UC-NRLF 


MANUAL 


FOE 


AND 

OF 

CAVALRY 
OF 

,    THE  ARMY  OF  THE  UNTIED  STATES 

19!  F 


GIFT  OF 


WAR  DEPARTMENT 


MANUAL 


FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS  AND 
PRIVATES  OF 


CAVALRY 


OF  THE  ARMY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES 


1917 


TO  BE  ALSO  USED  BY  ENGINEER  COMPANIES 

(MOUNTED)     FOR    CAVALRY    INSTRUCTION 

AND  TRAINING 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 
1917 


'7 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

Document  No.  620. 

Office  of  The  Adjutant  General. 


ADDITIONAL  COFIES 

CT  THIS  PTJ-LICvhON  MAY  BE  VnOCUEED  FROM 

THE   SUPERINTENDENT  OF  DOCUMENTS 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

WASHINGTON,  D.  C. 

AT 

50  CENTS  PER  COPY 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
WASHINGTON,  June  28,  1917. 

The  following  Manual  for  Noncommissioned  Officers  and 
Privates  of  Cavalry  is  published  for  the  information  and 
guidance  of  all  concerned. 

[  2582824  C.— A.  G.O.] 
BY   ORDER   OF   THE    SECRETARY   OF   \VAB : 

TASKER  H.  BLISS, 

Major  General,  Acting  Chief  of  Staff. 
OFFICIAL  : 

H.  p.  MCCAIN, 

The  Adjutant  General. 

o 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


Page. 

CHAPTER  I.  MILITARY  DISCIPLINE  AND  COURTESY 9 

Section  1.  Oath  of  enlistment 9 

Section  2.  Obedience 9 

Section  3.  Loyalty 11 

Section  4.  Discipline 11 

Section  5.  Military  courtesy 13 

Section  6.  Saluting 13 

Section  7.  Rules  governing  saluting 15 

Section  8.  Courtesies  in  conversation 18 

AJPTER   II.   ARMS,    UNIFORMS,    AND   EQUIPMENT 20 

Section  1.  The  rifle 1 20 

Section  2.  Care  of  the  rifle 21 

Section  3.  Cleaning  the  rifle 23 

Section  4.  Uniforms 27 

Section  5.  The  service  kit 30 

Section  6.  The  surplus  kit. . 32 

Section  7.  Assembling  equipment . . .  .v. 33 

BEAPTER  III.  RATIONS  AND  FORAGE 36 

Section  1.  The  ration -. 36 

Section  2.  Individual  cooking ,. 37 

Section  3.  The  forage  ration ^ 41 

A^PTER  IV.  PERSONAL  HYGIENE  AND  CARE  OF  THE  FEET.  . .  43 
3APTER  V.  EXTRACTS  FROM  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

1916 50 

Section  1.  Definitions 50 

Section  2.  General  provisions,  individual  instruction...  54 

Section  3.  School  of  the  trooper,  dismounted 57 

Section  4.  School  of  the  trooper,  mounted 112 

Section  5.  General  provisions,  elementary  collective  in- 
struction   134 

Section  6.  Basic  principles  of  the  drill 134 

5 


6  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  V.  EXTRACTS  FROM  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS, 

1916— Continued.  Page. 

Section  7.  The  school  of  the  squad 139 

Section  8.  Tent  pitching 176 

CHAPTER  VI .  FIELD  SERVICE 180 

Section  1.  Principles  of  training 180 

Section  2.  Combat 181 

Section  3.  Patroling 199 

Section  4.  Advance  guards 210 

Section  5.  Rear  guards 212 

Section  6.  Flank  guards 213 

Section  7.  Outposts 213 

Section  8.  Rifle  trenches 219 

CHAPTER  VII.  MARCHING  AND   CAMPING 223 

Section  1.  Breaking  camp  and  preparation  for  a  march ..  223 

Section  2.  Marches,  camps 225 

CHAPTER  VIII .  TARGET    PRACTICE 23<T 

Section  1.  Preliminary  training  and  marksmanship 233 

Section  2.  Sight  adjustment. 233 

Section  3.  Table  of  sight  corrections .  235 

Section  4.  Aiming 235 

Section  5.  Battle  sight 236 

Section  6.  Trigger  squeeze 237 

Section  7.  Firing  positions 238 

Section  8.  Calling  the  shot 240 

Section  9.  Coordination 241 

Section  10.  Advice  to  riflemen 241 

Section  11.  The  course  in  small-arms  firing 243 

Section  12.  Targets 244 

Section  13.  Pistol  and  revolver  practice 245 

CHAPTER  IX.  EXTRACTS  FROM  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD 

DUTY,  1914 254 

Section  1 .  Introduction 254 

Section  2.  Classification  of  interior  guards 255 

Section  3.  Details  and  rosters 255 

Section  4.  Commander  of  the  guard 258 

Section  5.  Sergeant  of  the  guard 263 

Section  6.  Corporal  of  the  guard 266 

Section  7 .  Musicians  of  the  guard .- 271 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  7 

CHAPTER  IX.  EXTRACTS  FROM  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD 

DUTY — Continued.  Page. 

Section  8.  Orderlies  and  color  sentinels 271 

Section  9.  Privates  of  the  guard ; 273 

Section  10.  Orders  for  sentinels 273 

Section  11.  Countersigns  and  paroles 282 

Section  12.  Guard  patrols 283 

Section  13.  Watchmen 283 

Section  14.  Compliments  from  guards 284 

Section  15.  Prisoners 286 

Section  16.  Guarding  prisoners 289 

Section  17.  Stable  guards 292 

Section  18.  Flags. .  > 296 

Section  19.  Reveille  and  retreat  gun 298 

Section  20.  Guard  mounting. 298 

Section  21 .  Relieving  the  old  guard 306 

CHAPTER  X.  MAP  READING  AND  SKETCHING 309 

Section  1 .  Military  map  reading 309 

Section  2.  Sketching 322 

CHAPTER  XI .  MESSAGE  BLANKS 325 

CHAPTER  XII.  SIGNALS  AND  CODES 326 

CHAPTER  XIII.  FIRST-AID  RULES 338 

CHAPTER  XIV.  LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS 350 

Section  1.  General  provisions 350 

Section  2.  The  Army  of  the  United  States 351 

Section  3.  Rank  and  precedence  of  officers   and  non- 
commissioned officers ,. . . .  351 

Section  4.  Insignia  of    officers  and  noncommissioned 

officers 353 

Section  5.  Extracts  from  the  Articles  of  War 353 

CHAPTER  XV.  ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY 371 

APPENDIX.  FORM  FOR  LAST  \VILL  AND  TESTAMENT 389 


MANUAL 

FOR 

NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS  AND  PRIVATES  OF  CAVALRY 

OP    THE 

ARMY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


CHAPTER  I. 
MILITARY  DISCIPLINE  AND  COURTESY. 


Section  1.  Oath  of  enlistment. 

Every  soldier  on  enlisting  in  the  Army  takes  upon  himself 
the  following  obligation : 

"  I,  ,  do  solemnly  swear  (or  affirm)  that  I  will  bear 

true  faith  and  allegiance  to  the  United  States  of  America  ;  that 
I  will  serve  them  honestly  and  faithfully  against  all  their 
enemies  whomsoever ;  and  that  I  will  obey  the  orders  of  the 
President  of  the  United  States,  and  the  orders  of  the  officers 
appointed  over  me  according  to  the  Rules  and  Articles  of  War." 
(109th  Article  of  War.) 

Section  2.  Obedience. 

The  very  first  paragraph  in  the  Army  Regulations  reads : 
"All  persons  in  the  military  service  are  required  to  obey 

strictly  and  to  execute  promptly  the  lawful  orders  of  their 

superiors." 

9 


10  MANUAL  FOB  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS, 

Obedience  is  the  first  and  last  duty  of  a  soldier.  It  is  the 
founcla-tton  o.po^  which  all  military  efficiency  is  built.  Without 
it  r.A  ani-y  becomes  .a  mob,  while  with  it  a  mob  ceases  to  be  a 
mob  and  becomes  possessed  of  much  of  the  power  of  an  organ- 
ized force.  It  is  a  quality  that  is  demanded  of  every  person  in 
the  Army  from  the  highest  to  the  lowest.  Each  enlisted  man 
binds  himself,  by  his  enlistment  oath,  to  obedience.  Each 
officer,  in  accepting  his  commission,  must  take  upon  himself  the 
same  solemn  obligation. 

Obey  strictly  and  execute  promptly  the  lawful  orders  of  your 
superiors.  It  is  enough  to  know  that  the  person  giving  the 
order,  whether  he  be  an  officer,  a  noncommissioned  officer,  or  a 
private  acting  as  such,  is  your  lawful  superior.  You  may  not 
like  him,  you  may  not  respect  him,  but  you  must  respect  his 
position  and  authority,  and  reflect  honor  and  credit  upon  your- 
self and  your  profession  by  yielding  to  all  superiors  that  com- 
plete and  unhesitating  obedience  which  is  the  pleasure  as  well 
as  the  duty  of  every  true  soldier. 

Orders  must  be  strictly  carried  out.  It  is  not  sufficient  to 
comply  with  only  that  part  which  suits  you  or  which  involves 
no  work  or  danger  or  hardship.  Nor  is  it  proper  or  permissible, 
when  you  are  ordered  to  do  a  thing  in  a  certain  way  or  to 
accomplish  a  work  in  a  definitely  prescribed  manner,  for  you 
to  obtain  the  same  results  by  other  methods. 

Obedience  must  be  prompt  and  unquestioning.  When  any 
soldier  (and  this  word  includes  officers  as  well  as  enlisted  men) 
receives  an  order,  it  is  not  for  him  to  consider  whether  the 
order  is  a  good  one  or  not,  whether  it  would  have  been  better 
had  such  an  order  never  been  given,  or  whether  the  duty  might 
be  better  performed  by  some  one  else,  or  at  some  other  time,  or 
in  some  other  manner.  His  duty  is,  first,  to  understand  just 
what  the  order  requires,  and,  second,  to  proceed  at  once  to  carry 
out  the  order  to  the  best  of  his  ability. 

"Officers  and  men  of  all  ranks  and  grades  are  given  a  certain 
independence  in  the  execution  of  the  tasks  to  which  they  are 
assigned  and  are  expected  to  show  initiative  in  meeting  the 
different  situations  as  they  arise.  Every  individual,  from  the 
highest  commander  to  the  lowest  private,  must  always  remem- 
ber that  inaction  and  neglect  of  opportunities  will  warrant  more 
severe  censure  than  an  error  in  the  choice  of  the  means." 
(Preface,  Field  Service 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.  11 

Section  3.  loyalty. 

But  even  with  implicit  obedience  you  may  yet  fail  to  measure 
up  to  that  high  standard  of  duty  which  is  at  once  the  pride  and 
glory  of  every  true  soldier.  Not  until  you  carry  out  the  desires 
and  wishes  of  your  superiors  in  a  hearty,  willing,  and  cheerful 
manner  are  you  meeting  all  the  requirements  of  your  profession. 
For  an  order  is  but  the  will  of  your  superior,  however  it  may 
be  expressed.  Loyalty  means  that  you  are  for  your  organiza- 
tion and  its  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers — not  against 
them ;  that  you  always  extend  your  most  earnest  and  hearty 
support  to  those  in  authority.  No  soldier  is  a  loyal  soldier  who 
is  a  knocker  or  a  grumbler  or  a  shirker.  Just  one  man  of  this 
class  in  a  troop  breeds  discontent  and  dissatisfaction  among 
many  others.  You  should,  therefore,  not  only  guard  against 
doing  such  things  yourself  but  should  discourage  such  actions 
among  any  of  your  comrades. 

Section  4.  Discipline. 

"  1.  All  persons  in  the  military  service  are  required  to  obey 
strictly  and  to  execute  promptly  the  lawful  orders  of  their 
superiors. 

"  2.  Military  authority  will  be  exercised  with  firmness,  kind- 
ness, and  justice.  Punishments  must  conform  to  law  and  fol- 
low offenses  as  promptly  as  circumstances  will  permit. 

"  3.  Superiors  are  forbidden  to  injure  those  under  their  au- 
thority by  tyrannical  or  capricious  conduct  or  by  abusive  lan- 
guage. While  maintaining  discipline  and  the  thorough  and 
prompt  performance  of  military  duty,  all  officers,  in  dealing 
with  enlisted  men,  will  bear  in  mind  the  absolute  necessity  of 
so  treating  them  as  to  preserve  their  self-respect.  Officers  will 
keep  in  as  close  touch  as  possible  with  the  men  under  their 
command  and  will  strive  to  build  up  such  relations  of  confidence 
and  sympathy  as  will  insure  the  free  approach  of  their  men  to 
them  for  counsel  and  assistance.  This  relationship  may  be 
gained  and  maintained  without  relaxation  of  the  bonds  of 
discipline  and  with  great  benefit  to  the  service  as  a  whole. 

"  Courtesy  among  military  men  is  indispensable  to  dis- 
cipline; respect  to  superiors  will  not  be  confined  to  obedience 
on  duty,  but  will  be  extended  on  all  occasions. 


12          MANUAL  FAR  N^^rOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

"  5.  Deliberations  or  discussions  among  military  men,  convey- 
ing praise  or  censure,  or  any  mark  of  approbation,  toward 
others  in  the  military  service,  and  all  publications  relating  to 
private  or  personal  transactions  between  officers  are  prohibited. 
Efforts  to  influence  legislation  affecting  the  Army  or  to  procure 
personal  favor  or  consideration  should  never  be  made  except 
through  regular  military  channels ;  the  adoption  of  any  other 
method  by  any  officer  or  enlisted  man  will  be  noted  in  the  mili- 
tary record  oi!  those  concerned."  (Army  Regulations.) 

'•  The  discipline  which  makes  the  soldier  of  a  free  country 
reliable  in  battle  is  not  to  be  gained  by  harsh  or  tyrannical 
treatment.  On  the  contrary,  such  treatment  is  far  more  likely 
to  destroy  than  to  make  an  army.  It  is  possible  to  impart  in- 
struction and  give  commands  in  such  manner  and  in  such  tone 
of  voice  as  to  inspire  in  the  soldier  no  feeling  but  an  intense  de- 
sire to  obey,  while  the  opposite  manner  and  tone  of  voice  can 
not  fail  to  excite  strong  resentment  and  a  desire  to  disobey. 
The  one  mode  or  the  other  of  dealing  with  subordinates  springs 
from  a  corresponding  spirit  in  the  breast  of  the  commander. 
He  who  feels  the  respect  which  is  due  to  others  can  not  fail  to 
inspire  in  them  regard  for  himself,  while  he  who  feels,  and 
hence  manifests,  disrespect  toward  others,  especially  his  in- 
feriors, can  not  fail  to  inspire  hatred  against  himself."  (Ad- 
dress of  Maj.  Gen.  John  M.  Scho field  to  the  United  States  Corps 
of  Cadets,  Aug.  11,  1879.) 

When,  by  long-continued  drill  and  subordination,  you  have 
learned  your  duties,  and  obedience  becomes  second  nature, 
you  have  acquired  discipline.  It  can  not  be  acquired  in  a 
day  nor  a  month.  It  is  a  growth.  It  is  the  habit  of  obedi- 
ence. To  teach  this  habit  of  obedience  is  the  main  object 
of  the  close-order  drill,  and,  if  good  results  are  to  be  expected, 
the  greatest  attention  must  be  paid  to  even  the  smallest  details. 
The  troop,  platoon,  or  squad  must  be  formed  promptly  at  the 
prescribed  time — not  a  minute  or  even  a  second  late.  All 
must  wear  the  exact  uniform  prescribed  and  in  the  exact  man- 
ner prescribed.  When  at  attention  there  must  be  no  gazing 
about,  no  raising  of  hands,  no  chewing  or  spitting  in  ranks. 
The  manual  of  the  rifle,  the  pistol,  the  saber,  and  all  movements 
must  be  executed  absolutely  as  prescribed.  A  drill  of  this  kind 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.  13 

teaches  discipline.  A  careless,  sloppy  drill  breeds  disobedience 
and  insubordination.  In  other  words,  discipline  simply  means 
efficiency. 

Section  5.  Military  courtesy. 

In  all  walks  of  life  men  who  are  gentlemanly  and  of  good 
breeding  are  always  respectful  and  courteous  to  those  about 
them.  It  helps  to  make  life  move  along  more  smoothly.  In 
civil  life  this  courtesy  is  shown  by  the  custom  of  tipping  the 
hat  to  ladies,  shaking  hands  with  friends,  and  greeting  per- 
sons with  a  nod  or  a  friendly  "  Good  morning,"  etc, 

In  the  Army  courtesy  is  just  as  necessary,  and  for  the  same 
reasons.  It  helps  to  keep  the  great  machine  moving  without 
friction. 

**  Courtesy  among  military  men  is  indispensable  to  discipline  • 
respect  to  superiors  will  not  be  confined  to  obedience  on  duty, 
but  will  be  extended  on  all  occasions."  (Par.  4>  Army  Regula- 
tions, 1913.) 

One  method  of  extending  this  courtesy  is  by  saluting.  When 
in  ranks  the  question  of  what  a  private  should  do  is  simple — 
he  obeys  any  command  that  is  given.  It  is  when  out  of  ranks 
that  a  private  must  know  how  and  when  to  salute. 

Section  6.  Saluting. 

In  the  old  days  the  free  men  of  Europe  were  all  allowed  to 
carry  weapons,  and  when  they  met  each  would  hold  up  his 
right  hand  to  show  that  he  had  no  weapon  in  it  and  that  they 
met  as  friends.  Slaves  or  serfs,  however,  were  not  allowed  to 
carry  weapons,  and  slunk  past  the  free  men  without  making 
any  sign.  In  this  way  the  salute  came  to  be  the  symbol  or  sign 
by  which  soldiers  (free  men)  might  recognize  each  other.  The 
lower  classes  began  to  imitate  the  soldiers  in  this  respect, 
although  in  a  clumsy,  apologetic  way,  and  thence  crept  into  civil 
life  the  custom  of  raising  the  hand  or  nodding  as  one  passed  an 
acquaintance.  The  soldiers,  however,  kept  their  individual 
salute,  and  purposely  made  it  intricate  and  difficult  to  learn  in 
order  that  it  could  be  acquired  only  by  the  constant  training  all 
real  soldiers  received.  To  this  day  armies  have  preserved  their 
salute,  and  when  correctly  done  it  is  at  once  recognized  and 


14          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

never  mistaken  for  that  of  the  civilian.  All  soldiers  should  be 
careful  to  execute  the  salute  exactly  as  prescribed.  The  civil- 
ian or  the  imitation  soldier  who  tries  to  imitate  the  military 
salute,  invariably  makes  some  mistake  which  shows  that  he  is 
not  a  real  soldier ;  he  gives  it  in  an  apologetic  manner,  he  fails 
to  stand  or  march  at  attention,  his  coat  is  unbuttoned  or  hat 
on  awry,  or  he  fails  to  look  the  person  saluted  in  the  eye. 
There  is  a  wide  difference  in  the  method  of  rendering  and 
meaning  between  the  civilian  salute  as  used  by  friends  in  pass- 
ing, or  by  servants  to  their  employers,  and  the  MILITARY 
SALUTE,  the  symbol  and  sign  of  the  military  profession. 

To  salute  with  the  hand,  first  assume  the  position  of  a  soldier 
or  march  at  attention.  Look  the  officer  you  are  to  salute 
straight  in  the  eye.  Then,  when  the  proper  distance  separates 
you,  raise  the  right  hand  smartly  till  the  tip  of  the  forefinger 
touches  the  lower  part  of  the  headdress  or  forehead  above  the 
right  eye,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  palm  to  the 
left,  forearm  inclined  at  about  45°,  hand  and  wrist  straight. 
Continue  to  look  the  officer  you  are  saluting  straight  in  the 
eye  and  keep  your  hand  in  the  position  of  salute  until  the 
officer  acknowledges  the  salute  or  until  he  has  passed.  Then 
drop  the  hand  smartly  to  the  side.  The  salute  is  given  with  the 
right  hand  only. 

To  salute  with  the  rifle,  bring  the  rifle  to  right  shoulder  arms 
if  not  already  there.  Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  small 
of  the  stock,  forearm  horizontal,  palm  of  the  hand  down,  thumb 
and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  forefinger  touching  the  end 
of  the  cocking  piece.  Look  the  officer  saluted  in  the  eye. 
When  the  officer  has  acknowledged  the  salute  or  has  passed, 
drop  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  side  and  turn  the  head  and 
eyes  to  the  front.  The  rifle  salute  may  also  be  executed  from 
the  order  or  trail.  See  paragraph  94,  Infantry  Drill  Regula- 
tions, and  paragraph  111,  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations,  1916. 

To  salute  with  the  pistol  when  drawn,  assume  the  position  of 
Raise  Pistol,  muzzle  up,  the  hand  holding  the  stock  with  the 
thumb  and  last  three  fingers,  forefinger  outside  the  guard, 
barrel  to  the  rear  and  inclined  to  the  front  at  an  angle  of  30°, 
hand  as  high  as  the  neck  and  6  inches  in  front  of  the  point 
of  the  right  shoulder.  The  pistol  is  carried  in  the  holster,  ex- 
cept when  about  to  be  used.  It  will  not  be  drawn  for  the  pur- 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.  15 

pose  of  saluting.  When  armed  only  with  the  pistol  in  the 
holster,  salute  with  the  hand. 

To  salute  with  the  saber,  bring  the  saber  to  carry  saber  if 
not  already  there,  carry  the  saber  to  the  front  with  arm  half 
extended  until  the  thumb  is  about  6  inches  in  front  of  the  chin, 
the  blade  vertical,  guard  to  the  left,  all  four  fingers  grasping 
the  grip,  the  thumb  extending  along  the  back  in  the  groove,  the 
fingers  pressing  the  back  of  the  grip  against  the  heel  of  the 
hand.  Look  the  officer  saluted  in  the  eye.  When  the  officer 
has  acknowledged  the  salute  or  has  passed,  bring  the  saber 
down  with  the  blade  against  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder, 
guard  to  the  front,  right  hand  at  the  hip,  the  third  and  fourth 
fingers  on  the  back  of  the  grip  and  the  elbow  back. 

Always  stand  or  march  at  attention  before  and  during  the 
salute.  The  hat  should  be  on  straight,  coat  completely  but- 
toned up,  and  hands  out  of  the  pockets. 

Section  7.  Rules  governing  saluting. 

912.  (1)  Salutes  shall  be  exchanged  between  officers  and 
enlisted  men  not  in  a  military  formation,  nor  at  drill,  work, 
games,  or  mess,  on  every  occasion  of  their  meeting,  passing 
near  or  being  addressed,  the  officer  junior  in  rank  or  the  en- 
listed man  saluting  first. 

(2)  When  an  officer  enters  a  room  where  there  are  several 
enlisted  men  the  word  "  attention  "  is  given  by  some  one  who 
perceives  him,  when  all  rise,  uncover,  and  remain  standing  at 
attention  until  the  officer  leaves  the  room  or  directs  otherwise. 
Enlisted   men   at   meals   stop   eating   and   remain   seated   at 
attention. 

(3)  An  enlisted  man,  if  seated,  rises  on  the  approach  of  an 
officer,  faces  toward  him,   stands  at   attention,   and  salutes. 
Standing,  he  faces  an  officer  for  the  same  purpose.     If  the 
parties  remain  in  the  same  place  or  on  the  same  ground,  such 
compliments  need  not  be  repeated.     Soldiers  actually  at  work 
do  not  cease  work  to  salute  an  officer  unless  addressed  by  him. 

(4)  Before  addressing  an  officer  an  enlisted  man  makes  the 
prescribed  salute  with  the  weapon  with  which  he  is  armed,  or, 
if  unarmed,  with  the  right  hand.    He  also  makes  the  same 
salute  after  receiving  a  reply. 


16          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

913.  (1)  In  uniform,  covered  or  uncovered,  but  not  in  forma- 
tion, officers  and  enlisted  men  salute  military  persons  as  fol- 
lows: With  arms  in  hand,  the  salute  prescribed  for  that  arm 
(sentinels  on  interior  guard  duty  excepted)  ;  without  arms,  the 
right-hand  salute. 

(2)  In  civilian  dress,  covered  or  uncovered,  officers  and  en- 
listed men  salute  military  persons  with  the  right-hand  salute. 

(3)  Officers  and  enlisted  men  will    render    the    prescribed 
salutes  in  a  military  manner,  the  officer  junior  in  rank  or  the 
enlisted  men  saluting  first.    When  several  officers  in  company 
are  saluted  all  entitled  to  the  salute  shall  return  it. 

(4)  Except  in  the  field  under  campaign  or  simulated  cam- 
paign conditions,  a  mounted  officer  (or  soldier)  dismounts  be- 
fore addressing  a  superior  officer  not  mounted. 

(5)  A  man  in  formation  shall  not  salute  when  directly  ad- 
dressed, but  shall  come  to  attention  if  at  rest  or  at  ease. 

914.  (1)   Saluting  distance  is  that  within  which  recognition 
is  easy.    In  general,  it  does  not  exceed  30  paces. 

(2)  When  an  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  passes  in  rear  of 
a  body  of  troops,  it  is  brought  to  attention  while  he  is  opposite 
the  post  of  the  commander. 

915.  In  public  conveyances,  such  as  railway  trains  and  street 
cars,  and  in  public  places,  such  as  theaters,  honors  and  per- 
sonal salutes  may  be  omitted  when  palpably  inappropriate  or 
apt  to  disturb  or  annoy  civilians  present. 

925.  Soldiers  at  all  times  and  in  all  situations  pay  the  same 
compliments  to  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy,  Marine  Corps,  and 
Volunteers,  and  to  officers  of  the  National  Guard  as  to  officers 
of  their  own  regiment,  corps,  or  arm  of  service. 

918.  Sentinels  on  post  doing  interior  guard  duty  conform  to 
the  foregoing  principles,  but  salute  by  presenting  arms  when 
armed  with  the  rifle.    They  will  not  salute  if  it  interferes  with 
the  proper  performance  of  their  duties.     Troops  under  arms 
will  salute  as  prescribed  in  drill  regulations. 

919.  (1)   Commanders  of  detachments  or  other  commands 
will  salute  officers  of  grades  higher  than  the  person  commanding 
the  unit  by  first  bringing  the  unit  to  attention  and  then  salut- 
ing as  required  by  subparagraph  (1),  paragraph  913.     If  the 
person  saluted  is  of  a  junior  or  equal  grade,  the  unit  need  not 
be  at  attention  in  the  exchange  of  salutes. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS,  17. 

(2)  If  two  detachments  or  other  commands  meet,  their  com- 
manders will  exchange  salutes,  both  commands  being  at  at- 
tention. 

920.  Salutes  and  honors,  as  a  rule,  are  not  paid  by  troops 
actually  engaged  in  drill,  on  the  march,  or  in  the  field  under 
campaign  or  simulated  campaign  conditions.     Troops  on  the 
service  of  security  pay  no  compliments  whatever. 

921.  If  the  command  is  in  line  at  a  halt  (not  in  the  field)  and 
armed  with  the  rifle,  or  with  sabers  drawn,  it  shall  be  brought 
to  present  arms  or  present  saber  before  its  commander  salutes 
in  the  following  cases :  When  the  National  Anthem  is  played, 
or  when  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard  is  sounded  during  cere- 
monies, or  when  a  person  is  saluted  who  is  its  immediate  or 
higher  commander  or  a  general  officer,  or  when  the  national 
or  regimental  color  is  saluted. 

922.  At  parades  and  other  ceremonies,  under  arms,  the  com- 
mand shall  render  the  prescribed  salute  and  shall  remain  in 
the  position  of  salute  while  the  National   Anthem   is  being 
played;  also  at  retreat  and  during  ceremonies  when  to  the 
color  is  played,  if  no  band  is  present.     If  not  under  arms,  the 
organizations  shall  be  brought  to  attention  at  the  first  note  of 
the  National  Anthem,  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard,  and  the 
salute  rendered  by  the  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  in 
command  as  prescribed  in  regulations,  as  amended  herein. 

910.  Whenever  the  National  Anthem  is  played  at  any  place 
when  persons  belonging  to  the  military  service  are  present,  all 
officers  and  enlisted  men  not  in  formation  shall  stand  at  atten- 
tion facing  toward  the  music  (except  at  retreat,  when  they 
shall  face  toward  the  flag).  If  in  uniform,  covered,  they  shall 
salute  at  the  first  note  of  the  anthem,  retaining  the  position 
of  salute  until  the  last  note  of  the  anthem.  If  not  in  uniform 
and  covered,  they  shall  uncover  at  the  first  note  of  the  an- 
them, holding  the  headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder  and  so 
remain  until  its  close,  except  that  in  inclement  weather  the 
headdress  may  be  slightly  raised. 

The  same  rules  apply  when  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard  is 
sounded  as  when  the  National  Anthem  is  played. 


18  MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

When  played  by  an  Army  band,  the  National  Anthem  shall 
be  played  through  without  repetition  of  any  part  not  required 
to  be  repeated  to  make  it  complete. 

The  same  marks  of  respect  prescribed  for  observance  during 
the  playing  of  the  National  Anthem  of  the  United  States  shall 
be  shown  toward  the  national  anthem  of  any  other  country 
when  played  upon  official  occasions. 

917.  Officers  and  enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased  color  will 
render  honors  as  follows:  If  in  uniform,  they  will  salute  as 
required  by  subparagraph  (5),  paragraph  759;  if  in  civilian 
dress  and  covered,  they  will  uncover,  holding  the  headdress  op- 
posite the  left  shoulder  with  the  right  hand ;  if  uncovered,  they 
will  salute  with  the  right-hand  salute. 

The  national  flag  belonging  to  dismounted  organizations  is 
called  a  color ;  to  mounted  organizations,  a  standard.  An  un- 
cased color  is  one  that  is  not  in  its  waterproof  cover. 

Privates  do  not  salute  noncommissioned  officers.  Prisoners 
are  not  permitted  to  salute;  they  merely  come  to  attention  if 
not  actually  at  work.  The  playing  of  the  National  Anthem  as 
a  part  of  a  medley  is  prohibited  in  the  military  service. 

Section  8.  Courtesies  in  conversation. 

In  speaking  to  an  officer,  always  stand  at  attention  and  use 
the  word  "  Sir."  Examples : 

"  Sir,  Private  Brown,  Company  B,  reports  as  orderly." 

"  Sir,  the  first  sergeant  directed  me  to  report  to  the  captain." 

(Question  by  an  officer:)  "To  what  company  do  you  be- 
long?" 

(Answer:)   "Company  H,  sir." 

(Question  by  an  officer :)  "  Has  first  call  for  drill  sounded?  " 

(Answer:)  "  No,  sir;"  or  "Yes,  sir;  it  sounded  about  five 
minutes  ago." 

(Question  by  an  officer:)  "Can  you  tell  me,  please,  where 
Major  Smith's  tent  is?  " 

(Answer :)   "  Yes,  sir ;  I'll  take  you  to  it." 

Use  the  third  person  in  speaking  to  an  officer.     Examples : 

"  Does  the  Lieutenant  wish,"  etc. 

"  Did  the  Captain  send  for  me?  " 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          19 

In  delivering  a  message  from  one  officer  to  another,  always 
use  the  form  similar  to  the  following :  "  Lieutenant  A  presents 
his  compliments  to  Captain  B  and  states,"  etc.  This  form  is 
not  used  when  the  person  sending  or  receiving  the  message  is 
an  enlisted  man. 

In  all  official  conversation  refer  to  other  soldiers  by  their 
titles,  thus :  Sergeant  B,  Private  C. 

909.  In  rendering  personal  honors,  when  the  command  pre- 
sent arms,  officers  and  men  in  uniform  who  are  not  in  forma- 
tion and  are  in  view  and  within  saluting  distance  shall  salute 
and  shall  remain  in  the  position  of  salute  until  the  end  of  the 
ruffles  and  flourishes,  or,  if  none,  until  order  arms.  (Cavalry 
Drill  Regulations,  1916.) 

This  extract  covers  the  conduct  of  officers  and  soldiers  who 
may  be  in  the  vicinity  of  troops  rendering  honors  to  the  Presi- 
dent or  other  persons  entitled  to  personal  salutes. 


CHAPTER  II. 
ARMS,  UNIFORMS,  AND  EQUIPMENT. 


Section  1.  The  rifle. 

The  rifle  now  used  by  the  Army  of  the  United  States  is  the 
United  States  magazine  rifle,  model  of  1903,  caliber  .30. 

It  is  43.212  inches  long  and  weighs  8.69  pounds. 

The  bayonet  weighs  1  pound  and  the  blade  is  16  inches  long. 

The  rifle  is  sighted  for  ranges  up  to  2,850*  yards. 

The  maximum  range,  when  elevated  at  an  angle  of  45  degrees, 
is  4,891  yards  (389  yards  less  than  3  miles). 

The  smooth  bore  of  the  rifle  is  0.30  inch  in  diameter.  It  is 
then  rifled  0.004  inch  deep,  making  the  diameter  from  the 
bottom  of  one  groove  to  the  bottom  of  the  opposite  groove  0.308 
inch.  The  rifling  makes  one  complete  turn  in  each  10  inches 
of  the  barrel. 

The  accompanying  plate  shows  the  names  of  the  principal 
parts  of  the  rifle. 

The  only  parts  of  a  rifle  that  an  enlisted  man  is  permitted  to 
take  apart  are  the  bolt  mechanism  and  the  magazine  mecha- 
nism. Learn  how  to  do  this  from  your  squad  leader,  for  you 
must  know  how  in  order  to  keep  your  rifle  clean.  _  Never  re- 
move the  hand  guard  or  the  trigger  guard,  nor  take  the  sights 
apart  unless  you  have  special  permission  from  a  commissioned 
officer. 

The  cartridge  used  for  the  rifle  is  called  the  .30-caliber  model 
1906  cartridge.  There  are  four  types  of  cartridges. 

The  ball  cartridge  consists  of  the  brass  case  or  shell,  the 
primer,  the  charge  of  smokeless  powder,  and  the  bullet.  The 
bullet  has  a  sharp  point,  is  composed  of  a  lead  core  and  a  jacket 
of  cupro  nickel,  and  weighs  150  grains.  The  bullet  of  this 
cartridge,  when  fired  from  the  rifle,  starts  with  an  initial 
velocity  at  the  muzzle  of  2,700  feet  per  second. 

20 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          21 

The  blank  cartridge  contains  a  paper  cup  instead  of  a  bullet. 
It  It  dangerous  up  to  100  feet.  Firing  blank  cartridges  at 
a  represented  enemy  at  ranges  less  than  100  yards  is  prohibited. 

The  guard  cartridge  has  a  smaller  charge  of  powder  than  the 
ball  cartridge,  and  five  cannelures  encircle  the  body  of  the  shell 
at  about  the  middle  to  distinguish  it  from  the  ball  cartridge. 
It  is  intended  for  use  on  guard  or  in  riot  duty,  and  gives  good 
results  up  to  200  yards.  The  range  of  100  yards  requires  a 
sight  elevation  of  450  yards,  and  the  range  of  200  yards  re- 
quires an  elevation  of  650  yards. 

The  dummy  cartridge  is  tin  plated  and  the  shell  is  provided 
with  six  longitudinal  corrugations  and  three  circular  holes. 
The  primer  contains  no  percussion  composition.  It  is  intended 
for  drill  purposes  to  accustom  the  soldier  to  the  operation  of 
loading  the  rifle. 

All  cartridges  are  secured  five  in  a  clip  to  enable  five  car- 
tridges to  be  inserted  into  the  magazine  at  one  motion.  Sixty 
ball  cartridges  in  12  clips  are  packed  in  a  cloth  bandoleer  to 
facilitate  issue  and  carrying.  When  full  the  bandoleer  weighs 
about  3.88  pounds.  Bandoleers  are  packed  20  in  a  box,  or  1,200 
rounds  in  all.  The  full  box  weighs  99  pounds. 

Section  2.  Care  of  the  rifle. 

Every  part  of  the  rifle  must  be  kept  free  from  rust,  dust,  and 
dirt.  A  dirty  or  rusty  rifle  is  a  sure  sign  that  the  soldier  does 
not  realize  the  value  of  his  weapon,  and  that  his  training  is 
incomplete.  The  rifle  you  are  armed  with  is  the  most  ac- 
curate in  the  world.  If  it  gets  dirty  or  rusty  it  will  deteriorate 
in  its  accuracy  and  working  efficiency,  and  no  subsequent  care 
will  restore  it  to  its  original  condition.  The  most  important 
part  of  the  rifle  to  keep  clean  is  the  bore.  If,  after  firing,  the 
bore  is  left  dirty  over  night,  it  will  be  badly  rusted  in  the 
morning;  therefore  your  rifle  must  be  cleaned  not  later  than 
the  evening  of  the  day  on  which  it  wras  fired.  The  fouling  of 
the  blank  cartridge  is  as  dangerous  to  the  bore  as  the  fouling 
of  the  ball  cartridge. 

Never  attempt  to  polish  any  part  that  is  blued.  If  rust  ap- 
pears, remove  by  rubbing  with  oil.  Never  use  emery  paper, 


22          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

pomade,  or  any  preparation  that  cuts  or  scratches,  to  clean  any 
part  of  the  rifle. 

To  beautify  and  preserve  the  stock  rub  with  raw  linseed  oil. 
The  use  of  any  other  preparation  on  the  stock  is  strictly  for- 
bidden. 

Always  handle  your  rifle  with  care.  Don't  throw  it  around 
as  though  it  were  a  club.  Don't  stand  it  up  against  anything 
so  that  it  rests  against  the  front  sight.  Don't  leave  a  stopper 
or  a  rag  in  the  bore ;  it  will  cause  rust  to  form  at  that  point. 
It  may  also  cause  the  gun  barrel  to  burst  if  a  shot  is  fired 
before  removing  it. 

Guard  the  sights  and  muzzle  carefully  from  any  blow  that 
might  injure  them.  The  front  sight  cover  should  always  be  on 
the  rifle  except  when  rifle  is  being  fired.  This  is  especially 
necessary  to  protect  the  front  sight  while  rifle  is  being  carried 
in  scabbard  by  a  mounted  man. 

In  coming  to  the  "  order  arms,"  lower  the  piece  gently  to  the 
ground. 

When  there  is  a  cartridge  in  the  chamber  the  piece  is  always 
carried  locked.  In  this  position  the  safety  lock  should  be 
kept  turned  fully  to  the  right,  since  if  it  be  turned  to  the  left 
nearly  to  the  "  ready  "  position  and  the  trigger  be  pulled,  the 
rifle  \vill  be  discharged  when  the  safety  lock  is  turned  to  the 
"  ready  "  position  at  any  time  later  on. 

Cartridges  can  not  be  loaded  from  the  magazine  unless  the 
bolt  is  drawn  fully  to  the  rear.  When  the  bolt  is  closed,  or 
only  partly  open,  the  cut-off  may  be  turned  up  or  down  as 
desired,  but  if  the  bolt  is  drawn  fully  to  the  rear,  the  magazine 
can  not  be  cut  off  unless  the  top  cartridge  or  the  follower  be 
pressed  down  slightly  and  the  bolt  pushed  forward  so  that  the 
cut-off  may  be  turned  "  off." 

In  the  case  of  a  misfire,  don't  open  the  bolt  immediately,  as  it 
may  be  a  hangfire.  Misfires  are  often  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
bolt  handle  was  not  fully  pressed  down.  Sometimes  in  pulling 
the  trigger  the  soldier  raises  the  bolt  handle  without  knowing  it. 

Unless  otherwise  ordered,  arms  will  be  unloaded  before  being 
taken  to  quarters  or  tents,  or  as  soon  as  the  men  using  them 
are  relieved  from  duty. 

Keep  the  working  parts  oiled. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          23 

In  every  troop  there  should  be  at  least  one  copy  of  the 
Manual  of  the  Ordnance  Department  entitled  "  Description  and 
Rules  for  the  Management  of  the  U.  S.  Magazine  Rifle."  This 
manual  gives  the  name  and  a  cut  ol!  every  part  of  the  rifle,  ex- 
plains its  use,  shows  how  to  take  the  rifle  apart  and  care  for 
the  same,  and  also  gives  much  other  valuable  and  interesting 
information. 

Section  3.  Cleaning  the  rifle. 

"Cleaning  the  rifle. —  (a)  The  proper  care  of  the  bore  requires 
conscientious,  careful  work,  but  it  pays  well  in  the  attainment 
of  reduced  labor  of  cleaning,  prolonged  accuracy  life  of  the 
barrel,  and  better  results  in  target  practice.  Briefly  stated, 
the  care  of  the  bore  consists  in  removing  the  fouling,  resulting 
from  firing,  to  obtain  a  chemically  clean  surface,  and  in  coating 
this  surface  with  a  film  of  oil  to  prevent  rusting.  The  fouling 
which  results  from  firing  is  of  two  kinds — one,  the  products  of 
combustion  of  the  powder ;  the  other,  cupro-nickel  scraped  ofl. 
( under  the  abrading  action  of  irregularities  or  grit  in  the  bore). 
Powder  fouling,  because  of  its  acid  reaction,  is  highly  corrosive  ; 
that  is,  it  will  induce  rust  and  must  be  removed.  Metal  fouling 
of  itself  is  inactive,  but  may  cover  powder  fouling  and  prevent 
the  action  of  cleaning  agents  until  removed,  and  when  accumu- 
lated in  noticeable  quantities  it  reduces  the  accuracy  of  the  rifle. 

(6)  Powder  fouling  may  be  readily  removed  by  scrubbing 
with  hot  soda  solution,  but  this  solution  has  no  effect  on  the 
metal  fouling  of  cupro-nickel.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to 
remove  all  metal  fouling  before  assurance  can  be  had  that  nil 
powder  fouling  has  been  removed  arid  that  the  bore  may  be 
safely  oiled.  Normally,  after  firing  a  barrel  in  good  condition 
the  metal  fouling  is  so  slight  as  to  be  hardly  perceptible.  It  is 
merely  a  smear  of  infinitesimal  thickness,  easily  removed  by 
solvents  of  cupro-nickel.  However,  due  to  pitting,  the  presence 
of  dust,  other  abrasives,  or  to  accumulation,  metal  fouling  may 
occur  in  clearly  visible  flakes  or  patches  of  much  greater  thick- 
ness, much  more  difficult  to  remove. 

(c)  In  cleaning  the  bore  after  firing  it  is  well  to  proceed  as 
follows :  Swab  out  the  bore  with  soda  solution  ( subparagraph 
;)  to  remove  powder  fouling.  A  convenient  method  is  to  insert 
the  muzzle  of  the  rifle  into  the  can  containing  the  soda  solution 


34          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

and,  with  the  cleaning  rod  inserted  from  the  breech,  pump  the 
barrel  full  a  few  times.  Remove  and  dry  with  a  couple  of 
patches.  Examine  the  bore  to  see  that  there  are  in  evidence 
no  patches  of  metal  fouling  which,  if  present,  can  be  readily 
detected  by  the  naked  eye,  then  swab  out  with  the  swabbing 
solution — a  dilute  metal-fouling  solution  (subparagraph  j). 
The  amount  of  swabbing  required  with  the  swabbing  solution 
can  be  determined  only  by  experience,  assisted  by  the  color 
of  the  patches.  Swabbing  should  be  continued,  however,  us 
long  as  the  wiping  patch  is  discolored  by  a  bluish-green  stain. 
Normally  a  couple  of  minutes'  work  is  sufficient.  Dry  thor- 
oughly and  oil. 

(d)  The  proper  method  of  oiling  a  barrel  is  as  follows :  Wipe 
the  cleaning  rod  dry ;  select  a  clean  patch  and  thoroughly  sat- 
Airate  it  with  sperm  oil  or  warmed  cosmic,  being  sure  that  the 
cosmic  has  penetrated  the  patch ;  scrub  the  bore  with  the  patch, 
finally  drawing  the  patch  smoothly  from  the  muzzle  to  the 
breech,  allowing  the  cleaning  rod  to  turn  with  the  rifling.    The 
bore  will  be  found  now  to  be  smooth  and  bright  so  that  any  sub- 
sequent rust  and  sweating  can  be  easily  detected  by  inspection. 

(e)  If  patches  of  metal  fouling  are  seen  upon  visual  inspec- 
tion of  the  bore  the  standard  metal  fouling  solution  prepared 
as  hereinafter  prescribed  must  be  used.     After  scrubbing  out 
with  the  soda  solution,  plug  the  bore  from  the  breech  with  a 
cork  at  the  front  end  of  the  chamber  or  where  the  rifling  begins. 
Slip  a  2-inch  section  of  rubber  hose  over  the  muzzle  down  to 
the  sight  and  fill  with  the  standard  solution  to  at  least  one-half 
inch  above  the  muzzle  of  the  barrel.    Let  it  stand  for  30  min- 
utes, pour  out  the  standard  solution,  remove  hose  and  breech 
plug,  and  swab  out  thoroughly  with  soda  solution  to  neutralize 
and  remove  all  trace  of  ammonia  and  powder  fouling.     Wipe 
the  barrel  clean,  dry,  and  oil.    With  few  exceptions,  one  appli- 
cation is  sufficient,  but  if  all  fouling  is  not  removed,  as  deter- 
mined by  careful  visual  inspection  of  the  bore  and  of  the  wiping 
patches,  repeat  as  described  above. 

(/)  After  properly  cleaning  with  either  the  swabbing  solu- 
tion or  the  standard  solution,  as  has  just  been  described,  the 
bore  should  be  clean  and  safe  to  oil  and  put  away,  but  as  a 
measure  of  safety  a  patch  should  always  be  run  through  the 
bore  on  the  next  day  and  the  bore  and  wiping  patch  examined 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.  85 

to  insure  that  cleaning  has  been  properly  accomplished.  The 
bore  should  then  be  oiled,  as  described  above. 

(g]  If  the  swabbing  solution  or  the  standard  metal-fouling 
solution  is  not  available,  the  barrel  should  be  scrubbed,  as 
already  described,  with  the  soda  solution,  dried,  and  oiled  with 
a  light  oil.  At  the  end  of  24  houvs  it  should  again  be  cleaned, 
when  it  will  usually  be  found  to  have  "  sweated  "  ;  that  is,  rust 
having  formed  under  the  smear  of  metal  fouling  where  powder 
fouling  was  present,  the  surface  is  puffed  up.  Usually  a  second 
cleaning  is  sufficient,  but  to  insure  safety  it  should  be  again 
examined  at  the  end  of  a  few  days,  before  final  oiling.  The 
swabbing  solution  should  always  be  used,  if  available,  for  it 
must  be  remembered  that  each  puff  when  the  bore  "  sweats  "  is 
an  incipient  rust  pit. 

(7i)  A  clean  dry  surface  having  been  obtained,  to  prevent 
rust  it  is  necessary  to  coat  every  portion  of  this  surface  with  a 
film  of  neutral  oil.  If  the  protection  required  is  but  temporary 
and  the  arm  is  to  be  cleaned  or  fired  in  a  few  days,  sperm  oil 
may  be  used.  This  is  easily  applied  and  easily  removed,  but 
has  not  sufficient  body  to  hold  its  surface  for  more  than  a  few 
days.  If  rifles  are  to  be  prepared  for  storage  or  shipment,  a 
heavier  oil,  such  as  cosmic,  must  be  used. 

(i)  In  preparing  arms  for  storage  or  shipment  they  should 
be  cleaned  with  particular  care,  using  the  metal-fouling  solu- 
tion as  described  above.  Care  should  be  taken,  insured  by  care- 
ful inspection  on  succeeding  day  or  days,  that  the  cleaning  is 
properly ,  done  and  all  traces  of  ammonia  solution  removed. 
The  bore  is  then  ready  to  be  coated  with  cosmic.  At  ordinary 
temperatures  cosmic  is  not  fluid.  In  order,  therefore,  to  insure 
that  every  part  of  the  surface  is  coated  with  a  film  of  oil  the 
cosmic  should  be  warmed.  Apply  the  cosmic  first  with  a  brush ; 
then,  with  the  breech  plugged,  fill  the  barrel  to  the  muzzle, 
pour  out  the  surplus,  remove  the  breechblock,  and  allow  to 
drain.  It  is  believed  that  more  rifles  are  ruined  by  improper 
preparation  for  storage  than  from  any  other  cause.  If  the 
bore  is  not  clean  when  oiled — that  is,  if  powder  fouling  is 
present  or  rust  has  started — a  half  inch  of  cosmic  on  the  out- 
side will  not  stop  its  action,  and  the  barrel  will  be  ruined. 
Remember  that  the  surface  must  be  perfectly  cleaned  before 
the  heavy  oil  is  applied.  If  the  instructions  as  given  above 


26          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

arc  carefully  followed,  arms  may  be  stored  for  years  without 

harm. 

(/)  Preparation  of  solutions: 

Soda  solution. — This  should  be  a  saturated  solution  of  sal 
soda  (bicarbonate  of  soda).  A  strength  of  at  least  20  per  rent 
is  necessary.  The  spoon  referred  to  in  the  following  directions 
is  the  model  1910  spoon  issued  in  the  mess  outfit. 

Sal  soda,  one-fourth  pound,  or  four  (4)  heaping  spoonfuls. 

Water,  1  pint  or  cup,  model  of  1910,  to  upper  rivets. 

The  sal  soda  will  dissolve  more  readily  in  hot  water. 

tiwabbiny  solution. — Ammonium  persulphate,  60  grains,  one- 
half  spoonful  smoothed  off. 

Ammonia,  28  per  cent,  6  ounces,  or  three-eighths  of  a  pint,  or 
12  spoonfuls. 

Water,  4  ounces,  or  one-fourth  pint,  or  8  spoonfuls. 

Dissolve  the  ammonium  persulphate  in  the  water  and  add  the 
ammonia.  Keep  in  tightly  corked  bottle ;  pour  out  only  what 
is  necessary  at  the  time,  and  keep  the  bottle  corked. 

Stand  a  i'-1  metal  fouling  solution. — Ammonium  persulphate,  1 
ounce,  or  2  medium  heaping  spoonfuls. 

Ammonium  carbonate,  200  grains,  or  1  heaping  spoonful. 

Ammonia,  28  per  cent,  6  ounces,  or  three-eighths  pint-,  or  12 
spoonfuls. 

Water,  4  ounces,  or  one-fourth  pint,  or  8  spoonfuls. 

Powder  the  persulphate  and  carbonate  together,  dissolve  in 
the  water  and  add  the  ammonia ;  mix  thoroughly  and  allow  to 
stand  for  one  hour  before  using.  It  should  be  kept  in  a  strong 
bottle,  tightly  corked.  The  solution  should  not  be  used  more 
than  twice,  and  used  solution  should  not  be  mixed  with  unused 
solution,  but  should  be  bottled  separately.  The  solution,  when 
mixed,  should  be  used  within  30  days.  Care  should  be  exer- 
cised in  mixing  and  using  this  solution  to  prevent  injury  to  the 
rifle.  An  experienced  noncommissioned  officer  should  mix  the 
solution  and  superintend  its  use. 

Neither  of  these  ammonia  solutions  have  any  appreciable 
action  on  steel  when  not  exposed  to  the  air,  but  if  allowed  to 
evaporate  on  steel  they  attack  it  rapidly.  Care  should,  there- 
fore, be  taken  that  none  spills  on  the  mechanism  and  that  the 
barrel  is  washed  out  promptly  with  soda  solution.  The  first 
application  of  soda  solution  removes  the  greater  portion  of  the 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.  27 

powder  fouling  and  permits  a  more  effective  and  economical 
use  of  the  ammonia  solution.  These  ammonia  solutions  are 
expensive  and  should  be  used  economically. 

(k)  It  is  a  fact  recognized  by  all  that  a  highly  polished  steel 
surface  rusts  much  less  easily  than  one  which  is  roughened; 
also  that  a  barrel  which  is  pitted  fouls  much  more  rapidly  than 
one  which  is  smooth.  Every  effort,  therefore,  should  be  made 
to  prevent  the  formation  of  pits,  which  are  merely  enlarged 
rust  spots,  and  which  not  only  affect  the  accuracy  of  the  arm 
but  increase  the  labor  of  cleaning. 

(I)  The  chambers  of  rifles  are  frequently  neglected  because 
they  are  not  readily  inspected.  Care  should  be  taken  to  see 
that  they  are  cleaned  as  thoroughly  as  the  bore.  A  roughened 
chamber  delays  greatly  the  rapidity  of  fire,  and  not  infrequently 
causes  shells  to  stick. 

(m)  A  cleaning  rack  should  be  provided  for  every  barrack. 
Rifles  should  always  be  cleaned  from  the  breach,  thus  avoiding 
possible  injury  to  the  rifling  at  the  muzzle,  which  would  affect 
the  shotting  adversely.  If  the  bore  for  a  length  of  6  inches  at 
the  muzzle  is  perfect,  a  minor  injury  near  the  chamber  will 
have  little  effect  on  the  accuracy  of  the  rifle.  The  rifle  should 
be  cleaned  as  soon  as  the  firing  for  the  day  is  completed.  The 
fouling  is  easier  to  remove  then,  and  if  left  longer  it  will  cor- 
rode the  barrel. 

(n)  The  principles  as  outlined  above  apply  equally  well  for 
the  care  of  the  barrel  of  the  automatic  pistol.  Special  atten- 
tion should  be  paid  to  cleaning  the  chamber  of  the  pistol,  using 
the  soda  solution.  It  has  been  found  that  the  chamber  pits 
readily  if  it  is  not  carefully  cleaned,  with  the  result  that  the 
operation  of  the  pistol  is  made  less  certain."  (Par.  13Jf,  Small 
Arms  Firing  Manual,  1913.) 

Section  4.  Uniforms. 

Uniforms  and  clothing  issued  to  enlisted  men  must  not  be 
sold,  pawned,  loaned,  given  away,  lost,  or  damaged  through 
neglect  or  carelessness.  Any  soldier  who  violates  this  rule 
may  be  tried  by  a  military  court  and  punished. 

All  uniforms  and  articles  of  clothing  issued  to  enlisted  men, 
whether  or  not  charged  on  their  clothing  allowance,  remain  the 
property  of  the  United  States  and  do  not  become  the  property 


28          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

of  the  soldier  either  before  or  after  discharge  from  the  service. 
Under  the  law  a  soldier  honorably  discharged  from  the  Army  of 
the  United  States  is  authorized  to  wear  his  uniform  from  the 
place  of  his  discharge  to  his  home  within  three  months  after 
the  date  of  such  discharge.  To  wear  the  uniform  after  three 
months  from  the  date  of  such  discharge  renders  such  person 
liable  to  fine  or  imprisonment,  or  both. 

The  dress  uniform  dismounted  (the  blue  uniform)  consists 
of  the  dress  cap,  dress  coat,  dress  trousers,  and  russet-leather 
shoes.  The  straight,  standing,  military,  white  linen  collar, 
showing  no  opening  in  front,  is  always  worn  with  this  uniform, 
with  not  to  exceed  one-half  inch  showing  above  the  collar  of 
the  coat.  Turndown,  piccadilly,  or  roll  collars  arc  not  au- 
thorized. 

When  under  arms,  white  gloves  and  the  garrison  belt  are 
worn.  The  dress  uniform  mounted  is  the  same  as  dismounted, 
except  that  riding  gloves,  leggings,  and  spurs  are  worn,  and 
the  saddle  cloth,  showing  regimental  number  and  troop  letter, 
is  placed  over  the  saddle  blanket. 

The  full-dress  uniform  is  the  same  as  the  dress  uniform, 
with  the  breast  cord  added. 

The  service  uniform  is  either  cotton  (summer)  or  woolen 
(winter)  olive  drab. 

For  duty  in  the  field  it  consists  of  the  service  hat,  with  cord 
sewed  on,  service  coat  or  sweater,  service  breeches,  olive-drab 
flannel  shirt,  leggings,  russet-leather  shoes,  spurs,  riding 
gloves,  and  identification  tag.  In  cold  weather  olive-drab 
woolen  gloves  may  be  prescribed. 

In  warm  weather  the  coat,  sweater,  and  riding  gloves  may 
be  omitted  when  authorized  by  the  commanding  officer. 

When  not  in  the  field,  the  service  cap  is  worn  instead  of  the 
campaign  hat.  Under  arms,  dismounted,  white  gloves  and  the 
garrison  belt  (or  russet-leather  belt  and  cartridge  box)  are 
worn. 

Spurs  and  riding  gloves  are  worn  on  all  mounted  duty  or 
when  on  mounted  pass. 

Wear  the  exact  uniform  prescribed  by  your  commanding 
officer,  whether  you  are  on  duty  or  off  duty. 

Never  wear  a  mixed  uniform  as,  for  instance,  a  part  of  the 
service  uniform  with  the  blue  uniform. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.  W 

Never  wear  any  part  of  the  uniform  with  civilian  clothes. 
It  is  very  unsoldierly,  for  example,  to  wear  a  civilian  overcoat 
over  the  uniform  or  to  wear  the  uniform  overcoat  over  a 
civilian  suit. 

Keep  the  uniform  clean  and  neat  and  in  good  repair. 

Grease  spots  and  dust  and  dirt  should  be  removed  as  soon  as 
possible. 

Rips  and  tears  should  be  promptly  mended.  In  taking  the 
field  always  wear  new  clothing  as  it  may  be  some  time  before 
you  are  again  supplied,  and  old  clothing  on  field  service  goes 
to  pieces  rapidly. 

Missing  buttons  and  cap  and  collar  ornaments  should  be 
promptly  replaced. 

There  is  but  one  correct  and  soldierly  \vay  to  wear  the  cap. 
Never  wear  it  on  the  back  or  side  of  the  head. 

The  service  hat  should  be  worn  in  the  regulation  shape, 
peaked,  with  four  indentations,  and  with  hat  cord  sewed  on. 
Do  not  cover  it  with  pen  or  pencil  marks.  The  chin  cord 
should  always  be  in  order  and  fit  for  long  field  service. 

Never  appear  outside  your  room  or  tent  with  your  coat  or 
olive-drab  shirt  unbuttoned  or  collar  of  coat  unhooked.  Chev- 
rons, service  stripes,  and  campaign  medals  and  badges  are  a 
part  of  the  uniform  and  must  be  worn  as  prescribed. 

•  When  coats  are  not  worn  with  the  service  uniform  olive- 
drab  shirts  are  prescribed. 

Suspenders  must  never  be  worn  exposed  to  view. 

Never  appear  in  breeches  without  leggings. 

Leather  leggings  should  be  kept  clean.  Saddle  soap  should 
be  used  to  clean  all  leather.  Should  the  shoes,  leggings,  or 
leather  equipment  be  soaked  by  rain  or  swimming  they  will 
not  become  hard  if  covered  with  a  light  coat  of  neat's-foot  oil 
applied  just  before  they  dry  out.  All  new  leather  should  be 
oiled  before  being  placed  in  service.  Leather  can  be  preserved 
for  years  by  the  use  of  saddle  soap  and  neat's-foot  oil,  but  once 
it  becomes  hard  and  cracked  nothing  \vill  make  it  serviceable. 
Canvas  leggings  should  be  scrubbed  when  dirty. 

Russet-leather  (tan)  shoes  should  be  kept  clean.  Leather 
cleaned  with  saddle  soap  can  be  polished  by  rubbing  with  a 
flannel  cloth. 


30          MTAinrAL  FOR  KONCOMMISSIONED  OTTICEES. 


The  overcoat  when  worn  mnst  be  buttoned  throughout  and 
the  collar  hooked.  When  the  belt  is  worn  it  will  be  worn  out- 
side the  overcoat. 

Section  5.  The  service  kit 

The  service  kit  is  composed  of  two  parts — (a)  the  field  kit 
which  includes  everything  the  soldier  wears  or  carries  with 
him  in  the  field,  and  ( &)  the  surplus  kit. 

The  field  kit  consists  of— 

(1)  The  clothing  worn  on  the  person. 

(2)  Arms  and  equipment,  consisting  o£ — 

(a)  Arms  and  equipments  of  all  enlisted  men  (except  buglers 
and  members  of  bands  and  machine-gun  troops)  : 


1  brush  and  thong.1 

1  canteen,  cavalry.2 

1  canteen  strap,  cavalry.3 

90  cartridges,  ball,  caliber  .30. 

21  cartridges,  ball,  pistol,  cali- 
ber .45. 

1  cartridge  belt,   caliber  .30, 
cavalry. 

1     cartridge-belt     suspenders, 
pair. 

1  cup. 

1  fork. 

1  front-sight  cover. 

1  gun  sling. 

1  knife. 

2  magazines,  pistol,  extra. 


1      magazine      pocket      wol«. 

double. 
1  meat  can. 

1  oiler  and  thong  case. » 
1  pistol. 
1  pistol  holster. 
1  pouch  for  first-aid  packet. 
1  rifle  scabbard. 
1  rifle,  United  States,  caliber 

.30. 

1  saber  and  scabbard,  cavalry. 
1  saber  knot. 
1  saber  straps,  pair. 
1  spoon. 
1  spurs,  pair. 
1  spur  straps,  set. 


(  5  )  Members  of  bands  and  buglers  : 

1  canteen,  cavalry.2 
1  canteen  strap,  cavalry.2 
21  cartridges,  ball,  pistol,  cali- 
ber  .45. 


1  cup. 
1  fork. 

1  knife. 

2  magazines,  pistol,  extra. 


1  To  be  omitted  if  rifle  is  provided  with  spare-part  container. 

2  In  lieu  of  these  the  canteen,  model  of  1910,  with  canteen  cover, 
dismounted,  may  be  issued. 

3  One  saddle  for  each  troop  and  the  saddles  for  the  2  color  sergeants 
are  to  be  provided  with  a  guidon  stirrup. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


31 


1  meat  can. 

1  pistol  belt  without  saber  ring. 

1  pistol. 

1  pistol  holster. 


1  pouch  for  first-aid  packet. 

1  spoon. 

1  spurs,  pair. 

1  spur  straps,  set. 


(c)  In  addition  to  (&)  first  sergeant  of  headquarters  troop 
(drum  major)  will  have: 

1  saber  and  scabbard,  cavalry,  2  saber  straps. 
1  saber  knot. 

(d)  For  members  of  machine-gun  troops,  except  that  buglers 
attached  to  machine-gun  troops  (only)  will  have  1  pistol  belt 
without  saber  ring  in  lieu  of  1  cartridge  belt,  1  cartridge-belt 
suspenders,  pair,  and  1  magazine  pocket,  web,  double: 


1  bolo. 

1  bolo  scabbard. 

1  canteen,  cavalry.1 

1  canteen  strap,  cavalry.1 

21  cartridges,  ball,  pistol,  cali- 
ber .45. 

1  cartridge  belt,  caliber  .30, 
cavalry. 

1  cartridge  -  belt  suspenders, 
pair. 

1  cup. 


1  fork. 

1  knife. 

2  magazines,  pistol,  extra. 

1  magazine  pocket,  web,  double. 

1  meat  can. 

1  pistol. 

1  pistol  holster. 

1  pouch  for  first-aid  packet. 

1  spoon. 

1  spurs,  pair. 

1  spur  straps,  set. 


(e)  Horse  equipments  for  each  enlisted  man  individually 
mounted  on  a  horse : 


1  bridle,  cavalry,  model  of  1909 
or  1912,  or  curb  bridle,  model 
of  1902. 

1  bridle,  watering,  if  curb  bri- 
dle model  of  1902  is  issued. 

1  currycomb. 

1  halter  headstall. 

1  halter  tie  rope. 

1  horse  brush. 

1  lariat. 


1  lariat  strap. 

1  link. 

1  nose  bag,  or  feed  bag  (with 

grain  bag). 
1  picket  pin. 

1  saddle,  cavalry,  complete.3 
1  saddlebags,  pair. 
1  saddle  blanket. 
1  surcingle. 


iln  lieu  of  these  the  canteen,  model  of  1910,  with  canteen  cover,  dismounted, 
may  be  issued. 


32          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Care  of  saddlery. 
(Cav.  Drill  Reg.  1916.) 

975.  The  saddlery  and  equipment  must  always  be  cleaned 
after  use.  This  duty,  like  the  care  of  the  horse,  is  to  be  re- 
garded as  part  of  the  mounted  duty  itself;  thus  a  drill  is  not 
over  until  horse,  saddlery,  arms,  and  equipments  have  been 
put  again  in  condition.  According  to  need,  the  leather  is 
simply  wiped  off  with  a  damp  sponge  or  fully  taken  apart  and 
well  soaped  and  cleaned.  In  no  case  must  it  be  soaked  in 
water. 

If  the  soap  used  does  not  contain  a  sufficient  amount  of  free 
oil  the  leather  must  be  oiled  to  keep  it  pliable.  A  mixture  of 
one-half  neat's-fpot  oil  and  one-half  mutton  tallow,  well  rubbed 
in,  keeps  leather  in  good  condition.  Special  care  is  taken  to 
keep  the  underside  of  the  skirts  of  the  saddle  and  the  parts 
which  do  not  come  in  contact  with  the  clothing  well  oiled. 
The  seat  and  outside  of  the  skirts  will  rarely  require  oil. 

Metal  parts  are  kept  clean  and  free  from  rust;  they  may 
require  oiling  if  not  regularly  used. 

The  saddle  blanket  must  be  kept  clean  and  soft  and  free 
from  wrinkles.  After  use  it  must  be  dried  and  then  well 
shaken  (unfolded).  It  must  never  be  folded  wet  and  left 
thus  with  the  saddle.  Provision  wTill  be  made  in  the  saddle 
room  or  stables  for  hanging  it  up  to  dry. 

When  necessary  the  blanket  should  be  thoroughly  cleansed 
by  repeated  immersions  in  tepid  soapsuds  and  hung  over  a  pole 
or  line  to  dry  without  wringing  or  pressing  it. 

Section  6.  The  surplus  kit. 

The  surplus  kit  for  each  man  consists  of — 
1  breeches,  pair. 
1  drawers,  pair. 
1  shirt,  olive  drab. 

1  shoes,  russet-leather,  pair. 

2  stockings,  pair. 
1  undershirt. 

1  shoe  laces,  extra,  pair. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          33 

Each  surplus  kit  bag  contains  1  jointed  cleaning  rod  and 
case. 

Squad  leaders  are  responsible  that  surplus  kit  bags  are  kept 
in  order  and  fully  packed  in  the  field.1  Men  are  allowed  access 
to  them  for  the  purpose  of  making  substitutions. 

The  surplus  kits  are  packed  in  surplus  kit  bags,  one  for  each 
squad,  one  for  sergeants,  and  one  for  cooks  and  buglers. 

The  kit  of  each  man  will  be  packed  as  follows : 

Stockings  to  be  rolled  tightly,  one  pair  in  the  toe  of  each 
shoe;  shoes  placed  together,  heels  at  opposite  ends,  soles  out- 
ward, wrapped  tightly  in  underwear,  and  bundle  securely  tied 
around  the  middle  by  the  extra  pair  of  the  shoe  laces,  each 
bundle  to  be  tagged  with  the  company  number  of  the  owner. 
These  individual  kits  will  be  packed  in  the  surplus  kit  bag 
in  two  layers  of  four  kits  each,  the  breeches  and  olive  drab 
shirts  to  be  neatly  folded  and  packed  on  the  top  and  sides  of 
the  layers,  the  jointed  cleaning  rod  and  case,  provided  for  each 
squad,  being  attached  by  the  thongs  on  the  inside  of  the  bag. 

When  overcoats  or  sweaters  are  not  prescribed  to  be  worn  on 
the  person  they  will  be  collected  into  bundles  of  convenient  size 
and  secured  by  burlap  or  other  suitable  material,  or  will  be 
boxed.  They  will  be  marked  ready  for  shipment  to  be  for- 
warded when  required.1 

Section  7.  Assembling  equipment. 

TO  MAKE  THE   BLANKET  BOLL. 

Spread  the  shelter  half,  triangular  part  to  the  right,  buttons 
underneath.  Fold  triangular  part  across  shelter  half,  making 
a  rectangle. 

Fold  blanket  through  center,  parallel  to  stripes ;  fold  again 
through  center  perpendicular  to  stripes.  Lay  folded  blanket 
on  shelter  half,  longer  side  of  blanket  parallel  to  and  1  inch 
from  edge  of  shelter  half  opposite  straps  and  equidistant  from 

1  In  campaign  or  simulated  campaign,  when  an  organization  is  re- 
stricted to  its  prescribed  field-train  transportation,  surplus  kits-,  over- 
<-oats,  and  sweaters  are  stored  on  the  line  of  communications  or  other 
designated  place  with  the  permanent  camp  equipment  of  the  organiza- 
tion. 

366°— 17 2 


3*          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

sides.  Place  tent  pole,  folded,  close  to  and  parallel  to  near 
edge  of  blanket,  end  of  pole  flush  with  left  side  of  blanket ; 
pins  and  tent  rope  to  be  similarly  placed  at  right  side  of 
blanket,  occupying  about  the  same  space  as  pole.  Arrange  -the 
clothing  and  toilet  articles  on  right  and  left  sides  of  blanket, 
leaving  center  space  clear. 

Fold  the  free  portions  of  the  right  and  left  sides  of  shelter 
half  over  the  blanket.  Fold  the  far  edge  of  the  shelter  half 
6  inches  toward  the  blanket,  making  a  pocket. 

With  hands  and  knees  roll  the  blanket  and  shelter  half 
toward  and  into  the  pocket.  Buckle  straps  around  roll,  strap 
buckles  on  line  with  shelter  half  buttons. 

KOLL  THE  OVERCOAT   AND    SLICKER. 

Turn  the  garment  inside  out,  collar  extended,  and  fold  once 
the  long  way.  Roll  tightly  from  the  front  edge,  making  roll 
the  full  length  of  garment. 

TO  PACK   THE   McCLELLAN    SADDLE. 

Put  saddle  pockets  on  saddle ;  fasten  straps  to  cincha  rings. 
Place  articles  pertaining  to  the  man  in  near  pocket,  those  per- 
taining to  the  horse  in  off  pocket. 

The  overcoat,  slicker,  or  both,  to  be  strapped  on  pommel, 
collar  to  left. 

Blanket  roll  to  be  strapped  on  cantle.  Feed  bag,  if  empty, 
neatly  folded  on  top  of  roll,  "  U.  S."  up.  If  grain  is  carried, 
the  grain  bag  is  tied  inside  the  feed  bag,  which  is  strapped  on 
top  of  the  pommel  roll,  above  the  overcoat  or  slicker. 

Lariat,  in  uniform  coils  of  about  10-inch  diameter,  fastened 
to  near  cantle  ring  by  lariat  strap  fastened  to  one  ring  and 
passing  through  the  other ;  coil  secured  by  two  outside  straps 
of  saddle  pocket  flap.  To  prevent  flapping  and  injuring  ad- 
jatent  troopers  and  horses  the  picket  pin  may  be  inserted 
through  the  saddlebag  strap  ring,  point  downward,  or  it  may 
be  placed  horizontally  under  the  flap  straps  of  the  near  saddle- 
bag, point  to  the  rear. 

Canteen  snapped  into  off  cantle  ring,  canteen  strap  passing 
through  handle  of  cup,  except  the  cup  model  1910,  which  is 


366°— 17.     34-1 


McCLELLAN   SADDLE. 
Full  pack,  near  side. 


'  *^|M  tsflfl^ 


i°— 17.    34-2 


McCLELLAN   SADDLE. 
Full  pack,  off  side. 


EQUIPMENT  ARRANGED  FOR   INSPECTION. 

The  arrangement  should  be  uniform  in  each  regiment. 

66°— 17.    34^3 


366°— 17.    34-4 


PLATE  A. 


PLATE  B. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          35 

fitted  over  the  bottom  of  the  canteen,  model  1910,  inside  the 
cover. 

Rifle  on  near  side ;  saber  on  off  side,  attached  to  pommel  ring. 

The'  surcingle  is  buckled  over  the  saddle.  The  two  extra 
fitted  'horseshoes,  one  front  and  one  hind,  may  be  wired,  one 
on  bottom  of  each  stirrup,  or  they  may  be  fastened  together 
with  a  nail  and  carried  in  off  saddle  pocket.  To  prevent  rust 
the  horseshoe  nails  should  always  be  well  oiled  and  wrapped 
in  canvas  or  leather.  They  are  carried  in  the  off  saddle  pocket. 

The  two  reserve  rations,  extra  ammunition,  and  other  extra 
articles  should  be  so  distributed  between  the  two  pockets  as  to 
balance  the  weight  on  the  horse. 


CHAPTER  III. 
RATIONS  AND  FORAGE. 


Section  1.  The  ration. 

A  ration  is  the  allowance  of  food  for  one  man  for  one  day. 

In  the  field  there  are  three  kinds  of  rations  issued,  as 
follows : 

The  garrison  ration  is  intended  to  be  issued  in  kind  whenever 
possible.  The  approximate  net  weight  of  this  ration  is  4.5 
pounds. 

The  reserve  ration  is  the  simplest  efficient  ration,  and  con- 
stitutes the  reserve  carried  for  field  service.  It  consists  of — 

Ounces. 

Bacon 12 

Hard  bread 16 

Coffee,  roasted  and  ground 1. 12 

Sugar 2.  4 

Salt  _.  .  16 


Approximate  net  weight pounds—    2 

The  field  ration  is  the  ration  prescribed  in  orders  by  the  com- 
mander of  the  field  forces.  It  consists  of  the  reserve  ration,  in 
whole  or  in  part,  supplemented  by  articles  requisitioned  or 
purchased  locally  or  shipped  from  the  rear. 

In  campaign  a  command  carries  as  a  part  of  its  normal  equip- 
ment the  following  rations: 

(a)   On  each  man:  At  least  two  days'  reserve  rations. 
(&)   In  the  ration  section  of  the  field  train,  for  each  man: 
Two  days'  field  and  one  day's  reserve,  and  for  each 

animal  two  days'  grain  rations. 
3G 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          87 

Xc)  In  the  supply  train : 

Of  an  infantry  division,  two  days'  field  and  grain 

rations. 
Of  a   cavalry  division,   one  day's  field  and  grain 

rations. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  commanders  will  require  each 
man  on  the  march  to  carry  the  unconsumed  portion  of  the  day's 
ration  Issued  the  night  before  for  the  noonday  meal.  In  the 
same  manner,  cavalry  and  field  artillery  carry  on  their  horses 
a  portion  of  their,  grain  ration  issued  the  night  before  for  a 
noonday  feed.  Reserve  rations  are  consumed  only  in  case  of 
extreme  necessity,  when  other  supplies  are  not  available. 
They  are  not  to  be  consumed  or  renewed  without  an  express 
order  from  the  officer  in  command  of  the  troops  who  is  re- 
sponsible for  the  provision  of  supplies,  namely,  the  division 
commander  or  other  independent-detachment  commander. 
Every  officer  within  the  limits  of  his  command  is  held  responsi- 
ble for  the  enforcement  of  this  regulation.  Reserve  rations 
consumed  must  be  replaced  at  the  first  opportunity. 

Section  2.  Individual  cooking. 

Sometimes  rations  for  several  days  are  issued  to  the  soldier 
at  one  time,  and  in  such  cases  you  should  be  very  careful  to  so 
use  the  rations  that  they  will  last  you  the  entire  period.  If 
you  stuff  yourself  one  day,  or  waste  your  rations,  you  will  have 
to  starve  later  on. 

Generally  the  cooking  for  the  troop  will  be  done  by  the 
troop  cook,  but  sometimes  every  soldier  will  have  to  prepare 
his  own  meals,  using  only  his  field  mess  kit  for  the  purpose. 

The  best  fire  for  individual  cooking  is  a  small,  clear  one,  or, 
better  yet,  a  few  brisk  coals.  To  make  such  a  fire,  first  gather 
a  number  of  sticks  about  1  inch  in  diameter.  These  should  be 
dry.  Dead  limbs  adhering  to  a  tree  are  dryer  than  those  picked 
up  from  the  ground.  Split  some  of  these  and  shave  them  up 
into  kindling.  Dig  a  trench  in  the  ground,  laid  with  the  wind, 
about  a  foot  long,  4  inches  wide,  and  6  inches  deep.  Start  the 
fire  in  this  trench  gradually,  piling  on  the  heavier  wood  as  the 
fire  grows.  When  the  trench  is  full  of  burning  wood,  allow 
it  a  few  minutes  to  burn  down  to  coals  and  stop  blazing  high. 


38          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Then  rest  the  meat  can  and  cup  over  the  trench  and  start 
cooking.  Either  may  be  supported,  if  necessary,  with  green 
sticks.  If  you  can  not  scrape  a  trench  in  the  soil,  build  one 
up  out  of  i-ocks  or  with  two  parallel  logs. 

The  following  recipes  have  been  furnished  from  the  office  of 
the  Quartermaster  General,  United  States  Army: 

Coffee.— Fill  the  cup  two-thirds  full  of  water  and  bring 
to  a  boil.  Add  one  heaping  spoonful  of  coffee  and  stir  well, 
adding  one  spoonful  of  sugar  if  desired.  Boil  five  minutes  and 
then  set  it  to  the  side  of  the  fire  to  simmer  for  about  10 
minutes.  Then,  to  clear  the  coffee,  throw  in  a  spoonful  or  two 
of  cold  water.  This  coffee  is  of  medium  strength  and  is  within 
the  limit  of  the  ration  if  made  but  twice  a  day. 

Cocoa. — Take  two-thirds  of  a  cupful  of  water,  bring  to  a  boil, 
add  one  heaping  spoonful  of  cocoa,  and  stir  until  dissolved. 
Add  one  spoonful  of  sugar,  if  desired,  and  boil  for  five 
minutes. 

Chocolate. — Take  two-thirds  of  a  cupful  of  water,  bring  to 
a  boil,  add  a  piece  of  chocolate  about  the  size  of  a  hickory 
nut,  breaking  or  cutting  it  into  small  pieces  and  stirring  until 
dissolved.  Add  one  spoonful  of  sugar,  if  desired,  and  boil  for 
five  minutes. 

Tea. — Take  two-thirds  of  a  cupful  of  water,  bring  to  a  boil, 
add  one-half  of  a  level  spoonful  of  tea,  and  then  let  it  stand 
or  "  draw "  for  three  minutes.  If  allowed  to  stand  longer 
the  tea  will  get  bitter,  unless  separated  from  the  tea  leaves. 

MEATS. 

Bacon. — Cut  slices  about  five  to  the  inch,  three  of  which 
should  generally  be  sufficient  for  one  man  for  one  meal.  Place 
in  a  meat  can  with  about  one-half  inch  of  cold  water.  Let 
come  to  a  boil  and  then  pour  the  water  off.  Pry  over  a  brisk 
fire,  turning  the  bacon  once  and  quickly  browning  it.  Remove 
the  bacon  to  lid  of  meat  can,  leaving  the  grease  for  frying 
potatoes,  onions,  rice,  flapjacks,  etc.,  according  to  recipe. 

Fresh  meat  (to  fry). — To  fry,  a  small  amount  of  grease  (one 
to  two  spoonfuls)  is  necessary.  Put  grease  in  the  meat  can 
and  let  come  to  a  smoking  temperature,  then  drop  in  the  steak 
and,  if  about  one-half  inch  thick,  let  fry  for  about  one  minute 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          39 

before  turning,  depending  upon  whether  it  is  desired  it  shall 
be  rare,  medium,  or  well  done.  Then  turn  and  fry  briskly  as 
before.  Salt  and  pepper  to  taste. 

Applies  to  beef,  veal,  pork,  mutton,  venison,  etc. 

Fresh  meat  (to  broil). — Cut  in  slices  about  one  inch  thick, 
from  half  as  large  as  the  hand  to  four  times  that  size.  Sharpen 
a  stick  or  branch  of  convenient  length — say,  from  two  to  four 
feet  long — and  weave  the  point  of  the  stick  through  the  steak 
several  times,  so  that  it  may  be  readily  turned  over  a  few  brisk 
coals  or  on  the  windward  side  of  a  small  fire.  Allow  to  brown 
nicely,  turning  frequently.  Salt  and  pepper  to  taste.  Meat 
with  considerable  fat  is  preferred,  though  any  meat  may  be 
broiled  in  this  manner. 

Fresh  meat  (to  stew). — Cut  into  chunks  from  one-half  inch 
to  one  inch  cubes.  Pill  cup  about  one-third  full  of  meat  and 
cover  with  about  one  inch  of  water.  Let  boil  or  simmer  about 
one  hour,  or  until  tender.  Add  such  fibrous  vegetables  as  car- 
rots, turnips,  or  cabbage,  cut  into  small  chunks,  soon  after  the 
meat  is  put  on  to  boil,  and  potatoes,  onions,  or  other  tender- 
vegetables  when  the  meat  is  about  half  done.  Amount  of  vege- 
tables to  be  added,  about  the  same  as  meat,  depending  upon 
supply  and  taste.  Salt  and  pepper  to  taste.  Applies  to  all  fresh 
meat  and  fowls.  The  proportion  of  meat  and  vegetables  used 
varies  with  their  abundance,  and  fixed  quantities  can  not  be 
adhered  to.  Fresh  fish  can  be  handled  as  above,  except  that  it 
is  cooked  much  quicker,  and  potatoes  and  onions  and  canned 
corn  are  the  only  vegetables  generally  used  with  it,  thus  mak- 
ing a  chowder.  A  slice  of  bacon  would  greatly  improve  the 
flavor.  May  be  conveniently  cooked  in  meat  can  or  cup. 

VEGETABLES. 

Potatoes  (fried). — Take  two  medium-sized  potatoes  or  one 
large  one  (about  one-half  pound),  peel  and  cut  into  slices 
about  one-fourth  inch  thick  and  scatter  well  in  the  meat  can 
in  which  the  grease  remains  after  frying  the  bacon.  Add 
sufficient  water  to  half  cover  the  potatoes,  cover  with  the  lid 
to  keep  the  moisture  in,  and  let  come  to  a  boil  for  about  15  to 
20  minutes.  Remove  the  cover  and  dry  as  desired.  Salt  and 
pepper  to  taste.  During  the  cooking  the  bacon  already  pre- 


40          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

pared  may  be  kept  on  the  cover,  which  is  most  conveniently 
placed  bottom  side  up  over  the  cooking  vegetables. 

Onions  (fried). — Same  as  potatoes. 

Potatoes  (boiled). — Peel  two  medium-sized  potatoes  (about 
one-half  pound)  or  one  large  one,  and  cut  in  coarse  chunks  of 
about  the  same  size — say,  1^-inch  cubes.  Place  in  meat  can 
and  three-fourths  fill  with  water.  Cover  with  lid  and  let  boil 
or  simmer  for  15  or  20  minutes.  They  are  done  when,  easily 
penetrated  with  a  sharp  stick.  Pour  off  the  water  and  let 
dry  out  for  one  or  two  minutes  over  hot  ashes  or  light  coals. 

Potatoes  (baked). — Take  two  medium-sized  potatoes  (about 
one-half  pound)  or  one  large  one  cut  in  half.  Lay  in  a  bed 
of  light  coals  and  cover  with  same  and  smother  with  ashes. 
Do  not  disturb  for  30  or  40  minutes,  when  they  should  be  done. 

Canned  tomatoes. — One  2-pound  can  is  generally  sufficient  for 
five  men. 

Stew. — Pour  into  the  meat  can  one  man's  allowance  of  toma- 
toes and  add  about  two  large  hardtacks  broken  into  small 
pieces  and  let  come  to  a  boil.  Add  salt  and  pepper  to  taste,  or 
add  a  pinch  of  salt  and  one-fourth  spoonful  of  sugar. 

Or,  having  fried  the  bacon,  pour  the  tomatoes  into  the  meat 
can,  the  grease  remaining,  and  add,  if  desired,  two  broken 
hardtacks.  Set  over  a  brisk  fire  and  let  come  to  a  boil. 

Or,  heat  the  tomatoes  just  as  they  come  from  the  can,  adding 
two  pinches  of  salt  and  one-half  spoonful  of  sugar,  if  desired. 

Or,  especially  in  hot  weather,  eaten  cold  with  hard  bread, 
they  are  very  palatable. 

Rice. — Take  about  two-thirds  of  a  cupful  of  water,  bring 
to  a  boil,  a£d  4  heaping  spoonfuls  of  rice,  and  boil  until  the 
grains  are  soft  enough  to  be  easily  mashed  between  the  fingers 
(about  20  minutes).  Add  two  pinches  of  salt  and,  after  stir- 
ring, pour  off  the  water  and  empty  rice  out  on  meat  can. 
Bacon  grease  or  sugar  may  be  added. 

Corn  meal,  fine  hominy,  oatmeal. — Take  about  one-third  of  a 
cupful  of  water,  bring  to  a  boil,  add  4  heaping  spoonfuls  of 
the  meal  or  hominy,  and  boil  about  20  minutes.  Then  add 
about  two  pinches  of  salt  and  stir  well. 

Dried  beans  and  peas. — Put  4  heaping  spoonfuls  in  about 
two-thirds  of  a  cupful  of  water  and  boil  until  soft.  This 
generally  takes  from  three  to  four  hours.  Add  one  pinch  of 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          41 

salt.    About  half  an  hour  before  the  beans  are  done  add  one 
slice  of  bacon. 

HOT  BEEADS. 

Flapjacks. — Take  6  spoonfuls  of  flour  and  one-third  spoon- 
ful of  baking  powder  and  mix  thoroughly  (or  dry  mix  in  a 
large  pan  before  issue,  at  the  rate  of  25  pounds  of  flour  and  3 
half  cans  of  baking  powder  for  100  men).  Add  sufficient  cold 
water  to  make  a  batter  that  will  drip  freely  from  the  spoon, 
adding  a  pinch  of  salt.  Pour  into  the  meat  can,  which  should 
contain  the  grease  from  fried  bacon  or  a  spoonful  of  butter  or 
fat,  and  place  over  medium  hot  coals  sufficient  to  bake,  so  that 
in  from  5  to  7  minutes  the  flapjack  may  be  turned  by  a  quick 
toss  of  the  pan.  Fry  from  5  to  7  minutes  longer,  or  until  by 
examination  it  is  found  to  be  done. 

Hoecake. — Hoecake  is  made  exactly  the  same  as  flapjacks 
by  substituting  corn  meal  for  flour. 

Emergency  rations. — Detailed  instructions  as  to  the  manner 
of  preparing  the  emergency  ration  are  found  on  the  label  of 
each  can.  Remember  that  even  a  very  limited  amount  of 
bacon  or  hard  bread,  or  both,  consumed  with  the  emergency 
ration  makes  it  far  more  palatable,  and  generally  extends  the 
period  during  which  it  can  be  consumed  with  relish.  For 
this  reason  it  would  be  better  to  husband  the  supply  of  hard 
bread  and  bacon  for  use  with  the  emergency  ration  when  it 
becomes  evident  that  the  latter  must  be  consumed  rather  than 
to  retain  the  emergency  ration  to  the  last  extremity  and  force 
its  exclusive  use  for  a  longer  period  than  two  or  three  days. 

Section  3.  The  forage  ration. 

"  WIT,  Army  Regulations. — The  forage  ration  for  a  horse  is 
14  pounds  of  hay  and  12  pounds  of  oats,  corn,  or  barley,  and  3J 
pounds  of  straw  (or  hay)  for  bedding;  for  a  Field  Artillery 
horse  of  the  heavy-draft  type,  weighing  1,300  pounds  or  over, 
17  pounds  of  hay  and  14  pounds  of  oats,  corn,  or  barley,  and  3& 
pounds  of  straw  (or  hay)  for  bedding;  for  a  mule,  14  pounds 
of  hay  and  9  pounds  of  oats,  corn,  or  barley,  and  3$  pounds  of 
straw  (or  hay)  for  bedding.  To  each  animal  3  pounds  of  bran 
may  be  issued  in  lieu  of  that  quantity  of  grain. 


42          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

"The  commanding  officer  may,  in  his  discretion,  vary  the 
proportions  of  the  components  of  the  ration  (1  pound  of  grain, 
14  pounds  of  hay,  and  2  pounds  of  straw  being  taken  as  equiva- 
lents), and  in  the  field  may  substitute  other  recognized  articles 
of  forage  obtained  locally,  the  variation  or  the  substitution 
not  to  exceed  the  money  value  of  the  components  of  the  ration 
at  the  contract  rates  in  effect  at  the  time  of  change. 

"1078,  Army  Regulations. — Where  grazing  is  practicable,  or 
when  little  work  is  required  of  the  animals,  commanding  offi- 
cers will  reduce  the  forage  ration.  When,  on  the  other  hand, 
conditions  demand  it,  they  are  authorized  to  increase  the 
ration,  not  in  excess,  however,  of  savings  made." 

In  the  field  the  authorized  allowances  must  often  be  reduced 
and  supplemented  by  grazing  and  other  kinds  of  food,  such  as 
green  forage,  beans,  peas,  rice,  palay,  wheat,  and  rye.  Wheat 
and  rye  should  be  crushed  and  fed  sparingly  (about  one- 
fourth  of  the  allowance).  For  unshelled  corn,  add  about  one- 
quarter  weight. 

On  the  march  the  grain  ration  is  the  only  forage  carried.  It 
consists  of  12  pounds  of  grain  for  each  horse  and  9  pounds  of 
grain  for  each  mule.  Recourse  must  be  had  to  grazing  if  it  is 
not  possible  to  procure  long  forage  in  the  country  traversed. 

In  campaign  a  command  carries  as  a  part  of  its  normal 
equipment  the  following  forage : 

(a)  For  each  draft  animal :  On  each  vehicle  a  reserve  of  one 
day's  grain  ration  for  its  draft  animals. 

(&)  On  animals  and  vehicles:  A  portion  of  their  grain  ra- 
tion issued  the  night  before,  for  a  noonday  feed. 

(c)  In  the  ration  section  of  the  field  train,  for  each  animal, 
two  days'  grain  rations. 

(d)  In  supply  train  of  an  Infantry  division  two  days'  grain 
rations,  and  of  a  Cavalry  division  one  day's  grain  ration. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

PERSONAL  HYGIENE  AND  CARE  OF  THE  FEET. 


PERSONAL  HYGIENE. 

History  shows  that  in  almost  every  war  many  more  men  die 
of  disease  than  from  wounds  received  in  battle.  Much  of  this 
disease  is  preventable  and  is  due  either  to  the  ignorance  or 
carelessness  of  the  person  who  has  the  disease  or  of  other 
persons  about  him.  It  is  a  terrible  truth  that  one  man  who 
violates  any  of  the  great  rules  of  health  may  be  the  means  of 
killing  many  more  of  his  comrades  than  are  killed  by  the  bullets 
of  the  enemy. 

It  is  therefore  most  important  that  every  soldier  should  learn 
how  to  take  care  of  his  health  when  in  the  field  and  that  he 
should  also  insist  that  his  comrades  do  not  violate  any  of  the 
rules  prescribed  for  this  purpose. 

A  great  many  diseases  are  due  to  germs,  which  are  either 
little  animals  or  little  plants  so  very  small  that  they  can  only 
be  seen  by  aid  of  the  microscope.  All  diseases  caused  by  germs 
are  "  catching."  All  other  diseases  are  not  "  catching." 

There  are  only  five  ways  of  catching  disease : 

(a)  Getting  certain  germs  on  the  body  by  touching  some  one 
or  something  which  has  them  on  it.  Thus,  one  may  catch 
venereal  diseases,  smallpox,  measles,  scarlet  fever,  chicken  pox, 
mumps,  boils,  body  lice,  ringworm,  barber's  itch,  dhobie  itch, 
and  some  other  diseases.  Wounds  are  infected  in  this  manner. 

(fo)  Breathing  in  certain  germs  which  float  in  the  air.  In 
this  way  one  may  catch  pneumonia,  consumption,  influenza, 
diphtheria,  whooping  cough,  tonsilitis,  spinal  meningitis,  mea- 
sles, and  certain  other  diseases. 

43 


44          MANUAL  FOU  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

(c)  Taking  certain  germs  in  through  the  mouth  in  eating  or 
drinking.    Dysentery,  cholera,  typhoid  ferer,  diarrhea,  and  in- 
testinal worms  may  be  caught  in  this  manner. 

(d)  Having  certain  germs  injected  into  the  body  by  the  bites 
of  insects,  such  as  mosquitoes,  fleas,  and  bedbugs.     Malaria, 
yellow  fever,  dengue  fever,  and  bubonic  plague  may  be  caught 
in  this  way. 

(c)  Inheriting  the  germ  from  one's  parents. 

Persons  may  have  these  germs  sometimes  without  apparently 
being  sick  with  any  disease.  Such  persons  and  persons  who  are 
sick  with  the  diseases  are  a  great  source  of  danger  to  others 
about  them.  Germs  which  multiply  in  such  persons  are  found 
in  their  urine  and  excretions  from  the  bowels;  in  discharges 
from  ulcers  and  abscesses ;  in  the  spit  or  particles  coughed  or 
sneezed  into  the  air ;  in  the  perspiration  or  scales  from  the 
skin ;  and  in  the  blood  sucked  up  by  biting  insects. 

Those  who  have  taken  care  of  their  health  and  who  have  not 
become  weakened  by  bad  habits,  exposure,  and  fatigue  are  not 
only  less  liable  to  catch  disease,  but  are  more  apt  to  recover 
when  taken  sick. 

Knowing  all  these  things,  the  soldier  can  understand  the  rea- 
sons for  the  following  rules  and  how  important  it  is  that  they 
should  be  carried  out  by  each  and  every  person : 

Stay  away  from  persons  having  "  catching  "  diseases. 

If  you  have  any  disease,  don't  try  to  cure  it  yourself,  but  go 
to  the  surgeon.  Insist  that  other  soldiers  do  likewise. 

Typhoid  fever  is  one  of  the  most  dangerous  and  common 
camp  diseases.  Modern  medicine  has,  however,  discovered  an 
effective  preventative  for  this  disease  in  the  typhoid  prophy- 
lactic, which  renders  the  person  immune  from  typhoid  fever. 
The  treatment  consists  in  injecting  into  the  arm  a  preventative 
serum.  The  injection  is  given  three  times  at  10-day  intervals. 

Association  with  lewd  women  is  dangerous.  It  may  result 
in  disabling  you  for  life.  It  is  the  cause  of  a  disease  (syphilis) 
which  may  be  transmitted  by  a  parent  to  his  children.  Soldiers 
with  venereal  diseases  should  not  use  basins  or  toilet  articles 
used  by  others,  as  the  germs  of  these  diseases  if  gotten  into  the 
eye  very  often  cause  blindness.  Likewise,  if  they  use  the  same 
drinking  cup  used  by  others  they  may  give  others  the  .disease. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.  45 

They  should  promptly  report  their  trouble  to  the  surgeon,  that 
they  may  receive  the  best  medical  advice  and  attention. 

Should  a  soldier  expose  himself  to  infection  by  having  inter- 
course with  an  unknown  woman,  he  should  report  as  soon  as 
possible  afterwards  to  the  regimental  infirmary  for  prophy- 
lactic treatment,  which,  if  taken  within  a  few  hours  after 
intercourse,  will  prevent  to  a  large  degree  the  liability  of 
contracting  any  disease. 

Cooked  germs  are  dead  and  therefore  harmless.  Water, 
even  when  clear,  may  be  alive  with  deadly  germs.  Therefore, 
when  the  conditions  are  such  that  the  commanding  officer 
orders  all  drinking  water  to  be  boiled,  be  careful  to  live  up  to 
this  order. 

Use  the  latrines  and  don't  go  elsewhere  to  relieve  yourself. 
In  open  latrines  cover  your  deposit  with  dirt,  as  it  breeds  flies 
and  may  also  be  full  of  germs. 

Flies  carry  germs  from  one  place  to  another.  Therefore  see 
that  your  food  and  mess  kit  are  protected  from  them. 

All  slops  and  scraps  of  food  scattered  about  camp  soon 
produce  bad  odors  and  draw  flies.  Therefore  do  your  part 
toward  keeping  the  camp  free  from  disease  by  carefully  de- 
positing such  refuse  in  the  pits  or  cans  used  for  this  purpose. 

Urinate  only  in  the  latrines,  or  in  the  cans  set  out  for  this 
purpose,  never  on  the  ground  around  camp,  because  it  not  only 
causes  bad  smells  but  urine  sometimes  contains  the  germs  of 
"  catching  "  diseases. 

Soapy  water  thrown  on  the  ground  soon  produces  bad  odors. 
Therefore  in  camps  of  several  days'  duration  this  water  should 
be  thrown  in  covered  pits  or  in  cans  used  for  this  purpose. 

As  certain  mosquitoes  can  transmit  malaria  and  yellow  fever, 
use  your  mosquito  bar  for  this  reason  as  well  as  for  personal 
comfort. 

Keep  your  mouth  clean  by  brushing  your  teeth  once  or  twice 
a  day.  It  helps  to  prevent  the  teeth  from  decaying.  Decayed 
teeth  cause  toothache.  They  also  lead  one  to  swallow  food 
without  properly  chewing  it,  and  this  leads  to  stomach  troubles 
of  various  kinds.  Food  left  around  and  between  the  teeth  is 
bad  for  the  teeth  and  forms  good  breeding  places  for  germs. 


46  MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Keep  the  skin  clean.  Through  the  pores  of  the  skin  the  body 
gets  rid  of  much  waste  and  poisonous  matter.  Therefore  re- 
move this  and  keep  the  pores  open  by  bathing  once  every  day. 
if  possible.  If  water  is  scarce,  rub  the  body  over  with  "a  we1 
towel.  If  no  water  is  at  hand,  take  a  dry  rub.  Wash  care- 
fully the  armpits,  between  the  legs,  and  under  the  foreskin, 
as  this  will  prevent  chafing. 

The  skin  protects  the  sensitive  parts  underneath  from  injury 
and  helps  to  keep  out  germs.  Therefore  when  blisters  are 
formed  don't  tear  off  the  skin.  Insert  a  needle  under  the  skin 
a  little  distance  back  from  the  blister  and  push  it  through  to 
the  opposite  side.  Press  out  the  liquid  through  the  holes  thus 
formed.  Heat  the  needle  red  hot  first,  with  a  match  or  candle, 
to  kill  the  germs. 

When  the  skin  is  broken  (in  cuts  and  wounds)  keep  the  open- 
ing covered  with  a  bandage  to  keep  out  germs  and  dirt ;  other- 
wise the  sore  may  fester.  Pus  is  always  caused  by  germs. 

Keep  your  hair  short.  Long  hair  and  a  long  beard  in  the 
field  generally  means  a  dirty  head  and  a  dirty  face  and  favors 
skin  diseases,  lice,  and  dandruff. 

Don't  let  any  part  of  the  body  become  chilled,  as  this  very 
often  is  the  direct  cause  of  diarrhea,  dysentery,  pneumonia, 
rheumatism,  and  other  diseases. 

Wet  clothes  may  be  worn  while  marching  or  exercising  with- 
out bad  results,  but  there  is  great  danger  if  one  rests  in  wet 
clothing,  as  the  body  may  become  chilled. 

Don't  sit  or  lie  or  sleep  directly  on  damp  ground,  as  this  is 
•  sure  to  chill  the  body. 

When  hot  or  perspiring  or  when  wearing  damp  clothes,  don't 
remain  where  a  breeze  can  strike  you.  You  are  sure  to  be- 
come chilled. 

Kvory  day,  if  possible,  hang  your  blanket  and  clothing  out  to 
air  in  the  sun ;  shake  or  beat  them  with  a  small  stick.  Germs 
anil  vermin  don't  like  this  treatment,  but  damp,  musty  clothing 
suits  them  very  well.  Wash  your  shirts,  underwrear,  and  socks 
frequently.  The  danger  of  blood  poisoning  from  a  wound  is 
greatly  increased  if  the  bullet  passes  through  dirty  clothes. 

Ditch  your  tent  as  soon  as  you  can,  particularly  a  shelter 
tent,  even  if  you  camp  for  one  night  only.  Otherwise  a  little 
rain  may  ruin  a  whole  night's  rest. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.  47 

Always  prepare  your  bed  before  dark.  Level  off  the  ground 
and  scrape  out  a  little  hollow  for  your  hips.  Get  some  Btraw 
or  dry  grass  if  possible.  Green  grass  or  branches  from  trees 
are  better  than  nothing.  Sleep  on  your  poncho.  This  keeps 
the  dampness  from  coming  up  from  the  ground  and  chilling  the 
body.  Every  minute  spent  in  making  a  good  bed  means  about 
an  hour's  good  rest  later  on. 

Avoid  the  food  and  drink  found  for  sale  in  the  cheap  stands 
about  camp.  The  quality  is  generally  bad,  and  it  is  often  pre- 
pared in  filthy  places  by  very  dirty  persons. 

The  use  of  intoxicating  liquor  is  particularly  dangerous  in 
the  field.  Its  excessive  use,  even  at  long  intervals,  breaks  down 
one's  system.  Drinking  men  are  more  apt  to  get  sick  and  less 
liable  to  get  well  than  are  their  more  sober  comrades.  If 
alcohol  is  taken  at  all,  it  is  best  after  the  work  of  the  day  is 
over.  It  should  never  be  taken  when  the  body  is  exposed  to 
severe  cold,  as  it  diminishes  the  resistance  of  the  body.  Hot 
tea  or  coffee  is  much  preferable  under  these  circumstances. 

CARE  OF  THE  FEET. 

A  soldier  can  not  march  with  sore  feet,  and  marching  is  the 
main  part  of  an  infantryman's  daily  duty  in  the  field.  All 
soldiers  should  be  familiar  with  the  proper  methods  of  caring 
for  the  feet.  Sore  feet  are  generally  due  to  carelessness,  neg- 
lect, or  ignorance  on  the  part  of  the  soldier. 

The  most  important  factor  in  the  care  of  the  feet  and  the 
marching  ability  of  the  soldier  is  the  shoe.  Civilian  shoes, 
particularly  light,  patent  leather,  or  low  shoes,  are  sure  to 
cause  injury  and  in  time  will  ruin  a  man's  foot.  Only  the 
marching  shoe  issued  by  the  Quartermaster  Corps  should  be 
worn,  and  they  must  be  properly  fitted  to  the  individual.  It 
will  not  suffice  to  order  a  marching  shoe  of  the  same  size  as 
one's  ordinary  civilian  shoes,  for  it  must  be  remembered  that  a 
soldier  may  have  to  march  many  miles  daily  over  rough  roads 
and  carrying  a  heavy  pack.  The  pack  itself  causes  the  foot  to 
spread  out  to  a  larger  size,  and  the  rough  roads  give  so  much 
exercise  to  the  muscles  of  the  feet  that  they  swell  greatly 
through  the  increased  blood  supply.  (For  directions  as  to 
measuring  the  foot  for  the  marching  shoe,  see  General  Order 


48          MANTTAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIOITED  OFFICEBS. 

No.  26,  War  Department,  1912,  a  copy  of  which  should  be  on 
hand  in  each  company.) 

Do  not  start  out  on  a  march  wearing  new  shoes.  This  is  ;i 
frequent  cause  of  sore  feet.  New  shoes  should  be  properly 
broken  in  before  beginning  a  inarch  by  wearing  them  for 
several  hours  daily  for  a  week  before  the  march,  and  they 
should  be  adapted  to  the  contours  of  the  feet  by  stretching  them 
with  shoe  stretchers  with  adjustable  knobs  to  take  the  pres- 
sure off:  painful  corns  and  bunions.  Such  stretchers  are  issued 
by  the  Quartermaster  Corps,  and  there  should  be  one  or  more 
pair  in  every  company  of  infantry.  Should  this  be  impracti- 
cable, then  the  following  is  suggested  : 

The  soldier  stands  in  his  new  shoes  in  about  2J  inches  of 
water  for  about  five  minutes  until  the  leather  is  thoroughly 
pliable  and  moist;  he  should  then  walk  for  about  an  hour  on 
a  level  surface,  letting  the  shoes  dry  on  his  feet,  to  the  irregu- 
larities of  which  the  leather  is  thus  molded  in  the  same  way 
as  it  was  previously  molded  over  the  shoe  last.  On  taking 
the  shoes  off  a  very  little  neat's-foot  oil  should  be  rubbed  into 
the  leather  to  prevent  its  hardening  and  cracking. 

If  it  is  desired  to  waterproof  shoes  at  any  time,  a  considerable 
amount  of  neat's-foot  oil  should  be  rubbed  into  the  leather. 
Waterproof  leather  causes  the  feet  of  some  men  to  perspire 
unduly  and  keeps  them  constantly  soft. 

Light  woolen  or  heavy  woolen  socks  will  habitually  be  worn 
for  marching.  Cotton  socks  will  not  be  worn  unless  specifically 
ordered  by  the  surgeon.  The  socks  will  be  large  enough  to  per- 
mit free  movement  of  the  toes,  but  not  so  loose  as  to  permit  of 
wrinkling.  Darned  socks,  or  socks  with  holes  in  them,  will  not 
be  worn  in  marching. 

Until  the  feet  have  hardened  they  should  be  dusted  with  foot 
powder,  which  can  be  obtained  at  the  regimental  infirmary, 
before  each  day's  march.  Clean  socks  should  be  worn  daily. 

As  soon  as  possible  after  reaching  camp  after  a  day  of  march- 
ing the  feet  should  be  washed  with  soap  and  water,  and  the 
soldier  should  put  on  a  dry  pair  of  socks  and  his  extra  pair  of 
shoes  from  his  surplus  kit.  If  the  skin  is  tender,  or  the  feet 
perspire,  wash  with  warm  salt  water  or  alum  water,  but  do  not 
soak  the  feet  a  long  time,  as  this,  although  very  comforting  at 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.  49 

the  time,  tends  to  keep  them  soft.  Should  blisters  appear  on 
the  feet,  prick  and  evacuate  them  by  pricking  at  the  lower  edge 
with  a  pin  which  has  been  passed  through  the  flame  of  a  match 
and  cover  them  with  zinc  oxide  plaster*  applied  hot.  This 
plaster  can  be  obtained  on  request  at  the  regimental  infirmary. 
If  serious  abrasions  appear  on  the  feet,  or  corns,  bunions,  and 
ingrowing  nails  cause  trouble,  have  your  name  placed  on  sick 
report  and  apply  to  the  surgeon  for  treatment.  Cut  the  toe- 
nails  square  (fairly  close  in  the  middle,  but  leaving  the  sides 
somewhat  longer),  as  this  prevents  ingrowing  nails. 


CHAPTER  V. 
EXTRACTS  FROM  CAVALRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

UNITED  STATES   ARMY,  1916. 


Section  1.  Definitions. 

Alignment. — The  placing  of  several  troopers  or  units  on  the 
same  straight  line ;  also  the  line  on  which  such  adjustment 
is  made. 

Assembly. — The  grouping  in  order,  and  in  a  close-order 
formation,  of  the  elements  of  a  command.  The  special  ar- 
rangement and  condition  that  constitute  order  for  each  unit 
are  explained  in  the  corresponding  part  of  the  text.  The 
purpose  of  the  assembly  is  to  bring  about  a  close-order  forma- 
tion in  order. 

Base. — The  element  on^  which  a  formation  or  movement  is 
regulated.  The  base  may  be  a  trooper,  two,  four,  section, 
platoon,  or  larger  unit.  When  the  base  is  a  single  trooper 
in  ranks,  he  may  also  be  termed  the  guide. 

Center. — The  middle  point  or  element  of  a  command.  If  the 
number  of  elements  considered  be  even,  the  right  center  ele- 
ment will  be  meant  when  the  center  element  is  referred  to. 

Column. — A  formation  in  which  the  elements  of  a  command 
are  placed  one  behind  the  other.  The  elements  here  referred  to 
may  be  troopers,  twos,  fours,  sections,  platoons,  or  larger 
units.  When  used  in  these  regulations  as  a  word  of  com- 
mand, without  qualifying  words  indicating  the  kind  of  column 
(as  of  twos,  of  platoons,  etc.),  column  signifies  a  column  of 
fours.  In  all  other  cases  the  word  is  to  be  understood  in  its 
general  sense  unless  the  context  indicates  the  contrary. 
50 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          51 

Deployment. — An  evolution  in  which  the  command  extends 
its  front,  as  in  forming  line  from  column  or  in  passing  from 
close  order  to  extended  order. 

Depth. — The  space  from  front  to  rear  of  any  formation,  in* 
eluding  the  front  and  rear  elements. 

Directing  leader. — The  leader  of  a  subordinate  unit  who 
temporarily  conducts  the  march  when  the  commander  is  not 
leading  in  person.  A  trooper  in  the  rank  of  a  platoon  or 
smaller  unit  who  similarly  conducts  the  march  is  termed  a 
directing  guide. 

Direction  of  march. — The  direction  in  which  the  base  of  the 
command  in  question,  whether  actually  in  march  or  halted, 
is  facing  at  the  instant  considered. 

Disposition. — The  distribution  of  the  elements  of  a  command, 
and  the  formations  and  duties  assigned  to  each  for  the  accom- 
plishment of  a  common  purpose. 

Distance. — The  space  between  men  or  bodies  of  troops 
measured  in  the  direction  of  depth.  Distance  is  measured — 
mounted,  from  the  croup  of  the  horse  in  front  to  the  head 
of  the  horse  in  rear;  dismounted,  from  the  back  of  the  trooper 
in  front  to  the  breast  of  the  trooper  in  rear. 

Dress. — The  act  of  taking  a  correct  alignment. 

Drill. — The  exercises  and  evolutions  taught  on  the  drill 
ground  and  executed  in  accordance  with  definitely  prescribed 
methods. 

Echelon. — A  body  of  troops  is  in  echelon  with  reference  to 
another  when  it  is  more  advanced  or  less  advanced  and  un- 
masks or  uncovers  the  other  body,  wholly  or  in  part ;  units 
thus  placed  are  called  echelons. 

Element. — One  of  the  component  subdivisions  of  a  command. 
As  used  in  these  regulations  the  term  element  is  a  general  one 
and  may  mean  a  single  trooper,  a  set  of  twos,  a  four,  section, 
platoon,  or  larger  unit,  according  to  the  command  and  forma- 
tion that  are  being  considered.  The  expression  elements  of  the 
column  refers  to  the  several  troopers,  fours,  platoons,  or  other 
units  that  are  placed  successively,  one  behind  another,  in  any 
column  formation. 

Evolutions. — Movements  by  which  a  command  changes  its 
position  or  passes  from  one  formation  to  another. 


62          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

File  closers. — Officers  or  noncommissioned  oilicers  placed  out 
of  ranks,  whose  duty  it  is  to  supervise  the  men  in  ranks  and 
see  that  the  orders  of  the  commander  are  carried  out.  For 
convenience,  this  term  is  applied  to  any  man  posted  as  a  file 
closer. 

Flank. — The  right  or  left  of  a  command  in  line  or  column. 

In  speaking  of  the  enemy  the  term  right  flank  or  left  flank 
is  used  to  designate  the  flank  that  would  be  so  designated  by 
him. 

Flank  guard. — An  element  of  a  command  disposed  with  a 
view  to  protecting  a  flank. 

Foragers. — Mounted  troopers  distributed  in  line  in  extended 
order ;  also  the  formation  in  which  the  troopers  are  so  dis- 
tributed. 

Formation. — The  arrangement  of  the  elements  .of  a  command 
in  line,  column,  or  echelon. 

Gait.— One  of  the  special  movements  of  the  horse,  as  the 
walk,  the  trot,  or  the  gallop.- 

Gait  of  march. — The  gait  at  which  the  base  of  the  command 
in  question  is  moving  at  the  instant  considered. 

Horse  length. — A  term  of  measurement.  For  convenience  in 
estimating  space,  a  horse  length  is  considered  as  3  yards ;  by 
actual  measure  it  is  about  8  feet. 

Interval. — The  lateral  space  between  the  elements  or  frac- 
tions of  a  command.  Interval  is  measured :  Mounted,  from 
the  left  knee  of  the  man  at  the  right  of  the  open  space  to  the 
right  knee  of  the  man  at  the  left  of  the  open  space;  dis- 
mounted, interval  is  measured  on  similar  principles,  but  from 
elbow  to  elbow. 

Line. — A  formation  in  which  the  different  elements  are 
abreast  of  each  other.  When  the  elements  are  in  column  the 
formation  is  called  a  line  of  columns. 

Maneuvers. — Operations  against  an  outlined  or  actual  force 
under  a  separate  commander,  who,  within  the  limits  of  the 
assumed  situation,  is  free  to  adopt  any  formations  and  make 
any  movements  he  chooses. 

Order. — An  indication  of  the  will  of  the  commander  in  what- 
ever form  conveyed.  An  order  may  be  given  orally,  by  signal, 
or  in  any  manner  that  is  intelligible  to  those  for  whom  it  is 
intended.  The  expression,  in  order,  has  no  reference  to  this 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          53 

definition,  but  is  used 'to  indicate  a  special  arrangement  and 
condition  of  the  elements  of  a  command. 

Order,  close. — This  includes  formations  in  which  the  intervals 
and  distances  between  elements  are  habitually  based  upon 
those  required  for  forming  the  normal  line  formation  of  each 
unit  of  the  formation. 

Order,  extended. — The  formation  in  which  the  troopers,  or 
the  subdh7isions,  or  both,  are  separated  by  intervals  or  dis- 
tances greater  than  in  close  order. 

Pace. — Used  with  reference  to  gait,  pace  signifies  the  rate  of 
speed  of  the  gait.  Used  as  a  unit  of  measure,  pace  signifies 
a  step  of  30  inches. 

Patrol. — A  group  detached  from  a  command  and  operating 
with  specific  mission,  usually  related  to  security  or  informa- 
tion. The  term  is  ordinarily  applied  to  groups  varying  in  size 
from  two  men  to  a  platoon.  They  are  frequently  designated 
by  special  names  connected  with  their  principal  mission  or 
their  composition ;  as,  reeonnoitering  patrols,  combat  patrols, 
visiting  patrols,  officer's  patrols. 

Ployment. — An  evolution  in  which  the  command  diminishes 
its  front,  as  in  passing  from  line  to  column,  or  from  extended 
order  to  close  order. 

Rally. — The  rapid  grouping  behind  the  leader  of  the  ele- 
ments of  a  command,  without  reference  to  their  previous  situa- 
tion or  formation. 

The  object  of  the  rally  is  to  reestablish  cohesion  with  a 
view  to  immediate  action,  or  to  form  line  in  a  new  direction 
when  the  regular  method  of  forming  line  would  be  slow  or 
complicated.  It  is  executed  in  the  order  of  arrival  of  the 
elements  of  the  command  without  regard  to  their  normal 
order.  The  formation  in  which  each  unit  is  rallied  is  fixed 
in  the  drill  instructions  of  that  unit. 

Rank. — Two  or  more  troopers  placed  side  by  side. 

Scouts. — Individual  troopers  detached  from  their  commands 
and  operating  with  a  definite  mission  related  to  security  or 
information. 

Skirmishers. — Dismounted  troopers  in  line  in  extended  order ; 
also  the  formation  in  which  the  troopers  are  so  placed. 

Successive  formation, — A  formation  in  which  the  elements 
take  their  places  successively. 


54          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Tactical  exercise. — An  operation  against  an  outlined  or  repre- 
sented enemy  whose  movements  are  restricted  with  a  view 
to  illustrating  some  particular  tactical  principle. 

PART  I.— INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION. 

Section  2.  General  provisions. 

34.1  Thorough  training  in  the  school  of  the  trooper  is  the 
basis  of  efficiency. 

35.  Short  and  frequent  drills  are  preferable  to  long  ones, 
which  exhaust  the  attention  of  both  instructor  and  recruit. 

36.  As    the    instruction    progresses,    the    recruits    will    be 
grouped  according  to  proficiency,  in  order  that  all  may  ad- 
vance as  rapidly  as  their  abilities  permit.     Those  who  lack 
aptitude  and  quickness  'will  be  separated  from  the  others  and 
placed  under  experienced  drillmasters. 

37.  The  individual  dismounted  instruction  of  the  recruit  is 
habitually  given  by  experienced  noncommissioned  officers,  espe- 
cially selected  for  that  purpose.     All  such  instruction  is  under 
the  careful  personal  supervision  of  a  commissioned  officer,  and 
in  the  corresponding  mounted  instruction  it  is  desirable  that 
the  actual  instructor  be  a  commissioned  officer  when  this  is 
practicable.     All  lieutenants  will  be  required  to  instruct  re- 
cruits in  person  sufficiently  to  acquire  skill  in  such  work. 

When  recruits,  upon  their  arrival  at  a  station,  are  assigned 
to  their  respective  troops  for  training,  the  captains  prescribe 
and  supervise  the  instruction. 

38.  The  instructor  will  always  maintain  a  military  bearing 
and  by  a  quiet,  firm  demeanor,  set  a  proper  example  to  his 
men.     A  calm  and  even   temper   is   indispensable.     Unneces- 
sarily loud  commands  and  prolonged  explanations  are  to  be 
avoided. 

As  the  recruits  become  somewhat  proficient  in  the  school  of 
the  trooper,  the  officer  superintending  the  instruction  may  call 
upon  them  in  turn  to  drill  the  squad  in  his  presence  and  to 
correct  any  errors  that  may  be  observed.  This  will  increase 

1  The  numbers  refer  to  paragraphs  in  the  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations, 
1916. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          65 

their  interest,  hasten  their  instruction,  and  facilitate  judg- 
ment upon  their  fitness  for  the  duties  of  noncommissioned 
officers. 

39.  A  carefully  thought  out  program  of  instruction,  prepared 
in  advance  and  based  upon  the  probable  time  and  facilities  for 
instruction  that  the  case*  in  question  may  present -,  is  essential 
to  economy  of  time  and  effort  and  to  systematic,  thorough 
instruction. 

40.  The  preliminary  individual  instruction,  dismounted  and 
mounted,  should  be  carried  on  during  different  drill  hours  of 
the  same  clays.     This  preliminary  phase  should  include,  in 
addition  to  regular  drill,  instruction  in:  The  elements  of  dis- 
cipline ;   the   names  of  the   various  parts  of  the   arms  and 
equipment ;  the  proper  care  of  arms,  equipment,  and  clothing ; 
elementary  instructions  as  to  the  names  of  those  parts  of  the 
horse  that  are  frequently  referred  to  at  drill  and  stable  duty ; 
grooming ;  a  few  simple  rules  regarding  the  care  of  the  horse ; 
personal  hygiene:  and  other  related  subjects. 

41.  As  soon  as  the  instruction  shall  have  advanced  so  far  as 
to,  include  the  few  necessary  preliminary  drills,  collective  in- 
struction in  the  school  of  the  squad  will  be  taken  up.     This 
instruction  may,  like  the  individual  instruction,  properly  be 
carried  on  during  different  hours  of  the  same  drill  days,  in 
both  mounted  and  dismounted  phases.    The  recruits  meanwhile 
continue  their  progress  in  the  individual  instruction. 

42.  The  progress  in  mounted  collective  instruction  must  be 
carefully  regulated  in  accordance  with  the  recruit's  confidence 
and  skill  in  the  management  of  his  mount,  and  must  progress 
no  faster  than  the  recruit's  horsemanship  justifies ;  but  this 
restriction  need  not  affect  the  dismounted  collective  instruc- 
tion, and  the  latter  may  properly  be  carried  forward  as  rap- 
idly as  the  state  of  the  dismounted  individual  instruction  will 
permit.    By  the  time  the  recruit's  instruction  in  equitation  has 
progressed  so  as  to  prepare  him  for  mounted  drills  at  the 
faster  gaits,  he  should  have  learned  the  mechanism  of  all  the 
movements  by  executing  them  at  a  walk.     His  course  of  dis- 
mounted training  should  meanwhile  have  included  not  only  the 
close-order  movements  of  the  squad  but  the  mechanism  of  ex- 
tended order,  practice  in  the  use  of  the  saber,  a  little  prepara- 
tory range  practice  with  the  rifle  and  pistol,  and  work  in  the 


56          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

nature  of  minor  field  exercises  involving  dismounted  fire  action. 
He  should,  during  the  same  period,  have  learned^  the  mechan- 
ism of  passing  from  mounted  action  to  dismounted  action 
and  should  have  acquired  familiarity  with  all  commands 
and  signals  used  in  the  squad.  The  recruit  will  thus  ordi- 
narily be  ready  to  enter  with  reasonable  efficiency  upon  certain 
phases  of  the  work  in  the  platoon  and  troop  before  his  indi- 
vidual mounted  instruction  is  completed. 

43.  There  are  two  kinds  of  commands  : 

The  preparatory  command,  such  as  forward,  indicates  the 
movement  that  is  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution,  such  as  MARCH,  HALT,  or 
ARMS,  causes  the  execution. 

Preparatory  commands  are  distinguished  by  boldface  type, 
those  "of  execution  by  CAPITALS. 

The  preparatory  command  should  be  given  at  such  an  in- 
terval-of  time  before  the  command  of  execution  as  to  admit 
of  being  properly  understood;  the  command  of  execution 
should  be  given  at  the  instant  the  movement  is  to  commence. 

The  preparatory  command  is  enunciated  distinctly,  with  a 
rising  inflection  at  the  end,  and  in  such  manner  that  the  com- 
mand of  execution  may  be  more  energetic. 

On  foot,  the  command  of  execution  is  firm  in  tone  and  brief. 

In  mounted  movements  the  preparatory  command  is  usually 
somewhat  prolonged  to  insure  its  being  heard,  and  the  com- 
mand of  execution  is  always  prolonged. 

Commands  will  be  given  no  louder  than  is  necessary. 

Laxness  or  indifference  suggested  in  the  manner  of  giving  a 
command  is  certain  to  result  in  corresponding  carelessness  of 
execution. 

44.  To  revoke  a  preparatory  command,  or  being  at  the  halt, 
to  begin  anew  a  movement  improperly  begun:  AS  YOTT  WERE. 
Any  movement  ceases  and  the  former  position  is  resumed. 

45.  To 'stay  the  execution  of  a  movement  when  marching, 
for  the  correction  of  errors,  the  commands  may  be  given :  1. 
In  place,  2.  HALT.     All  halt  and  stand  fast.     If  executed  dis- 
mounted, the  position  of  the  rifle  is  not  changed.    To  resume 
the  movement,  the  commands  are:  1.  Resume;  or,  1.  Resume, 
trot;    or,  1.  Resume,  gallop.     2.  MARCH.     The  movement  is 
then  completed  as  if  it  had  not  been  interrupted. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          67 

46.  Movements  that  may  be  executed  toward  either  flank  are 
explained  as  toward  but  one  flank,  it  being  necessary  to  sub- 
stitute the  word  "left"  for  "right,"  and  the  reverse,  to  have 
the  explanation  of  the  corresponding  movement  toward  the 
other  flank.    The  commands  are  given  for  the  execution  of 
the  movements  toward  either  flank.     The  substitute  word  of 
the  command  is  placed  within  parentheses. 

47.  Any  movement  may  be  executed  either  from  the  halt  or 
when  marching  unless  otherwise  prescribed. 

Any  movement  on  foot  not  specially  excepted  may  be  exe- 
cuted in  double  time. 

If  at  a  halt,  or  if  marching  in  quick  time,  the  command 
double  time  precedes  the  command  of  execution. 

48.  As  instructors,  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  go 
wherever  their  presence  is  necessary. 

49.  Before  beginning  work,   the  instructor  always  assures 
himself  that  those  under  his  charge  are  neatly  dressed  and  in 
proper  uniform.     At  mounted  formations  he  will  also  require 
that  horses  be  properly  groomed  and  that  equipments  be  in 
good  condition  and  adjusted  as  prescribed. 

50.  The  value  of  recruit  drill  as  an  exercise  in  teaching  dis- 
cipline must  be  kept  constantly  in  view  by  the  instructor.    No 
phase  of  the  instruction  is  of  such  great  ultimate  importance. 

Section  3.  School  of  the  trooper,  dismounted. 

51.  The  object  of  this  school  is  to  develop  the  strength  and 
agility  of  the  trooper,  to  give  him  a  military  bearing,  to  fix 
in  him  the  habit  of  sustained  attention  and  instant  obedience, 
to  prepare  him  for  instruction  in  mounted  combat  with  the 
saber  and  pistol,  and  to  train  him  in  dismounted  combat  with 
the  rifle. 

In  order  to  make  rapid  progress  in  those  exercises  which 
form  the  basis  of  instruction  of  the  trooper,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  lessons  should,  as  far  as  practicable,  be  given  indi- 
vidually. 

52.  Cautions  to  instructors. — The  instructor  explains  briefly 
each  movement,  first  executing  it  himself  if  practicable.     He 
requires  the  recruits  to  take  the  proper  positions  unassisted 


58          HANTJAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

and  does  not  touch  them  for  the  purpose  of  correcting  them, 
except  when  they  are  unable  to  correct  themselves.  He  avoids 
keeping  them  too  long  at  the  same  movement,  although  each 
should  be  understood  before  passing  to  another.  He  exacts 
by  degrees  the  desired  precision  and  uniformity.  Recruits 
should  be  allowed  to  stand  at  ease  frequently.  During  these 
pauses  the  instructor  will  not  be  idle,  but  opportunity  will  bo 
taken  to  talk  to  the  men,  to  encourage  them  to  ask  questions, 
and  so  to  develop  their  confidence  and  common  sense. 

53.  During  the  period  devoted  to  preliminary   instruction, 
without  arms,  the  recruit  will  be  prepared  for  subsequent  in- 
struction with  arms  by  being  taught  the  names  of  the  prin- 
cipal parts  of  the  different  weapons  and  the  proper  methods 
of    cleaning,    disassembling,    assembling,    and    operating   the 
latter. 

PHYSICAL  TRAINING. 

54.  The  physical  training  of  the  soldier  must  receive  due 
attention.      Its    direct   results   are   to   increase   the   soldier's 
strength,  agility,  and  endurance,  and  it  has  indirect  results 
of  far-reaching  value  in  connection  with  discipline  and  morale. 
It  should  begin  with  his  first  instruction  as  a  recruit  and  be 
continued  throughout  his  entire  enlistment.    The  methods  pre- 
scribed in  the  authorized  Manual  of  Physical  Training  will  be 
followed   with  a   view  to   making  the  soldier's  development 
thorough  and  well  balanced,  and  to  prevent  the  instruction 
from  becoming  unnecessarily  tedious  and  monotonous. 

55.  In   the  earlier   phases  of  the  recruit   instruction,   and 
under  temporary  conditions  that  do  not  favor  the  carrying  out 
of  a  more  comprehensive  scheme  of  training,  special  attention 
will  be  given  to  the  setting-up  exercises.     Running,  jumping, 
and  swimming  are  phases  of  training  of  special  importance  to 
the  soldier. 

INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION  WITHOUT  ARMS. 

56.  For  this  instruction  a  few  recruits,  usually  not  exceed- 
ing 3  or  4,  are  placed  (as  a  squad)  in  single  rank,  facing  to 
the  front. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.  59 

57.  To  teach  the  recruits  how  to  form  in  ranks  the  instructor 
will  first  place  them  in  single  rank,  arranged  according  to 
height,  the  tallest  man  on  the  right,  with  intervals  of  about  4 
inches  between  men,  and  will  explain  that  the  object  of  these 
intervals  is  to  give  freedom  of  movement  in  marching  and  in 
the  use  of  the  rifle  in  ranks.     He  will  then  direct  each  man 
singly  to  place  the  palm  of  the  left  hand  on  the  hip,  fingers 
pointing  downward,  and  draw  attention  to  the  fact  that  the 
indicated  interval  of  about  4  inches  may  be  verified  by  each 
man   so  placing  himself  that  his  right   arm,   when  hanging 
naturally  at  his  side,  touches  the  elbow  of  the  man  on  his 
right.    When  this  is  understood,  he  will  cause  the  recruits  to 
fall  out  and  successively  to  place  themselves  as  before,  each 
man  verifying  his  interval  by  causing  his  right  arm  to  touch 
the  left  elbow  of  the  man  on   his   right,   the  latter 's  hand 
being  on  his  hip,  as  already  explained.     He  will  then  explain 
that  at  the  command  FALL  IN  the  men  will,  beginning  with 
the  right  trooper,  successively  and  quickly  take  their  places 
in  rank,  each  man  placing  the  left  hand  at  the  hip  as  above 
and  dropping  his  hand  to  his  side  as  soon  as  the  man  on  his 
left  has  the  proper  interval. 

58.  The  recruits  having  had  sufficient  instruction  to  under- 
stand how  to  form  by  command,  the  instructor  commands: 
FALL  IN. 

The  men  assemble  as  prescribed  in  par.  57,  each  taking 
the  position  of  attention  as  described  below. 

As  soon  as  the  recruits  have  had  sufficient  preliminary 
instruction  they  will  habitually  be  formed  as  regularly  pre- 
scribed for  a  squad. 

POSITION    OF   THE   TROOPEK,    OR    ATTENTION     (DISMOUNTED). 

59.  Heels  on  the  same  line  and  as  near  each  other  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of  about  45°. 

Knees  straight  without  stiffness. 

Hips  level  and  drawn  back  slightly ;  body  erect  and  resting 
equally  on  hips ;  chest  lifted  and  arched ;  shoulders  square 
and  falling  equally. 


60         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally,  thumb  along  the  seam 
of  the  breeches. 

Head  erect  and  squarely  to  the  front,  chin  drawn  in  so  that 
the  axis  of  the  head  and  neck  is  vertical ;  eyes  to  the  front. 

Weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  upon  the  heels  and  balls 
of  the  feet. 

THE   EESTS. 

60.  Being  at  a  halt,  the  commands  are:  FALL  OUT;  REST; 
AT  EASE;   and  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

At  the  command  fall  out,  the  men  may  leave  the  ranks,  but 
are  required  to  remain  in  the  immediate  vicinity.  They  resume 
their  former  places,  at  attention,  at  the  command  fall  in. 

At  the  command  rest,  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place,  but 
is  not  required  to  preserve  silence  or  immobility. 

At  the  command  at  ease,  each  man  keeps  one  foot  in  place 
and  is  required  to  preserve  silence,  but  not  immobility. 

1.  Parade,  2.  REST.  Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight 
to  the  rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent ;  clasp  the  hands,  without 
constraint,  in .  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  lingers  joined, 
left  hand  uppermost,  left  thumb  clasped  by  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  the  right  hand ;  preserve  silence  and  steadiness 
of  position. 

61.  Being  in  march,   at  the  command :   1.   Route  order,  2. 
MARCH;  or  1.  At  ease,  2.  MARCH,  the  men  keep  their  places 
in  ranks,  but  are  not  required  to  keep  the  step ;  at  route  order, 
they  are  not  required  to  preserve  silence.     If  halted   from 
route  order,  the  men  stand  at  rest;  if  halted  from  at  ease,  they 
remain  at  ease. 

Marching  at  route  order  or  at  ease,  rifles  are  carried  at  will, 
the  muzzles  elevated. 

62.  To  resume  the  attention :  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 

If  at  a  halt,  the  men  take  the  position  of  the  trooper,  dis- 
mounted (par.  59).  If  marching,  the  cadenced  step  in  quick 
time  is  resumed,  and  rifles,  if  carried,  are  brought  to  the  right 
shoulder. 

63.  To  dismiss  the  squad :  DISMISSED. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


61 


EYES   RIGHT  OR  LEFT. 

64.  1.  Eyes,  2.  RIGHT,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  right,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  oblique, 
eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  eyes  of  the  man  in,  or  supposed  to  be 
in,  the  same  rank.  At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  and 
eyes  to  the  front. 

FACINGS. 

65.  To  the  flank :  1.  Right,  2.  FACE. 

Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right  toe ;  face  to  the  right, 
turning  on  the  right  heel,  assisted  by  a  slight  pressure  on  the 
ball  of  the  left  foot;  place  the  left  foot  by  the 
side  of  the  right.  Left  face  is  executed  on  the 
left  heel  in  the  corresponding  manner. 

66.  To  the  rear :  1.  About,  2.  FACE. 

Carry  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  about  a  half 
foot  length  to  the  rear  and  slightly  to  the  left 
of  the  left  heel  without  changing  the  position 
of  the  left  foot ;  face  to  the  rear,  turning  to  the 
right  on  the  left  heel  and  right  toe ;  place  the 
right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

67.  1.  Hand,  2.  SALUTE. 

Raise  the  right  hand  smartly  till  the  tip  of 
the  forefinger  touches  the  low^r  part  of  the 
headdress  above  the  right  eye,  thumb  and 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  palm  to  the  left,  FlGL  -^  par 
forearm  inclined  at  about  45°,  hand  and  wrist 
straight ;  at  the  same  time  look  toward  the  person  saluted. 
(TWO),  Drop  the  arm  smartly  by  the  side.  The  salute  for 
officers  is  the  same  (Pig.  1). 

STEPS    AND    MARCHES. 

68.  All  steps  and  marchings  executed  from  a  halt,  except 
right  step,  begin  with  the  left  foot. 

69.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  30  inches, 
measured  from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of 
120  steps  per  minute. 


62          MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time  is  36  inches ;  the 
cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  180  steps  per  minute. 

The  instructor,  when  necessary,  indicates  the  cadence  of  the 
step  by  calling  one,  two,  three,  four,  or  left,  right,  the  instant 
the  left  and  right  foot,  respectively,  should  be  planted. 

70.  All  steps  and  marchings  and  movements  involving  march 
are  executed  in  quick  time  unless  the  squad  be  marching  in 
double  time,  or  double  time  be  added  to  the  command ;  in  the 
latter  case  double  time  is  added  to  the  preparatory  command. 

Example :  1.  Forward,  doutle  time,  2.  MARCH. 

71.  It  should  be  explained  to  the  recruits  that  in  collective 
drills  and  exercises  one  of  the  troopers,   termed  the  guide, 
habitually  has  to  follow  a  leader  or  direct  himself  upon  some 
designated  objective,  the  other  troopers  regulating  their  march 
so  as,  in  line,  to  march  abreast  of  the  guide,  maintaining  their 
approximate  intervals.     The  necessity,  in  this  connection,  for 
learning  to  inarch  steadily  in  ti  given  direction  without  waver- 
ing from  side  to  side  should  further  be  pointed  out.     Each 
recruit  should  then  be  practiced  individually  in  marching  upon 
a  designated  objective,  selecting  for  that  purpose  two  points 
of  direction  on  the  straight  line  that  passes  through  the  trooper 
and  the  objective  and  keeping  constantly  in  the  prolongation 
of  that   line.     When   the   objective   is    sufficiently   distinct   it 
should  be  taken  as  one  of  the  points  of  direction  and  another 
point  in  line  with  the  trooper  and  the  objective,  and  either 
nearer  or  more  distant  than  the  latter  bo  selected  as  a  second 
point  to  fix  the  direction  of  march. 

OTIC K  TIME  AND  DOUBLE  TIME. 

72.  Being  at   a   halt,   to  march  forward  in  quick  time:  1. 
Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  shift  the  weight  of  the  body  to 
the  right  leg,  left  knee  straight. 

At  the  command  march,  move  the  left  foot  smartly  straight 
forward  30  inches  from  the  right,  sole  near  the  ground,  and 
plant  it  without  shock;  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the 
right  foot  and  plant  it  as  above;  continue  the  march.  The 
arms  swing  naturally. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          63 

73.  Being  at  a  halt,  or  in  march  in  quick  time,  to  march 
forward  in  double  time:  1.  Forward,  double  time,  2.  MARCH. 

If  at  a  halt,  at  the  first  command  shift  the  weight  of  the 
body  to  the  right  leg.  At  the  command  inarch,  raise  the 
forearms,  lingers  closed,  to  a  horizontal  position  along  the 
waist  line,  take  up  an  easy  run  with  the  step  and  cadence 
of  double  time,  allowing  a  natural  swinging  motion  to  the 
arms. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command  MARCH,  given 
as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground,  take  one  step  in  quick  time 
and  then  step  off  in  double  time. 

74.  To  resume  the  quick  time:  1.  Quick  time,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  command   march,  given  as  either   foot  strikes  the 

ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot  in  double  time; 
resume  the  quick  time,  dropping  the  hands  by  the  sides. 

TO  MARK  TIME. 

75.  Being  in  march :  1.  Mark  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  other  foot ;  bring  up  the  foot 
in  rear  and  continue  the  cadence  by  alternately  raising  each 
foot  about  2  inches  and  planting  it  on  line  with  the  other. 

Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command  march,  raise  and  plant  the 
feet  as  described  above. 

THE   HALF   STEP. 

76.  1.  Half  step,  2.  MARCH. 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  in  quick  time,  18  inches  in  double 
time. 

77.  Forward,  half  step,  halt,  and  mark  time  may  be  executed 
one  from  the  other  in  quick  or  double  time. 

To  resume  the  full  step  from  half  step  or  mark  time :  1.  For- 
ward, 2.  MARCH. 

SIDE    STEP. 

78.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1.  Right  (left)  step,  2. 
MARCH. 


64          MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Carry  and  plant  the  right  foot  15  inches  to  the  right ;  bring 
the  left  foot  beside  it  and  continue  the  movement  in  the 
cadence  of  quick  time. 

The  side  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not 
executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  side  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
other  command. 

BACK  STEP. 

79.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH. 
Take  steps  of  15  inches  straight  to  the  rear. 

The  back  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not 
executed  in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  back  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
other  command. 

TO  HALT. 

80.  To  stop  the  inarch  in  quick  or  double  time :  1.  Squad. 
2.  HALT. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
plant  the  other  foot  as  in  marching;  raise  and  phic?  the  rear 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  other.  If  in  double  time,  drop  the 
hands  by  the  sides. 

TO  MARCH  BY  THE  FLANK. 

81.  Being  in  march:  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  command  inarch,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 

ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  then  face  to  the  right 
in  marching,  and  step  off  in  the  new  direction  with  the  right 
foot. 

This  movement  is  not  executed  by  signal  except  in  foragers. 

TO  MARCH  TO  THE  REAR. 

82.  Being  in  march :  1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  turn  to  the  right-about: 
on  the  balls  of  both  feet,  and  immediately  step  off  with  the 
left  foot. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          65 

If  marching  in. double  time,  turn  to  the  right-about,  taking 
four  steps  in  place,  keeping  the  cadence,  and  then  step  off  with 
the  left  foot 

This  movement  is  not  executed  by  signal  except  in  foragers. 

CHANGE  STEP. 

83.  Being  in  march :  1.  Change  step,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  plant  the  toe  of  the 
right  foot  near  the  heel  of  the  left,  and  step  off  with  tlie  left 
foot. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed,  the  com- 
mand MARCH  being  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the  ground. 

TO     COUNT     tfOUfiS. 

84.  Being  in  line,  at  the  command,  COUNT  FOURS,  all  the 
troopers  in  the  rank  except  the  right  trooper  execute  eyes  right 
and,   beginning  on   the  right,   count  successively  1,  -2,   3,  4. 
Each  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  as  he  counts. 

Fours  may  be  counted  at  the  halt,  or  marching,  mounted  or 
dismounted,  in  line  or  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers.  In 
counting  fours  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers  the  elements 
count  off  successively  from  front  to  rear  in  the  column  and 
from  right  to  left  in  each  two.  Eyes  right  is  not  executed 
when  counting  fours  from  column  of  twos  or  troopers. 

TO  TAKE  INTERVALS   AND  DISTANCES. 

85.  Being  in  l*ue  at  a  halt:  l;  Take  intervals,  to  the  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  command  march,  all  face  to  the  right  and  the  leading 
trooper  steps  off;  the  other  men  step  off  in  succession,  each 
following  the  preceding  trooper  at  four  paces. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  when  all  have  their  intervals, 
all  halt:  and  face  to  the  front. 


66          MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

86.  Being  at  intervals,  to  assemble  the  squad :  1.  Assemble  to 
the  right  (left),  2.  MARCH.     The  trooper  on  the  right  stands 
fast.     The  other  troopers  face  to  the  right,  close  by  the  shortest 
line  and  face  to  the  front. 

87.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt  and  fours  having  been  counted: 

1.  Take  distance,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  command  inarch,  No.  1  moves  straight  to  the  front; 
Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  in  the  order  named,  move  straight  to  the  front, 
each  stepping  off  so  as  to  follow  the  preceding  man  at  4  paces. 
The  command  halt  is  given  when  all  have  their  distances. 

If  there  be  more  than  one  No.  1,  all  the  Nos.  1  move  for- 
ward together,  guiding  on  the  right  trooper.  The  same  prin- 
ciple applies  to  the  other  numbers. 

88.  The  normal  interval  and  distance  of  4  paces  indicated, 
respectively,  in  pars.  34  and  36,  may  be  increased  or  diminished 
by  adding  to  the  corresponding  preparatory  command  the  in- 
dication of  the  interval  or  distance  desired ;  thus :  1.   Take 
interval  to  the  right  at  1  pace,  2.  MARCH,  etc. ;  1.  Take  dis- 
tance, at  2  paces,  2.  MARCH,  etc. 

89.  Being  at  distances,  to  assemble  the  squad:  1.  Assemble, 

2.  MARCH. 

No.  1  of  the  front  rank  stands  fast ;  the  other  numbers  move 
forward  to  their  proper  places  in  line. 

INDIVIDUAL  INSTRUCTION  WITH  ARMS. 

MANUAL  OF  THE  RIFLE. 

90.  When  the  recruit  has  made  fair  progress  in  the  instruc- 
tion without  arms,  including  that  required  by  par.  53,  he  is 
taught  the  manual  of  arms.     Instruction  without  arms  and 
that  with  arms  alternate. 

91.  The  following  rules  govern  the  carrying  of  the  rifle: 
First.  The  rifle  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in  either  the 

chamber  or  the  magazine  except  when  specifically  ordered. 
When  so  loaded,  or  supposed  to  be  loaded,  it  is  habitually 
carried  locked ;  that  is,  with  the  safety  lock  turned  to  the 
"  safe."  At  all  other  times  it  is  carried  unlocked,  with  the 
trigger  pulled. 


MANTTAI  FOE,  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


67 


Second.  Whenever  troops  are  formed  under  arms,  rifles  are 
immediately  inspected  at  the  commands:  1.  Inspection,  2. 
ARMS;  3.  Order  (right  shoulder,  port),  4.  ARMS. 

A  similar  inspection  is  made  immediately  before  dismissal. 

If  cartridges  arc  found  in  the  chamber  or  magazine  they  are 
removed  and  placed  in  the  belt. 

Third.  Tho  cut-off  is  kept  turned  "off"  except  when  car- 
tridges are  actually  used. 

Fourth.  Fall  in  is  executed  with  the  rifle  at  the  order  arms. 
Fall  out,  rest,  and  at  ease  are  executed  as  without  arms.  On 
resumiDg  attention  the  position  of  order  arms  is  taken. 

Fifth.  If  at  the  order,  unless  otherwise  prescribed,  the  rifle 
is  brought  to  the  right  shoulder' at  the  command  march,  the 
three  motions  corresponding  with  the  lirst  thive  slops.  Move- 
ments may  be  executed  at  the  trail  by  prefacing  the  pre- 
paratory command  with  the  words  at  trial,  as.  1.  At  trail,  for- 
ward, -.  MARCH;  the  trail  is  taken  at  the  command  march. 

When  the  facings,  alignments,  open  and  close 
ranks,  taking  interval,  and  assemblings  are  ex- 
ecuted from  the  order,  raise  the  rifle  to  the  trail 
while  m  motion  and  resume  the  order  on  halting. 

Sixth.  The  rifle  is  brought  to  the  order  on  halt- 
ing. The  execution  of  the  order  begins  when  the 
halt  is  completed. 

Seventh.  A  disengaged  hand  in  double  time  is 
held  as  when  without  arms. 

92.  The  following  rules  govern  the  execution 
of  the  manual  of  arms : 

First.  In  all  positions  of  the  left;  hand  at  the 
balance  (center  of  gravity)  the  thumb  clasps 
the  rifle;  the  sling  is  included  in  the  grasp  of 
the  hand.  (Figs.  6,  12.)  PIG.  2,  par.  92. 

Second.  In  all  positions  of  the   rifle  "  diagon- 
ally across  the  body  "  the  position  of  the  rifle,  left  arm,  and 
hand  are  the  same  as  in  port  arms.     (Pig.  6.) 

Third.  In  resuming  the  order  from  any  position  in  the 
manual,  the  motion  next  to  the  last  concludes  with  the  butt  of 
the  rifle  about  3  inches  from  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear, 
the  left  hand  above  and  near  the  right,  steadying  the  rifle, 


68 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS, 


fingers  extended,  and  joined,  forearm  and  wrist  straight  and 
inclining  downward,  all  fingers  of  the  right  hand  grasping  the 
rifle.  To  complete  the  order,  lower  the  rifle  gently  to  the 
ground  with  the  right  hand,  drop  the  left  quickly  by  the  side, 
and  take  the  position  of  order  arms.  (Fig.  2.) 

Allowing  the  rifle  to  drop  through  the  right  hand  to  the 
ground,  or  other  similar  abuse  of  the  arm  to  produce  effect  in 
executing  the  manual,  is  prohibited. 

Fourth.  The  cadence  of  the  motions  is  that  of  quick  time; 
the  recruits  are  first  required  to  give  their  whole  attention  to 
the  details  of  the  motions,  the  cadence  being  gradually  ac- 
quired as  they  become  accustomed  to  handling  their  rifles. 

Fifth.  The  manual  is  taught  at  a  halt  and  the  movements 
are  for  the 'purpose  of  instruction,  divided  into  motions  and 
executed  in  detail ;  in  this  case  the 
command  of  execution  determines 
the  prompt  execution  of  the  first 
motion,   and   the   commands,   two, 
three,  four,  that  of  the  other  mo- 
tions. 

To  execute  the  movements  in 
detail,  the  instructor  first  cau- 
tions :  By  the  numbers ;  all  move- 
ment divided  into  motions  are  then 
executed  as  above  explained  until 
he  cautions  :  Without  the  numbers; 
or  commands  movements  other 
than  those  in  the  manual  of  arms. 
Sixth.  Whenever  circumstances 


FIG.  3,  par.  93. 


FIG.  4,  par.  93. 


require,   the   regular   positions   of 
the  manual  of  arms  and  the  firings  may  be  ordered  without 
regard  to  the  previous  position  of  the  rifle. 

Under  exceptional  conditions  of  weather  or  fatigue  the  rifle 
may  be  carried  in  any  manner  directed. 

93.  Position  of  order  arms,  standing:  The  butt  rests  evenly 
on  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear,  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with 
toe  of,  and  touching,  the  right  shoe,  arms  and  hands  hanging 
naturally,  right  hand  holding  the  rifle  between  the  thumb  and 
fingers. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


FlG 


94,  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  carry  the  rifle  in  front  of  the  center  of 

the  body,  barrel  to  the  rear  and  vertical,  grasp  it  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  balance,  forearm 
horizontal  and  resting  against 
the  body.  (TWO)  Grasp  the 
small  of  the  stock-  With  the 
right  hand.  (Fig.  5.) 

95.  Being  at  order  arms:  1. 
Port,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and 
throw  the  rifle  diagonally  across 
the  body,  grasp  it  smartly  with 
both  hands  ;  the  right,  palm 
down,  at  the  small  of  the 
stock  ;  the  left,  palm  up,  at  the 
balance;  barrel  up,  sloping  to 
the  left  and  crossing  opposite 

FIG.  5,^794.    the  junction  of  the  neck  with 
the  lett  shoulder  ;  right  forearm 

horizontal  ;  left  forearm  resting  against  the  body  ;  the  rifle  in 

Ji  vertical  plane  parallel  to  the  front.     (Fig.  6.) 

96.  Being  at  present  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  rifle  diagonally  across  the  body  and  take  the  posi- 
tion of  port  arms. 

97.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  rifle  to  a  vertical  position  in  front  of  the  center  of 
the  body  and  take  the  position  of  present  arms. 

98.  Being  at  present  or  port  arms  :  1  .  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Let  go  with  the  right  hand  ;  lower  and  carry  the  rifle  to  the 
right  with  the  left  hand  ;  regrasp  it  with  the  right  hand  just 
above  the  lower  band  ;  let  go  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the 
next  to  the  last  position  in  coming  to  the  order.  (TWO)  Com- 
plete the  order. 

99.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  rifle  diagonally 
across  the  body  ;  carry  the  right  hand  quickly  to  the  butt, 
embracing  it,  the  heel  between  the  first  two  fingers.  (TWO) 
Without  changing  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  place  the  rifle 


70          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

on  the  right  shoulder,  barrel  up  and  inclined  at  an  angle  of 
about  45°  from  the  horizontal,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow 
of  the  shoulder,  right  elbow  near  the  side,  the 
rifle  in  a  vertical  plane  perpendicular  to  the 
front;  carry  the  left  hand,  thumb,  and  fingers 
extended  and  joined,  to  the  small  of  the  stock, 
tip  of  the  forefinger  touching  the  cocking  piece, 
wrist  straight  and  elbow  down.  (THREE)  Drop 
the  left  hand  by  the  side.  (Fig.  7.) 

100.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:   1.  Order, 
2.  ARMS. 

Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the 
rifle  diagonally  across  the  body,  the  right  hand 
retaining  the  grasp  of  the  butt.  (TWO), 
(THREE)  Execute  order  arms  as  described 
from  port  arms. 

101.  Being  at. port  arms:    1.  Right  shoulder, 
2.  ARMS. 


FIG.  7,  par.  99. 


Change  the  right  hand  to  the  butt.  (TWO),  (THREE)  As  in 
right  shoulder  arms  from  order  arms. 

102.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 
Press  the  butt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  rifle  diagonally 

across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  its  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(TWO)  Change  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

103.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.     (THREE)  Execute  present  arms. 

104.  Being  at  present  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.     (TWO),   (THREE),   (FOUR).     Execute 

right  shoulder  arms  as  from  port  arms. 

105.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Left  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  rifle  with  the  right  hand  and  place  it  on  the  left 
shoulder,  barrel  up,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoul- 
der ;  at  the  same  time  grasp  the  butt  with  the  left  hand,  heel 
between  first  and  second  fingers,  thumb  and  fingers  closed  on 
the  stock.  (TWO)  Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

Left  shoulder  arms  may  be  ordered  directly  from  the  order, 
right  shoulder,  or  present,  or  the  reverse.  At  the  command 
Arms  execute  port  arms  and  continue  in  cadence  to  the  posi- 
tion ordered. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


71 


106.  Being  at  left  shoulder  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Grasp  the  rifle  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 
(TWO)  Carry  the  rifle  to  the  right  with  the  right  hand,  re« 
grasp  it  with  the  left  and  take  the  position 
of  port  arms. 

107.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 
Carry  the  right  foot  0  inches  straight  to  the 

rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent ;  carry  the  muzzle 
in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  barrel  to 
the  left;  grasp  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand 
just  below  the  slacking  swivel 
and  with  the  right;  hand  below 
tind  against  the  lofl.  (Fig.  8.) 
Being  at  parade  rest:  1. 
Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 

Resume  the  order,  the  left 
hand  quitting  the  rifle  oppo- 
site the  right  hip. 

108.  Being  at  order  arms.  1, 
Trail,  2.  ARMS. 

Raise  the  rifle,  right  arm 
slightly  bent,  and  incline  the 
muzzle  forward  so  that  the 
barrel  makes  an  angle  of 
about  30°  with  the  vertical. 
(Fig.  9.) 

When  it  can  be  done  without  danger  or  in- 
convenience to  others,  the  rifle  may  be 
grasped  at  the  balance  and  muzzle  lowered 
until  the  rifle  is  horizontal ;  a  similar  position 
in  the  left  hand  may  be  used. 

109.  Being  at  trail  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 
Lower  the  rifle  with  the  right  hand  and 
resume  the  order. 


FIG.  8,  par.  107. 


FIG.  9,  par.  108, 


FIG.  10,  par.  110. 


RIFLE  SALUTE. 


110.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 
Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  fore- 
arm horizontal,  palm  of  the  hand  down,  thumb  and  fingers 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


extended  and  joined,  forefinger  touching  end  of  cocking  piece ; 
look  toward  the  person  saluted.    (TWO)  Drop  left  hand  by  the 
side;  turn  head  and  eyes  to  the  front.     (Fig.  10.) 
With  the  rifle  on  the  left 

shoulder,   the  salute  is  ren- 
dered    in     a     corresponding 

manner     with     the     right 

hand. 

111.  Being  at  order  or  trail 
•    arms:   1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 
Carry     the    left    hand 

smartly    to    the    right    side, 

palm     of     the     hand    down, 

thumb  and  fingers  extended 

and  joined,  forefinger  against 

the    rifle    near    the    muzzle ; 

look    toward    the    person 
FIG.  11,  par.  111.    saluted.       (TWO)     Drop    the 

left  hand  by  the  side ;  turn    FIG.  12,  par.  112. 
the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front.     (Fig.  11.) 

THE   INSPECTION. 

112.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  second  command,  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 
(TWO)  Seize  the  bolt  handle  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
of  the  right  hand,  turn  the  handle  up,  draw  the  bolt  back  and 
glance  at  the  chamber.  ^Having  found  the  chamber  empty,  or 
having  emptied  it,  raise  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 
(Fig.  12.) 

113.  Being   at   inspection   arms:    1.    Order    (right   shoulder, 
port),  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  preparatory  command,  push  the  bolt  forward,  turn 
the  handle  down,  pull  the  trigger,  and  resume  port  arms.  At 
the  command  arms  complete  the  movement  ordered. 

TO  DISMISS. 

114.  Being  at  halt:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Port,  4.  ARMS, 
5,  DISMISSED. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          78 

TO  STACK  AND  TAKE  ABMS. 

115.  Three  rifles  only  are  used  to  make  a  stack;  rifles  not 
so  used  are,  in  this  connection,  termed  loose  rifles. 

Being  in  line  at  a  halt:   STACK  ARMS. 

At  the  command  stack,  No.  3  steps  back  and  covers  No.  3, 
No.  2  raises  his  rifle  with  the  right  hand,  grasps  it  with  the 
left  at  the  upper  band  and  rests  the  butt  between  his  feet,  bar- 
rel to  the  front,  muzzle  inclined  slightly  to  the  front  and  oppo- 
site the  center  of  the  interval  on  his  right,  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  raising  the  stacking  swivel;  No.  3  then  passes  his 
rifle,  barrel  to  the  rear,  to  No.  2,  who  grasps  it  between  the 
bands  with  his  right  hand  and  throws  the  butt  about  2  feet  in 
advance  of  that  of  his  own  rifle  and  opposite  the  right  of  the 
interval,  the  right  hand  slipping  to  the  upper  band,  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  raising  the  stacking  swivel,  which  he  engages 
with  that  of  his  own  rifle ;  No.  1  raises  his  rifle  with  the  right 
hand,  carries  it  well  forward,  barrel  to  the  front,  the  left  hand 
guiding  the  stacking  swivel,  engages  the  lower  hook  of  the  swivel 
of  his  own  rifle  with  the  free  hook  of  that  of  No.  3 ;  he  then 
turns  the  barrel  outward  into  the  angle  formed  by  the  other 
two  rifles  and  lowers  the  butt  to  the  ground  to  the  right  of 
and  against  the  toe  of  his  right  shoe.  No.  2  lays  loose  rifles 
on  the  stack;  No.  3  resumes  his  place  in  line.  When  each 
man  has  finished  handling  rifles,  he  takes  the  position  of 
attention.  The  instructor  may  then  rest  or  dismiss  the  squad, 
leaving  the  arms  stacked. 

On  re-forming,  the  men  take  their  places  in  rear  of  the 
stacks. 

116.  Being  in  line,  behind  the  stacks:   TAKE  ARMS. 

No.  3  steps  back  and  covers  No.  2;  No.  2  returns  the  loose 
rifles,  then  grasps  his  own  rifle  with  the  left  hand,  the  rifle 
of  No.  3  with  his  right  hand,  grasping  both  between  the  bands ; 
No.  1  grasps  his  rifle  in  the  same  way  with  the  right  hand. 
No.  1  disengages  his  rifle  by  raising  the  butt  from  the  ground 
and  then  turning  the  rifle  to  the  right,  detaches  it  from  the 
stack;  No.  2  disengages  and  detaches  his  rifle  by  turning  it 
to  the  left,  and  then  passes  the  rifle  of  No.  3  to  him;  No.  3 
resumes  his  place  in  line ;  all  resume  the  order. 


74          MAOTAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OPSICXBB, 


KNEELING  AND  LYING  DOWN. 

117.  If  standing:  KNEEL. 

Half  face  to  the  right :  carry  the  right  toe  about  1  foot  to 
the  left  rear  of  the  left  heel ;  kneel  on  the  right  knee,  sitting 
as  nearly  as  possible  on  the  right  heel ;  left 
forearm  across  left  thigh;  rifle  remains  in 
position  of  order  arms,  right  hand  grasping 
it  above  the  lower  band.  This  is  the  position 
of  order  arms,  kneeling.  (Fig.  13.) 

118.  If 
standing  or 
k  n  e  e  li  n  g  : 
LIE  DOWN. 

Kneel,  but 
with  right 


FIG.  13,  par.  117. 


FIG.  14,  par.  118. 


knee   against 

left  heel ;  carry  back  the  left  foot  and  lie  flat  on  the  belly, 
inclining  body  about  35°  to  the  right;  rifle  horizontal,  barrel 
up.  muzzle  off  the  ground  and  pointed  to  the  front ;  elbows  on 
the  ground ;  left  hand  at  the  balance,  right  hand  grasping  the 
small  of  the  stock  opposite  the  neck.  This  is  the  position  of 
order  arms,  lying  down.  (Fig.  14.) 

119.  If  kneeling  or  lying  down :  RISE. 

If  kneeling,  stand  up.  faced  to  the  front,  on  the  ground 
marked  by  the  left  heel. 

If  lying  down,  raise  the  body  on  both  knees;  st#.nd  up.  faced 
to  the  front,  on  the  ground  marked  by  the  knees. 

120.  If  lying  down  :  KNEEL. 

Kaise  the  body  on  both  knees,  take  the  position  of  kneel. 
When  deployed  a.s  skirmishers,  a   sitting  position   may  be- 
taken instead  of  the  position  kneeling1. 

II,  INSTRUCTION  WITH  THE  RIFLE. 

23.  The  commands  for  and  the  execution  of  the  foot  move- 
ments are  the  same  a.s  already  given  for  movements  without 
the  rifle. 

24.  The  men  having  taken  intervals  or  distances,   the  in- 
structor commands : 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


75 


1.  Bayonet  exercise,  2.  GUARD. 

At  the  second  command  take  the  position  of  guard  (see  par. 
15)  ;  at  the  same  time 
throw  the  rifle  smartly 
to  the  front,  grasp  the 
rifle  with  the  left  hand 
just  below  the  lower 
band,  fingers  between 
the  stock  and  gun 
sling,  barrel  turned 
slightly  to  the  left,  the 
right  hand  grasping  the 
small  of  the  stock 
about  6  inches  in  front 
of  the  right  hip,  elbows 
free  from  the  body, 
bayonet  point  at  the 
height  of  the  chin.  L/ 

25.  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS.      r^ 
Bring  the  right  foot 

up  to  the  left  and  the 
rifle  to  the  position  of 
order  arms,  at  the 
same  time  resuming 
the  position  of  atten- 
tion. 

26.  During   the   pre- 
liminary      instruction, 
attacks    and    defenses 


FIG.   15,  par.  24. 


will  be  executed  from  guard  until  proficiency  is  attained,  after 
which  they  may  be  executed  from  any  position  in  which  the 
rifle  is  held. 

ATTACKS. 

27.  1.  THRUST, 

Thrust  the  rifle  quickly  forward  to  the  full  length  of  the  left 
arm,  turning  the  barrel  to  the  left,  and  direct  the  point  of  the 
bayonet  at  the  point  to  be  attacked,  but  covering  the  right 
forearm.  At  the  same  time  straighten  the  right  leg  vigor- 
ously and  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  forward  and  on  the 


76          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


left  leg,   the  ball  of  the  right  foot  always  on  the  ground. 
Guard  is  resumed  immediately  without  command. 
The    force    of    the    thrust    is    delivered    principally    with 


the  right  arm,  the  left 
being  used  to  direct  the 
bayonet.  The  points  at 
which  the  attack  should  be 
directed  are,  in  .order  of 
theii  importance,  stomach, 
chest,  head,  neck,  and 
limbs. 

28.  1.  LUNGE. 

Executed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  thrust,  except  that  the 
left  foot  is  carried  forward  about  twice  its  length.    The  left 


FIG.   17,  par.  20. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


77 


sumed  by  advancing  the  right  foot  if  for  any  reason  it  is  de- 
heel  must  always  be  in  rear  of  the  left  knee.  Guard  is  re- 
sumed immediately  without  command.  Guard  may  also  be  re- 


FlG.   18,  par.  28. 


sired  to  hold  the  ground  gained  in  lunging.  In  the  latter  case 
the  preparatory  command  forward  will  be  given.  Each  method 
should  be  practiced. 

29.  1.  Butt,  2.  STRIKE. 

Straighten  right  arm  and  right  leg  vigorously  and  swing 
butt  of  rifle  against  point  of  attack,  pivoting  the  rifle  in  the 
left  hand  at  about  the  height  of  the  left  shoulder,  allowing  the 
bayonet  to  pass  to  the  rear  on  the  left  side  of  the  head.  Guard 
is  resumed  without  command. 

The  points  of  attack  in  their  order  of  importance  are  head, 
neck,  stomach,  and  crotch. 

30.  1.  Cut,  2.  DOWN. 

Execute  a  quick  downward  stroke,  edge  of  bayonet  directed 
at  point  of  attack.  Guard  is  resumed  without  command. 


Par.  1 9. 


31.  I.  Cut,  2.  RIGHT 
(LEFT). 

With  a  quick  exten- 
sion of  the  arms  exe- 
cute a  cut  to  the  right, 
(left),  directing  the 
edge  toward  the  point 
attacked.  Guard  is  re- 
sumod  without  com- 
mand. 

The    cuts    are    espe-  / 

pecially   useful   against  * 

The  head,  neck,  and 
hands  of  an  enemy.  In 
executing  left,  cut  it 
^hould  be  remembered 
i  luii  the  false,  or  back. 
edge  is  only  5.0  inches 
long.  The  cuts  can  be 
executed  in  continua- 
tion of  strokes,  thrusts, 
lunges,  and  parries. 

32.  To   direct  an   at- 
tack to  the  right,  lefi. 
or  rear  the  soldier  will 
change  front  as  quickly 
as  possible  in  the  most 
convenient  manner,  for 
example:     1.     To     the 
right    rear,    2.    Cut,    3. 
DOWN;  1.  To  the  right, 
2.    LUNGE;    1.    To    the 
left,  2.  THRUST,  etc. 

Whenever  possible 
the  impetus  gained  by 
the  turning  movement 
of  the  body  should  be 
thrown  into  the  attack. 
In  general  this  will  be 
best  accomplished  by 
turning  on  the  ball  of 
the  right  foot.  par.  20. 

(78) 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          79 

These  movements  constitute  a  change  of  front  in  which  the 
position  of  guard  is  resumed  at  the  completion  of  the  move- 
ment. 

33.  Good  judgment  of  distance  is  essential.     Accuracy  in 
thrusting  and  lunging  is  best   attained  by  practicing  these 
attacks  against  rings  or  other  convenient  openings,  about  3 
inches  in  diameter,  suitably  suspended  at  desired  heights. 

34.  The  thrust  and  lunges  at  rings  should  first  be  prac- 
ticed by  endeavoring  to  hit  the  opening  looked  at.    This  should 
be  followed  by  directing  the  attack  against  one  opening  while 
looking  at  another. 

35.  The  soldier  should  also  experience  the  effect  of  actual 
resistance  offered  to  the  bayonet  and  the  butt  of  the  rifle  in 
attacks.    This  will  be  taught  by  practicing  attacks  against  a 
dummy. 

36.  Dummies  should  be  constructed  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
permit  the  execution  of  attacks  without  injury  to  the  point  or 
edge  of  the  bayonet  or  to  the  barrel  or  stock  of  the  rifle.    A 
suitable  dummy  can  be  made  from  pieces  of  rope  about  5  feet 
in  length  plaited  closely  together  into  a  cable  between  6  and  12 
laches  in  diameter.     Old  rope  is  preferable.     Bags  weighted 
and  stuffed  with  hay,  straw,  shavings,  v  etc.,  are  also  suitable. 

DEFENSES. 

37.  In  the  preliminary  drills  in  the  defenses  the  position  of 
giard  is  resumed,  by  command,  after  each  parry.    When  the 
iren  have  become  proficient  the  instructor  will  cause  them 
co  resume  the  position  of  guard  instantly  without  command 
after  the  execution  of  each  parry. 

38.  1.  Parry,  2.  RIGHT. 

Keeping  the  right  hand  in  the  guard  position,  move  the  rifle 
sharply  to  the  right  with  the  left  arm,  so  that  the  bayonet 
point  is  about  6  inches  to  the  right. 

39.  1   Parry,  2.  LEFT. 

Move  the  rifle  sharply  to  the  left  front  with  both  hands  so 
as  to  cover  the  point  attacked. 

40.  1.  Parry,  2.  HIGH. 

Raise  the  rifle  with  both  hands  high  enough  to  clear  the 
line  of  vision,  barrel  downward,  point  of  the  bayonet  to  the 
left  front 


80        MANTTAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


When  necessary  to  raise  the  rifle  well  above  the  head,  it 
may  be  supported  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the 
left  hand.  This  position  will  be  necessary  against  attacks 

from  •  higher  eleva- 
tions, such  as  men 
mounted  or  on  top  ol 
parapets. 

41.  1.  Low  parry,  2.  RIGHT   (LEFT). 
Garry  the  point  of  the  bayonet  down 

until  it  is  at  the  height  of  the  knee, 
moving  the  point  of  the  bayonet  suffi- 
ciently to  the  right  (left),  to  keep  the 
opponent's  attacks  clear  of  the  point 
threatened. 

These  parries  are  rarely  used,  as  an 
attack  below  the  waist  leaves  the  head 
and  body  exposed. 

42.  Parries  must  not  be  too  wide  oc 
sweeping,  but  sharp,  short  motions,  fin- 
ished with  a  jerk  or  quick  catch.    Tho 
hands   should,   as   far   as  possible,   ):e 

/kept  in  the  line  of  attack.  Parries 
against  butt  strike  are  made  by  quickly 
moving  the  guard  so  as  to  cover  the 
point  attacked. 

43.  To  provide  against  attack  from 
the  right,  left,  or  rear  the  soldier  will 
change  front  as  quickly  as  possible  in 
the  most  convenient  manner;   for  ex- 
ample :  1.  To  the  left  rear,  2.  Parry,  c!. 
HIGH;    1.    To   the    right,   2.    Parry.    M. 
RIGHT,  etc. 

These  movements  constitute  a  chansp 
of  front  in  which  the  position  of  guard  is  resumed  at  the  com- 
pletion of  the  movement. 

In  changing  front  for  the  purpose  of  attack  or  defense,  ii 
there  is  danger  of  wounding  a  comrade,  the  rifle  should  firs: 
be  brought  to  a  vertical  position. 


FIG.  21,  par.  40. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 
Ill,  INSTRUCTION  WITHOUT  THE  BAYONET, 


81 


44.  1.  Club  rifle,  2.  SWING. 

Being  at  order  arms,  at  the  preparatory  command  quickly 
raise  and  turn  the  rifle,  regrasping  it  with  both  hands  between 
the  rear  sight  and  muzzle,  barrel  down,  thumbs  around  the  stock 


FIG.  22,  par.  41. 


FIG.  23,  par.  41. 


:iud  toward  the  butt;  at  the  same  time  raise  the  rifle  above 
the  shoulder  farthest  from  the  opponent,  butt  elevated  and  to 
the  rear,  elbows  slightly  bent  and  knees  straight.  Each  indi- 
vidual takes  such  position  of  the  feet,,  shoulders,  and  hands 
as  best  accords  with  his  natural  dexterity.  SWING.  Tighten 


82 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


the  grasp  of  the  hands  and  swing  the  rifle  to  the  front  and 
downward,  directing  it  at  the  head  of  the  opponent,  and 
immediately  return  to  the  position  of  club  rifle  by  complet- 


FIG.  24,  par.  44. 


FIG.  25,  par.  44. 


iog  the  swing  of  the  rifle  downward  and  to  the  rear.  Repeat 
by  the  command,  SWING. 

The  rifle  should  be  swung  with  sufficient  force  to  break 
through  any  guard  or  parry  that  may  be  interposed. 

Being  at  club  rifle,  order  arms  is  resumed  by  command. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        83 

The  use  of  this  attack  against  dummies  or  in  fencing  is  pro- 
hibited. 

45.  The  position  of  club  rifle  may  be  taken  from  any  posi- 
tion of  the  rifle  prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Arms.    It  will  not 
be  taken  in  personal  combat  unless  the  emergency  is  such  as 
to  preclude  the  use  of  the  bayonet. 

IV,  COMBINED  MOVEMENTS. 

46.  The  purpose  of  combined  movements  is  to. develop  more 
vigorous  attacks  and  more  effective  defenses  than  are  obtained 
by  the  single  movements;  to  develop  skill  in  passing  from  at- 
tack to  defense  and  the  reverse.    Every  movement  to  the  front 
should  be  accompanied  by  an  attack,  which  is  increased  in 
effectiveness  by  the  forward  movement  of  the  body.     Every 
movement  to  the  rear  should  ordinarily  be  accompanied  by  a 
parry  and  should  always  be  followed  by  an  attack.    Movements 
TO  the  right  or  left  may  be  accompanied  by  attacks  or  defenses. 

47.  Not  more  than  three  movements  will  be  used  in  any 
combination.     The  instructor  should  first  indicate  the  num- 
ber of  movements  that  are  to  be  combined  as  two  movements 
or   three  movements.     The   execution   is   determined   by   one 
command  of  execution,  and  the  position  of  guard  is  taken 
upon  the  completion  of  the  last  movement  only. 

EXAMPLES. 

Front  pass  and  LUNGE. 

Right  step  and  THRUST. 

Left  step  and  low  parry  RIGHT. 

Rear  pass,  parry  left  and  LUNGE. 

Lunge  and  cut  RIGHT. 

Parry  right  and  parry  HIGH. 

Butt  strike  and  cut  DOWN. 

Thrust  and  parry  HIGH. 

Parry  high  and  LUNGE. 

Advance,  thrust  and  cut  RIGHT. 

Right  step,  parry  left  and  cut  DOWN. 

To  the  left,  butt  strike  and  cut  DOWN. 

To  the  right  rear,  cut  down  and  butt  STRIKE. 


84          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

48.  Attacks  against  dummies  will  be  practiced.     The  ap- 
proach will  be  made  against  the  dummies  both  in  quick  time 
and  double  time. 

V,  PRACTICAL  BAYONET   COMBAT. 

49.  The  principles  of  practical  bayonet  combat  should  be 
taught  as  far  as  possible  during  the  progress  of  instruction  In 
bayonet  exercises. 

50.  The  soldier  must  be  continually  impressed  with  the  ex- 
treme importance  of  the  offensive  due  to  its  moral  effect.  Should 
an  attack  fail,  it  should  be  followed  immediately  by  another 
attack  before  the  opponent  has  an  opportunity  to  assume  the 
offensive.    Keep  the  opponent  on  the  defensive.    If,  due  to  cir- 
cumstances, it  is  necessary  to  take  the  defensive,  constantly 
watch  for  an  opportunity  to  assume  the  offensive  and  take  im- 
mediate advantage  of  it. 

51.  Observe  the  ground  with  a  view  to  obtaining  the  best 
footing.    Time  for  this  will  generally  be  too  limited  to  permit 
more  than  a  single  hasty  glance. 

52.  In  personal  combat  watch  the  opponent's  eyes  if  they 
can  be  plainly  seen,  and  do  not  fix  the  eyes  on  his  weapon  nor 
upon  the  point  of  your  attack.    If  his  eyes  can  not  be  plainly 
seen,  as  in  night  attacks,  watch  the  movements  of  his  weapon 
and  of  his  body. 

53.  Keep  the  body  well  covered  and  deliver  attacks  vigor- 
ously.    The  point  of  the  bayonet  should  always  be  kept  as 
nearly  as  possible  in  the  line  of  attack.    The  less  the  rifle  Is 
moved  upAvard,  downward,  to  the  right,  or  to  the  left,  the 
better  prepared  the  soldier  is  for  attack  or  defense. 

54.  Constantly  watch  for  a  chance  to  attack  the  opponent's 
left  hand.     His  position  of  guard  will  not  differ  materially 
from  that  described  in  paragraph  24.     If  his  bayonet  is  with- 
out a  cutting  edge,  he  will  be  at  a  great  disadvantage. 

55.  The  butt  is  used  for  close  and  sudden  attacks.     It  is 
particularly  useful  in  riot  duty.     From  the  position  of  port 
arms  a  sentry  can  strike  a  severe  blow  with  the  butt  of  the 
rifle. 

56.  Against  a  man  on  foot,  armed  with  a  sword,  be  careful 
that  the  muzzle  of  the  rifle  is  not  grasped.     All  the  swords- 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        85 

man's  energies  will  be  directed  toward  getting  past  the  bayo- 
net Attack  him  with  short,  stabbing  thrusts  and  keep  hin? 
beyond  striking  distance  of  his  weapon. 

57.  The  adversary  may  attempt  a  greater  extension  in  the 
thrust  and  lunge  by  quitting  the  grasp  of  his  piece  with  the 
left  hand  and  advancing  the  right  as  far  as  possible.     When 
this  is  done,  a  sharp  parry  may  cause  him  to  lose  control  of 
his  rifle,  leaving  him  exposed  to  a  counter  attack,  which  should 
follow  promptly. 

58.  Against  odds  a  small  number  of  men  can  fight  to  best 
advantage  by  grouping  themselves  so  as  to  prevent  their  being 
attacked  from  behind. 

59.  In  fighting  a  mounted  man  armed  with  a  saber  every 
effort  must  be  made  to  get  on  his  near,  or  left,  side,  because 
here  his  reach  is  much  shorter  and  his  parries  much  weaker. 
If  not  possible  to  disable  such  an  enemy,  attack  his  horse  and 
then  renew  the  attack  on  the  horseman. 

60.  In  receiving  night  attacks  the  assailant's  movements  can 
be  best  observed  from  the  kneeling  or  prone  position,  as  his 
approach  generally  brings  him  against  the  sky  line.     When  he 
arrives  within  attacking  distance  rise  quickly  and  lunge  well 
forward  at  the  middle  of  his  body. 

I 

VI,  FENCING-  EXERCISES, 

61.  Fencing  exercises  in  two  lines  consist  of  combinations 
of  thrusts,  parries,  and  foot  movements  executed  at  command 
or  at  will,  the  opponent  replying  with  suitable  parries  and 
returns, 

62.  The  instructor  will  inspect  the  entire  fencing  equipment 
before  the  exercise  begins  and  assure  himself  that  everything 
is  in  such  condition  as  will  prevent  accidents. 

63.  The  men  equip  themselves  and  form  in  two  lines  at  the 
order,  facing  each  other,  with  intervals  of  about  4  paces  be- 
tween fiteiS  and  a  distance  of  about  2  paces  between  lines. 
One  line  is  designated  as  number  1;  the  other,  number  2. 
Also  as  attack  and  defense. 

64.  The  opponents  being  at  the  order  facing  each  other,  the 
instructor  commands :  SALUTE. 

Each  man,  with  eyes  on  his  opponent,  carries  the  left  hand 
smartly  to  the  right  side,  palm  of  the  hand  down,  thumb  and 


86          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

fingers  extended  and  joined,  forearm  horizontal,  forefinger 
touching  the  bayonet.  (Two.)  Drop  the  arm  smartly  by  the 
side. 

This  salute  is  the  fencing  salute. 

All  fencing  exercises  and  all  fencing  at  will  between  indi- 
viduals will  begin  and  terminate  with  the  formal  courtesy  of 
the  fencing  salute. 

65.  After   the   fencing   salute   has   been    rendered   the    in- 
structor commands:  1.  Fencing  exercise,  2.  GUARD. 

At  the  command  guard  each  man  comes  to  the  position  of 
guard,  heretofore  defined,  bayonets  crossed,  each  man's  bayo- 
net bearing  lightly  to  the  right  against  the  corresponding  por- 
tion of  the  opponent's  bayonet.  This  position  is  known  as  the 
engage  or  engage  right. 

66.  Being  at  the  engage  right:   ENGAGE  LEFT. 

The  attack  drops  the  point  of  his  bayonet  quickly  until  clear 
of  his  opponent's  rifle  and  describes  a  semicircle  with  it  up- 
ward and  to  the  right;  bayonets  are  crossed  similarly  as  in 
the  engaged  position,  each  man's  bayonet  bearing  lightly  to 
the  left  against  the  corresponding  portion  of  the  opponent's 
bayonet. 

67.  Being  at  engage  left:   ENGAGE  RIGHT. 

The  attack  quickly  drops  the  point  of  his  bayonet  until  clear' 
of  his  opponent's  rifle  and  describes  a  semicircle  with  it  up- 
ward and  to  the  left  and  engages. 

68.  Being  engaged:   ENGAGE  LEFT  AND  RIGHT. 

The  attack  engages  left  and  then  immediately  engages 
right. 

69.  Being  engaged  left:   ENGAGE  RIGHT  AND  LEFT. 

The  attack  engages  right  and  then  immediately  engages 
left. 

70.  1.  Number  one,  ENGAGE  RIGHT  (LEFT);  2.  Number 
two,  COUNTER. 

Number  one  executes  the  movement  ordered,  as  above; 
number  two  quickly  drops  the  point  of  his  bayonet  and  circles 
it  upward  to  the  original  position. 

71.  In  all  fencing  while  maintaining  the  pressure  in  the  en- 
gage a  certain  freedom  of  motion  of  the  rifle  is  allowable,  con- 
sisting of  the  play,  or  up-and-down  motion,  of  one  bayonet 
against  the  other.    This  is  necessary  to  prevent  the  opponent 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          87 

from  divining  the  intended  attack.  It  also  prevents  his  using 
the  point  of  contact  as  a  pivot  for  his  assaults.  In  changing 
from  one  engage  to  the  other  the  movement  is  controlled  by 
the  left  hand,  the  right  remaining  stationary. 

72.  After  some  exercise  in  engage,  engage  left,  and  counter, 
exercises  will  be  given  in  the  assaults. 

ASSAULTS. 

73.  The  part  of  the  body  to  be  attacked  will  be  designated 
by  name,  as  head,  neck,  chest,  stomach,  legs.    No  attacks  will 
be  made  below  the  knees.    The  commands  are  given  and  the 
movements  for  each  line  are  first  explained  thoroughly  by  the 
instructor;    the   execution    begins   at   the    command    assault. 
Number  one  executes  the  attack,  and  number  two  parries ; 
conversely,  at  command,  number  two  attacks  and  number  one 
parries. 

74.  For  convenience  in  instruction  assaults  are  divided  into 
simple  attacks,  counter  attacks,  attacks  on  the  rifle,  and  feints. 

SIMPLE    ATTACKS. 

75.  Success  in  these  attacks  depends  on  quickness  of  move- 
ment.    There  are  three  simple  attacks — the  straight,  the  dis- 
engagement, and  the  counter   disengagement.     They   are  not 
preceded  by  a  feint. 

76.  In  the  straight  the  bayonet  is  directed  straight  at  an 
opening  from  the  engaged  position.     Contact  with  the  oppo- 
nent's rifle  may  or  may  not,  be  abandoned  while  making  it.    If 
the  opening  be  high  or  low.  contact  with  the  rifle  will  usually 
be  abandoned  on  commencing  the  attack.     It'  the  opening  be 
near  bis  guard,  the  light  pressure  used  in  the  engage  may  be 
continued  in  the  attack. 

Example :  Being  at  the  engage  right,  1.  Number  one,  at 
neck  (head,  chest,  right  leg,  etc.),  thrust;  2.  Number  two, 
parry  right;  3.  ASSAULT. 

77.  In  the  disengagement  contact  with  the  opponent's  rifle 
is  abandoned  and  the  point  of  the  bayonet  is  circled  under  or 
over  his  bayonet  or  rifle  and  directed  into  the  opening  at- 
tacked.    This  attack  is  delivered  by  one  continuous  spiral 


88         MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

movement  of  the  bayonet  from  the  moment  contact  is  aban- 
doned. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage  right,  1.  Number  one,  at 
stomach  (left  chest,  left  leg,  etc.),  thrust;  2.  Number  two, 
parry  left  (etc.)  ;  3.  ASSAULT. 

78.  In  the  counter  disengagement  a  swift  attack  is  made 
into  the  opening  disclosed  while  the  opponent  is  attempting  to 
change  the  engagement  of  his  rifle.     It  is  delivered  by  one 
continuous  spiral  movement  of  the  bayonet  into  the  opening. 

Example :  Being  at  the  engage  right,  1.  Number  two,  en- 
gage left;  2.  Number  one,  at  chest,  thrust;  3.  Nur  ber  two, 
parry  left;  4.  ASSAULT. 

Number  two  initiates  the  movement,  number  one  thrusts  as 
soon  as  the  opening  is  made,  and  number  two  then  attempts  to 
parry. 

79.  A  counter  attack  or  return  is  one  made  instantly  after 
or  in  continuation  of  a  parry.    The  parry  should  be  as  narrow 
as  possible.    This  makes  it  more  difficult  for  the  opponent  to 
recover  and  counter  parry.    The  counter  attack  should  also  be 
made  at  or  just  before  the  full  extension  of  the  opponent's 
attack,  as  when  it  is  so  made  a  simple  extension  of  the  arms 
will  generally  be  sufficient  to  reach  the  opponent's  body. 

Example:  Being  at  engage,  1.  Number  two,  at  chest,  lunge; 
2.  Number  one,  parry  right,  and  at  stomach  (chest,  head,  etc.), 
thrust;  3.  ASSAULT. 

ATTACKS  ON  THE  RIFLE. 

80.  These  movements  are  made  for  the  purpose  of  forcing 
or  disclosing  an  opening  into  which  an  attack  can  be  made. 
They  are  the  press,  the  beat,  and  the  twist. 

81.  In  the  press  the  attack  quickly  presses  against  the  op- 
ponent's bayonet   or   rifle  with   his   own   and   continues   the 
pressure  as  the  attack  is  delivered. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  press,  and 
at  chest,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  right;  3.  ASSAULT. 

82.  The  attack  by   disengagement  is  particularly   effective 
following  the  press. 

Example :  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  press,  and  at 
stomach,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  low  parry  left;  3.  ASSAULT. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         89 

83.  The  beat  is  an  attack  in  which  a  sharp  blow  is  struck 
against  the  opponent's  rifle  for  the  purpose  of  forcing  him  to 
expose  an  opening  into  which  an  attack  immediately  follows. 
It  is  used  when  there  is  but  slight  opposition  or  no  contact  of 
rifles. 

Example :  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  beat,  and  at 
stomach  (chest,  etc.),  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  left;  3. 
ASSAULT. 

84.  In  the  twist  the  rifle  is  crossed  over  the  opponent's  rifle 
or  bayonet  and  his  bayonet  forced  downward  with  a  circular 
motion  and  a  straight  attack  made  into  the  opening.     It  re- 
quires superior  strength  on  the  part  of  the  attack. 

Example :  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  twist,  and  at 
stomach,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  low  parry  left;  3.  ASSAULT. 

FEINTS. 

85.  Feints  are  movements  which  threaten  or  simulate  at- 
tacks and  are  made  with  a  view  to  inducing  an  opening  or 
parry  that  exposes  the  desired  point  of  "attack.     They  are 
either   single  or   double,   according  to  the  number   of  such 
movements  made  by  the  attack. 

86.  In  order  that  the  attack  may  be  changed  quickly,  as 
little  force  as  possible  is  put  into  a  feint. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  feint  head 
thrust;  at  stomach,  lunge;  2.  Number  two,  parry  right  and 
low  parry  right;  3.  ASSAULT. 

Number  one  executes  the  feint  and  then  the  attack.  Num- 
ber two  executes  both  parries. 

87.  In  double  feints  first  one  part  of  the  body  and  then  an- 
other is  threatened  and  a  third  attacked. 

Example :  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  feint  straight 
thrust  at  chest;  disengagement  at  chest;  at  stomach,  lunge; 
2.  Number  two,  parry  right,  parry  left,  and  low  parry  left;  3. 
ASSAULT. 

88.  An  opening  may  be  offered  or  procured  by  opposition,  as 
in  the  press  or  beat. 

89.  In  fencing  exercises  every  feint  should  at  first  be  par- 
ried.   When  the  defense  is  able  to  judge  or  divine  the  char- 


90          MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

actor  of  the  attack  the  feint  is  not  necessarily  parried,  but 
may  be  nullified  by  a  counter  feint. 

90.  A  counter  feint  is  a  feint  following  the  opponent's  feint 
or  following  a  parry  of  his  attack  and  generally  occurs  in 
combined  movements. 

COMBINED  MOVEMENTS, 

91.  When  the  men  have  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  the 
various  foot  movements,  parries,  guards,  attacks,  feints,  etc., 
the  instructor  combines  several  of  them  and  gives  the  com- 
mands in  quick  succession,  increasing  the  rapidity  and  num- 
ber of  movements  as  the  men  become  more  skillful.    Opponents 
will  be  changed  frequently. 

1.  Example :  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one.  by  disen- 
gagement at  chest,  thrust;    2.  Number  two.  parry  left,  right 
step  (left  foot  first),  and  lunge;  3.  ASSAULT. 

2.  Example:  Being  at  engage  left,  1.  Number  one,  press  and 
lunge;   2.  Number  two,  parry  right,  left  step,  and  thrust;    3. 
ASSAULT. 

3.  Example :  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  by  disen- 
gagement at  chest,  thrust;   2.  Number  two,  parry  left,  front 
pass,  and  at  head  butt  strike:   3.  Number  one,  right  step;    4. 
ASSAULT. 

92.  Examples  1  and  2  are  typical  of  movements  known  as 
cross  counters,  and  example  No.  3  of  movements  known  as 
close  counters. 

93.  A  chancery  is  an  attack  by  means  of  which  the  opponent 
is  disarmed,  which  causes  him  to  lose  control  of  his  rifle,  or 
which  disables  his  weapon. 

94.  When  the  different  combinations  are  executed  with  suffi- 
cient skill  the  instructor  will  devise  series  of  movements  to  be 
memorized  and  executed  at  the  command  assault.    The  accu- 
racy and  celerity  of  the  movements  will  be  carefully  watched 
by  the  instructor,  with  a  view  to  the  correction  of  faulty 
execution. 

95.  It  is  not  intended  to  restrict  the  number  of  movements, 
but  to  leave  to  the  discretion  of  company  commanders  and  the 
ingenuity  of  instructors  the  selection  of  such  other  exercises 
as  accord  with  the  object  of  the  drill. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          91 
VII.  FENCING  AT  WILL. 

96.  As  satisfactory  progress  is  made  the  instructor  will  pro- 
ceed to  the  exercises  at  will,  by  which  is  meant  assaults  be- 
tween two  men,  each  endeavoring  to  hit  the  other  and  to  avoid 
being  hit  himself.     Fencing  at  will  should  not  be  allowed  to 
degenerate  into  random  attacks  and  defenses. 

97.  The  instructor  can  supervise  but  one  pair  of  combatants 
at  a  time.    Frequent  changes  should  be  made  so  that  the  men 
may  learn  different  methods  of  attack  and  defense  from  each 
other. 

98.  The  contest   should  begin  with   simple,   careful  move- 
ments, with  a  view  to  forming  a  correct  opinion  of  the  adver- 
sary ;  afterwards  everything  will  depend  on  coolness,  rapid 
and  correct  execution  of  the  movements,  and  quick  perception 
of  the  adversary's  intentions. 

99.  Continual  retreat  from  the  adversary's  attack  and  fre- 
quent dodging  to  escape  attacks  should  be  avoided.    The  offen- 
sive should  be  continually  encouraged. 

100.  In  fencing  at  will,  when  no  commands  are  given,  oppo- 
nents facing  each  other  at  the  position  of  order  arms,  salute. 
They  then  immediately  and  simultaneously  assume  the  position 
of  guard,  rifles  engaged.    Neither  man  may  take  the  position 
of  guard  before  his  opponent  has  completed  his  salute.     The 
choice  of  position  is  decided  before  the  salute. 

101.  The  opponents  being  about  two  paces  apart  and  the 
fencing  salute  having  been  rendered,  the  instructor  commands, 
1.  At  will,  2.  ASSAULT,  after  which  either  party  has  the  right 
to  attack.     To  interrupt  the  contest  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand, HALT,  at  which  the  combatants  will  immediately  come 
to  the  order.     To  terminate  the  contest,  the  instructor  will 
command,  1.  Halt,  2.  SALUTE,  at  which  the  combatants  will 
immediately  come  to  the  order,  salute,  and  remove  their  masks. 

102.  When  men  have  acquired  confidence  in  fencing  at  will, 
one  opponent  should  be  required  to  advance  upon  the  other  in 
quick  time  at  charge  bayonet,  from  a  distance  not  to  exceed 
10  yards,  and  deliver  an  attack.    As  soon  as  a  hit  is  made  by 
either  opponent  the  instructor  commands,  HALT,  and  the  as- 
sault  terminates.     Opponents   alternate   in   assaulting.     The 
assailant  is  likewise  required  to  advance  at  double  time  from 


92        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

a  distance  not  exceeding  20  yards  and  at  a  run  from  a  dis- 
tance not  exceeding  30  yards. 

103.  The  instructor  will  closely  observe  the  contest  and  de- 
cide doubtful  points.  He  will  at  once  stop  the  contest  upon 
the  slightest  indication  of  temper.  After  conclusion  of  the 
combat  he  will  comment  on  the  action  of  both  parties,  point 


FIG.  26, -par.  104. 

out  errors  and  deficiencies,  and  explain  how  they  may  be 
avoided  in  the  future. 

104.  As  additional  instruction,  the  men  may  be  permitted  to . 
wield  the  rifle  left  handed — that  is,  on  the  left  side  of  the 
body,  left  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock.    Many  men  will  be 
able  to  use  this  method  to  advantage.     It  is  also  of  value  in 
case  the  left  hand  is  wounded. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          93 

105.  After  men  have  fenced  in  pairs,   practice  should  be 
given  in  fencing  between  groups,  equally  and  unequally  di- 
vided.   When  practicable,  intrenchments  will  be  used  in  fenc- 
ing of  this  character. 

In  group  fencing  it  will  be  necessary  to  have  a  sufficient 
number  of  umpires  to  decide  hits.  An  individual  receiving  a 
hit  is  withdrawn  at  once  from  the  bout,  which  is  decided  in 
fnvor  of  the  group  having  the  numerical  superiority  at  the 
end.  The  fencing  salute  is  not  required  in  group  fencing. 

KULES   FOR  FENCING  AT   WILL. 

106.  1.  Hits  on  the  legs  below  the  knees  will  not  be  counted. 
No  hit  counts  unless,  in  the  opinion  of  the  instructor,  it  has 
sufficient  force  to  disable. 

2.  Upon  receiving  a  hit,  call  out  "  hit." 

3.  After  receiving  a  fair  hit  a  counter  attack  is  not  per- 
mitted.   A  position  of  engage  is  taken. 

4.  A  second  or  third  hit  in  a  combined  attack  will  be  counted 
only  when  the  first  hit  was  not  called. 

5.  When  it  is  necessary  to  stop  the  contest — for  example,  be- 
cause of  breaking  of  weapons  or  displacement  of  means  of 
protection — take  the  position  of  the  order. 

6.  When   it   is  necessary  to   suspend   the   assault   for   any 
cause,  it  will  not  be  resumed  until  the  adversary  is  ready  and 
in  condition  to  defend  himself. 

7.  Attacks  directed  at  the  crotch  are  prohibited  in  fencing. 

8.  Stepping  out  of  bounds,  when  established,  counts  as  a  hit. 

SUGGESTIONS   FOR  FENCING  AT   WILL. 

107.  When  engaging  in  an  assault,  first  study  the  adver- 
sary's position  and  proceed  by  false  attacks,  executed  with 
speed,  to  discover,  if  possible,  his  instinctive  parries.     In  or- 
der to  draw  the  adversary  out  and  induce  him  to  expose  that 
part  of  the  body  at  which  the  attack  is  to  be  made,   it  is 
advisable  to  simulate  an  attack  by  a  feint  and  then  make  the  . 
real  attack. 

108.  Return  attacks  should  be  frequently  practiced,  as  they 
are  difficult  to  parry,  and  the  opponent  Is  within  easier  reach 


94        MANUAL  FOB  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

and  more  exposed.  The  return  can  be  made  a  continuation  of 
the  parry,  as  there  is  no  previous  warning  of  its  delivery, 
although  it  should  always  be  expected.  Returns  are  made 
without  lunging  if  the  adversary  can  be  reached  by  thrusts 
or  cuts. 

109.  Endeavor  to  overcome  the  tendency  to  make  a  return 
without  knowing  where  it  will  hit.    Making  returns  blindly  is 
a  bad  habit  and  leads  to  instinctive  returns — that  is,  habitual 
returns   with  certain   attacks   from   certain  parries — a   fault 
which  the  skilled  opponent  will  soon  discover. 

110.  Do  not  draw  the  rifle  back  preparatory  to  thrust  ing 
and  lunging. 

111.  The  purpose  of  fencing  at  will  is  to  teach  the  soldier  as 
many  forms  of  simple,  effective  attacks  and  defenses  as  pos- 
sible.    Complicated  and   intricate  movements  should   not   he 
attempted. 

HINTS    FOE    INSTRUCTORS. 

112.  The  influence  of  the  instructor  is  great.     He  must  be 
master  of  his  weapon,  not  only  to  show  the  various  movements 
but  also  to  lead  in  the  exercises  at  will.    He  should  stimulate 
the  zeal  of  the  men  and  arouse  pleasure  in  Hie  work.    Officers 
should  qualify  themselves  as  instructors  by  fencing  with  each 
other.  * 

113.  The  character  of  each  man,  his  bodily  conformation, 
and  his  degree  of  skill  must  always  be  taken  into  account. 
When  the  instructor  is  demonstrating  the  combinations,  feints, 
returns,  and  parries  the  rapidity  of  his  attack  should  be  regu- 
lated by  the  skill  of  the  pupil,  and  no  more  force  than  is  nec- 
essary should  be  used.    If  the  pupil  exposes  himself  too  much 
in  the  feints  and  parries,  the  instructor  will,  by  an  attack, 
convince  him  of  his  error ;  but  if  these  returns  be  too  swiftly 
or  too  strongly  made  the  pupil  will  become  overcautious  and 
the  precision  of  his  attack  will  be  impaired.    The  object  is  to 
teach  the  pupil,  not  to  give  exhibitions  of  superior  skill. 

114.  Occasionally  the  instructor  should  leave  himself  uucov- 
"  ered  and  fail  to  parry,  in  order  to  teach  the  pupil  to  take  quick 

advantage  of  such  opportunities. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          95 
SUGGESTIONS, 

Instruction  in  bayonet  exercise  and  bayonet  fencing  should 
be  conducted  with  a  view  to  teaching  the  aggressive  use  of  the 
bayonet.  Unless  troops  are  so  thoroughly  trained  with  the 
bayonet  that  they  believe  that  with  it  they  are  superior  to 
their  opponents  it  will  be  difficult  or  impossible  to  develop  that 
morale  which  is  necessary  for  a  successful  assault.  Men 
should  be  impressed  with  the  importance  of  acting  always  on 
the  offensive  in  bayonet  combat,  of  pushing  their  attack  with 
all  their  might.  Troops  which  are  successful  in  their  first 
few  bayonet  encounters  will  seldom  thereafter  be  called  upon 
to  use  the  bayonet — their  opponents  will  not  await  the  assault. 

LOADINGS     AND    FIEINGS. 

121.  The  commands  for  loading  and  firing  are  the  same 
whether  standing,  kneeling,  or  lying  down.     The  firings  are 
always  executed  at  a  halt. 

The  instruction  in  firing  will  be  preceded  by  a  command  for 
loading. 

Loadings  are  executed  in  line  and  skirmish  line  only. 

122.  Rifles  having  been  ordered  loaded  are  kept  loaded  with- 
out command  until  the  command  unload  or  inspection  arms, 
fresh  clips  being  inserted  when  the  magazine  is  exhausted. 

123.  The  aiming  point  or  target  is  carefully  pointed  out. 
This  may  be  done  before  or  after  announcing  the  sight  setting. 
Both  are  indicated  before  giving  the  command  for  firing,  but 
may  be  omitted  when  the  target  appears  suddenly  and  is  un- 
mistakable ;  in  suoh  cases  the  battle  sight  is  used  if  no  sight 
setting  is  announced.    The  troopers  must  be  practiced  repeat- 
edly in  locating  targets,  making  the  appropriate  sight  settings, 
and  simulating  fire  on  the  target  indicated. 

124.  The  target  or  aiming  point  having  been  designated  and 
the  sight  setting  announced,   such  designation  or  announce- 
ment need  not  be  repeated  until  a  change  of  either  or  both  is 
necessary. 

Troops  are  trained  to  continue  their  fire  upon  the  aiming 
point  or  target  designated  and  at  the  sight  setting  announced 
until  a  change  is  ordered. 


96        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEBS. 


125.  If  the  men  are  not  already  in  the  position  of  load,  that 
position  is  taken  at  the  announcement  of  the  sight  setting  ;  if 
the  announcement  is  omitted,  the  position  is  taken  at  the  first 
command  for  firing. 

126.  When  deployed,   the   use  of  the  sling  as  an  aid  to 
accurate  firing  is  discretionary  with  each  man. 

127.  The  correct  estimation  of  distances  is  of  great  impor- 
tance in  connection  with  all  rifle  firing  except  that  at  short 
ranges.     Instruction  of  the  recruit  in  this  phase  of  training 
must  not  be  delayed  until  range  firing  is  taken  up,  but  should 
be  begun  in  the  early  instruction  and  carried  forward  pro- 
gressively, thus  gradually  developing  the  faculties  involved. 
In  the  same  way  the  occasional  firing  of  a  few  shots,  first  with 
blank  cartridges  and  later  with  ball  cartridges  at  short  range 
and  under  conditions  permitting  very  careful  detailed  super- 
vision of  each  man's  position,  will  be  found  of  exceptional 
value  as  a  preliminary  exercise  to  the  course  of  range  firing 
prescribed  for  recruits.    Detailed  directions  for  conducting  the 
instruction  of  .the-  recruit  in  estimating  distances  and  in  rifle 
firing  are  prescribed  in  the  Small  Arms  Firing  Manual. 


TO    LOAD. 

128.  Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt:  1, 
(blank  or  ball)  cartridges,  2.  LOAD. 

At  the  command  •  load  each  trooper  faces 
half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to  tho 
right,  about  1  foot,  to  such  position  as  will 
insure  the  greatest  firmness  and  steadiness 
of  the  body,  raises  or  lowers  the  rifle  ancj 
drops  it  into  the  left  hand  at  the  balance, 
left  thumb  extended 
along  the  stock,  muzzle 
at  the  height  of  the 
breast,  and  turns  the  cut- 
off up.  With  the  right 
hand  he  turns  and  draws 
the  bolt  back,  takes  a 
loaded  clip  and  inserts 
the  end  in  the  clip  slots, 
places  the  thumb  on  the 


With  dummy 


FIG.  1:7,  par.  li!S. 


FlG-  ~8>  Par.  12 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.          97 

powder  space  of  the  top  cartridge,  the  fingers  extending  around 
the  rifle  and  tips  resting  on  the  magazine  floor  plate;  forces 
the  cartridges  into  the  magazine  by  pressing  down  with  the 
thumb ;  without  removing  the  clip  thrusts  the  bolt  home,  turn- 
ing down  (he  handle ;  turns  the  safety  lock  to  the  "  safe  " ;  and 
carries  tho  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  rifles  being  held 
:is  nearly  as  practicable  in  the  position  of  load. 

If  kneeling  or  sitting,  the  position  of  the  piece  is  similar ; 
if  kneeling,  the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh;  if  sitting, 
the  elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees ;  if  lying  down,  the  left 
hand  steadies  and  supports  the  piece  at  the  balance,  the  toe  of 
the  butt  resting  on  the  ground,  the  muzzle  off  the  ground. 

For  reference,  these  positions  (standing,  kneeling,  and  lying 
down)  are  designated  as  that  of  load.  (Figs.  15,  16.) 

129.  For  instruction  in  loading:  1.  Simulate,  2.  LOAD. 
Executed  as  above  described,  except  that  the  cut-off  remains 

"  off  "  and  the  handling  of  cartridges  is  simulated. 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  to  simulate  loading  and  firing; 
after  a  few  lessons  dummy  cartridges  may  be  used.  Later, 
blank  cartridges  may  be  used. 

130.  The  rifle  may  be  used  as  a  single  loader  by  turning  the 
magazine  "  off."     The  magazine  may  be  filled  in  whole  or  in 
part  while  •;  off ''  or  "  on  "  by  pressing  cartridges  singly  down 
and  back  until  they  are  in  the  proper  place.    The  use  of  the 
rifle  as  a  single  loader  is,  however,  to  be  regarded  as  excep- 
tional. 

TO   UNLOAD. 

131.  UNLOAD. 

Take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  safety  lock  up  and  move 
bolt  alternately  back  and  forward  until  all  the  cartridges  are 
ejected.  After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected  the  chamber  is 
closed  by  first  thrusting  the  bolt  slightly  forward  to  free  it 
from  the  stud  holding  it  in  place  when  the  chamber  is  open, 
pressing  the  follower  down  and  back  to  engage  it  itnder  the 
bolt,  and  then  thrusting  the  bolt  home;  the  trigger  is  pulled. 
The  cartridges  are  then  picked  up,  cleaned,  and  returned  to 
the  belt,  and  the  rifle  is  brought  to  the  order. 
3/KT-- 17 4 


98          MANUAL  FOR  N 01*  COMMISSION  ED  OFFICERS. 


TO    SET    THE    SIGHT. 

132.  RANGE,  ELEVEN  HUNDRED  (EIGHT-FIFTY,  ETC.),  or 
BATTLE  SIGHT. 

The  sight  is  set  at  the  elevation  indicated.    The  instructor 
explains  and  verifies  sight  settings. 

TO   FIRE   BY   VOLLEY. 

133.  1.  READY,  2.  AIM,  3.  Squad,  4.  FIRE. 

At  the  command  ready,  turn  the  safety 
lock  to  the  "  ready ;  "  at  the  command 
aim,  raise  the  rifle  with  both  hands  and 
support  the  hutt  firmly  against  the  hol- 
jow  of  the  right  shoulder,  right  thumb 
clasping  the  stock,  barrel  horizontal,  left 
elbow  well  under  the  rifle,  right  elbow 
as  high  as  the  shoulder ;  incline  the  head 
slightly  forward  and  a  little  to  the  right, 
cheek  against  the  stock,  left  eye  closed, 
right  eye  looking  through  the  notch  of 
the  rear  sight  so  as  to  perceive  the  object 
aimed  at,  second  joint  of  forefinger  rest- 
ing lightly  against  the  front  of  the  trig- 
ger and  taking  up  the  slack ;  top  of  front 
sight  is  carefully  raised  into,  and  held 
in,  the  line  of  sight. 

In  aiming  kneeling  the  left  elbow  rests 
on  the  left  knee,  point  of  elbow  in  front 
of  knee- 
cap. In 
a  i  m  i  n  g 
sitting 

the    el-  FlG.  31,  par.  133. 

bows  are 


FIG.  30,  par.  133 


supported  by  the  knees. 

In  aiming  lying  down  raise  the  rifle  with  both  hands,  rest 
on  both  elbows  and  press  the  butt  firmly  against  the  right 
shoulder. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         99 

At  the  command  fixe,  press  the  finger  against  the  trigger; 
fire  without  deranging  the  aim  and  without  lowering  or  turn- 
ing the  rifle ;  lower  the  rifle  to  the  position  of  load  and  load. 
(Figs.  IT,  18,  19.) 

134.  To  continue  the  firing:  1.  AIM,  2.  Squad,  3.  FIRE. 
Each  command  is  executed  as  previously  explained.     Load 

(from  magazine)  is  executed  by  drawing  back  and  thrusting 
home  the  bolt  with  the  right  hand,  leaving  the  safety  lock  at 
the  "  ready." 

TO  FIRE  AT  WILL. 

135.  FIRE  AT  WILL. 

Each  man,  independently  of  the  other,  comes  to  the  ready, 
aims  carefully  and  deliberately  at  the  aiming  point  or  target, 
fires,  loads,  and  continues  the  firing. until  ordered  to  suspend  or 
cease  firing. 

136.  To  increase  (decrease)  the  rate  of  fire  in  progress  the 
instructor  shouts:  FASTER  (SLOWER). 

Men  are  trained  to  fire  at  the  rate  of  about  three  shots  per 
minute  at  effective  ranges  and  five  or  six  at  close  ranges,  de- 
voting the  minimum  of  time  to  loading  and  the  maximum  to 
deliberate  aiming.  To  illustrate  the  necessity  for  delibera- 
tion, and  to  habituate  men  to  battle  conditions,  small  and  com- 
paratively indistinct  targets  are  designated. 

TO  FIRE  BY  CLIP. 

137.  CLIP  FIRE. 

Executed  in  the  same  manner  as  fire  at  will,  except  that  each 
man,  afer  having  exhausted  the  cartridges  then  in  the  rifle, 
sitspc-n ds  firing. 

TO  SUSPEND  FIRING. 

138.  The  instructor  blows  a  long  blast  of  the  whistle  and 
repeats  same,  if  necessary,  or  commands:  SUSPEND  SIRING. 

Firing  stops ;  rifles  are  held,  loaded,  and  locked  in  a  position 
of  readiness  for  instant  resumption  of  firing,  sights  unchanged. 
The  men  continue  to  observe  the  target  or  aiming  point,  or  the 
place  at  which  the  target  disappeared,  or  at  which  it  is  ex- 
pected to  reappear. 


100         MANUAL  TOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

This  whistle  signal  may  be  used  as  a  preliminary  to  cease 
firing. 

TO  CEASE  FIRING. 

139.  CEASE  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  rifles  not  already  there  are  brought  to  the 
position  of  load,  the  cut-off  turned  down  if  firing  from  maga- 
zine, the  cartridge  is  drawn  or  the  empty  shell  is  ejected,  the 
trigger  is  pulled,  sights  are  laid  down,  and  the  rifle  is  brought 
to  the  order. 

Cease  firing  is  used  for  long  pauses  to  prepare  for  changes 
of  position  or  to  steady  the  men. 

140.  Commands  for  suspending  or  ceasing  fire  may  be  given 
at  any  time  after  the  preparatory  command  for  firing  whether 
the  firing  has  actually  commenced  or  not. 

TARGET  DESIGNATION. 

141.  In  the  training  of  men  in  the  mechanism  of  the  firing 
ir»e,   they  should  be  practiced  in  repeating  to  one  another 
target  and  aiming  point  designations  and  in  quickly  locating 
and  pointing  out  a  designated  target.     They  should  be  taught 
to   distinguish,   from   a  prone  position,   distant   objects,  par- 
ticularly troops,  both  with  the  naked  eye  and  \vith  field  glasses. 

Owing  to  the  invariable  custom  of  attempting  to  conceal  fire 
trenches,  it  is  necessary  to  have  some  ready  method  of  indi- 
cating the  exact  location  of  an  indistinct  pit  or  trench  occupied 
or  supposed  to  be  occupied  by  an  enemy  in  order  that  effective 
fire  may  be  opened.  The  so-called  clock  system  furnishes  one 
of  the  simplest  devices  for  so  doing.  Two  methods  of  apply- 
ing this  system  are  indicated  below. 

First  method:  That  in  which  an  imaginary  clock  dial  is 
assumed  to  be  horizontal,  its  center  at  the  firing  point  and  the 
center-XII  line  of  the  dial  perpendicular  to  the  front  of  the 
.  firing  line. 

To  designate  a  target  the  commander  announces,  for  ex- 
ample: Target  at  11  o'clock,  range  800  yards,  a  trench.  Each 
man  looks  along  the  center-11  o'clock  line  of  his  imaginary 
dial,  estimates  the  distance  (800  yards)  along  that  line,  and 
thereby  locates  the  trench. 


MANTTAI,  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.       101 

In  this  method  it  is  necessary  that  the  target- be  •  visible  to 
the  naked  eye  and  that  each  man  be  able  to  estimate  distances 
with  fair  accuracy. 

Second  method:  That  in  which  an  imaginary  clock  dial  is 
assumed  to  be  vertical,  its  center  being 'at  a  prominent,  distant 
point  selected  by  the  commander  and  called  the  reference 
point. 

To  designate  a  target  the  commander  announces,  for  ex- 
ample: Reference  point,  that  clump  of  trees  on  hill  crest. 
When  the  men  have  located  the  reference  point  he  announces : 
Target  at  4  o'clock,  2  finger  widths,  range  1,000  yards,  a  gun 
pit.  By  a  finger  width  is  meant  the  distance  on  the  face  of 
the  assumed  vertical  clock  (actually  on  the  landscape)  inter- 
cepted by  the  breadth  of  a  man's  finger  held  perpendicularly 
to  his  hand  and  arm,  the  latter  being  fully  extended  in  the 
direction  of  the  reference  point. 

Each  man  looks  along  the  center-4-  o'clock  line  of  the  imagi- 
nary (vertical)  dial,  measures,  on  this  line,  a  point  distant  2 
finger-widths  from  the  reference  point  (the  center  of  {he 
dial),  and  thus  locates  the  gun  pit. 

A  combination  of  the  two  methods  may  be  necessary  when, 
in  using  the  second  method,  the  reference  point  is  not  readily 
identified.  Thus,  in  the  case  mentioned,  it  may,  for  example, 
be  necessary  to  say:  Reference  point  at  1  o'clock,  clump  of 
trees  on  hill  crest. 

In  both  methods  the  sequence  of  commands  laid  down  should 
be  observed. 

Various  devices  for  pointing  out  indistinct  targets  may  be 
improvised  and  used. 

THE  USE  OF  COVER. 

142.  The  recruit  should  be  given  careful  instruction  in  the 
individual  use  of  cover. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that,  in  taking  advantage 
of  natural  cover,  he  must  be  able  to  fire  easily  and  effectively 
upon  the  enemy ;  if  advancing  on  an  enemy,  he  must  do  so 
steadily  and  as  rapidly  as  practicable,  taking  advantage  of  any 
available  cover  while  setting  the  sights,  firing,  or  advancing. 


102        MANUAL  FOR  ITONCOOTCISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

To  teach  tim  to  fir<}  easily  and  effectively,  at  the  same  time 
concealing  himself  from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  he  is  prac- 
ticed in  simulated  firing  in  the  prone,  sitting,  kneeling,  and 
crouching  positions,  from  behind  hillocks,  trees,  heaps  of 
earth  or  rocks,  from  depressions,  gullies,  ditches,  doorways,  or 
windows.  He  is  taught  to  fire  around  the  right  side  of  his 
concealment  whenever  practicable,  or,  when  this  is  not  practi- 
cable, to  rise  enough  to  fire  over  the  top  of  his  concealment. 

When  these  details  are  understood,  he  is  required  to  select 
cover  with  reference  to  an  assumed  enemy  and  to  place  him- 
self behind  it  in  proper  position  for  firing. 

143.  The  disadvantage  of  remaining  too  long  in  one  place, 
however  good  the  concealment,  should  be  explained.    He  should 
be  taught  to  advance  from  cover  to  cover,  selecting  cover  in 
advance  before  leaving  his  concealment. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that  a  man  running  rapidly 
toward  an  enemy  furnishes  a  poor  target.  He  should  be 
trained  in  springing  from  a  prone  position  behind  concealment, 
running  at  top  speed  to  cover  and  throwing  himself  behind  it. 
He  should  also  be  practiced  in  advancing  from  cover  to  cover 
by  crawling,  or  by  lying  on  the  left  side,  rifle  grasped  in  the 
right  hand,  and  pushing  himself  forward  with  the  right  leg. 

He  should  be  taught  that  when  fired  on  while  acting  inde- 
pendently, he  should  drop  to  the  ground,  seek  cover,  and  then 
endeavor  to  locate  his  enemy ;  also  that  in  the  sun  he  is  visible 
to  a  much  greater  degree  than  when  in  the  shade. 

The  instruction  of  the  recruit  in  the  use  of  cover  is  continued 
in  combat  exercises  of  the  squad  and  platoon,  but  he  must 
then  be  taught  that  the  proper  advance  of  the  platoon  or  troop 
and  the  effectiveness  of  its  fire  is  of  greater  importance  than 
the  question  of  cover  for  individuals  should  the  two  considera- 
tions conflict.  He  should  also  be  taught  that  he  may  not  move 
about  or  shift  his  position  in  the  firing  line  except  to  get  a 
better  view  of  the  target. 

OBSERVATION. 

144.  In  order  to  develop  the  faculty  of  rapid  and  accurate 
observation,  which  is  of  great  importance  in  campaign,  the 
recruit  should  be  trained  in  taking  notice  of  his  surroundings, 
at  first  from  selected  positions  and  later  at  the  various  gaits. 


MANTTAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS;        103 

He  should  be  practiced  under  various  conditions  of  weather 
in  recognizing  colors  and  forms;  in  pointing  out  and  naming 
military  features  of  the  ground ;  in  observing  the  effect  of  the 
direction  of  light  on  distinctness  of  objects:  in  recognizing 
at  gradually  increasing  distances  the  animate  and  inanimate 
objects  ordinarily  met  with  in  the  field ;  in  counting  distant 
objects ;  and  in  estimating  the  size  of  groups,  such  as  herds  of 
animals  and  bodies  of  troops. 

MANUAL   OF    THE   PISTOL. 

145.  Instruction  under  this  head  is  first  given  on  foot,  the 
recruit  having  previously  been  made  familiar  with  the  mecha- 
nism of  the  pistol,  the  names  of  the  principal  parts,  and  the 
method  of  cleaning,  assembling,  and  operating  it. 

When  a  lanyard  is  used  the  snaps  are  attached  to  the  butt 
of  the  pistol  and  the  magazine,  the  lanyard  is  passed  over  the 
head,  and  the  sliding  loop  drawn  snug  against  the  right  arm- 
pit. The  lanyard  should  then  be  of  just  such  length  that  the 
arm  can  be  extended  without  constraint. 

For  dismounted  instruction  with  the  pistol  the  troopers  may 
be  formed  with  or  without  intervals. 

During  instruction  in  the  manual  of  the  pistol  given  when 
dismounted  with  intervals  each  trooper  terminates  the  first 
execution  of  raise  pistol  by  currying  his  right  foot  24  inches 
to  the  right  and  placing  his  left  hand  in  the  position  of  his 
bridle  hand.  This  position  is  then  retained  until  return  pistol 
is  executed,  when  the  position  of  attention  is  resumed. 

At  all  other  times  when  movements  in  the  manual  of  the 
pistol  are  executed  dismounted  the  left  hand  is  raised  to  the 
positibn  of  the  bridle  hand  whenever  used  to  manipulate  the 
mechanism  and  is  then  dropped  again  to  the  side. 

146.  Except  in  the  act  of  firing,  the  automatic  pistol,  when 
actually  on  the  person,  whether  loaded  or  unloaded,  will  be 
carried  cocked  and  locked.     At  all  other  times  the  hammer  will 
be  lowered  fully  down. 

147.  The  pistol  being  in  the  holster,  to  raise  pistol:  1.  Raise, 
1\  PISTOL. 

Raise:  Unbutton  the  flap  of  the  holster  with  the  right  hand 
and  grasp  the  stock,  back  of  the  hand  outward. 


104       &ANTTAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


PISTOL :  Draw  the  pistol  from  the  holster ;  reverse  it,  muz- 
zle up,  the  hand  holding  the  stock  with  the  thumb  and  last 
three  fingers,  forefinger  outside  the  guard, 
barrel  to  the  rear  and  inclined  to  the  front 
at  an  angle  of  30°,  hand  as  high  as  the  neck 
and  6  inches  in  front  of  the  point  of  the  right 
shoulder.  This  is  the  position  of  raise  pistol. 
(Fig.  32.) 

148.  Being  at  raise  pistol,  to  inspect  pistol : 
1.  Inspection,  2.  PISTOL. 

(a)  When  a  magazine  is  in  the  pistol:  Push 
down  the  safety  lock  and  lower  the  right 
hand  to  within  easy  reach  of  the  left,  pistol 
pointed  upward  and  to  the  right  front  at  an 
angle  of  about  30°  ;  grasp  the  corrugations  of 
the  slide  with  the  left  thumb  and  forefinger, 
thumb  to  the  right;  thrust  upward  with  the 
right  hand,  thus  drawing  back  the  slide  until  the  slide  stop  is 
engaged  (fig.  35)  ;  resume  raise  pistol  (fig.  33). 


FIG.  32,  par.  147. 


FIG.  33,  par.  148   (a). 


FIG.  34,  par.  148   (6). 


(I)  When  no  magazine  is  in  the  pistol:  Push  down  the 
safety  lock  and  lower  the  pistol  to  the  left  hand,  rotating 
the  pistol  so  that  the  sights  move  to  the  left,  barrel  pointing 
downward  and  to  the  left  front,  stock  pointing  upward  and 
to  the  right  front;  with  the  left  thumb  and  forefinger  grasp 
the  corrugations  of  the  slide,  back  of  the  left  hand  down  (fig. 
34)  ;  change  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand  slightly  until  the 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        105 

thumb  presses  against  the  rounded  surface  of  the  slide  stop; 
thrust  downward  and  to  the  left  front  with  the  rigllt  hand, 
thus  drawing  back  the  slide,  and  at  the  same  time  press  the 
slide  stop  with  the  right  thumb  against  the  slide  until  it  en- 
gages ;  resume  raise  pistol. 

Inspection  pistol  is  never  executed  with  a  loaded  pistol  or 
with  a  loaded  magazine  in  the  pistol. 

149.  1.  Return,  2.  PISTOL. 

(a)  Being  at  raise  pistol;  lock  the  pistol,  if  not  locked; 
lower  the  pistol  to  the  holster,  reversing  it,  muzzle  down,  back 
of  the  hand  to  the  right ;  raise  the  flap  of  the  holster  with  the 
right  thumb ;  insert  the  pistol  in  the  holster  and  thrust  it 
home ;  button  the  flap  of  the  holster  with  the  right  hand. 

(&)  Being  at  inspection  pistol;  (with  a  magazine  in  the 
pistol)  lower  the  pistol  to  the  left  hand  and  grasp  the  slide  as 
prescribed  for  inspection  pistol  without  magazine  (par.  148-?), 
fig.  22)  ;  thrust  downward  and  to  the  left  front  with  the  right 
hand,  thus  relieving  the  pressure  on  the  slide  stop,  and  at  the 
same  time  disengage  the  slide  stop  with  the  right  thumb; 
release  the  slide ;  reverse  and  lock  the  pistol ;  place  it  in 
holster  as  prescribed  in  (a).  If  there  is  no  magazine  in  the 
pistol,  lower  it  to  the  bridle  hand  as  in  load  (par.  151)  ;  draw 
back  the  slide  and  release  it;  lock  the  pistol  and  place  it  in 
the  holster. 

When  the  last  shot  is  fired  the  slide  stop  engages  auto- 
matically. Return  pistol  is  then  executed  as  from  inspection 
pistol  ( & ) . 

150.  Being  at  raise  pistol,  to  insert  a  magazine  in  the  pistol : 
1.  Insert,  2.  MAGAZINE,  or  2.  LOADED  MAGAZINE. 

(a)  When  a  magazine  is  in  the  pistol:  Lower  the  pistol 
into  the  left  hand,  rotating  it  so  that  the  sights  move  to  the 
left ;  grasp  the  slide  with  the  left  hand,  back  of  the  hand  down, 
barrel  pointing  downward  to  the  left  front,  stock  pointing 
upward  to  the  right  front;  release  the  magazine  catch  with 
the  middle  finger  of  the  left  hand;  withdraw  the  magazine 
with  the  right  hand ;  insert  the  designated  magazine  and 
resume  raise  pistol.  If  there  be  no  empty  space  in  the  maga- 
zine pocket  when  the  magazine  is  withdrawn  from  the  pistol, 
the  magazine  may  be  held  between  the  left  thumb  and  the 
stock  of  the  pistol  until  the  magazine  has  been  taken  from 


106       MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

the  pocket  and  inserted  :   the  magazine  withdrawn  from   the 
pistol  is  then  inserted  in  the  magazine  pocket. 

Whenever  the  magazine  catch  is  released,  the  right  hand 
should  be  so  placed  as  to  limit  the  motion  of  the  magazine 
and  prevent  its  falling  out. 

(/>)  When  no  magazine  is  in  the  pistol:  Lower  the  pistol 
into  the  left  hand  and  grasp  it  as  before;  insert  the  desig- 
nated magazine  and  resume  raise  pistol. 

A  loaded  inagazine  will  never  be  inserted  without  specific 
command. 

151.  Being  at  raise  pistol  with  a  loaded  inagazine  in  the 
pistol,  to  load:  LOAD:  Push  down  the  safety  lock  and  lower 
the  pistol  to  the  bridle  hand  as  prescribed 
for  inspection  pistol  when  a  magazine  is  in 
the  pistol  (par.  148  (a))  ;  operate  the  slider, 
engage  the  safety  lock  with  the  right  thumb, 
and  raise  pistol.  (Pig.  35.) 

To  simulate  loading  for  instruction,  first 
withdraw  the  empty  magazine. 

The  command  load  may  be  given  in  connec- 
tion with  the  insertion  of  the  magazine,  for 
example:  1.  Insert,  2.  LOADED  MAGAZINE; 
!*.  LOAD. 

After  inserting  magazine,  reverse  the  pistol 
•ft     o~          «r<i      and  load  as  above  prescribed. 

152.  Being  in  any  position.,  to  eject  the  car- 
tridge from  the  receiver:  UNLOAD. 

Pass  the  pistol  into  the  left  hand  as  in  insert  magazine; 
release  the  inagazine  catch  with  the  middle  finger  of  the  left 
hand,  slightly  disengaging  the  inagazine ;  push  down  the  safety 
lock  with  the  right  thumb ;  operate  the  slide  to  eject  the 
cartridge ;  engage  the  magazine ;  raise  and  lock  the  pistol. 

153.  Being  in  any  position,  to  withdraw  the  magazine  from 
the  pistol :  ^WITHDRAW  MAGAZINE. 

Handle  the  pistol  as  in  insert  magazine;  release  the  maga- 
zine catch;  withdraw  the  magazine  and  execute  raise  pistol. 

Recruits  are  taught  the  motions  of  loading  and  firing  with- 
out cartridges,  and  preferably  without  a  magazine  in  the  pistol, 
to  avoid  wear  on  the  magazine  lips.  Loading  and  pointing 
practice  should  be  had  at  all  gaits. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         107 

154.  The  hammer  is  always  lowered  preparatory  to  placing 
the  pistol  in  the  arm  rack  or  other  place  of  deposit. 

155.  Being  at  raise  pistol,  to  lower  the  hammer : 

(a)  Using  both  hands:  Push  down  the  safety  lock;  assume 
the  position  of  load ;  seat  the  right  thumb  firmly  on  the  ham- 
mer and  hold  it  there;  raise  the  left  hand  to  the  right  and 
press  the  grip  safety  with  the  left  thumb;  insert  the  fore- 
finger inside  the  trigger  guard ;  press  the  trigger  and  carefully 
let  the  hammer  down  with  the  right  thumb.  Resume  raise 
pistol. 

(&)  Using  but  one  hand:  Raise  the  right  hand  until  the 
muzzle  of  the  pistol  is  well  above  the  head ;  disengage  the 
safety  lock;  seat  the  ball  of  the  right  thumb  firmly  on  the 
hammer ;  bear  down  the  grip  safety  by  pressure  on  the  ham- 
mer ;  press  the  trigger  and  carefully  let  down  the  hammer 
with  the  right  thumb. 

156.  To  charge  the  magazine :  Hold  the  magazine  in  the  left 
hand,  open  end  up,  rounded  side  to  the  right.    Take  the  car- 
tridge in  the  right  hand,  thumb  on  the  rim,  bullet  end  pointing 
to  the  right;  place  the  rim  on  the  end  of  the  magazine  fol- 
lower; force  down  the  magazine  spring  and  slip  the  cartridge 
to  the  left  of  the  magazine.    The  next  cartridge  is  similarly 
slipped  in  by  placing  it  on  the  cartridge  just  inserted  and 
forcing  down  the  spring. 

The  magazine  may  be  charged  with  any  number  of  cartridges 
from  one  to  seven. 

Before  dismissing  the  squad,  pistols  will  be  inspected,  and 
if  found  loaded,  will  be  unloaded  and  magazines  withdrawn 
to  prevent  loaded  or  partially  loaded  magazines  being  left  in 
the  pistol.  Except  at  target  practice,  on  guard  duty,  or  active 
service,  the  pistol  is  habitually  carried  unloaded  with  empty 
magazine. 

EMPLOYMENT    OF   THE   PISTOL. 

157.  The  pistol  is  primarily  a  weapon  for  use  at  very  close 
range.    Its  characteristic  employment  by  cavalry  is  in  mounted 
firing  from  a  horse  moving  at  a  rapid  gait.    Under  such  con- 
ditions its  effectiveness  is  almost  negligible  at  ranges  over  25 
yards  against  individuals  or  over  50  yards  against  a  line  in 


108        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

close  order  except  in  the  hands  of  exceptionally  skilled  shots, 
and  the  effectiveness  rapidly  decreases  at  ranges  over  5  to  10 
yards.  These  limitations  on  the  use  of  the  pistol  are  due  not 
to  its  short  range  as  a  weapon  but  to  the  difficulties  of  direct- 
ing it  accurately  under  the  conditions  of  use.  While  the  pistol 
is  a  weapon  employing  fire  action,  its  tactical  employment  is 
more  nearly  analogous  to  that  of  either  the  saber  or  bayonet 
than  to  that  of  the  rifle. 

158.  From  the  preceding  paragraph  it  results  that  there  is 
no  need,  in  connection  with  the  employment  of  the  pistol  as  a 
weapon  of  mounted  combat,  for  commands  that  purport  to 
designate  a  target  or  to  indicate  range  or  other  details  for  the 
direction  of  fire.     The  only  commands  ordinarily  needed  are 
those   required   for   instruction   purposes.      (See    Small-Arms 
Firing  Manual.) 

159.  The  effectiveness  of  the  individual  trooper  in  mounted 
pistol  combat  depends  upon : 

j(«)  Thorough  familiarity  with  the  weapon  and  facility  in 
manipulating  its  mechanism  under  all  conditions.  This  is 
acquired  by  training  in  the  Manual  of  the  Pistol.  Constant 
practice  is  necessary  in  rapidly  drawing  the  pistol  from  its 
holster,  loading  it,  withdrawing  magazine,  and  inserting  mag- 
azine, at  first  at  a  halt,  later  in  motion,  and  finally  at  rapid 
gaits. 

(&)  Skill  in  firing  the  pistol.  This  is  acquired  by  actual 
practice  in  the  preliminary  exercises  and  range  firing  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  Small-Arms  Firing  Manual. 

(c)  Control  of  the  horse.    This  is  acquired  in  the  School  of 
the  Trooper. 

(d)  The  thorough  inculcation  in  the  trooper  of  the  habit  of 
withholding  liis  fire  until  within  close  range.    This  can  well 
be  accomplished  in  individual  training  by  exercises  in  firing  or 
simulating  fire  at  one  or  more  silhouette  targets.    The  trooper 
approaches  at  a  gait  graduated  in  accordance  with  his  state 
of  training  and  is  required  to  withhold  his  fire  until  he  passes 
a  certain  line. 

160.  The  other  elements  that  enter  into  effective  use  of  the 
pistol  as  a  mounted  weapon  relate  to  the  formations  and  tac- 
tics employed  rather  than  to  individual  training.     They  per- 
tain, therefore,  to  collective  rather  than  individual  instruction. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        109 

161.  If  any  command  be  required  in  connection  with  the 
characteristic  use  of  the  pistol  in  mounted  combat,  it  consists 
simply  of  an  indication  of  the  moment  at  which  fire  may  begin. 
For  this  purpose  the  command  COMMENCE  FIRING  may  be 
employed  in  any  case  for  which  a  command  may  be  desirable. 

MANUAL  OF  THE  SABER,  DISMOUNTED. 

162.  For  this  instruction,  dismounted,  the  saber  in  the  scab- 
bard is  carried  in  the  left  hand. 

In  the  position  of  attention  the  saber  will  be  held  upright  by 
the  side,  guard  to  the  front,  the  shoe  of  the  scabbard  resting 
on  the  ground  close  to  the  left  foot  and  just  in  front  of  the 
heel.  The  left  arm  will  be  extended,  the  fingers  and  thumb 
grasping  the  scabbard,  back  of  the  hand  outward. 

In  the  necessary  movements  on  foot  with  the  saber  in  hand 
the  saber  is  carried  with  the  hilt  to  the  front  and  higher  than 
the  shoe  of  the  scabbard. 

Officers,  dismounted,  may  carry  the  saber  in  the  hollow  of 
the  left  arm,  elbowT  bent,  forearm  horizontal,  guard  of  the 
saber  to  the  front,  blade  vertical.  An  officer  or  noncommis- 
sioned officer  habitually  draws  saber  before  giving  any  com- 
mands involving  the  use  of  that  weapon  by  those  under  him. 
Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  out  of  ranks  draw  saber 
only  on  occasions  when  the  men  draw  saber  unless  otherwise 
prescribed.  The  saber  may  be  drawn  for  signaling. 

163.  The  saber  is  intended  for  mounted  combat.     The  in- 
structor will  impress  upon  the  recruit  from  the  first  that  the 
use  of  the  saber  in  war  is  ordinarily  limited  to  occasions  of 
mounted  combat,  and  that  instruction  on  foot  in  its  use  is 
merely  preliminary  to  the  mounted  training  which  the  recruit 
will  receive  later. 

164.  For  dismounted  instruction,  if  the  squad  is  in  ranks 
the  '-istructor  causes  intervals  or  distances  (pars.  85-88)  to  be 
taken  before  drawing  saber. 

165.  1.  Draw,  2.  SABER. 

At  the  command  draw,  grasp  the  scabbard  with  the  left 
hand  about  4  inches  from  the  mouth,  place  the  left  hand 
against  the  thigh,  and  carry  the  hilt  to  the  front ;  ,turn  the 
head  slightly  to  the  left  without  deranging  the  position  and 
glance  at  the  saber  knot ;  engage  the  right  wrist  in  the  saber 


110        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

knot  and  give  it  two  Turns  inward  to  secure  it;  grasp  the  hilt 
with  the  right  hand  and  draw  the  saber  about  (»  inches  from 
the  scabbard  and  look  to  the  front. 

At  the  command  saber,  draw  the  saber  quickly,  raising  the 
arm  to  the  front  and  upward  to  its  full  length,  saber  in  pro- 
longation of  the  arm.  Make  a-  short  pause  with  the  saber 
raised,  then  bring  it  down  with  the  blade  against  the  hollow 
of  the  right  shoulder,  guard  to  the  front,  right  hand  at  the 
hip,  the  third  and  fourth  lingers  on  the  back  of  the  grip  and 
the  elbow  back. 

The  left  hand  holds  the  scabbard  as  at  attention. 

This  is  the  position  of  carry  saber  dismounted. 

166.  1.  Return,  2.  SABER. 

At  the  command  return,  grasp  the  scabbard  as  in  draw  saber 
and  carry  the  opening  to  the  front.  Carry  the  saber  to  the 
front  with  arm  half  extended  until  the  thumb  is  about  G 
inches  in  front  of  the  chin,  the  blade  vertical,  guard  to  the 
left,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  side  of  the  grip,  the  little 
finger  .joined  with  the  others. 

At  the  command  saber,  move  the  wrist  to  opposite  tne  left 
shoulder,  lower  the  blade  and  pass  it  across  and  along  the 
left  arm,  point  to  the  rear.  Turn  the  head  to  the  left,  fixing 
the  eyes  upon  the  opening  of  the  scabbard;  raise  the  right 
hand  and  insert  the  blade  in  the  scabbard  and  push  it  home. 
Disengage  the  wrist  from  the  saber  knot  and  resume  the  posi- 
tion of  attention. 

167.  Being  at  carry  saber:  3.  Present,  2. 'SABER. 
Without  changing  the  position  of  the  left  hand,  execute  at 

the  command  saber  what  is  prescribed  in  par.  166  at  the  com- 
mand return,  except  that  the  grip  is  held  in  the  full  grasp. 
The  saber  is  said  to  be  held  in  the  full  grasp  when  all  four 
fingers  grasp  the  grip,  the  thumb  extending  along  the  back 
in  the  groove,  the  fingers  pressing  the  back  of  the  grip  against 
the  heel  of  the  hand. 

Officers  at  the  command :  1.  Present,  execute  present  saber 
as  described  above;  at  the  command:  2.  SABER,  they  lower 
the  saber  until  the  point  is  12  inches  from  the  ground  and 
directed  to  the  front,  guard  to  the  left,  right  arm  straight, 
hand  beside  the  thigh.  Mounted,  the  point  is  lowered  to  the 
level  of  the  stirrup. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        Ill 

168.  Being  at  carry  saber:   1.  Port,  2.  SABER. 

Carry  the  right  foot  about  24  inches  to  the  right,  bring  the 
left  hand  to  the  position'  of  the  bridle  hand  and  raise  the 
saber  to  a  vertical  position,  guard  to  the  front,  grip  held  in 
the  full  grasp,  right  hand  about  12  inches  in  front  of  the 
shoulder. 

To  resume  the  carry:  1.  Carry,  2.  SABER. 

169.  Being  at  carry  saber,  or  in  any  position :  GUARD. 
Carry  the  right  foot  about  24  inches  to  the  right  and  bend 

knees  to  simulate  the  position  mounted.     Incline  the  body  to 
the  front  from  the  waist  (not  the  hips).     Let  the  blade  fall  to 


Guard,  to  the, 


Brant 


FIG.  36,  par.  169. 


the  front  to  a  position  nearly  horizontal,  elbow  well  away  from 
the  body,  forearm  and  saber  forming  one  straight  line,  guard 
to  the  right,  point  at  the  height  of  the  adversary's  breast,  the 
left  hand  in  the  position  of  the  bridle  hand.  (Fig.  24.) 

170.  Being  at  carry  saber:  1.  Inspection,  2.  SABER. 

Carry  the  right  hand  upward,  arm  half  extended  until  the 
thumb  is  at  the  height  of  the  chin,-  grip  held  in  the  full  grasp, 
blade  vertical,  guard  to  the  left.  Make  a  slight  pause,  then 
loosen  the  grasp  on  the  grip  and  turn  the  saber  with  the 
guard  to  the  right.  .Again  make  a  slight  pause,  then  resume 
the  first  position  and  return  to  the  carry. 

171.  Saber  exercise  is  conducted,  and  instruction  given,  as 
prescribed  in  the  Saber  exercise.     For  Manual  of  the  Saber 
Mounted,  see  par.  245. 


112        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Section  4.   School  of  the  Trooper,   Mounted, 


172.  Object.  —  The  primary  object  of  this  school  is  to  train 
the  trooper   in   horsemanship   and   in  tin;   ready   use  of  his 
weapons  while  mounted. 

173.  The  instructor.  —  It  is  essential  that  the  instructor  (par. 
37)  be  a  skilled  and  experienced  horseman,  properly  mounted.. 
He  should  always  supplement  the  original  explanation  of  :i 
movement  by  executing  it  himself,  so  that  the  recruits  may 
actually   see   the   result    that    is   desired    and    the   menus   by 
which  it  is  effected. 

174.  Cautions  to  instructor*.—  The  instructor  must   tjrs;   de- 
velop the  confidence  of  the  recruit,  give  him  a  proper  seat. 
and   make    him    supple   on    the   horse.      Progress    should    In- 
suited  to  his  capacity  and  exempt  him  as  far  as  practicable 
from  falls  or  other  accidents.     Instruction  in  the  use  of  the 
aids  and  in  the  means  employed  to  train  the  horse  to  obey 
them  will  follow. 

When  the  recruit  lias  acquired  confidence  in  his  ability  in 
ride  and  control  his  horse  he  will  be  instructed  in  the  usr  of 
arms  mounted. 

Instruction  is  given  individually  ;  every  new  movement  is 
made  the  object  of  a  particular  lesson  given  to  each  trooper 
in  turn. 

During  the  exercise  the  instructor  avoids  general  remarks 
and  (in  so  far  as  possible)  unfamiliar  terms;  in  the  correc- 
tion of  faults  he  addresses  by  name  those  committing  them. 

He  passes  frequently  from  one  trooper  to  another  repeating 
advice  and  endeavoring  to  impress  upon  the  troopers  the  prin- 
ciples embodied  in  the  regulations.  In  doing  this  he  need  not 
use  the  language  of  the  text. 

.  The  instructor  may  be  on  foot  or  mounted.  For  the  first 
lessons  it  is  advantageous  to  remain  on  foot  so  as  better  to 
explain  movements  and  correct  faults. 

Steady,  well-trained  horses  are  selected  for  the  first  lessons. 
The  troopers  exchange  horses  from  time  to  time  during  the 
lesson  on  indication  from  the  instructor, 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         113 

There  should  be  frequent  rests,  especially  with  recruits. 
During  these  rests  advantage  may  be  taken  of  the  opportunity 
ti  question  the  troopers  respecting  the  instruction  they  have 
received. 

In  all  exercises  the  instructor  varies  the  gait  so  as  not  to 
weary  the  troopers  or  the  horses.  The  instruction  is  conducted 
without  hurry.  The  daily  work  begins  and  ends  at  the  walk. 

175.  The  standard  required  of  troopers. — To  be  a  good  mili- 
tary horseman  each  trooper  should — 

(a)  Have  a  strong  seat. 

(b)  Be  able  to  apply  correctly  the  aids  by  which  a  horse  is 
controlled. 

(c)  Be  capable  of  covering  long  distances  on  horseback  with 
the  least  possible  fatigue  to  his  horse  and  to  himself. 

(rZ)  Be  able  to  use  his  horse  to  the  utmost  advantage  in  a 
mounted  fight. 

(c)  Be  capable  of  riding  across  country. 

(/)  Under  proper  directions,  be  able  to  train  an  unbroken 
horse  in  garrison  and  in  the  field,  understand  how  to  detect 
and  treat  the  minor  ailments  to  which  the  horse  is  liable,  and 
be  a  good  groom. 

All  officers,  in  addition  to  being  good  military  horsemen  and 
instructors  in  riding,  must  be  able  to  train  remounts  and  to 
direct  their  training. 

177.  General  provisions. — For  the  preparatory  exercises  the 
horses  are  saddled  and  equipped  with  the  snaffle  bit  only, 
saddles  stripped.  Spurs  are  not  worn. 

These  exercises  are  conducted  at  first  in  a  riding  hall  or 
on  an  inclosed  course  out  of  doors. 

References  to  the  riding  hall  are  to  be  understood  as  ordi- 
narily applying  equally  to  any  out-of-doors  inclosurc  or  to 
the  space  included  in  any  course  marked  off  for  instruction 
in  equitation  (pars.  269,  296). 

At  first,  the  troopers,  dismounted,  lead  their  horses  to  the 
riding  hall  and  return  them  to  the  stable  in  the  same  manner. 
When  they  have  received  sufficient  instruction  they  go  and 
return  mounted. 

As  soon  as  the  instruction  has  advanced  sufficiently  to  per- 
mit the  use  of  such  commands  and  methods,  the  instructor  will 


114        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

confine  himself  to  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  the 
School  of  the  Trooper. 

TO  FOLD  THE  SADDLE  BLANKET. 

178.  The  blanket,  after  being  well  shaken,  will  be  folded  into 
six  thicknesses,  as  follows :  Hold  it  well  up  by  the  two  cor- 
ners, the  long  way  up  and  down;  double  it  lengthwise  (so  the 
fold  will  come  between  the  "  U  "  and  "  S  "),  the  folded  corner 
(middle  of  blanket)  in  the  left  hand;  take  the  folded  comer 
between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  thimb 
pointing  to  the  left;  slip  the  left  hand  down  the  folded  edge 
two-thirds  its  length  and  seize  it  with  the  thumb  and  second 
finger ;  raise  the  hands  to  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  the 
blanket  between  them  extended ;  bring  th&  hands  together, 
the  double  fold  falling  outward ;  pass  the  folded  corner  from 
the  right  hand  into  the  left  hand,  between  the  thumb  and 
forefinger,  slip  the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand  between 
the  folds  and  seize  the  double  folded  corner;  turn  the  left 
(disengaged)  corner  in  and  seize  it  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand,  the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand 
stretching  and  evening  the  folds ;  after  evening  the  folds  grasp 
the  corners  and  shake  the  blanket  well  in  order  to  smooth  the 
folds ;  raise  the  blanket  and  place  it  between  the  chin  and 
breast;  slip  the  hands  down  half  way,  the  first  two  fingers 
outside,  the  other  fingers  and  thumb  of  each  hand  inside,  seize 
the  blanket  with  the  thumbs  and  first  two  fingers  and  let  the 
part  under  the  chin  fall  forward ;  hold  the  blanket  up,  arms 
extended,  even  the  lower  edges,  seize  the  middle  points  be- 
tween the  thumbs  and  forefingers,  and  flirt  the  outside  part 
over  the  right  arm ;  the  blanket  is  thus  held  before  placing  it 
on  the  horse. 

While  retaining  the  general  method  of  folding  the  blanket 
as  above  indicated,  troop  commanders  will  require  the  blanket 
to  be  refolded  frequently  with  a  view  to  equalizing  the  wear 
on  the  different  sections  of  the  blanket. 

TO  PUT  ON  THE  BLANKET  AND   SURCINGLE. 

179.  The  instructor   commands:   BLANKET. 

Approach  the  horse  on  the  near  (left)  side,  with  the  blanket 
folded  and  held  as  just  described;  place  it  well  forward  on 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        115 

liis  bark  by  tossing  the  part  of  the  blanket  over  the  right  arm 
tr  the  off  (right)  side  of  the  horse,  still  keeping  hold  of  the 
middle  points;  slide  the  blanket  once  or  twice  from  front  to 
rew  to  smooth  the  hair.  Being  careful  to  raise  the  blanket 
in  bringing  it  forward,  place  the  blanket  with  the  forefinger  of 
the  left  hand  on  the  withers  and  the  forefinger  of  the  right 
hand  011  the  backbone,  the  blanket  smooth;  it  should  then  be 
well  forward  with  the  edges  on  the  left  side ;  remove  the  locks 
of  mane  that  may  be  under  it;  pass  the  buckle  end  of  the 
surcingle  over  the  middle  of  the  blanket  and  buckle  it  on  the 
near  side  a  little  below  the  edge  of  the  blanket. 

TO  PUT  ON  AND  TAKE  OFF  THE  WATERING  BRIDLE. 

180.  The  instructor  commands :  BRIDLE. 

Take  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  the  bit  in  the  left;  ap- 
proach the  horse  on  the  near  side,  slip  the  reins  over  the 
horse's  head  and.  let  them  rest  on  his  neck ;  reach  under  and 
engage  the  snap  in  the  right  halter  ring;  insert  the  left  thumb 
in  the  side  of  the  horse's  mouth  above  the  tush  and  press  open 
the  lower  jaw:  insert  the  bit  and  engage  the  snap  in  the  left 
halter  ring.  The  bit  should  hang  so  as  to  touch,  but  not  draw 
up,', the  corners  of  the  mouth.  At  the  command  unbridle,  pass 
the  reins  over  the  horse's  head  and  disengage  the  snaps. 

TO   SADDLE. 

181.  (ft-)  (McClellan  saddle.)  For  instruction  the  saddle  may 
be  placed  four  yards  in  rear  or  front  of  the  horse.     The  stir- 
rups are  crossed  over  the  seat,  the  right  one  uppermost ;  then 
the  cincha  and  cincha  strap  are  crossed  above  the  stirrups,  the 
strap  uppermost.     The  blanket  having  been  placed  as  previ- 
ously explained,  the  instructor  commands:  SADDLE. 

Seize  the  pommel  of  the  saddle  with  the  left  hand  and  the 
cantle  with  the  right,  approach  the  horse  on  the  near  side 
from  the  direction  of  the  croup  and  place  the  center  of  the 
saddle  on  the  middle  of  the  horse's  back,  the  end  of  the  side 
bar  about  three-finger  widths  behind  the  point  of  the  shoulder 
blade;  let  down  the  cincha  strap  and  cincha,  pass  to  the  on: 
side,  adjust  the  cincha  and  straps,  and  see  that  the  blanket 


116        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

is  smooth ;  return  to  the  near  side,  raise  the  blanket  slightly 
under  the  pommel  arch  so  that  the  withers  may  not  be  com- 
pressed ;  take  the  cincha  strap  in  the  right  hand,  reach  under 
the  horse  and  seize  the  cincha  ring  with  the  left  hand,  pis* 
the  end  of  the  strap  through  the  ring  from  underneath  (from 
inside  to  outside),  then  up  and  through  the  upper  ring  from 
the  outside,  if  necessary,  make  another  fold  in  the  same 
manner. 

The  strap  is  fastened  as  follows :  Pass  the  end  through  the 
upper  ring  to  the  front ;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand,  place  the 
fingers  of  the  right  between  the  outside  folds  of  the  strap, 
pull  from  the  horse  with  the  right  hand  and  take  up  the  slack 
with  the  left ;  cross  the  strap  over  the  folds,  pass  the  end  of 
it  with  the  right  hand  underneath  and  through  the  upper  ring 
back  of  the  folds,  then  down  and  under  the  loop  that  crosses 
the  folds  and  draw  it  tightly ;  weave  the  ends  of  the  strap  into 
the  strands  of  the  cincha. 

Another  method  of  fastening  the  cincha  strap  is  as  follows : 
Pass  the  end  through  the  upper  ring  to  the  rear ;  seize  it  with 
the  right  hand ;  place  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  between 
the  outer  folds  of  the  strap ;  pull  from  the  horse  with  the  left 
hand  and  take  up  the  slack  with  the  right ;  pass  the  end  of  the 
strap  underneath  and  draw  it  through  the  upper  ring  until  a 
loop  is  formed ;  double  the  loose  end  of  the  strap  and  push  it 
through  the  loop  and  draw  the  loop  taut.  The  free  end  should 
be  long  enough  to  be  seized  conveniently  with  the  hand. 

Having  fastened  the  cincha  strap,  let  down  the  right  stirrup 
and  then  the  left. 

The  surcingle  is  then  buckled  over  the  saddle,  and  should  be 
a  little  looser  than  the  cincha. 

The  cincha  when  first  tied  should  admit  a  finger  between 
it  and  the  belly.  After  exercising  for  a  while  the  cincha  will 
be  found  too  loose  and  should  be  tightened. 

( & )  ( Service  saddle,  model  of  1912. )  Troops  equipped  with 
this  model  will  saddle  as  prescribed  for  the  McClellan  saddle 
with  the  following  modifications : 

Place  the  saddle  on  the  blanket  so  that  the  front  edge  of 
the  side  bar  approaches  the  shoulder  blade  without  pressing 
upon  it.  After  the  saddle  has  been  so  placed,  let  down  the 
girth;  pass  to  the  off  side,  adjust  the  girth  and  saddle  skirt, 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        117 

and  see  tlmt  the  blanket  is  smooth,1  return  to  the  near,  side 
and  push  the  blanket  well  up  into  the  pommel  arch ;  reach 
under  the  horse,  seize  the  girth  with  the  left  hand  and  bring 
up  its  free  end  to  the  near  side  of  the  saddle;  with  the  right 
hand  raise  the  saddle  skirt  and  buckle  the  girth  straps  to  the 
corresponding  buckles  of  the  girth,  beginning  with  the  forward 
strap,  lower  the  saddle  skirt  and  let  down  the  stirrups,  begin- 
ning with  the  right  stirrup.  The  girth  should  ordinarily  be 
about  4  inches  in  rear  of  the  point  of  the  elbow. 

182.  To  approximate  the  length  of  the  stirrup  straps  before 
mounting,  they  are  adjusted  so  that  the  length  of  the  stirrup 
strap,   including  the  stirrup,   is   about   1   inch   less  than  the 
length  of  the  arm,  fingers  extended. 

TO   UNSADDLE. 

183.  The  instructor  commands:   UNSADDLE. 

(a)  (McClellan   saddle.)    Stand   on   the   near   side   of   the 
horse:  unbuckle  and  remove  the  surcingle;  cross  the  left  stir- 
rup over  the  saddle;  loosen  the  cincha  strap  and  lot  down  the 
cincha ;  pass  to  the  off  side,  cross  the  right  stirrup,  then  the 
cincha ;  pass  to  the  near  side,  cross  the  cincha  strap  over  the 
saddle :  grasp  the  pommel  With  the  left  hand,  the  cantle  with 
the  right,  and  remove  the  saddle  over  the  croup  and  place  it 
in  front  or  rear  of  the  hors"e  as  may  be  directed,  pommel  to 
the  front ;  grasp  the  blanket  at  the  withers  with  the  left  hand 
and  at  the  loin  \vith  the  right,  remove  it  in  the  direction  of 
the  croup,  the  edges  falling  together,  wet  side  in,  and  place  it 
on  the  saddle,  folded  edge  on  the  pommel. 

If  in  the  stable,  place  the  saddle  on  its  peg  when  taken  off 
the  horse. 

(b)  (Service  saddle,  model  of  1912.)     Stand  on  the  near 
side  of  the  horse:  cross  the  left  stirrup  over  the  saddle;  raise 
the  saddle  skirt  with  the  left  hand,  and  with  the  right  un- 
buckle the  girth  straps,  beginning  with  the  rear  strap ;   let 
down  the  girth ;  pass  to  the  off  side ;  cross  the  right  stirrup 
and  then  the  girth  over  the  saddle ;  pass  to  the  near  side, 
grasp  the  pommel  with  the  left  hand,   the  cantle  with  the 
right,  and  remove  and  dispose  of  the  saddle  as  prescribed 
in  (a). 


118        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

The  service  saddle,  model  1912,  should  be  hung  on  a  bracket 
sufficiently  wide  for  the  saddle  to  rest  on  its  side  bars.  If  a 
narrower  support  is  used,  the  saddle  will  rest  on  the  low  point 
in  the  leather  seat  and  become  misshapen. 

TO  PUT   ON   AND   TAKE   OFF   THE  BIT   AND  BRIDOON   BRIDLE    (MODEL 

1909). 

184.  Before  bridling  the  curb  chain  is  unhooked  on  the  near 
side    The  instructor  commands :  BRIDLE. 

Take  the  reins  in  the  right,  the  crownpiece  in  the  left  hand ; 
approach  the  horse  on  the  near  side,  passing  the  right  hand 
along  his  neck;  slip  both  reins  over  his  head  and  let  them 
rest  on  his  neck ;  take  the  crownpiece  in  the  right  hand  and 
the  lower  left  branch  of  the  curb  bit  in  the  left  hand,  the 
forefinger  against  the  mouthpiece,  the  snaffle  bit  above  and 
resting  on  the  mouthpiece  of  the  curb  bit;  bring  the  crown- 
piece  in  front  of  and  slightly  below  its  proper  position ;  insert 
the  thumb  into  the  side  of  the  mouth  above  the  tush ;  press 
open  the  lower  jaw  and  insert  the  bits  by  raising  the  crown- 
piece;  with  the  left  hand  draw  the  ears  gently  under  the 
crownpiece,  beginning  with  the  left  ear ;  arrange  the  forelock, 
secure  the  throatlatch,  and  hook  up  the  curb  chain  on  the 
near  side  below  the  snaffle  bit. 

The  bridle  is  adjusted  as  prescribed  in  par.  302. 

The  throatlatch  should  admit  four  fingers  between  it  and 
the  throat. 

185.  At  the  discretion  of  the  instructor,  the  halter  may  be 
taken  off  before  bridling,  the  reins  being  first  passed  over  the 
neck;  the  hitching  strap,  if  not  left  at  the  manger  or  picket 
line,  is  tied  around  the  horse's  neck ;  if  the  horse  be  saddled,  in 
the  near  pommel  ring. 

186.  The  instructor  commands:   UNBRIDLE. 

Stand  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse;  pass  the  reins  over 
the  horse's  head,  placing  them  on  the  bend  of  the  left  arm; 
unhook  the  curb  chain  on  the  near  side;  unbuckle  the  throat- 
latch,  grasp  the  crownpiece  with  the  right  hand  and,  assisting 
with  the  left  hand,  gently  disengage  the  ears;  gently  dis- 
engage the  bits  from  the  horse's  mouth  with  the  left  hand  by 
lowering  the  crownpiece ;  place  the  crownpiece  in  the  palm  of 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         119 

the  left  hand,  take  the  reins  in  the  right  hand,  pass  them 
together  over  the  crownpiece,  make  two  or  three  turns  around, 
the  bridle,  then  pass  the  bight  between  the  brow  band  and 
crownpiece  and  draw  it  snug. 

The  bridle  is  hung  up  by  the  reins  or  placed  across  the  sad- 
dle on  the  blanket. 

If  the  horse  has  no  halter  on,  unbridle  and  push  the  bridle 
buck  so  that  the  crownpiece  will  rest  on  the  neck  behind  the 
poll  until  the  halter  -is  replaced. 

187.  Stand  to  horse:   At  this  command  each  trooper  places 
himself,  facing  to  the  front,  on  the  near  side  of  the  horse,  oppo- 
site his  head,  and  takes  the  position  of  attention,  except  that 
the  right  hand,  nails  down,  grasps  the  reins,  the  forefinger 
separating  them,  about  G  inches  from  the  bit.     The  bights  of 
the  reins  rest  on  the  neck  near  the  pommel  of  the  saddle. 

188.  To  lead  out:   The  troopers  being  at  stand  to  horse,  to 
leave  the  stable  or  picket  line,  the  instructor  commands:  LEAD 
OUT. 

Each  trooper,  holding  his  right  hand  well  up  and  firm,  leads 
his  horse,  without  looking  at  him,  to  the  place  designated  by 
the  instructor. 

189.  Upon  entering  the  riding  hall  or  inclosure  the  instructor 
disposes  the  troopers  upon  a  line  at  intervals  of  3  yards,  the 
troopers  at  stand  to  horse,  the  horses  correctly  disposed  and 
perpendicular  to  the  line  of  troopers. 

A  horse  is  correctly  disposed  when  he  stands  squarely  on  all 
four  feet,  having  his  head,  neck,  and  body  in  line. 

190.  Stirrups:  The  stirrups  are  properly  adjusted  when,  the 
trooper  being  properly  seated  with  the  feet  removed  from  the 
stirrups  and  the  legs  falling  naturally,  the  tread  of  the  stir- 
rups is  about  1  inch  above  the  top  of  the  heel  of  the  shoe. 

The  stirrups  should  bear  only  the  weight  of  the  lower  leg; 
about  one-third  of  the  foot  should  be  inserted  in  the  stirrup, 
so  that  the  ball  of  the  foot  rests  on  the  tread,  the  heel  lower 
than  the  toe. 

The  flat  of  the  stirrup  strap  should  rest  against  the  leg  of 
the  mounted  trooper.  To  accomplish  this  the  trooper's  toe 
should  be  so  inserted  in  the  stirrup  as  to  place  the  front 
branch  of  the  latter  on  the  outside.  By  the  front  branch  of 
the  stirrup  is  meant  the  forward  branch  as  the  stirrup  hangs 
before  the  trooper  mounts. 


120        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Placing  too  much  weight  on  the  stirrup  disturbs  the  seat  and 
contracts  the  leg,  hindering  its  freedom  of  action. 

If  the  toe  is  not  inserted  far  enough  the  trooper  risks  losing 
his  stirrup ;  if  inserted  too  far  suppleness  is  diminished. 

The  heel  is  carried  naturally  lower  than  the  toe  if  the  ankle 
joint  is  not  rigid. 

For  the  extended'  gallop,  in  the  charge,  for  the  use  of 
weapons,  and  for  leaping  obstacles  the  foot  is  inserted  fully 
in  the  stirrup. 

191.  To  mount:   Being  at  stand  to  horse,  MOUNT. 

(a)  Face  to  the  right,  drop  the  right  rein,  grasp  the  left 
rein  in  the  right  hand,  take  two  steps  to  the  right,  sliding 
the  hand  along  the  left  rein,  make  a  half  face. to  the  left 
when  opposite  the  girth;  with  the  aid  of  the  left  hand  take 
both  reins  in  the  right,  forefinger  between  the  reins,  the  right 
hand  on  the  pommel,  the  reins  coming  into  the  hand  on  the 
side  of  the  forefinger,  and  held  so  as  to  feel  lightly  the  horse's 
mouth,  the  bight  falling  on  the  off  side.  Place  the  left  foot 
in  the  stirrup,  assisted  by  the  left  hand  if  necessary,  and 
bring  the  left  knee  against  the  saddle;  grasp  a  lock  of  the 
mane  with  the  left  hand,  lock  coming  out  between  the  thumb 
and  forefinger. 

(&)  Spring  from  the  right  foot,  keeping  the  hands  firmly  in 
place,  the  left  knee  bent  and  pressed  against  the  saddle,  bring 
the  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left,  body  inclining  slightly 
forward ;  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  without 
touching  it.  sit  down  lightly  in  the  saddle;  let  go  of  the  mane; 
insert  the  right  foot  in  the  stirrup,  assisted  by  the  right  hand 
if -necessary ;  take  a  rein  in  each  hand,  the  rein  coming  into 
the  hand  under  the  little  finger  and  passing  out  over  the  sec- 
ond joint  of  the  forefinger,  the  thumbs  closed  on  the  reins,  the 
bight  of  the  reins  falling  to  the  right. 

The  reins  should  be  so  held  that  the  trooper  feels  lightly 
the  horse's  mouth,  the  fingers  closed  until  the  nails  lightly 
touch  the  palms  of  the  hands ;  the  reins  well  up  in  the  crotch 
of  the  fingers ;  the  backs  of  the  hands  vertical  and  in  prolonga- 
tion of  the  forearm ;  the  wrists  flexible ;  the  elbows  near  the 
body  and  low,  so  that  the  forearms  will  be  in  prolongation  of 
the  reins ;  the  hands  about  9  inches  apart, 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        121 

The  instructor  takes  care  that  the  recruit  in  adjusting  the 
reins  provokes  no  movement  of  the  horse  and  deranges  in  no 
manner  the  position  of  the  horse's  head. 

The  instructor  cautions  the  trooper  to  avoid  touching  the 
horse  with  the  left  toe  in  mounting;  this  fault  begets  nearly 
all  the  resistance  of  horses  to  standing  quietly  while  being 
mounted. 

The  modifications  incident  to  mounting  and  dismounting  a 
horse  equipped  with  the  double  snaffle  or  bit  and  bridoon  are 
indicated  in  pars.  271,  303,  and  307.  The  troopers  are  also 
trained  to  mount  on  the  right  side. 

192.  To  dismount:    Being  halted,  DISMOUNT. 

(a)  Seize  the  reins  with  the  right  hand  in  front  of  and  near 
the  left,  forefinger  between  the  reins,  the  reins  entering  the 
hand  from  the  side  of  the  forefinger ;  drop  the  reins  with  the 
left  hand;  place  the  right  hand  on  the  pommel ;  grasp  a  lock 
of  the  mane  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  coming  out  between 
the  thumb   and  forefinger ;   take  the  right  foot  out  of  the 
stirrup. 

( b )  Rise  upon  the  left  stirrup,  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent, 
over  the  croup  without  touching  the  horse,  and  bring  the  right 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  left,  the  left  knee  against  the  saddle, 
the  upper  part  of  the  body  inclined  slightly  forward ;  descend 
lightly  to  the  ground  and  take  the  position  of  stand  to  horse. 

The  troopers  are  also  trained  to  dismount  on  the  right  side. 

193.  Commanding  officers  may  authorize  the  following  alter- 
native method  of  mounting  and  dismounting  by  officers  and 
enlisted  men  on  all  occasions  except  those  when  it  is  required 
that   mounting   and   dismounting  be   executed   in   unison   at 
the  corresponding  command    (par.  354).     Instruction  in  the 
methods  authorized  in  this  paragraph  is  optional. 

Being  at  stand  to  horse,  at  the  command  MOUNT,  face  to  the 
right,  drop  the  right  rein,  take  a  step  to  the  right  to  be  oppo- 
site the  shoulder  of  'the  horse ;  at  the  same  time  sieze  the  bights 
of  the  reins  in  the  right  hand  and  pull  them  taut  enough  to 
give  a  gentle,  even  bearing  on  the  horse's  mouth ;  grasp  the 
reins  with  the  left  hand,  with  the  little  finger  between  them, 
and  the  bight  coming  out  b'etween  the  thumb  and  forefinger, 
which  also  hold  a  lock  of  the  mane.  Place  the  left  foot  in  the 


122       MANTTAI,  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

stirrup,  assisted  by  the  right  hand  if  necessary,  and  bring  the 
left  knee  against  the  saddle. 

Place  the  right  hand  upon  the  cantle.  rise  by  an  effort  of 
the  right  leg,  aided  by  the  arms,  the  left  knee  bent  and 
pressed  against  the  saddle,  the  upper  part  of  the  body  inclined 
slightly  forward  to  keep  the  saddle  from  turning;  bring  the 
right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left;  change  the  right  hand  to 
the  pommel,  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  with- 
out touching  it,  and  sit  down  lightly  in  the  saddle.  Put  the 
right  foot  in  the  stirrup,  assisted  by  the  right  hand  if  neces- 
sary. 

At  the  command  DISMOUNT,  pass  the  right  rein  into  the 
left  hand  and  grasp  with  this  hand  a  lock  of  the  mane,  place 
the  right  hand  on  the  pommel,  and  remove  the  right  foot  from 
the  stirrup ;  pass  the  right  leg,  knee  bent,  over  the  croup  with- 
out touching  the  horse  and  bring  the  right  foot  by  the  side  of 
the  left,  the  left  knee  against  the  saddle,  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  inclined  slightly  forward,  right  hand  on  the  cantle. 
Descend  lightly  to  the  ground  and  take  the  position  of  stand 
to  horse. 

194.  To  take  the  reins  in  one  hand  and  to  separate  them:   At 
the  command  IN  LEFT  HAND   TAKE  REINS,  place  the  left 
hand  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  pass  the  right  rein  into 
the  left  hand,  separating  it  from  the  left  rein  by  the  little 
finger;  let  the  ri^ht  hand  fall  by  the  side. 

195.  At  the  command  IN  BOTH  HANDS  TAKE  REINS,  grasp 
the  right  rein  \Y...:    the  right  hand  and  replace  the  hands  0 
inches  apart. 

The  reins  are  taken  in  the  right  hand  and  again  separated 
in  a  similar  manner. 

196.  To  adjust  the  reins  the  trooper  brings  the  wrists  to- 
gether and  grasps  with  one  hand,  above  and  near  the  opposite 
thumb,  the  rein  that  he  desires  to  shorten. 

197.  The  instructor  causes  the  reins  to 'be  dropped  and  re- 
taken by  the  commands  DROP  REINS  and  REINS. 

At  the  first  command,  the  trooper  drops  the  reins  behind 
the  pommel  and  lets  the  hands  fall  by  the  side. 

The  reins  are  dropped  as  an*  exceptional  measure,  and 
always  with  precaution  against  accident. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        123 

198.  Position  of  the  trooper,  or  attention   (mounted):  The 
position   described   below   should   be   considered   a    standard 
toward  which  all  troopers  should  gradually  approximate. 

The  buttocks  bearing  equally  upon  and  well  forward  in  the 
middle  of  the  saddle. 

The  thighs  turned  without  constraint  upon  their  flat  side, 
clamping  the  horse  evenly  and  stretched  only  by  their  own 
weight  and  that  of  the  lower  legs. 

The  knees  bent  and  flexible. 

The  lower  legs  falling  naturally,  the  calves  in  contact  with 
the  horse  without  pressure,  the  toes  dropping  naturally  when 
the  trooper  is  without  stirrups. 

The  back  supple  and  never  hollowed. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  easy,  free,  and  erect. 

The  shoulders  thrown  back  evenly. 

The  arms  free,  the  elbows  falling  naturally. 

The  head  erect  and  turned  to  the  front,  but  without  stiffness. 

Eyes  alert,  well  up,  and  directed  to  the  trooper's  front. 

The  reins  held  as  heretofore  prescribed. 

This  position  may  be  modified  by  the  instructor  to  suit 
varying  conditions  and  unusual  conformations.  When  not  at 
attention,  the  head  and  eyes  are  directed  so  as  best  to  favor 
alertness  and  observation.  In  other  respects  the  position 
should  be  practically  unchanged. 

199.  The  body  and  lower  legs  are  movable  and  should  be 
under  the  control  of  the  trooper,  either  acting  intermittently 
as  aids  for  guiding  the  horse  or  as  a  means  of  binding  the 
rider  to  the  horse  while  following  his  movements. 

The  thighs,  on  the  other  hand,  should  remain  fixed  im- 
movably to  the  saddle,  except  while  posting  at  the  trot. .  This 
fixity  should  be  obtained  not  by  the  pressure  of  the  knees 
but  by  the  clinging  of  the  buttocks,  which  is  secured  by  the 
suppleness  of  the-  loins  and  the  relaxation  of  the  thighs.  It 
is  acquired  very  rapidly  by  daily  ".rotation  of  the  thiglis" 
which  gradually  presses  the  large  thigh  muscles  to  the  rear 
and  permits  the  femur  to  rest  solidly  against  the  saddle. 

The  trooper  should  sit  with  his  buttocks  well  under  the 
upper  part  of  his  body  and  especially  avoid  bowing  the  back 
by  thrusting  the  buttocks  to  the  rear  and  the  lower  part  of 
the  spine  to  the  front.  Sitting  well  forward  in  the  middle 


124       MANUAL  TOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

of  the  saddle  will  tend  to  assist  the  trooper  in  avoiding  the 
defect  just  referred  to.  If  the  buttocks  are  thrust  back  too 
much  the  trooper  can  not  conform  to.  the  movements  of  the 
horse  and  carries  forward  the  upper  part  of  his  body. 

If  the  thigh  is  too  nearly  horizontal,  the  trooper  is  doubled 
up  and  his  power  of  action  diminished ;  if  the  thigh  is  too 
nearly  vertical,  the  trooper  is  on  the  crotch  and  lacks  ease.  • 

To  sum  up :  The  trooper  should  take  a  relaxed  sitting  posi- 
tion, squarely  on  his  buttocks,  with  the  thighs  inclined  down- 
ward. 

The  various  defects  of  position  are  overcome  by  suitable 
suppling  exercises  (pars.  209-220). 

200.  The  aids. — The  legs,  the  reins,  and  the  weight  are  the 
means  of  controlling  the  horse  in  riding.     They  are  called 
the  aids. 

201.  The  legs:   The  legs  serve  to  urge  the  horse  forward,  to 
increase  his  pace  or  gait,  and  to  engage  the  hind  quarters  or 
move  them  laterally.     The  legs  act  by  the  pressure  of  the 
calves.     If  pressure  alone  is  insufficient  the  trooper  increases 
the  action  by  blows  with  his  calves. 

It  is  essential  to  obtain  from  the  horse  perfect  obedience  to 
the  action  of  the  legs.  He  should  respond  to  the  simultaneous 
and  equal  action  of  both  legs  by  engaging  his  hindquarters 
and  moving  forward ;  to  the  predominant  action  of  one  leg  by 
moving  his  haunches  to  the  opposite  side. 

202.  The   reins:    The  reins   serve  to   prepare  the  horse   to 
move,  to  decrease  or  increase  his  pace,  to  change  the  gait,  or 
to  change  direction. 

Contact  is  a  light  bearing  of  the  mouth  of  the  horse  on  the 
hand  of  the  rider.  It  should  be  constantly  maintained, 

The  reins  are  held  in  the  full  hand,  the  thumb  pressing 
them  lightly  upon  the  second  joint  of  the  forefinger.  By 
means  of  closing  and  relaxing  the  fingers*  and  flexing  the 
wrist,  arm,  and  shoulder,  the  trooper,  while  maintaining  con- 
tact and  keeping  the  reins  taut,  follows  easily  the  movements 
of  the  head  of  the  horse  without  anticipating  or  interfering 
with  these  movements.  The  hand  is  then  said  to  be  passive. 
It  is  kept  so  as  long  as  the  trooper  is  not  required  to  change 
the  pace,  gait,  or  direction. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         125 

203.  The  direct  rein:  When  the  trooper,  with  the  hands  sep- 
arated and  the  reins  adjusted,  closes  his  fingers  upon  the  reins 
without  raising  the  hands  he  exercises  an  action  from  front  to 
rear,  called  the  effect  of  the  direct  reins.    This  effect,  when  on 
one  rein  only,  is  called  that  of  the  right  (or  left)  direct  rein. 

204.  The  leading  rein:   When  the  trooper  carries  the  right 
hand  to  the  right  and  forward  in  a  manner  to  preserve  contact 
but  not  to  increase  pressure  on  the  bit  the  effect  is  called  that 
of  the  right  leading  rein. 

The  back  of  the  hand  should  remain  vertical,  the  wrist  in 
prolongation  of  the  forearm,  the  elbow  remaining  near  the 
body. 

The  horse's  head  and  neck  are  drawn  to  the  right,  the  shoul- 
ders follow,  and  he  turns  to  the  right. 

205.  The  bearing  rein:   When  the  trooper  carries  the  right 
hand  forward,  upward,  and  to  the  left  in  a  manner  to  pre- 
serve contact,  but  not  to  increase  pressure  on  the  bit,  the 
effect  is  said  to  be  that  of  the  right  bearing  rein. 

The  back  of  the  hand  should  remain  vertical,  the  wrist  in 
prolongation  of  the  forearm. 

The  horse's  head  is  turned  slightly  to  the  right,  but  the 
effect  is  to  the  left ;  the  neck  bends  and  is  convex  to  the  left 
and  is  followed  by  the  shoulders.  The  horse  turns  to  the  left. 

The  action  of  the  bearing  rein  is  much  more  powerful  than 
that  of  the  leading  rein,  and  is  used  to  the  exclusion  of  the 
latter  to  turn  the  horse  when  riding  with  the  reins  in  one 
hand. 

206.  The  indirect  rein  of  opposition:  When  the  trooper  car- 
ries the  right  hand  to  the  left  in  a  manner  to  press  the  shoul- 
ders to  the  left  and  to  produce  a  diagonal  traction  on  the  rein 
in  the  direction  of  the  left  shoulder  or  haunch  the  effect  is 
called  that  of  the  right  indirect  rein  of  opposition. 

Its  effect  may  be  produced  in  front  of  the  withers  if  the 
hand  be  slightly  raised ;  in  rear  of  the  withers  if  the  hand  be 
slightly  lowered.  It  is  frequently  used  by  the  trooper  when 
riding  with  one  hand  (as  he  must  do  in  order  to  use  his 
weapons),  and  its  effect  should  be  studied  and  practiced  from, 
the  beginning. 

207.  Manner  of  applying  the  aids :  The  action  of  the  reins 
and  legs  and  weight  should  not  be  continuous.    The  trooper 


126       MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

alternately  closes  and  relaxes  the  fingers,  the  hands  preserv- 
ing contact  in  the  intervals  between  the  actions.  In  the  same 
manner  he  uses  the  legs,  neither  gripping  nor  releasing  alto- 
gether, but  preserving  light  contact  in  the  intervals  between 
the  blows  with  the  calve*.  The  weight  likewise  is  used  in  a 
similar  manner,  being  quickly  applied  to  the  front,  to  the 
rear,  or  to  a  side,  alternating  with  returns  to  the  normal 
position. 

If  an  action  of  the  aids  is  prolonged  the  horse  has  oppor- 
tunity to  establish  the  corresponding  resistance,  but  it'  pro- 
duced by  repeated  applications  the  effect  is  very  marked. 

All  action  of  the  aids  should  diminish  in  intensity  when 
obedience  begins  and  cease  entirely  as  soon  as  the  desired 
result  is  secured. 

Troopers  must  be  thoroughly  trained  in  riding  with  the 
reins  in  one  hand. 

208.  The  instructor,  in  teaching  troopers  to  avail  themselves 
of  their  legs  and  reins,  is  governed  by  the  preceding  consid- 
erations, and  from  the  first  watches  vigilantly  the  action  of 
the  aids. 

The  hand  should  always  be  kept  low.  The  most  thought- 
ful care  should  be  exercised  in  the  combined  application  of  the 
aids,  so  that  they  may  not  be  opposed  to  each  other  in  their 
action;  that  is.  one  favoring  the  intended  movement,  the  other 
opposing  it. 

The  instructor  impresses  upon  the  troopers  that  their  hands 
must  be  kept  still ;  that  is,  free  from  bobbing  up  and  down, 
and  pulling,  and  from  giving  and  taking  when  there  is  no 
reason  therefor. 

Likewise  their  legs  should  remain  in  light  contact  with  the 
horse's  sides  and  the  heels  not  be  used  to  kick  the  horse 
constantly  in  a  nervous  manner. 

Moreover,  that  the  effects  of  the  aids  may  be  perfectly 
clear,  and  that  there  may  be  no  contradiction  between  them. 
there  should  never  be  simultaneous  action  of  the  direct  reins 
demanding  slowing  up  or  halting  and  of  the  legs  provoking  a 
forward  movement.  This  condition  is  essential  for  preserving 
the  composure  indispensable  to  the  horses  of  the  troop. 

242.  Posting :  Posting  is  habitually  employed  when  the  troop- 
ers have  stirrups  and  understand  their  use. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        127 

It  is  executed  as  follows:  The  horse  moving  at  a  trot,  the 
trooper  inclines  the  upper  part  of  his  body  forward,  then 
supporting  himself  on  the  stirrups  while  maintaining  the 
clinging  of  his  knees  he  rises  under  the  impulsion  of  the  horse, 
maintains  his  position  detached  from  the  saddle  while  the 
succeeding  impulse  is  produced,  again  sits  down  in  the  saddle, 
and  continues  in  this  way,  avoiding  alternate  impulses. 

At  the  beginning  the  mechanism  of  posting  is  made  easier 
to  the  trooper  by  causing  him  to  stroke  the  horse's  neck  or  to 
grasp  a  lock  of  the  mane  with  either  hand,  thus  determining 
the  forward  inclination  of  the  body. 

Its  proper  execution  requires  that  the  seat  be  raised  moder- 
ately, that  contact  with  the  saddle  be  resumed  gently  and 
without  shock,  that  the  full  support  of  the  stirrup  be  obtained 
while  keeping  the  lower  leg  steady,  that  the  ankle  joint  be 
supple,  and  that  the  heel  be  kept  lower  than  the  toe. 

243.  Care  of  horses  and  saddlery:  The  recruits  will  be  given 
talks  and  practical  illustrations  in  every  phase  of  the  care  of 
horses  and  the  care  of  saddlery.     This  in  addition  to  their 
daily  attention  to  those  subjects  as  a  matter  of  routine. 

244.  The  use  of  arms,  mounted. — During  the  period  in  which 
the  instruction  in  the  school  of  the  trooper  is  held,  there  must 
be  thorough  instruction  in  the  use  of  arms  mounted.    After  the 
first  few  drills  there  should  be  daily  instruction  in  some  phase 
of  this  important  part  of  the  trooper's  training.     Progress  in 
the  more  advanced  steps  of  this  instruction  must  necessarily 
depend  upon  the  trooper's  progress  in  horsemanship ;  but  by 
making  the  dismounted  instruction  thorough  and  keeping  it 
well  in  advance  of  the  corresponding  parts  of  the  mounted 
program,   many  difficulties  will  be  obviated  and  much  time 
saved.     Success  with  the  pistol  and  saber  will  be  dependent 
upon  that  familiarity  with  their  use  that  can  be  gained  only 
by  daily  practice  extending  over  a  considerable  period.     The 
dismounted  instruction  already  prescribed  in  connection  with 
the  use  of  the  weapons  must  be  supplemented  by  thorough 
mounted  work  at  all  gaits,  when  passing  obstacles,  etc.     The 
troope.  must  learn  to  control  his  horse  thoroughly  with  one 
hand  while  carrying  and  using  his  weapon  in  the  other;  he 
must  learn  to  handle  his  weapon  mounted  with  a  minimum  of 
danger  to  himself,  his  comrades,  or  his  horse.     The  principal 


128        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

drill  on  at  least  one  day  of  each  week  during  the  entire  period 
devoted  to  the  school  of  the  trooper  should  ordinarily  be  de- 
voted to  the  above  instruction,  thus  supplementing  and  testing 
the  results  accomplished  in  the  shorter  daily  drills.  At  this 
weekly  drill  the  troopers  should  habitually  appear  fully  armed 
and  equipped,  the  saddles  being  packed  as  for  field  service. 

The  employment  of  the  saber  mounted  is  taught  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  Saber  Exercise;  the  use  of  the  pistol  in  firing 
mounted,  as  prescribed  in  the  Small-Arms  Firing  Manual. 

245.  Manual  of  the  Saber,  Mounted:    The  saber  suspended 
from  the  left  side  of  the  saddle — 

1.  Draw,  2.  SABER.  Pfiss  the  right  hand  over  the  reins  and 
execute  with  it  rapidly  what  is  prescribed  for  drawing  the 
saber  on  foot ;  place  the  pommel  near  the  hip  and  resting  on 
top  of  the  thigh,  flat  of  the  blade  against  the  point  of  the  shoul- 
der. This  is  the  position  of  carry  saber,  mounted. 

246.  The  saber  suspended  from  the  righ  t  side  of  the  saddle — 

1.  Draw.     Turn  the  head  to  the  right  without  deranging  the 
position  of  the  body  and  glance  toward  the  hilt ;  engage  the 
right  wrist  in  the  saber  knot ;  pull  the  hilt  forward ;  seize  the 
grip  in  the  full  hand,  nails  to  the  right;  draw  the  blade  (I 
inches  from  the  scabbard,  and  look  to  the  front. 

2.  SABER.     Draw  the  saber  as  prescribed  on  foot  and  take 
the  position  of  carry  saber. 

247.  The  troopers  are  also  exercised  in  drawing  the  saber  as 
quickly  as  possible  at  the  single  command :  DRAW  SABER. 

248.  To  return  saber:   The  scabbard  suspended  from  the  Jeff 
side  of  the  saddle — 

1.  Return.     Execute  as  prescribed  on  foot. 

2.  SABER.     Execute  as  prescribed  on  foot,  supporting  the 
back  of  the  blade  against  the  left  forearm  until  the  point  is 
engaged  in  the  scabbard. 

This  command  is  given  only  at  a  halt  or  when  marching  fit 
a  walk. 

249.  The  scabbard  suspended  on  the  right — 

1.  Return.     Execute  as  prescribed  on  foot. 

2.  SABER.     Carry   the  wrist   opposite   the   right   shoulder ; 
lower  the  blade  to  the  right  of  the  horse's  neck;  let  the  grip 
turn  in  the  hand  so  that  the  hand  grasps  the  guard  at  the 
pommel,  back  of  the  hand  up;  turn  the  head  to  the  right  and 


FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        120 

fix  the  eyes  on  the  opening  of  the  scabbard ;  raise  the  hand ; 
insert  the  blade  and  push  it  home ;  disengage  the  wrist  from 
the  saber  knot ;  and  turn  the  head  to  the  front. 

When  the  saber  is  carried  on  the  right  the  return  saber  is 
executed,  so  far  as  possible,  at  the  halt. 

250.  Inspection  saber  and  present  saber  are  executed  as  when 
dismounted. 

251.  Guard. — Thrust   the   feet    home    in    the   stirrups    and 
crouch  slightly  in  the  saddle,  bending  forward  from  the  waist. 
Otherwise  as  explained  dismounted. 

In  the  charge  in  close  order  the  trooper  (in  single  rank) 
assumes  the  position  indicated  in  par.  297,  the  body  almost  in 
u  horizontal  line  over  the  horse's  neck,  the  arm  fully  extended 
to  the  front,  the  saber,  in  the  full  grasp,  in  prolongation  of  the 
arm,  guard  tip,  finger  nails  to  the  right,  point  at  the  height  of 
the  eye.  When  difficult  ground  is  encountered  the  trooper 
rakes  the  position  of  guard  while  passing  it. 

If  charging  in  double  rank,  the  front-rank  troopers  conform 
to  the  positions  indicated  for  single  rank.  Those  troopers  who 
:i.re  in  the  rear  rank  or  who  are  directly  in  rear  of  others,  take 
the  position  of  port  saber. 

In  the  melee  the  troopers  take  the  position  of  guard  toward 
the  nearest  enemy,  crouching  slightly  in  the  saddle  and  alive 
to  all  possible  attacks. 

MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL,  MOUNTED. 

252.  The;  modifications  of  the  dismounted  manual,  incident 
to  the  employment  of  the  pistol  mounted  are  explained  in  the 
corresponding  paragraphs  of  the  Manual  of  the  Pistol,  Dis- 
mounted (pars..  145-156) . 

THE   RIFLE. 

(For  troops  armed  with  the  Cavalry  Equipment,  Model  of 
1912.) 

253.  Before  standing  to  horse  the  trooper  atttaches  his  rifle 
to  his  belt  by  passing  the  muzzle  up  through  the  belt  ring 
and  engaging  the  snap  hook  of  the  belt  ring  into  the  trigger 
guard. 

366°— 17 5 


130         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Being  at  stand  to  horse,  upon  any  preparatory  command, 
except  for  mounting  or  securing  horses,  unsling  the  rifle  from 
the  belt  ring  and  take  the  position  of  order  arms,  removing 
the  snaffle  reins  from  the  horse's  neck  and  passing  the  right 
arm  through  them  if  necessary. 

If  a  command  to  secure  horses  is  given,  link  or  couple  first 
and  then,  unsling  the  rifle. 

To  mount,  proceed  as  without  the  rifle.  When  seated  in 
the  saddle,  grasp  the  rifle  at  the  bolt  with  the  left  hand,  barrel 
to  the  front,  place  the  butt  of  the  rifle  in  the  bucket,  steady- 
ing the  latter  with  the  left  foot  if  necessary  and  take  the 
position  of  the  trooper  mounted. 

To  dismount :  At  the  preparatory  command,  seize  the  rifle 
at  the  bolt  with  the  left  hand,  give  it  a  quick,  forcible  pull, 
lifting  the  butt  from  the  bucket,  and  let  the  rifle  hang  from 
the  belt. 

(For  troops  armed  with  equipment  corresponding  to  the 
McClellan  saddle.) 

254.  At  stand  to  horse,  the  rifle  is  held  on  the  left  side  of  the 
trooper  in  a  position  corresponding  to  order  arms  (par.  93),  as 
modified  by  substituting  the  word  left  for  right  wherever  the 
latter  occurs. 

In  leading  out,  and  on  all  occasions  when  the  trooper  leads 
his  horse  for  short  distances,  the  rifle  is  carried  at  the  left 
trail  (par.  108)  unless  otherwise  prescribed. 

255.  In  mounting,  the  rifle  is  inserted  in  the  scabbard  after 
the  trooper  steps  back  opposite  the  girth  and  before  he  takes 
the  reins  in  his  right  hand  (par.  191). 

On  dismounting,  each  trooper,  after  placing  the  bights  of  the 
reins  on  the  horse's  neck,  and  before  stepping  forward  to  take 
the  position  of  stand  to  horse  (par.  192),  takes  the  rifle  from 
the  scabbard  and  assumes  the  left  trail.  A  modification  of  this 
provision  applies  when  the  trooper  dismounts  for  inspection. 
The  rifle  is  never  carried  on  the  saddle  when  the  trooper  is 
dismounted,  except  as  specially  authorized  at  inspections, 
with  the  equipment  corresponding  to  the  McClellan  saddle 
(par.  262). 

256.  Inspection  of  arms  and  equipment,  mounted. — It  is  as- 
sumed   that    the    troopers    before    being    formally    inspected 
mounted  and  under  arms,  will  have  advanced  in  elementary 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        131 

collective  instruction  to  a  point  when  they  can  be  formed  and 
aligned  as  a  mounted  squad  (par.  350).  Should  this  not  be  the 
case,  the  instructor  will  place  the  troopers  in  line  with  inter- 
vals in  advance  of  the  inspection.  References  to  the  guide  and 
to  alignment  will  then  be  disregarded  and  the  command  front 
will  be  omitted. 

The  inspection  is  described  below  upon  the  assumption  that 
all  arms  are  inspected.  The  inspection  of  pistols,  is  explained 
for  both  the  mounted  and  dismounted  execution.  The  neces- 
sary modification  in  case  the  inspection  of  any  weapon  be 
omitted  is  indicated  in  par.  266. 

257.  When  arms  are  inspected  mounted  they  are  always  in- 
spected   in    the   order:    Saber,   pistol.     When   inspected   dis- 
mounted t  hey  are  always  inspected  in  the  order :  Rifle,  pistol. 
Sabers  are  not  inspected  dismounted,  nor  are  rifles  inspected 
mounted.     Pistols  may  be  inspected  either  mounted  or  dis- 
mounted. 

258.  The  troopers  being  mounted  and  fully  armed  and  in 
line:  1.  Prepare  for  inspection,  2.  MARCH,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  second  command  all  align  themselves  on  the  guide. 
The  inspector,  having  verified  the  alignment,  takes  position 
3  yards  to  the  right  and  front  of  the  right  trooper,  facing  to 
the  left,  and  commands:  FRONT,  followed  by:  1.  Draw,  2. 
SABER  (par.  165). 

259.  If  it  is  not  intended  to  inspect  the  pistols  mounted,  the 
inspector    cautions    PISTOLS    WILL     NOT    BE    INSPECTED 
MOUNTED,  and  approaches  tlie  right  of  the  rank. 

260.  As  the  inspector  approaches,  the  first  two  troopers  exe- 
cute the  first  motion  of  inspection  saber  (par.  170),  the  first 
trooper,  as  the  inspector  comes  in  front  of  him,  executes  the 
second   and   third   motions   of   inspection   saber ;    the  second 
trooper,  as  the  inspector  conies  in  front  of  him,  executes  the 
.second  and  third  motions  of  inspection  saber,  the  first  trooper 
at  this   instant   resuming  the   carry   and   the  third   trooper 
executing    the    first    motion    of    inspection    saber.     The    first 
trooper  then  returns  saber.     As  the  inspector  comes  in  front  of 
the  other  troopers  the  movements  are  executed  successively  as 
just  explained. 

261.  The    inspector,    having    completed    the    inspection    of 
sabers,  passes  in  rear  from  the  left  to  the  right  of  the  rank. 


132        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

As  he  approaches  the  right  of  the  rank  the  first  two  troopers 
(in  the  absence  of  indication  to  the  contrary)  (par.  259)  exe- 
cute inspection  pistol *(par.  148).  Each  of  the  other  troopers, 
in  order  from  right  to  left,  successively  executes  inspection 
pistol  in  time  to  complete  the  execution  just  before  the  in- 
spector arrives  in  front  of  him.  Each  trooper  executes  return 
pistol  as  the  inspector  passes  to  the  trooper  next  on  his  left. 

262.  To  inspect  the  rifles,  to  inspect  the  pistols  dismounted, 
or  to  inspect  the  dress  and  equipment  of  the  squad  more  mi- 
nutely,  the  inspector  dismounts   the  squad  without  forming 
rank. 

Troopers  when  dismounted  following  the  command  prepare 
for  inspection  take  a  special  position ;  and  a  special  exception 
is  made  in  this  case  to  the  rule  requiring  the  rifle  (if  not 
slung)  to  be  taken  from  the  scabbard  upon  dismounting  (par. 
255).  Upon  dismounting  while  at  prepare  for  inspection  each 
trooper  takes  the  snaffle  reins  off  the  horse's  neck,  passes  the 
right  arm  through  the  reins  (the  bight  of  the  reins  resting  on 
the  shoulder)  and  takes  a  position  similar  to  stand  to  horse. 
The  rifle  is  not  unslung  (or  removed  from  the  scabbard) 
unless  it  has  been  specially  designated  for  inspection;  it  is 
then  reslung  or  returned  to  the  scabbard  as  soon  as  its  in- 
spection is  completed. 

A  trooper  dismounted  at  prepare  for  inspection,  if  his  right 
hand  be  free,  grasps  the  reins  as  in  stand  to  horse.  The  snaffle 
reins  once  taken  from  the  neck  as  above  are  not  replaced 
until  the  first  command  for  mounting. 

The  above  position  is  habitually  terminated  by  the  first  com- 
mand for  mounting  or  by  stand  to  horse. 

263.  If  the  inspector  wishes  to  inspect  the  arms  after  dis- 
mounting, he  cautions,  immediately  following  the  commands 
for  dismounting:  RIFLES  AND  PISTOLS   (or  RIFLES,  or  PIS- 
TOLS) WILL  BE  INSPECTED. 

Each  trooper  at  once  unslings  his  rifle  (or  takes  it  from  the 
scabbard)  and  resumes  his  position  similar  to  stand  to  horse, 
his  rifle  at  the  order,  the  reins  as  described  in  par.  262. 

264.  As  the  inspector  approaches  the  right  of  the  rank  the 
trooper  on  the  right  executes  inspection  arms  (par.  112). 

The  inspector  takes  the  piece,  grasping  it  with  his  right  hand 
just  above  the  rear  sight,  the  man  dropping  his  hands.  The 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         133 

inspector  inspects  the  piece,  and,  with  the  hand  and  piece  in 
the  same  position  as  in  receiving  it,  hands  it  back  to  the  man, 
who  takes  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  balance,  executes  port 
arms,  and  slings  the  riile  or  places  it  in  the  scabbard,  according 
to  his  equipment. 

As  the  inspector  returns  the  piece  the  next  man  executes 
inspection  arms,  and  so  on  through  the  troop. 

Should  the  piece  be  inspected  without  handling,  each  man 
proceeds  as  above  as  soon  as  the  captain  passes  to  the  next 
man. 

265.  As  the  inspector  approaches  the  right  of  the  rank  of  odd 
numbers,  after  completing  the  inspection  of  the  rifles  of  the 
even   numbers,   the   first   two   troopers   of   the   rank  execute 
inspection  pistol. 

To  inspect:  the  pistol  closely  the  inspector  grasps  it  with  his 
left  hand  above  the  trooper's  hand,  makes  such  examination 
as  is  desired,  and  hands  the  pistol  back  to  the  trooper  in  the 
same  position  as  that  in  which  the  inspector  took  the  weapon. 
The  trooper  takes  the  pistol  with  the  right  hand  as  in  inspec- 
tion pistol  and, executes  return  pistol.  Should  the  pistols  be 
inspected  without  handling,  each  man  executes  return  pistol  as 
the  inspector  passes  to  the  next  trooper. 

266.  If  no  indication  be  given  for  the  inspection  of  rifles  they 
remain  slung  or  in  the  wabbard,  according  to  the  equipment 
carried.    If  only  rifles  are  ordered  inspected,  pistols  are  not 
presented  for  inspection  and  rifles  are  slung  or  returned  to 
the  scabbard  as  soon  as  inspected. 

If  only  pistols  are  ordered  inspected,  they  are  presented  by 
the  two  troopers  on  the  right  when  the  inspector  approaches 
the  rank  the  first  time  after  dismounting. 

267.  During  the  inspection  of  arms  the  inspector  observes 
the  appearance  of  the  men,  horses,  equipment,  and  clothing. 

After  the  inspection  of  arms  is  completed  he  makes  such 
further  inspection  of  equipment,  clothing,  etc.,  as  he  may  con- 
sider desirable.  During  this  part  of  the  inspection  the  troopers 
may  be  permitted  to  stand  at" ease. 

268.  If  an  inspection  of  arms  of  a  detailed  character  be 
made  in  connection  with  a  dismounted  formation  it  is  cojfc* 
ducted  by  the  above  commands  and  in  accordance  with  the 
above  methods  in  so  far  as  applicable.    Rifles  are  presented 


134        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

for  inspection  as  described  without  special  indication  when  the 
inspector  approaches  the  rank  after  commanding  FRONT  (pur. 
258).  Except  when  rifles  are  slung  as  provided  in  the  next 
sentence,  each  trooper  executes  order  arms  as  soon  as  his 
rifle  is  returned  to  him.  Should  the  troopers  be  armed  with 
both  rifle  and  pistol,  each  trooper  slings  his  rifle  as  soon  as 
i-ted  if  the  equipment  in  use  so  permits;  otherwise  the 
are  stacked  (par.  115)  by  command  after  being  inspected. 
The  pistols  are  then  inspected,  after  which  take  arms  (par. 
116)  is  executed  before  the  troopers  are  dismissed. 

PART  II.— ELEMENTARY  COLLECTIVE 
INSTRUCTION. 

Section  5.  Elementary  collective  instruction. 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS. 

321.  The  elementary  collective  instruction  of  the  trooper  in- 
cludes the  instruction  in  the  School  of-  the  Squad  and  in  the 
mechanism  of  the  movements  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the 
Platoon.    This  latter  instruction  is  given  as  prescribed  in  par. 
44.4. 

Section  6.  Basic  principles  of  the  drill. 

322.  The  following  provisions  apply  generally  to  the  School 
of  the  Squad  and  to  all  subsequent  drill.     Previous  provisions 
of  a  similar  general  character  are  to  be  found  in  pars.  43-49. 

323.  Leading:   A   commander   leading  his  unit  marches  in 
the  direction  and  at  the  gait  desired.     He  is  followed  at  a 
specified  distance  by  the  base   (Def.),  which  conforms  to  his 
gait  and  direction.     The  commander  thus  controls  the  move- 
ments of  the  base,  and  may  at  any  time  by  his  indication 
conveyed  in  the  most  convenient  way   (as  by  his  own  move- 
ments, his  commands,  or  signals)   cause  the  base  to  change 
its  direction  or  to  increase  or  decrease  the  pace  or  gait  or  to 
halt,  according  to  the  object  in  view.     Elements  of  the  same 
kind  as  the  base  regulate  upon  the  latter  conforming  to  its 
gait  and  direction. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         135 

324.  Directing  leader,   directing  guide:   A  commander  who 
desires  to  become  temporarily  freo  in  his  movements  may  leave 
his  position  as  leader,  first  indicating:  DISREGARD  (see  Sig- 
nals) for  the  information  of  The  leader  of  the  base  unit,  who 
then  becomes  the  directing  leader    (Def.).     The  latter  then 
ceases  to  follow  in  the  trace  of  the  commander  and  temporarily 
conducts  the  march.     In  the  absence  of  other  indication  from 
the  leader  lie  maintains  the  existing  direction  and  gaitf 

When  necessary  the  conduct  of  the  march  of  a  group  (e.  g., 
a  platoon)  having  no  subordinate  leader  may  similarly  be 
intrusted  to  the  guide.  The  latter  then  becomes  the  directing 
guide  (Def.). 

325.  Whenever  a  change  of  formation  involves  a  break  in 
the  continuity  of  the  leading  the  leader  habitually  moves  at 
once  to  his  new  position,  so  as  to  resume  leadership  with  the 
least  practicable  delay.    He  usually  starts  at  the  command  of 
execution  for  the  movement.     Should  he  start  for   his  new 
position  before  the  command  of  execution  he  first  cautions  or 
signals :  DISREGARD  for  the  information  of  the  base. 

326.  Change  of  directing  unit  (base) :  Whenever  a  change  of 
formation  results  in  a  change  of  the  base,  the  base  of  the 
formation  from  which  the  movement  is  executed  continues,  in 
the  absence  of  specific  indication  to  the  contrary,  to  be  the 
base  until  the  new  base  is  indicated. 

In  movements  from  line  by  which  column  is  formed  directly 
to  a  flank,  the  element  of  the  column  on  the  flank  toward  which 
the  column  is  formed  is  the  base  upon  which  other  similar 
elements  regulate  during  the  formation  of  the  column  as  well 
as  after  the  column  is  formed. 

327.  Changes  of  direction:  Any  movement  may  be  executed 
either  from  the  halt  or  when  marching,  unless  otherwise  pre- 
scribed.   If  executed  from  the  halt  the  command  forward  need 
not  be  prefixed  to  any  other  preparatory  command  that  indi- 
cates a  direction  of  march;  thus,  being  at  a  halt,  1.  Column 
right,  2.  MARCH;  but,  1.  Forward  trot,  2.  MARCH. 

328.  To   insure  certainty   of  prompt  execution,   commands 
(and  signals)  must  be  so  given  that  their  meaning  is  unmis- 
takable.   The  preparatory  command  must  be  given  at  such  an 
interval  of  time  before  the  command  of  execution  as  will 
admit  of  the  former  being  properly  understood,  and  should 


136        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

be  followed  by  a  distinct  pause  that  properly  varies  in  length 
with  the  size  of  the  body  of  troops  that  is  to  execute  the 
movement.  The  command  of  execution  should  be  given  the 
instant  the  movement  is  to  begin. 

329.  All  changes  of  direction  are  simply  applications  of  the 
principle  of  leading  as  explained  in  pars.  323  and  367. 

(a)  The  turn  (par. 386)  and  half  turn  (par. 388)  are  special 
cases  of  the  change  of  direction  in  line  in  that  they  involve  a 
change 'of  direction  of  90°  and  45°,  respectively;  as  executed 
by  the  platoon  and  squad,  they  differ  further  from  the  general 
case  of  the  change  of  direction  in  that  the  leader  follows  a 
specially  prescribed  arc  during  the  turn  (par.  387)  ;  in  the 
troop  and  larger  units,  the  leader  in  each  case  regulates  the 
arc  upon  which  he  moves  during  the  turn  in  accordance  with 
the  length  of  the  front  and  the  requirements  of  the  special 
case. 

(&)  For  a  change  of  direction  in  any  column  formation,  the 
elements  of  the  column  successively  change  direction  on  the 
same  ground,  the  change  in  each  successive  element  being 
made  in  accordance  with  the  principles  that  regulate  the 
change  of  direction  in  line  (a).  In  each  successive  element 
the  leader  (if  any)  and  the  guide  move  over  the  same  path 
that  is  followed  by  the  leader  at  the  head  of  the  column. 

330.  The  principles  and  methods  laid  down  in  the  School  of 
the  Trooper   (dismounted  and  mounted)    are,  except  as  may 
otherwise  be  indicated,  or  where  clearly  applicable  only  to  in- 
dividual instruction,  to  be  followed  in  corresponding  instruc- 
tion in  the  School  of  the  Squad  and  in  all  subsequent  training. 
The  same  commands  apply  unless  otherwise  stated. 

Certain  modifications  in  the  execution  of  some  of  the  move- 
ments, incident  to  their  use  in  collective  instruction,  are  noted 
in  appropriate  places  in  the  School  of  the  Squad. 

331.  Column  of  twos  and  of  troopers:   Movements  involving 
the  use  of  column  of  twos  or  troopers,  although  simple  in  prin- 
ciple, are  not  adapted  to  execution  as  movements  of  precision, 
and  the  details  of  their  execution  will  be  regulated  accord- 
ingly  (pars.  393-400).     Familiarity  with  the  practical  use  of 
these  formations  must  be  insisted  upon,  but  they  will  be  taken 
in  the  simplest  manner  consistent  with  efficiency  in  their  use. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        137 

332.  To  avoid  repetition  the  detailed  descriptions  and  ex- 
planations of  collective  movements  are,  as  a  rule,  based  only 
upon  the  execution  of  the  mounted  movements. 

333.  Gaits   for   mounted   movements. — All   mounted   move- 
ments not  specially  excepted  may  be  executed  at  the  trot  or 
gallop  (par.  239'). 

For  the  execution  of  a  movement  at  the  trot  or  gallop  the 
command  trot  or  gallop  precedes  the  command  inarch  unless 
marching  at  the  gait  desired  or  unless  it  be  otherwise  pre- 
scribed. When  the  indication  for  the  trot  or  gallop  is  included 
in  the  command  for  the  movement  it  precedes  the  command 
inarch;  thus,  1.  Forward,  trot;  2.  MAKCH. 

334.  When  the  troopers  of  any  element  (Def.)  move  at  dif- 
ferent gaits,  if  the  gait  of  such  element  be  referred  to,  the 
gait  of  its  base  is  to  be  understood. 

335.  A  gait  is  said  to  be  correspondingly  faster  or  corre- 
spondingly slower  than  another  gait  when  there  is  a  difference 
of  one  degree  between  the  two  (par.  239). 

336.  In  the  rules  included  in  pars.  333  to  337  the  expression 
"other  elements"  (Def.)  means  in  each  case  elements  of  the 
same  kind  as  the  base. 

337.  (a)  In  movements  from  the  halt  the  base  moves  at  the 
walk  unless  another  gait  be  stated  in  the  command  or  indi- 
cated by  the  leader's  movements. 

(&)  In  forming  line  to  the  front  from  column  the  other  ele- 
ments (par.  336)  take,  without  command,  a  correspondingly 
faster  gait  than  the  base.  If  gallop  be  commanded  at  any 
time,  it  applies  only  to  the  other  elements  (/).  The  base 
(leading  element)  habitually  preserves  the  gait  of  march  (a). 
The  leader  controls  the  movements  of  the  base  according  to 
the  object  in  view.  He  may  diminish  its  pace  or  gait  or  halt 
it  to  hasten  the  formation.  A  command  to  decrease  the  gait 
or  to  halt,  given  during  the  execution  of  the  movement,  ap- 
plies only  to  those  elements  that  have  already  completed  the 
movement.  The  leader  habitually  so  controls  the  base  that 
elements  in  rear  need  not  move  faster  than  a  maneuver  gallop 
in  order  to  execute  the  movement. 

(c)  Column  to  the  front  is  formed  from  line  on  the  base  at 
the  gait  of  march  (a)  or  at  the  gait  ordered  (e).  The  other 
elements  (par.  336)  take  or  maintain  a  correspondingly 


138        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEBS. 

slower  gait  (or,  if  halted,  remain  so)  until  they  can  move 
at  the  gait  of  the  base  to  take  their  places  in  the  column.  If 
an  increased  gait  be  commanded  at  any  time,  it  is  taken  at 
first  only  by  the  leader  and  base  or  by  the  leader  and  those 
elements  that  have  already  moved  to  enter  the  column  (/). 

((/)  In  cases  not  covered  by  (b)  or  (c),  if  the  base  and  other 
elements  have  equal  distances  to  go  they  move  at  the  gait  of 
march  or  at  that  indicated  in  the  command  (e.  g.,  1.  Platoons 
right  turn,  trot;  2.  MARCH). 

(c)  In  cases  not  covered  by  (&),  (c),  or  (d)  (e.  g.,  assemble 
from  foragers,  par.  414),  or  by  some  special  provision  in  the 
description  of  the  corresponding  movement  (e.  g.,  echelon,  par. 
702)  the  base  maintains  the  gait  of  march  (a)  or  takes  that  of 
the  leader;  the  other  elements  move  at  a  correspondingly 
faster  or  slower  gait  as  may  be  necessary  for  the  execution 
of  the  movement  and  on  arriving  at  their  places  take  the 
gait  of  the  base  (par.  338).  If  a  special  gait  be  commanded, 
it  is  taken  by  the  base  or  by  the  other  elements,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  principle  stated  in  (/). 

(/)  When  the  commander  indicates  a  special  gait,  whether 
in  the  preparatory  command  or  during  the  execution  of  the 
movement,  the  effect  is  always  to  Jiasten  the  completion  of 
the  movement.  This  principle  will  assist  in  applying  the  rules 
in  (6),  (c),  and  (e). 

(g)  Changes  of  gait  made  by  elements,  without  command,  in 
accordance  with  the  above  rules,  are,  except  as  specially  indi- 
cated in  the  commands,  changes  of  one  degree. 

338.  Any  exceptions  to  the  above  rules  are  noted  where  they 
occur. 

339.  Gaits  for  movements  on  foot. —  (a)  The  general  princi- 
ples of  gaits  for  mounted  movements  apply  to  movements  on 
foot  with  the  modifications  noted  in   (6)  to   (#),  below,  and 
such  others  as  are  to  be  readily  inferred  from  the  application 
of  the  principles  of  the  School  of  the  Trooper,  Dismounted. 

(b)  No  element  moves  in  double  time  unless  the  movement 
be  executed  when  marching  in  double  time  or  double  time  be 
commanded  (par.  47)  or  otherwise  indicated  by  the  leader. 
No  trooper  increases  the  length  of  the  step  or  the  cadence 
unless  specially  so  prescribed. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        139 

(c)  The  leader  so  controls  the  movements  of  the  base  as  to 
facilitate  the  execution  of  the  movement  in  accordance  with 
(?;),  above.  This  will  involve  halting  the  base  whenever  cer- 
tain movements  (e.  g.,  those  from  column  into  line)  are 
executed  in  quick  time. 

( <l )  If  double  time  be  included  in  the  preparatory  command 
for  a  movement,  the  indication  is  obeyed  in  accordance  with 
the  principles  of  par.  337. 

(e}  In  movements  from  line  into  column,  and  in  other  simi- 
lar movements,  if  executed  at  attention,  the  troopers  while 
waiting  to  take  their  places  in  the  column  do  not  halt  unless 
halt  be  commanded  by  a  platoon  (or  troop)  commander.  They 
mark  time  instead  if  necessary  for  the  execution  of  the  move- 
ment. 

(/)  In  applying  the  rules  for  mounted  movements  to  move- 
ments on  foot  quick  time  will  be  understood  where  walk  is  re- 
ferred to  and  double  time  where  any  faster  gait  is  referred  to. 

(g)  Any  exceptions  to  the  above  rules  are  stated  where  they 
occur. 

Section  7.  The  School  of  the  Squad. 

340.  As  soon  as  the  troopers  are  sufficiently  advanced  in 
their  instruction  in  the  School  of  the   Trooper  they  will  be 
grouped  into  temporary  squads  for  elementary  collective  in- 
struction.    This  instruction  will  be  conducted  in  accordance 
with   the   general   principles   indicated   in  par.   42;   progress 
therein  should  be  so  regulated  that  no  collective  movement 
will  be  taken  up  until  the  trooper,  by  previous  individual  in- 
struction, has  been  properly  prepared  for  its  execution. 

341.  Instruction  in  the  School  of  the  Squad  is  intended  pri- 
marily to  teach  recruits  the  elementary  movements  upon  which 
the  entire  drill  is  based.    It  may  be  recurred  to  whenever  nec- 
essary in  cases  where  troopers  evidence  the  need  of  further 
elementary  work. 

342.  For  elementary  collective  instruction  groups  of  not  to 
exceed  six  or  eight  men  can  be  used  to  best  advantage.    The 
actual  instruction  of  each  group  should  be  conducted  by  a 
noncommissioned  officer,  but  the  instruction  must  be  closely 
supervised  by  a  commissioned  officer  (par.  37). 


140        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

343.  The  system  of  drill  contained  in  these  regulations  is 
based  largely  upon  the  actual  leading  of  units  oy  their  re- 
spective chiefs  or  commanders.     During  the  elementary  in- 
struction of  recruits,  both  mounted  and  dismounted,  leading 
Avill  be  emphasized  as  indicated  in  par.  344.     Thereafter  the 
application  of  leading  will  conform  to  pars.  448  to  4f>6. 

344.  The   first  collective   instruction   will,   therefore,    bo   in 
conforming  to  the  march  of  a   leader,   thus  confirming  and 
extending  the  instruction  given  in  the  School  of  the  Trooper 
(pars.  295,  298)  ;  and  reasonable  proficiency  in  this  instruc- 
tion must  be  secured  before  any  attempt  is  made  to  utilize 
cither   commands   or   signals   in   the   execution   of   collect  ire 
•increments,  except  as  prescribed  in  par.  363. 

345.  It  is  difficult  for  a  leader  to  lead  the  squad  properly 
and  at  the  same  time  to  supervise  the  march  and  correct  the 
errors  of  individual  troopers.    For  this  reason  it  is  desirable, 
especially  in  the  earlier  collective  drills,  that  the  instructor 
have  as  an  assistant   another  noncommissioned  officer  or  a 
well-instructed  trooper.     The  instructor  then  leads  the  squad 
and    requires    his    assistant    (who    takes    the   positions    best 
adapted   for  the  purpose   in  view)    to   supervise  closely   the 
movements  of  the  troopers  and  to  correct  errors  by  means. of 
cautions  addressed  quietly  by  name  to  the  individual  man  or 
men  concerned.    Later  the  instructor  similarly  supervises  the 
execution  of  the  march  while  requiring  his  assistant  to  lead 
the  squad.     As  the  troopers  advance  in  the  instruction  the 
instructor  should  give  each  of  them  such  practice  in  leading 
the  squad  as  the  progress  of  the  individual  trooper  concerned 
may  appear  to  justify. 

346.  When  instruction  in  leading   (par.  367)   has  advanced 
to  the  point  where  the  guide  can  preserve  his  proper  distance 
from  the  leader  and  conform  promptly  and  smoothly  to  the 
hitter's  movements,  the  other  troopers  meantime  preserving 
their    interval    and   alignment    without   undue   constraint   or 
unnecessarily  abrupt  changes  of  gait  or  pace,  the  instruction 
is  extended  progressively  to  include,  in  accordance  with  the 
methods  prescribed  in  par.   347,  the  execution  of  the  move- 
ments prescribed  for  the  squad. 

347.  Throughout  the  instruction  prescribed  by  par.  346  the 
squad  will  continue  as  before  to  be  led.    In  teaching  each 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         141 

new  movement  the  example  and  movements  of  the  instructor 
as  leader  will  be  supplemented  at  first  by  oral  commands 
only,  then  by  oral  commands  accompanied  by  the  correspond- 
ing arm  signals  for  those  movements  for  which  such  signals 
are  provided  (see  Signals,  pars.  988-996),  then  by  signals 
alone.  The  commands  and  signals  will  ~be  given  by  the  actual 
leader.  When  the  instructor  is  not  actually  leading  (par. 
345)  he  may  either  indicate  to  the  leader  the  movements  to 
be  executed^  or  else  leave  to  him  the  selection  of  such  move- 
ments. 

348.  After  the  oral  commands  and  arm  signals  are  thor- 
oughly understood  the  instructor  will  practice  the  squad  in 
passing  from  one  formation  to  another,  using  oral  commands 
for  some  movements,  signals  for  some,  and  causing  some  (e.  g., 
changes  of  direction)    to  be  executed  by  conforming  to  the 
movements  of  the  leader  without  the  additional  indication  of 
either  oral  commands  or  signals. 

349.  The  troopers  must  be  accustomed  to  conforming,  with- 
out the  assistance  of  any  command  or  signal  given  to  the  squad 
as  a  whole,  to  simple  movements  (e.  g.,  movements  front  into 
line)  initiated  at  the  head  of  a  column  formation  by  a  com- 
mand so  given  as  to  be  heard  by  only  the  leading  troopers. 

With  reasonable  practice  the  more  essential  changes  of  for- 
mation that  are  executed  toward  the  direction  of  march  can 
readily  be  taken  by  the  squad  by  conforming,  without  other 
indication,  to  the  movements  of  the  troopers  nearest  the  leader. 
As  many  movements  in  service  must  be  executed  under  condi- 
tions of  noise,  dust,  etc.,  that  will  render  it  difficult  for  the 
commands  or  signals  of  the  leader  to  be  understood  except  by 
those  near  him,  practice  in  conforming  promptly  and  intelli- 
gently to  the  movements  of  the  elements  nearest  the  leader  is 
important  and  must  be  given  careful  attention. 

The  object  ultimately  to  be  sought  in  the  instruction  is  the 
quiet,  rapid,  and  effective  handling  of  the  squad  with  a  mini- 
mum of  either  oral  commands  or  signals.  The  squad  is  re- 
quired to  pass  rapidly  from  one  formation  to  another,  a  new 
movement  being  occasionally  initiated  before  the  execution  of 
the  one  preceding  it  has  been  completed. 


143        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 
To  FORM  THE  SQUAD,  MOUNTED. 

350.  To  form  the   squad  in  line    (par.  368-a),  the  leader 
(instructor)   designates  a  trooper  to  act  as  the  base  of  the 
formation,  indicates  to  such  trooper  the  point  where  the  right 
of  the  squatf  is  to  rest  and  the  direction  in  which  the  line  is 
to  face,  takes  position  at  a  convenient  distance  in  front  of  and 
facing  the  point  where  the  center  of  the  squad  is  to  rest,  and 
commands:  LEAD  INTO  LINE.     The  base  trooper  leads  out 
(par.  188)  and  takes  position  as  indicated ;  the  other  troopers 
lead  out  so  as  to  approach  the  line  succcssirclii  directly  from 
the  rear  and  in  single  rank  form  on  the  line  established  by 
the  base  trooper,  in  order  from  right  to  left.     The  troopers 
form  at  stand  to  horse  (par.  187)  with  intervals  of  18  inches 
between  horses. 

The  line  having  thus  formed,  the  leader  calls  the  roll  and 
commands,  COUNT  FOURS  (par.  84). 

Where  there  is  an  incomplete  four  the  troopers  in  it  are 
cautioned  as  to  the  numbers  finally  assigned  them  (par.  .'>6S-?> ) . 

When  but  a  single  trooper  is  available  for  an  incomplete 
four  the  four  is  habitually  broken  up  and  a  trooper  is  placed 
as  an  extra  file  closer.  This  rule  may,  however,  be  modified 
in  connection  with  the  instruction  of  recruits. 

The  squad  having  counted  fours,  the  leader  onuses  th«i  squad 
to  mount  (par.  358). 

351.  The  formation  in  column  of  fours,   twos,   or  troopers 
(par.   3G8-&,   c.   d)    is   similarly   executed.     The  leader   com- 
mands: LEAD  INTO  COLUMN    (COLUMN  OF  TWOS,  COLUMN 
OF  TROOPERS).     The  trooper  upon  whom  the  formation  is 
based  (par.  350)  becomes  No.  1  of  the  leading  four.     The  ele- 
ments of  the  column  form,  in  order  from  front  to  rear,  with 
distances  of  4  feet  between  successive  fours,  twos,  or  troopers. 
In  column  of  fours  or  twos  each  four  or  two  forms  on  its 
right  trooper  as  in  line. 

When  the  formation  is  in  column  of  fours  the  command 
COUNT  FOURS  is  omitted.  The  leader  cautions :  NOTE  YOUR 
NUMBERS. 

352.  The  squad  may  also  form  in  similar  manner  after  the 
troopers  mount.    In  this  case  the  leader  causes  the  troopers  to 
mount  individually  after  saddling  and  commands :  RIDE  INTO 


MANTJAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         143 

LINE  (COLUMN,  COLUMN  OF  TWOS,  COLUMN  OF  TROOPERS). 

The  interval  between  the  mounted  troopers  is  6  inches  from 
knee  to  knee. 

To  FORM  THE  SQUAD,  DISMOUNTED. 

353.  For  the  dismounted  formation  of  the  squad,  in  line, 
when   not   armed  with   the   rifle,   the  leader   designates   the 
trooper  to  act  as  the  base,  indicates  the  latter's  position,  and 
takes  his  own  position  as  described  in  par.  350,  above.     He 
then  commands :  FALL  IN.    The  troopers  form  as  in  pars.  57 
and  58.     The  leader  then  calls  the  roll  and  causes  the  squad 
to  count  fours. 

If  armed  with  the  rifle,  the  troopers  fall  in  with  rifles  at  the 
order.  As  soon  as  the  line  or  column  is  formed  the  leader  com- 
mands: 1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Right  shoulder,  4.  ARMS 
(par.  91-2d),  and  calls  the  roll.  Each  man,  as  his  name  is 
called,  answers  here  and  executes  order  arms. 

The  formation  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers  is  con- 
ducted in  accordance  with  the  modifications  indicated.  The 
commands  of  the  leader  are :  FALL  IN,  IN  COLUMN  (COLUMN 
OF  TWOS,  COLUMN  OF  TROOPERS).  The  distance  between 
successive  fours  is  92  inches ;  between  successive  twos,  40 
inches ;  between  successive  troopers,  14  inches. 

To  MOUNT  AND  DISMOUNT. 

354.  The  squad  being  in  line,  at  stand  to  horse,  the  habitual 
commands  for  mounting  are :  1.  Prepare  to  mount,  2.  MOUNT; 
3    Form,  4.  RANK.     At  the  first  command  the  odd  numbers 
lead  out  4  yards  directly  to  the  front,  and  all  execute  the 
movements   and  take   the  final   positions  prescribed   in   par. 
191-a.     At   the   second   command   all   the  troopers   complete, 
simultaneously,  the  movements  of  mounting  as  prescribed  in 
par.  191-&.     At  the  fourth  command  the  even  numbers  move 
up   into  their   intervals  in  the  line.     If  the  squad  has  dis- 
mounted  from   line   and   has   formed    rank    (par.    356),    the 
odd  numbers  stand  fast  at  the  command  Prepare  to  mount  and 
all  mount  in  place. 


144        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

If  the  squad  be  mounted  in  column  of  fours,  the  third  and 
fourth  commands  are  omitted.  At  the  first  command  the 
troopers  of  each  four  open  out  fanwise,  Nos.  1  and  2  to  the 
right,  Xos.  3  and  4  to  the  left.  Nos.  1  and  4  open  out  a  littl<» 
more  than  Xos.  2  and  3,  all  opening  only  enough  to  permit  the 
troopers  to  mount  without  interfering  with  each  other.  The 
troopers  habitually  straighten  their  horses  in  the  column  as 
soon  as  they  have  mounted,  but  this  requirement  may  1m 
relaxed  whenever  mounting  in  unison  is  not  required  (par. 
;-.r,S).  The  squad  in  column  of  twos  is  mounted  by  commands 
and  methods  conforming  to  those  used  for  mounting  from 
column  of  fours. 

355.  The  preparatory  oral  command  for  mounting  may  be 
omitted.     The  squad  then  executes  at  the  command  MOUNT 
all  the  movements  prescribed  in  par.  354  for  the  commands, 
1.  Prepare  to  mount,  2.  MOUNT.    The  troopers  mount  promptly, 
but  not  in  unison. 

The  preparatory  signal  for  mounting,  when  followed  imme- 
diately by  the  signal  of  execution,  will  be  understood  as  equiv- 
alent to  the  oral  command  MOUNT,  and  will  be  executed 
accordingly. 

356.  The  squad  being  in  line,  the  habitual  commands  for 
dismounting  are:  1.  Prepare  to  dismount,  2.  DISMOUNT;    3. 
Form,  4.  RANK.     At  the  first  command  the  odd  numbers  ride 
4  yards  directly  to  the  front,  regulating  on  the  right,  and  all 
the  troopers  execute  the  movements  and  take  the  final  position 
prescribed  in  par.  192-cr.    At  the  second  command  the  troopers 
execute,    simultaneously,    the   movements   prescribed   in   par. 
192-b.     At  the  fourth  command  the  even  numbers  lead  into 
their  intervals  in  the  rank.    The  third  and  fourth  commands 
are  given  only  in  case  it  is  desired  to  form  rank.    The  squad 
may  be  dismounted  and,  without  forming  rank,  execute  rest 
or  at  ease  (par.  359),  or  be  inspected,  mounted,  or  dismissed. 
The   modifications   indicated   for   dismounting  in   column   of 
fours  and  column  of  twos  correspond  to  those  prescribed  in 
par.    354   for   mounting   from    the   corresponding   formation, 
except  that  the  horses  are  not  habitually  straightened  in  the 
column  after  dismounting  unless  the  dismounted  squad  moves 
forward  (the  troopers  leading  their  horses). 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        145 

357.  The  preparatory  oral  command  for  dismounting  may  be 
omitted.    The  squad  then  executes  at  the  command  DISMOUNT 
all  the  movements  prescribed  in  par.  356  for  the  commands: 
1.  Prepare  to  dismount,  2.  DISMOUNT.    The  troopers  dismount 
promptly  but  not  in  unison. 

The  preparatory  signal  for  dismounting,  when  followed 
immediately  by  the  signal  of  execution,  will  be  understood  as 
equivalent  to  the  oral  command  DISMOUNT,  and  will  be 
executed  accordingly. 

358.  Until   the  individual   instruction  of  recruits  has   ad- 
vanced -to  a  point  where  they  have  acquired  reasonable  pro- 
iiciency  in  mounting  and  dismounting,  these  movements  will 
be  executed  at  collective  as  well  as  at  individual  instruction 
by  the  commands  and  methods  indicated  in  pars.  355  and  357. 
After  such  proficiency  has  been  acquired,  mounting  and  dis- 
mounting at  close-order  drills,  at  ceremonies,  and  at  all  occa- 
sions of  a  ceremonial  nature  will  habitually  be  executed  in 
imison   by   the   commands   and   methods   prescribed   in   pars. 
354  and  356,  respectively.    The  commands  and  methods  pre- 
scribed in  pars.  355  and  357,  respectively,  may,  in  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  commander,  continue  to  be  employed  on  all 
other  duty. 

THE  RESTS  AND  ROUTE  ORDER. 

359.  The  mounted  squad  executes  the  rests  and  route  order 
as  prescribed  in  par.  221.     After  dismounting  from  line,  rest 
or  at  ease  may  be  given  either  before  or  after  forming  rank. 

The  dismounted  squad  executes  the  rests  and  route  order  as 
prescribed  in  pars.  60  and  61. 

To  DISMISS  THE  SQUAD. 

360.  The  squad,  in  column  of  troopers,  is  dismissed  as  pre- 
scribed for  tlfat  formation  in  par.  222.     The  squad  in  column 
of  fours  is  'dismissed  at  the  same  command.     The  trooper  on 
the  right  of  the  leading  four  leads  out  as  indicated  in  par.  222 
and  is  followed,  in  turn,  by  the  other  troopers  of  that  four, 
then  by  the  troopers  of  the  next  four,  and  so  on  successively 
to  the  rear  of  the  column.    In  each  four  the  troopers  lead  out 


146        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

in  order  from  right  to  left.  The  dismissal  from  column  of 
twos  is  similarly  executed.  The  squad  being  in  line  is  dis- 
missed by  the  commands  and  methods  prescribed  in  par.  222 
for  a  line  with  intervals,  except  that  the  troopers,  in  order  to 
have  their  proper  distance,  move  out  successively  from  right 
to  left  instead  of  simultaneously.  At  the  commands:  1.  By 
the  right  and  left,  2.  FALL  OUT,  the  movement  is  executed  in 
a  similar  manner  from  both  flanks  of  the  line.  After  having 
dismounted  from  line  the  squad  may  be  dismissed  without 
forming  rank. 

Dismounted,  without  horses  and  not  under  arms,  the  com- 
mand is  DISMISSED. 

Dismounted,  without  horses  but  armed  with  the  rifle,  the 
squad  is  dismissed  as  in  par.  114. 

ALIGNMENTS. 

361.  At  the  preliminary  instruction  (conducted  without  for- 
mal command)  the  instructor  has  two  troopers  on  the  right 
of  the  rank  move  forward  a  convenient  distance  and  halt.  He 
then  aligns  these  two  troopers  carefully,  with  the  proper  inter- 
val as  in  line  (par.  368-a),  and  causes  the  other  troopers  to 
note  the  details  of  the  alignment.  The  other  troopers  are  then 
required  to  move  up  one  at  a  time  and  align  themselves,  with 
the  correct  interval,  on  the  line  thus  established.  The  troopers 
move  forward,  in  order  from  right  to  left,  at  successive  repeti- 
tions by  the  instructor  of  the  caution  NEXT.  Each  trooper, 
when  on  or  near  the  line,  executes  eyes  right  (par.  64),  aligns 
himself  accurately  on  the  line  established  by  the  trooper  or 
troopers  on  his  right,  and  looks  to  the  front  as  soon  as  he 
thinks  himself  correctly  aligned.  The  instructor  explains  and 
corrects  any  errors.  Similar  instruction  is  given  the  troopers 
in  aligning  themselves  to  the  left.  As  soon  as  reasonable 
proficiency  is  attained  but  a  single  trooper  is  moved  forward, 
and  the  alignment  is  made  in  the  same  manner  upon  the  single 
trooper  established  as  the  base. 

The  instruction  is  similarly  given  with  the  center  trooper 
moved  to  the  front  as  a  base.  Two  troopers,  one  on  the  right, 
the  other  on  the  left  of  the  base,  then  move  forward  at  each 
repetition  of  the  caution  NEXT. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        147 

The  instructor  observes  in  the  mounted  instruction:  That 
each  trooper  moves  his  horse  promptly  and  halts  with  his  horse 
correctly  disposed ;  that  he  sits  squarely  on  his  horse  without 
advancing  either  shoulder  or  leaning  his  body  to  the  front  or 
rear ;  that  he  dresses  promptly,  as  he  arrives  on  the  line ;  and 
that  he  makes  proper  .use  of  the  aids  (pars.  200  to  208). 

In  the  first  drills  the  basis  of  the  alignment  is  established 
parallel  to  the  front  of  the  section;  afterwards  in  oblique 
directions. 

362.  When  the  troopers  have  acquired  reasonable  proficiency 
in  aligning  themselves,  as  above,  the  alignment  is  executed  at 
Vhe  command  DUESS,  given  by  the  instructor  from  his  position 
as  loader.     The  trooper  designated  as  the  guide   (par.  371)  is 
always  the  base  trooper  of  the  alignment  and  places  himself 
accurately  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  leader.    All  the  other  troopers 
align  themselves  promptly  on  the  base  trooper,  continuing  to 
look  toward  him  until  the  command,   FRONT.     At  this  last 
command,  given  when  the  alignment  is  completed,  all  turn  the 
head  and  eyes  quickly  to  the  front  and  take  the  position  of 
attention  (pars.  59,  198).    Movements  in  the  rank  then  cease. 
The   instructor   then   habitually   faces   the   .squad   or  goes  to 
either  flank  to  verify  the  accuracy  of  ihe  dressing,  first  cau- 
tioning the  guide  to  remain  in  place. 

363.  The  troopers  and  their  mounts  must  be  so  trained  as 
to  enable  alignment  and  interval   to  be  kept  with  sufficient 
accuracy  to  maintain  cohesion  in  the  mounted  charge  and  to 
present  a   creditable  appearance  at  ceremonies  and  at  other 
occasions  of  a  formal  or  ceremonial  character.     A  dispropor- 
tionate amount  of  time  and  energy  will  not  be  devoted  to  this 
detail. 

364.  The  use  of  dressing  by  command,  is  ordinarily  confined 
to  elementary  instruction    (as  preparation  for  the  march  in 
line)  and  to  formations  of  a  distinctly  ceremonial  character. 
At  all  other  times  the  troopers   are  required  habitually  to 
align  themselves  on  the  base  trooper  without  special  command 
and  to  look  to  the  front  as  soon  as  aligned. 

Formal  dressing  is  employed  only  when  the  squad  is  at  a 
halt. 

365.  The  caution:   DRESS,  may,  if  necessary,   be  given  to 
the  squad  when  marching  (par.  367)  ;  but  it  will  not  be  em- 


148        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

ployed  when  it  is  practicable  to  use  instead  cautions  addressed 
by  name  to  the  individual  trooper  or  troopers  who  are  at 
fault. 

366.  Alignments,  dismounted,  are  executed  by  the  same  gen- 
eral methods  as  when  mounted.    At  the  command  :  DRESS,  the 
hand  is  placed  upon  the  hip  to  verify  the  interval  (par.  57). 
Each  trooper  in  dressing  so  places  himself  that  his  right  arm 
rests  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  man  on  his  right  and  that 
his  eyes  and  shoulders  are  in  line  with  those  of  the  man  on 
his  right.     The  left  hand  is  dropped  to  the  side  at  the  command 
FRONT. 

LEADING  THE  SQUAD. 

(See  also  pars.  322-332.) 

367.  The  squad  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  directs 
the  guide   (par.  371)  to  maintain  a  position  at  a  distance  of 
3   yards    (about   one   horse   length)    in  rear   of  him   and   to 
follow  accurately  in  his  path,  whether  such  path  be  a  straight 
line  or  a  curve.     He  explains  to  the  other  troopers  that  in 
marching  they  are  so  to   regulate  on  the  guide  as   to   pre- 
serve as  nearly  as  practicable  their  alignment  and  interval 
in  the  rank,  individually  increasing  and  decreasing  the  gait 
or  pace  (Def.)  as  may  be  necessary  to  do  this.     All  are  cau- 
tioned that  they  must  learn  to  keep  their  proper  positions  in 
the  rank  without  unnecessary  rigidity  without  making  sudden 
changes  in  gait  or  pace  and  without  keeping  their  eyes  con- 
stantly fixed  on  the  guide.     They  are  instructed  that  while 
riding  with  the  head  and  eyes  habitually  directed  as  in  par. 
198  they  will  keep  an  alert  lookout  over  the  ground  in  front, 
cast  frequent  glances  toward  the  leader  so  as  to  observe  the 
latter's  movements,  and  glance  occasionally  toward  the  guide 
to  assure  that  the  alignment  is  being  correctly  maintained. 
Having  given   these   instructions,   the  leader  places   himself, 
facing  to  the  front,  3  yards  in  front  of  the  guide,  commands : 
FOLLOW  ME,  and  moves  forward.     The  leader  must  be  care- 
ful to  march  steadily,  so  regulating  his  direction  and  gait  at 
first  as  to  enable  the  guide  to  conform  without  difficulty. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        149 

Each  trooper  keeps  his  horse  straight  in  the  rank,  maintain- 
ing his  alignment  with  the  guide  and  his  proper  interval  (par. 
368-a)  from  the  man  next  him  on  the  side  of  the  guide.  The 
troopers  yield  to  pressure  from  the  side  of  the  guide  and  resist 


s 


&  LEADING  THE  SQUAD, 

f         ^          l^HEN  DEPLOYED  AS  f.O^Gm^ 


COMMAND? - 

trORAGEFtS.  2.  MARCH. 


FIG.  37,  par.  36 


pressure  from   the   opposite   direction.     All    adjustments   are 
made  gradually  without  crowding  or  confusion. 

In  the  beginning  the  leader  moves  at  a  walk  and  makes  only 
slight  changes  of  direction.  As  the  instructor  completes  each 
change  of  direction  he  indicates  the  new  direction  of  march  by 


150         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

extending  his  arm  as  in  signal  forward  (par.  990),  dropping 
the  hand  to  the  side  when  the  guide's  horse  is  straightened 
in  the  new  direction.  When  the  troopers  have  become  suffi- 
ciently practiced  in  adjusting  themselves  to  the  movements 
of  the  instructor,  the  latter  makes  the  changes  of  direction 
more  marked,  and  moves,  during  such  changes,  on  the  arcs  of 
smaller  circles.  Finally,  he  requires  the  squad  to  apply  the 
principles  of  leading  in  the  manner  indicated  in  pars.  346-349. 
As  each  movement  is  taken  up  the  principles  of  leading  that 
apply  are  explained  in  detail,  so  that  all  may  understand 
clearly  the  identity  and  position  of  the  base.  The  base 
trooper  (guide)  must  clearly  understand  his  duties.  (Fig.  31.) 

SQUAD  FORMATIONS. 

The  formations  of  the  squad  for  drill,  march,  or  combat  are 
as  follows : 

CLOSE  OBDEE. 

368.  (a)  Line:  The  troopers  are  abreast  of  each  other  with 
intervals  (Del)  of  6  inches  (mounted)  or  4  inches  (dis- 
mounted) between  troopers. 

(b)  Column   of  fours:    The  troopers  of  each  four  are  ar- 
ranged as  in  line.     The  fours  follow  successively  one  behind 
another  with  distances   (Def.)   between  successive  fours  of  4 
feet,   mounted,   or  92   inches,   dismounted.   When   a   four   in- 
cludes less  .than  four  troopers  it  is  an  incomplete  four.    Places 
in  an  incomplete  four  are  habitually  filled  in  the  following 
order:  No.  2,  No.  3,  No.  4,  No.  1  (par.  374). 

(c)  Column  of  twos:  The  troopers  of  each  two  are  arranged 
as  in  line,  the  twos  following  successively,  one  behind  another, 
with  distances  between  successive  twos  of  4  feet,  mounted,  or 
40  inches,  dismounted.     If  any  two  have  but  a  single  trooper 
the  latter  takes  the  position  corresponding  to  the  right  trooper 
of  the  incomplete  two  (par.  374). 

(d)  Column  of  troopers:   The  troopers  of  each  four  follow 
successively,  one  behind  another,  with  distances  between  con- 
secutive troopers  of  4  feet  when  mounted,  or  14  inches  when 
dismounted. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        151 

EXTENDED  OKDEB. 

(c)  Foragers:  The  troopers  are  abreast  of  each  other,  with 
intervals  of  3  yards  between  troopers,  unless  some  other 
interval  be  specially  designated. 

The  dismounted  formation  corresponding  to  foragers  is  skir- 
mishers. The  interval  between  troopers  in  line  of  skirmishers 
is  one-half  pace  unless  some  other  interval  be  designated. 

In  the  employment  of  a  squad  or  other  small  detachment 
the  designation  of  a  greater  interval  than  one-half  pace  is 
habitual  rather  tJian  exceptional  (par.  408). 

In  a  line  of  skirmishers  at  one-half  pace  interval  each  man 
may  be  considered  as  occupying,  including  his  interval,  about 
1  yard  of  front. 

The  squad  may  also  be  extended  in  depth  as  prescribed  in 
par.  413. 

ORDEB  IN  THE  SQUAD. 

369.  When  it  is  said  that  a  unit  is  in  order  in  any  formation 
it  is  meant  that  the  arrangement  and  condition  of  the  compo- 
nent elements  is  such  that  the  unit  is  ready  to  execute,  in  the 
accustomed  manner,  any  movement  that  is  intended  to  be  exe- 
cuted from  the  formation  in  question.     The  conditions  essen- 
tial to  order  in  each  formation,  of  the  squad  are  stated  in  para- 
graph 370.    The  squad,  in  line,  for  example,  would  not  be  in 
order  if  the  troopers  did  not  know  their  numbers,  for  it  could 
then  execute  no  movement  based  upon  the  division  into  fours, 
twos,  or  troopers. 

370.  The  squad  in  line,  column  of  fours,  or  foragers  is  in 
order  when  the  troopers  of  each  four  are  arranged,  from  right 
to  left  in  the  four,  in  the  order  of  their  respective  numbers, 
and  each  knows  his  number. 

The  squad  in  column  of  twos  is  in  order  when  the  twos  of 
each  four  are  next  to  each  other  in  the  column,  odd  numbers 
on  the  right,  and  each  trooper  knows  his  number. 

When  the  two  composed  of  1  and  2  is  in  front,  the  column  is 
said  to  be  right  in  front;  when  the  two  composed  of  3  and  4 
is  in  front,  the  column  is  said  to  be  left  in  front. 

The  squad  in  column  of  troopers  is  in  order  when  the  troop- 
ers of  each  four  art  next  to  one  another  in  the  column,  are  ar- 


1*9        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

ranged  from  front  to  rear  in  the  order  1,  2,  3,  4,  or  4,  3,  2,  1, 
and  each  trooper  knows  his  number.     When  the  order  is  1,  2, 

3,  4,  the  column  is  said  to  be  right  in  front ;  when  the  order  is 

4,  3,  2,  1,  left  in  front. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  order  in  the  squad,  in  any  of  the  above 
formations,  that  a  particular  trooper  or  troopers  be  in  any 
designated  four,  nor  that  the  fours  have  any  special  relative 
order  from  right  to  left  or  front  to  rear. 

GUIDE  OF  THE  SQUAD. 
(see  also  Def.  Base,  and  par.  326.) 

371.  At  the  original  formation   of  the  squad   in  line,   the 
leader  designates  a  trooper  by  name  as  guide  of  the  squad. 
The  guide  of  the  squad  in  line  and  foragers  is  habitually  a 
trooper  at  or  near  the  center  of  the  squad;  any  trooper  may, 
however,  be  designated  as  guide. 

372.  A  trooper  having  once  been  designated  as  guide  of  the 
squad  in  line  continues  to  act  as  such,  in  line  or  foragers,  until 
another  trooper  be  specifically  designated  as  guide.     With  a 
view,  however,  to  avoiding  possible  doubt  as  to  the  identity 
of  the  guide,  the  leader  at  each  change  of  formation  that  ter- 
minates in  line  or  foragers  habitually  indicates  the  guide  of 
the  new  formation. 

373.  To  designate  the  guide  the  leader  cautions :  (So-and-so) 
THE  GUIDE,  and  habitually  places  himself  3  yards  in  front  of 
the  trooper  named  if  not  already  in  that  position.     A  trooper 
designated  as  guide  will,  at  the  time  of  the  designation,  raise 
his  hand  or  weapon  to  a  position  vertically  above  his  head, 
hold  the  position  for  a  moment,  and  then  lower  his  arm  to  his 
side  without  further  command.     The  leader  or  his  assistant 
may  at  any  time  cause  the  guide  thus  to  indicate  his  identity 
to  the  other  troopers  by  cautioning :  GUIDE.    The  leader  may 
change  the  guide  of  the  squad  in  line  at  any  time  by  indicating 
disregard    (par.   990),    placing   himself   in   front   of   another 
trooper  and  designating  the  latter  as  guide  in  the  manner  pre- 
scribed above. 

374.  The  base  of  the  squad  in  each  of  the  column  forma- 
tions is  the  leading  element    (four,  two,  or  trooper,  respec- 
tively). 


MANUAL  FOB,  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        158 

The  guide  of  the  leading  (base)  element  is  also  the  guide  of 
the  squad.  In  each  four  No.  2  is  the  guide;  in  each  two  the 
right  trooper  (No.  1  or  No.  3).  In  an  incomplete  four  or  two 
the  position  of  the  guide  is  always  filled.  The  guide  of  each 
element  in  rear  of  the  base  follows  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  of 
the  base  (leading)  element  at  the  prescribed  distance. 

375.  Whenever  in  the  execution  of  any  movement  a  four  or 
two  moves  to  its  new  position  by  an  oblique   (or  movement 
approximating   an  oblique)    the  trooper  on  the  side  toward 
which  the  oblique  is  made  acts  as  guide  of  the  element  during 
the  oblique.     At  all  other  times  the  guide  in  a  four  or  two  is 
as  indicated  in  par.  374  unless  specially  otherwise  stated. 

376.  The  guide  of  the  squad  habitually  follows  the  leader  at 
3  yards  distance,  but  the  leader  may  designate  a  greater  dis- 
tance, in  which  case  the  guide  marches  accordingly. 

377.  When   a   guide   temporarily   is    directing   guide    (par. 
324),  it  is  necessary  that  he  continue  accurately  in  the  direc- 
tion of  march  or  in  the  direction  indicated  for  him  by  the 
leader.     This  is  an  application  of  the  marching  upon  fixed 
points  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Trooper  (par.  232). 

MOVEMENTS  EXECUTED  BY  THE  SQUAD. 

378.  Any  formation    (close  or  extended  order)    prescribed 
for  the  squad  may  be  taken  directly  from  any  other  close-order 
formation.     Being  in  extended  order  the  squad,  to  pass  di- 
rectly to  close  order,  must  execute  the  assembly  or  rally. 

379.  Subject  to  such  modifications  as  are  indicated  under 
the  respective  paragraphs  describing  the  movements,  the  dis- 
mounted squad  executes,  at  the  same  commands  as  prescribed 
for  the  mounted  squad,  such  movements  as  are  not  obviously 
inapplicable  to  dismounted  duty.     The  execution  of  the  dis- 
mounted movements  will,  where  differences  in  the  mounted  and 
dismounted  methods  necessarily  exist,  be  in  accord  with  the 
principles  explained  in  the  School  of  the  Trooper,  Dismounted, 
corresponding  changes  in  the  details  of  execution  being  made. 

380.  The  general  principles  regulating  gait  and  pace  for  both 
mounted  and  dismounted  movements  are  stated  in  pars.  333- 
339.     Modifications  of  those  principles,  if  any,  are  stated  under 
the  corresponding  paragraphs  in  the  School  of  the  Squad. 


154        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

COMMANDS  AND  COKHESPONDIXI;  ARM   SIGNALS. 

381.  Following  is  a  list  of  the  principal  commands  employed 
in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  together  with  the  corresponding 
arm  signals,  if  any.  The  list  includes  only  a  few  of  the  com- 
mands also  found  in  the  School  of  the  Trooper  (mounted  or 
dismounted.)  The  commands  are  arranged  alphabetically  for 
convenient  reference.  The  description  of  the  signals  will  be 
found  in  par.  990. 


COMMANDS. 

PAKS. 

ARM  SIGNALS. 

I.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH        

414 

Assemble.* 

1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH  

384 

None. 

1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH.  .  . 
CIRCLE  HORSES  

411 

428 

March  to  the  flank.* 
None. 

1.  Column,  2.  MARCH  

399 

Column.* 

1.  Column  half  right  (left),  2.  MARCH... 
1.  Column  of  twos,  2.  MARCH   '.  

396 
399 

Change      direction.*     (See 
par.  386.) 
Column—  twos.f 

1.  Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH 

396 

Change    direction.*      (See 

COUPLE  HEAD  AND  TAIL     

427 

par.  386.) 
None. 

DISMOUNT  

357 

Prepare      to      dismount.* 

1.  Foragers,  2.  MARCH               .... 

J    408 

(Given  as  explained  in  par. 
357.) 
[Foragers.* 

1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH        

1    410 
r    382 

[Forward.* 

1.  Fours  right  (left),  2.  MARCH  

1    412 
[    391 
1    400 

JMarch  to  the  flank.* 

*  Signals  marked  thus  are  preparatory  signals;  the  signal  of  execution  in  each 
case  is  made  as  prescribed  in  par.  990. 

t  In  signals  marked  thus  (combination  signals)  the  preparatory  signal  consists 
of  more  than  one  element;  the  signal  of  execution  follows  the  last  element  of  the 
preparatory  signal. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         105 


COMMANDS. 

PARS. 

ARM  SIGNALS. 

1.  Fours  right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH... 

1.  Fours  right  (left),  column  left  (right); 
2.  MARCH. 
1.  Fours  (twos  or  troopers)  at  so  many 
yards  distance,  2.  MARCH. 
1.  Gallop,  2.  MARCH      ..T  

r    401 
I    402 
403-c 

413 
382 

JTo  the  rear*  (left   about 
1    only). 
None. 

None. 
From  the  trot  only*  Increase 

HORSES  BACK    .              

432 

the  galt.*a 
None. 

INCLINE  TO  THE  RIGHT  

J    390 

I  None. 

1.  Nos.  1,  2,  and  4;  2.  FORM  ON  FOOT.. 
MOUNT  '.  

1    396 
436 
355 

None. 
Prepare   to   mount.    (Given 

1.  Prepare  to  dismount,  2.  DISMOUNT.. 
1.  Prepare  to  mount,  2.  MOUNT  

|    356 
1    358 
f    354 

as  explained  in  par.  355.) 
[prepare  to  dismount.* 

[Prepare  to  mount.* 

RALLY  

I    358 
416 

Rally   (no   preparatory   sig- 

1. Right  (left)  by  fours,  2.  MARCH  

403-a 

nal).    Oral  command  ha- 
bitually accompanies  sig- 
nal. 
None. 

1.  Right  (left)  by  troopers,  2.  MARCH  
1.  Right  (left)  by  twos,  2.  MARCH  

J393-6 
1403-6 
J393-a 

JNone.      , 
I  None. 

1.  Right  (left)  forward,  fours  right  (left); 
2.  MARCH. 

J403-6 
403-d 

None. 

*  Signals  marked  thus  are  preparatory  signals;  the  signal  of  execution  in  each 
case  is  made  as  prescribed  in  par.  990. 

a  See  pars.  239,  333.  When  a  gait  signal  is  added  to  the  preparatory  command 
the  resulting  signal  is  given  as  a  combination  signal'. 


156         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


COMMANDS. 

PARS. 

ARM  SIGNALS. 

1.  Right   (left)   half  turn,  2.  MARCH;   3. 

388 

Change  direction.*  The  sig- 

Forward, 4.  MARCH;  or  3.  Squad,   4. 

nal  of  execution   for   the 

HALT. 

change  of  direction  rs  fol- 

lowed by  forward  or  halt* 

(par.  386). 

1.  Right  (left)  front  into  foragers  (or  skir- 

400 

N'one. 

mishers),  2.  MARCH. 

1.  Right  (left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH  .  .  . 

397 

None. 

1.  Right    (left)    turn,  2.  MARCH;  3.  For- 

386 

Change  direction.*    The  sig- 

ward,   4.    MARCH;    or    3.    Squad,    4. 

nal   of  execution   for   the 

HALT. 

change  of  direction  is  fol- 

lowed    by     forward*     or 

halt.* 

1   Skirmishers,  9   MARCH 

|  ^408 

[skirmishers.* 

1    410 

1.  Squad,  2.  HALT  

383 

Halt.* 

TO  FIGHT  ON  FOOT.    When  given  or- 

430 

To  fight  on  foot.    (No  pre- 

ally   the   indication   ACTION   RIGHT 

paratory  signal.) 

(LEFT,  FRONT)  is  habitually  added  to 

•  the  above  command.    FIRE  AT  WILL 

•  may  also  immediately  follow  the  above 

command  (par.  430). 

1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH 

412 

To  the  rear.* 

1.  Troopers     right     (left)     about, 

402 

To   the   rear*    (left   about 

2.  MARCH.    (Given  only  from  column 

only). 

of  troopers.) 

1.  Troopers     right     (left)     oblique, 

38o 

None. 

2.  MARCH.                   $ 

*  Signals  marked  thus  are  preparatory  signals;  the  signal  of  execution  in  each 
case  is  ma<i3  a* prtseribed  in  par.  990. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        107 


COMMANDS. 

PARS. 

ABM  SIGNALS. 

1.  Trot,  2.  MARCH  

239 

From    the    walk:    Increase 

the  gait.*a 

From  the  gallop:  Decrease 

the  gait.*a 

1.  Twos  right  (left),  2.  MARCH.    (Given 

400 

March  to  the  flank.* 

only  from  column  of  twos  and  as  an  ex- 

ceptional movement.) 

1.  Twos    right    (left)    about,  2.  MARCH. 

402 

To    the    rear*    (left    about 

(Given  only  from  column  of  twos.) 

only). 

1.  Walk,  2.  MARCH 

239 

From    the    trot   only*    De- 

crease the  gait.*a 

*  Signals  marked  thus  are  preparatory  signals;  the  signal  of  execution  in  each 
case  is  made  as  prescribed  in  par.  990. 

a  See  pars.  239,  333.  When  a  gait  signal  is  added  to  the  preparatory  command, 
the  resulting  signal  is  given  as  a  combination  signal. 

DETAILED  DESCRIPTION  or  MOVEMENTS,  CLOSE  ORDER. 

382.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  march  to  the  front:  1.  For- 
ward, 2.  MARCH. 

The  leader  moves  forward,  followed  at  a  distance  of  3  yards 
by  the  guide  (par.  371).  The  other  troopers  conform  to  the 
march  of  the  guide  as  explained  in  par.  367. 

Being  at  a  halt,  to  move  forward  at  a  trot  or  gallop,  the 
commands'  are  (par.  333)  :  1.  Forward,  trot,  or  1.  Forward, 
gallop;  2.  MARCH. 

Increases  of  gait  are  habitually  made  progressively  (par. 
239). 

The  march  of  the  squad  in  line,  dismounted,  is  conducted  in 
accordance  with  the  provisions  of  pars.  68-74. 

383.  Marching  in  line,  to  halt:  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT. 
All  halt  at  the  second  command. 

The  troopers,  if  not  already  aligned,  align  themselves  with- 
out command  on  the  guide  as  they  halt  (par.  364)*  Move- 
ment in  the  rank  then  ceases. 


158        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

If  marching  at  the  trot  or  gallop,  the  gait  is  ordinarily  de- 
creased progressively,  the  halt  being  executed  from  the  walk 
(par.  239). 

384.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  march  backward:   ~\.  Back- 
ward, 2.  MARCH. 

All  the  troopers  rein  back  (par.  280),  regulating  on  the 
guide,  who  maintains  his  distance  from  the  leader.  The  exe- 
cution of  the  march  backward  as  a  collective  movement  is 
habitually  limited  to  cases  where  the  movement  may  be  neces- 
sary ;  it  is  then  executed  for  short  distances  only.  His  not 
executed  at  an  increased  gait. 

385.  Being  in  line,  to  oblique  and  resume  the  original  direc- 
tion:  1.  Troopers  right  (left)  oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  trooper  as  in  par.  2.*>0.  During  the 
oblique  inarch  the  right  knee  of  each  trooper  should  be  just 


,    .   f  ,       COMMAND: 
'  ,  ', ',  '  2.  FORWARD,  2.  MARCH. 


COMMAND: 

1.  TROOPERS 
RIGHT  OBLIQUE. 
Z.  MARCH. 

FIG.  38,  par.  385. 

in  rear  of  the  left  knee  of  the  trooper  on  his  right ;  the  trooper 
on  the  flank  toward  which  the  oblique  is  made  acts  tempo- 
rarily without  special  indication  as  directing  guide  (Def.) 
of  the  squad.  The  line  during  the  oblique  inarch  should  be 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        159 

parallel  to  its  original  direction.  The  leader  does  not  take 
position  in  front  of  the  flank  trooper  during  the  oblique. 

Halting  the  mounted  squad  while  at  the  oblique  should  be 
avoided.  If  the  squad  has  to  be  halted  thus,  the  troopers 
upon  halting  turn  their  horses  to  the  original  front  in  so  far 
as  practicable. 

To  resume  the  original  direction  by  similar  means,  the  com- 
mands are :  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

In  executing  the  oblique  by  trooper,  dismounted,  each 
trooper  preserves  his  relative  position,  keeping  his  shoulders 
parallel  to  those  of  the  directing  guide  and  so  regulating  his 
step  that  the  rank  may  remain  parallel  to  its  original  front. 
In  resuming  the  original  direction,  the  troopers  half  face  to 
the  left  in  marching,  then  move  straight  to  the  front.  If  at 
half  step  or  mark  time  while  obliquing,  the  oblique  march  is 
resumed  by  the  commands :  1.  Oblique,  2.  MARCH.  Should  the 
halt  be  commanded  while  the  squad  is  obliquing,  the  troopers 
halt  faced  to  the  front  (fig.  32). 

386.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  to  the  right  or  left:  1.  Right 
(left)  turn,  2.  MARCH;  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH;  or  3.  Squad, 
4.  HALT. 

The  principle  of  the  movement  is  explained  in  par.  329-a. 

The  form  of  the  third  and  fourth  commands  is  determined 
by  whether  the  turn  is  to  terminate  with  the  advance  in  line 
or  with  the  halt. 

In  the  turn  the  squad  is  led  by  its  leader  (par.  367)  through 
a  change  of  direction  of  90°.  The  leader  (and,  therefore,  the 
guide)  are  restricted  not  only  to  this  particular  Change  of 
direction  but  also  to  a  particular  arc  or  path  during  the  turn 
(par.  387). 

There  is  no  special  arm  signal  for  the  turn  as  such ;  but,  as 
the  turn  is  a  change  of  direction,  the  signal  for  the  latter 
movement  is  applicable.  The  signal  for  the  change  of  direc- 
tion does  not  in  itself  indicate  the  degree  of  the  turn,  but  the 
leader's  subsequent  signal  forward  or  halt  indicates  when  the 
change  of  direction  is  to  cease. 

In  the  turn,  as  in  any  case  of  the  march  in  line,  the  leader, 
subject  to  the  restrictions  just  indicated,  regulates  the  direc- 
tion and  gait  of  march,  the  guide  conforms  to  the  movements 
of  the  leader,  and  all  the  other  troopers  regulate  their  align- 


160        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

ment  and  interval  on  the  guide.  The  rate  of  march  of  the 
leader  and  the  guide  should  not  be  so  rapid  as  to  make  it 
impracticable  for  the  troopers  on  the  marching  flank  of  the 
squad  to  preserve  their  alignment  on  the  guide  during  the  turn. 
The  guide  moves  in  the  trace  of  the  leader  during  the  turn,  as 
well  MS  before  and  after  the  turn.  When  the  turn  is  executed 
by  the  marching  squad  the  leader  gives  the  command  after  he 
has  begun  to  change  direction  and  at  the  moment  when  the 
guide  arrives  at  the  point  where  the  leader  straightened  7n> 
horse  in  the  neic  direction  (par.  471).  When  executed  from  a 
halt  the  second  command  can  not  be  given  as  above  indicated. 
The  leader  in  that  case  begins  to  turn  at  the  command  of  exe- 
cution, while  the  guide,  instead  of  beginning  the  actual  turn 
at  once,  moves  forward  so  as  to  move,  during  the  turn,  in  the 
trace  of  the  leader  (par.  367). 

In  executing  the  turn  dismounted  the  leader  so  regulates 
the  length  of  step  of  the  guide  that  the  trooper  on  the  in-arch- 
ing flanlv  can  keep  the  regular  step  corresponding  to  the  gait 
at  which  the  turn  is  made.  The  other  troopers  lengthen  or 
shorten  the  step  accordingly,  maintaining  the  cadence  and 
their  alignment  and  interval  with  respect  to  the  guide.  If  the 
turn  be  terminated  by  the  commands :  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH, 
all  the  troopers  resume  the  regular  step  at  the  fourth  com- 
mand . 

387.  In  executing  the  turn  in  a  squad  or  platoon,  the  leader, 
followed  by  the  guide,  so  turns  on  the  arc  of  a  circle  that  the 
pivot  trooper,  in  conforming  to  the  guide's  movements,  marches 
on  the  arc  of  a  circle  whose  radius  varies  with  the  gait  of  the 
guide,  this  radius  being  2  yards  at  a  walk,  4  yards  at  a  trot, 
and   0  yards  at   a   gallop.     When  the  turn  is  executed  dis- 
mounted the  corresponding  radius,  in  either  quick  or  double 
time,  is  1  yard. 

388.  At  the  command:  1.  Right  (left)  half  turn,  2.  MARCH; 
&  Forward,  4.  MARCH;   or  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT,  a  change  of  di- 
rection of  45°  may  be  made  in  accordance  with  the  principles 
explained  in  pars.  388  and  387.    The  arm  signal  for  the  half 
turn  follows  the  rule  indicated  for  the  full  turn  (par.  386). 

389.  In  all  movements  in  these  regulations  in  the  course  of 
which  fours,  twos,  or  troopers  execute  a  turn  or  half  turn  this 
last  movement  is  made  by  each  element  in  accordance  with  the 


MAffTTAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        161 

principles  explained  in  pars.  386  and  387,  except  that  the  com- 
mands 3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH,  are  omitted  and  each  element 
continues  the  march  in  the  new  direction,  upon  completion  of 
the  turn,  unless  the  commands :  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT,  are  given. 
The  guide  of  a  four  in  the  turn  is  always  No.  2 ;  the  guide  of  a 
two  the  right  trooper. 

390.  Whore  only  a. slight  change  in  the  direction  of  march  is 
desired,  it  is  habitually  accomplished  by  leading  without  any 
special  command  or  signal  therefor.    The  leader  may  caution  : 
INCLINE    TO   THE   RIGHT    (LEFT).     The   execution   of   this 
movement,  like  that  of  the  turn,  is  a  special  case  of  leading 
applied  to  the  march  in  line.     The  leader  slightly  alters  the 
direction  of  march,  the  guide  conforms  to  the  leader's  -move- 
ments,     and      the     other 

troopers    conform   to    the 
movements  of  the  guide. 

391.  Being    in    line,    to 
form   column   of  fours   to 
a    flank:     1.    Fours    right 
(left),  L>.  MARCH. 

The  fours  move,  simul- 
taneously, each  executing  FIG.  39,  par.  391. 
right  turn  and  taking  up 

rhe  march  in  the  new  direction  (par.  '389).  No.  2  of  the  four 
on  the  ilank  toward  which  the  movement  is  executed  is  the 
guide  upon  whom  the  other  Nos.  2  regulate  during  the  move- 
ment (par.  326),  as  well  as  the  guide  of  the  resulting  column 
(par.  374).  The  leader  promptly  takes  position  in  front  of 
the  guide  (par.  325).  Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-rf. 

The  movement  dismounted  is  executed  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples except  that  No.  2  of  each  four  regulates  his  step  and 
path  as  indicated  for  the  dismounted  turn  (pars.  386,  387). 
(Fig.  33.) 

392.  Column  of  twos  is  not  formed  directly  to  a  flank  fror^ 
line.     Column  of  twos  may  be  formed  to  the  front  as  explained 
in  pars.  393  and  403,  and  the  head  of  the  column  be  at  once 
inarched  in  any  desired  direction.     The  same  principle 
latos  the  formation  of  column  of  troopers  to  a  flank. 

366°— 17 6 


162        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

393.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  to  form  column  of  twos  or 
troopers: 

(a)  To  form  column  of  twos:  1.  Eight  (left)  by  twos,  2. 
MAECH. 

The  right  two  of  the  leading  four  is  the  base.  The  other 
twos  enter  the  column  successively,  the  right  two  of  each 
four  being  followed  •  immediately  by  the  left  two  of  the  same 
four,  the  left  two  obliquing  to  enter  the  column  (par.  331). 
All  distances  are  4  feet  (par.  368).  Gaits  are  regulated  as  in 
movements  from  line  into  column  (par.  337-a,  c). 
x  (&)  Column  of  troopers  is  formed  on  the  same  principles  at 
the  commands:  1.  Eight  (left)  by  trooper,  2.  MAECH.  The 
right  trooper  of  the  leading  four  is  the  base. 

Column  of  troopers  from  column  of  twos  is  formed  by  the 
same  commands  as  from  column  of  fours  and  in  accordance 
with  the  same  principles. 

The  movements  described  in  this  paragraph  are  among  those 
referred  to  in  par.  ^68-b. 

394.  In  executing  any  movement  by  which  a  column  of  twos 
or  troopers  is  formed,  a  four  composed  of  less  than  three 
troopers  (par.  3G8-&)  acts  temporarily  as  a  two — on  the  right 
of  the  four  if  the  column  of  twos  is  formed  right  in  front  (par. 
370)  ;  on  the  left  of  the  four  if  the  column  of  twos  is  formed 
left  in  front.     When  the  column  of  fours  is  re-formed  the 
troopers  take  their  proper  places  in  column  as  indicated  in 
par.  368-fc. 

395.  The  squad  in  column  of  fours,   twos,  or  troopers  is 
marched  to  the  front,  halted,  marched  backward,  marched  in 
an  oblique  direction,  and  marched  again  to  the  original  front 
by  the  same  commands  as  the  squad  in  line,  each  element  of 
the  column  conforming  to  the  principles  indicated  for  the 
squad  in  line  (pars.  329,  374). 

396.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  to  change 
direction. 

The  movement  is  executed  as  explained  in  par.  329,  the 
fours  (twos,  troopers)  successively  changing  on  the  same 
ground,  the  guide  of  each  element  moving  in  the  trace  of  the 
leader. 

In  changing  direction  in  column  of  fours,  mounted,  the 
guide  of  each  rear  four  slightly  diminishes  the  pace  when  4 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        163 

feet  from  the  turning  point,  correspondingly  increasing  the 
pace  during  the  actual  change  of  direction  so  as  to  have  the 
proper  distance  of  4  feet  from  the  four  next  in  front  when  the 
turn  is  completed.  This  provision  does  not  apply  to  the  cor- 
responding dismounted  movement,  nor  to  the  column  of  twos, 
or  troopers. 

To  indicate,  lor  any  column,  n  change  of  direction  of  90°  or 
45°,  the  leader  may  command,  respectively:  1.  Column  right 
(left),  or  1.  Column  half  right  (left) ;  2.  MARCH. 

The  leader  may  indicate  a  slight  change  of  direction  by  the 
caution:  INCLINE  TO  THE  RIGHT. 

The  dismounted  execution  of  the  change  of  direction  con- 
forms in  each  element  of  the  column  to  the  modifications  noted 
in  pars.  380  and  387  for  the  execution  of  -the  turn  dismounted. 
The  leader  regulates  the  length  of  his  own  stop  accordingly 
during  his  actual  change  of  direction,  and  die  guide  of  each 
successive  element  does  the  same  when  *.- 

lie  reaches  the  turning  point.  II 

397.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  U 

troopers,  to  form  line  to  the  front:    3. 
Right  (left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH. 

The  leading  element  (four,  two,  or 
trooper)  of  the  column  is  the  base  of  the 
movement  and  moves  forward. 

Each  element  in  rear  of  the  base 
leaves  the  column  by  a  movement  ap- 
proximating a  right  oblique  and  pro- 
ceeds (par.  375)  to  a  place  abreast  of 
the  leading  element,  the  elements  taking 
succassively,  from  left  to  right  in  the 
new  line,  positions  in  the  same  order 
as  that  in  which  they  previously  ap- 
peared from  head  to  rear  in  the  column. 

The  guide  of  the  leading  element,  when 
the  movement  begins,  acts  as  directing 
guide  (Def.)  of  the  squad  from  the 
moment  the  leader  starts  to  his  new 
position  until  he  indicates  the  guide  of  the  new  line  (pars. 
32(j,  373)  when  all  regulate  on  the  latter  guide. 


164        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  pars.  337-a,  &.  (Fig.  34.) 
This  is  one  of  the  movements  referred  to  in  par.  468-&. 
In  the  dismounted  execution  of  the  movement  at  quick  time 
the  leader  commands :  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT,  as  soon  as  the  lead- 
ing element  has  advanced  to  the  point  where  it  is  desired  that 
the  line  shall  form  (par.  339-a,  1),  c).  Only  the  leading  (base) 
element  halts  at  the  command,  each  rear  element  halting  as  it 
arrives  on  the  line  (par.  337-/).  If  executed  while  marching 
in  double  time,  the  leader  similarly  commands :  1.  Quick  time, 
2.  MARCH,  the  reduced  gait  being  taken  successively  by  the 
elements  as  they  reach  their  positions  (par.  337-/).  If  march- 
ing in  quick  time,  and  double  time  be  included  in  the  com- 
mand, the  command  for  the  increased  gait  applies  only  to  the 
rear  elements  (par. '337-/). 

398.  To  prevent  the  inversion  of  twos  or  troopers  in  their 
respective  fours  the  squad  in  column  of  twos  or  column  of 
troopers  should  form  line  to  the  left  front  when  the  squad  is 
right  in  front  (par.  370),  and  vice  versa. 

399.  Being  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers,  to  form  column  of 
fours:   1.  Column,  2.  MARCH.     (See  Def.  Column.) 

The  leading  element  is  the  base  and  follows  the  leader. 
If  in   column   of  twos   the  rear   two   of  the  leading   four 
obliques  at  a  correspondingly  faster  gait  (par.  335)  and  takes 

its  proper  place 
abreast  of,  and  to 
the  right  or  left  of, 

__        the    leading   two    of 

COMMAND:  /  COLUMN,  2.  MARCH  that  fouiyso  that  the 

FIG.  41,  par.  399.  troopers  of  the  four 

shall  appear  from 

right  to  left,  in  the  order  of  their  respective  numbers.  All 
the  other  twos  take  up  a  correspondingly  faster  gait  than  the 
leading  two,  and  the  fours  form  successively  from  head  to 
rear  in  the  column  in  the  manner  indicated  above  (par. 
331).  The  leading  two  of  each  four,  other  than  the  leading 
four,  takes  the  gait  of  the  head  of  the  column  (or  halts)  when 
at  4  feet  from  the  corresponding  two  of  the  four  next  in  front. 
In  each  four  the  rear  two  begins  to  oblique  as  the  leading  two 
of  that  four  approaches  the  position  where  it  decreases  the 
gait  (or  halts). 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        165 

The  leader  takes  position  in  front  of  the  guide  of  the 
column  (No.  2). 

Gaits  are  further  regulated  as  in  movements  from  column 
into  line  (par.  337-a,  6). 

Column  of  fours  from  column  of  troopers  is  formed  by  the 
same  commands  and  in  accordance  with  the  same  principles. 

Column  of  twos  from  column  of  troopers  is  formed  in  a  simi- 
lar manner  at  the  commands :  1.  Column  of  twos,  2.  MARCH. 
The  column  of  twos  will  be  right  in  front  or  left  in  front 
(par.  e>70),  according  as  the  column  of  troopers  was  right  in 
front  or  left  in  front  prior  to  the  movement. 

In  the  dismounted  execution  of  the  above  movements  in  quick 
time  the  leader  habitually  commands :  1.  Squad,  2.  HALT,  im- 


COLUMN  OF  FOURS  ATA  WALK. 
COMMAND: 
1  1.  FOURS  LEFT, 
2.  MARCH.  3.  SQUAD. 
4.  HALT. 

Fro.  42,  par.  400. 

mediately  following  the  command  of  execution  (par.  339-fr,  c). 
Only  the  leading  element  halts  (par.  339-/),  each  of  the  rear 
elements  halting  when  it  reaches  its  prescribed  position  in  the 
column.  If  executed  in  double  time  the  leader  similarly  fol- 
lows the  command  of  execution  by  the  command  for  quick  time 
(par.  339-7;,  c),  which  is  successively  taken  by  the  elements,  as 
above.  If  inarching  in  quick  time,  and  double  time  be  com- 
manded, only  the  rear  elements  take  the  increased  gait,  each 
taking  quick  time  on  arriving  in  its  place.  (Fig.  41.) 

400.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  to  form  line 
to  a  flank:  1.  Fours  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

Kndi  four  turns  to  the  right  (par.  389).  Each  rear  four 
regulate*  on  the  leading  four  until  the  fours  unite  in  line  (par. 


166        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

326),  when,  unless  the  leader  halts  the  squad,  all  take  up  the 
march  in  the  new  direction  without  further  command,  regu- 
lating on  the  new  guide  (pars.  325,  372).  If  the  squad  is  tc 
form  line  without  advancing  in  the  new  direction,  the  leader 
gives  the  preparatory  indication  for  the  halt  immediately  fol- 
lowing the  second  command,  so  as  to  add  the  command  halt 
as  the  four  unite  in  line. 

In  an  emergency  a  similar  movement  may  be  executed  from 
columns  of  twos  at  the  commands:  1.  Twos  right  (left),  2. 
MARCH.  Loss  of  order  may  result.  In  the  absence  of  other 
indication,  intervals  are  closed  toward  the  guide  (par.  372). 
A  similar  movement  executed  from  column  of  troopers  results 
in  a  line  of  foragers,  which  may  be  assembled  or  rallied  tc 
form  line  (pars.  414,  416). 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-d.     (Fig.  36.) 

401.  Being  in  line,  to  face  or  march  the  line  to  the  rear: 
1.  Fours  right  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH. 

When  the  movement  is  executed  by  signal  the  elements  of 
the  column  always  turn  to  the  left  about.  The  oral  command 
fours  right  about  is  not  accompanied  by  an  arm  signal. 

Each  four  turns  180  degrees  in  the  direction  indicated  (par, 
389).  The  leader,  passing  around  a  flank  of  the  squad, 
promptly  takes  position  in  front  of  the  guide  so  as  to  lead  the 
squad  in  the  new  direction  (pars.  325,  372). 

To  face  to  the  rear,  the  squad  is  halted  as  the  fours  unite 
in  line. 

The  modifications  incident  to  the  execution  of  the  dis- 
mounted movement  are  indicated  in  par.  391. 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-d. 

A  dismounted  squad  may  also  be  marched  a  short  distance 
to  the  rear  by  the  oral  command  and  methods  indicated  in 
par.  82. 

402.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  to  face  01 
march  the  column  to  the  rear:  1.  Fours  (twos,  troopers),  right 
(left)  about,  2.  MARCH. 

The  provision  in  the  preceding  paragraph  regarding  the 
execution  of  the  movement  by  signal  applies  equally  to  this 
paragraph.  Each  four  (two,  trooper)  turns  180  degrees  in 
the  direction  indicated  (par.  389).  The  leader  promptly  takes 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         167 


position  in  front  of  the  guide  of  the  column  (par.  325).  (Fig. 
37.) 

403.  Being  in  line  to  form  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers 
to  the  front:  1.  Right  (left)  by  fours  (twos,  troopers),  2. 
MARCH. 

The  formation  is  a  successive  one.  The  right  element  (four, 
two,  or  trooper,  according  to  the  command)  is  the  base;  it 
moves  forward  and  follows  the  leader,  becoming  the  leading 
element,  of  the  column. 


6 


FIG.  43,  par.  402. 


FIG.  44,  par.  403    (a). 


(a)  In  forming  column  of  fours  each  four  to  the  left  of  the 
base  successively  obliques  to  the  right,  (par.  385)  at  the  gait 
of  the  base  as  soon  as  it  has  sufficient  space,  and  resumes  the 
direct  march  so  as  to  enter  the  column  at  4  feet  distance.  To 
avoid  losing  distance  the  oblique  must  be  begun  in  each  four 
when  the  heads  of  its  horses  are  opposite  the  croups  of  the 
horses  of  the  four  on  its  right.  Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  pars. 
;mi-a,  e.  (Fig.  44.) 

( ?> )  In  forming  column  of  twos  or  troopers  only  the  elements 
of  the  right  four  move  in  the  manner  indicated  above.  Each 
of  the  other  elements  successively  turns  to  the  right  (par.  389) 
and  then,  after  advancing  in  the  new  direction,  turns  to  the 


168        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

left  so  as  to  enter  the  column  at  4  feet  distance  (par.  331). 
Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  pars.  337-a,  c.  The  movements  de- 
scribed in  (a)  and  (&)  are  among  those  referred  to  in  par. 
468-6.  (Fig.  45.) 

(c)  Right  (left)  by  fours  is  ordinarily  unsuited  to  execution 
in  groups  of  any  size.  Should  it  be  necessary  to  break  to  the 
front  from  the  flank  of  such  a  unit,  column  of  fours  to  the 
front  may  be  formed  by  executing  fours  right  (left)  and  then 
changing  the  direction  of  march  of  the  head  of  the  column. 
The  oral  commands:  1.  Fours  right  (left),  column  left  (right), 


COMMAND: 
,f\      LLLFT^BYTWOS    Z.MARCH. 


%,.....    J 

"X^-m 


[f./jjk  VJ  [*$$(/;  H:J;0B 

FIG.  45,  par.  403   (6).  FIG.  46,  par.  403   (d). 

2.  MARCH,  and  1.  Fours  right  (left),  column  half  left  (right), 
2.  MARCH,  are  authorized  for  this  purpose.  Gaits  are  regu- 
lated as  in  par.  337-tf. 

((0  For  cases  that  are  not  suitably  met  by  (a)  or  (c)  of 
this  paragraph  the  commands:  1.  Right  (left)  forward,  fours 
right  (left),  2.  MARCH,  are  authorized.  The  right  four  is  the 
base  and  moves  forward  following  the  leader,  who  promptly 
takes  position  in  front  of  the  guide  of  the  column  (pars.  325, 
*>74).  The  second  four  from  the  right  starts  to  move  as  in 
fours  right  (par.  391),  its  guide  decreasing  the  pace  until  the 
right  four  has  partly  cleared  the  second  four,  when  the  latter 
four,  by  a  movement  approximating  an  oblique,  enters  the 
column  so  as  to  follow  in  the  trace  of  the  leading  (original 
right)  four  at  4  feet  distance.  The  other  fours  execute  fours 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        169 

right  (each  slightly  decreasing  the  pace  during  the  turn), 
and  then  column  left,  so  as  to  follow  the  second  four  at  the 
proper  distance.  The  fours  move  simultaneously  and,  except 
as  noted  above,  all  at  the  same  gait  (par.  337-$). 

In  the  execution  of  the  movement  dismounted  the  right  four 
moves  forward;  the  remainder  of  the  squad  executes  fours 
right,  column  left,  and  follows  the  right  (leading)  four  at 
92  inches  distance.  The  right  four  takes  four  short  steps  just 
after  it,  clears  the  four  next  on  its  left,  then  resumes  the  full 
step.  (Fig.  46.) 

EXTENDED  OKD'EE. 

404.  In  extended-order  drills  the  troopers  habitually  march 
at  ease,  but  keep  on  the  alert  so  as  promptly  to  conform  to  the 
indications  of  the  leader  and  the  movements  of  the  guide. 

The  rifles  of  dismounted  troopers  in  extended  order  are 
carried  as  in  par.  61. 

405.  Foragers  may  be  formed  when  the  squad  is  in  any  au- 
thorized formation  (par.  468)  or  in  disorder,  when  it  is  mov- 
ing at  any  gait  or  is  halted.    The  extension  is  effected  toward 
the  direction  of  march.    When  possible  the  deployment  should 
be  made  upon  ground  protected  from  hostile  view  and  fire. 
Whatever  the  method  employed  for  the  extension,  the  leader 
controls  the  movements  of  the  base    (par.  323).     The  other 
troopers,  moving  at  a  gallop,  form  foragers  in  accordance  with 
the  methods  indicated. 

The  squad,  deployed  as  foragers,  is  marched  to  the  front 
and  halted,  obliques,  resumes  the  original  direction,  executes 
changes  in  gait  and  changes  of  direction,  by  the  commands 
and  methods  prescribed  for  the  squad  in  line. 

406.  The  appropriate   substitution  of   skirmishers   for   for- 
agers, is  made  in  the  commands  for  movements  in  extended 
order,  dismounted   (par.  368-e).     The  skirmishers  move  at  a 
run  to  their  positions  on  the  line  of  foragers. 

407.  A  greater  or  less  interval  than  3  yards  between  for- 
agers may  be  ordered,  the  words  at   (so  many)   yards  being 
added  to  the  preparatory  command  so  as  immediately  to  follow 
the  word  foragers  or  skirmishers. 

408.  Being  in  line,  to  form  foragers:  1.  Foragers,  2.  MARCH. 
The  guide  continues  to  be  the  base  and  advances  (par.  405) 

at  the  gait  of  march  unless  the  leader  indicates  otherwise 


170         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


(pars.  337-jf,  405).  The  troopers  to  the  right  of  the  guide 
move  at  a  gallof)  obliquely  to  the  right  front;  those  to  the. 
left  obliquely  to  the  left  front.  The  troopers  take  position 
abreast  of  the  base  in  the  same  order  as  in  line  and  at  inter- 
vals of  3  yards  measured  from  the  side  of  the  base.  Should 
the  right  trooper  be  the  guide,  all  oblique  to  the.  left: 
the  left  trooper  be  the  guide,  all  oblique  to  the  right. 


/)   0 

1    ^ 

•^ 

I' 

.'  1        /        / 

f  I  i  /  S 

t  '       '       '       , 

>'/.</  ' 


// 

(.' 

' 


'     S 

.'  x 


FIG.  47,  par.  409. 

Ill  the  execution  of  the  corresponding  dismounted  movement 
(commands:  1.  Skirmishers,  2.  MARCH — par.  406)  the  troop- 
ers move  to  their  places  at  a  run,  taking  intervals  of  one-half 
pace,  unless  some  other  interval  be  indicated  (pars.  368-c, 
407.)  (Fig.  37.) 

409.  Being  in  column  of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers,  to  form 
foragers^  1.  Right  (left)  front  into  foragers,  2.  MARCH. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        171 

The  left  trooper  of  the  leading  element  of  the  column  as  the 
base  of  the  deployment  advances  at  the  gait  of  march  (par. 
337-a)  unless  the  leader  indicates  otherwise  (pars.  337-/, 
405),  the  other  troopers  of  the  leading  element  deploying  as 
indicated  in  par.  408.  The  remaining  troopers  move  obliquely 
to  the  right  front  at  a  gallop  and  extend  the  line  in  similar 
manner,  the  order  of  the  successive  elements  being  the  same, 
from  left  to  right  in  line,  as  it  formerly  was  from  head  to  rear 
in  the  column. 

The  possibility  of  the  inversion  of  troopers  in  the  fours  as 
a  result  of  forming  foragers  from  column  of  twos  or  troopers 
should  be  kept  in  mind.  No  such  inversion  can  occur  in  move- 
ments executed  from  column  of  fours.  The  movement  de- 
scribed in  this  paragraph  is  one  of  those  referred  to  in  par. 
468-fc.  (Fig.  41.) 

410.  Being  in  disorder,  to  form  foragers: 

Foragers  may  be  formed  from  any  condition  of  dispersion 
or  disorder  by  methods  similar  to  those  indicated  in  pars.  408 
and  409.  At  the  command :  1.  Foragers,  2.  MARCH,  the  troop- 
ers nearest  the  leader  ride  toward  him  at  a  gallop.  The  leader 
indicates  the  guide  (par.  373),  who  follows  the  leader;  the 
other  troopers,  moving  at  a  gallop,  take  position,  with  the 
proper  interval,  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  guide,  without 
regard  to  order. 

Line  of  foragers  from  a  condition  of  disorder  may  also  be 
formed  by  first  rallying  the  squad  (par.  416)  and  then  forming 
foragers. 

Dismounted,  skirmishers  may  similarly  be  formed. 

411.  Being  deployed  as  foragers,  to  march  to  a  flank:  1.  By 
the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 

Each  trooper  turns  90°  to  the  right  and  marches  in  the  new 
direction  (par.  389).  A  column  of  troopers  at  4  feet  distance 
results.  The  line  of  foragers  may  be  resumed  by  again  march- 
ing to  the  flank  by  the  use  of  corresponding  commands  and 
methods. 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-d. 

Dismounted,  each  trooper  moves  as  in  par.  81.  If  at  a  halt, 
the  movement  of  the  foragers  by  the  flank  is  executed  by  the 
same  commands  as  when  marching. 

412.  Being  deployed  as  foragers,  to  march  to  the  rear:  1.  To 
the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 


172        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Each  trooper  executes  an  about  to  the  left  (pars.  389,  486). 
To  march  again  to  the  front  the  commands:  1.  Forward, 
2.  MARCH,  are  given.  Each  trooper  executes  another  about 
to  the  left.  If  a  line  of  foragers  be  halted  while  inarching  to 
the  rear,  each  trooper  turns  to  the  left  about  and  halts,  faced 
to  the  front  (par.  474). 

Gaits  are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-r7. 

Dismounted,  each  trooper  executes  to  the  rear  (par.  $2). 
If  at  a  halt,  the  movement  of  the  foragers  to  the  rear  is  exo- 
cuted  by  the  same  commands  as  when  marching. 

413.  The  squad  may  be  extended  in  depth  as  well  as  in  front. 
The  commands  are:  1.  Fours  (twos,  or  troopers)  at  so  many 


1.  ASS£MBL£f  2.  MARGH. 


r  .  f   .  .  , 

fl  6  I  ft  o  a  d  0 


FIG.  48.  par.  414. 

yards  distance,  2.  MARCH.  This  movement  may  be  used  to 
cross  a  fire-swept  area  when  such  a  course  is  necessary.  The 
leader  indicates  the  point  where  the  squad  is  to  be  reassem- 
bled. The  fours  (twos  or  troopers)  move  out  successively 
from  head  to  rear  in  column  or  right  to  left  in  line.  Each 
element  may  extend  laterally  on  its  guide.  The  gait  is  the 
gallop. 

414.  Being  deployed  as  foragers  and  in  order  (par.  470)  to 
assemble:  1.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH.  The  guide  advances  and 
follows  the  leader.  The  other  troopers  close  in  on  the  guide 
and  form  in  line  upon  him  in  the  same  relative  order  in  which 
they  were  at  the  moment  the  assembly  was  commanded.  The 
leader  halts  the  guide  at  any  time  if  it  is  desired  to  assemble 
without  gaining  further  ground  in  the  direction  of  march. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        173 

Tfce  leader,  by  moving  in  any  desired  direction,  may  regulate 
the  direction  toward  which  the  assembly  is  executed.  Gaits 
are  regulated  as  in  par.  337-e,  the  elements  other  than  the 
base  taking  a  correspondingly  faster  gait.  The  assembly  in 
each  unit  is  explained  for  that  unit  (par.  46S-&). 

The  leader  may,  by  prior  designation  of  any  trooper  (e.  g., 
a  flank  trooper)  as  guide  (par.  373),  cause  the  assembly  to 
be  executed  on  that  trooper  by  the  commands  and  methods 
just  indicated. 

The  troopers  always  start  to  assemble  in  line,  but  when  an 
assembly  in  column  is  desired  it  may  virtually  be  accom- 
plished by  the  leader's  designation  of  a  flank  trooper  as  the 
guide  before  ordering  the  assembly  and  cautioning:  COLUMN 
as  soon  as  the  assembly  begins.  The  fours,  as  they  succes- 
sively assemble  toward  the  base,  then  take  their  places  in 
column  of  fours  instead  of  in  line;  the  leader  takes  post  in 
front  of  No.  2  (par.  325). 

If  there  be  not  space  to  advance  in  column  of  fours,  the 
assembly  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers  may  be  accomplished 
by  corresponding  commands  and  methods. 

The  squad  executes  assemble  only  when  deployed  as  foragers 
and  in  order.  Under  other  conditions  the  rally  (par.  416),  fol- 
lowed by  count  fours,  more  easily  accomplishes  the  purposes  of 
the  assembly  (Def.). 

In  executing  the  assembly  dismounted  the  troopers  close  in 
on  the  guide  in  double  time  without  special  command  if  the 
guide  and  leader  continue  to  advance  (par.  339-#)  ;  otherwise 
they  close  in  at  quick  time  unless  double  time  be  commanded 
(par.  339-&).  (Fig.  42.) 

415.  If  to  the  rear  (par.  412)  be  executed  by  the  squad,  a 
temporary  loss  of  order  occurs.     If  it  be  desired  to  pass  to 
close  order   without  resuming  the  march   to   the  front   and 
assembling   (par.  414),  the  squad  may  rally    (par.  416)    and 
count  fours. 

416.  Being  in  any  formation,  or  not  formed,  or  in  disorder,  to 
rally:   RALLY.    When  the  rally  is  ordered  the  signal  is  habitu- 
ally accompanied  by  the  oral  command,  both  the  signal  and 
the  oral  command  being  repeated  until  understood  and  obeyed. 
The  signal  is  obeyed  at  once,  there  being  no  preparatory  com- 
mand for  this  movement. 


174        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

The  leader  takes  position  at  any  point  or  moves  in  any 
desired  direction,  and  at  any  gait  that  will  permit  the  move- 
ment to  be  executed.  The  troopers  ride  toward  the  leader  at 
an  extended  gallop  and,  in  the  absence  of  other  indication, 
form  in  rear  of  the  leader  in  line.  The  leader  promptly  d»'sii:~ 
nates  the  guide  (pars.  371.  373),  who  follows  the  leader.  The 
other  troopers  form,  as  they  come  up.  on  the  right  and  left  of 
the  guide  extending  the  line.  The  leader  may  caution :  COI- 
UMN,  as  the  leading  troopers  approach.  The  troopers  then 
form  in  column  of  fours  instead  of  in  line.  The  leading  ele- 
ment forms  first ;  the  other  troopers,  as  they  arrive,  suecea- 


__  COMMAND:  __ 
-'"""  RALU£~ 


0    fl   0    0    fl   fl    fl   (I 


FIG.  49,  par.  416. 

sively  form  fours,  extending  the  column  to  the  rear.  The 
leader  designates  the  guide  (pars.  373,  374)  and  cautions: 
NOTE  YOUR  NUMBERS.  The  rally  in  column  is  exceptional 
ami  is  intended  for  use  only  on  occasions  when  a  narrow 
road  or  other  circumstances  of  the  terrain  prevent  the  rally 
in  line. 

Should  the  route  along  which  the  leader  is  moving  when 
the  rally  is  ordered  be  too  narrow  to  permit  the  formation  of 
column  of  fours,  the  leader  may  caution:  COLtTMN  OF  TWOS 
(COLUMN  OF  TROOPERS)  as  the  leading  troopers  approach. 
The  movement  is  executed  as  explained  for  the  rally  in  column 
of  fours.  Fours  should  be  counted  at  once.  The  rally  in 
columns  of  twos  or  troopers  is  to  be  regarded  as  very  excep- 
tional. 

The  squad  being  rallied  in  line,  though  ordinarily  not  in 
order  until  fours  are  counted  (par.  470),  is  available  at  once 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        175 

to  charge  or  to  execute  any  movement  that  does  not  involve  a 
knowledge  of  their  respective  numbers  on  the  part  of  the  indi- 
viqual  troopers.  Unless  the  charge  is  to  be  executed  at  once, 
foi^s  should  be  counted  without  delay  after  rallying,  so  that 
the  squad  may  be  in  order  and  ready  to  execute  any  move- 
ments whatever  that  conditions  may  demand. 

The    rally,    dismounted,    is    always    executed    at    a    run. 
(Fig.  49.) 

THE  MOUNTED  ATTACK. 

417.  The  mounted  attack  is  made  with  the  pistol  or  saber  in 
accordance   with   the  principles   indicated   in   pars.   562-565. 
The  typical  saber  charge  is  executed  in  line.     Under  some 
circumstances,  as  in  the  attack  of  a  dispersed  enemy,  etc.,  a 
saber  charge  may  be  made  by  troopers  deployed  as  foragers. 
The  pistol  attack  is  usually  made  in  foragers.    In  exceptional 
circumstances  (as  in  breaking  out  from  an  ambush,  attacking 
in  a  narrow  road,  etc.)  it  may  be  made  in  line  or  in  column 
of  fours,  twos,  or  troopers. 

418.  Cohesion  in  the  line  and  vigor  in  the  shock  are  essential 
to  the  success  of  the  saber  charge.    High  speed  is  necessary 
for  the  desired  shock;  and  in  the  saber  charge,  as  executed 
in  combat,  the  horses  are,  at  the  culmination  of  the  charge, 
habitually  "  turned  loose "  and  urged  to  the  highest  speed. 
This,  except  with  men  and  horses  that  are  highly  trained, 
necessarily  involves  loss  of  control  over  the  horse  on  the  part 
of   the   trooper.     The   saber   charge,    executed   with   poorly 
trained    horsemen,    especially   if   on   imperfectly    trained   or 
excitable  horses,  is  apt  to  be  futile  as  regards  the  instruction 
of  the  trooper  and  to  result  in  more  or  less  permanent  loss  of 
control  over  the  horses.    Control  of  the  mount  by  the  trooper 
is  essential  during  the  execution  of  the  pistol  attack   (ordi- 
narily made  in  line  of  foragers),  and  is,  of  course,  necessary 
during  march  and  maneuver.    For  these  reasons  it  is  consid- 
ered advisable  that  the  first  instruction  of  the  recruit  in  the 
actual  saber  charge  be  deferred  until  after  platoon  instruction 
and  that  it  be  given  then  only  after  the  troop  commander  is 
satisfied  that  the  recruit's  progress  in  horsemanship  and  in  the 
use  of  his  weapon  has  advanced  to  a  point  when  the  exercise 
will  be  of  value. 


176        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

419.  The  work  in  the  squad,  with  a  view  to  preparing  the 
recruit  for  the  mounted  attack  with  the  saber  find  pistol,  Till 
therefore  bo  limited  to  those  exercises  in  which  the  hors*  is 
controlled.    It  should  consist,  in  substance,  of  an  extension  to 
collective  work  of  the  individual  instruction  described  in  par. 
297.  and  should  include  occasional  practice  in  advancing  a* 
rapidly  as  can  be  done  while  maintaining  a  close  formation  anil 
control  of  the  mount.     The  increase  in  speed  should  be  niucta 
quietly  and  progressively,  be  continued  but  a  short  distance, 
and    invariably    be    terminated    bij   the   quiet   resuming  of   <\ 
ftloir  gait.     As  the  recruit  gets  more  skill  and  confidence  th»i 
exercise  will   be  conducted  with   sabers  drawn,  the  troopers 
taking  the  Charging  position    (par.  251)   when  the  instructor 
does  so  and  returning  to  the  carry  with  him.    Similar  exercises 
will  be  conducted  with  the  pistol,  with  especial  attention  to 
directing  the  horses  through  lines  of  silhouette  targets  and  to 
drawing,  returning,  and  manipulating  the  pistol.     The  exer- 
ciser with  the  pistol  will  usually  be  conducted  in  foragers  and 
may  be  extended  to  include  the  actual  execution  of  the  pistol 
attack  as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Platoon. 

In  campaign  any  small  group  executes  the  mounted  attack 
as  explained  for  the  platoon. 

420.  In  combat  of  every  kind  skill  on  the  part  of  the  indi- 
vidual trooper  in  the  use  of  the  weapon  or  weapons  employed 
is  essential.     So  important  is  this  part  of  the  training  that 
where  time  for  the  training  of  the  troopers  is  limited  all  but 
the  most  essential  portions  of  close-order  drill  should  be  de- 
ferred or  omitted  in  order  that  the  training  of  the  trooper  in 
the  use  of  his  weapons  may  be  thorough  and  efficient. 

Section  8.  Tent  pitching. 

TO     PITCH     ALL     TYPES     OF     ARMY     TEXTS,     EXCEPT     SHELTER     AND 
CONICAL  WALL  TENTS. 

To  pitch  all  types  of  Army  tents,  except  shelter  and  coni- 
cal wall  tents:  Mark  line  of  tents  by  driving  a  wall  pin  on 
the  spot  to  be  occupied  by  the  right  (or  left)  corner  of  each 
tent.  For  pyramidal  tents  the  interval  between  adjacent  pins 
should  be  about  30  feet,  which  will  give  a  passage  of  2  feet 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         177 

between  tents.  Spread  tripod  on  the  ground  where  the  center 
of  tent  is  to  be,  if  tripod  is  used.  Spread  the  tent  on  the 
ground  to  be  occupied,  door  to  the  front,  and  place  the  right  (or 
left)  front  wall  loop  over  the  pin.  The  door  (or  doors,  if  more 
than  one)  being  fastened  and  held  together  at  the  bottom,  the 
left  (or  right)  corner  wall  loop  is  carried  to  the  left  (or 
right)  as  far  as  it  will  go  and  a  wall  pin  driven  through  it,  the 
pin  being  placed  in  line  with  the  right  (or  left)  corner  pins 
already  driven.  At  the  same  time  the  rear  corner  Avail  loops 
are  pulled  to  the  rear  and  outward  so  that  the  rear  wall  of  the 
tent  is  stretched  to  complete  the  rectangle.  Wall  pins  are 
then  driven  through  these  loops.  Each  corner  pin  should  be 
directly  in  rear  of  the  corresponding  front  corner  pin,  making  a 
rectangle.  Unless  the  canvas  be  wet,  a  small  amount  of  slack 
should  be  allowed  before  the  corner  pins  are  driven.  According 
to  the  size  of  the  tent,  one  or  two  men,  crawling  under  the  tent 
if  necessary,  fit  each  pole  or  ridge  or  upright  into  the  ring  or 
ridge-pole  holes,  and  such  accessories  as  hood,  fly,  and  brace 
ropes  are  adjusted.  If  a  tripod  be  used  an  additional  man  will 
go  under  the  tent  to  adjust  it.  The  tent,  steadied  by  the  re- 
maining men,  one  at  each  corner  guy  rope,  will  then  be  raised. 
If  the  tent  is  a  ward  or  storage  type,  corner  poles  will  now  be 
placed  at  the  four  corners.  The  four  corner  guy  ropes  are  then 
placed  over  the  lower  notches  of  the  large  pins  driven  in  pro- 
longation of  the  diagonals  at  such  distance  as  to  hold  the  walls 
and  ends  of  the  tent  vertical  and  smooth  when  the  guy  ropes 
are  drawn  taut.  A  wall  pin  is  then  driven  through  each  re- 
maining wall  loop  and  a  large  pin  for  each  guy  rope  is  driven  in 
line  with  the  corner  guy  pins  already  driven.  The  guy  ropes  of 
the  tent  are  placed  over  the  lower  notches,  while  the  guy  ropes 
of  the  fly  are  placed  over  the  upper  notches,  and  are  then  drawn 
taut.  Brace  ropes,  when  use'd,  are  then  secured  to  stakes  or 
pins  suitably  placed. 

CONICAL   WALL   TENT. 

Drive  the  door  pin  and  center  pin  8  feet  3  inches  apart. 
Using  the  hood  lines,  with  center  pin  as  center,  describe  two 
concentric  circles  with  radii  8  feet  3  inches  and  11  feet  3  inches. 


178        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

In  the  outer  circle  drive  two  door  guy  pins  3  feet  apart.    At 
intervals  of  about  3  feet  drive  the  other  guy  pins. 

In  other  respects  conical  tents  are  erected  practically  as  in 
the  case  of  pyramidal  tents. 

TO  STRIKE  COMMON,  WALL,  PYBAMIDAL,  AND  CONICAL  WALL  TENTS. 

STRIKE  TENTS. 

The  men  first  remove  all  pins  except  those  of  the  four  corner 
guy  ropes,  or  the  four  quadrant  guy  ropes  in  the  case  of  the 
conical  wall  tent.  The  pins  are  neatly  piled  or  placed  in  their 
receptacle. 

One  man  holds  each  guy,  and  when  the  ground  is  clear  the 
tent  is  lowered,  folded,  or  rolled  and  tied,  the  poles  or  tripod 
and  pole  fastened  together,  and  the  remaining  pins  collected. 

TO  FOLD  TENTS. 

For  folding  common,  wall,  hospital,  and  storage  tents: 
Spread  the  tent  flat  on  the  ground,  folded  at  the  ridge  so  that 
bottoms  of  side  walls  are  even,  ends  of  tent  forming  triangles 
to  the  right  and  left ;  fold  the  triangular  ends  of  the  tent  in 
toward  the  middle,  making  it  rectangular  in  shape ;  fold  the  top 
over  about  9  inches ;  fold  the  tent  in  two  by  carrying  the  top 
fold  over  clear  to  the  foot ;  fold  again  in  two  from  the  top  to  the 
foot ;  throw  all  guys  on  tent  except  the  second  from  each  end ; 
fold  the  ends  in  so  as  to  cover  about  two-thirds  of  the  second 
cloths ;  fold  the  left  end  over  to  meet  the  turned-in  edge  of  the 
right  end,  then  fold  the  right  end  over  the  top,  completing  the 
bundle ;  tie  with  the  two  exposed  guys. 

METHOD  OF  FOLDING  PYRAMIDAL  TENT. 

The  tent  is  thrown  toward  the  rear  and  the  back  wall  and 
roof  canvas  pulled  out  smooth.  This  may  be  most  easily  accom- 
plished by  leaving  the  rear-corner  wall  pins  in  the  ground'  with 
the  wall  loops  attached,  one  man  at  each  rear-corner  guy,  and 
one  holding  the  square  iron  in  a  perpendicular  position  and 
pulling  the  canvas  to  its  limit  away  from  the  former  front  of 
the  tent.  This  leaves  the  three  remaining  sides  of  the  tent  on 
top  of  the  rear  side,  with  the  door  side  in  the  middle. 


MANIJAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         179 

Now  carry  the  right-front  corner  over  and  lay  it  on  the  left- 
real*  corner.  Pull  all  canvas  smooth,  throw  guys  toward  square 
iron,  and  pull  bottom  edges  even.  Then  take  the  right-front 
corner  and  return  to  the  right,  covering  the  right-rear  corner. 
This  folds  the  right  side  of  the  tent  on  itself,  with  the  crease 
in  the  middle  and  under  the  front  side  of  tent. 

Next  carry  the  left-front  corner  to  the  right  and  back  as  de- 
scribed above;  this  when  completed  will  leave  the  front  and 
rear  sides  of  the  tent  lying  smooth  and  flat  and  the  two  side 
walls  folded  inward,  each  on  itself. 

Place  the  hood  in  the  square  iron  which  has  been  folded 
downward  toward  the  bottom  of  the  tent,  arid  continue  to  fold 
around  the  square  iron  as  a  core,  pressing  all  folds  down  flat 
and  smooth  and  parallel  with  the  bottom  of  the  tent.  If  each 
fold  is  compactly  made  and  the  canvas  kept  smooth,  the  last 
fold  will  exactly 'cover  the  lower  edge  of  the  canvas.  Lay  all 
exposed  truys  along  the  folded  canvas  except  the  two  on  the 
Center  width,  which  should  be  pulled  out  and  away  from  bot- 
tom edge  to  their  extreme  length  for  tying.  Now,  beginning 
at  one  end,  fold  toward  the  center  on  the  first  seam  (that 
.•joining  the  first  and  second  widths)  and  fold  again  toward  the 
center,  so  that  the  already  folded  canvas  will  come  to  within 
about,  3  inches  of  the  middle  width.  Then  fold  over  to  the 
opposite  edge  of  middle  width  of  canvas.  Then  begin  folding 
from  opposite  end,  folding  the  first  width  in  half,  then  making 
a  second  fold  to  come  within  about  4  or  5  inches  of  that  al- 
ready folded ;  turn  this  fold  entirely  over  that  already  folded. 
Take  the  exposed  guys  and  draw  them  taut  across  each  other, 
turn  bundle  over  on  the  under  guy,  cross  guys  on  top  of  bundle, 
drawing  tight.  Turn  bundle  over  on  the  crossed  guys  and  tie 
lengthwise. 

When  properly  tied  and  pressed  together  this  will  make  a 
package  11  by  23  by  34  inches,  requiring  about  8,855  cubic 
inches  to  store  or  pack. 

Stencil  the  organization  designation  on  the  lower  half  of  the 
middle  width  of  canvas  in  the  back  wall. 


CHAPTER  VI. 
FIELD  SERVICE. 


Section  1.  Principles  of  training. 

Inaction  gives  every  advantage  to  the  enemy. 

The  offensive  alone  gives  decisive  results. 

A  quick  and  energetic  offensive  minimizes  losses. 

An  advance  against  the  enemy's  position  once  entered  upon 
must  be  continued.  To  go  back  under  fire  is  to  die. 

The  best  way  to  hold  down  the  fire  of  the  enemy  and  to 
diminish  his  power  to  inflict  losses  is  to  bring  the  position  he 
occupies  under  well-conducted  and  continued  fire. 

Present  as  small  a  target  as  possible  to  the  enemy  by  utiliz- 
ing every  bit  of  cover  the  ground  affords. 

Individual  skill  in  marksmanship  is  an  advantage  in  battle 
only  when  united  with  fire  discipline  and  control. 

Constant  movement  to  the  front  lessens  the  effect  of  the 
enemy's  fire.  Modern  battles  fought  in  the  open  show  that  the 
heaviest  losses  are  in  the  mid  and  long  ranges.  When  close 
range  is  reached  the  losses  diminish  rapidly. 

The  best  protection  against  artillery  fire  is  a  constant  but 
irregular  movement  to  the  front.  When  close  to  the  enemy's 
position  his  fire  is  least  effective. 

A  knowledge  of  how  to  use  the  bayonet  and  the  will  to  use 
it  must  often  be  the  deciding  factors  in  battle. 

Finally  : 

In  training  we  can  not  go  far  wrong  or  fail  to  accomplish 
the  best  results  if  we  keep  before  our  minds  the  spirit  as  well 
as  the  wording  of  paragraph  352  of  the  Infantry  Drill  Regu- 
lations :  "  The  duties  of  infantry  are  many  and  difficult. 
All  infantry  must  be  fit  to  cope  with  all  conditions  that  may 
arise.  Modern  war  requires  but  one  kind  of  infantry — good 
infantry."  Cavalry,  dismounted,  should  be  as  efficient  as 
infantry  under  all  conditions  of  service. 
180 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         181 

Section  2.  Combat. 

The  field  of  battle  is  the  final  test  of  the  instruction,  disci- 
pline, and  efficiency  of  the  fighting  force  of  any  army. 

The  squadron  is  the  attack  unit  or  the  defense  unit,  whether 
operating  alone  or  as  part  of  a  regiment.  The  troops  consti- 
uite  the  firing  line  and  the  support. 

An  individual  soldier  is  concerned  only  with  the  enemy  in  his 
immediate  front,  in  obeying  orders,  and  instinctively  doing 
what  he  has  been  trained  to  do. 

The  one  requisite  necessary  to  win  the  battle  is  intelligent 
team  work.  The  army  is  handled  just  like  a  football  team.  A 
part  is  on  the  first  line  facing  the  enemy.  Another  part,  like 
the  half  backs,  is  held  back  as  supports.  Another  part,  like 
'the  full  backs,  is  held  as  a  reserve.  Each  unit,  like  each 
player,  has  a  certain  duty  to  perform.  When  the  signal  is 
given,  all  work  together — all  play  the  game — team  work.  The 
players  consist  of  all  branches  of  the  service. 

The  same  rule  holds  true  down  to  the  smallest  unit  and  even 
to  the  individual  enlisted  man.  Each  regiment  is  a  team  com- 
posed of  three  players — each  a  squadron.  Each  squadron  is  a 
team  of  four  players — each  a  troop.  In  the  same  manner 
each  troop  is  a  team  of  two  or  more  platoons ;  each  platoon 
a  team  of  two  sections ;  and  last,  but  not  least,  each  section  is 
a  team  of  from  6  to  14  players. 

The  one  question  that  always  presents  itself  on  the  battle 
field  every  minute  of  the  time  to  every  person,  whether  he  be 
a  general  or  a  private,  is,  "  What  play  has  my  team  captain  or- 
dered, and  how  best  may  I  act  so  as  to  work  in  conjunction 
with  the  other  players  to  bring-  about  the  desired  result?  " — 
team  play. 

To  the  trooper  this  means — 

First.  Prompt  and  loyal  obedience  to  the  section  leader. 
Every  section  always  has  a  team  captain.  If  the  section  leader 
and  corporal  are  killed  or  disabled,  other  players  previously 
designated  take  their  places.  If  no  one  was  designated,  then 
the  private  with  the  longest  service  takes  command.  When 
the  section  leader  gives  the  command  for  a  certain  play,  don't 
stop  to  think  if  the  play  is  a  good  one,  but  do  your  very  best 
to  carry  out  the  play  as  ordered.  A  poor  play  in  which  every 


182        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

player  enters  with  his  whole  heart  (team  work)  will  often 
win,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  best  play,  in  which  some  of 
the  players  are  skulkers  and  shirkers  will  probably  fail. 

Second.  Never  lose  touch  with  your  section.  Every  individ- 
dual,  as  well  as  every  unit,  should  always  be  acting  under  the 
control  of  some  higher  commander.  This  is  necessary  if  there 
is  to  be  any  unity  of  action.  Therefore  if  you  lose  your  sec- 
tion, or  it  becomes  broken  up,  join  the  first  section  you  can 
find  and  obey  your  new  section  leader  as  loyally  and  as  cheer- 
fully as  you  did  your  own. 

While  yet  several  miles  from  the  enemy's  position  the  troops 
may  come  under  artillery  fire.  On  green  men  entering  upon 
their  fight,  the  sound  of  the  projectile  whistling  through  the 
air,  the  noise,  flash,  and  smoke  on  the  burst  of  the  shrapnel, 
and  the  hum  of  the  various  pieces  thereafter,  all  produce,  a  very 
terrifying  effect,  but  old  soldiers  soon  learn  to  pay  little  at- 
tention to  this,  as  the  danger  is  not  great. 

THE  MOUNTED  ATTACK. 
THE  TROOP  ACTING  ALONE. 

639.  When  the  troop  acting  alone  charges  it  is  ordinarily 
divided  into  two  parts,  viz,  the  attacking  line  and  the  reserve, 
but  a  platoon  is  never  kept  in  rear  except  when  the  captain 
so  directs. 

If  the  attacking  line,  or  reserve,  consists  of  only  one  platoon, 
it  is  led  by  its  chief ;  if  it  consists  of  two  or  more  platoons,  it 
is  led  by  the  senior  chief  of  platoon  or  by  the  captain. 

When  a  chief  of  platoon  takes  post  as  leader  of  two  or  more 
platoons,  his  place  as  platoon  leader  is  taken  by  the  corre- 
sponding file  closer.  Whenever  the  rally  or  assembly  is  or- 
dered, the  captain  may  cause  the  guidon  to  be  displayed  at  the 
rallying  or  assembly  point  indicated. 

640.  In  instruction  exercises  the  enemy  must  always  be  out- 
lined or  represented  by  troopers,  who  may  carry  flags,  under 
command  of  an  officer   or  noncommissioned  officer.     In  the 
beginning  of  this  instruction  these  men  will  occupy  fixed  posi- 
tions ;  later  they  will  be  instructed  to  ride  so  as  to  represent 
the  movements  of  an  aggressive  enemy.    The  captain  will  ex- 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        183 

plain  to  the  commander  the  object  of  the  exercise  and  tell 
him  what  to  do. 

641.  The  platoons  of  the  attacking  line  may  attack  in  one 
line  or  successively,  as  from  column  of  platoons  with  extended 
distances.    The  captain,  in  addition  to  designating  a  reserve, 
may  direct  one  or  more  platoons  to  execute  any  special  mis- 
sion.   In  the  absence  of  special  instructions  from  the  captain 
the  leader  of  each  platoon,  or  combination  of  platoons,  that  is 
acting  separately  uses  his  discretion,  endeavoring  so  to  em- 
ploy his  command  as  best  to  assist  in  carrying  out  the  general 
plan  indicated  by  the  captain's  orders. 

642.  The  reserve,  in  the  absence  of  special  instructions,  fol- 
lows the  attacking  line  at  from  100  to  150  yards  in  readiness 
to  support  the  attacking  line,  meet  a  counter  attack,  or  press 
tho  pursuit,  as  occasion  may  require. 

A  platoon  designated  for  a  flank  attack  is  so  conducted  by 
its  leader  as  to  fall  opportunely  upon  the  enemy's  flank. 

If  u  flank  platoon  be  so  designated,  it  attacks  from  that 
flank  unless  otherwise  directed.- 

To  guard  against  a  flank  attack  or  an  enveloping  attack 
the  captain  may  detach  a  platoon  to  move  to  the  threatened 
flank  so  as  to  take  an  enveloping  attack  in  flank  or  meet  a 
flank  attack.  If  a  flank  platoon  be  so  designated,  it  acts  on 
the  corresponding  flank  unless  otherwise  directed.  When  no 
platoon  is  specially  designated  for  flank  guard,  the  correspond- 
ing duties  fall  upon  the  reserve. 

643.  The  captain's  commands  should  include  an  indication 
of  the  objective,  unless  the  latter  is  obvious,  designate  the 
elements  of  the  attack,  and  state  any  special  mission  that  is 
assigned  to  any  element.     The  captain's  orders  also  usually 
include  an  indication  of  the  weapon  to  be  used  by  the  several 
elements  of  the  attack  and  may  prescribe  the  formations  to 
be  employed.     All  details  not  prescribed  by  the  captain  are 
left  to  the  discretion  of  the  commanders  of  the  several  ele- 
ments into  which  the  attack  is  divided. 

Where  the  same  weapon  is  to  be  used  by  all  it  is  ordinarily 
drawn  at  the  captain's  orders  before  the  instructions  for  the 
attack  are  given.  Otherwise,  each  commander  gives  the  proper 
orders  for  drawing  saber  or  raising  pistol. 


184        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

644.  The  troop  being,  for  example,  in  line,  marching  at  a 
gallop  with  sabers  drawn,  the  captain  may  command :  Objec- 
tive,   Cavalry   in   front;    Second   and   Third   platoons,    to   the 
charge;   First  platoon,  flank  attack;    Fourth  platoon,  reserve. 
Each  element  of  the  attack  proceeds  at  once  to  carry  out  its 
orders.     The  leader  of  the  attacking  line   (whether  the  cap- 
tain  or  a  lieutenant)   directs  the  leader  of  the  base  platoon 
to  close  on  him  before  charge  is  ordered  (par.  563).    In  other 
respects,  the  charge  is  conducted  as  explained  for  the  platoon 
(pars.  562-564). 

The  troop  being,  for  example,  in  column  of  platoons,  march- 
ing at  a  gallop,  no  weapon  drawn,  the  captain  may  command 
(the  objective  being  obvious)  :  First  and  Second  platoons,  pistol 
attack;  Third  platoon,  reserve;  Fourth  platoon,  left  flank 
guard.  The  leader  of  the  attacking  line  commands:  1.  As 
foragers,  2.  MARCH,  and  attacks  with  the  pistol  according  to 
the  principles  explained  for  the  platoon  (pars.  566-568)  as 
soon  as  the  second  platoon  completes  its  deployment  on  the 
left  of  the  first  platoon.  The  commanders  of  the  third  and 
fourth  platoons  move  to  their  positions,  drawing  saber  or 
raising  pistol  in  their  discretion. 

Should  the  captain  command,  for  example :  First  and  Second 
platoons,  pistol  attack  in  two  lines;  Third  platoon,  charge 
enemy's  right  flank;  Fourth  platoon,  reserve,  the  third  platoon 
may  charge  with  the  saber. 

Should  the  captain  cause  pistols  to  be  raised  before  ordering 
the  attack  all  use  the  pistol. 

The  above  are  only  examples  to  indicate  the  character  of 
the  captain's  commands.  The  actual  orders  must  meet  the 
situation  presented. 

645.  At  the  first  indication  for  the  charge  the  ground  scouts 
move  out  from  the  flanks  of  the  attacking  line    (par.   569) 
unless  otherwise  specially  directed.    The  captain  usually  sends 
out  any  necessary  combat  patrols ;  but  each  leader  of  a  sepa- 
rate group  is  responsible  that  any  further  steps  necessary  for 
the  immediate  protection  of  his  own  flanks  are  taken. 

THE    TEOOP    IN    THE    SQUADRON. 

646.  The  troop  in  squadron,  in  mounted  attack,  has  no  re- 
serve, but  may  have  a  support  in  the  discretion  of  the  major. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         185 

If  on  the  flank  of  the  squadron,  its  own  flank  defense  must 
be  provided  by  the  captain  in  the  absence  of  instructions. 

PASSING  FROM  MOUNTED  ACTION  TO  DISMOUNTP:D  ACTION. 

647.  The  movements  are  executed  by  commands  and  methods 
corresponding  to  those  already  explained  for  the  squad  and 
platoon,    with    the    following    modifications    and    additions 
thereto : 

The  horses  of  the  captain  and  of  one  bugler  who  accom- 
panies the  captain  are  held  by  the  other  bugler  or  by  a  man 
specially  designated  in  advance  for  that  duty. 

The  horses  of  the  first  sergeant  and  other  men  out  of  ranks, 
and  not  otherwise  specially  provided  for,  are  secured  in  the 
same  manner  indicated  in  the  corresponding  provisions  for  the 
squad  and  platoon. 

648.  The  guidon,  in  the  absence  of  instructions  to  the  con- 
trary, takes  general  charge  of  the  led  horses  arid  performs  the 
duties  prescribed  for  the  trooper  in  charge  of  the  horse-holders 
and  horses  (par.  431).     Should  one  of  the  platoon  file  closers 
be  senior  to  the  guidon,  the  first  sergeant  cautions  such  file 
closer  and  the  guidon  in  advance  that  the  senior  will  have 
general  charge  of  the  led  horses  of  the  troop  while  such  senior 
remains  with  the  horses.     In  the  absence  of  other  special  in- 
structions, the  file  closer  of  each  platoon  reports  the  additional 
troopers  of  his  platoon  to  the  troop  commander  after  Nos.  2 
dismount.     The  guidon  remains  in  general  charge  of  the  other 
horse-holders   and   the   horses,   a  designated  trooper  having, 
under  the  guidon,  immediate  charge  of  the  horse-holders  and 
horses  of  each  platoon. 

649.  The  captain  gives  any  desired  special  instructions  to 
the  guidon  and  sees  that  proper  measures  for  security  are 
taken.     On  dismounting,  the  first  sergeant  remains  near  the 
horses  long  enough  to  see  that   the  designated   noncommis- 
sioned officer  is  in  charge  and  is  making  proper  provision  as 
regards  the  horses ;  he  then  joins  the  captain.     Any  sergeants 
who  may  be  extra  file  closers  without  special  assignment  of 
duties  join  the  captain ;  other  extra  file  closers  not  specially 
assigned  join  the  platoons  with  which  they  were  riding.     The 
captain,  on  dismounting,  takes  position  at  the  point  where  he 


186        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

desires  the  base  platoon  to  form  or  otherwise  indicates  that 
position  to  the  leader  of  the  base  platoon.  The  platoon  that 
was  the  base  when  the  troop  dismounted  remains  the  base  of 
the  dismounted  formation  in  the  absence  of  other  indication. 
Its  leader  takes  position  at  once  in  rear  of  the  captain,  or  as 
indicated  by  the  latter,  and  the  dismounted  platoon  forms  in 
double  column  or  as  directed.  The  other  platoons  form  so 
as  to  extend  the  formation  in  line  of  double  columns,  or  as  the 
captain  orders,  in  accordance  with  the  principles  governing 
the  assembly  of  the  troop.  The  captain  may  direct  the  pla- 
toon leaders  to  proceed  at  once  to  designated  positions  without 
forming  the  troop  as  a  unit.  In  all  cases  the  measures  taken 
must  l)e  such  as  to  prevent  unnecessary  exposure  of  men  or 
horses  to  hostile  view  or  fire. 

DISMOUNTED  COMBAT  (THE  TROOP). 
GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS. 

650.  When  the  troop,  acting  alone,  dismounts  to  engage  in 
deliberate  fire  action  the  captain  makes  provisions  for  the  led 
horses   (par.  649)   and  at  once  sends  out  scouts   (usually  two 
experienced  men  detailed  and  trained  as  such)  to  the  front  to 
reconnoiter.    The  captain  reconnoiters  usually  in  rear  of,  but 
in  touch  with  the  scouts,  and  accompanied  by  platoon  com- 
manders and  the  first  sergeant:  he  explains  to  them  the  pur- 
pose of  the  attack,  gives  them  all  the  information  he  has  about 
the  enemy  and  about  our  own  troops  in  the  vicinity,  points  out 
to  them  the  objective  of  each  platoon  if  they  are  to  advance, 
or  indicates  the  part  of  the  line  to  be  held  by  each  if  to  take 
the  defensive. 

651.  The  advance  of  a  troop  after  dismounting,  in  anticipa- 
tion of  fire  action  either  in  attack  or  defense  is  made  in  close 
order,  preferably  in  columns  of  fours  or  twos,  until  the  proba- 
bility or  the  actual  encountering  of  hostile  fire  makes  it  advis- 
able to  deploy.    After  such  deployment  the  advance  ( now  desig- 
nated the  approach)  may  be  continued  in  line  of  skirmishers 
or  other  suitable  formation  before  opening  fire.    The  approach 
dismounted  may  often  be  facilitated,  better  advantage  taken 
of  cover,  and  losses  minimized  by  using  formations  such  as 


MANUAI  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        187 

line  of  platoons  each  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers,  or  a  suc- 
cession of  thin  lines  at  varying  distances,  one  directly  behind 
the  other  or  echeloned.  The  choice  of  a  formation  would 
depend  upon  conditions,  such  as  the  effectiveness  of  the  en- 
emy's fire,  cover  afforded  by  folds  of  the  ground,  or  by  natural 
obstacles.  If  the  deployment  is  found  to  be  premature,  it  will 
generally  be  better  to  assemble  the  troop  and  resume  the 
advance  in  close  order. 

The  formations  mentioned  as  facilitating  the  advance,  viz, 
line  of  platoons  in  column  of  twos  or  troopers,  or  a  succession 
of  thin  lines  find  application  most  frequently  in  the  approach 
when  the  ground  is  so  difficult  or  the  cover  so  limited  as  to 
make  it  desirable  to  take  advantage  of  the  few  favorable 
routes  on  which  to  move  forward. 

652.  The  approach  in  a  succession  of  thin  lines  is,  if  pos- 
sible, made  by  sections  under  the  immediate  direction  of 
platoon  commanders  with  wide  intervals  between  skirmishers. 
By  so  advancing  continuous  control  of  the  line  is  assured.  If 
that  method  is  not  practicable,  then  the  successive  lines  are 
made  up  of  one  or  more  men  from  each  four  of  a  platoon  on 
the  skirmish  line,  the  command  being:  1.  Numbers  1  (or  such 
number  or  numbers),  first  (or  such)  platoon,  forward;  2. 
MARCH. 

The  captain  having  pointed  out  in  advance  the  selected  posi- 
tion in  front  of  the  lines  which  are  to  be  occupied,  the  desig- 
nated numbers  move  to  the  front:  The  line  thus  formed  pre- 
serves the  original  intervals  as  nearly  as  practicable;  when 
this  line  has  advanced  to  the  indicated  position,  a  second  line 
is  sent  forward  by  similar  commands,  and  so  on  at  irregular 
distances  until  the  whole  line  has  advanced.  Upon  arriving 
at  the  indicated  position  the  first  line  is  halted.  Successive 
lines  upon  arriving  halt  on  line  with  the  first,  and  the  men 
take  their  proper  places  in  the  skirmish  line. 

Ordinarily  each  line  is  made  up  of  one  man  or  more  from 
each  four  of  a  platoon,  and  the  men  of  a  four  are  sent  for- 
ward in  order  from  right  to  left.  The  first  line  is  led  by  the 
platoon  leader  of  that  platoon,  the  second  by  its  file  cioser, 
and  so  on.  Under  favorable  conditions  the  successive  lines 
may  be  made  up  from  all  of  the  platoons  which  are  deployed 
as  skirmishers. 


188        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

The  movement  is  conducted  in  quick  time  unless  conditions 
make  double  time  necessary. 

After  the  entire  troop  has  reached  the  line  a  further  ad- 
vance in  the  same  manner  may  be  found  advisable. 

The  movement  in  a  succession  of  thin  lines  is  used  to  cross 
a  wide  stretch  swept  or  likely  to  be  swept  by  artillery  fire  or 
heavy  long-range  rifle  fire  which  can  riot  profitably  be  re- 
turned. Its  purpose  is  the  building  up  of  a  strong  skirmish 
line  preparatory  to  engaging  in  a  fire  fight.  This  method  of 
advancing  by  thin  lines  results  in  serious,  though  temporary, 
loss  of  control  over  the  successive  platoons  of  the  troop.  Its 
advantages  lie  in  the  fact  that  it  offers  a  less  definite  target, 
hence  is  less  likely  to  draw  fire. 

653.  These  are  merely  suggested  methods  of  advancing  pre- 
liminary to  opening  the  fire  attack;  other  formations  better 
adapted  to  particular  occasions  or  terrain  may  be  devised. 
The  best  formation  is  that  which  advances  the  line  the  far- 
thest without  drawing  the  enemy's  fire,  or,  if  he  does  open  fire, 
then  with  the  least  loss  of  men,  time,  and  control. 

THE   FIRE   ATTACK. 

654.  The  principles  involved  in  the  fire  attack  are  discussed 
under  Dismounted  Fire  Action,  the  Squadron   (par.  716),  and 
necessary  modifications  as  to  details  made  under  Dismounted 
Action,  the  Regiment  (par.  760). 

When  the  enemy's  fire  makes  it  impracticable  for  the  troop 
to  move  forward  in  one  of  the  above-mentioned  formations, 
it  may  advance  by  rushes. 

Being  in  skirmish  line :  1.  By  platoon  (section)  from  the 
right  (left),  2.  RUSH. 

The  platoon  leader  on  the  indicated  iiank  arranges  the  de- 
tails for  a  prompt  and  vigorous  execution  of  the  rush  and 
puts  it  into  effect  as  soon  as  practicable.  If  necessary  he 
designates  the  leader  for  the  indicated  unit.  When  about 
to  rush  he  causes  the  men  of  the  indicated  unit  to  suspend 
firing  and  to  hold  themselves  flat  on  the  ground  but  in  readi- 
ness to  spring  forward  instantly.  The  leader  of  the  rush  (at 
the  signal  of  the  platoon  leader  if  the  latter  is  not  the  leader 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         189 

of  the  rush)  commands,  Follow  me,  and,  running  at  top  speed, 
leads  the  fraction  to  the  new  line,  where  he  halts  it  and  causes 
it  to  open  fire.  The  leader  of  the  rush  selects  the  new  line  if 
it  has  not  been  previously  designated. 

The  first  fraction  having  established  itself  on  the  new  line, 
the  next  like  fraction  is  sent  forward  by  its  platoon  leader 
without  further  command  from  the  captain,  and  so  on,  succes- 
sively, until  the  entire  troop  is  on  the  line  established  by  the 
first  rush. 

The  men  must  be  trained  to  lie  perfectly  still  until  the  com- 
mand (since  any  movement  might  warn  the  enemy  of  the  rush 
to  follow),  then  at  command  to  spring  instantly  and  together 
to  their  feet,  run  at  top  speed,  and  drop  together  at  command. 

655.  In  an  advance  oy  rushes,  leaders  of  platoons  in  firing 
positions  are  responsible  for  the  delivery  of  an  effective  fire  to 
cover  the  advance  of  each  rushing  fraction.  Troops  are  cau- 
tioned so  to  fire  as  not  to  endanger  the  flanks  of  advanced  por- 
tions of  the  firing  line.  The  husbanding  of  ammunition  for  the 
final  stages  of  the  fire  attack  must  be  constantly  impressed  on 
the  men. 

The  rush  of  a  troop  as  a  whole  is  conducted  by  the  captain 
on  the  same  principle  as  described  for  the  platoon.  The  cap- 
tain leads  the  rush,  platoon  leaders  lead  their  respective  pla- 
toons, and  file  closers  follow  the  line  to  insure  prompt  and 
orderly  execution  of  the  advance. 

When  the  foregoing  method  of  rushing,  by  running,  becomes 
impracticable,  any  method  of  advance  that  carries  the  attack 
closer  to  the  enemy,  such  as  crawling,  should  be  employed. 

The  charge  corresponds  to  that  described  in  the  squadron. 

When  a  leader  in  command  of  a  platoon  or  section  receives 
an  order  or  signal  to  rush,  he  should  cause  his  men  to  suspend 
firing  and  to  hold  themselves  flat  but  ready  for  a  sprinter's 
start.  He  selects  the  point,  as  far  as  possible  with  reference 
to  cover,  to  which  he  intends  to  carry  his  unit  forward.  He 
then  gives  the  command  "RUSH,"  springs  forward,  and  run- 
ning at  full  speed  about  three  paces  ahead  of  his  men,  leads 
them  in  the  rush.  Arriving  at  the  position  he  has  selected,  he 
throws  himself  prone,  and  the  men  drop  on  either  side  of  him. 
All  crawl  forward  to  good  firing  positions,  considering  the  cover 


190        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEES. 

also,  and  the  leader  gives  the  necessary  orders  for  resuming  the 
fire.  The  latter  will  include  giving  the  range  again,  the  length 
of  the  rush  being  subtracted  from  the  sight  setting  ordered  at 
the  last  position. 

The  original  platoon  and  section  divisions  of  the  troop  in 
the  firing  line  should  be  maintained,  if  possible,  and  should 
only  be  broken  up  if  the  mingling  of  reinforcements  renders 
it  unavoidable. 

Upon  joining  the  firing  line,  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers  accompanying  a  reinforcement  take  over  the  duties  of 
others  of  like  grade  who  have  been  disabled,  or  they  distribute4 
themselves  so  as  best  to  exercise  their  normal  functions.  Con- 
ditions vary  and  no  exact  rules  can  bo  prescribed.  It  is 
essential  that  all  assist  in  mastering  the  increased  difficulties 
of  control. 


657.  Ordinarily  rifles  are  loaded  and  extra  ammunition  in 
bandoliers  is  distributed  before  the  troop  deploys  for  combat. 
In  close  order  the  troop  executes  the  firings  at  the  command 
of  the  captain,  who  posts  himself  in  rear  of  the  center. 

Firings  in  close  order  are  exceptional. 

658.  Signals  during  fire  action:   The  voice  is  generally  in- 
adequate for  giving  commands  during  firing,  and  must  be  re- 
placed by  signals  of  such  character  that  proper  fire  direction 
and  control  are  assured  (par.  989).     To  attract  attention  sig- 
nals must  usually  be  preceded  by  the  whistle  signal    (short 
blast).    A  fraction  of  the  firing  line  about  to  rush  should  avoid 
using  the  long  blast  signal  as  an  indication  to  suspend  firing. 
Officers  and  men  behind  the  firing  line  can  not  ordinarily  move 
freely  along  the  line,  but  each  must  depend  on  the  other's 
watchfulness,  in  addition  to  his  own,  and  make  use  of  pre- 
scribed signals   (par.  997,  Cav.  Drill  Reg.,  1916).     All  should 
place  themselves  so  as  to  see  their  immediate  superiors  and 
subordinates. 

The  bugler  with  the  captain  assists  by  observing  the  enemy, 
the  target,  and  the  fire  effect,  and  by  watching  for  and  trans- 
mitting commands. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         191 

The  effect  of  fire  and  the  influence  of  the  ground  in  relation 
thereto,  and  the  individual  and  collective  instruction  in  marks- 
manship are  treated  in  the  Small-Arms  Firing  Manual. 

659.  Volley  fire   has   limited   application.     It   has   a  moral 
effect  both  on  the  troops  employing  it  and  on  those  subjected 
to  it.     It  may  be  employed  to  restore  control.     In  defense  it 
may  be  used  in  the  early  stages  of  the  action  if  the  enemy 
presents  a  large  compact  target.     It  may  be  used  by  troops 
especially  posted  on  the  flank  or  in  a  dominant  position  in 
rear   of  an  attacking  force  for  the  purpose  of  aiding  the 
advance  by  so-called  fire  of  position.    When  the  ground  near 
the  target  is  such  that  the  strike  of  bullets  can  be  seen  from 
the  firing  line,  ranging  volleys  may  be  used  to  correct  the 
sight  setting. 

In  combat,  volley  firing,  if  used,  is  executed  habitually  by 
platoon. 

660.  Fire  at  will  is  the  class  of  fire  normally  employed  in 
attack  or  defense. 

661.  Clip  fire  has  limited  application.    It  is  principally  used 
(a)    in  the  early  stages  of  combat  to   steady  the  men  by 
habituating  them  to  brief  pauses  in  firing;   (&)  to  produce  a 
short  burst  of  fire. 

FIRE   DIRECTION. 

662.  When  the  troop   is  large   enough  to  be   divided   into 
platoons,  it  is  impracticable  for  the  captain  to  command  it  in 
combat.    His  efficiency  in  managing  the  firing  line  is  measured 
by  his  ability  to  enfore  his  will  through  the  platoon  leaders. 
Having  indicated  clearly  what  he  desires  them  to  do,  he  avoids 
interfering  except  to  correct  serious  errors  or  omissions. 

The  captain  directs  the  fire  of  his  troop  or  of  designated 
platoons.  He  designates  the  target  and,  when  practicable, 
allots  a  part  of  the  target  to  each  platoon.  Before  beginning 
the  fire  action  he  determines  the  range,  announces  the  sight 
setting,  and  indicates  the  class  of  fire  to  be  employed  and  the 
time  to  open  fire.  Thereafter  he  observes  the  fire  effect,  cor- 
rects material  errors  in  sight  setting,  prevents  exhaustion  of 
the  ammunition  supply,  and  causes  the  distribution  of  such 
extra  ammunition  as  may  be  received. 


192        MANUAL  TOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

FIRE  CONTROL. 

663.  Ill  combat  the  platoon  is  the  fire  unit.     From  20  to  35 
rifles  are  as  many  as  one  leader  can  control  effectively. 

Each  platoon  leader  puts  into  execution  the  commands  or 
directions  of  the  captain,  having  first  taken  such  precautions 
to  insure  correct  sight  setting  and  clear  description  of  the 
target  or  aiming  point  as  the  situation  permits  or  requires 
(par.  141)  ;  thereafter  he  gives  such  additional  commands 
or  directions  as  are  necessary  to  exact  compliance  with  the 
captain's  will.  He  corrects  the  sight  setting  when  necessary. 
When  the  target  can  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye,  he  desig- 
nates an  aiming  point  (by  one  of  the  methods  described  in 
par.  141  if  necessary)  and  orders  fire  upon  it,  first  announcing 
the  proper  sight  setting  to  correct  the  error  of  aim. 

In  general,  platoon  leaders  observe  the  target  and  the  effect 
of  the  fire  and  are  on  the  alert  for  the  captain's  commands ; 
they  observe  and  regulate  the  rate  of  fire.  The  file  closers 
watch  the  firing  line  and  check  every  breach  of  fire  discipline. 
Chiefs  of  section  transmit  commands  when  necessary,  observe 
the  conduct  of  their  sections  and  abate  excitement-,  assist  in 
enforcing  fire  .discipline,  and  participate  in  the  firing  unless 
otherwise  directed  by  the  platoon  commanders. 

The  best  troops  are  those  that  submit  longest  to  fire  control. 
To  avoid  or  delay  such  loss  of  control  should  be  the  constant; 
aim  of  all. 

Fire  control  implies  the  ability  of  the  commander  to  stop 
the  firing,  change  the  sight  setting  and  target,  and  resume 
a  welljdirected  fire. 

FIRE  DISCIPLINE. 

664.  Fire  discipline  implies,  besides  an  unquestioning  habit 
of  obedience  to  commands,  a  control  of  the  rifle  by  the  soldier 
(the  result  of  training),  which  will  enable  him  in  action  to 
make  hits  instead  of  misses.     It  embraces  taking  advantage 
of  the  ground ;  proper  understanding  of  orders  as  to  target 
designation ;  care  in  setting  the  sight  and  delivery  of  fire  : 
constant  attention  to  the  orders  of  the  leaders,  and  careful 
observation  of  the  enemy :  an  increase  of  fire  when  the  target 
is  favorable,  and  a  cessation  of  fire  when  the  enemy  disap- 
pears: economy  of  ammunition.    Orderly  and  regular  methods 


MANUAL  FOK  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         193 

on  the  part  of  leaders  aid  lire  discipline.  vSelf  possession  and 
a  confident  tone  in  giving  commands  and  instructions  are  in- 
dispensable. 

Tn  combat,  shots  which  graze  the  enemy's  trench  or  position, 
and  thus  reduce  the  effectiveness  of  his  tire,  have  the  approxi- 
mate value  of  hits  ;  such  shots  only,  or  actual  hits,  contribute 
toward  lire  superiority. 

Fire  discipline  implies  that,  in  a  firing  line  without  leaders, 
each  man  retains  his  presence  of  mind  and  directs  effective 
fire  upon  the  proper  target. 

665.  To  create  a  correct,  appreciation  oC  the  requirements  of 
lire  discipline,  men  are  taught  that  the  rate  of  fire,  having 
<  -oust  airily  in  vie\v  the  available  ammunition  supply,  should 
be  as  rapid  as  is  consistent  with  accurate  aiming;  that  the 
rate  will  depend  upon  the  visibility,  proximity,  and  size  of 
the  target:  and  that  the  proper  rate  will  ordinarily  suggest 
itself  to  each  trained  man  usually  rendering  cautions  or  com- 
i  j  lands  iin  necessary. 

686.  In  attack,  ammunition  must  be  used  with  extreme  cau- 
i  ion  in  order  that  the  highest  rate  of  fire  man  be  employed  at 
the  hall  preceding  the  assault  and  in  pursuing  fire. 

667.  In  defense,  when  the  target  disappears  behind  cover, 
platoon    leaders   suspend   fire,   prepare  their  platoons  to   fire 
upon  the  point  where  it  is  expected  to  reappear,  and  greet 
its  reappearance  instantly  with  a   vigorous  burst  of  fire.     In 
defense,  the  available  ammunition  supply  is  not  ordinarily  so 
limited  as  in  the  attack. 

668.  For  communication  between  the  firing  line  and  the  re- 
serve or  commander   in   rear  certain   signals   are  prescribed 

(par.  097).  In  transmission  their  concealment  from  the 
enemy's  view  should  be  insured.  In  the  absence  of  signal 
tlags  the  headdress  or  other  substitute  may  be  used. 


669.  For  convenience  of  reference,  ranges  are  classified  as 
follows  : 

0  to  600  yards,  close  range. 
GOO  to  1,200  yards,  effective  range. 
1  .200  to  2,000  yards,  long  range. 
<  >ver  2,000  yards,  distant  range. 

;;,;,;       .47  ------  7 


194        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEBS. 

The  distance  to  the  target  must  be  determined  as  accu- 
rately as  possible  and  the  sights  set  accordingly. 

Aside  from  training  and  morale,  this  is  the  most  important 
single  factor  in  securing  effective  fire  at  the  longer  ranges. 

Except  in  a  deliberately  prepared  defensive  position,  the 
most  accurate  and  only  practicable  method  of  determining  the 
range,  in  absence  of  a  suitable  mechanical  range  finder,  will 
generally  be  to  take  the  mean  of  several  estimates  made  inde- 
pendently. 

Estimation  of  ranges. — Five  or  six  officers  and  men,  selected 
from  the  most  accurate  estimators  in  the  troop  and  designated 
as  range  estimators,  should  be  specially  trained  in  estimating 
distances. 

Whenever  necessary  and  practicable,  the  captain  assembles 
the  range  estimators,  points  out  the  target  to  them,  and  adopts 
the  mean  of  their^  estimates.  The  range  esimators  then  take 
their  customary  posts. 

When  a  range  is  announced,  the  men  at  once  set  their  sights 
to  correspond,  and  whenever  practicable  an  examination  of  the 
pieces  is  made  in  order  to  verify  the  sight  setting. 

(C.  C.  D.  R.,  No.  1,  Apr.  26,  1917.) 

Firing  is  delayed  as  long  as  possible  for  three  reasons,  viz : 
(a)  At  the  extreme  ranges  little  damage  can  be  done  on  the 
enemy,  and  ineffective  firing  always  encourages  him ;  ( b )  halt- 
ing to  fire  delays  the  advance,  and  the  great  object  to  be  accom- 
plished is  to  close  in  on  the  enemy  where  you  can  meet  him  on 
better  terms;  (c)  plenty  of  ammunition  will  be  required  at  the 
decisive  stage  of  the  fight,  and  it  is  very  difficult  to  send  extra 
ammunition  up  to  the  firing  line.  Therefore  never  fire  until  or- 
dered to  do  so,  and  then  never  fire  more  than  the  number  of 
rounds  designated.  Never  fire  after  the  command  "  cease  fir- 
ing "  is  given. 

Ammunition  in  the  bandoleers  will  ordinarily  be  expended 
first.  Thirty  rounds  in  the  right  pocket  section  of  the  belt 
will  be  held  as  a  reserve,  to  be  expended  only  when  ordered  by 
an  officer. 

Soon,  however,  it  will  be  necessary  to  halt  and  open  fire  on 
the  enemy  in  order  to  cause  him  some  loss,  to  make  his  riflemen 
keep  down  in  their  trenches,  and  to  make  them  fire  wildly.  It 
is  probable  that  at  this  time  and  until  you  arrive  much  closer 


MANTTAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         195 

YOU  will  not  see  any  of  the  enemy  to  fire  at.  You  may  not  even 
see  any  trenches  nor  know  just  where  the  enemy  is.  Your 
higher  officers,  however,  with  their  field  glasses  and  the  mes- 
sages they  receive,  will  know.  Each  troop  will  be  assigned 
M  oertain  front  to  cover  with  its  lire.  Therefore  be  careful  to 
fix  your  sights  at  the  designated  range  and  fire  only  at  the 
designated  target.  This  means  team  work  in  firing,  which  is 
one  of  the  juiost  important  elements  of  success. 

The  firing  line  advances  from  position  to  position  by  means 
of  rushes.  At  long  range  the  entire  line  may  rush  forward  at 
the  same  time,  but  as  the  range  decreases  one  part  of  the  line 
rushes  forward  while  the  remainder  keeps  up  a  hot  fire  on  the 
enemy.  The  number  taking  part  in  each  rush  -decreases  as  the 
fire  of  the  enemy  becomes  warmer,  until  perhaps  only  one 
squat!,  or  even  less,  rushes  or  crawls  forward  at  a  time,  pro- 
tected by  the  fire  of  the  rest  of  the  company.  The  distance 
covered  by  each  rush  also  becomes  less  and  less.  After  any 
rush  no  part  of  the  line  again  advances  until  the  rest  of  the 
line  is  up.  In  making  a  rush,  the  leader  of  the  unit  gives  the 
signal  and  leads  the  way.  The  rest  follow.  No  attempt  is  made 
to  keep  a  line,  but  each  man  rushes  forward  at  a  run,  seeking 
only  to  reach  the  new  halting  position  as  quickly  and  with 
as  little  exposure  as  possible.  When  halted,  the  skirmishers 
need  not  be  in  a  perfect  line,  but  every  advantage  should  be 
taken  of  the  ground  for  concealment  and  protection.  It  is 
necessary  only  that  no  man  or  group  of  men  should  interfere 
with  the  fire  of  other  parts  of  the  firing  line. 

The  noise  on  the  firing  line  will  be  great.  Leaders  will  be  dis- 
abled and  new  men  will  take  their  places.  Reinforcements 
coming  up  will  cause,  units  to  become  mixed.  To  the  green  man 
everything  may  appear  to  be  in  confusion,  but  this  is  not  so. 
This  is  war  us  it  really  is.  If  you  have  lost  your  section  or 
your  section  leader,  join  the  leader  nearest  to  you.  This  is  the 
way  the  game  is  played. 

As  long  as  the  fight  lasts  every  available  rifleman  must  be 
kepi  in  the  firing  line.  The  first  and  last  consideration  is  to 
win  the  battle.  Therefore,  under  no  circumstances  will  any 
soldier  be  permitted  to  go  to  the  rear,  either  for  ammunition 
or  to  assist  the  wounded. 

If  the  attacking  force  can  no  longer  advance,  it  is  much  safer 
to  throw  up  hasty  intrenchments  and  await  the  arrival  of  re- 


196        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

inforcements  or  darkness  than  it  is  to  retreat.  Retreating 
troops  are  the  ones  that  suffer  the  greatest.  This  lesson  is 
taught  by  every  great  war.  Therefore,  always  remember  that 
the  safest  thing  to  do  is  to  stick  to  the  firing  line. 

Troops  on  the  firing  line,  when  not  actually  engaged  in  tiring 
at  the  enemy,  busy  themselves  throwing  up  shelter  trenches. 
It  only  requires  a  few  minutes  to  construct  a  trench  that  gives 
great  protection.  Therefore,  never  get  separated  from  your 
intrenching  tool. 

Concealment  is  no  less  important  than  protection.  There- 
fore, when  conditions  permit,  as  is  generally  the  case  when  on 
the  defensive,  every  effort  should  be  made  to  hide  intrench- 
ments  by  the  use  of  sod,  grass,  weeds,  bushes,  etc. 

In  making  an  attack  the  infantry  is  always  supported  when 
possible  by  its  own  artillery,  which  continues  to  fire  over  its 
head  until  the  infantry  arrives  very  close  to  the  enemy's 
trenches.  This  fire  is  helping  you  a  great  deal  by  keeping 
down  the  fire  of  the  enemy's  infantry  and  artillery.  There- 
fore, don't  think  you  are  being  fired  into  by  your  own  artillery 
because  you  hear  their  shells  and  shrapnel  singing  through 
the  air  or  bursting  a  short  distance  in  your  front,  but  rather 
be  thankful  you  are  receiving  their  help  up  to  the  very  last 
minute. 

In  the  last  rush  which  carries  the  enemy's  position  there  is 
always  much  mixing  of  units.  The  firing  line  does  not  con- 
tinue rushing  madly  as  individuals  after  the  enemy,  but  halts 
and  fires  on  him  until  he  gets  out  of  good  range.  The  pursuit 
is  taken  up  by  formed  troops  held  in  reserve  or  by  the  firing 
line  only  after  its  units  are  again  gotten  together. 

As  the  fighting  often  lasts  all  day,  and  great  suffering  is 
caused  from  thirst,  don't  throw  away  your  canteen  when  the 
fight  commences.  It  may  also  be  impossible  to  get  rations  up 
to  the  line  during  the  night.  Therefore,  it  is  advisable  to  hold 
onto  at  least  one  ration. 

As  the  recent  war  has  shown  the  possibility  of  hand-to-hand 
fighting,  especially  at  night,  each  soldier  should  be  schooled  in 
the  use  of  the  bayonet. 

The  following  has  particular  reference  to  the  duties  of 
platoon  and  section  leaders  and  to  the  teamwork  of  the  platoon 
in  combat: 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        197 

Attacking  troops  must  first  gain  fire  superiority  in  order  to 
roach  the  hostile  position.  By  gaining  fire  superiority  is  meant 
making  one's  fire  superior  to  that  of  thn  enemy  in  volume  and 
accuracy,  and 'it  depends  upon  the  number  of  ritles  employed, 
the  rate  of  fire,  the  character  of  the  target,  training  and  dis- 
cipline, and  fire  direction  and  control.'  When  the  fire  of  the 
attackers  becomes  effective  and  superior  to  that  of  the  defend- 
ers the  latter  are  no  longer  able  to  effectively  and  coolly  aim 
and  fire  at  the  former,  and,  as  a  consequence,  the  attackers  are 
able  to  inaugurate  a  successful  rush  or  advance  which  carries 
them  nearer  to  the  enemy's  position. 

When  a  trained  organization  has  been  committed  to  the 
attack,  the  gaining  of  tire  superiority  depends  upon  the  way  in 
which  fire  direction  and  fire  control  are  exercised. 

The  captain  directs  the  fire  of  the  troop.  He  indicates  to 
the  platoon  commanders  the  target  (enemy)  which  the  troop  is 
to  fire  and  advance  upon,  and  tells  each  upon  which  part  of  this 
target  he  is  to  direct  the  fire  of  his  platoon.  When  he  desires 
the  fire  to  be  opened,  lie  gives  the  necessary  commands  or  sig- 
nals, including  the  range  at  which  the  sights  are  to  be  set. 

When  the  fire  fight  has  once  started,  it  becomes  to  a  great 
extent  a  fight  of  a  number  of  platoons.  The  platoon  is  the 
largest  organization  which  can  be  controlled  by  a  single  leader 
in  action.  The  platoon  comina'nder  (lieutenant  or  sergeant) 
controls  its  fire  in  order  to  gain  the  maximum  fire  effect  and 
to  avoid  wasting  ammunition.  He  must  try  his  best  to  make 
the  lire  of  his  platoon  effective,  to  get  it  forward,  and  to  sup- 
port neighboring  platoons  in  their  effort  to  advance.  At  the 
same  time  he  must  hold  himself  subject  to  his  captain's  direc- 
tions. He  should  take  advantage  of  every  chance  to  carry  his 
platoon  forward  unless  otherwise  ordered.  In  all  this  he  is 
assisted  by  his  section  chiefs  (sergeants)  and  by  his  corporals. 

At,  the  commencement  of  an  engagement  the  platoon  com- 
mander will  give  the  objective  (part  of  the  enemy's  line  Cl- 
aiming target)  at  which  his  platoon  is  to  direct  its  fire.  Non- 
commissioned officers  must  be  sure  that  they  see  and  under- 
stand the  objective,  and  that  all  the  men  in  their  squads  do 
likewise.  Fire  is  then  directed  at  this  objective  without  fur- 
ther command  until  the  platoon  commander  gives  a  new  ob- 
jective. 


198        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Men  should  be  instructed  to  aim  at  that  part  of  the  target 
assigned  to  their  platoon  which  corresponds  with  their  own 
position  in  their  own  platoon,  so  that  there  will  be  no  portion 
of  the  target  which  is  not  covered  by  fire.  A  portion  of  the 
enemy's  line  not  covered  by  fire  means  that  that  portion  is  able 
to  coolly  aim  and  fire  at  their  opponents. 

In  an  engagement  the  voice  can  seldom  be  heard  over  a  few 
feet,  and  the  platoon  commander  will  generally  have  to  convey 
his  orders  by  signals.  A  sergeant  may  be  able  to  shout  orders 
to  his  section,  and  orders  may  be  repeated  along  a  skirmish  line 
by  shouting.  Care  should  be  taken  that  orders  intended  for 
one  platoon  only  are  not  thus  conveyed  to  another  platoon. 

A  short  blast  on  the  whistle,  given  by  the  platoon  commander, 
means  "Attention  to  Orders."  All  noncommissioned  officers  at 
once  suspend  firing  and  glance  toward  the  platoon  commander 
to  see  if  the  latter  has  any  signals  or  orders  for  them.  If  not, 
they  resume  firing.  A  long  blast  on  the  whistle  means  "  Sus- 
pend Firing."  When  a  noncommissioned  officer  hears  this  sig- 
nal from  his  platoon  commander,  he  should  at  once  shout  "  Sus- 
pend Firing."  Upon  receiving  a  signal,  the  noncommissioned 
officer  for  whom  it  is  intended  should  at  once  repeat  it  back,  to 
be  sure  that  it  is  correctly  understood. 

As  a  rule,  rushes  should  be  started  by  a  unit  on  one  flank 
and  should  jbe  followed  in  succession  by  the  other  units  to  the 
opposite  flank.  Each  succeeding  unit  should  halt  on  the  line 
established  by  the  unit  which  first  rushed.  When  a  unit  is 
about  to  rusli,  leaders  in  charge  of  adjacent  units  should  cau- 
tion their  men  to  be  careful  not  to  fire  into  the  rushing  unit  as 
it  bounds  forward. 

When  one  unit  suspends  fire  for  the  purpose  of  rushing,  ad- 
jacent leaders  should  arrange  to  have  a  portion  of  their  men 
turn  their  fire  on  the  target  of  the  rushing  unit,  to  the  end  that 
there  may  be  no  portion  of  the  enemy's  line  not  under  fire  and 
able  to  fire  coolly  on  the  rushing  unit. 

Rushes  should  be  made  for  as  long  a  distance  as  possible, 
due  regard  being  had  for  the  wind  of  the  men  and  not  to  get 
beyond  supporting  distance  of  the  other  units.  Long  rushes 
facilitate  an  advance,  and  quickly  place  a  skirmish  line  close 
to  the  enemy's  position,  where  its  fire  will  have  more  effect. 


MANUAL  FOU  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        199 

An  attacking  line  .suffers  less  from  casualties  at  short  ranges 
i  han  it  does  at  mid  range. 

Every  advantage  should  be  taken  to  utilize  the  cover  avail- 
able. The  best  kind  of  cover  is  that  which,  while  it  masks  the 
skirmishers  from  the  sight  and  tire  of  the  enemy,  affords  favor- 
able conditions  for  firing  and  for  readily  advancing.  In  order 
to  allow  men  to  regain  their  wind,  or  should  the  fire  of  the 
enemy  be  so  effective  as  to  prevent  a  further  advance  without 
reinforcement,  advantage  may  be  taken  to  lie  close  in  cover,  or 
J tasty  fire  trenches  may  be  thrown  up  in  order  to  allow  the  line 
to  maintain  its  position.  "  To  go  back  under  fire  is  to  die." 

When  a  platoon  is  firing,  all  noncommissioned  officers  watch 
every  opportunity  to  make  the  fire  more  effective.  The  section 
chiefs  and  corporals  should  constantly  watch  the  men  to  see 
that  they  do  not  become  excited,  fire  too  hastily  or  without 
aim,  that,  their  sights  are  set  at  the  correct  range,  that  they 
are  obviously  firing  at  the  designated  target,  and  that  they 
assume  steady  firing  positions  and  take  advantage  of  cover. 
In  performing  these  duties  if  may  be  necessary  for  the  section 
chiefs  to  be  constantly  crawling  along  the  line.  A  substitute 
chief  assists  the  chief  of  his  section  by  supervising  the  fire  of 
the  men  near  him.  firing  when  not  actively  engaged  in  that 
duty. 

Bayonets  are  fixed  preparatory  to  a  charge  when  armed  with 
that  weapon.  This  command  is  usually  given  by  the  bugle. 
Only  two  or  three  men  in  each  section  should  fix  their  bayonets 
at  the  same  time,  in  order  that  there  may  be  no  marked  pause 
or  diminution  in  the  lire-  at  this  critical  stage  of  the  engage- 
ment. 

In  order  to  be  effective  in  combat,  the  platoon  must  be  thor- 
oughly trained  to  work  as  a  team.  Each  noncommissioned  offi- 
cer must  be  conversant  with  the  signals  and  commands  and 
the  proper  methods  for  instantly  putting  into  effect  the  orders 
of  his  platoon  commander.  Each  private  must  be  trained  until 
ho  instinctively  does  the  right  thing  in  each  phase  of  the  action. 

Section  3.  Patrolling. 

The  designation  of  a  patrol  indicates  the  nature  of  the  duty 
for  which  it  is  detailed,  as.  for  example,  visiting,  reconnoitering, 
exploring,  flanking,  combat,  harassing,  pursuing,  etc.  An  In- 


200         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

f antry  patrol  consists,  as  a  rule,  of  from  3  to  16  men,  a  Cavalry 
patrol  generally  of  from  4  to  10  men. 

Reconnoitering  patrols  are  habitually  small  and  seek  safety 
in  concealment  or  flight,  fighting  only  when  their  mission  de- 
mands it.  The  most  skillful  reconnoissance  is  where  patrols  ac- 
complish their  mission  and  return  without  being  discovered  by 
the  enemy.  When  resistance  is  expected  stronger  detachments 
are  required.  These  cover  themselves  with  small  patrols  of  two 
to  four  men,  the  remainder  acting  as  support. 

The  commander  determines  the  number  and  strength  of  pa- 
trols and  when  they  are  to  be  sent  out.  It  is  a  cardinal  prin- 
ciple to  send  out  patrols  of  such  strength  only  as  will  accom- 
plish the  object. 

The  officer  sending  out  the  patrol  verifies  the  details,  desig- 
nates a  second  in  command,  and  gives  the  necessary  instruction. 
The  orders  or  instructions  for  a  patrol,  or  for  any  detachment 
going  on  reconnoissance,  must  state  clearly  where  the  enemy 
is  or  is  supposed  to  be,  what  information  is  desired,  what  fea- 
tures are  of  special  importance,*  the  general  direction  to  be 
followed?  whether  friendly  patrols  are  liable  to  be  encountered, 
and  where  messages  are  to  be  sent  or  the  patrol  is  to  report. 
Important  and  comprehensive  instructions  should  be  in  writ- 
ing, but  precautions  against  capture  of  papers  must  be  taken. 
An  officer  sending  out  a  patrol  must  be  certain  that  his  orders 
are  understood.  Detailed  instructions  are,  as  a  rule,  avoided. 
When  necessary  the  time  of  return  is  stated. 

The  patrol  leader  should  be  selected  with  care.  He  should 
be  an  excellent  horseman,  have  good  judgment,  courage,  be  able 
to  read  maps,  make  sketches,  and  send  clear  and  concise  mes- 
sages. In  addition  to  his  ordinary  equipment,  he  should  have 
a  map  of  the  country,  a  watch,  field  glass,  compass,  whistle, 
message  blanks,  and  pencils. 

The  leader  of  a  patrol  should  carefully  inspect  the  men  and 
horses  before  starting  out.  He  should  see  that  the  horses  are 
well  shod  and  in  good  working  condition.  Nervous  horses  or 
those  that  neigh  when  left  alone  should  not  be  taken.  The 
equipment  of  each  man  should  be  complete  and  so  arranged  as 
to  prevent  rattling.  Articles  that  are  liable  to  glitter  in  the 
sunlight  should  be  covered.  Nothing  should  be  taken  along 
that  would  be  of  information  to  the  enemy  if  any  members  of 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        201 

the  patrol  were  captured,  for  example,  copies  of  orders,  maps 
with  positions  of  troops  marked  thereon,  letters,  newspapers, 
or  collar  ornaments. 

The  leader  then  gives  his  patrol  information  and  instructions. 
These  embrace  instructions  from  higher  authority ;  his  detailed 
plans  ;  information  of  the  country  and  enemy ;  the  countersign, 
if  any ;  the  point  where  the  patrol  will  assemble  if  scattered. 
Ho  will  see  that  the  men  understand  the  prescribed  signals. 

It  must  always  be  remembered  that  it  makes  no  difference 
how  valuable  may  be  the  information  that  the  patrol  gets,  it  is 
worthless  if  not  sent  back  in  time  to  be  of  service.  Herein  is 
where  most  patrols  fail.  This  applies  particularly  to  the  infor- 
mation obtained  by  patrols  acting  as  a  point  or  flankers  of  ad- 
vance, rear,  and  flank  guards.  Whenever  the  patrol  gets  any 
information,  the  leader  must  think  whether  the  commanding 
othcer  would  change  his  plans  or  issue  new  orders  if  he  had  the 
information.  If  he  would,  the  information  should  be  sent  back 
at  once.  If  the  distance  is  great  or  the  inhabitants  are  hostile, 
it  is  well  to  send  two  men  with  the  message.  These  men  should 
not  travel  side  by  side,  but  as  a  patrol  of  two  men.  If  the  infor- 
mation is  very  important,  and  the  danger  of  capture  is  consid- 
erable, the  message  should  be  sent  by  two  parties,  each  travel- 
ing by  a  different  route.  The  gaits  should  be  specified. 

A  message  from  a  patrol  should  always  show  (a)  the  place 
from  which  it  is  sent;  (b)  the  time  it  is  sent  (date,  hour,  and 
minute)  ;  (c)  to  whom  it  is  sent;  (d)  the  message  itself;  (e) 
what  the  patrol  intends  doing  after  sending  the  message;  (/) 
the  name  of  the  sender.  Under  (d)  care  must  be  taken  to 
separate  what  has  actually  been  seen  by  the  patrol  from  infor- 
mation received  from  other  sources.  Care  must  also  be  taken 
not  to  exaggerate  what  is  seen,  but  to  report  only  the  exact 
facts. 

Whether  moving  or  halted,  patrols  exercise  the  greatest  vigi- 
lance to  prevent  discovery.  No  formal  formation  is  or  should 
be  prescribed.  Under  the  leader's  guidance  it  moves  so  as  to 
guard  against  surprise,  usually  with  point  and  flankers.  To 
extend  the  sphere  of  its  observation,  still  smaller  patrols  (one 
or  two  men)  may  be  sent  out  for  short  distances,  communica- 
tion with  the  leader  being  maintained  by  signals.  Whatever 
the  formation  adopted,  it  should  favor  the  escape  of  at  least 
one  man  in  case  of  surprise. 


202        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

In  patrols  of  two  to  five  men  the  commander  generally  leads. 
In  this  formation  few  signals  are  necessary,  the  men  simply 
regulating  their  movements  by  his. 

In  questioning  civilians  caution  is  observed  not  to  disclose 
information  that  may  be  of  value  to  the  enemy.  Strangers  are 
not  allowed  to  precede  the  patrol.  Patrol ,  leaders  are  author- 
ized to  seize  telegrams  and  mail  matter,  and  to  arrest  individ- 
uals, reporting  the  facts  as  soon  as  possible. 

Patrols  should  observe  everything  for  signs  of  the  enemy. 
Even  apparent  trifles  may  be  of  great  value.  The  finding  of  *a 
collar  ornament  showing  a  man's  regiment  may  enable  the  chief 
of  staff  to  determine  that  the  enemy  has  been  reenforced. 

Patrols  should  not  travel  on  the  main  roads  if  they  can  ob- 
serve them  and  at  the  same  time  make  the  necessary  progress 
by  moving  some  distance  to  the  side  of  the  roads. 

Except  in  case  of  attack  or  of  great  personal  danger,  no  mem- 
ber of  the  patrol  should  fire  on  hostile  troops  without  orders 
from  the  patrol  leader.  When  sent  out  to  gain  information, 
patrols  should  avoid  lighting  unless  it  is  absolutely  necessary 
in  order  to  carry  out  their  orders.  If  the  leader  determines  to 
light,  he  should  quickly  decide  whether  he  will  attack  mounted 
with  the  saber  and  thus  dispose  of  the  enemy  without  the 
noise  of  fire  action.  Cases  will  arise  where  a  quick  mounted 
pistol  attack  will  obtain  the  best  results.  If  discovered,  the 
patrol  would  dismount  only  as  a  last  resort.  The  leader  should 
always  have  in  mind,  as  he  rides  long,  what  he  will  do  if  he 
meets  the  enemy. 

Villages  and  inclostires  involving  danger  of  surprise  are 
entered  with  precaution,  and  for  brief  periods  only.  Halts  are 
made  at  points  affording  good  view,  and  the  country  is  studied 
in  all  directions,  landmarks  to  the  rear  being  impressed  on  the 
minds  of  the  men  so  that  the  way  back  can  be  readily  found : 
the  leader  consults  his  map  and  locates  himself  thereon. 

When  a  patrol  is  scattered  it  reassembles  at  some  place  pre- 
viously selected ;  if  checked  in  one  direction,  it  takes  another : 
if  cut  off  it  returns  by  a  detour  or  forces  its  way  through.  As 
a  last  resort  it  scatters  so  that  at  least  one  man  may  return 
with  information.  Patrols  nearing  their  own  lines  should 
march  at  a  walk  unless  pressed  by  the  enemy. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         203 

Occasionally  it  is  advisable  for  the  leader  to  conceal  his 
patrol  and  continue  the  reconnaissance  with  one  or  two  com- 
panions. 

Patrols  far  from  their  commands  or  in  contact  with  the 
enemy  often  remain  out  overnight.  In  such  cases  they  seek  a 
place  of  concealment,  proceeding  thereto  after  nightfall  or 
under  cover. 

When  the  enemy  is  encountered  it  is  very  necessary  to  locate 
his  main  force.  Information  is  particularly  desired  of  his 
strength,  whether  he  has  infantry,  cavalry,  and  artillery,  the 
route  and  direction  of  his  march,  or  the  location  of  his  camp 
and  line  of  outposts. 

Dust  clouds  indicate  moving  bodies.  Infantry  raises  a  low, 
thick  cloud ;  cavalry  a.  high,  thin  cloud ;  artillery  and  wagons  a 
broken  cloud.  The  kind  of  troops,  direction  of  march,  and 
approximate  strength  may  thus  sometimes  be  roughly  esti- 
mated. If  from  some  position  a  body  of  troops  can  be  seen 
marching  along  in  column,  the  exact  time  in  minutes  and  sec- 
onds it  requires  for  them  to  pass  a  certain  point  should  be 
noted,  together  with  the  formation  they  are  in,  thus :  Infantry, 
column  of  squads,  three  minutes  and  twelve  seconds ;  cavalry, 
columns  of  twos  at  a  trot,  one  minute  and  twenty  seconds ; 
wagons,  four-mule,  five  minutes.  From  this  information  the 
strength  can  be  determined  by  the  following  rule : 

Assuming  that  infantry  in  column  of  squads  occupy  half  a 
yard  per  man,  cavalry  in  column  of  fours  1  yard  per  man,  and 
artillery  and  wagons  in  single  column  20  yards  per  gun,  cais- 
son, or  wagon,  a  given  point  would  be  passed  in  one  minute  by 
about — 

175  infantry. 

110  cavalry  at  a  walk. 

200  cavalry  at  a  trot. 

5  guns,  caissons,  or  wagons. 

For  troops  in  column  of  twos,  take  one-half  of  the  above  esti- 
mate. 

Patrols  should  always  observe  the  country  marched  over, 
with  a  view  to  making  a  report  on  the  same.  The  following 
information  is  always  of  value : 

Roads. — Direction ;  kind,  whether  dirt,  gravel,  macadam,  etc. ; 
width,  whether  suitable  for  column  of  squads,  etc. ;  border, 


204        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

whether  fenced  with  stone,  barbed  wire,  rails,  etc. ;  steepness 
in  crossing  hills  and  valleys ;  where  they  pass  through  defiles 
and  along  commanding  heights,  etc. ;  crossroads. 

Surrounding  country. — Whether  generally  open  and  passable 
for  infantry,  cavalry,  and  artillery,  or  whether  broken  and  im- 
passable, due  to  fences,  woods,  crops,  ravines;  whether  good 
grazing  is  available,  etc. 

Railroads. — Single  or  double  track,  narrow  or  broad  gauge, 
tunnels,  bridges,  cuts,  direction,  stations,  etc. 

Bridges. — Material,  wood,  stone,  steel,  etc.;  length  and 
breadth;  number  and  kind  of  piers  or  supports. 

Rivers. — Direction;  width,  depth;  kind  of  bottom,  such  as 
mud,  sand,  rocky,  etc. ;  banks,  steep  or  gentle,  open  or  wooded; 
rapidity  of  current;  variations  in  depth  at  different  times  as 
indicated  by  driftwood  and  high-waver  marks;  islands;  heights 
in  vicinity  commanding  streams. 

Woods. — Extent  and  shape;  kind  of  trees;  free  from  under- 
brush or  not;  clearings,  roads,  swamps,  ravines,  eic. 

Telegraph  lines. — Xumher  of  wires,  along  roads  m*  railroads, 
stations,  etc. 

Villages. — Size,  kind  of  houses,  nature  of  streets,  means  of 
defense,  etc. 

Hills  and  ridges. — Whether  slopes  are  gentle  or  steep; 
whether  top  is  narrow  or  wide;  whether  ground  is  broken  or 
smooth,  wooded  or  clear  ;  whether  difficult  or  easy  to  cross,  etc.  ; 
whether  commanded  by  other  lulls. 

Defiles. — Their  direction,  length,  and  width;  whether  suiv 
rounding  heights  are  passable  for  infantry  and  artillery:  kind 
of  country  at  each  opening  of  the  defile,  etc. 

Ravines,  ditches,  etc. — Width  and  depth ;  banks,  whether 
passable  for  infantry,  cavalry,  and  wagons;  whether  .suitable 
for  trenches,  or  for  movement  of  troops  therein,  etc. 

In  general,  every  soldier  should  be  constantly  on  the  lookoui: 
to  obtain  information  that  might  be  of  some  military  value. 
Remember  that  information  of  the  enemy  and  of  the  country 
is  worthless  unless  made  known  to  the  proper  officials  in  time 
to  be  of  use. 

Every  soldier  should  be  able  to  find  his  way  in  a  strange 
country;  should  know  how  to  use  a  compass:  should  know  how 
to  locate  the  North  Star;  should  be  able  10  travel  across  conn- 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         205 

try,  keeping  a  given  direction,  both  by  day  and  by  night,  and  by 
observing  landmarks  he  should  be  able  to  return  to  the  starting 
point  either  over  the  same  route  or  by  a  more  circuitous  one. 
This  can  easily  be  learned  by  a  little  practice. 

It  adds  a  great  deal  to  the  value  of  a  soldier  if  he  knows  how 
to  use  a  map  to  find  his  way.  If  he  knows  how  to  make  a 
rough  sketch  of  the  country,  showing  the  position  of  roads, 
streams,  woods,  railroads,  bridges,  houses,  villages,  fields, 
fences,  hills,  etc.,  he  has  added  to  his  value  as  a  soldier  very 
much,  indeed,  because  a  rough  sketch  of  a  country  will  give 
more  and  better  information  at  a  glance  than  can  be  obtained 
by  reading  many  pages  of  written  description. 

Patrolling  is  one  of  the  most  important  duties  a  soldier  can 
learn.  'Any  enlisted  man  who  understands  thoroughly  his  du- 
ties as  a  member  of  a  patrol  will  understand  also  most  of  his 
duties  when  with  advance  or  rear  guards  or  when  on  outpost 
duty.  Patrolling  can  not  be  learned  merely  by  reading  books 
nor  by  work  indoors.  Thoroughness  comes  only  by  actually 
going  out  in  the  country  and  acting  as  a  patrol. 

In  carrying  out  this  idea  the  following  scheme  is  recom- 
mended :  x 

Let  four  or  more  men  and  a  noncommissioned  officer  act  as 
a  patrol.  They  assemble  at  a  certain  time,  at  a  convenient 
point  on  some  country  road.  An  officer,  whom  we  will  call 
Captain  A,  acts  as  the  director ;  the  noncommissioned  officer, 
whom  we  will  call  Sergeant  B,  acts  as  patrol  leader ;  and  the 
others  (Privates  C,  D,  E,  etc.)  act  as  members  of  Sergeant 
B's  patrol. 

Assume  that  the  troop  (squadron,  etc.)  has  just  made 
camp  in  this  vicinity  and  that  the  inhabitants  are  friendly 
(or  hostile). 

Captain  A  indicates  to  the  rest  of  the  men  where  the  camp 
is  situated  and  points  out  wTiere  the  various  sentinels  are 
posted.  (This  in  itself  affords  an  opportunity  for  much  dis- 
cussion and  for  teaching  many  valuable  lessons.) 

Captain  A  then  calls  up  Sergeant  B  and  tells  him — 

(a)  Just  what  information  Captain  A  has  of  the  enemy,  and 
also  any  information  of  the  country  or  of  friendly  troops  in 
the  vicinity  that  might  be  of  service  to  Sergeant  B. 

(b)  How  many  men  he  shall  take  for  the  patrol   (this  is 
another  problem  for  Captain  A  to  solve).     Any  men  present 


206        MANUAL  POR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS, 

not  used  as  part  of  the  patrol  ride  along  with  Captain  A  as 
observers. 

(c)  How  far  lie  shall  go  and  Avhat  country  he  shall  cover 
with  the  patrol. 

(d)  Just  what  information  it  is  particularly  desired  lie  shall 
obtain. 

(c)  Where  he  shall  send  his  messages  and  when  he  shall 
return. 

Example  1: 

"  Sergeant  B,  it  has  jnst  been  reported  to  me  that,  a  com- 
pany of  hostile  infantry  was  in  camp  last  night  at  X.  about 
5  miles  from  here  on  this  road.  Take  0  men  and  proceed  to- 
ward X  and  find  out  whether  the  enemy  is  still  there,  and  if 
not.  when  he  left,  and  where  he  went.  Send  messages  to  me 
here,  and  return  by  8  o'clock  this  evening/' 

Example  2: 

*•  Sergeant  B,  I  think  I  heard  the  firing  of  field  guns  over  in 
that  direction  a  short  while  ago.  Take  0  men  and  proceed  to 
that  high  hill  you  see  over  there  about  4  miles  away.  Send  a 
message  to  me  here  when  you  reach  there.  You  may  go  far- 
ther if  you  then  think  it  advisable,  but  return  'before  day- 
light. I  desire  particularly. -to  know  if  there  are  any  hostile 
troops  in  this  vicinity,  especially  artillery.  I  shall  send  Ser- 
geant X  with  3  men  to  observe  the  country  from  that  hill 
you  see  over  there  farther  to  the  south.  He  will  remain  there 
till  dark.  Send  messages  to  me  here.  If  the  troop  is  not  here 
on  your  return  you  will  find  a  note  for  you  underneath  this 
rail." 

Example  3: 

"  Sergeant  B,  this  friendly  country  boy  has  just  reported 
that  four  hostile  cavalrymen  stopped  about  half  an  hour- ago 
at  his  father's  house,  which  he  says  is  about  2  miles  up  this 
road.  One  of  the  men  seemed  to  be  very  sick.  You  will  select 
eight  men  from  your  section  and  endeavor  to  capture  these 
men.  If  they  have  disappeared  you  will  reconnoiter  in  that 
vicinity  until  dark.  This  boy  will  accompany  you  as  a  guide. 
He  will  ride  Private  X's  horse.  I  desire  particularly  to  learn 
the  position,  strength,  and  composition  of  any  hostile  troops 
in  this  vicinity.  Send  reports  to  me  here.  Return  before 
daylight." 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        207 

Example  4: 

"  Sergeant  B,  here  is  a  map  of  the  country  in  this  vicinity 
on  a  scale  of  1  inch  to  the  mile.  Here  is  where  we  are  camped 
[indicating  position  on  the  map].  I  have  just  learned  that 
foraging  parties  of  the  enemy  are  collecting  supplies  over  here 
at  X  [indicating  point  on  map],  which  is  10  miles  off  in  that 
direction  [pointing  across  country  toward  X],  It  is  reported 
that  this  bridge  over  this  stream  [indicating  same  on  the 
map],  which  is  about  3  miles  down  this  road  [indicating  road 
and  direction  on  the  ground],  has  been  destroyed.  You  will 
take  three  men  from  your  platoon  and  verify  this  report.  You 
will  also  reconnoiter  the  stream  for  a  distance  of  3  miles  both 
above  and  below  the  bridge  for  fords  suitable  for  infantry. 
Messages  will  reach  me  here.  Return  by  8  o'clock  to-night." 

Sergeant  B  then  inspects  his  horses  and  men  and  gives  them 
their  instructions.  The  patrol  is  then  formed  and  moves  out 
exactly  as  it  would  under  actual  war  conditions. 

Captain  A  may  halt  (and  assemble  if  desirable)  the  patrol 
at  intervals  in  order  to  discuss  the  formation  used  and  the 
movement  of  any  members  of  the  patrol,  their  route,  use  of 
cover,  etc.,  with  the  reasons  therefor,  and  compare  the  same 
with  suggested  modifications  of  tjie  formations,  etc.  After  the 
discussion,  the  patrol  is  again  set  in  motion.  Captain  A  may 
accompany  any  part  of  the  patrol.  From  time  to  time  he  pre- 
sents certain  situations  to  some  member  of  the  patrol,  being 
very  careful  to  assume  only  such  situations  as  might  naturally 
occur. 

Thus,  take  Example  1 : 

Captain  A  is  with  Sergeant  B,  who,  with  Private  C,  is 
marching  along  the  road  as  the  point  of  the  patrol.  The  other 
members  of  the  patrol  are  distributed  to  suit  the  nature  of 
the  country  over  which  the  patrol  is  marching.  The  point  has 
just  reached  a  ridge  beyond  which  the  country  is  open  and 
cultivated  for  about  half  a  mile.  Beyond  this  the  road  enters 
a  woods.  Captain  A  now  says :  "  Sergeant  B,  from  this  point 
you  see  two  soldiers  in  khaki  on  the  road  there  at  the  begin- 
ning of  that  cornfield  about  200  yards  from  the  woods  [points 
out  same].  They  are  moving  in  this  direction.  About  200 
yards  to  the  right  of  these  and  somewhat  farther  to  their  rear 
you  see  two  more  men  moving  along  that  rail  fence." 


208        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Sergeant  B  now  does  exactly  as  lie  would  do  in  actual  \var. 
How  does  he  signal  to  his  patrol?  Does  he  assemble  his  men? 
If  so,  how  and  whore V  Does  ho  sond  a  message  back  to  camp: 
and  if  so,  by  whom,  and  is  ir  written  or  verbal?  (If  written, 

S< -recant  P»  actually  write*  ir  and  delivers  il  to  Private , 

with  the  necessary  instructions.  If  verbal,  it  is  actually  given 
to  Private  -  -  with  instructions.)  Captain  A  must  in  this 
case  make  notes  of  what  the  message  was.  In  either  cast-. 
Private  --  -  ceases  to  be  a  member  of  the  patrol  and  joins 
Captain  A  as  an  observer.  He  should,  however,  at  some  later 
time  be  required  to  repeat  his  message  to  Captain  A,  on  the 
assumption  that;  he  -*ad  reached  camp  with  the  same.  The 
message,  whether  oral  or  written,  should  be  thoroughly  ana- 
lyzed and  discussed.  Was  it  proper  to  send  a  message  at  this 
time?  Does  Sergeant  B  intend  to  remain  in  observation:  jf  so, 
how  long?  (Captain  A  can  give  such  information  from  time. to 
time  concerning  the  hostile  patrol  as  Sergeant  B  might  reason- 
ably be  supposed  to  learn  in  view  of  his  dispositions.  In  order 
that  Captain  A  may  present  natural  assumptions,  it  is  very  es- 
sential that  in  his  own  mind  he  should,  at  the. outset,  assume  a 
situation  for  the  hostile  forces  and  that  he  should  consider 
himself  as  in  command  of  all  hostile  troops.  In  this  particular 
case  lie  should  assume  himself  to  be  in  command  of  the  hostile 
patrol,  acting  under  certain  specified  orders  similar  to  exam- 
ples given,  and  he  should  conduct  this  patrol  in  his  own  mind  in 
accordance  with  these  orders,  giving  Sergeant  B  only  such  in- 
formation as  he  might  reasonably  be  expected  to  obtain  in  view 
of  whatever  action  Sergeant  B  takes.)  NVill  Sergeant  B  at- 
tempt to  capture  this  patrol?  If  ^n.  how?  Will  lie  avoid  fight- 
ing and  attempt  to  pass  it  unobserved ;  rrr/d  if  so.  how  and  why? 

In  this  manner  the  exercise  is  continued.  Care  must  be 
taken  not  to  have  the  patrol  leader  or  members  state  what 
they  would  do,  but  they  must  actually  do  it.  Explanations  and 
discussions  may  take  place  later. 

In  a  similar  manner  the  director  may  inform  Sergeant  B  (.or 
any  member  of  the  patrol  >  that  this  hostile  patrol  is  followed 
by  a  squad  (on  the  assumption  that  it  is  the  leading  unit  of  an 
advance  guard),  and  the  exercise  is  then  continued  along 
these?  lines. 

The  following  are  examples  of  assumption  that  might  be 
made  and  carried  out : 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         209 

(a)  That  the  patrol  is  unexpectedly  fired  upon. 

(?))  That  one  or  more  of  the  patrol  is  wounded. 

(e)  That  a  prisoner  is  captured  (let  an  observer  act  as 
prisoner).  „ 

<<»   That  a  friendly  inhabitant  gives  certain  information. 

( e)  That  a  dust  cloud  is  seen  in  the  distance  over  the  trees. 

1.0  That  a  column  of  troops  can  be  seen  marching  along  a 
distant  road. 

(fl)  That  an  abandoned  camp  is  discovered  and  certain 
signs  noted. 

(ft)  That  the  patrol  is  attacked  by  a  superior  force  and 
compelled  to  scatter. 

There  is  practically  no  end  to  the  number  of  reasonable 
assumptions  that  may  be  made. 

Troop  officers  may  use  this  method  of  instructing  non- 
commissioned officers  in  patrolling,  advance  and  rear  guard 
duty,  outposts,  and  in  squad  leading,  in  writing  messages,  in 
selecting  positions  for  trenches,  and  in  constructing  and  con- 
cealing same.  This  form  of  instruction  is  called  "  a  tactical 
ride  or,  if  dismounted,  a  tactical  walk."  It  is  very  greatly 
nsed  by  all  foreign  armies.  Exercises  along  the  same  general 
lines  are  conducted  for  field  and  staff  officers  and  even  general 
officers,  and  are  called  "tactical  rides"  and  "strategical 
rides,"  depending  upon  their  object. 

After  some  proficiency  has  been  attained  as  a  result  of  these 
tactical  rides,  the  greatest  interest  and  enthusiasm  can  be 
awakened  in  this  work  by  sending  out  two  patrols  the  same 
day,  one  to  operate  against  the  other.  Each  should  wear  a 
distinctive  uniform.  The  strength  of  each  patrol,  its  starting 
point,  route  to  be  followed,  and  its  orders  should  all  be  un- 
known to  the  other  patrol.  If  blank  ammunition  is  used,  an 
officer  should  supervise  its  issue  and  carefully  inspect  to  see 
that  no  man  carries  any  ball  cartridges.  One  umpire  should 
accompany  the  commander  of  each  party.  Each  umpire  should 
bo  fully  informed  of  the  strength,  orders,  and  route  of  both 
patrols.  He  must,  however,  carefully  avoid  giving  suggestions 
or  offering  any  information  to  the  commander.  Observers  in 
these  small  maneuver  problems  are  generally  in  the  way  and 
none  should  be  permitted  to  be  along. 


210        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

These  small  maneuvers  may  be  gradually  developed  by  hav- 
ing one  side  establish  an  outpost  or  fight  a  delaying  action,  etc. 

It  should  always  be  remembered  that  there  is  no  hard  and 
fast  rule  prescribing  how  a  patrol  of  three,  five,  or  any  number 
of  men  should  march.  The  same  is  equally  true  of  advance 
guards,  and  applies  also  to  the  establishment  of  outposts  It 
is  simply  a  question  of  common  sense  based  on  military  knowl- 
edge. Don't  try  to  remember  any  diagrams  in  a  book.  Think 
only  of  what  you  have  been  ordered  to  do  and  how  best  you 
can  handle  your  men  to  accomplish  your  mission,  and  at  the 
same  time  save  the  men  and  horses  from  any  unnecessary 
hardships.  Never  use  two  or  more  men  to  do  what  one  can  do 
just  as  well,  and  don't  let  your  men  get  beyond  your  control. 

In  addition  to  the  signals  prescribed  in  the  Cavalry  Drill 
Regulations,  the  following  should  be  clearly  understood  by  the 
members  of  a  patrol : 

Enemy  in  sight  in  small  numbers,  hold  rifle  above  the  head 
horizontally ;  enemy  in  force,  same  proceeding,  raising  and 
lowering  the  rifle  several  times;  take  cover,  a  downward  mo- 
tion of  the  hand. 

Other  signals  may  be  agreed  upon,  but  they  must  be  familiar 
to  the  men ;  complicated  signals  are  avoided.  Signals  must  be 
used  cautiously  so  as  not  to  convey  information  to  the  enemy. 

Section  4.  Advance  guards. 

The  advance  guard  is  a  detachment  of  the  main  body  which 
precedes  and  covers  it  on  the  inarch.  The  primary  duty  of  an 
advance  guard  is  to  insure  the  safe  and  uninterrupted  march 
of  the  main  body.  Specifically  its  duties  are : 

1.  To  guard  against  surprise  and  furnish  information  by 
reconnoitering. 

2.  To  push  back  small  parties  of  the  enemy  and  prevent 
their  observing,  firing  upon,  or  delaying  the  main  body. 

3.  To  check  the  enemy's  advance  in  force  long  enough  to 
permit  the  main  body  to  prepare  for  action. 

4.  When  the  enemy  is  encountered  on  the  defensive,  to  seize 
a  good  position  and  locate  his  lines, 'care  being  taken  not  to 
bring  on  a  general  engagement  unless  the  advance  guard  com- 
mander is  empowered  to  do  §o. 


MANTTAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        211 

5.  To  remove  obstacles,  repair  the  road,  and  favor  in  every 
way  the  steady  march  of  the  column. 

The  strength  of  the  advance  guard  will  vary  with  the  prox- 
imity of  the  enemy  and  character  of  the  country:  for  a  regi- 
ment it  will  generally  consist  of  Iron!  two  troops  to  a  squad- 
ron,!  for  a  squadron  of  one  troop:  for  a  troop  of  from  a  sec- 
tion to  a  platoon.  The  advance  guard  commander  is  responsi- 
ble for  the  proper  performance  of  the  duties  with  which  it  is 
charged  and  for  its  conduct  and  forma'tion. 

The  advance  guard  provides  for  its  security  and  gains  infor- 
mation by  throwing  out  to  the  front  and  flanks  smaller  bodies. 
Each  part  must  keep  in  touch  with  the  unit  from  which  it  is 
sent  out.  An  advance  guard  is  generally  divided  into  a  re- 
serve and  a  support:  where  it  consists  of  less  than  a  squad- 
ron, the  reserve  is  generally  omitted. 

The  support  sends  forward  an  advance  party,  which,  in 
turn,  sends  forward  a  point.  In  small  advance  guards  the 
point  precedes  the  advance  party  about  H50  yards,  the  advance 
party  the  support  about  500  yards,  and  the  support  the  main 
body  about  600  yards.  Where  advance  guards  are  large 
enough  to  require  a  reserve  these  distances  are  increased 
about  one-fourth,  the  reserve  following  the  support,  the  main 
body  following  the  reserve  at  a  distance  varying  from  500  to 
SOO  yards. 

'Unless  the  country  to  the  flanks  is  distinctly  visible  from 
the  roads  for  a  distance  of  what  may  be  said  to  be  effective 
rifle  fire,  approximately  1,000  yards.  Hanking  patrols  of  two  or 
three  men  each  should  be  sent  out  from  the  advance  party, 
and.  when  in  proximity  of  the  enemy,  in  addition  from  the 
support.  Wliea  the  nature  of  the  country  is  such  that  pa- 
trols may  move  across  country  without  unduly  delaying  the 
march  these  patrols  should  march  at  a  distance  of  from  500 
to  600  yards  from  the  flank  of  the  body  from  which  detached. 
For  the  examination  of  any  object,  such  as  a  wood,  buildings, 
etc.,  examining  patrols  should  be  sent  out  from  the  main  body. 
The  usual  method  of  protecting  the  Hanks,  particularly  when 
the  country  is  at  all  cut  up  or  difficult,  is  to  send  out 'patrols 
from  time  to  time  to  some  point  from  which  a  good  outlook 
can  be  obtained,  or  which  will  afford  protection  to  the  enemy. 
Those  patrols  remain  in  observation,  observer  being  dismount- 


212         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

ed,  his  horse  held  by  another  trooper  until  the  advance  guard 
has  passed,  when  they  rejoin  the  nearest  subdivision,  as 
quickly  as  possible  working  their  way  to  that  to  which  they 
belong  during  the  halts  or  by  riding  up  the  side  of  the  road. 
By  sending  out  a  succession  of  small  patrols  in  this  manner 
the  flanks  are  protected.  Should  the  advance  party  become 
depleted,  it  must  be  reenforced  from  the  support. 

A  squadron  acting  as  advance  guard  would  have  two  or 
three  troops  in  reserve  and  one  or  two  in  support.  The  sup- 
port would  send  forward  as  advance  party  two  platoons,  the 
advance  party  in  turn  sending  forward  as  point  one  section. 
A  troop  acting  as  advance  guard  would  have  no  reserve  and 
would  send  forward  as  advance  party  one  platoon.  All  of  the 
above  may  be  changed  as  circumstances  warrant. 

Cases  may  arise  when  the  best  means  of  covering  the  head 
and  flanks  of  the  column  will  be  by  a  line  of  skirmishers  ex- 
tended at  intervals  of  from  5  to  50  yards,  as,  for  instance, 
when  passing  through  high  corn,  underbrush,  etc. 

It  must  always  be  remembered  that  the  principal  duty  of  the 
advance  guard  is  to  secure  the  uninterrupted  march  of  the 
main  body.  If  the  point  is  fired  upon,  it  should  at  once  deploy 
and  endeavor  to  advance  fighting.  The  flankers  should  assist 
in  this  and  endeavor  to  locate  the  enemy's  flank  should  there 
be  such  resistance  that  advance  was  impossible.  Each  succeed- 
ing body  should  march  promptly  forward,  and  in  turn  be 
placed  in  action,  with  the  idea  of  clearing  the  way  for  the 
advance  of  the  main  body.  Should  this  be  impossible,  the 
commander  of  the  entire  body  must  determine  what  measures 
he  will  take. 

Section  5.  Rear  guards. 

A  rear  guard  is  a  detachment  detailed  to  protect  the  main 
body  from  attack  in  rear.  Cavalry  is  an  excellent  arm  for 
rear  guard  duty  on  account  of  its  mobility.  While  part  of 
the  cavalry  is  using  dismounted  fire  action,  the  other  part 
may  gallop  back  and  take  up  a  new  position.  In  a  retreat  it 
checks  pursuit  and  enables  the  main  body  to  increase  the 
distance  between  it  and  the  enemy  and  to  re-form  if  disor- 
ganized. The  general  formation  is  that  of  an  advance  guard 
reversed. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        213 

Its  commander  should  take  advantage  of  every  favorable  op- 
portunity to  delay  the  pursuers  by  obstructing  the  road,  or  by 
taking  up  specially  favorable  positions  from  which  to  force  the 
enemy  to  deploy.  In  this  latter  case  care  must  be  taken  not 
to  become  so  closely  engaged  as  to' render  withdrawal  unneces- 
sarily difficult.  The  position  taken  should  be  selected  witli  ref- 
erence to  ease  of  withdrawal  and  ability  to  bring  the  enemy 
under  lire  at  long  range. 

Section  6.  Flank  guards. 

A  Hank  guard  is  a  detachment  detailed  to  cover  the  flank  of 
a  column  inarching  past,  or  across  the  front  of,  an  enemy.  It 
may  be  placed  in  position  to  protect  the  passage,  or  it  may  be 
so  marched  as  to  cover  the  passage.  The  object  of  the  flank 
guard  is  to  hold  the  enemy  in  check  long  enough  to  enable  the 
main  body  to  pass,  or,  like  the  advance  guard,  to  enable  the 
main  body  to  deploy.  Like  all  other  detachments,  it  should  be 
no  larger  than  is  necessary,  and  should  not  be  detailed  except 
when  its  protection  is  required. 

When  a  flank  guard  consists  of  a  regiment  or  less,  its  dis- 
tance from  the  main  body  should  not  be  much  over  5  miles. 
Practicable  communication  must  exist  between  it  and  the  main 
body.  The  flank  guard  is  marched  as  a  separate  command; 
that  is.  with  advance  or  rear  guards,  or  both,  as  circumstances 
demand,  and  with  patrolling  on  the  exposed  flank. 

Section  7.  Outposts. 

Troops  not  on  the  march  provide  for  their  security  by  out- 
posts. The  general  duties  of  an  outpost  are  reconnoissance, 
observation,  and  resistance. 

The  specific  duties  are : 

1.  To  protect  the  main  body,  so  that  the  troops  may  rest  un- 
disturbed. 

L*.  In  case  of  attack,  to  check  the  enemy  long  enough  to  en- 
able the  main  body  to  make  the  necessary  dispositions. 

During  an  advance  the  outposts  are  usually  detailed  from 
the  advance  guard.  During  the  retreat  the  outposts  for  the 
night  usually  forms  the  rear  guard  the  next  day.  If  the  com- 


214        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


mand  remains  in  bivouac,  the  new  outpost  generally  goes  on 
duty  at  daybreak. 

The  vigilance  of  outpost  troops  must  be  unceasing,  4)ut  they 
should  avoid  bringing  on  combats  or  unnecessarily  alarming 
the  command.  Firing  disturbs  the  rest  of  troops  and,  if  fre- 
quently indulged  in,  ceases  to  be  a  warning. 

No  trumpet  signals  except  "  to  arms  "  or  "  to  horse  "  are 
sounded,  and  all  unnecessary  noises  must  be  avoided. 

As  a  rule  an  outpost  will  not  exceed  one-sixth  the  strength 
of  a  command.  For  a  single  troop  a  few  sentinels  and  patrols 
will  suffice ;  for  a  larger  command  a  more  elaborate  system 
must  be  devised.  The  troops  composing  the  outpost  are  gen- 
erally divided  into  a  reserve  and  several  supports. 

At  a  proper  distance  in  front  of  the  camp  of  the  main  body 
a  line  which  offers  a  good  defensive  position  is  selected.  This 
is  called  the  line  of  resistance,  and  should  be  so  located  that 
an  advancing  enemy  will  be  held  in  check  beyond  effective 
rifle  range  in  case  of  a  small  force,  artillery  range  in  case  of 
a  large  force,  of  the  main  body  until  the  latter  can  deploy. 
The  reserve  is  stationed  at  some  point  in  rear  of  this  line, 
where  it  can  be  moved  quickly  to  reinforce  any  point  as 
needed.  The  line  of  resistance  is  divided  into  sections,  the 
limits  of  each  of  \vhich  are  clearly  defined.  A  support  is  as- 
signed to  each  section,  which  are  numbered  from  right  to  left, 
and  occupies  a  position  on  or  near  the  line,  having  special  re- 
gard to  covering  avenues  of  approach.  The  position  occupied 
should  always  be  intrenched.  The  reserve  and  supports  pro- 
ceed to  their  respective  positions  by  the  shortest  routes,  pro- 
viding for  their  own  protection  by  sending  out  covering  de- 
tachments. 

Generally  speaking,  about  one-half  the  Infantry  of  the  ad- 
vance guard  should  be  in  the  supports.  As  each  support 
arrives  at  its  position  it  sends  out  observation  groups,  vary- 
ing in  size  from  four  men  to  a  platoon,  to  watch  the  country 
in  the  direction  of  the  enemy.  These  groups  are  called  out- 
guards.  For  convenience  they  are  classified  as  pickets,  sentry 
squads,  and  cossack  posts,  and  should  be  sufficient  in  number 
to  cover  the  front  of  the  section  occupied  by  the  support  and 
connect  with  the  neighboring  supports.  The  horses  of  the  out- 
guards  may  be  left  at  the  position  of  the  support. 


on 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        215 

A  picket  is  n  group  consisting  of  one  or  two  sections,  ordi- 
narily not  exceeding  half  a  company,  posted  in  the  line  of 
outposts  to  cover  a  given  sector.  It  furnishes  patrols  and 
one  or  more  sentinels,  sentry  squads,  or  cossack.  posts  for  ob- 
servation. Pickets  are  placed  at.  ihe  more  important  points 
in  the  line  of  outguards,  such  as  road  forks.  The  strength  of 
each  depends  upon  the  number  of  small  groups  required  to 
observe  properly  its  sector. 

A  sentry  squad  is  a  squad  (eight  men)  posted  in  observation 
at  an  indicated  point.  It  posts  a  double  sentinel  in  observation, 
the  remaining  men  resting  near  by  and  furnishing  the  reliefs  of 
sentinels.  In  some  cases  it  may  be  required  to  furnish  a  patrol. 

A  cossack  post  consists  of  four  men.  It  is  an  observation 
group  similar  to  a  sentry  squad,  but  employs  a  single  sentinel. 

As  a  rule  not  more  than  one-third  of  Hie  support  should  be 
on  outguard  duty.  As  soon  as  they  are  sent  out  to  their  posi- 
tions the  support  commander  selects  a  defensive  position  on 
the  line  of  resistance;  gives  instruction  for  intrenching  same; 
establishes  a  sentinel  to  watch  for  and  transmit  signals  from 
outguards;  sends  our  patrols  to  reconnoiter  the  country  to  the 
front  of  his  section  and.  if  on  the  Hank  of  the  line,  the  flank; 
and  then  proceeds  to  make  a  careful  reconnoissance  of  the  sec- 
tion assigned  him,  rectifying  the  position  of  outguards  if  neces- 
sary, seeing  that  they  understand  their  instructions  in  case  of 
attack  oi"  when  strangers  approach  their  posts,  and  pointing 
out  their  lines  of  retreat  in  ease  they  are  compelled  to  fall 
back  on  the  support. 

When  the  outguards  are  established,  the  members  of  the  sup- 
port may  stack  arms  and  remove  equipment  except  cartridge 
belts.  Part  of  the  horses  may  be  unsaddled  and  groomed  and 
fed  at  one  time.  All  girths  should  be  loosened.  No  tires  will 
be  built  or  smoking  permitted  unless  specially  authorized,  or 
no  loud  talking  or  other  noise.  All  patrolling  to  the  front  will 
be  done,  as  a  rule,  from  the  support.  The  support  commander 
should  locate  the  position  of  the  adjacent  supports  and  make 
arrangements  with  the  commanders  for  the  joint  defense  of 
the  line  of  resistance.  At  nights  all  roads  and  trails  should  be 
carefully  covered  and  the  country  to  the  front  and  between 
adjacent  outguards  well  patrolled.  Horses  should,  as  far  as 
possible,  be  permitted  to  rest,  unsaddled,  at  night. 


316        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

The  line  occupied  by  the  outguards  is  called  the  line  of  ob- 
servation. Outguards  move  to  their  positions  providing  for 
their  own  protection  and  so  as  to  conceal  the  movement  from 
the  enemy.  These  positions  are  intrenched  and  are  numbered 
from  right  to  left  in  each  support. 

The  duties  of  the  outguard  are  to  observe  the  enemy,  to 
guard  the  outpost  from  surprise,  and  to  make  a  preliminary 
resistance  to  the  enemy's  advance.  The  strength  of  the  out- 
guard  will  vary  according  to  its  object.  When  an  important 
road,  which  at  night  will  afford  a  line  of  advance,  or  a  bridge 
is  to  be  covered,  or  when  several  posts  are  established  from 
an  outguard  it  should  be  of  considerable  strength,  a  section 
or  a  platoon.  When  mere  observation  and  alarm  are  all  that 
is  required  four  men  will  suffice.  One  corporal  and  seven  pri- 
vates are  a  good  number  to  use  as  an  outguard ;  this  will 
allow  one  double  sentry  post  of  three  reliefs  and  one  man  in 
addition  to  the  commander,  wyho  may  be  used  for  messenger 
service.  The  outguard  should  be  carefully  concealed. 

The  utmost  quiet  should  be  observed,  and  there  should  be 
no  cooking  or  smoking.  The  intervals  between  outguards  will 
depend  upon  the  situation  and  the  terrain.  The  line  of 
observation  is  not  necessarily  continuous,  but  all  avenues  of 
approach  must  be  carefully  guarded.  The  distance  of  the 
outguard  from  the  support  likewise  is  governed  by  the  ter- 
rain, but  in  general  may  be  said  to  be  from  300  to  400  yards. 
In  thick  country  or  at  night  outguards  patrol  along  the  line 
of  observation  between  posts.  Communication  between  out- 
guards and  the  support  is  by  signal  and  messenger,  in  special 
cases  by  wire.  Members  of  the  outguard  retain  possession  of 
their  weapons  and  clo  not  remove  their  equipment. 

Sentinels  from  the  outguard  are  posted  so  as  to  avoid  obser- 
vation, but  so  that  they  may  have  a  clear  lookout  and  be  able 
to  see,  if  possible,  by  day,  the  sentinels  of  the  adjacent  out- 
guards. Double  sentinels  are  always  posted  near  enough  to 
each  other  to  communicate  easily  in  ordinary  voice.  Sentinels 
are  generally  on  post  two  hours  out  of  six.  For  every  sentinel 
and  every  patrol  there  should  be  three  reliefs,  and  outguards 
should  be  of  a  strength  sufficient  to  allow  this.  The  position 
of  a  sentinel  should  be  selected  with  reference  to  observation. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         217 

It  may  be  advantageous  to  place  a  sentinel  in  a  tree.  Senti- 
nels furnished  by  cossack  posts  or  sentry  squads  are  kept 
near  their  group.  Those  furnished  by  their  pickets  may  be 
kept  as  far  as  100  yards  away. 

Reliefs,  visiting  patrols,  and  inspecting  officers  approach 
sentinels  from  the  rear. 

A  sentinel  on  the  line  of  observation  should  always  have  the 
following  instructions :  The  names  of  villages,  streams,  and 
prominent  features  in  sight  and  where  the  roads  lead.  The 
number  (if  any)  of  his  post,  and  the  number  of  his  and  of  the 
adjoining  outguards ;  the  position  of  the  support ;  the  line  of 
retreat  to  be  followed  if  the  outguard  is  compelled  to  fall 
back;  the  position  of  advance  detachments  and  whether 
friendly  patrols  are  operating  in  front;  to  watch  to  the  front 
and  flanks  without  intermission  and  devote  special  attention 
to  unusual  or  suspicious  occurrences ;  if  he  sees  indications  of 
the  enemy,  to  at  once  notify  his  immediate  superior ;  in  case 
of  imminent  danger,  or  when  an  attack  is  made,  to  give  the 
alarm  by  firing  rapidly ;  by  day  to  pass  in  or  out  officers,  non- 
commissioned officers,  and  detachments  recognized  as  part  of 
the  outposts,  and  officers  known  to  have  authority  to  do  so; 
to  detain  all  others  and  notify  the  outguard  commander;  at 
night,  when  persons  approach  his  post,  to  come  to  a  ready, 
halt  them,  and  notify  the  outguard  commander ;  the  latter 
challenges,  ascertains  their  identity,  and  acts  accordingly. 
When  individuals  fail  to  halt,  or  otherwise  disobey,  to  fire 
upon  them  after  a  second  warning,  or  sooner  if  they  attempt 
to  attack  or  escape;  to  require  deserters  to  lay  down  their 
arms,  and  remain  until  a  patrol  is  sent  out  to  bring  them  in; 
to  order  deserters  pursued  by  the  enemy  to  drop  their  arms 
and  to  give  an  alarm ;  if  they  fail  to  obey  they  are  fired  upon ; 
to  require  bearers  of  flags  of  truce  and  their  escorts  to  halt 
and  to  face  outward ;  to  permit  them  to  hold  ho  conver- 
sation and  to  see  that  they  are  then  blindfolded  and  disposed 
of  in  accordance  with  instructions  from  the  support  com- 
mander ;  if  they  fail  to  obey  to  fire  upon  them ;  at  night,  to 
remain  practically  stationary,  moving  about  for  purposes  of 
observation  only ;  not  to  sit  or  lie  down  unless  authorized  to 
do  so;  in  the  daytime,  to  make  use  of  natural  or  artificial 
cover  and  assume  such  positions  as  to  give  him  the  best  field 


218        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

of  view:  to  inform  passing  patrols  of  what  lie  has  seen  :  to 
carry  his  weapon  habitually  loaded  and  locked  and  at  will. 

Outpost  patrols  are  divided  into  those  which  operate  beyond 
the  lines  and  those  whose  duly  lies  principally  within  the 
lines.  The  former,  called  reconnoitering  patrols,  scout  in  the 
direction  of  the  enemy ;  the  latter,  called  visiting  patrols, 
maintain  communication  between  the  parts  of  the  outpost  and 
supervise  the  performance  of  duty  on  the  line  of  observation. 
Reconnoissance  should  be  continuous.  Though  scouts  and 
detachments  of  cavalry  remain  in  contact  with  the  enemy,  or 
at  least  push  forward  to  a  considerable  distance,  more  detailed 
reconnoissance  by  infantry  patrols  in  the  foreground  must  not 
be  neglected.  Reconnoitering  patrols  are  composed  of  at  least 
two  men  and  a  skillful  leader,  who.  in  important  cases,  would 
be  an  officer.  They  obtain  information,  ascertain  the  presence 
of  the  enemy,  or  discover  his  approach.  All  patrols,  when  they 
cross  the  line  of  observation,  inform  the  nearest  sentinel  of 
the  direction  in  which  they  are  to  advance;  on  their  return 
they  similarly  report  what  they  have  seen  of  the  enemy ;  sig- 
nals are  agreed  upon  so  that  they  can  be  recognized  when  re- 
turning. Any  ground  near  the  line  of  observation  which 
might  afford  cover  for  troops,  or  for  scouts  or  spies,  and  the 
approach  to  which  can  not  be  observed  by  sentinels,  is 
searched  frequently  by  patrols.  Definite  information  con- 
cerning the  enemy  is  reported  at  once.  Patrols  fire  only  in 
self-defense  or  to  give  the  alarm.  Supports  on  the  flank  of  an 
outpost  position  patrol  ihc  country  on  the  exposed  flank. 
Visiting  patrols  and  reliefs  should  not  march  in  the  open 
and  thereby  expose  the  position  of  sentinels. 

During  a  inarch  in  the  vicinity  of  the  enemy  when  halts  are 
made,  special  measures  for  protection  are  taken.  When  the 
halt  is  for  a  short  period,  less  than  half  an  hour,  the  advance 
party  and  support  remain  at  ease,  the  point  and  flankers  move 
to  positions  from  which  they  can  obtain  a  good  lookout,  and 
additional  patrols  may  be  sent  out  from  advance  parties  and 
supports.  Where  the  halt,  is  for  a  period  exceeding  half  an 
hour  a  march  outpost  should  be  formed. 

With  an  advance  guard  consisting  of  a  squadron,  one 
troop  as  support  and  three  as  reserve,  a  suggested  form  of 
march  outpost  might  be  formed  as  follows:  The  leading  pla- 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         219 

toon  moving  to  the  front  at  a  trot  for  400  yards  would  be 
outguard  No.  2 ;  the  next  platoon  in  rear,  moving  to  the  right 
at  a  trot  for  about  600  to  800  yards  would  be  outguard  No. 
1;  the  next  platoon,  moving  to  the  left  in  the  same  manner 
would  be  outguard  No.  3 ;  and  the  4th  platoon  would  be  the 
support  of  the  march  outpost.  The  reserve  (3  troops)  would 
be  the  reserve  of  the  march  outpost.  On  signal  being  given 
to  resume  the  march,  the  various  units  would  close  in  at  a 
trot  or  gallop,  and  as  soon  as  the  support  had  assembled  the 
march  would  be  resumed. 

Section  8.  Rifle  trenches. 

Soldiers  should  remember  that  only  by  acting  vigorously  on 
the  offensive  can  an  army  hope  to  gain  the  victory.  The  de- 
fensive may  delay  or  stop  the  enemy,  but  it  can  never  destroy 
him.  "  Troops  dig  because  they  are  forced  to  halt ;  they  do 
not  halt  to  dig." 

Trenches  will  frequently  be  constructed,  without  being  used, 
and  soldiers  must  expect  this  as  a  feature  of  campaigning  and 
accept  cheerfully  what  at  times  may  appear  as  unnecessary 
labor. 

When  intrenching  under  fire  cover  is  first  secured  in  the 
lying  position,  each  man  scooping  out  a  depression  for  his  body 
and  throwing  the  earth  to  the  front.  In  this  position  no  ex- 
cavation can  be  conveniently  made  for  the  legs,  but  if  time 
permits  the  original  excavation  is  enlarged  and  deepened  until 
it  is  possible  to  assume  a  sitting  position,  with  the  legs  crossed 
and  the  shoulder  to  the  parapet.  In  such  a  position  a  man 
presents  a  smaller  target  to  shrapnel  bullets  than  in  the  lying 
trench  and  can  fire  more  comfortably  and  with  less  exposure 
than  in  the  kneeling  trench.  From  the  sitting  position  the 
excavation  may  be  continued  until  a  standing  trench  is  secured. 

The  accompanying  plate  shows  some  of  the  more  common 
forms  of  trenches  in  profile.  Figure  1  is  the  simplest  form  of 
standing  trench.  Figure  2  shows  the  same  trench  deepened  in 
rear,  so  as  to  allow  men  to  walk  along  in  the  rear  (deeper) 
portion  of  the  trench  without  exposing  their  heads  above  the 
parapet.  Figure  3  shows  a  cover  and  firing  trench,  with  a 
chamber  in  which  men  can  find  shelter  when  under  heavy 


220        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

artillery  fire.  When  the  excavated  earth  is  easily  removed 
figure  4  shows  a  good  profile.  The  enemy's  infantry,  as  well 
as  his  artillery,  will  generally  have  great  difficulty  in  seeing 
this  type  of  trench. 

The  mound  or  bank  of  earth  thrown  up  for  shelter  in  front 
of  a  trench  is  <  ailed  the  parapet.  It  should  be  at  least  30 
inches  thick  on  to]>.  and  the  front  should  slope  gradually,  as 
shown  in  the  plate,  so  that  shells  will  tend  to  glance  from  it, 
rather  than  penetrate  and  explode.  The  top  should  be  cov- 
ered with  sod,  grass,  or  leaves,  so  as  to  hide  the  newly  turned 
earth,  which  could  be  easily  seen  and  aimed  at  by  the  enemy. 
There  should  be  no  rocks,  loose  stones,  or  pebbles  on  top., 
which  might  be  struck  by  the  bullets,  splintering  and  flying, 
thus  adding  greatly  to  the  number  of  dangerous  projectiles, 
and  often  deflecting  bullets  downward  into  the  trench.  A 
stone  wall  is  a  very  dangerous  thing  to  be  behind  in  a  tight. 

The  portion  of  the  ground  in  rear  of  the  parapet  and  be- 
tween the  parapet  and  the  trench  not  covered  by  the  parapet  is 
to  rest  the  elbows  on  when  tiring,  the  rifle  being  rested  on 
top  of  the  parapet. 

To  obtain  head  cover  in  a  trench  till  a  gunny  sack  or  other 
bag  with  sand  or  soil  and  place  it  on  top  of  the  parapet,  aim- 
ing around  the  right-hand  side  of  it.  or  dig  a  small  lateral 
trench  in  the  parapet  large  enough  to  hold  the  rifle.  Roof  it 
over  with  boards,  small  logs,  or  brush,  and  heap  dirt  on  top, 
aiming  through  the  small  trench  or  resulting  loophole. 

Figure  5  shows  the  plan  of  a  section  of  a  rifle  trench.1  Be- 
tween the  portions  occupied  by  each  sqtiad  there  is  often  placed, 
a  mound  of  earth  as  high  as  the  top  of  the  parapet  and  pro- 
jecting back  into  the  trench.  This  is  called  a  traverse  and 
protects  the  occupants  of  the  trench  from  fire  from  a  flank. 
Bullets  from  this  direction  hit  a  traverse,  instead  of  living 
down  into  the  trench  and  wounding  several  men. 

Trenches  are  seldom  continuous,  but  are  made  in  sections 
placed  at  the  most  advantageous  points,  as  shown  in  figure  C. 
A  company  or  battalion  may  occupy  a  single  section.  The  fir- 
ing trenches  have  cover  trenches  in  rear  of  them,  where  the 

1  The  traverse  should  be  at  least  6  feet  wide  instead  of  3  feet,  as 
shown  in  figure  5. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        221 

supports  can  rest  undisturbed  by  the  hostile  fire  until  they 
are  needed  in  the  firing  trench  to  repel  a  serious  assault  or 
to  take  part  in  a  counter  attack.  Passages  consisting  of  deep 
communicating  trenches  facilitate  passage  from  the  cover 
trenches  to  the  firing  trenches  when  under  fire.  These  com- 
municating trenches  are  usually  zigzag  or  traversed  to  prevent 
their  being  swept  by  hostile  fire. 

When  troops  are  likely  to  remain  in  trenches  for  a  consid- 
erable time  drainage  should  be  arranged  for,  and  latrines  and 
dressing  stations  should  be  constructed  in  trenches.  Water 
should  be  brought  into  the  trenches  and  holes  excavated  in  the 
i'ront  wall  of  the  trench  for  extra  ammunition. 

In  digging  trenches  men  usually  work  in  reliefs,  one  relief 
digging  while  the  others  rest,  the  proportion  of  shovelers  to 
pickmen  being  about  3  to  1.  If  a  plow  can  be  obtained  to 
turn  the  sod,  it  will  greatly  facilitate  the  initial  work  of  digging. 


A  \  D  C 


fotsib/t  crrtr.jemenf  of  2  Bns.  of  lr,f.  mfrtnched  (Regimental  Reserve  of  I  Bn.nof  show), 
A       Firing  frcncha. 
B     Cover  trenches, 

C      Communicating  trench;  D^amc  fa/crscd;  E  communicating  »aj 
F      Closed  suppcrting  point  for  fhnk  protection 
M.G.  Possible  position  for  machine  guns,  concealed  fnm  front 

~~ 


222 


CHAPTER  VII. 
MABCHING  AND  CAMPING. 


Section  1.  Breaking  camp  and  preparation  for  a  march. 

THE  EVENING  BEFORE   THE   MABCH. 

When  a  command  learns  that  it  is  to  make  a.  march  on  the 
following  day,  presumably  starting  early  in  the  morning,  cer- 
tain details  should  be  attended  to  the  evening  before. 

All  men  should  fill  their  canteens,  as  there  will  probably  be 
no  time  for  this  in  the  morning. 

The  mess  sergeant  should  find  out  whether  lunch  or  the 
reserve  ration  will  be  carried  on  the  march,  and  should  attend 
to  these  details  in  the  evening  in  order  that  the  issue  can  be 
made  promptly  in  the  morning. 

The  stable  sergeant  will  have  the  stable  detail  fill  all  of  the 
feed  bags  for  the  morning's  feed,  and  the  section  leaders  will 
see  that  each  of  their  men  has  filled  his  grain  bag  with  the 
noon  feed  for  the  following  day. 

The  commander  of  the  guard  should  be  given  a  memorandum 
as  to  what  time  to  awaken  the  cooks  and  where  their  tent  is. 
The  member  of  the  guard  who  does  this  should  awaken  them 
without  noise,  so  as  not  to  disturb  the  rest  of  the  remainder 
of  the  command. 

The  cooks  should  be  instructed  as  to  what  time  breakfast  is 
to  be  served  and  what  time  to  awaken  the  first  sergeant. 

The  cooks  or  cooks'  police  must  cut  and  split  all  firewood  for 
the  morning  before  9  p.  m.  There  must  be  no  chopping,  talk- 
ing, or  rattling  of  pans  before  reveille  which  will  disturb  the 
rest  of  the  command.  This  applies  to  every  morning  in  camp. 


b 


224        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

THE  INKTRXrXG  OF  THK  MATH  TI. 

Cooks  arise  when  called  by  the  guard  ami  start  l he  prepara- 
tion  of  breakfast  without  noise.  The  first  sergeant  and  stable 
sergeant  are  usually  awakened  by  one  of  the  cooks  about  half 
an  hour  before  reveille  in  order  that  they  may  complete  their 
toilets  and  breakfast  early  and  be  able  to  devote  all  their 
time  to  supervising  the  details  of  the  morning's  work.  If  the 
officers  desire  to  be  awakened  before  reveille  they  will  notify 
the  first  sergeant  accordingly. 

At  first  call  the  men  turn  out,  perform  their  toilets,  strike 
their  shelter  tents  (unless  it  has  been  directed  to  await  the 
sounding  of  the  general  for  this),  and  make  up  their  pa<-ks. 
The  stable  detail  feeds  the  horses. 

At  the  sounding  of  assembly  immediately  after  reveille  each 
man  must  be- in  his  proper  place  in  ranks,  except  the  kitchen 
and  stable  details  who  are  actually  at  work.  This  assembly 
is  under  arms.  The  first  sergeant  starts  to  call  the  roll  or 
commands  "Report"  at  the  last  note  of  Assembly.  Arms  are 
stacked  before  the  troop  is  dimissed. 

Breakfast  is  served  to  the  troop  immediately  after  roll  call. 
Immediately  after  breakfast  each  man  will  wash  his  mess  kit 
in  the  hot  water  provided  for  that  purpose  at  the  kitchen  and 
will  at  once  pack  the  mess  kit  in  his  saddlebags. 

The  cooks  will  provide  hot  water  for  washing  mess  kits  at 
the  same  time  that  breakfast  is  served. 

Immediately  after  breakfast  the  troop  proceed^  to  the  work 
of  breaking  camp  and  packing  in  accordance  with  a  prear- 
ranged system  similar  to  the  following: 

One  section  assists  the  cooks  in  packing  the  kitchen. 

One  section  strikes  and  folds  the  officers'  tents  and  brings 
them  to  the  kitchen. 

One  section  fills  in  the  sink.  The  sink  should  not  be  filled 
in  earlier  than  is  absolutely  necessary. 

The  stable  detail  police  the  picket  line  and  vicinity. 

One  section  polices  the  camp  within  the  company  police 
limits. 

One  section  is  available  for  possible  details  from  regimental 
headquarters. 

Officers  and  first  sergeant  supervise  the  work. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         225 

A  permanent  assignment  of  squads  to  these  duties 'lightens 
the  labor  and  decreases  the  time  necessary  for  breaking  camp. 

Boots  and  saddles  should  not  be  sounded  before  all  of  the 
above  work  has  been  completed,  and  without  confusion.  Don't 
begin  the  day  by  nagging  your  men,  thereby  making  them 
"  grouchy  "  during  the  march. 

Always  be  most  careful  to  groom  all  parts  of  your  horse 
that  will  be  touched  by  the  equipment  before  you  begin  to 
saddle  up. 

Men  should  not  start  from  camp  thirsty,  but  should  drink 
all  the  water  they  want  immediately  after  breakfast.  All 
canteens  should  be  filled  before  marching. 

Section  2.  Marches,  camps. 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS. 

977.  The  successful  conduct  of  a  march  is  one  of  the  surest 
tests  of  the  ability  and  good  judgment,  not  only  of  the  com- 
mander, but  of  all  subordinate  officers  as  well.  Certain  gen- 
eral principles  and  some  exact  rules  are  laid  down  to  fit  the 
case  of  a  normal  march,  but  tactical  considerations  as  well 
as  the  condition  of  roads  and  weather,  the  necessary  forage, 
water  and  shelter,  sanitation,  and  other  circumstances  render 
a  march  of  any  considerable  body  of  mounted  troops  one 
requiring  the  most  unremitting  attention  to  details  on  the 
part  of  the  commander  and  his  subordinates.  A  successful 
Cavalry  march  whether  in  peace  or  war  is  one  that  places 
the  men  and  horses  at  the  time  and  place  needed  in  the  best 
possible  condition  for  the  service  required.  Failure  of  mounted 
troops  to  successfully  carry  out  a  mission  is  due  as  a  rule  to 
exhaustion  or  injuries  to  the  horses  rather  than  to  the  men. 

The  training  of  officers  of  all  grades  must  be  such  that 
solicitude  for  the  condition  of  horses  on  the  march  is  second 
nature;  constant  effort  should  be  made,  however  severe  the 
work,  to  stimulate  the  pride  of  the  trooper  in  having  and  in 
keeping  his  mount  in  fit  condition;  if  such  stimulus  is  in- 
effective then  the  remedy,  if  the  trooper  is  at  fault,  lies  in 
other  directions.  Under  favorable  conditions  field  service 
366°— 17 8 


226         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

offers  the  best  opportunity  for  conditioning  the  horses  and 
hardening  the  men. 

978.  Preparation:   Responsibility  for  the  timely  ordering  of 
necessary  preparations  preliminary  to  leaving  a  permanent 
camp  or  station  rests  with  the  commander.    All  probable  needs 
of  the  command  for  the  service  on  which  ordered  should  be 
anticipated,  instructions  prepared,  verified,  and  issued  once  in 
complete  form,  and  no  departure  therefrom  permitted.     The 
march  order  proper  for  the  actual  movement  of  the  command 
conforms  to  the  requirements  of  Field  Service  Regulations. 
An  order  or  memorandum  of  service  calls  will  be  issued  and 
distributed  in  ample  time  the  night  before  beginning  a  march 
stating  the  hour  for  reville,  stables,  and  breakfast  and  such 
other  duties  as  can  reasonably  be  anticipated. 

Except  on  account  of  imperative  military  reasons,  Cavalry 
should  not  leave  camp  for  an  hour  or  more  after  daylight.  If 
grazing  is  depended  upon,  this  is  especially  necessary,  since 
horses  as  a  rule  graze  more  freely  in  the  early  morning  when 
rested.  Ample  time  should  be  allowed  after  reville  for  groom- 
ing and  feeding  and  thereafter  for  the  men  to  breakfast.  All 
stable  duties  should  be  done  quietly  and  without  hurry  or  con- 
fusion under  the  immediate  supervision  of  troop  and  squadron 
commanders.  In  each  troop  a  man  is  detailed  to  walk  the 
picket  line  while  grain  is  being  fed,  to  look  out  for  the  horses 
generally  and  to  take  off  the  feed  or  the  nose  bag  of  a  horse 
as  soon  as  he  has  finished  feeding. 

The  signals  for  striking  tents  (the  general),  for  policing, 
saddling,  and  beginning  the  march  should  be  ordered  per- 
sonally by  the  commanding  officer  and  only  when  the  duties 
pertaining  to  the  previous  signal  are  completed. 

979.  The   march,   its   length   and   rate:    The  average   daily 
march  of  a  Cavalry  column  of  the  size  of  a  squadron,  or 
larger,  is  about  25  miles  when  horses  are  in  condition ;  when 
starting  on  long-distance  marches  the  rate  per  day  for  the  first 
few  days  should  be  less  than  20  miles  and  gradually  increased. 
These  rules  may  necessarily  be  modified,  even  when  horses  are 
not  in  fit  condition,  by  reason  of  emergencies,  character  of 
roads  or  weather,  proximity  of  water,  grazing,  etc.,  but,  with 
these  exceptions,  the  question  of  the  length  of  the  daily  march 
is1  one  of  good  judgment  and  experience  on  the  part  of  the 
commander.    The  gait  and  pace  of  the  daily  march  are  in- 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         227 

fluenced  by  both  the  time  the  horse  is  to  carry  the  load  and 
the  distance  to  be  covered.  The  quicker  a  march  can  be  com- 
pleted without  forcing  the  less  the  fatigue  to  both  horse  and 
man.  Where  the  footing  is  good,  the  road  level,  and  other 
considerations  do  not  hamper  the  column,  after  the  first  or  a 
subsequent  halt,  may  advance  first  by  leading  dismounted, 
then  mount  and  walk,  then  trot,  a  short  gallop  (exceptional), 
then  the  trot,  followed  by  the  walk  to  the  next  halt.  No  gait 
is1  to  be  maintained  continuously  long  enough  to  weary  either 
horse  or  man,  neither  must  it  be  changed  too  frequently  in 
long  columns;  but  whatever  pace  or  gait  is  taken  it  should 
conform  to  the  standards  (par.  279).  The  officer  setting  the 
pace  should  occasionally  drop  back  to  observe  its  effect  on  the 
column,  and  veterinarians,  if  present,  should  be  habitually 
utilized  for  this1  purpose. 

The  walk,  if  the  footing  is  good,  should  be  at  the  rate  of 
4  miles  per  hour,  exclusive  of  halts;  the  trot  at  8  miles  per 
hour,  so  as  to  facilitate  posting ;  the  gallop,  a  very  exceptional 
gait  even  for  small  commands,  should  be  not  faster  than  the 
maneuvering  gallop  (par.  236),  and  its  practicability  will  de- 
pend upon  the  training  and  condition  of  the  horses1,  since  on 
long  marches,  unless  accustomed  to  this  gait  with  packed 
saddles,  the  horses  will  soon  break  down. 

Very  rarely,  however,  will  the  conditions  allow  the  regular 
arrangement  of  gaits  indicated  above.  Rolling  country,  with 
ascents  and  descents,  stretches  of  hard  or  stony  road  or  of 
mud,  dust,  or  sand,  crossings  of  streams,  etc.,  will  ordinarily, 
impose  corresponding  changes  of  gait  or  pace  on  each  of  the 
small  elements  of  the  column  as  it  reaches'  them.  To  provide 
for  this  the  troops  in  route  column,  when  so  directed,  take 
greater  distances  than  prescribed  in  order  to  allow  for  closing 
up  at  checks. 

The  commander  must  give  this  matter  unremitting  atten- 
tion, since  normal  route-order  distances  in  column  frequently 
entail  discomfort  to  the  men  and  sometimes  injuries  to  the 
horses  which  might  have  been  avoided. 

Unless  under  exceptional  circumstances,  the  commander  of 
a  marching  column  will  authorize  each  troop  commander  to  so 
regulate  the  gait  and  pace  of  his  troop  as  to  conform  to  that 
next  in  front,  the  gait  and  pace  of  the  leading  troop  being 

Dilated  by  the  commander  himself.     This  results  in  each 


228        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

troop  changing  to  the  trot,  walk,  leading  dismounted,  etc.,  at 
the  same  place  at  which  the  leading  troop  did,  and  although 
regulation  distances  are  frequently  exceeded,  the  tendency  on 
all  stretches  of  good  road  is  to  close  on  the  leading  troop  of 
the  column.  With  care  this  method  of  marching  should  result 
in  enabling  each  troop  in  the  column  to  move  with  almost  the 
same  regularity  and  freedom  from  checks  as  though  it  were 
in  the  lead. 

The  fast  rate  of  march  that  can  be  expected  of  small  detach- 
ments and  of  single  riders  can  not  be  demanded  of  a  long 
Cavalry  column,  and  as  the  eorimiand  increases  in  size  the  rate 
of  march  will  decrease.  The  regulation  gaits  being,  at  the 
walk,  4  miles,  the  trot,  8  miles,  Cavalry  should  be  able  to 
make,  including  halts,  5  miles  per  hour  or  better.  This  rate 
can  be  maintained  for  daily  marches  of  25  miles  under  ordi- 
nary conditions  for  a  week  at  a  time,  after  which  a  day  of 
rest  should  be  allowed  before  continuing  the  march. 

980.  Formations:    The   habitual   formation   for   marches   is 
route  order  in  column  of  fours  (par.  754).     When  the  roads 
are  unsuitable  or  the  command  is  small,  column  of  twos  or 
troopers  is  permissible.     To  economize  road   space  in  large 
commands  double  column  or  parallel  columns  should  be  used 
if  practicable.     Squadrons  in  regiment  and  troops  in  squad- 
rons alternate  in  leading,  the  rule  being  that  the  one  in  front 
one  day  automatically  follows  in  rear  the  next  day. 

981.  Halts:  The  first  half  hour  of  a  march  should  be  made 
at  a  walk  and  the  first  halt  of  10  or  15  minutes  toward  the 
end  of  the  first  hour  after  starting;  it  should,  if  possible,  be 
preceded   by   a   short   trot   in   order   to   make   apparent   any 
faulty  adjustment  of  equipment.     This  halt  gives  an  oppor- 
tunity for  the  horses  to  stale  and  for  the  troopers  to  attend 
to  the  calls  of  nature,  to  tighten  girths,  and  to  adjust  saddles, 
equipment,  and  clothing. 

Other  halts  of  5  to  10  minutes  should  be  made  at  hourly 
intervals,  and,  if  the  march  is  to  be  prolonged  into  the  after- 
noon, a  longer  halt  should  be  made  at  noon,  when  girths  are 
loosened,  bridles  removed,  horses  fed,  and  the  men  eat  their 
lunches. 

An  invariable  rule  on  the  march  and  in  camp  is  to  have  all 
troopers  dismount  promptly  on  halting;  in  other  words,  never 
to  permit  a  man  to  sit  a  moment  in  the  saddle  while  his  horse 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         229 

is  standing  still,  and  under  no  circumstances  to  lounge  in  the 
saddle. 

982.  Watering:    On   the   march   horses   should   be   watered 
whenever  opportunity  occurs,  conforming  as  far  as  practicable 
to  the  rule  of  watering  before  feeding  and  of  removing  the 
bit  when  by  so  doing  the  horse  can  drink  more  freely,  as  when 
the  stream  or  watering  place  is  shallow.     Public  watering 
troughs  should  ordinarily  be  avoided  on  account  of  danger 
from  infection.    The  use  of  buckets  or  of  portable,  collapsible 
canvas  watering  troughs   (articles  of  issue)   will  often  make 
watering  places  otherwise  insufficient  thoroughly  satisfactory. 
On  the  march  and  in  camp  watering  is  always  done  under 
supervision  of  an  officer. 

983.  Feeding:    In  time  of  peace  when  a  regular  supply  of 
grain  and  long  forage  can  be  counted  on,  effort  should  be  made 
to  follow,  as  far  as  practicable,  the  routine  to  which  horses 
have  been  accustomed  in  garrison.     In  time  of  war  regularity 
of  supply  of  forage,  and  especially  of  the  long  forage,  can  not 
be  expected,  and  officers  must  neglect  no  opportunity  of  antici- 
pating the  needs  of  their  animals  when  passing  grain  fields, 
pastures,  or  stacks  of  hay  and  other  fodder.    A  supply  for  the 
night  can  often  be  gathered  and  carried  along  on  the  wagons 
or  it  may  be  tied  up  compactly  with  the  lariat  and  carried  on 
the  horse. 

The  trooper  with  habitual  solicitude  for  his  mount  will,  if 
permitted,  be  prompt  to  remove  the  bits  to  let  his  horse  graze 
(facing  the  wind  in  hot  weather)  at  every  delay  or  check, 
and  he  will  miss  no  chance  to  pick  up  an  extra  feed  of  grain. 

984.  Camps  (see  also  Care  of  Troops,  F.  S.  R.)  :  The  ground 
being  suitable,  a  troop  encamps  in  line,  with  first  sergeant's 
cook  and  officers'  tents  on  one  flank,  the  men's  sink  on  the 
other,  and  with  picket  line  15  yards  in  front  of  and  parallel 
to  the  men's  tents,  the  open  ends  of  the  tents  toward  the 
picket  line.     A  squadron  or  regiment  encamps  in  column  of 
troops  as  above,  but  with  picket  lines  on  the  flank  of  the 
column  on  the  side  opposite  the  cook  and  officers'  tents,  each 
in  prolongation  of  its  own  company   street.     Intervals  and 
distances  should  approximate  those  of  the  normal  semiper- 
manent camps  (F.  S.  R.),  if  space  is  available.    For  a  shelter- 
tent  camp  in  column  of  troops  with  picket  lines  stretched 
between  the  rows  of  tents  the  guidons  which  mark  first  ser- 


230        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

geants'  tents  should  not  be  less  than  15  yards  apart.  The 
squadron  or  regiment  may  encamp  in  line  similarly  to  the 
troop  if  the  ground  is  more  favorable  for  such  form  of  camp, 
but  ordinarily  they  encamp  in  column  of  troops  with  picket 
lines  between  the  rows  of  tents. 

985.  On  nearing  the  end  of  a  day's  march,  the  regimental 
commander  will  send  his  adjutant  and  supply  officer  ahead  to 
locate  the  camp  and  provide  for  the  arrival  of  the  column: 
On  approaching  the  camping  place,  squadron  adjutants  and 
the  guidon  of  each  troop  will  be  summoned  by  the  colonel's 
bugler  sounding  adjutant's  call  followed  by  guidons  (or  other- 
wise according  to  circumstances).  At  these  calls  each  squad- 
ron adjutant  followed  by  the  guidons  of  his  squadron  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  front  and  will  join  the  regimental  ad- 
jutant, who  indicates  to  each  the  ground  which  his  squadron 
is  to  occupy.  If  the  available  ground  is  sufficient  to  encamp 
the  entire  regiment  as  prescribed  in  the  Field  Service  Regula- 
tions, the  regimental  adjutant  causes  the  guidons  to  be 
aligned  and  planted  at  the  prescribed  intervals,  thereby  mark- 
ing the  first  sergeant's  tent  on  the  flank  of  each  troop,  other- 
wise each  squadron  adjutant  has  the  guidons  of  his  squadron 
so  placed  on  the  ground  allotted  to  his  squadron  as  to  conform, 
as  nearly  as  conditions  will  permit,  to  the  normal  camp,  hav- 
ing in  view  the  comfort  of  horses  and  men  and  convenience  to 
supplies.  The  object  in  marking  off  the  camp  as  prescribed, 
by  establishing  the  guidons  before  the  arrival  of  the  column, 
is  to  relieve  the  horse  of  his  rider  and  pack  as  soon  as  possible. 
To  further  minimize  delay,  commanding  officers,  unless  under 
exceptional  circumstances,  wTill,  immediately  on  reaching  the 
ground,  direct  majors  to  dismiss  their  squadrons  and  have 
their  troop  commanders  proceed  directly  to  their  guidons,  dis- 
mount at  once,  and  pitch  camp. 

The  foregoing  principles  will  also,  in  so  far  as  applicable, 
be  enforced  by  commanders  of  all  units  smaller  than  the 
regiment. 

The  regimental  supply  officer  has  the  drivers  of  the  baggage 
section  of  the  regimental  train  go  direct  to  their  proper  troops 
and  unhitch.  Ordinarily,  for  convenience  in  a  one-night 
camp  or  bivouac  the  wagons  of  the  baggage  section  are  left 
between  the  cook  tents  and  the  troop  officers'  tents,  the  supply 
section  being  parked  outside  by  itself.  After  arrival  at  the 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         231 

camping  place  a  guard  is  at  once  placed  over  the  source  of 
supply  of  drinking  water. 

Before  pitching  tents  the  rifles  are  stacked,  sabers,  rolls, 
saddle  bags,  and  lariats  removed  from  the  saddles,  girths 
loosened  (the  saddles  being  left  on  until  backs  are  cooled), 
and  the  horses  either  linked  by  section,  in  circle  (par.  428), 
or  coupled  head  and  tail  (par.  427),  and  a  man  detailed  to 
watch  them  until  tents  are  pitched. 

After  pitching  tents,  stacks  are  broken,  rifles  placed  in  the 
tents,  horses  unsaddled,  unbridled,  and  tied  on  the  line  or 
herded,  saddles  placed  in  a  row  in  front  of  the  tents  and 
sadle  blankets  spread  on  them  to  dry,  fuel  secured,  sinks  dug, 
and  other  necessary  preparations  made  for  the  night.  The 
use  of  saddle  blankets  as  bedding  by  the  men  will  be  permitted 
only  under  very  exceptional  conditions,  and  special  care  must 
be  exercised  to  keep  them  free  from  dirt  and  burs.  During 
evening  stables,  troop  commanders,  accompanied,  if  practicable, 
by  a  veterinarian,  inspect  the  backs  and  feet  of  their  horses, 
and  in  the  morning  they  permit  no  trooper  who  is  not  spe- 
cially authorized,  to  saddle  his  horse  before  the  call  boots  and 
saddles,  or  to  mount  before  the  command  for  so  doing. 

986.  Herding:    In  a  hostile   country   camps  should  be   se- 
lected, if  possible,  where  grazing  is  good  and  beyond  rifle 
range  of  cover  for  an  enemy.     Orders  are  issued  as  to  places 
of  assembly,  and  in  each  troop  men  are  detailed  beforehand 
to  go  among  the  horses  and  quiet  them  in  case  of  a  night 
alarm.     In  the  event  of  a  stampede,  men  should  mount  the 
fastest  animals  within  reach,  ride  ahead  of  the  herd,  and  lead 
it  back  to  camp.    Sometimes  the  sounding  of  stable  and  water 
call  will  prevent  or  check  a  stampede. 

In  case  it  is  necessary  to  graze  the  horses  in  an  enemy's 
country,  they  are  sent  out  to  herd  under  charge  of  an  officer 
as  soon  as  possible  after  making  camp,  they  being  taken 
during  daylight  as  far  away  as  is  safe  so  as  to  keep  the  grass 
nearer  camp  for  the  night. 

987.  Forced  and  night  marches:  To  conduct  a  rapid  march 
of  a  command  of  any  magnitude  successfully,  horses  must  be 
in  condition  (pars.  950,  959)  and  men  must  have  been  trained 

(par.  175)  ;  if  either  is  lacking,  the  daily  marches  at  first 
must  be  short. 


232        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

A  night  march,  being  slow  and  fatiguing  to  horses  and  men, 
is  seldom  undertaken  unless  as  a  forced  march  to  seize  a 
position  or  to  surprise  an  enemy  by  attacking  him  at  dawn. 
In  a  forced  march  frequently  the  gait,  if  the  footing  is  favor- 
able, and  always  the  number  of  hours  in  the  saddle,  are  in- 
creased. Under  favorable  conditions  a  rate  of  50  miles  in  24 
hours  for  three  or  four  days  can  be  maintained.  During  such 
a  march,  in  addition  to  the  usual  hourly  halts,  a  halt  of  2 
hours  is  made  toward  the  end  of  the  first  half  of  each  day's 
march,  during  which  bits  are  removed,  horses  unsaddled, 
watered,  fed,  and  their  legs  hand  rubbed ;  the  rate  should  be 
about  5  miles  an  hour,  exclusive  of  halts. 

Under  very  favorable  conditions  a  single  march  of  100 
miles  can  be  made  in  from  24  to  30  hours.  During  a  march  of 
this  character,  in  addition  to  the  usual  hourly  halts,  halts  of 
2  hours  are  made  toward  the  end  of  the  first  and  second  thirds 
of  the  march,  during  which  bits  are  removed,  the  horses 
unsaddled,  watered,  fed,  and  their  legs  hand  rubbed ;  the  rate 
of  march  should  be  from  5  to  6  miles  an  hour,  exclusive  of 
halts. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 
TARGET  PRACTICE. 


Section  1.  Preliminary  training  in  marksmanship. 

Effective  rifle  fire  is  generally  what  counts  most  in  battle. 
To  have  effective  rifle  fire,  the  men  on  the  firing  line  must  be 
able  to  HIT  what  they  are  ordered  to  shoot  at.  There  is  no 
man  who  can  not  be  taught  how  to  shoot.  It  is  not  necessary 
or  even  desirable  to  begin  instruction  by  firing  on  a  rifle  range. 
A  perfectly  green  recruit  who  has  never  fired  a  rifle  may  be 
made  into  a  good  shot  by  a  little  instruction  and  some  pre- 
liminary drills  and  exercises. 

Before  a  man  goes  on  the  range  to  fire  it  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary that  he  should  know — 

1.  How  to  set  the  rear  sight. 

2.  How  to  sight  or  aim. 

3.  How  to  squeeze  the  trigger. 

4.  How  to  hold  the  rifle  in  all  positions. 

If  he  does  not  know  these  things  it  is  worse  than  useless  for 
him  to  fire.  He  will  not  improve;  the  more  he  shoots  the 
worse  he  will  shoot,  and  it  will  become  more  difficult  to  teach 
him. 

Section  2.  Sight  adjustment. 

Men  must  be  able  to  adjust  their  sights  correctly  and 
quickly.  An  error  in  adjustment  so  small  that  one  can 
scarcely  see  it  on  the  sight  leaf  is  sufficient  to  cause  a  miss 
at  an  enemy  at  500  yards  and  over. 

Notice  your  rear  sight.  When  the  leaf  is  laid  down  the  bat- 
tle sight  appears  on  top.  This  sight  is  set  for  547  yards  and  is 
not  adjustable.  When  the  leaf  is  raised  four  sights  come  into 
view.  The  extreme  range  sight  for  2,850  yards  at  the  top  of 

233 


234         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

the  leaf  is  seldom  used.  The  open  sight  at  the  upper  edge  of 
the  drift  slide  is  adjustable  from  1,400  to  2,750  yards.  To  set 
it  the  upper  edge  of  the  slide  is  made  to  correspond  with  the 
range  reading  on  the  leaf,  and  the  slide  is  then  clamped  with 
the  slide  screw.  This  sight  also  is  seldom  used.  The  open 
sight  at  the  bottom  of  the  triangular  opening  in  the  drift  slide 
is  adjustable  from  100  to  2,450  yards.  To  set  it  the  index  line 
at  the  lower  corners  of  the  triangle  is  set  opposite  the  range 
graduation  on  the  leaf  and  the  slide  clamped.  This  and  the 
peep  sight  just  below  it  are  the  sights  most  commonly  used. 
To  set  the  peep  sight,  the  index  lines  on  either  side  of  the  peep- 
hole are  set  opposite  the  range  desired  and  the  slide  clamped. 

Notice  the  scales  for  the  various  ranges  on  either  side  of 
the  face  of  the  leaf.  The  odd-numbered  hundreds  of  yards 
are  on  the  right  and  the  even  on  the  left.  The  line  below  the 
number  is  the  index  line  for  that  range.  Thus  to  set  the  sight 
for  500  yards  the  index  line  of  the  slide  is  brought  in  exact 
line  with  the  line  on  the  leaf  below  the  figure  5  and  the  slide 
clamped.  To  set  for  550  yards  the  index  lines  of  the  slide  are 
set  halfway  between  the  index  lines  on  the  leaf  below  the 
figure  5  on  the  right  side  and  the  figure  6  on  the  left  side. 
Look  at  your  sight  carefully  when  setting  it  and  take  great 
pains  to  get  it  exact.  An  error  in  setting  the  wridth  of  one  of 
the  lines  on  the  leaf  will  cause  an  error  of  about  8  inches  in 
where  your  bullet  will  strike  at  500  yards. 

The  wind  gauge  is  adjusted  by  means  of  the  windage  screw 
at  the  right  front  end  of  the  base  of  the  sight.  Each  gradua- 
tion on  the  wind-gauge  scale  is  called  a  "point."  For  con- 
venience in  adjusting  the  line  of  each  third  point  on  the  scale 
is  longer  than  the  others.  If  you  turn  the  windage  screw  so 
that  the  movable  base  moves  to  the  right,  you  are  taking  right 
windage,  which  will  cause  your  rifle  to  shoot  more  to  the  right. 

It  is  seldom  that  a  rifle  will  shoot  correctly  to  the  point  aimed 
at  at  a  given  range  with  the  sights  adjusted  exactly  to  the 
scale  graduations  for  that  range.  If  your  sight  is  not  cor- 
rectly adjusted  for  your  shooting  and  you  wish  to  move  it 
slightly  to  make  it  correct,  remember  to  move  it  in  the  direc- 
tion you  wish  your  shot  to  hit.  If  you  wish  to  shoot  higher 
raise  your  sight.  If  to  the  right,  move  the  wind  gauge  to  the 
right.  Always  move  your  sight  the  correct  amount  in  accord- 
ance with  the  following  table : 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         235 
Section  3.  Table  of  sight  corrections. 

Showing  to  what  extent  the  point  of  impact  is  moved  by  a 
change  of  25  yards  in  elevation  or  1  point  in  windage. 


Range. 

Correction 
by  a  change 
in  elevation 
of  25  yards. 

Correction 
by  a  change 
in  windage 
of  1  point. 

Yards. 
100 
200 
300 
400 
500 
600 
800 
1,000 

Inches. 
0.72 
1.62 
2.79 
4.29 
6.22 
8.59 
15.43 
25.08 

Inches. 
4 
8 
12 
16 
20 
24 
32 
40 

An  easy  rule  to  remember  the  windage  correction  by  is :  "A 
change  of  1  point  of  wind  changes  the  point  of  impact  4  inches 
for  every  100  yards  of  range." 

Copy  this  table  and  take  it  to  the  range  with  you. 

Example  of  sight  adjustment :  Suppose  you  are  firing  at  500 
yards.  The  first  two  or  three  shots  show  you  that  your  shots 
are  hitting  about  a  foot  below  and  a  foot  to  the  right  of  the 
center  of  the  bull's-eye.  From  the  above  table  you  will  see 
that  if  you  wrill  raise  your  sight  50  yards  and  move  the  wind 
gauge  half  a  point  to  the  left  the  rifle  will  be  sighted  so  that 
if  you  aim  correctly  the  bullets  will  hit  well  inside  the  bull's- 
eye. 

Section  4.  Aiming. 

Open  sight:  Always  align  your  sights  with  the  front  sight 
squarely  in  the  middle  of  the  "  U  "  or  notch  of  the  rear  sight, 
and  the  top  of  the  front  sight  even  with  the  upper  corners  of 
the  "U."  (See  fig.  1.)  All  the  sights  on  the  rifle  except  the 
peep  sight  are  open  sights. 

Peep  sight:  Always  center  the  tip  of  the  front  sight  in  the 
center  of  the  peephole  when  aiming  with  this  sight.  (See 
fig.  2.) 


236         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Always  aim  below  the  bull's-eye.  Never  let  your  front 
sight  appear  to  touch  the  bull's  eye  in  aiming.  Try  to  see  the 
same  amount  of  white  target  between  the  top  of  the  front 
sight  and  the  bottom  of  the  bull's-eye  each  time.  The  eye 
must  be  focused  on  the  bull's-eye  or  mark  and  not  on  the  front 
or  rear  sight. 

Look  at  figures  1  and  2  until  your  eye  retains  the  memory 
of  them,  then  try  to  duplicate  the  picture  every  time  you  aim. 
Aim  consistently,  always  the  same.  Never  change  your  aim ; 
change  your  sight  adjustment  if  your  shots  are  not  hitting  in 
the  right  place.  Many  shots  have  been  wasted  when  the  point 


FIGURE  1. 

of  aim  has  been  moved  to  what  the  firer  thought  was  the  nec- 
essary change  on  the  target,  instead  of  changing  the  sights 
according  to  the  table  on  page  191. 

Section  5.  Battle  sight. 

The  battle  sight  is  the  open  sight  seen  when  the  leaf  is  laid 
flat.  It  is  adjusted  for  a  range  of  547  yards.  It  is  intended 
to  be  used  in  battle  when  you  get  nearer  to  the  enemy  than  600 
yards.  Always  aim  at  the  belt  of  a  standing  enemy,  or  just 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         237 

below  him  if  he  is  kneeling,  sitting,  or  lying.  On  the  target 
range  this  sight  is  used  for  rapid  fire.  With  it  the  rifle  shoots 
about  2  feet  high  at  ranges  between  200  and  400  yards,  so  you 
must  aim  below  the  figure  on  the  target  "  D."  Find  out  in 
your  instruction  practice  just  how  much  you  must  aim  below 
to  hit  the  figure. 

Section  6.  Trigger  squeeze. 

Use  the  first  joint  of  the  forefinger  to  squeeze  the  trigger. 
It  is  the  most  sensitive  and  best  controlled  portion  of  the  body. 


FIGURE  2. 

As  you  place  the  rifle  to  your  shoulder,  squeeze  the  trigger  so 
as  to  pull  it  back  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch,  thus  taking  up 
the  safety  portion  or  slack  of  the  pull.  Then  contract  the 
trigger  finger  gradually,  slowly  and  steadily  increasing  the 
pressure  on  the  trigger  while  the  aim  is  being  perfected.  Con- 
tinue the  gradual  increase  of  pressure  so  that  when  the  aim 
has  become  exact  the  additional  pressure  required  to  release 
the  point  of  the  sear  can  be  given  almost  insensibly  and  with- 


238         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

out  causing  any  deflection  of  the  rifle.  Put  absolutely  all  your 
mind  and  will  power  into  holding  the  rifle  steady  and  squeez- 
ing the  trigger  off  without  disturbing  the  aim.  Practice 
squeezing  the  trigger  in  this  way  every  time  you  have  your 
rifle  in  your  hand  until  you  can  surely  and  quickly  do  it  with- 
out a  suspicion  of  a  jerk. 

By  practice  the  soldier  becomes  familiar  with  the  trigger 
squeeze  of  his  rifle,  and  knowing  this  he  is  able  to  judge  at 
any  time,  within  limits,  what  additional  pressure  is  required 
for  its  discharge.  By  constant  repetition  of  this  exercise  he 
should  be  able  finally  to  squeeze  the  trigger  to  a  certain  point 
beyond  which  the  slightest  movement  will  release  the  sear. 
Having  squeezed  the  trigger  to  this  point  the  aim  is  cor- 
rected, and  when  true  the  additional  pressure  is  applied  and 
the  discharge  follows  and  the  bullet  flies  true  to  the  mark. 

Section  7.  Firing  positions. 

When  in  ranks  at  close  order  the  positions  are  those  de- 
scribed in  the  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations.  When  in  extended 
order  or  when  firing  alone  these  positions  may  be  modified 
somewhat  to  better  suit  the  individual.  The  following  re- 
marks on  the  various  positions  are  offered  as1  suggestions 
whereby  steady  positions  may  be  learned  by  the  soldier. 

Standing  position:  Face  the  target,  then  execute  right  half 
face.  Plant  the  feet  about  12  inches  apart.  As  you  raise  the 
rifle  to  the  shoulder  lean  very  slightly  backward  just  enough 
to  preserve  the  perfect  balance  on  both  feet  which  the  raising 
of  the  rifle  has  somewhat  disturbed.  Do  not  lean  far  back 
and  do  not  lean  forward  at  all.  If  your  body  is  out  of  balance, 
it  will  be  under  strain  and  you  will  tremble.  The  right  elbow 
should  be  at  about  the  height  of  the  shoulder.  The  left  hand 
should  grasp  well  around  the  stock  and  handguard  in  front 
of  the  rear  sight,  and  the  left  elbow  should  be  almost  directly 
under  the  rifle.  The  right  hand  should  do  more  than  half  the 
work  of  holding  the  rifle  up  and  against  the  shoulder,  the  left 
hand  only  steadying  and  guiding  the  piece.  Do  not  try  to 
meet  the  recoil ;  let  the  whole  body  move  back  with  it.  Do 
not  be  afraid  to  press  the  jaw  hard  against  the  stock;  this 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         239 

steadies  the  position,  and  the  head  goes  back  with  the  recoil 
and  insures  that  your  face  is  not  hurt. 

Kneeling  position:  Assume  the  position  very  much  as  de- 
scribed in  the  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations.  Sit  on  the  right 
heel.  The  right  knee  should  point  directly  to  the  right ;  that 
is,  along  the  firing  line.  The  point  of  the  left  elbow  should 
rest  over  the  left  knee.  There  is  a  flat  place  under  the  elbow 
which  fits  a  flat  place  on  the  knee  and  makes  a  solid  rest. 
Lean  the  body  well  forward.  This  position  is  uncomfortable 
until  practiced,  when  it  quickly  ceases  to  be  uncomfortable. 

Sitting  position:  Sit  down  half  faced  to  the  right,  feet  from 
6  to  8  inches  apart,  knees  bent,  right  knee  slightly  higher  than 
the  left,  left  leg  pointed  toward  the  target.  Rest  both  elbows 
on  the  knees,  hands  grasping  the  piece  the  same  as  in  the  prone 
position.  This  is  a  very  steady  position,  particularly  if  holes 
can  be  found  or  made  in  the  ground  for  the  heels. 

Prone  position  and  use  of  the  gun  sling:  To  adjust  the  sling 
for  firing,  unhook  'the  straight  strap  of  the  sling  and  let  it  out 
as  far  as  it  will  go.  Adjust  the  loop  so  that  when  stretched 
along  the  bottom  of  the  stock  its  rear  end  (bight)  comes  about 
opposite  the  comb  of  the  stock.  A  small  man  needs  a  longer 
loop  than  a  tall  man.  Lie  down  facing  at  an  angle  of  about 
60°  to  the  right  of  the  direction  of  the  target.  Spread  the  legs 
as  wide  apart  as  they  will  go  with  comfort.  Thrust  the  left 
arm  through  between  the  rifle  and  the  sling,  and  then  back 
through  the  loop  of  the  sling,  securing  the  loop,  by  means  of 
the  keeper,  around  the  upper  left  arm  as  high  up  as  it  will  go. 
Pass  the  hand  under  and  then  over  the  sling  from  the  left  side, 
and  grasp  the  stock  and  handguard  just  in  rear  of  the  lower 
band.  Raise  the  right  elbow  off  the  ground,  rolling  slightly 
over  on  the  left  side.  Place  the  butt  to  the  shoulder  and  roll 
back  into  position,  clamping  the  rifle  hard  and  steady  in  the 
firing  position.  The  rifle  should  rest  deep  down  in  the  palm  of 
the  left  hand  with  fingers  almost  around  the  handguard.  Shift 
the  left  palm  a  little  to  the  right  or  left  until  the  rifle  stands 
perfectly  upright  (no  cant)  without  effort.  The  left  elbow 
should  rest  on  the  ground  directly  under  the  rifle,  and  right 
elbow  on  the  ground  about  5  inches  to  the  right  of  a  point  di- 
rectly under  the  stock.  In  this  position  the  loop  of  the  sling, 
starting  at  the  lower  band,  passes.  tQ  the  right  Qf  the  left  wrist, 


240        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

and  thence  around  the  left  upper  arm.  The  loop  should  be  so 
tight  that  about  50  pounds  tension  is  placed  on  it  when  the 
position  is  assumed.  This  position  is  uncomfortable  until  prac- 
ticed, when  it  quickly  ceases  to  be  uncomfortable.  It  will  be 
steadier  if  small  holes  can  be  found  or  dug  in  the  ground  for 
the  elbows.  In  this  position  the  sling  binds  the  left  forearm  to 
the  rifle  and  to  the  ground  so  that  it  forms  a  dead  rest  for  the 
rifle,  with  a  universal  joint,  the  wrist,  at  its  upper  end.  Also 
the  rifle  is  so  bound  to  the  shoulder  that  the  recoil  is  not  felt 
at  all.  This  is  the  steadiest  of  all  firing  positions. 

The  gun  sling  can  also  be  used  in  this  manner  with  advan- 
tage in  the  other  positions. 

Section  8.  Calling  the  shot. 

It  is  evident  that  the  sights  should  be  so  adjusted  at  each 
range  that  the  rifle  will  hit  where  you  aim.  In  order  to  der 
terniine  that  the  sights  are  so  adjusted,  it  is  necessary  that 
you  shall  know  each  time  just  where  you  were  aiming  on  the 
target  at  the  instant  your  rifle  was  discharged.  If  you  know 
this  and  your  rifle  hits  this  point,  your  rifle  is  correctly  sighted. 
If  your  shot  does  not  hit  near  this  point,  you  should  change 
your  sight  adjustment  in  accordance  with  the  table  of  sight 
corrections  on  page  191. 

No  man  can  hold  absolutely  steady.  The  rifle  trembles 
slightly,  and  the  sights  seem  to  wabble  and  move  over  the  tar- 
get. You  try  to  squeeze  off  the  last  ounce  of  the  trigger 
squeeze  just  as  the  sights  move  to  the  desired  alignment  under 
the  bull's-eye.  At  this  instant,  just  before  the  recoil  blots 
out  a  view  of  the  sights  and  target,  you  should  catch  with  your 
eye  a  picture,  as  it  were,  of  just  where  on  the  target  your 
sights  were  aligned,  and  call  to  yourself  or  to  the  coach  this 
point.  This  point  is  where  your  shot  should  strike  if  your 
sights  are  correctly  adjusted  and  if  you  have  squeezed  the 
trigger  without  disturbing  your  aim.  Until  a  man  can  call  his 
shots  he  is  not  a  good  shot,  for  he  can  never  tell  if  his  rifle  is 
sighted  right  or  not,  or  if  a  certain  shot  is  a  good  one  or  only 
the  result  of  luck. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         241 
Section  9.  Coordination. 

Good  marksmanship  consists  in  learning  thoroughly  the  de- 
tails of — 

Holding  the  rifle  in  the  various  positions. 

Aiming. 

Squeezing  the  trigger. 

Calling  the  shot. 

Adjusting  the  sights. 

And  when  these  have  been  mastered  in  detail  then  the  co- 
ordination of  them  in  the  act  of  firing.  This1  coordination  con- 
sists in  putting  absolutely  all  of  one's  will  power  into  an  effort 
to  hold  the  rifle  steadily,  especially  in  getting  it  to  steady 
down  when  the  aim  is  perfected ;  in  getting  the  trigger 
squeezed  off  easily  at  the  instant  the  rifle  is  steadiest  and 
the  aim  perfected ;  in  calling  the  shot  at  this  instant ;  and  if 
the  shot  does  not  hit  near  the  point  called,  then  in  adjusting 
the  sights  the  correct  amount  so  that  the  rifle  will  be 
sighted  to  hit  where  you  aim. 

Section  10.  Advice  to  riflemen. 

Before  going  to  the  range  clean  the  rifle  carefully,  removing 
every  trace  of  oil  from  the  bore.  This  can  best  be  done  with  a 
rag  saturated  with  gasoline.  Put  a  light  coat  of  oil  on  the 
bolt  and  cams.  Blacken  the  front  and  rear  sights  with  smoke 
from  a  burning  candle  or  camphor  or  with  liquid  sight  black. 

Look  through  the  bore  and  see  that  there  is  no  obstruction 
in  it. 

Keep  the  rifle  off  the  ground ;  the  stock  may  absorb  damp- 
ness, the  sights  may  be  injured,  or  the  muzzle  tilled  with  dirt. 

Watch  your  hold  carefully  and  be  sure  to  know  where  the 
line  of  sight  is  at  discharge.  It  is  only  in  this  way  that  the 
habit  of  calling  shots,  which  is  essential  to  good  shooting,  can 
be  acquired. 

Study  the  conditions,  adjust  the  sling,  and  set  the  sight 
before  going  to  the  firing  point. 

Look  at  the  sight  adjustment  before  each  shot  and  see  that  it 
has  not  changed. 
366°— 17 9 


242         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

If  sure  of  your  hold  and  if  the  hit  is  not  as  called,  determine 
and  make  FULL  correction  in  elevation  and  windage  to  put 
the  next  shot  in  the  bull's-eye. 

Keep  a  written  record  of  the  weather  conditions  and  the 
corresponding  elevation  and  windage  for  each  day's  firing. 

Less  elevation  will  generally  be  required  on  hot  days;  on 
wet  days ;  in  a  bright  sunlight ;  with  a  6  o'clock  wind ;  or  with 
a  cold  barrel. 

More  elevation  will  generally  be  required  on  cold  days;  on 
very  dry  days ;  with  a  12  o'clock  wind ;  with  a  hot  barrel ; 
in  a  dull  or  cloudy  light. 

The  upper  band  should  not  be  tight  enough  to  bind  the 
barrel. 

Do  not  put  a  cartridge  into  the  chamber  until  ready  to  fire. 
Do  not  place  cartridges  in  the  sun.  They  will  get  hot  and 
shoot  high. 

Do  not  rub  the  eyes — especially  the  sighting  eye. 

In  cold  weather  warm  the  trigger  hand  before  shooting. 

After  shooting,  clean  the  rifle  carefully  and  then  oil  it  to 
prevent  rust. 

Have  a  strong,  clean  cloth  that  will  not  tear  and  jam,  prop- 
erly cut  to  size,  for  use  in  cleaning. 

Always  clean  the  rifle  from  the  breech,  using  a  brass  clean- 
ing rod  when  available.  An  injury  to  the  rifling  at  the  muzzle 
causes  the  piece  to  shoot  very  irregularly. 

Regular  physical  exercise,  taken  systematically,  will  cause  a 
marked  improvement  in  shooting. 

Frequent  practice  of  the  "  Position  and  aiming  drills  "  and 
gallery  practice  are  of  the  greatest  help  in  preparing  for  shoot- 
ing on  the  range. 

Rapid  firing:  Success  in  rapid  firing  depends  upon  catching 
a  quick  and  accurate  aim,  holding  the  piece  firmly  and  evenly, 
and  in  squeezing  the  trigger  without  a  jerk. 

In  order  to  give  as  much  time  as  possible  for  aiming  accu- 
rately, the  soldier  must  practice  taking  position,  loading  with 
the  clip,  and  working  the  bolt,  so  that  no  time  will  be  lost  in 
these  operations.  With  constant  practice  all  these  movements 
may  be  made  quickly  and  without  false  motions. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         243 

When  the  bolt  handle  is  raised,  it  must  be  done  with  enough 
force  to  start  the  shell  from  the  chamber ;  and  when  the  bolt 
is  pulled  back  it  must  be  with  sufficient  force  to  throw  the 
empty  shell  well  away  from  the  chamber  and  far  enough  to 
engage  the  next  cartridge. 

In  loading,  use  force  enough  to  load  each  cartridge  with  one 
motion. 

The  aim  must  be  caught  quickly,  and,  once  caught,  must  be 
held  and  the  trigger  squeezed  steadily.  Rapid  firing,  as  far  as 
holding,  aim,  and  squeezing  the  trigger  are  concerned,  should 
be  done  with  all  the  precision  of  slow  fire.  The  gain  in  time 
should  be  in  getting  ready  to  fire,  loading,  and  working  the 
bolt. 

Firing  with  rests :  In  order  that  the  shooting  may  be  uniform 
the  piece  should  always  be  rested  at  the  same  point. 

Section  11.  The  course  in  small-arms  firing. 

The  course  in  small-arms  firing  consists  of — 
(a)  Nomenclature  and  care  of  rifle. 
(6)   Sighting  drills. 

(c)  Position  and  aiming  drills. 

(d)  Deflection  and  elevation  correction  drills. 

(e)  Gallery  practice. 

(/)  Estimating  distance  drill. 

(g)  Individual  known-distance  firing,  instruction  practice. 

(h)  Individual  known-distance  firing,  record  practice. 

(i)  Long-distance  practice. 

I/)   Practice  with  telescopic  sights. 

(k)   Instruction  combat  practice. 

(?)  Combat  practice. 

Iff*)  Proficiency  test. 

The  regulations  governing  these  are  found  in  Small  Arms 
Firing  Manual,  1913:  There  should  be  several  copies  of  this 
manual  in  every  troop. 


Section  12.  Targets. 

The  accompanying  plates  show  the  details  and  size  of 
targets: 


the 


V 

-r-r 
i 

I 


i 

i 
t 

*-i 


TARGET  A» 


TARGET  B. 


J.. 


i ,^- 


T2BOETC 


—  g — i 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


245 


r 


TARGET  D, 
Section  13.  Pistol  and  revolver  practice.1 

135.2  Nomenclature  and  care  of  the  weapon;   handling  and 
precautions  against  accidents. — The  soldier  will  first  be  taught 

1  Whenever  in  these  regulations  the  word  "  pistol  "  appears  the  regu- 
lation applies  with  equal  force  to  the  revolver,  if  applicable  to  that 
weapon. 

2  The    numbers    refer    to    paragraphs    in    the    Small    Arms    Firing 
Manual,  1913. 


246        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

the  nomenclature  of  those  parts  of  the  weapon  necessary  to  an 
understanding  of  its  action  and  use  and  the  proper  measures 
for  its  care  and  preservation.  Ordnance  pamphlets  Nos.  1866 
(description  of  the  Colt's  automatic  pistol),  1919,  and  1927  (de- 
scriptions of  the  Colt's  revolver,  calibers  .38  and  .45,  respec- 
tively), contain  full  information  on  this  subject,  and  are  fur- 
nished to  organizations  armed  with  these  weapons. 

Careless  handling  of  the  pistol  or  revolver  is  the  cause  of 
many  accidents  and  results  in  broken  parts  of  the  mechanism. 
The  following  rules  will,  if  followed,  prevent  much  trouble  of 
this  character: 

(a)  On  taking  the  pistol  from  the  armrack  or  holster,  take 
out  the  magazine  and  see  that  it  is  empty  before  replacing  it ; 
then  draw  back  the  slide  and  make  sure  that  the  piece  is  un- 
loaded. Observe  the  same  precaution  after  practice  on  the 
target  range,  and  again  before  replacing  the  pistol  in  the 
holster  or  in  the  armrack.  When  taking  the  revolver  from  the 
armrack  or  holster  and  before  returning  it  to  the  same,  open 
the  cylinder  and  eject  empty  shells  and  cartridges.  Before  be- 
ginning a  drill  and  upon  arriving  on  the  range  observe  the 
same  precaution. 

(&)  Neither  load  nor  unlock  the  weapon  until  the  moment  of 
firing,  nor  until  a  run  in  the  mounted  course  is  started. 

(c)  Always  keep  the  pistol  or  revolver  in  the  position  of 
41  Raise  pistol"    (par.  147,  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations,  1916), 
except  when  it  is  pointed  at  the  target.     (The  position  of 
"  Lower  pistol  "  is  authorized  for  mounted  firing  only. ) 

(d)  Do  not  place  the  weapon  on  the  ground  where  sand  or 
earth  can  enter  the  bore  or  mechanism. 

(e)  Before  loading  the  pistol,  draw  back  the  slide  and  look 
through  the  bore  to  see  that  it  is  free  from  obstruction.    Before 
loading  the  revolver,  open  the  cylinder  and  look  through  the 
bore  to  see  that  it  is  free  from  obstruction.     When  loading 
the  pistol  for  target  practice  place  five  cartridges  in  the  maga- 
zine and  insert  the  magazine  in  the  handle;  draw  back  the 
slide  and  insert  the  first  cartridge  in  the  chamber  and  carefully 
lock  the  hammer. 

In  loading  the  revolver  place  five  cartridges  in  the  cylinder 
and  let  the  hammer  down  on  the  empty  chamber. 

(/)  Whenever  the  pistol  is  being  loaded  or  unloaded,  the 
muzzle  must  be  kept  up. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        247 

(g)  Do  not  point  the  weapon  in  any  direction  where  an  acci- 
dental discharge  might  do  harm. 

(h)  After  loading  do  not  cock  the  revolver  or  unlock  the 
pistol  until  ready  to  fire. 

(i)  Keep  the  working  parts  properly  lubricated. 

136.  Position,  dismounted:   Stand  firmly  on  both  feet,  body 
perfectly  balanced  and  erect  and  turned  at  such  an  angle  as  is 
most  comfortable  when  the  arm  is  extended  toward  the  target ; 
the  feet  far  enough  apart  to  insure  firmness  and  steadiness  of 
position  (about  8  to  10  inches)  ;  weight  of  body  borne  equally 
upon  both  feet;  right  arm  fully  extended,  left  arm  hanging 
naturally. 

REMARKS. — The  right  arm  may  be  slightly  bent,  although  the 
difficulty  of  holding  the  pistol  uniformly  and  of  keeping  it  as 
well  as  the  forearm  in  the  same  vertical  plane  makes  this 
objectionable. 

137.  The  grip:  Grasp  the  stock  as  high  as  possible  with  the 
thumb  and  last  three  fingers,  the  forefinger  alongside  the  trig- 
ger guard,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  stock.     The  barrel, 
hand,  and  forearm  should  be  as  nearly  in  one  line  as  possible 
when  the  weapon  is  pointed  toward  the  target.     The  grasp 
should  not  be  so  tight  as  to  cause  tremors  of  the  hand  or  arm 
to  be  communicated  to  the  weapon,  but  should  be  firm  enough 
to  avoid  losing  the  grip  when  the  recoil  takes  place. 

REMARKS. — The  force  of  recoil  of  the  pistol  or  revolver  is 
exerted  in  a  line  above  the  hand  which  grasps  the  stock.  The 
lower  the  stock  is  grasped  the  greater  will  be  the  movement  or 
"jump"  of  the  muzzle  caused  by  the  recoil.  This  not  only 
results  in  a  severe  strain  upon  the  wrist  but  in  loss  of 
accuracy. 

If  the  hand  be  placed  so  that  the  grasp  is  on  one  side  of  the 
stock,  the  recoil  will  cause  a  rotary  movement  of  the  weapon 
toward  the  opposite  side. 

The  releasing  of  the  sear  causes  a  slight  movement  of  the 
muzzle,  generally  to  the  left.  The  position  of  the  thumb  along 
the  stock  overcomes  much  of  this  movement.  The  soldier 
should  be  encouraged  to  practice  this  method  of  holding  until 
it  becomes  natural. 

To  do  uniform  shooting  the  weapon  must  be  held  with 
exactly  the  same  grip  for  each  shot.  Not  only  must  the  hand 


248        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

grasp  the  stock  at  the  same  point  for  each  shot,  but  the  tension 
of  the  grip  must  be  uniform. 

138.  (a)   The  trigger  squeeze:  The  trigger  must  be  squeezed 
in  the  same  manner  as  in  rifle  firing.     (See  p.  193.)     The 
pressure  of  the  forefinger  on  the  trigger  should  be  steadily 
increased  and  should  be  straight  back,  not  sideways.     The 
pressure  should   continue   to  that  point   beyond   which   the 
slightest  movement  will  release  the  sear.    Then,  when  the  aim 
is  true,  the  additional  pressure  is  applied  and  the  pistol  fired. 

Only  by  much  practice  can  the  soldier  become  familiar  with 
the  trigger  squeeze.  This  is  essential  to  accurate  shooting.  It 
is  the  most  important  detail  to  master  in  pistol  or  revolver 
shooting. 

(&)  Self -cocking  action. — The  force  required  to  squeeze  the 
trigger  of  the  revolver  when  the  self-cocking  device  is  used  is 
considerably  greater  than  with  the  single  action.  To  accustom 
a  soldier  to  the  use  of  the  self -cocking  mechanism,  and  also  to 
strengthen  and  develop  the  muscles  of  the  hand,  a  few  min- 
utes' practice  daily  in  holding  the  unloaded  revolver  on  a 
mark  and  snapping  it,  using  the  self -cocking  mechanism,  is 
recommended.  The  use  of  the  self-cocking  device  in  firing  is 
not  recommended  except  in  emergency.  By  practice  in  cocking 
the  revolver  the  soldier  can  become  sufficiently  expert  to  fire 
very  rapidly,  using  single  action,  while  his  accuracy  will  be 
greater  than  when  using  double  action. 

139.  Aiming. — Except  when  delivering  rapid  or  quick  fire, 
the  rear  and  front  sights  of  the  pistol  are  used  in  the  same 
manner  as1  the  rifle  sights.     The  normal  sight  is  habitually 
used   (see  PI.  VI),  and  the  line  of  sight  is  directed  upon  a 
point  just  under  the  bull's-eye  at  "6  o'clock."     The  front 
sight  must  be  seen  through  the  middle  of  the  rear-sight  notch, 
the  top  being  on  a  line  with  the  top  of  the  notch.    Care  must 
be  taken  not  to  cant  the  pistol  to  either  side.1 

If  the  principles  of  aiming  have 'not  been  taught,  the  sol- 
dier's instruction  will  begin  with  sighting  drills  as  prescribed 
for  the  rifle  so  far  as  they  may  be  applicable.  The  sighting 

1  The  instructor  should  take  cognizance  of  the  fact  that  the  proper 
aiming  point  is  often  affected  by  the  personal  and  fixed  peculiarities 
of  the  firer,  and  if  unable  to  correct  such  abnormalities  permit  firer  to 
direct  sight  at  such  point  as  promises  effective  results. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         249 

bar  with  open  sight  will  be  used  to  teach  the  normal  sight 
and  to  demonstrate  errors1  likely  to  be  committed. 

To  construct  a  sighting  rest  for  the  pistol  (see  PI.  VI)  take 
a  piece  of  wood  about  10  inches  long,  1£  inches  wide,  and  tk 
inch  thick.  Shape  one  end  so  that  it  will  fit  snugly  in  the 
handle  of  the  pistol  when  the  magazine  has  been  removed. 
Screw  or  nail  this  stick  to  the  top  of  a  post  or  other  object  at 
such  an  angle  that  the  pistol  when  placed  on  the  stick  will  be 
approximately  horizontal.  A  suitable  sighting  rest  for  the 
revolver  may  be  easily  improvised. 

140.  (a)  How  to  cock  the  pistol. — The  pistol  should  be  cocked 
by  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  and  with  the  least  possible 
derangement  of  the  grip.     The  forefinger  should  be  clear  of 
the  trigger  when  cocking  the  pistol.    Some  men  have  difficulty 
at  first  in  cocking  the  pistol  with  the  right  thumb.    This  can 
be  overcome  by  a  little  practice.    Jerking  the  pistol  forward 
while  holding  the  thumb  on  the  hammer  will  not  be  permitted. 

(&)  How  to  cock  the  revolver:  The  revolver  should  be 
cocked  by  putting  the  thumb  on  the  hammer  at  as  nearly  a 
right  angle  to  the  hammer  as  possible,  and  by  the  action  of 
the  thumb  muscles  alone  bringing  the  hammer  back  to  the 
position  of  full  cock.  Some  men  with  large  hands  are  able  to 
cock  the  revolver  with  the  thumb  while  holding  it  in  the  posi- 
tion of  aim  or  raise  pistol.  Where  the  soldier's  hand  is  small 
this  can  not  be  done,  and  in  this  case  it  assists  the  operation 
to  give  the  revolver  a  slight  tilt  to  the  right  and  upward  (to 
the  right ) .  Particular  care  should  be  taken  that  the  forefinger 
is  clear  of  the  trigger  or  the  cylinder  will  not  revolve.  Jerk- 
ing the  revolver  forward  while  holding  the  thumb  on  the 
hammer  will  not  be  permitted. 

141.  Position  and  aiming  drills,   dismounted:    For  this  in- 
struction the  squad  will  be  formed  with  an  interval  of  1  pace 
between  files.     Black  pasters  to  simulate  bull's-eyes  will  be 
pasted  opposite  each  man  on  the  barrack  or  other  wall,  from 
which  the  squad  is  10  paces  distant. 

The  squad  being  formed  as  described  above,  the  instructor 
gives  the  command:  1.  Raise,  2.  Pistol  (par.  147,  Cavalry  Drill 
Regulations),  and  cautions,  "Position  and  aiming  drill,  dis- 
mounted." The  men  take  the  positions  described  in  paragraph 
136,  except  that  the  pistol  is  held  at  "  Raise  pistol." 


250        MANTJA1  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


PLATE  VI. 


MANtfAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        251 

The  instructor  cautions,  "  Trigger  squeeze  exercise."  At  the 
command  READY,  cock  the  weapon  as  described  in  paragraph 
140.  At  the  command,  1.  Squad,  2.  FIRE,  slowly  extend  the 
arm  till  it  is  nearly  horizontal,  the  pistol  directed  at  a  point 
about  6  inches  below  the  bull's-eye.  At  the  same  time  put  the 
forefinger  inside  the  trigger  guard  and  gradually  "feel"  the 
trigger.  Inhale  enough  air  to  comfortably  fill  the  lungs  and 
gradually  raise  the  piece  until  the  line  of  sight  is  directed  at 
the  point  of  aim,  i.  e.,  just  below  the  bull's-eye  at  6  o'clock. 
While  the  sights  are  directed  upon  the  mark,  gradually  in- 
crease the  pressure  on  the  trigger  until  it  reaches  that  point 
where  the  slightest  additional  pressure  will  release  the  sear. 
Then,  when  the  aim  is  true,  the  additional  pressure  necessary 
to  fire  the  piece  is  given  so  smoothly  as  not  to  derange  the 
alignment  of  the  sights.  The  weapon  will  be  held  on  the  mark 
for  an  instant  after  the  hammer  falls  and  the  soldier  will 
observe  what  effect,  if  any,  the  squeezing  of  the  trigger  has 
had  on  his  aim. 

It  is  impossible  to  hold  the  arm  perfectly  still,  but  each  time 
the  line  of  sight  is  directed  on  the  point  of  aim  a  slight  addi- 
tional pressure  is  applied  to  the  trigger  until  the  piece  is  finally 
discharged  at  one  of  the  moments  when  the  sights  are  cor- 
rectly aligned  upon  the  mark. 

When  the  soldier  has  become  proficient  in  taking  the  proper 
position,  the  trigger  squeeze  should  be  executed  at  will.  The 
instructor  prefaces  the  preparatory  command  by  "At  will" 
and  give  the  command  HALT  at  the  conclusion  of  the  exercise, 
when  the  soldier  will  return  to  the  position  of  "  Raise  pistol." 

At  first  this  exercise  should  be  executed  with  deliberation, 
but  gradually  the  soldier  will  be  taught  to  catch  the  aim 
quickly  and  to  lose  no  time  in  beginning  the  trigger  squeeze 
and  bringing  it  to  the  point  where  the  slightest  additional 
pressure  will  release  the  sear. 

REMARKS. — In  service  few  opportunities  will  be  offered  for 
slow  aimed  fire  with  the  pistol  or  revolver,  although  use  will 
be  made  of  the  weapon  under  circumstances  when  accurate 
pointing  and  rapid  manipulation  are  of  vital  importance. 

In  delivering  a  rapid  fire,  the  soldier  must  keep  his  eyes 
fixed  upon  the  mark  and,  after  each  shot,  begin  a  steadily  in- 
creasing pressure  on  the  trigger,  trying  at  the  same  time  to 
get  the  sights  as  nearly  on  the  mark  as  possible  before  the 


252        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

hammer  again  falls.  The  great  difficulty  in  quick  firing  with 
the  pistol  lies  in  the  fact  that  when  the  front  sight  is  brought 
upon  the  mark  the  rear  sight  is  often  found  to  be  outside  the 
line  joining  the  eye  with  the  mark.  This  tendency  to  hold  the 
pistol  obliquely  can  be  overcome  only  by  a  uniform  manner  of 
holding  and  pointing.  This  uniformity  is  to  be  attained  only 
by  acquiring  a  grip  which  can  be  taken  with  certainty  each 
time  the  weapon  is  fired.  It  is  this  circumstance  which  makes 
the  position  and  aiming  drills  so  important.  The  soldier 
should  constantly  practice  pointing  the  pistol  until  he  acquires 
the  ability  to  direct  it  on  the  mark  in  the  briefest  interval  of 
time  and  practically  without  the  aid  of  sights. 

The  soldier  then  repeats  the  exercises  with  the  pistol  in  the 
left  hand,  the  left  side  being  turned  toward  the  target. 

142.  To  draw  and  fire  quickly — Snap  shooting. — With  the 
squad  formed  as  described  in  paragraph  141  except  that  the 
pistol  is  in  the  holster  and  the  flap,  if  any,  buttoned,  the  in- 
structor cautions  "  Quick-fire  exercise."  And  gives  the  com- 
mand, 1.  SQUAD,  2.  FIRE.  At  this  command  each  soldier, 
keeping  his  eye  on  the  target,  quickly  draws  his  pistol,  un- 
locks it,  thrusts  it  toward  the  target,  squeezes  the  trigger, 
and  at  the  instant  the  weapon  is  brought  in  line  with  the  eye 
and  the  objective  increases  the  pressure,  releasing  the  sear. 
To  enable  the  soldier  to  note  errors  in  pointing,  the  weapon 
will  be  momentarily  held  in  position  after  the  fall  of  the  ham- 
mer. Efforts  at  deliberate  aiming  in  this  exercise  must  be 
discouraged. 

Remarks  under  paragraph  141  are  specially  applicable  also 
to  this  type  of  fire.  When  the  soldier  has  become  proficient  in 
the  details  of  this  exercise,  it  should  be  repeated  at  will ;  the 
instructor  cautions,  "At  will ;  quick-fire  exercise."  The  exer- 
cise should  be  practiced  until  the  mind,  the  eye,  and  trigger 
finger  act  in  unison. 

To  simulate  this  type  of  fire  mounted,  the  instructor  places 
the  squad  so  that  the  simulated  bull's-eyes  are  in  turn,  to  the 
RIGHT,  to  the  LEFT,  to  the  RIGHT  FRONT,  to  the  LEFT 
FRONT,  to  the  RIGHT  REAR.  With  the  squad  in  one  of  these 
positions,  the  instructor  cautions,  "  Position  and  aiming  drill, 
mounted."  At  this  caution  the  right  foot  is  carried  20  inches 
to  the  right  and  the  left  hand  to  the  position  of  the  bridle  hand 
(par.  145,  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations).  The  exercise  is  carried 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         253 

out  as  described  for  the  exercise  dismounted,  using  the  com- 
mands and  means  laid  down  in  paragraph  141  for  firing  in 
the  several  directions.  The  exercise  is  to  be  executed  at  will 
when  the  squad  has  been  sufficiently  well  instructed  in  detail. 

When  firing  to  the  left  the  pistol  hand  will  be  about  opposite 
the  left  shoulder  and  the  shoulders  turned  about  45°  to  the 
left;  when  firing  to  the  right  rear  the  shoulders  are  turned 
about  45°  to  the  right. 

When  the  soldier  is  proficient  in  these  exercises  with  the 
pistol  in  the  right  hand,  they  are  repeated  with  the  pistol  in 
the  left  hand. 

Revolver  or  pistol  range  practice. — The  courses  in  range 
practice  are  given  in  paragraphs  147  to  199,  Small  Arms  Firing 
Manual,  1913. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

EXTEACTS  FROM  MANUAL  OF  INTERIOR  GUARD 
DUTY, 

UNITED    STATES    ARMY,    1914. 


[The  numbers  refer  to  paragraphs  in  the  Manual.] 
Section  1.  Introduction. 

1.  Guards  may  be  divided  into  four  classes :  Exterior  guards, 
interior  guards,  military  police,  and  provost  guards. 

2.  Exterior  guards  are  used  only  in  time  of  war.    They  be- 
long to  the  domain  of  tactics  and  are  treated  of  in  the  Field 
Service  Regulations  and  in  the  drill  regulations  of  the  different 
arms  of  the  service. 

The  purpose  of  exterior  guards1  is  to  prevent  surprise,  to 
delay  attack,  and  otherwise  to  provide  for  the  security  of  the 
main  body. 

On  the  march  they  take  the  form  of  advance  guards,  rear 
guards,  and  flank  guards.  At  a  halt  they  consist  of  outposts. 

3.  Interior  guards  are  used  in  camp  or  garrison  to  preserve 
order,  protect  property,  and  to  enforce  police  regulations.    In 
time  of  war  such  sentinels  of  an  interior  guard  as  may  be 
necessary  are  placed  close  in  or  about  a  camp,  and  normally 
there  is  an  exterior  guard  further  out  consisting  of  outposts. 
In  time  of  peace  the  interior  guard  is  the  only  guard  in  a  camp 
or  garrison. 

4.  Military   police   differ   somewhat   from   either   of   these 
classes.     (See  Field  Service  Regulations.)     They  are  used  in 
time  of  war  to  guard  prisoners,  to  arrest  stragglers  and  de- 
serters, and  to  maintain  order  and  enforce  police  regulations 
in  the  rear  of  armies,  along  lines  of  communication,  and  in 
the  vicinity  of  large  camps, 

254 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         255 

5.  Provost  guards  are  used  in  the  absence  of  military  police, 
generally  in  conjunction  with  the  civil  authorities  at  or  near 
large  posts  or  encampments,  to  preserve  order  among  soldiers 
beyond  the  interior  guard. 

Section  2.  Classification  of  interior  guards. 

6.  The  various  elements  of  an  interior  guard  classified  ac- 
cording to  their  particular  purposes  and  the  manner  in  which 
they  perform  their  duties  are  as  follows : 

(a)  The  main  guard. 

(b)  Special  guards:  Stable  guards,  park  guards,  prisoner 
guards,  herd  guards,  train  guards,  boat  guards,  watchmen, 
etc. 

Section  3.  Details  and  rosters. 

7.  At  every  military  post,  and  in  every  regiment  or  separate 
command  in  the  field,  an  interior  guard  will  be  detailed  and 
duly  mounted. 

It  will  consist  of  such  number  of  officers  and  enlisted  men 
as  the  commanding  officer  may  deem  necessary,  and  will  be 
commanded  by  the  senior  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer 
therewith,  under  the  supervision  of  the  officer  of  the  day  or 
other  officer  detailed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

8.  The  system  of  sentinels  on  fixed  posts  is  of  value  in  dis- 
cipline and  training  because  of  the  direct  individual  responsi- 
bility which  is  imposed  and  required  to  be  discharged  in  a 
definite  and  precise  manner.     While  the  desirability  of  this 
type  of  duty  is  recognized,  it  should  only  be  put  in  practice 
to  an  extent  sufficient  to  insure  thorough  instruction  in  this 
method  of  performing  guard  duty,  and  should  not  be  the  rou- 
tine method  of  its  performance.    The  usual  guard  duty  will  be 
performed  by  watchmen,  patrols,  or  such  method  as  in  the 
opinion  of  the  commanding  officer  may  best  secure  results 
under  the  particular  local  conditions. 

9.  At  posts  where  there  are  less  than  three  companies  the 
main  guard  and  special  guards  may  all  be  furnished  by  one 
company  or  by  details  from  each  company.    It  is  directed  that 
whenever  possible  such  guards  shall  be  furnished  by  a  single 
company,  for  the  reason  that  if  guard  details  are  taken  from 
each  organization  at  a  post  of  two  companies,  troops,  or  bat- 


256         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

teries  it  will  result  in  both  being  so  reduced  as  to  seriously 
interfere  with  drill  and  instruction,  whereas  if  details  are 
taken  from  only  one  the  other  is  available  for  instruction  at 
full  strength. 

Where  there  are  three  or  more  companies,  the  main  guard 
will,  if  practicable,  be  furnished  by  a  single  company,  and,  as 
far  as  practicable,  the  same  organization  will  supply  all  de- 
tails for  that  day  for  special  guard,  overseer,  and  fatigue  duty. 
In  this  case  the  officer  of  the  day  and  the  officers  of  the  guard, 
if  there  are  any,  will,  if  practicable,  be  from  the  company  fur- 
nishing the  guard. 

10.  At  a  post  or  camp  where  the  headquarters  of  more  than 
one  regiment  are  stationed,  or  in  the  case  of  a  small  brigade 
in  the  field,  if  but  one  guard  be  necessary  for  the  whole  com- 
mand, the  details  will  be  made  from  the  headquarters  of  the 
command. 

If  formal  guard  mounting  is  to  be  held,  the  adjutant,  ser- 
geant major,  and  band  to  attend  guard  mounting  will  be  desig- 
nated by  the  commanding  officer. 

11.  When  a  single  organization  furnishes  the  guard,  a  roster 
of  organizations  will  be  kept  by  the  sergeant  major  under  the 
supervision  of  the  adjutant.     (See  Appendix  B.) 

12.  When  the  guard  is  detailed  from  several  organizations, 
rosters  will  be  kept  by  the  adjutant,  of  officers  of  the  day  and 
officers  of  the  guard  by  name ;  by  the  sergeant  major  under  the 
supervision  of  the  adjutant,  of  sergeants,  corporals,  musicians, 
and  privates  of  the  guard  by  number  per  organization ;  and  by 
first  sergeants,  of  sergeants,  corporals,  musicians,  and  privates 
by  name.     (See  Appendix  A.) 

13.  When  organizations  furnish  their  own  stable,  or  stable 
and  park  guards,  credit  will  be  given  each  for  the  number  of. 
enlisted  men  so  furnished  as  though  they  had  been  detailed  for 
main  guard. 

14.  Special  guards,  other  than  stable  or  park  guards,  will  be 
credited  the  same  as  for  main  guard,  credited  with  fatigue 
duty,  carried  on  special  duty,  or  credited  as  the  commanding 
officer  may  direct.     (Pars.  6,  221,  247,  and  300.) 

15.  Captains  will  supervise  the  keeping  of  company  rosters 
and  see  that  all  duties  performed  are  duly  credited.     (See 
pars.  355-364,  A.  R.,  for  rules  governing  rosters,  and  Form  342, 
A.  G.  O.,  for  instructions  as  to  how  rosters  should  be  kept. ) 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        257 

16.  There  will  be  an  officer  of  the  day  with  each  guard,  unless 
iii  the  opinion  of  the  commanding  officer  the  guard  is  so  small 
that  his  services  are  not  needed.     In  this  case  an  officer  will 
be  detailed  to  supervise  the  command  and  instruction  of  the 
guard  for  such  period  as  the  commanding  officer  may  direct. 

17.  When  more  than  one  guard  is  required  for  a  command, 
M  field  officer  of  the  day  will  be  detailed,  who  will  receive  his 

u-ders  from  the  brigade  or  division  commander,  as  the  latter 
nay  direct.  When  necessary  captains  may  be  placed  on  the 
•ostev  for  field  officer  of  the  day. 

18.  The  detail  of  officers  of  the  guard  will  be  limited  to  the 
K'ce-ssities  of  the  service  and  efficient  instruction;  inexperi- 
Micecl  officers  may  be  detailed  as  supernumerary  officers  of  the 

guard  for  purposes  of  instruction. 

19.  Officers  serving  on  staff  departments  are,  in  the  discre- 
tion of  the  commanding  officer,  exempt  from  guard  duty. 

20.  Guard  details  will,  if  practicable,  be  posted  or  published 
liie  day  preceding  the  beginning  of  the  tour  and  officers  noti- 
fied personally  by  a  written  order  at  the  same  time. 

21.  The  strength  of  guards  and  the  number  of  consecutive 
days  for  which  an  organization  furnishes  the  guard  will  be  so 
regulated  as  to  insure  privates  of  the  main  guard  an  interval 
of  not  Jess  than  five  days  between  tours. 

When  this  is  not  otherwise  practicable,  extra  and  special 
duty  men  will  be  detailed  for  night  guard  duty,  still  perform- 
ing their  daily  duties.  When  so  detailed  a  roster  will  be  kept 
by  the  adjutant  showing  the  duty  performed  by  them. 

22.  The  members  of  main  guards  and  stable  and  park  guards 
will  habitually   be  relieved  every  24  hours.     The  length  of 
the  tour  of  enlisted  men  detailed  as  special  guards,  other  than 
stable  or  park  guards,  w^ill  be  so  regulated  as  to  permit  of 
ihrso  men  being  held  accountable  for  a  strict  performance  of 
their  duty. 

23.  Should  the  officer  of  the  day  be  notified  that  men  are  re- 
quired to  till  vacancies  in  the  guard,  he  will  cause  them  to  be 
supplied  from  the  organization  to  which  the  guard  belongs. 
If  none  are  available  in  that  organization,  the  adjutant  will 
be  notified  and  will  cause  them  to  be  supplied  from  the  organ- 
ization that  is  next  for  guard.     (Par.  63.) 

366°— 17 10 


258        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

24.  The  adjutant  will  have  posted  on  the  bulletin  board  at 
his  office  all  data  needed  by  company  commanders  in  making 
details  from  their  companies. 

At  first  sergeant's  call  first  sergeants  will  go  to  headquarters 
and  take  from  the  bulletin  board  all  data  necessary  for  making 
the  details  required  from  their  companies ;  these  details  will 
be  made  from  their  company  rosters. 

25.  In  order  to  give  ample  notice,  first  sergeants  will,  when 
practicable,  publish  at  retreat  and  post  on  the  company  bul- 
letin board  all  details  made  from  the  company  for  duties  to 
be  performed. 

26.  Where  rosters  are  required  to  be  kept  by  this  manual, 
all  details  will  be  made  by  roster. 

Section  4.  Commander  of  the  guard. 

41.  The  commander  of  the  guard  is  responsible  for  the  in- 
struction and  discipline  of  the  guard.    He  will  see  that  all  of 
its  members  are  correctly  instructed  in  their  orders  and  duties 
and  that  they  understand  and  properly  perform  them.    He  will 
visit  each  relief  at  least  once  while  it  is  on  post,  and  at  least 
one  of  these  visits  will  be  made  between  12  o'clock  midnight 
and  daylight. 

42.  He  receives  and  obeys  the  orders  of  the  commanding 
officer  and  the  officer  of  the  day,  and  reports  to  the  latter  with- 
out delay  all  orders  to  the  guard  not  received  from  the  officer 
of  the  day ;  he  transmits  to  his  successor  all  material  instruc- 
tions and  information  relating  to  his  duties. 

43.  He  is  responsible  under  the  officer  of  the  day  for  the 
general  safety  of  the  post  or  camp  as  soon  as  the  old  guard 
marches  away  from  the  guardhouse.     In  case  of  emergency, 
while  both  guards  are  at  the  guardhouse,   the  senior  com- 
mander of  the  two  guards  will  be  responsible  that  the  proper 
action  is  taken. 

44.  Officers  of  the  guard  will  remain  constantly  with  their 
guards,  except  while  visiting  patrols  or  necessarily  engaged 
elsewhere  in  the  performance  oi[  their  duties.    The  command- 
ing officer  will  allow  a  reasonable  time  for  meals. 

45.  A  commander  of  a  guard  lea^ng  his  post  for  any  pur- 
pose will  inform  the  next  in  command  of  his  destination  and 
probable  time  of  return. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         259 

46.  Except  in  emergencies,  the  commander  of  the  guard  may 
divide  the  night  with  the  next  in  command,  but  retains  his 
responsibility;  the  one  on  watch  must  be  constantly  on  the 
alert. 

47.  When  any  alarm  is  raised  in  camp  or  garrison,  the  guard 
will  be  informed  immediately.      (Par.  23(4.)      If  the  case  be 
serious,  the  proper  call  will  be  sounded,  and  the  commander 
of  the  guard  will  cause  the  commanding  officer  and  the  officer 
«>f  the  day  to  be  at  once  notified. 

48.  If  a  sentinel  calls :  "  The  guard,"  the  commander  of  the 
guard  will  at  once  send  a  patrol  to  the  sentinel's  post.    If  the 
danger  be  great,  in  which  case  the  sentinel  will  discharge  his 
piece,  the  patrol  will  be  as  strong  as  possible. 

49.  When  practicable,  there  should  always  be  an  officer  or 
noncommissioned  officer  and  two  privates  of  the  guard  at  the 
guardhouse  in  addition  to  the  sentinels  there  on  post. 

50.  Between  reveille  and  retreat,  when  the  guard  has  been 
turned   out   for  any  person   entitled  to  the  compliment    (see 
pars.  222  and  224).  the  commander  of  the  guard,  if  an  officer, 
will  receive  the  report  of  the  sergeant,  returning  the  salute  of 
the  latter  with  the.  right  hand.    He  will  then  draw  his  saber 
and  place   himself  two  paves  in   front  of  the  center  of  the 
guard.      When    the   person    for    whom    the    guard    has    been 
turned    out   approaches   he    faces   his   guard    and   commands: 
1.  Present,  2.  ARMS;   faces  to  the  front  and  salutes.     When 
his  salute  is  acknowledged  lie  resumes  the  carry,  faces  about, 
and  commands:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS;  and  faces  to  the  front. 

If  it  be  an  officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard,  after  saluting 
and  before  bringing  his  guard  to  an  order,  the  officer  of  the 
guard  reports:  "  Sir,  all  present  or  accounted  for";  or  "Sir, 
(so-and-so)  is  absent";  or.  if  the  roll  call  has  been  omitted: 
<k  Sir.  the  guard  is  formed,'1  except  that  at  guard  mounting  the 
commanders  of  the  guards  present  their  guards  and  salute 
without  making  any  report. 

Between  rerreat  and  reveille  the  commander  of  the  guard 
salutes  and  reports,  but  does  not  bring  the  guard  to  a  present. 

51.  To  those  entitled  to  have  the  guard  turned  out  but  not 
entitled  to  inspect  it  no  report  will  be  made ;  nor  will  a  report 
be  made  to  any  officer  unless  he  halts  in  front  of  the  guard. 

52.  When  a  guard  commanded  by  a  noncommissioned  officer 
is  turned  out  as  a  compliment'  or  for  inspection  the  noncom- 


260        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

.missioned  officer,  standing  at  a  right  shoulder  on  the  right  of 
the  right  guide,  commands :  1.  Present,  2.  AEMS.  He  then 
executes  the  rifle  salute.  If  a  report  be  also  required,  he 
will,  after  saluting  and  before  bringing  his  guard  to  an  order, 
report  as  prescribed  for  the  officer  of  the  guard.  (Par.  50.) 

53.  When  a  guard  is  in  line,  not  under  inspection,  and  com- 
manded by  an  officer,  the  commander  of  the  guard  salutes  his 
regimental,  battalion,  and  company  commander  by  bringing 
the  guard  to  attention  and  saluting  in  person. 

For  all  -other  officers,  excepting  those  entitled  to  the  compli- 
ment from  a  guard  (par.  224),  the  commander  of  the  guard 
salutes  in  person,  but  does  not  bring  the  guard  to  attention. 

When  commanded  by  a  noncommissioned  officer,  the  guard 
.is  brought  to  attention  in  either  case,  and  the  noncommis- 
sioned officer  salutes. 

The  commander  of  a  guard  exchanges  salutes  with  the  com- 
manders of  all  other  bodies  of  troops ;  the  guard  is  brought  to 
attention  during  the  exchange. 

"  Present  arms  "  is  executed  by  a  guard  only  when  it  has 
turned  out  for  inspection  or  as  a  compliment,  and  at  the  cere- 
monies of  £uard  mounting  and  relieving  the  old  guard. 

54.  In  marching  a  guard  or  a  detachment  of  a  guard  the 
principles  of  paragraph  53  apply.     "  Eyes  right "  is  executed 
only  in  the  ceremonies  of  guard  mounting  and  relieving  the 
old  guard. 

55.  If  a  person  entitled  to  the  compliment,  or  the  regimental, 
battalion,  or  company  commander,  passes  in  rear  of  a  guard, 
neither  the  compliment  nor  the  salute  is  given,  but  the  guard 
is  brought  to  attention  while  such  person  is  opposite  the  post 
of  the  commander. 

After  any  person  has  received  or  declined  the  compliment, 
or  received  the  salute  from  the  commander  of  the  guard,  offi- 
cial recognition  of  his  presence  thereafter  while  he  remains 
in  the  vicinity  will  be  taken  by  bringing  the  guard  to  atten- 
tion. 

.  56.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  inspect  the  guard  at 
reveille  and  retreat,  and  at  such  other  times  as  may  be  neces- 
sary, to  assure  himself  that  the  men  are  in  proper  condition  to 
perform  their  duties  and  that  their  arms  and  equipments  are 
in  proper  condition.  For  inspection  by  other  officers,  he  pre- 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         261 

pares  the  guard  in  each   rase  as  directed  by  the  inspecting 
officer. 

57.  The  guard  will  not  be  paraded  during  ceremonies  unless 
directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

58.  At  all  formations  members  of  the  guard  or  reliefs  will 
<  xeeute  inspection  arms  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  regulations 
<»f  their  arm. 

59.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  see  that  all  sentinels 
Mre  habitually  relieved  every  two  hours,  unless  the  weather  or 
other  causes  makes  it  necessary  that  it  be  done  at  shorter  or 
longer  intervals,  as  directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

60.  He  will  question  his  noncommissioned  officers  and  sen- 
tinels relative  to  the  instructions  they  may  have  received  from 
the  old  guard:  he  will  see  that  patrols  and  visits  of  inspection 
are  made  as  directed  by  the  officer  of  the  day. 

61.  lie  will  see  that  the  special  orders  for  each  post   and 
member  of  the  guard,  either  written  or  printed,  are  posted  in 
the  guardhouse  and,  if  practicable,  in  the  sentry  box  or  other 
sheltered  place  to  which  the  member  of  the  guard  has  con- 
stant access. 

62.  He.  will    sec*   that  the   proper   calls   are  sounded   at   the 
hours  appointed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

63.  Should  a  member  of  the  guard  be  taken  sick,  or  be  ar- 
rested, or  desert,  or  leave  his  guard,  he  will  at  once  notify  the 
officer  of  the  day.     (Par.  23.) 

64.  He  will,  when  the  countersign  is  used  (pars.  210  to  216), 
communicate  it  to  the  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard 
and  see  that  it  is  duly  communicated  to  the  sentinels  before 
the  hour  of  challenging;  the  countersign  will  not  be  given  to 
sentinels  posted  at  the  guardhouse. 

65.  He  will  have  the  details  for  hoisting  the  (lag  at  reveille 
and  lowering  it  at  retreat,  and  for  tiring  the  reveille  and  re- 
treat gun.  made  in  time  for  the  proper  performance  of  these 
duties.     (See  pars.  ?>.>S,  ;>44,  345,  and  o46.)     He  will  see  that 
the  flags  are  kept  in  the  best  condition  possible,  and  that  they 
are  never  handled  except  in  the  proper  performance  of  duty. 

66.  He  may  permit  members  of  the  guard  while  at  the  guard- 
house to  remove  their  headdress,   overcoats,   and   gloves:   if 
they  leave  the  guardhouse  for  any  purpose  whatever,  he  will  re- 
quire that  they  be  properly  equipped  and  armed  according  to 


262        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

the  character  of  the  service  in  which  engaged,  or  as  directed 
by  the  commanding  officer. 

67.  He  will  enter  in  the  guard  report  a  report  of  his  tour  of 
duty  and,  on  the  completion  of  his  tour,  will  present  it  to  the 
officer  of  the  day.     He  will  transmit  with  his  report  all  passes 
turned  in  at  the  post  of  the  guard. 

68.  Whenever  a  prisoner  is  sent  to  the  guardhouse  or  guard 
tent  for  confinement  he  will  cause  him  to  be  searched,  and 
will,  without  unnecessary  delay,  report  the  case  to  the  officer 
of  the  day. 

69.  Under  war  conditions,  if  anyone  is  to  be  passed  out  of 
camp  at  night,  he  will  be  sent  to  the  commander  of  the  guard, 
4wlio  will  have  him  passed  beyond  the  sentinels. 

70.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  detain  at  the  guard- 
house all  suspicious  characters  or  parties  attempting  to  pass  a 
sentinel's  post  without  authority,  reporting  his  action  to  the 
officer  of  the  day,  to  whom  persons  so  arrested  will  be  sent, 
if  necessary. 

71.  He  will  inspect  the  guardrooms  and  cells,  and  the  irons 
of  such  prisoners  as  may  be  ironed,  at  least  once  during  his" 
tour,  and  at  such  other  times  as  he  may  deem  necessary. 

72.  He  will  cause  the  corporals  of  the  old  and  new  reliefs 
to   verify   together,   immediately   before  each   relief   goes   on 
post,  the  number  of  prisoners  who  should  then  properly  be 
at  the  guardhouse. 

73.  He  will  see  that  the  sentences  of  prisoners  under  his 
charge  are  executed  strictly  in  accordance  with  the  action  of 
the  reviewing  authority. 

74.  When  no  special  prisoner  guard  has  been  detailed  (par. 
300),   he  will-   as  far   as  practicable,   assign  as  guards  over- 
working  parties   of  prisoners   sentinels   from   posts   guarded 
at  night  only. 

75.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  inspect  all  meals  sent 
to  the  guardhouse  and  see  that  the  quantity  and  quality  of 
food  are  in  accordance  \vith  regulations. 

76.  At  guard  mounting  he  will  report  to  the  old  officer  of  the 
day  all  cases  of  prisoners  whose  terms  of  sentence  expire  on 
that  day,  and  also  all  cases  of  prisoners  concerning  whom  no 
statement  of  charges  has  been  received.     (See  par.  241.) 

77.  The   commander   of   the    guard    is   responsible   for   the 
security  of  the  prisoners  under  the  charge  of  his  guard ;  he 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         263 

becomes  responsible  for  them  after  their  number  has  been 
verified  and  they  have  been  turned  over  to  the  custody  of  his 
guard  by  the  old  guard  or  by  the  prisoner  guard  or  overseers. 

78.  The  prisoners  will  bo  verified  and  turned  over  to  the 
new  guard   without  parading  them,    unless  the   commanding 
officer  or  the  officer  of  the  day  shall  direct  otherwise. 

79.  To  receive  the  prisoners  at   the  guardhouse  when  they 
have  been  paraded  and  after  they  have  been  verified  by  the 
officers  of  the  day,  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  directs 
liis   sergeant    to   form  his  guard   with    an   interval.'  and   com- 
mands: 1.  Prisoners,  2.  Right,  3.  FACE,  4.  Forward,  5.  MARCH. 
The   prisoners    having   arrived    opposite   the    interval    in    the 
new  guard,   he  commands:   1.   Prisoners,   2.   HALT,  3.   Left,  4. 
FACE,  5.  Right   (or  left),  0.  DRESS,  7.  FRONT. 

The  prisoners  dress  on  the  line  of  the  new  guard. 

Section  5.  Sergeant  of  the  guard. 

80.  The  senior  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard  always 
acts  as  sergeant  of  the  guard  and  if  there  be  no  officer  of  the 
guard  will  perform  the  duties  prescribed  for  the  commander 
of  the  guard. 

81.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  has  general  supervision  over 
the  other  noncommissioned  officers  and  the  musicians  and  pri- 
vates of  the  guard,  and  must  be  thoroughly  familiar  with  all 
of  their  orders  and  duties. 

82.  He  is  directly  responsible  for  the  property  under  charge 
of  the  guard  and  will  see  that  it  is  properly  cared  for.     He 
will  make  lists  of  articles  taken  out  by  working  parties  and 
see  that  all  such  articles  are  duly  returned.     If  they  are  not, 
he  will  immediately  report  the  fact  to  the  commander  of  the 
guard. 

83.  Immediately  after  guard  mounting  he  will  prepare  dupli- 
cate lists  of  the  names  of  all  noncommissioned  officers,  musi- 
cians, and  privates  of  the  guard,  showing  the  relief  and  post 
or  duties  of  each.    One  list  will  be  handed  as  soon  as  possible 
to  the  commander  of  the  guard;  the  other  will  be  retained  by 
the  sergeant. 

84.  He  will  see  that  all  reliefs  are  turned  out  at  the  proper 
time,  and  that  the  corporals  thoroughly  understand,  and  are 
prompt  and  efficient  in.  the  discharge  of  their  duties. 


I 


26*        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

85.  During  the  temporary  absence  from  the  guardhouse  of 
the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  the  next  in  rank  of  the  noncommis- 
sioned officers  will  perform  his  duties. 

86.  Should  the  corporal  whose  relief  is  on  post  be  called 
away  from  the  guardhouse,  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  will 
designate   a   noncommissioned   officer   to   take   the   corporal's 
place  until  his  return. 

87.  The  sergeant  of  the  guard  is  responsible  at  all  times  for 
the  proper  police  of  the  guardhouse  or  guard  tent,  including 
the  ground  about  them  and  the  prison  cells. 

88.  At  first  sergeant's  call  he  will  proceed  to  the  adjutant's 
office  and  obtain  the  guard  report  book. 

89.  When  the  national  or  regimental  colors  are  taken  from 
the  stacks  of  the  color  line,  the  color  bearer  and  guard,  or  the 
sergeant  of  the  guard,  unarmed,  and  two  armed  privates  as  a 
guard,  will  escort  the  colors  to  the  colonel's  quarters,  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  color  guard  in  the  drill  regulations  of  the  arm 
of  the  service  to  which  the  guard  belongs. 

90.  He  will  report  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  any  sus- 
picious or  unusual  occurrence  that  comes  under  his  notice,  will 
warn  him  of  the  approach  of  any  armed  body,  and  will  send  to 
him  all  persons  arrested  by  the  guard. 

91.  When  the  guard  is  turned  out  its  formation  will  be  as 
follows :  The  senior  noncommissioned  officer,  if  commander  of 
the  guard,   is  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide;   if  not  com- 
mander of  the  guard,  he  is  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  in  rear  of 
the  right  four  of  the  guard ;  the  next  in  rank  is  right  guide ; 
the  next  left  guide ;  the  others  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  usu- 
ally each  in  rear  of  his  relief;  the  field  music,  with  its  left 
three  paces  to  the  right  of  the  right  guide.    The  reliefs  form 
in  the  same  order  as  when  the  guard  was  first  divided,  except 
that  if  the   guard   consists   of  dismounted   Cavalry   and   In- 
fantry, the  Cavalry  forms  on  the  left. 

92.  "The  sergeant  forms  the  guard,  calls  the  roll,  and,  if  not 
in  command  of  the  guard,  reports  to  the  commander  of  the 
guard  as  prescribed  in  drill  regulations  for  a  first  sergeant 
forming  a  troop  or  company ;  the  guard  is  not  divided  into 
platoons  or  sections,   and,   except  when  the  whole  guard  is 
formed  prior  to  marching  off,  fours  are  not  counted. 

93.  The  sergeant   reports   as   follows :  "  Sir,   all  present   or 
accounted  for,"  or  "Sir,  (so-and-so)  is  absent";   or  if  the  roll 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        265 

call  has  been  omitted,  "  Sir,  the  guard  is  formed."  Only  men 
absent  without  proper  authority  are  reported  absent.  He  then 
takes  his  place  without  command. 

94.  At  night  the  roll  may  be  called  by  reliefs  and  numbers 
instead  of  names ;  thus,  the  first  relief  being  on  post :  Second 
relief;  No.  1;  No.  2;  etc.;  Third  relief,  Corporal;  No.  1,  etc. 

95.  Calling  the  roll  will  be  dispensed  with  in  forming  the 
guard  when  it  is  turned  out  as  a  compliment,  on  the  approach 
of  an  armed  body,  or  in  any  sudden  emergency ;  but  in  such 
cases  the  roll  may  be  called  before  dismissing  the  guard.     If 
the  guard  be  turned  out  for  an  officer  entitled  to  inspect  it, 
the  roll  will,  unless  he  directs  otherwise,   always  be  called 
before  a  report  is  made. 

96.  The  sergeant  of  the   guard  has   direct  charge  of  the 
prisoners,  except  during  such  time  as  they  may  be  under  the 
charge  of  the  prisoner  guard  or  overseers,  and  is  responsible  to 
the  commander  of  the  guard  for  their  security. 

97.  He  will  carry  the  keys  of  the  guardroom  and  cells,  and 
will  not  suffer  them  to  leave  his  personal  possession  while  he  is 
at  the  guardhouse,  except  as  hereinafter  provided.     (Par.  99.) 
Should  he  leave  the  guardhouse  for  any  purpose  he  will  turn 
the  keys  over  to  the  noncommissioned  officer  who  takes  his 
place.     (Par.  85.) 

98.  He  will  count  the  knives,  forks,  etc.,  given  to  the  pris- 
oners with  their  food,   and  see  that  none  of  these  articles 
remain  in  their  possession.     He  will  see  that  no  forbidden 
articles  of  any  kind  are  conveyed  to  the  prisoners. 

99.  Prisoners  when  paraded  with  the  guard  are  placed  in  line, 
in  its  center.     The  sergeant,  immediately  before  forming  the 
guard,  will  turn  over  his  keys  to  the  noncommissioned  officer 
at  the  guardhouse.     Having  formed  the  guard  he  will  divide 
it  into  two  nearly  equal  parts.     Indicating  the  point  of  division 
with  his  hand,  he  commands:  1.  Right  (or  left),  2.  FACE,  3. 
Forward,  4.  MARCH,  5.  Guard,  6.  HALT,  7/Left  (or  right),  8. 
FACE. 

If  the  first  command  be  right  face,  the  right  half  of  the 
guard  only  will  execute  the  movements ;  if  left  face,  the  left 
half  only  will  execute  them.  The  command  halt  is  given  when 
sufficient  interval  is  obtained  to  admit  the  prisoners.  The 
doors  of  the  guardroom  and  cells  are  then  opened  by  the  non- 
commissioned officer  having  the  keys.  The  prisoners  will  file 


266        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

out  under  the  supervision  of  the  sergeant,  the  noncommissioned 
officer,  and  sentinel  on  duty  at  the  guardhouse,  ancf  such  other 
sentinels  as  may  be  necessary ;  they  will  form  in  line  in  the 
interval  between  the  two  parts  of  the  guard. 

100.  To  return  the  prisoners  to  the  guardroom  and  cells,  the 
sergeant  commands:  ].  Prisoners,  2.  Right  (or  left),  3.  FACE, 
4.  Column  right  (or  left),  5.  MARCH. 

The  prisoners,  under  the  same  supervision  as  before,  return 
to  their  proper  rooms  or  cells. 

101.  To  dose  the  guard,  the  sergeant  commands :  1.  Left  (or 
right),  2.  FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH,   5.   Guard,  6.  HALT, 
7.  Right  (or  left),  8.  FACE. 

The  left  or  right  half  only  of  the  guard,  as  indicated,  exe- 
cutes the  movement. 

102.  If  there  be  but  few  prisoners,  the  sergeant   may  indi- 
cate the  point  of  division  as  above,  and  form  the  necessary 
interval  by  the  commands:  1.  Right  (or  left)  step,  2.  MARCH, 
3.  Guard,  4.  HALT,  and  close  the  intervals  by  the  commands : 
1.  Left  (or  right)  step,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guard,  4.  HALT. 

103.  If  sentinels  are  numerous,  reliefs  may,  at  the  discretion 
of   the   commanding:   officer,    be   posted    in   detachments,   and 
sergeants   MS  wrU  as  corporals  required  to  relieve  and   post 
them. 

Section  6.  Corporal  of  the  Guard. 

104.  A  corporal  of  the  xnard  receives  and  obeys  orders  from 
none  but  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  senior  to  him- 
self, the  officers  of  the  guard,  the  officer  of  the  day.  and  the 
commanding  officer. 

105.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  corporal  of  the  guard  to  post  and 
relieve  sentinels  and  to  instruct  the  members  of  his  relief  in 
their  orders  and  duties. 

106.  Immediately  after  the  division  of  the  guard  into  reliefs 
the    corporals    will   assign   the   members   of   their   respective 
reliefs  to  posts  by  number,  and  a  soldier  so  assigned  to  his 
post  will  not  be  changed  to  another  during  the  same  tour  of 
guard  duty  unless  by  direction  of  the  commander  of  the  guard 
or  higher  authority.     Usually  experienced  .soldiers  are  placed 
over  the  arms  of  the  guard   and  at  remote  and  responsible 
posts. 

107.  Each  corporal  will  then  make  a  list  of  the  member.*  of 
his  relief,  including  himself.     This1  list  will  contain  the  num- 


I 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         267 

ber  of  the  relief,  the  name,  the  company,  and  the  regiment  of 
every  member  thereof  and  the  post  to  which  each  is  assigned. 
The  list  will  be  made  in  duplicate,  one  copy  to  be  given  to  the 
sergeant  of  the  guard  as  soon  as  completed,  the  other  to  be 
retained  by  the  corporal. 

108.  When  directed  by  the  commander  of  the  guard,   the 
corporal  of  the  first  relief  forms  his  relief,   and  then  com- 
mands :  CALL  OFF. 

Commencing  on  the  right,  the  men  call  off  alternately  rear 
and  front  rank,  "  one/'  "  two,"  "  three,"  "  four,"  and  so  on ;  if 
in  single  rank,  they  call  off  from  right  to  left.  The  corporal 
then  commands :  1.  Right,  2.  FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

The  corporal  marches  on  the  left  and  near  the  rear  file  in 
order  to  observe  the  march.  The  corporal  of  the  old  guard 
marches  on  the  right  of  the  leading  file,  and  takes  command 
when  the  last  one  of  the  old  sentinels  is  relieved,  changing 
places  with  the  corporal  of  the  new  guard. 

109.  When  the  relief  arrives  at  six  paces  from  a  sentinel 
(see  par.  1G8),  the  corporal  halts  it  and  commands,  according 
to  the  number  of  the  post :  No.  ( ) . 

Both  sentinels  execute  port  arms  or  saber ;  the  new  sentinel 
approaches  the  old,  halting  about  one  pace  from  him.  (See 
par.  172.) 

110.  The   corporals   advance   and   place   themselves,    facing 
each  other,  a  little  in  advance  of  the  new  sentinel,  the  old 
corporal  on  his  right,  the  new  corporal  on  his  left,  both  at  a 
right  shoulder,  and  observe  that  the  old  sentinel  transmits 
correctly  his  instructions. 

The  following  diagram  will  illustrate  the  positions  taken : 

A 
R 

I  I  I  I  I  Cl  ID 

I      III 

B 

is  the  relief;  A,  the  new  corporal ;  B.  the  old ;  C,  the  new 
inel ;  D,  the  old. 

111.  The  instructions  relative  to  the  post  having  been  com- 
municated, the  new  corporal  commands,  Post;   both  sentinels 


268        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

then  resume  the  right  shoulder,  face  toward  the  new  corporal, 
and  step  back  so  as  to  allow  the  relief  to  pass  in  front  of  them. 
The  new  corporal  then  commands:  "  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH''; 
the  old  sentinel  takes  his  place  in  rear  of  the  relief  as  it  passes 
him,  his  piece  in  the  same  position  as  those  of  the  relief. 
The  new  sentinel  stands  fast  at  a  right  shoulder  until  the  relief 
has  passed  six  paces  beyond  him,  when  he  walks  his  post. 
The  corporals  take  their  places  as  the  relief  passes  them. 

112.  Mounted  sentinels  are  posted  and  relieved  in  accord- 
ance with  the  same  principles. 

113.v  On  the  return  of  the  old  relief,  the  corporal  of  the  new 
guard  falls  out  when  the  relief  halts :  the  corporal  of  the  old 
guard  forms  his  relief  on  the  left  of  the  old  guard,  salutes,  and 
reports  to  the  commander  of  his  guard :  "  Sir,  the  relief  is 
present";  or  "Sir,  (so-and-so)  is  absent,"  and  takes  his  place 
in  the  guard. 

114.  To  post  a  relief  other  than  that  which  is  posted  when 
the  old  guard  is  relieved,  its  corporal  commands: 

1.  (Such)  relief,  2.  PALL  IN;  and  if  arms  are  stacked,  they 
are  taken  at  the  proper  commands. 

The  relief  is  formed  facing  to  the  front,  with  arms  at  fin 
order,  the  men  place  themselves  according  to  the  numbers  of 
their  respective  posts,  viz,  tv/o,  four,  six,  and  so  on,  in  the 
front  rank,  and  one,  three,  five,  and  so  on.  in  the  rear  rank. 
The  corporal,  stain  ling  about  two  paces  in  front  of  the  center 
of  his  relief,  then  commands  :  CALL  OFF. 

The  men  call  oft"  as  prescribed.  The  corporal  then  com- 
mands: 1.  Inspection, '2.  ARMS,  3.  Order,  4.  ARMS;  faces  the 
commander  of  the  guard,  executes  the  rifle  salute,  reports : 
"  Sir,  the  relief  is  present";  or  u  Sir,  (so-and-so)  is  absent"; 
he  then  takes  his  place  on  the  right  at  order  arms. 

115.  When  the  commander  of  the  guard  directs  the  corporal. 
Post  your  relief,  the  corporal  salutes  and  posts  his  relief  as 
prescribed   (Pars.  108  to  111)  ;  the  corporal  of  the  relief  on 
post  does  not  go  with  the  new  relief,  except  when  necessary  to 
show  the  way. 

116.  To  dismiss  the  old  relief,  it  is  halted  and  faced  to  the 
front  at  the  guardhouse  by  the  corporal  of  the  new  relief,  who 
then  falls  out ;  the  corporal  of  the  old  relief  then  steps  in 
front  of  the  relief  and  dismisses  it  by  the  proper  commands. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         269 

117.  Should  the  pieces  have  been  loaded  before  the  relief 
was  posted,  the  corporal  will,  before  dismissing  the  relief,  see 
that  no  cartridges  are  left  in  the  chambers  or  magazines.  The 
same  rule  applies  to  sentinels  over  prisoners. 

118.  Each  corporal  will  thoroughly  acquaint  himself  with  all 
the  special  orders  of  every  sentinel  on  his  relief,  and  see  that 
each  understands  and  correctly  transmits  such  orders  in  detail 
to  his  successor. 

119.  There  should  be  at  least  one  noncommissioned  officer 
constantly  on  the  alert  at  the  guardhouse,  usually  the  corporal 
whose  relief  is  on  post.     This  noncommissioned  officer  takes 
post  near  the  entrance  of  the  guardhouse,  and  does  not  fall  in 
with  the  guard  when  it  is  formed.     He  will  have  his  rifle  con- 
stantly \vith  him. 

120.  Whenever   it   becomes    necessary   for    the   corporal   to 
leave  his  post  near  the  entrance  of  the  guardhouse,  he  will 
notify  the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  who  will  at  once  take  his 
place,  or  designate  another  noncommissioned  officer  to  do  so. 

121.  He  will  see  that  no  person  enters  the  guardhouse  or 
guard  tent,  or  crosses  the  posts  of  the  sentinels  there  posted 
without  proper  authority. 

122.  Should  any  sentinel  call  for  the  corporal  of  the  guard, 
the  corporal  will,  in  every  case,  at  once  and  quickly  proceed  to 
such  sentinel.     He  will  notify  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  before 
leaving  the  guardhouse. 

123.  He  will  at  once  report  to  the  commander  of  the  guard 
any  violation  of  regulations  or  any  unusual  occurrence  which 
is  reported  to  him  by  a  sentinel,  or  which  comes  to  his  notice 
in  any  other  way. 

124.  Should  a  sentinel  call  "  The  Guard/'  the  corporal  will 
promptly  notify  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

125.  Should  a  sentinel  call  "  Relief,"  the  corporal  will  at 
once  proceed  to  the  post  of  such  sentinel,  taking  with  him  the 
man  next  for  duty  on  that  post.     If  the  sentinel  is  relieved  for 
a  short  time  only,  the  corporal  will  again  post  him  as  soon  as 
the  necessity  for  his  relief  ceases. 

126.  When  the  countersign  is  used,  the  corporal  at  the  post- 
ing of  the  relief  during  whoso  tour  challenging  is  to  begin 
gives  the  countersign  to  the  members  of  the  relief,  excepting 
those  posted  at  the  guardhouse. 


270        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

127.  He  will  wake  the  corporal  whose  relief  is  next  on  post 
in  time  for  the  latter  to  verify  the  prisoners,  form  his  relief, 
and  post  it  at  the  proper  hour. 

128.  Should  the  guard  be  turned  out,  each  corporal  will  call 
his  own  relief,  and  cause  its  members  to  fall  in  promptly. 

129.  Tents  or  bunks  in  the  same  vicinity  will  be  designated 
for  the  reliefs  so  that  all  the  members  of  each  relief  may,  if 
necessary,  be  found  and  turned  out  by  the  corporal  in  the  least 
time  and  with  the  least  confusion. 

130.  When  challenged  by  a  sentinel  while  posting  his  relief, 
the  corporal  commands:  1.  Relief,  2.  HALT;   to  the  sentinel's 
challenge  he  answers  "  Relief,"  and  at  the  order  of  the  senti- 
nel he  advances  alone  to  give  the  countersign,  or  to  be  recog- 
nized.   When  the  sentinel  says.  "Advance  relief,"  the  corporal 
commands :  1.  Forward,  l!.  MARCH. 

If  to  be  relieved,  the  sentinel  is  then  relieved  as  prescribed. 

131.  Between  retreat  and  reveille,  the  corporal  of  the  guard 
\vill  challenge  all  suspicious  looking  persons  or  parties  he  may 
observe,  first  halting  his  patrol  or  relief,  if  either  be  with  him. 
He  will  advance  them  in  the  same  manner  that  sentinels  on 
post  advance  like  parties  (Pars.  191  to  197),  but  if  the  route 
of  a  patrol  is  on  a  continuous  chain  of  sentinels,  he  should  not 
challenge  persons  coming  near  him  unless  he  has  reason  to 
believe  that  they  have  eluded  the  vigilance  of  sentinels. 

132.  Between  retreat  and  reveille,  whenever  so  ordered  by 
an  officer  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard,  the  corporal  will  call: 
"  Turn  out  the  guard,"  announcing  the  title  of  the  officer,  and 
then,  if  not  otherwise  ordered,  lie  will  salute  and  return  to  his 
post. 

133.  As  a  general  rule  he  will  advance  parties  approaching 
the  guard  at  night  in  the  same  manner  that  sentinels  on  post 
advance  like  parties.     Thus,  the  sentinel  at  the  guardhouse 
challenges  and  repeats  the  answer  to  the  corporal,   as  pre- 
scribed hereafter  (Par.  200)  ;  the  corporal,  advancing  at  port 
arms,  says :  "Advance    (so-and-so)   with  the  countersign,"  or 
"to  be  recognized,"  if  there  be  no  countersign  used:  the  coun- 
tersign being  correctly  given,  or  the  party  being  duly  recog- 
nized, the  corporal  says:  "Advance  (so-and-so),"  repeating  the 
answer  to  the  challenge  of  the  sentinel. 

134.  When   officers  of  different   rank  approach   the  guard- 
house from  different  directions  at  the  same  time,  the  senior 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         271 

will  be  advanced  first,  and  will  not  be  made  to  wait  for  his 
junior. 

135.  Out  of  ranks  and  under  arms,  the  corporal  salutes  with 
th$  rifle  salute.    He  will  salute  all  officers,  whether  by  day  or 
night. 

136.  The  corporal  will  examine  parties  halted  and  detained 
by  sentinels,  and,  if  he  have  reason  to  believe  the  parties  have 
no  authority  to  cross  sentinel's  posts,  will  conduct  them  to  the 
commander  of  the  guard. 

137.  The  corporal   of  the  guard  will  arrest  all  suspicious 
looking  characters  prowling  about  the  post  or  camp,  all  per- 
sons of  a  disorderly  character  disturbing  the  peace,  and  all 
persons  taken  in  the  act  of  committing  crime  against  the  Gov- 
ernment on  a  military  reservation  or  post.     All  persons  ar- 
rested by  corporals  of  the  guard  or  by  sentinels  will  at  once  be 
conducted  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  by  the  corporal. 

Section  7.  Musicians  of  the  guard. 

138.  The  musicians  of  the  guard  will  sound  calls  as  pre- 
scribed by  the  commanding  officer. 

139.  Should  the  guard  be  turned  out  for  national  or  regi- 
mental colors  or  standards,  uncased,  the  field  music  of  the 
guard  will,  when  the  guard  present  arms,   sound,   "  To  the 
color"  or '"To  the  standard";   or,  if  for  any  person  entitled 
thereto,  the  march,  flourishes,  or  ruffles,  prescribed  in  para- 
graphs 375?  376,  and  377,  A.  R. 

Section  8.  Orderlies  and  color  sentinels. 

140.  When  so  directed  by  the  commanding  officer,  the  officer 
who  inspects  the  guard  at  guard  mounting  will  select  from 
the  members  of  the  new  guard  an  orderly  for  the  commanding 
officer  and  such  number  of  other  orderlies  and  color  sentinels 
as  may  be  required. 

141.  For  these  positions  the  soldiers  will  be  chosen  who  are 
most  correct  in  the  performance  of  duty  and  in  military  bear- 
ing, neatest  in  person  and  clothing,  and  whose  arms  and  ac- 
couterments  are  in  the  best  condition.     Clothing,  arms,  and 
equipments   must   conform   to   regulations.     If   there   is   any 
doubt  as  to  the  relative  qualifications  of  two  or  more  soldiers, 


272          MANUAI  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

the  inspecting  officer  will  cause  them  to  fall  out  at  the  guard- 
house and  to  form  in  line  in  single  rank.  He  will  then,  by 
testing  them  in  drill  regulations,  select  the  most  profideit. 
The  commander  of  the  guard  will  be  notified  of  the  selection. 

142.  When  directed  by. -the  commander  of  the  guard  to  full. 
out  and  report  an  orderly  will  give  his  name,  company,  and 
regiment  to  the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  and,  leaving  his  rifle  in 
the  arm  rack  in  his  company  quarters,  will  proceed  at  once  t<> 

.the  officer  to  whom  he  is  assigned,  reporting:   "Sir,  Private 
,  Company ,  reports  as  orderly." 

143.  If  the  orderly  selected  be  a  cavalryman,  he  will  leave 
his  rifle  in  the  arm  rack  of  his  troop  quarters  and  report  with 
his  belt  on,  but  without  side  arms  unless  specially  otherwise 
ordered. 

144.  Orderlies,  while  on  duty  as  such,  are  subject  only  to 
the  orders  of  the  commanding  officer  and  of  the  officers  to 
whom  they  are  ordered  to  report. 

145.  When  an  orderly  is  ordered  to  carry  a  message,  lie  will 
be  careful  to  deliver  it  exactly  as  it  was  given  to  him. 

146.  His   tour   of   duty   ends   when   he   is  relieved   by   the 
orderly  selected  from  the  guard  relieving  his  own. 

147.  Orderlies  are  members  of  the  guard,  and  their  name, 
company,  and  regiment  are  entered  on  the  guard  report  and 
lists  of  the  guard. 

148.  If  a  color  line  is  established,   sufficient  sentinels  are 
placed  on  the  color  line  to  guard  the  colors  and  stacks. 

149.  Color  sentinels  are  posted  only  so  long  as  the  stacks 
are  formed.     The  commander  of  the  guard  will  divide  the 
time  equally  among  them. 

150.  When  stacks  are  broken,  the  color  sentinels  may  be  per- 
mitted to  return  to  their  respective  companies.     They  are  re- 
quired to  report  in  person  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  at 
reveille  and  retreat.    They  will  fall  in  with  the  guard,  under 
arms,  at  guard  mounting. 

151.  Color  sentinels  are  not  placed  on  the  regular  reliefs,  nor 
are  their  posts  numbered.     In  calling  for  the  corporal  of  the 
guard,  they  call :  "  Corporal  of  the  guard.     Color  line." 

152.  Officers  or  enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased  colors  will 
render  the  prescribed  salute.     If  the  colors  are  on  the  stacks, 
the  salute  will  be  made  on  crossing  the  color  line  or  on  pass- 
ing the  colors. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        273 

153.  A  sentinel  placed  over  the  colors  will  not  permit  them 
to%  be   moved   except  in   the   presence   of   an   armed   escort. 
Unless  otherwise  ordered  by  the  commanding  officer,  he  will 
allow  no  one  to  touch  them  but  the  color  bearer. 

He  will  not  permit  any  soldier  to  take  arms  from  the  stacks 
or  to  touch  them  except  by  order  of  an  officer  or  noncommis- 
sioned officer  of  the  guard. 

If  any  person  passing  the  colors  or  crossing  the  color  lino 
fails  to  salute  the  colors,  the  sentinel  will  caution  him  to  do 
so,  anil  if  the  caution  be  not  heeded  he  will  call  the  corporal 
of  the  guard  and  report  the  facts. 

Section  9.  Privates  of  the  Guard. 

154.  Privates  are  assigned  to  reliefs  by  the  commander  of. 
the  guard,  and  to  posts  usually  by  the  corporal  of  their  relief. 
They  will  not  change  from  one  relief  or  post  to  another  during 
the  same  tour  of  guard  duty  unless  by  proper  authority. 

Section  10.  Orders  for  Sentinels. 

155.  Orders  for  sentinels  are  of  two  classes :  General  orders 
and   special   orders.     General  orders  apply  to  all  sentinels. 
Special  orders  relate  to  particular  posts  and  duties. 

156.  Sentinels  will  be  required  to  memorize  the  following: 
My  general  orders  are : 

1.  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  Government  property 
in  view. 

2.  To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner  keeping  always  on 
the  alert  and  observing  everything  that  takes  place  within 
sight  or  hearing. 

3.  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  I  am  instructed  to  en- 
force. 

4.  To   repeat   all   calls   from   posts   more    distant   from   the 
guardhouse  than  my  own. 

5.  To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved. 

6.  To  receive,  obey,  and  pass  on  to  the  sentinel  who  relieves 
me  all  orders  from  the  commanding  officer,  officer  of  the  day, 
and  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard  only. 

7.  To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line  of  duty. 


274        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

r^ 

8.  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  to  give  the  alarm. 

9.  To  allow  no  one  to  commit  a  nuisance  on  or  near  my  post. 

10.  In  any  case  not  covered  by  instructions  to  call  the  cor- 
poral of  the  guard. 

11.  To  salute  all  officers,  and  all  colors  and  standards  not 
cased. 

12.  To  be  especially  watchful  at  night,  and,  during  the  time 
for  challenging,  to  challenge  all  persons  on  or  near  my  post 
and  to  allow  no  one  to  pass  without  proper  authority. 

REGULATIONS   RELATING  TO  THE   GENERAL   ORDERS   FOR   SENTINELS. 

No.  1 :  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  Government  prop- 
erty in  view. 

157.  All  persons,  of  whatever  rank  in  the  service,  are  re- 
quired to  observe  respect  toward  sentinels  and  members  of  the 
guard  when  such  are  in  the  performance  of  their  duties. 

158.  A  sentinel  will  at  once  report  to  the  corporal  of  the 
guard  every  unusual  or  suspicious  occurrence  noted. 

159.  He  will  arrest  suspicious  persons  prowling  about  the 
post  or  camp  at  any  time,  all  parties  to  a  disorder  occurring 
on  or  near  his  post,  and  all,  except  authorized  persons,  who 
attempt  to  enter  the  camp  at  night,  and  will  turn  over  to  the 
corporal  of  the  guard  all  persons  arrested. 

160.  The   number,   limits,   and   extent  of  his  post  will   in- 
variably constitute  part  of  the  special  orders  of  a  sentinel  on 
post.    The  limits  of  his  post  should  be  so  defined  as  to  include 
every  place  to  which  he  is  required  to  go  in  the  performance 
of  his  duties. 

No.  2 :  To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner,  keeping  always 
on  the  alert  and  observing  everything  that  takes  place 
within  sight  or  hearing. 

161.  A  sentinel  is  not  required  to  halt  and  change  the  posi- 
tion of  his  rifle  on  arriving  at  the  end  of  his  post,  nor  to 
execute  to  the  rear,  march,  precisely  as  prescribed  in  the  drill 
regulations,  but  faces  about  while  walking  in  the  manner  most 
convenient  to  him  and  at  any  part  of  his  post  as  may  be  best 
suited  to  the  proper  performance  of  his  duties.  He  carries  his 


MANUAL  POR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        275 

rifle  on  either  shoulder,  and  in  wet  or  severe  weather,  when 
Hot  in  a  sentry  box,  may  carry  it  at  a  secure. 

162.  Sentinels  when  in  sentry  boxes  stand  at  ease.     Sentry 
boxes  will  be  used  in  wet  weather  only,  or  at  other  times 
when  specially  authorized  by  the  commanding  officer. 

163.  In  very  hot  weather,  sentinels  may  be  authorized  to 
stand  at  ease  on  their  posts,  provided  they  can  effectively  dis- 
charge their  duties  in  this  position ;  but  they  will  take  advan- 
tage of  this  privilege  only  on  the  express  authority  of  the 
officer  of  the  day  or  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

164.  A  mounted  sentinel  may  dismount  occasionally  and  lead 
the  horse,  but  will  not  relax  his  vigilance. 

No.  3:  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  I  am  instructed  to 
enforce. 

165.  A  sentinel  will  ordinarily  report  a  violation  of  orders 
when  he  is  inspected  or  relieved,  but  if  the  case  be  urgent,  he 
will  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  and  also,  if  necessary,  will 
arrest  the  offender. 

No.  4:  To  repeat  all  calls  from  posts  more  distant  from  the 
guardhouse  than  my  own. 

166.  To  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard  for  any  purpose  other 
than  relief,  fire,  or  disorder  (Pars.  167  and  173),  a  sentinel  will 
of  his  post.     In  no  case  will  any  sentinel  call,  "  Never  mind 
of  his  post.     In  no  case  will  any  sentinel  call,  "  Never  mind 
the  corporal";  nor  will  the  corporal  heed  such  call  if  given. 

No.  5:  To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved. 

167.  If  relief  becomes  necessary,  by  reason  of  sickness  or 
other  cause,  a  sentinel  will  call,  "  Corporal  of  the  guard,  No. 
( ),  Relief,"  giving  the  number  of  his  post. 

168.  Whenever  a  sentinel  is  to  be  relieved,  he  will  halt,  and 
with  arms  at  a  right  shoulder,  will  face  toward  the  relief, 
when  it  is  30  paces  from  him.     He  will  come  to  a  port  arms 
with  the  new  sentinel,  and  in  a  low  tone  will  transmit  to  him 
all  the  special  orders  relating  to  the  post  and  any  other  infor- 
mation which  will  assist  him  to  better  perform  his  duties. 


276        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

No.  6:  To  receive,  obey,  and  pass  on  to  the  sentinel  who  re- 
lieves me,  all  orders  from  the  commanding  officer,  officer  of 
the  day,  and  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  the 
guard  only. 

169.  During  his  tour  of  duty  a  soldier  is  subject  to  the 
orders  of  the  commanding  officer,  officer  of  the  day,  and  officers 
and  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  .guard  only ;  but  any  officer 
is  competent  to  investigate  apparent  violations  of  regulations 
by  members  of  the  guard. 

170.  A  sentinel  will  quit  his  piece  on  an  explicit  order  from 
any  person  from  whom  he  lawfully  receives  orders  while  on 
post ;  under  no  circumstances  will  he  yield  it  to  any  other  per- 
son.    Unless  necessity  therefor  exists,  no  person  will  require 
a  sentinel  to  quit  his  piece,  even  to  allow  it  to  be  inspected. 

171.  A  sentinel  will  not  divulge  the  countersign   (Pars.  209 
to  217)  to  anyone  except  the  sentinel  who  relieves  him,  or  to 
a  person  from  whom  he  properly  receives  orders,  on  such  per- 
son's verbal  order  given  personally.     Privates  of  the  guard 
will  not  use  the  countersign  except  in   the  performance  of 
their  duties  while  posted  as  sentinels. 

No.  7 :  To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line  of  duty. 

172.  When  calling  for  any  purpose,  challenging,  or  holding 
communication  with  any  person  a  dismounted  sentinel  armed 
with  a  rifle  or  saber  will  take  the  position  of  port  arms  or 
saber.     At  night  a  dismounted  sentinel  armed  with  a  pistol 
takes  the  position  of  raised  pistol  in  challenging  or  holding 
communication.    A  mounted  sentinel  does  not  ordinarily  draw 
his  weapon  in  the  daytime  when  challenging  or  holding  con- 
versation ;  but  if  drawn  he  holds  it  at  advance  rifle,  raise  pis- 
tol, or  port  saber,  according  as  he  is  armed  with  a  rifle,  pistol, 
or  saber.     At  night  in  challenging  and  holding  conversation 
his  weapon  is  drawn  and  held  as  just  prescribed,  depending  on 
whether  he  is  armed  with  a  rifle,  pistol,  or  saber. 

No.  8 :  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  to  give  the  alarm. 

173.  In  case  of  fire,  a  sentinel  will  call.  "Fire,  No.  ( )," 

adding  the  number  of  his  post;  if  possible,  he  will  extinguish 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         277 

the  fire  himself.    In  case  of  disorder  lie  will  call,  "  The  Guard, 

No.  ( ),"  adding  the  number  of  his  post.    If  the  danger  be 

great,  he  will  in  either  case  discharge  his  piece  before  calling. 

No.  11 :  To  salute  all  officers  and  all  colors  and  standards  not 

cased. 

174.  When  not  engaged  in  the  performance  of  a  specific  duty, 
the  proper  execution  of  which  would  prevent  it,  a  member  of 
the  guard  will  salute  all  officers  who  pass  him.     This  rule 
applies  at  all  hours  of  the  day  or  night,  except  in  the  case  of 
mounted  .sentinels  armed  with  a  ritie  or  pistol,  or  dismounted 
.sentinels  armed   with   a  pistol,  after  challenging.      (See  par. 
181. ) 

175.  Sentinels  will  salute  as  follows:  A  dismounted  sentinel 
armed   with  a  rifle  or  saber  salutes  by  presenting  arms;  if 
otherwise  armed,  he  salutes  with  the  right  hand. 

A  mounted  sentinel,  if  armed  with  a  saber  and  the  saber  be 
drawn,  salutes  by  presenting  saber ;  otherwise  he  salutes  in  all 
cases  with  the  right  hand. 

176.  To  salute,  a  dismounted  sentinel,  with  piece  at  a  right 
shoulder  or  saber  ar  a  carry,  halts  and  faces  toward  the  per- 
son to  be  saluted  when  the  latter  arrives  within  80  paces. 

The  limit  within  which  individuals  and  insignia  of  rank  can 
he  readily  recognized  is  assumed  to  be  about  30  paces,  and 
therefore  at  this  distance  cognizance  is  taken  of  the  person 
or  party  to  be  saluted. 

177.  The  salute  is  rendered  at  six  paces ;  if  the  person  to  be 
saluted  <loes  not  arrive  within  that  distance,  then  when  he  is 
nearest. 

178.  A  sentinel  in  a  sentry  box,  armed  with  a  rifle,  stands 
at  attention  in  the  doorway  on  the  approach  of  a  person  or 
party  entitled  to  salute,  and  salutes  by  presenting  arms  ac- 
cording to  the  foregoing  rules. 

If  armed  with  a  saber,  he  stands  at  a  carry  and  salutes  as 
before. 

179.  A  mounted  sentinel  on  a  regular  post,  halts,  faces,  and 
salutes  in   accordance   with   the   foregoing   rules.     If  doing 
patrol  duty,  he  salutes,  but  does  not  halt  unless  spoken  to. 

180.  Sentinels  salute,  in  accordance  with  the  foregoing  rules, 
ail   persons   and   parties   entitled   to   compliments   from   the 


278        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

guards  (Pars.  224,  227,  and  228)  ;  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy, 
and  Marine  Corps;  military  and  naval  officers'  of  foreign 
powers;  officers  of  volunteers  and  militia  officers  when  in 
uniform. 

181.  A  sentinel  salutes  as  just  prescribed  when  an  officer 
comes  on  his  post;  if  the  officer  holds  communication  with  the 
sentinel,  the  sentinel  again  salutes  when  the  officer  leaves  him. 

During  the  hours  when  challenging  is  prescribed,  the  first 
salute  is  given  as  soon  as  the  officer  has  been  duly  recognized 
and  advanced.  A  mounted  sentinel  armed  with  a  rifle  or  pistol, 
or  a  dismounted  sentinel  armed  with  a  pistol,  does  not  salute 
after  challenging. 

He  stands  at  advance  rifle  or  raise  pistol  until  the  officer 
passes. 

182.  In  case  of  the  approach  of  an  armed  party  of  the  guard, 
the  sentinel  will  halt  when  it  is  about  30  paces  from  him, 
facing  toward  the  party  with  his  piece  at  the  right  shoulder. 
If  not  himself  relieved,  he  will,  as  the  party  passes,  place  him- 
self so  that  the  party  will  pass  in  front  of  him ;  he  resumes 
walking  his  post  when  the  party  has  reached  six  paces  beyond 
him. 

183.  An   officer   is   entitled  to  the  compliments  prescribed, 
whether  in  uniform  or  not. 

184.  A  sentinel  in  communication  with  an  officer  will  not 
interrupt  the  conversation  to  salute.     In  the  case  of  seniors 
the  officer  will  salute,  whereupon  the  sentinel  will  salute. 

185.  When  the  flag  is  being  lowered  at  retreat,  a  sentinel  on 
post  and  in  view  of  the  flag  will  face  the  flag,  and,  at  the  first 
note  of  the  Star-Spangled  Banner  or  to  the  color  will  come  to 
a  present  arms.     At  the   sounding  of  the  last  note  he  will 
resume  walking  his  post. 

No.  12 :  To  be  especially  watchful  at  night  and  during  the  time 
for  challenging,  to  challenge  all  persons  on  or^  near  my  post, 
and  to  allow  no  one  to  pass  without  proper  authority. 

186.  During  challenging  hours,  if  a  sentinel  sees  any  person 
or  party  on  or  near  his  post,  he  will  advance  rapidly  along  his 
post  toward  such  person  or  party  and  when  within  about  30 
yards  will  challenge  sharply,  "Halt,  who  is  there?"     He  will 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        279 

place  himself  in  the  best  possible  position  to  receive -or,  if 
necessary,  to  arrest  the  person  or  party. 

187.  In  case  a  mounted  party  be  challenged,  the  sentinel  will 
call,  "Halt,  Dismount    Who  is  there?'' 

188.  The  sentinel  will  permit  only  one  of  any  party  to  ap- 
proach him  for  the  purpose  of  giving  the  countersign   (Pars. 
209  to  217),  or,  if  no  countersign  be  used,  of  being  duly  recog- 
nized.    When  this  is  done  the  whole  party  is  advanced,  i.  e., 
allowed  to  pass. 

189.  In  all  rases  the  sentinel  must  satisfy  himself  beyond  a 
reasonable  doubt  that  the  parties   are  what   they   represent 
themselves  to  be  and  have  a  right  to  pass.     If  he  is  not  satis- 
lied,  he  must  cause  them  to  stand  and  call  the  corporal  of  the 
guard.     So,  likewise,  if  he  have  no  authority  to  pass  persons 
with  the  countersign,  or  when  the  party  has  not  the  counter- 
sign, or  gives  an  incorrect  one. 

190.  A  sentinel  will  not  permit  any  person  to  approach  so 
close  as  to  prevent  the  proper  use  of  his  own  weapon  before 
recognizing  the  person  or  receiving  the  countersign. 

191.  When  two  or  more  persons  approach  in  one  party,  the 
sentinel,  on  receiving  an  answer  that  indicates  that,  some  one 
in  the  party  has  the  countersign,  will  say,  "Advance  one  with 
the   countersign,"   and   if  the  countersign   is  given   correctly, 
will  then  say.  "Advance  (so-and-so),''  repealing  the  answer  to 
his  challenge.     Thus  if  the  answer  be  "Belief   (friend  with 
the  countersign,  patrol,  etc.),"  the  sentinel  will  say,  "Advance 
one  with  the   countersign";    then   "Advance,   relief    (friends, 
patrol,  etc.)." 

192.  If  a  person  having  the  countersign  approach  alone,  he 
is  advanced  to  give  the  countersign.     Thus  if  the  answer  be 
"Friend  with  the  countersign  (or  officer  of  the  day,  or  etc.)," 
the  sentinel  will  say.  "Advance,  friend  (or  officer  of  the  day, 
or   etc.)    with   the   countersign";    then   "Advance,   friend    (or 
officer  of  the  day,  or  etc.)." 

193.  If  two  or  more  persons  approach  a  sentinel's  post  from 
different  directions  at  the  same  Time,   all  such  persons  are 
challenged  in  turn  and  required  to  halt  and  to  remain  halted 
until  advanced. 

The  senior  is  first  advanced,  in  accordance  with  the  fore- 


280        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

194.  If  a  party  is  already  advanced  and  in  communication 
with  a  sentinel,  the  latter  will  challenge  any  other  party  that 
may  approach;  if  the  party  challenged  be  senior  to  the  one 
already  on  his  post,  the  sentinel  will  advance  the  new  party 
at  once.    The  senior  may  allow  him  to  advance  any  or  all  of 
the  other  parties ;  otherwise  the  sentinel  will  not  advance  uny 
of  them  until  the  senior  leaves  him.     He  will  then  advance 
the  senior  only  of  the  remaining  parties,  and  so  on. 

195.  The  following  order  of  rank  will  govern  a  sentinel  in 
advancing  different  persons  or  parties  approaching  his  post: 
Commanding  officers,  officer  of  the  day,  officer  of  the  guard, 
officers,  patrols,  reliefs,  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  guard 
in  order  of  rank,  friends. 

196.  A  sentinel  will  never  allow  himself  to  be  surprised,  nor 
permit  two  parties  to  advance  upon  him  at  the  same  time. 

197.  If  no  countersign  be  used,  the  rules  for  challenging  are 
the  same.     The  rules  for  advancing  parties  are  modified  only 
as  follows:  Instead  of  saying  "Advance   (so-and-so)  with  the 
countersign,"   the  sentinel  will   say   "Advance    (so-and-so)    to 
be  recognized."     Upon  recognition  he  will  say,  "Advance   (so- 
and-so.)" 

198.  Answers  to  a  sentinel's  challenge  intended  to  confuse  or 
mislead  him  are  prohibited,  but  the  use  of  such  an  answer  as 
"  Friends  with  the  countersign,"  is  not  to  be  understood  as 
misleading,  but  as  the  usual  answer  made  by  officers,  patrols, 
etc.,  when  the  purpose  of  their  visit  makes  it  desirable  that 
their  official  capacity  should  not  be  announced. 

SPECIAL  ORDERS  FOR  SENTINELS   AT  THE  POST  OF  THE  GUARD. 

199.  Sentinels  posted  at  the  guard  will  be  required  to  mem- 
orize the  following: 

Between  reveille  and  retreat  to  turn  out  the  guard  for  all 
persons  designated  by  the  commanding*  officer,  for  all  colors  or 
standards  not  cased,  and  in  time  of  war  for  all  armed  parties 
approaching  my  post,  except  troops  at  drill  and  reliefs  and 
detachments  of  the  guard. 

At  night,  after  challenging  any  person  or  party,  to  advance 
no  one  but  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  repeating  the  answer 
to  the  challenge. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         281 

200.  After  receiving  an  answer  to  his  challenge,  the  sentinel 
calls,  "Corporal  of  the  guard  (so-and-so),"  repeating  the  an- 
swer to  the  challenge. 

He  does  not  in  such  cases  repeat  the  number  of  his  post. 

201.  He  remains  in  the  position  assumed  in  challenging  until 
the  corporal  has  recognized  or  advanced  the  person  or  party 
challenged,  when  he  resumes  walking  his  post,  or,  if  the  per- 
son or  party  be  entitled  thereto,  he  salutes  and,  as  soon  as  the 
salute  has  been  acknowledged,  resumes  walking  his  post. 

202.  The  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  will  be  notified  by 
direction  of  the  commanding  officer  of  the  presence  in  camp  or 
garrison  of  persons  entitled  to  the  compliment.     (Par.  224.) 

203.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  manner  in  which 
the  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  will  turn  out  the  guard 
upon  the  approach  of  persons  or  parties  entitled  to  the  compli- 
ment  (Pars.  224,  227,  and  228),  "Turn  out  the  guard,  com- 
manding officer'5;   "Turn  out  the  guard,  governor  of  a  Terri- 
tory";   "Turn   out  the   guard,   national   colors";    "Turn   out 
the  guard,  armed  party";  etc. 

At  the  approach  of  the  new  guard  at  guard  mounting  the 
sentinel  will  call,  "  Turn  out  the  guard,  armed  party." 

204.  Should  the  person  named  by  the  sentinel  not  desire  the 
guard  formed,  he  will  salute,  whereupon  the  sentinel  will  call 
"  Never  mind  the  guard." 

205.  After  having  called  "  Turn  out  the  guard,"  the  sentinel 
will  never  call  "  Never  mind  the  guard,"  on  the  approach  of  an 
armed  party. 

206.  Though  the  guard  be  already  formed  he  will  not  fail  to 
call,  "  Turn  out  the  guard,"  as  required  in  his  special  orders, 
except  that  the  guard  will  not  be  turned  out  for  any  person 
while  his  senior  is  at  or  coming  to  the  post  of  the  guard. 

207.  The  sentinels  at  the  post  of  the  guard  will  warn  the 
commander  of  the  approach  of  any  armed  body  and  of  the 
presence  in  the  vicinity  of  all  suspicious  or  disorderly  per- 
sons. 

208.  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  in  sight  or  hearing,  the  sen- 
tinel at  the  guardhouse  will  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard  and 
report  the  facts  to  him. 


2S2        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Section  11.  Countersigns  and  Paroles. 

209.  fri'roitii-xrrciitli  article  <>/  >'Y/r. — Any  person  subject  to 
military  law  who  makes  known  the  parole  or  countersign  to 
any  person  not  entitled  to  receive  it  according  to  the  rules 
and  discipline  of  war,  or  gives  a  parole  or  countersign  differ- 
ent from  that  which  he  received,  shall,  it'  the  offense  be  rom- 
mitled  in  time  of  war.  suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment 
as  a  court-martial  may  direct.     (See  Par.  171.) 

210.  The  countersign  is  a  word  given  daily  from  the  prin- 
cipal headquarters  of  a  command  to  aid  guards  and  sentinels 
in    identifying   persons   who    may    be    authorized    to    pass    ot 
night. 

It  is  given  to  such  persons  as  may  be  authorized  to  pass 
and  repass  sentinels'  posts  during  the  night,  and  to  officers, 
noncommissioned  officers,  and  sentinels  of  the  guard. 

211.  The  parole  is  a  word  used  as  a  check  on  the  counter- 
sign in  order  to  obtain  more  accurate  identification  of  persons. 
It  is  imparted  only  to  those  who  are  entitled  to  inspect  guards 
and  to  commanders  of  guards. 

The  parole  or  countersign,  or  both,  are  sent  sealed  in  the 
form  of  an  order  to  those  entitled  to  them. 

212.  When  the  commander  of  the  guard  demands  the  parole, 
he  will  advance  and  receive  it  as  the  corporal   receives  the 
countersign.     (See  Par.  133.) 

213.  As  the  communications  containing  the  parole  and  coun- 
tersign must  at  times  be  distributed  by  many  orderlies,  the 
parole  intrusted  to  many  officers,  and  the  countersign   and 
parole  to  many  officers  and  sentinels,  and  as  both  the  counter- 
sign and  parole  must,  for  large  commands,  be  prepared  several 
days  in  advance,  there  is  always  danger  of  their  being  lost  or 
becoming  known  to  persons  who  would  make  improper  use  of 
them ;  moreover,  a  sentinel  is  too  apt  to  take  it  for  granted 
that  any  person  who  gives  the  right  countersign  is  what  he 
represents  himself  to  be;   hence  for  outpost  duty   there  is 
greater  security  in  omitting  the  use  of  the  countersign  and 
parole,  or  in  using  them  with  great  caution.    The  chief  reli- 
ance should  be  upon  personal  recognition  or  identification  of 
all  persons  claiming  authority  to  pass. 

Persons  whose  sole  means  of  identification  is  the  counter- 
sign, or  concerning  whose  authority  to  pass  there  is  a  reason- 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         283 

able  doubt,  should  not  be  allowed  to  pass  without  the  author- 
ity of  the  corporal  of  the  guard  after  proper  investigation ;  the 
corporal  will  take  to  his  next  superior  any  person  about  whom 
he  is  not  competent  to  decide. 

214.  The  countersign  is  usually  the  name  of  a  battle;  the 
parole,  that,  of  a  general  or  other  distinguished  person. 

215.  When  they  can  not  be  communicated  daily,  a  series  of 
words  for  some  days  in  advance  may  be  sent  to  posts  or  de- 
tachments that  are  to  use  the  same  parole  or  countersign  as 
the  main  body. 

216.  If  the  countersign  be  lost,  or  if  a  member  of  the  guard 
deserts  with  it,  the  commander  on  the  spot/will  substitute  an- 
other for  it  arid  report  the  case  at  once  to  headquarters. 

217.  In  addition  to  the  countersign,  use  may  be  made  of  pre- 
concerted signals,  such  as  striking  the  rifle  with  the  hand  or 
striking   the   hands   together   a   certain  number   of  times   as 
agreed  upon.     Such  signals  may  be  used  only  by  guards  that 
occupy  exposed  points. 

They  are  used  before  the  countersign  is  given  and  must  not 
be  communicated  to  anyone  not.  entitled  to  know  the  counter- 
sign. Their  use  is  intended  to  prevent  the  surprise  of  a 
sentinel. 

In  the  daytime  signals  such  as  raising  a  cap  or  a  handker- 
chief in  a  prearranged  manner  may  be  used  by  sentinels  to 
communicate  with  the  guard  or  with  each  other. 
Section  12.  Guard  Patrols. 

218.  A  guard  patrol  consists  of  one  or  more  men  detailed  for 
the  performance  of  some  special  service  connected  with  guard 
duty. 

219.  If  the  patrol  be  required  to  go  beyond  the  chain  of 
sentinels,  the  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  will 
be  furnished  with  the  countersign  and  the  outposts  and  senti- 
nels warned. 

220.  If  challenged  by  a  sentinel,  the  patrol  is  halted  by  its 
commander,  and  the  noncommissioned  officer  accompanying  it 
advances  alone  and  gives  the  countersign. 

Section  13.  Watchmen. 

221.  Enlisted  men  may  be  detailed  as  watchmen  or  as  over- 
seers over  prisoners,  and  as  such  will  receive  their  orders  and 
perform  their  duties  as  the  commanding  officer  may  direct. 


284        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 
Section  14.  Compliments  from  Guards. 

222.  The  compliment  from   a   guard  consists   in   the  guard 
turning  out  and  presenting  arms.     (See  Par.  50.)     No  compli- 
ments will  be  paid  between  retreat  and  reveille  except  as  pro- 
vided in  paragraphs  361  and  362.  nor  will  any  person  other 
than  those  named  in  paragraph  224  receive  the  compliment. 

223.  Though  a  guard  does  not  turn  out,  between  retreat  and 
reveille  as  a  matter  of  compliment,  it  may  be  turned  out  for 
inspection  at  any  time  by  a  person  entitled  to  inspect   it. 

224.  Between  reveille  and  retreat,  the  following  persons  arc 
entitled  to  the  compliment:  The  President:  sovereign  or  chieC 
magistrate  of  a  foreign  country  and  members  of  a  royal  fam- 
ily;  Vice  President:  President  and  President  pro  temporo  of 
the  Senate:  American  and  foreign  ambassadors:  members  ot" 
the  Cabinet :  Chief  Justice :  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives;  committees  of  Congress  officially  visiting  a  milir 
tary  post ;  governors  within  their  respective  States  and  Terri- 
tories;   governors  general:   Assistant   Secretary  of  War  offi- 
cially  visiting   a    military    post:    all    general    officers    of   the 
Army:   general    officers  of   foreign   services    visiting  a    post; 
naval,  marine,   volunteer,  and  militia  officers  in  the  service 
of  the  United  States  and  holding  the  rank  of  general  officer: 
American  or  foreign  envoys  or  ministers :  ministers  accredited 
to   the  United    States :    charge's   d'affaires   accredited   to   the 
United    States:    consuls    general    accredited    to    the    United 
States;   commanding  officer  of  the  post    or  camp:   officer   of 
the  day. 

225.  The   relative  rank  between  officers   of  the   Army   and 
Navy  is  as  follows:  General  with  admiral,  lieutenant  general 
with  vice  admiral,  major  general  with  rear  admiral,  brigadier 
general    with    commodore,1    colonel    with    captain,    lieutenant 
colonel  with  commander,  major  with  lieutenant  commander, 
captain    with    lieutenant,    first    lieutenant    with    lieutenant 
(junior  grade),  second  lieutenant  with  ensign.     (A.  R.  12.) 

1  The  grade  of  commodore  ceased  to  exist  as  a  grade  on  the  active 
list  of  the  Navy  of  the  United  States  on  Mar.  3,  1809.  By  section  7 
of  the  act  of  Mar.  3,  1899,  the  nine  junior  rear  admirals  are  author- 
ized to  receive  the  pay  and  allowances  of  a  brigadier  general  of  the 
Army. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         285 

226.  Sentinels  will  not  be  required  to  memorize  paragraph 
224,  and,  except  in  the  cases  of  general  officers  of  the  Army, 
the  commanding  officer  and  the  officer  of  the  day  will  be  ad- 
vised in  each  case  of  the  presence  in  camp  or  garrison  of  per- 
sons entitled  to  the  compliment. 

227.  Guards  will  turn  out  and  present  arms  when  the  na- 
tional or  regimental  colors  or  standards,  not  cased,  are  car- 
ried past  by  a  guard  or  an  armed  party.     This  rule  also  ap- 
plies when  the  party  carrying  the  colors  is  at  drill.     If  the 
drill  is  conducted  in  the  vicinity  of  the  guardhouse,  the  guard 
will  be  turned  out  when  the  colors  first  pass,  and  not  there- 
after. 

228.  In  case  the  remains  of  a  deceased  officer  or  soldier  are 
carried  past,  the  guard  will  turn  out  and  present  arms. 

229.  In  time  of  war  all  guards  will  turn  out  under  arms 
when  armed  parties,  except  troops  at  drill  and  reliefs  or  de- 
tachments of  the  guard,  approach  their  post.     ( See  Par.  53. ) 

230.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  be  notified  of  the 
presence  in  camp  or  garrison  of  all  persons  entitled  to  the 
compliment  except  general  officers  of  the  Army,  the  command- 
ing officer,  and  the  officer  of  the  day.    Members  of  the  guard 
will  salute  all  persons  entitled  to  the  compliment  and  all  offi- 
cers in  the  military  or  naval  service  of  foreign  powers,  officers 
of  the  Army,  Navy,  and  Marine  Corps,  officers  of  volunteers, 
and  officers  of  militia  when  in  uniform. 

GENERAL  RULES  CONCERNING  GUARD  DUTY. 

232.  Eighty-fifth  article  of  war. —     *     *     *     Any  person  sub- 
ject to  military  law,  except  an  officer,  who  is  found  drunk  on 
duty  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

233.  All   material  instructions   given  to   a   member   of  the 
guard  by  an  officer  having  authority  will  be  promptly  com- 
municated to  the  commander  of  the  guard  by  the  officer  giv- 
ing them. 

234.  Should  the  guard  be  formed,  soldiers  will  fall  in  ranks 
under  arms.     At  roll  call  each  man,  as  his  name  or  number 
and  relief  are  called,  will  answer  "  Here,"  and  come  to  an 
order  arms. 

235.  Whenever  the  guard  or  a  relief  is  dismissed,  each  mem- 
ber not  at  once  required  for  duty  will  place  his  rifle  in  the 


286        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

arm  racks1,  if  they  be  provided,  and  will  not  remove  it  there- 
from unless  he  requires  it  in  the  performance  of  some  duty. 

236.  Without  permission  from  the  commander  of  the  guard, 
members  of  the  main  guard,  except  orderlies,  will  not  leave 
the   immediate   vicinity    of   the   guardhouse.     Permission   to 
leave  will  not  be  granted  except  in  cases  of  necessity. 

237.  Members  of  the  main  guard,  except  orderlies,  will  not 
remove  their  accouterments  or  clothing  without  permission 
from  the  commander  of  the  guard.     (Par.  66.) 

Section  15.  Prisoners. 

238.  Articles  of  war  69,  TO,  71,  72,  and  73  have  special  ref- 
erence to  the  confinement  of  prisoners  and  should  be  care- 
fully borne  in  mind. 

239.  The  commander  of  the  guard  will  place  a  civilian  in 
confinement  on  an  order  from  higher  authority  only,  unless 
such  civilian  is  arrested  while  in  the  act  of  committing  some 
crime  within  the  limits  of  the  military  jurisdiction,  in  which 
case  the  commanding  officer  will  be  immediately  notified. 

240.  Except  as  provided  in  the  sixty-eighth  article  of  war. 
or   when   restraint  is  necessary,   no  soldier  will   be  confined 
without  the  order  of  an  officer,  who  shall  previously  inquire 
into  his  ofTense.     (A.  K.  930.) 

241.  An  officer  ordering  a  soldier  into  confinement  will  send. 
as  soon  as  practicable,  a  written  statement,  signed  by  himself, 
to  the  commander  of  the  guard,  setting  forth  the  name,  com- 
pany, and  regiment  of  such  soldier,  and  a  brief  statement  of 
the  alleged  offense.    It  is  a  sufficient  statement  of  the  offense, 
to  give  the  number  and  article  of  war  under  which  the  soklior 
is  charged. 

242.  A  prisoner,  after  his  first  day  of  confinement,  and  until 
his  sentence  has  been  duly  promulgated,  is  considered  as  held 
in  confinement  by  the  commanding  officer.    After  due  promul- 
gation of  his  sentence,  the  prisoner  is  held  in  confinement  by 
authority  of  the  officer  who  reviews  the  proceedings  of  the 
court  awarding  sentence.     The  commander  of  the  guard  will 
state  in  his  report,  in  the  proper  place,  the  name  of  the  officer 
by  whom-  the  prisoner  was  originally  confined. 

243.  Enlisted   men  against  whom  charges  have  been  pre- 
ferred will  be  designated  as  "awaiting  trial"  ;  enlisted  men 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         287 

who  have  been  tried  will,  prior  to  the  promulgation  of  the 
result,  be  designated  as  "  awaiting  result  of  trial "  ;  enlisted 
men  serving  sentences  of  confinement  not  involving  dishonor- 
able discharge  will  be  designated  as  "  garrison  prisoners." 
Persons  sentenced  to  dismissal  or  dishonorable  discharge  and 
to  terms  of  confinement  at  military  posts  or  elsewhere  will  be 
designated -as  "'general  prisoners."  (A.  R.  928.) 

244.  The  sentences  of  prisoners  will  be  read  to  them         >n 
the  order  promulgating  the  same  is  received.     The  officer  of 
the  guard,  or  the  officer  of  the  day  if  there  be  no  officer  of  the 
guard,  will  read  them  unless  the  commanding  officer  shall 
direct  otherwise. 

245.  When  the  date  for  the  commencement  of  a  term  of  con- 
finement imposed  by  sentence  of  a  court-martial  is  not  ex- 
pressly fixed  by  sentence,  the  term  of  confinement  begins  on 
the  date  of  the  order  promulgating  it.     The  sentence  is  con- 
tinuous until  the  term  expires,  except  when  the  person  sen- 
tenced is  absent  without  authority.     (A.  R.  969.) 

246.  When  soldiers  awaiting  trial  or  the  result  of  trial,  or 
undergoing  sentence  commit  offenses  for  which  they  are  tried, 
the  second  sentence  will  be  executed  upon  the  expiration  of 
the  first. 

247.  Prisoners  awaiting  trial  by,  or  undergoing  sentence  of, 
a  general  court-martial  and  those  confined  for  serious  offenses 
will  be  kept  apart,  when  practicable,  from  those  confined  by 
sentence  of  an  inferior  court  or  for  minor  offenses.     Enlisted 
men  in  confinement  for  minor  offenses,  or  awaiting  trial  or  the 
result  of  trial  for  the  same,  will  ordinarily  be  sent  to  work 
under  charge  of  unarmed  overseers  instead  of  armed  sentinels 
and  will  be  required  to  attend  drills  unless  the  commanding 
officer  shall  direct  otherwise. 

248.  Prisoners,   other  than   general  prisoners,   will  be  fur- 
nished with  food  from  their  respective  companies  or  from  the 
organizations  to  which  they  may  be  temporarily  attached. 

The  food  of  prisoners  will,  when  practicable,  be  sent  to  their 
places  of  confinement,  but  post  commanders  may  arrange  to 
send  the  prisoners,  under  proper  guard,  to  their  messes  for 
meals. 

When  there  is  no  special  mess  for  general  prisoners,  they 
will  be  attached  for  rations  to  companies. 


288         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Knlisted  men  bringing  meals  for  the  prisoners  will  not  he 
allowed  to  enter  the  prison  room.  (See  Tar.  U^.u 

249.  With  the  exception  <»r  ihose  specially  designated  by  the 
commanding  officer,  no  prisoners  will  be  allowed  to  leave  the 
guardhouse  unless  under  charge  of  a  sentinel  and  passed  by  an 
oMicer   or    noncommissioned   officer   of   the   guard.     The   mm 
manding  officer  may  authorize  certain  garrison  prisoners  and 
paroled  general  prisoners  to  leave  the  guardhouse,  not  under 
the  c>  •  n  sentinel,  for  the  purpose  of  working  outside 
under  such  surveillance  and  restrictions  as  he  may  impo>e. 

250.  Prisoners  reporting  themselves  sick  at   sick  call,  or  ai 
the  time  designated  by  the  commanding  otticer,  will  be  seat  to 
the  hospital  under  charge  of  proper  guard,  with  a  sjck  ropori 
kept    for    the   purpose.     The   recommendation    of   the    >urge-»n 
will  be  entered  in  the  guard  report. 

251.  The  sernrity  of  sick  prisoners  in  the  hospital  devolve* 
upon  the  po>i  surgeon,  who  will,  if  necessary,  apply  to  the  post 
commander  for  a  guard. 

252.  Prisoners   will   be  paraded   with   the   guard  only    when 
directed  by  the  commanding  oltirer  or  the  officer  of  the  day. 

253.  A  prisoner  under  charge  of  a  sentinel  will  not  salute  an 

officer. 

254.  All    serviceable   clothing   which    belongs   to   a    prisoner, 
and  his  blankets,  will  accompany  him  to  the  post   designated 
for  his  confinement,  and  will  be  fully  itemized  on  the  clothing 

•nt  to  thai  post.  The  guard  in  charge  of  the  prisoner 
during  transfer  will  be  furnished  with  a  duplicate  of  this  list, 
and  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  delivery  of  all  articles 
itemized  therein  with  the  prisoner.  At.  least  one  serviceable 
Avoolen  blanket  will  i»c  sent  with  every  such  prisoner  so  trans 
ferred.  <  A.  K.  S)3'.U 

255.  When  mattresses  are  not  supplied,  each  prisoner  in  the 
guardhouse  will  be  allowed  a  bed  sack  and  ">o  pounds  of  straw 
per  month  for  bedding.     So  far  as  practicable  iron  bunks  will 
be  furnished  to  all  prisoners  in  post  guardhouses  and  prison 
rooms.     (A.  K.  1084.) 

If  the  number  of  prisoners,  including  general  prisoners, 
confined  at  a  post  justifies  it,  the  commanding  officer  will 
detail  a  commissioned  officer  as  "  officer  in  charge  of  prison- 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        289 

ers."     At  posts  \vhere  the  average  number  of  prisoner 
tinually  in  confinement  is  less  than  12,  the  detail  of  an  o!li< -IT 
in  charge  of  prisoners  will  not  be  made. 

Section  16.  Guarding  Prisoners. 

299.  The  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  has  charge  of  the 
prisoners  except  when  they  have  been  turned  over  to  the  pris- 
oner guard  or  overseers.     (Pars.  247  and  ,4>00  to  304.) 

(a)  He  will  allow  none  to  escape. 

(b)  He  will  allow  none  to  cross  his  post  leaving  the  guard- 
house except  when  passed  by  an  officer  or  noncommissioned 
officer  of  the  guard. 

(c)  He  will  allow  no  one  to  communicate  with  prisoners 
without  permission  from  proper  authority. 

(d)  He  will  promptly  report  to  the  corporal  of  the  guard  any 
suspicious  noise  made  by  the  prisoners. 

(e)  He  will  be  prepared  to  tell,  whenever  asked,  how  many 
prisoners  are   in  the  guardhouse  and  how  many  are   out  at 
work  or  elsewhere. 

Whenever  prisoners  are  brought  to  his  post  returning  from 
work  or  elsewhere,  he  will  halt  them  and  call  the  corporal  of 
the  guard,  notifying  him  of  the  number  of  prisoners  returning. 
Thus :  "  Corporal  of  the  guard,  (so  many)  prisoners." 

He  will  not  allow  prisoners  to  pass;  into  the  guardhouse 
until  the  corporal  of  the  guard  has  responded  to  the  call  and 
ordered  him  to  do  so. 

300.  Whenever  practicable,  special  guards  will  be  detailed 
for  the  particular  duty  of  guarding  working  parties  composed 
of  such  prisoners  as  can  not  be  placed  under  overseers.     (Par. 
247.) 

301.  The  prisoner  guard  and  overseers  will  be  commanded 
by  the  police  officer ;  if  there  be  no  police  officer,  then  by  the 
officer  of  the  day. 

302.  The  provost  sergeant  is  sergeant  of  the  prisoner  guard 
and  overseers,   and   as  such  receives  orders  from  the  com- 
manding officer  and  the  commander  of  the  prisoner  guard 
only. 

303.  Details  for  prisoner  guard  are  inarched  to  the  guard- 
house and  mounted  by  being  inspected  by  the  commander  of 

.     :J663— 17- 11 


290        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

the  main  guard,  who  determines  whether  all  of  the  men  are  in 
proper  condition  to  perform  their  duties  and  whether  their 
arms  and  equipments  are  in  proper  condition,  and  rejects  any 
men  found  unfit. 

304.  When  prisoners  have  been  turned  over  to  the  prisoner 
guard  or  overseers,  such  guards  or  overseers  are  responsible 
for  them  under  their  commander,  and  all  responsibility  and 
control  of  the  main  guard  ceases  until  they  are  returned  to 
the  main  guard.     (Par.  306.) 

305.  If  a  prisoner  attempts  to  escape,  the  sentinel  will  call 
'*  Halt."     If  he  fails  to  halt  when  the  sentinel  has  once  re- 
peated his  call,  and  if  there  be  no  other  possible  means  of  pre- 
venting his  escape,  the  sentinel  will  fire  upon  him. 

The  following  will  more  fully  explain  the  important  duties 
of  a  sentinel  in  this  connection: 

(Circular.)  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

ADJUTANT  GENERAL'S  OFFICE, 

Washington,  November  1,  1887. 

By  direction  of  the  Secretary  of  War,  the  following  is  pub- 
lished for  the  information  of  the  Army: 

UNITED    STATES    CIRCUIT    COURT,    EASTERN    DISTRICT    OF    MICHIGAN, 
AUGUST  1,  1887. 

THE  UNITED  STATES  V.  JAMES  CLARK. 

The  circuit  court  has  jurisdiction  of  a  homicide  committed  by  one 
soldier  upon  another  within  a  military  reservation  of  the  United 
States. 

If  a  homicide  be  committed  by  a  military  guard  without  malice 
and  in  the  performance  of  his  supposed  duty  as  a  soldier,  such  homi- 
cide is  excusable,  unless  it  was  manifestly  beyond  the  scope  of  his 
authority  or  was  such  that  a  man  of  ordinary  sense  and  understand- 
ing would  know  that  it  was  illegal. 

It  seems  that  the  sergeant  of  the  guard  has  a  right  to  shoot  a 
military  convict  if  there  be  no  other  possible  means  of  preventing  his 
escape. 

The  common-law  distinction  between  felonies  and  misdemeanors 
has  no  application  to  military  offenses. 

While  the  finding  of  a  court  of  inquiry  acquitting  the  prisoner  of 
all  blame  is  not  a  legal  bar  to  a  prosecution,  it  is  entitled  to  weight 
as  an  expression  of  the  views  of  the  military  court  of  the  necessity 
of  using  a  musket  to  prevent  the  escape  of  the  deceased. 

***** 


MANUAL  FOB,  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEHS.        201 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War : 

R.  C.  DBUM,  Adjutant  General. 

The  following  is  taken  from  Circular  No.  3,  of  1883,  from 
Headquarters  Department  of  the  Columbia : 

VANCOUVEB  BARBACKS,  W.  T.,  April  20,  188$. 
To  the  ASSISTANT  ADJUTANT  GENEBAI^ 

Department  of  the  Columbia. 
SIR: 

*  *  *  *  • 

A  sentinel  is  placed  as  guard  over  prisoners  to  prevent  their 
escape,  and,  for  this  purpose,  he  is  furnished  a  musket,  with 
ammunition.  To  prevent  escape  is  his  first  and  most  im- 
portant duty. 

$  *  *  *  * 

I  suppose  the  law  to  be  this:  That  a  sentinel  shall  not  use 
more  force  or  violence  to  prevent  the  escape  of  a  prisoner  than 
is.  necessary  to  effect  that  object,  but  if  the  prisoner,  after 
being  ordered  to  halt,  continues  his  flight  the  sentinel  may 
maim  or  even  kill  him,  and  it  is  his  duty  to  do  so. 

A  sentinel  who  allows  a  prisoner  to  escape  without  firing 
upon  him,  and  firing  to  hit  him,  is,  in  my  judgment,  guilty  of 
a  most  serious  military  offense,  for  which  he  should  and  would 
be  severely  punished  by  a  general  court-martial. 

***** 

(Signed)  HENBY  A.  MOBBOW, 

Colonel  Twenty-first  Infantry,  Commanding  Post. 

[Third  indorsement.] 

OFFICE  JUDGE  ADVOCATE, 
MILITARY  DIVISION  OF  THE  PACIFIC, 

May  11,  1S83. 

Respectfully  returned  to  the  assistant  adjutant  general, 
Military  Division  of  the  Pacific,  concurring  fully  in  the  views 
expressed  by  Col.  Morrow.  I  was  not  aware  that  such  a  view 
had  ever  been  questioned.  That  the  period  is  a  time  of  peace 
does  not  affect  the  authority  and  duty  of  the  sentinel  or  guard 
to  fire  upon  the  escaping  prisoner,  if  this  escape  can  not  other- 


202        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEES. 

wise  be  prevented.  He  should,  of  course,  attempt  to  stop  the 
prisoner  before  firing  by  ordering  him  to  halt,  and  will  prop- 
erly warn  him  by  the  words  "  Halt,  or  I  fire,"  or  words  to  such 
effect. 

W.  WINTHEOP,  Judge  Advocate. 

[Fourth  indorsement.] 

HEADQUARTERS  MILITARY  DIVISION  or  THE  PACIFIC, 

May  11,  1883. 

Respectfully  returned  to  the  commanding  general,  Depart- 
ment of  the  Columbia,  approving  the  opinion  of  the  command- 
ing officer,  Twenty-first  Infantry,  and  of  the  judge  advocate  of 
the  division,  in  respect  to  the  duty  of  and  method  to  be 
adopted  by  sentinels  in  preventing  prisoners  from  escaping.  > 
***** 

By  command  of  Maj.  Gen.  Schofield : 

J.  C.  KELTON, 
Assistant  Adjutant  General. 

See  also  Circular  No.  53,  A.  G.  O.,  December  22,  1900. 

306.  On  approaching  the  post  of  the  sentinel  at  the  guard- 
house, a  sentinel  of  the  prisoner  guard  or  an  overseer  in  charge 
of  prisoners  will  halt  them  and  call,  "No.  1,  (so  many)  pris- 
oners."   He  will  not  allowT  them  to  cross  the  post  of  the  sen- 
tinel until  so  directed  by  the  corporal  of  the  guard. 

307.  Members  of  the  prisoner  guard  and  overseers  placed 
over  prisoners  for  work  will  receive  specific  and  explicit  in- 
structions   covering   the   required    work ;    they    will   be    held 
strictly  responsible  that  the  prisoners  under  their  charge  prop- 
erly and  satisfactorily  perform  the  designated  work. 

Section  17.  Stable  guards. 

STABLE   GUARDS. 

308.  Under  the  head  of  stable  guards  will  be  included  guards 
for  cavalry  stables,  artillery  stables  and  parks,  mounted  infan- 
try stables,  machine-gun  organization  stables  and  parks,  and 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        293 

quartermaster  stables  and  parks.  Where  the  words  "  troop  " 
and  "  cavalry  "  are  used,  they  will  be  held  to  include  all  of 
these  organizations. 

309.  When  troop  stable  guards  are  mounted  they  will  guard 
the  stables  of  the  cavalry    (see  Par.   13).     When  no  stable 
guards  are  mounted  the  stables  will  be  guarded  by  sentinels 
posted  from  the  main  guard  under  the  control  of  the  officer  of 
the  day. 

The  instructions  given  for  troop  stable  guard  will  be  ob- 
served as  far  as  applicable  by  the  noncommissioned  officers 
and  sentinels  of  the  main  guard  when  in  charge  of  the  stables. 

TBOOP   STABLE   GUARDS. 

310.  Troop  stable  guards  will  not  be  used  except  in  the 
field,  or  when  it  is  impracticable  to*  guard  the  stables  by  sen- 
tinels from  the  main  guard. 

311.  Troop  stable  guards  will  be  under  the  immediate  con- 
trol of  their  respective  troop  commanders ;  they  will  be  posted 
in,each  cavalry  stable  or  near  the  picket  line,  and  will  consist 
of  not  less  than  one  noncommissioned  officer  and  three  pri- 
vates. 

Stable  guards  are  for  the  protection  of  the  horses,  stables, 
forage,  equipments,  and  public  property  generally.  They  will, 
in  addition,  enforce  the  special  regulations  in  regard  to  stn- 
bles,  horses,  and  parks. 

312.  Sentinels  of  stable  guards  will  be  posted  at  the  stables 
or  at  the  picket  lines  when  the  horses  are  kept  outside.     The 
troop  stable  guard  may  be  used  as  a  herd  guard  during  the 
day  time  or  when  grazing  is  practicable. 

313.  The  troop  stable  guard,  when  authorized  by  the  post 
commander,  will  be  mounted   under  the  supervision  oJP  the 
troop  commander.    It  will  be  armed,  at  the  discretion  of  the 
troop  commander,  with  either  rifle  or  pistol. 

314.  The  tour  continues  for  24  hours,  or  until  the  guard  is 
relieved  by  a  new  guard. 

315.  The  employment  of  stable  guards  for  police  and  fatigue 
duties  at  the  stables  is  forbidden ;  but  this  will  not  prohibit 
them  from  being  required  to  assist  in  feeding  grain  before 
reveille. 


294         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

316.  The  troop  stable  guard  will  attend  stables  with  the  rest 
of  the  troop  and,  groom  their  own  horses,  the  sentinels  being 
taken  off  post  for  the  purpose. 

317.  Neither  the  noncommissioned  officer  nor  the  members 
of  the  stable  guard  will  absent  themselves  from  the  immedi- 
ate vicinity  of  the  stables  except  in  case  of  urgent  necessity, 
and  then  for  no  longer  time  than  is  absolutely  necessary.    No 
member  of  the  guard  will  leave  for  any  purpose  without  the 
authority  of  the  noncommissioned  officer  of  the  guard. 

318.  The  noncommissioned  officer  and  one  member  of  the 
stable  guard  will  go  for  meals  at  the  proper  hour ;  upon  their 
return  the  other  members  of  the  guard  will  be  directed  to  go 
by  the  noncommissioned  officer. 

319.  When  the  horses  are  herded  each  troop  will  furnish  its 
own  herd  guard.     (Par.  14.) 

320.  Smoking  in  the  staples  or  their  immediate  vicinity  is 
prohibited.      No    fire   or    light,    other   than    electric   light   or 
stable  lanterns,  will  be  permitted  in  the  stables.     A  special 
place  will  be  designated  for  trimming,  filling,   and  lighting 

lanterns.  9 

i 

NONCOMMISSIONED    OFFICER   OF   THE   TEOOP    STABLE    GUABD. 

321.  The  noncommissioned  officer  receives  his  orders  from 
his  troop  commander,   to  whom  he  will   report  immediately 
after   posting   his   first   relief,   and   when   relieved   will   turn 
over  all  his  orders  to  his  successor.    He  instructs  his  sentinels 
in  their  general  and  special  duties;  exercises  general  super- 
vision over  his  entire  guard  ;  exacts  order  and  cleanliness  about 
the  guardroom ;  prevents  the  introduction  of  intoxicants  into 
the  guardhouse  and  stables ;  receives,  by  count,  from  his  pre- 
decessor,   the   animals,    horse   equipments,    and    all   property 
(both  private  .and  public)   pertaining  thereto;  examines,  be- 
fore relieving  his  predecessor,  all  locks,  windows,  and  doors, 
and  should  any  be  found  insecure  he  will  report  the  fact  to 
his  troop  commander  when  he  reports  for  orders.     He  will 
personally    post    and    relieve    each    sentinel,    taking   care    to 
verify  the  property  responsibility  of  the  sentinel  who  comes 
off  post,  and  see  that  the  sentinel  who  goes  on  post  is  aware 
of  the  property  responsibility  that  he  assumes. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        295 

322.  That  the  noncommissioned  officer  may  be  more  thor- 
oughly  informed  of  his  responsibility,   all  horses  returning*, 
except  those  from  a  regular  formation,  will  be  reported  to 
him.     He  will  then  notify  the  sentinel  on  post,  and,  in  the 
absence  of  the  stable  sergeant,  will  see  that  the  horses  are 
promptly  cared  for. 

In  case  of  abuse,  he  will  promptly  report  ta  the  troop  com- 
mander. Should  the  horse  be  the  private  property  of  an 
officer,  he  will  report  such  abuse  to  the  owner. 

323.  The  noncommissioned  officer  will  report  any  unusual 
occurrence  during  his  tour  direct  to  his  troop  commander. 

324.  Horses  and  other  property  for  which  the  noncommis- 
sioned officer  is  responsible  will  not  be  taken  from  the  stables 
without  the  authority  of  the  post  or  troop  commander. 

325.  The  noncommissioned  officer  must  answer  the  sentinel's 
calls  promptly. 

326.  In  case  of  fire,  the  noncommissioned  officer  will  see  that 
the  requirements  of  paragraph  334  are  promptly  carried  out. 

327.  Whenever   it   becomes   necessary   for    the   noncommis- 
sioned officer  to  leave  his  guard,  he  will  designate  a  member 
of  it  to  take  charge  and  assume  his  responsibility  during  his 
absence. 

SENTINELS  OF  THE  TBOOP   STABLE  GUAED. 

328.  The  sentinel  in  the  discharge  of  his  duties  will  be  gov- 
erned by   the  regulations   for   sentinels  of  the   main   guard 
whenever  they  are  applicable — such  as  courtesies  to  officers, 
walking   post   in   a    soldierly    manner,    challenging,   etc. ;    he 
will  not  turn  out  the  guard  except  when  ordered  by  proper 
authority. 

329.  The  sentinel  will  receive  orders  from  the  commanding 
officer,  the  troop  commander,  and  the  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers of  the  stable  guard  only,  except  when  the  commanding 
officer  directs   the  officer  of  the  day   to  inspect  the  stable 
guard. 

330.  In  the  field  and  elsewhere  when  directed  by  the  com- 
manding officer  the  sentinel  when  posted  will  verify  the  num- 
ber of  horses  for  which  he  is  responsible,  and  when  relieved 
will  give  the  number  to  his  successor. 


296        MANUAL  FOK  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

331.  The  sentinel  will  not  permit  any  horse  or  equipments 
to  be  taken  from  the  stables,  except  in  the  presence  of  the 
noncommissioned  officer. 

332.  Should  a  horse  get  loose,  the  sentinel  will  catch  him 
and  tie  him  up.     If  he  be  unable  to  catch  the  horse,  the  non- 
commissioned officer  will  at  once  be  notified.    In  case  a  horse 
be  cast,  or  in  any  way  entangled,  he  will  relieve  him,  if  possi- 
ble ;  if  unable  to  relieve  him,  he  will  call  the  noncommissioned 
officer.    Sentinels  are  forbidden  to  punish  or  maltreat  a  horse. 

333.  When  a  horse  is  taken  sick,  the  sentinel  will  notify  the 
noncommissioned   officer,   who   in   turn   will   call   the  farrier 
and  see  that  the  horse  is  properly  attended  to. 

334.  In  case  of  fire  the  sentinel  will  give  the  alarm  by  step- 
ping outside  the  stable  and  firing  his  pistol  or  piece  repeat- 
edly, and  calling  out  at  the  same  time,  "  Fire,  stables,  Troop 

( )•" 

As  soon  as  the  guard  is  alarmed,  he  will  take  the  necessary 
precautions  in  opening  or  closing  the  doors  so  as  to  prevent 
the  spreading  of  the  fire  and  make  it  possible  to  remove  the 
horses ;  he  will  drop  the  chains  and  bars,  and,  with  the  other 
members  of  the  guard,  proceed  to  lead  out  the  horses  and 
secure  them  at  the  picket  line  or  such  other  place  as  may  have 
been  previously  designated. 

335.  Sentinels  over  horses,  or  in  charge  of  prisoners,  receive 
orders  from  the  stable  sergeant,  so  far  as  the  care  of  the  horses 
and  the  labor  of  prisoners  are  concerned. 

336.  In   field   artillery  and   machine-gun  organizations,   the 
guard  for  the  stables  has  charge  of  the  guns,  caissons,  etc., 
with  their  ammunition  and  stores,  as  well  as  the  horses,  har- 
ness, and  forage. 

Section  18.  Flags. 

337.  The  garrison,  post,  and  storm  flags  are  national  flags 
and  shall  be  of  bunting.    The  union  of  each  is  as  described  in 
paragraph  216,  Army  Regulations,  and  shall  be  of  the  follow- 
ing proportions :  Width,  seven-thirteenths  of  the  hoist  of  the 
Hag;  length,  seventy-six  one-hundredths  of  the  hoist  of  the 
flag. 

The  garrison  flag  will  have  38  feet  fly  and  20  feet  hoist.  It 
will  be  furnished  only  to  posts  designated  in  orders  from  time 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        297 

to  time  from  the  War  Department,  and  will  be  hoisted  only 
on  holidays  and  important  occasions. 

The  post  flag  will  have  19  feet  fly  and  10  feet  hoist.  It  will 
be  furnished  for  all  garrison  posts  and  will  be  hoisted  in 
pleasant  weather. 

The  storm  flag  will  have  9  feet  6  inches  fly  and  5  feet  hoist. 
It  will  be  furnished  for  all  occupied  posts  for  use  in  stormy 
and  windy  weather.  It  will  also  be  furnished  to  national 
cemeteries.  (A.  R.  223.) 

338.  At   every   military   post   or   station   the   flag   will   be 
hoisted  at  the  sounding  of  the  first  note  of  the  reveille,  or  of 
the  first  note  of  the  march,  if  a  march  be  played  before  the 
reveille.    The  flag  will  be  lowered  at  the  sounding  of  the  last 
note  of  the  retreat,  while  the  flag  is  being  lowered  the  band 
will   play   "  The   Star-Spangled   Banner,"   or,   if  there  be  no 
band  present,  the  field  music  will  sound  "  to  the  color."    When 
"  to  the  color  "  is  sounded  by  the  field  music  while  the  flag 
is  being  lowered  the  same  respect  will  be  observed  as  when 
"  The  Star-Spangled  Banner  "  is  played  by  the  band,  and  in 
either  case  officers  and  enlisted  men  out  of  ranks  will  face 
toward  the  flag,  stand  at  attention,  and  render  the  prescribed 
salute  at  the  last  note  of  the  music.     (A.  R.  437.) 

The  lowering  of  the  flag  will  be  so  regulated  as  to  be  com- 
pleted at  the  last  note  of  "  The  Star-Spangled  Banner  "  or 
"  to  the  color." 

339.  The  national  flag  will  be  displayed  at  a  seacoast  or  lake 
fort  at  the  beginning  of  and  during  an  action  in  which  a  fort 
may  be  engaged,  whether  by  day  or  by  night.     (A.  R.  437.) 

340.  The  national  flag  will  always  be  displayed  at  the  time 
of  firing  a  salute.     (A.  R.  397.) 

341.  The  flag  of  a  military  post  will  not  be  dipped  by  way 
of  salute  or  compliment.     (A.  R.  405.) 

342.  On  the  death  of  an  officer  at  a  military  post  the  flag  is 
displayed  at  halfstaff  and  so  remains  between  reveille  and 
retreat  until  the  last  salvo  or  volley  is  fired  over  the  grave; 
or  if  the  remains  are  not  interred  at  the  post  until  they  are 
removed  therefrom.     (A.  R.  422.) 

343.  During  the  funeral  of  an  enlisted  man  at  a  military 
post  the  flag  is  displayed  at  halfstaff.    It  is  hoisted  to  the  top 
after  the  final  volley  or  gun  is  fired  or  after  the  remains  are 


298        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

taken  from  the  post.    The  same  honors  are  paid  on  the  occa- 
sion of  the  funeral  of  a  retired  enlisted  man.     (A.  R.  423.) 

344.  When  practicable,  a  detail  consisting  of  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer  and  two  privates  of  the  guard  will  raise  or  lower 
the  flag.    This  detail  wears  side  arms  or  if  the  special  equip- 
ments do  not  include  side  arms  then  belts  only. 

The  noncommissioned  officer,  carrying  the  flag,  forms  the 
detail  in  line,  takes  his  post  in  the  center  and  marches  it  to 
the  staff.  The  flag  is  then  securely  attached  to  the  halyards 
and  rapidly  hoisted.  The  halyards  are  then  securely  fastened 
to  the  cleat  on  the  staff  and  the  detail  marched  to  the  guard- 
house. 

345.  When   the   flag   is   to   be   lowered,    the   halyards   are 
loosened  from  the  staff  and  made  perfectly  free.     At  retreat 
the  flag  is  lowered  at  the  last  note  of  retreat.     It  is  then 
neatly  folded  and  the  halyards  made  fast.    The  detail  is  then 
re-formed  and  marched  to  the  guardhouse,  where  the  flag  is 
turned  over  to  the  commander  of  the  guard. 

The  flag  should  never  be  allowed  to  touch  the  ground  and 
should  always  be  hoisted  or  lowered  from  the  leewrard  side  of 
the  staff,  the  halyards  being  held  by  two  persons. 

Section  19.  Reveille  and  Retreat  Gun. 

346.  The  morning  and  evening  gun  will  be  fired  by  a  detach- 
ment of  the  guard,  consisting,  when  practicable,  of  a  corporal 
and  two  privates.    The  morning  gun  is  fired  at  the  first  note 
of  reveille,  or,  if  marches  be  played  before  the  reveille,  it  is 
fired  at  the  beginning  of  the  first  march.    The  retreat  gun  is 
fired  at  the  last  note  of  retreat. 

The  corporal  marches  the  detachment  to  and  from  the  piece, 
which  is  fired,  sponged  out,  and  secured  under  his  direction. 

Section  20.  Guard  Mounting. 

347.  Guard  mounting  will  be  formal  or  informal  as  the  com- 
manding officer  may  direct.     It  will  be  held  as  prescribed  in 
the  drill  regulations  of  the  arm  of  the  service  to  which  the 
guard  belongs.    If  none  is  prescribed,  then  as  for  infantry.    In 
case  the  guard. is  composed  wholly  of  mounted  organizations, 
guard  mounting  may  be  held  mounted. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        299 

348.  When  Infantry  and  mounted  troops  dismounted  are 
united  for  guard  mounting,  all  details  form  as  prescribed  for 
Infantry. 

FORMAL   GUARD   MOUNTING — MOUNTED. 
(Extract  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations,   1916.) 

857.  Formal  guard  mounting  will  ordinarily  be  held  only  in 
posts  or  camps  where  a  band  is  present.     At  the  assembly 
the  men  of  each  troop  designated  for  guard  form  at  stand  to 
horse  on   their  troop  parade  grounds,   the  noncommissioned 
officers  falling  in  as  file  closers;  the  supernumeraries  do  not 
fall  in ;  each  first  sergeant  verifies  his  detail  and  inspects  the 
dress  and  general  appearance,  replaces  any  man  unfit  to  go 
on  guard,  turns  the  detail  over  to  the  senior  noncommissioned 
officer,  and  retires.     The  senior  noncommissioned  officer  then 
mounts,  draws  saber,  and  causes  the  detail  to  mount.     The 
band,  accompanied  by  the  buglers,  takes  its  place  on  the  pa- 
rade ground  so  that  the  left  of  its  front  rank  shall  be  12  yards 
to  the  right  of  the  rank  when  the  guard  is  formed. 

858.  At  adjutant's  call  the  adjutant  takes  post  so  as  to  be 
12  yards  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center  of  the  guard  when 
formed;  the  sergeant  major  takes  post  facing  to  the  left  12 
yards  to  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  band ;  the  band  plays 
in  appropriate  time,  the  details  are  marched  to  the  parade 
ground  by  their  senior  noncommissioned  officers ;   the  detail 
that  arrives  first  is  marched  to  the  line  so  that  upon  halting 
the  head  of  the  horse  of  the  man  on  the  right  shall  be  on  line 
with  and  near  to  the  sergeant  major's  horse,  the  noncommis- 
sioned officer,  having  halted  his  detail,  places  himself  facing 
the  sergeant  major  at  a  distance  from  him  a  little  greater 
than   the   front  of  his  detail,   and  commands :  DRESS.     The 
detail    dresses    on    its    right    trooper;    the    noncommissioned 
officers  of  the  detail  in  the  line  of  file  closers  rein  back  so  as 
to   be   6   yards   in    rear   of   the   rank ;    the   noncommissioned 
officer    in    command    of    the    detail    then    commands,    Front, 
salutes,  and  reports,  The  detail  is  correct,  or  (so  many)  ser- 
geants, corporals,  or  privates  are  absent;  the  sergeant  major 
returns  the  salute;  the  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge  of 
the  detail  then  passes  by  the  right  of  the  guard  and  takes 
post  on  the  line  of  noncommissioned  officers  in  rear  of  the 


300        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICER!, 

right  trooper  of  his  detail.  Should  there  be  more  than  one  de- 
tail, it  is  formed  in  like  manner  on  the  left  of  the  one  preced- 
ing ;  the  privates,  noncommissioned  officers,  and  commander  of 
each  detail  dress  on  those  of  the  preceding  details  in  the  same 
rank  or  line. 

Should  the  detail  from  a  troop  not  include  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer,  one  will  be  detailed  to  perform  the  duties  of 
commander  of  the  detail.  In  this  case  such  noncommissioned 
officer,  after  reporting  to  the  sergeant  major,  passes  around 
the  right  flank  between  the  guard  and  the  band  and  retires. 

The  troops  detailed  alternate  in  taking  the  right  of  the  line. 

859.  When  the  last  detail  has  formed  the  sergeant  major 
draws  saber,  verifies  the  details,  causes  the  guard  to  count 
fours,  and,  if  there  be  more  than  five  fours,  divides  the  guard 
into  two  or  more  platoons;  he  designates  the  center  guide  or 
guides  and  then  commands,  DRESS  (Par.  362),  verifies  the 
alignment  of  rank  and  the  line  of  noncommissioned  officers, 
and  then  returns  to  the  right  of  the  rank,  turns  to  the  left, 
commands,  FRONT,  passes  to  a  point  midway  between  the 
adjutant  and  center  of  the  guard,  halts  facing  the  adjutant, 
salutes,  und  reports:  Sir,  the  details  arc  correct;  or,  Sir,  (so 
r.iany)  serf/cants,  corporals,  or  privates  are  absent:  the  adju- 
tant returns  the  salute,  directs  the  sergeant  major:  Take  your 
post,  and  then  draws  saber;  the  sergeant  major  turns  to  the 
left  about  and  takes  post  3  yards  to  the  left  of  and  on  a  line 
with  the  rank.  When  the  sergeant  major  has  completed  his 
report  the  officer  of  the  guard  takes  post  facing  to  the  front 
8  yards  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  guard  and  draws  saber. 
The  adjutant  then  directs,  Inspect  your  guard.  Sir,  at  which 
the  commander  of  the  guard  turns  about,  commands :  1.  Draw, 
2.  SABER,  3.  Prepare  for  inspection,  4.  MARCH,  moves  toward 
raid  inspects  the  guard,  as  in  troop  inspection.  During  the 
inspection  the  band  plays. 

The  adjutant  returns  saber,  observes  the  general  condition 
of  the  guard,  and  falls  out  any  man  who  is  unfit  for  guard 
duty  or  does  not  present  a  creditable  appearance.  Substitutes 
will  report  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  at  the  guard  house. 

The  adjutant,  when  so  directed,  selects  orderlies  and  color 
sentinels  as  prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty 
and  notifies  the  commander  of  the  guard  of  his  selection.  He 
may  require  a  trooper  to  move  out  of  the  rank  and  to  dis- 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEES.         301 

mount  for  a  more  minute  inspection.  He  also  notifies  the  two 
'  senior  noncommissioned  officers  to  act  as  platoon  leaders  if 
there  has  been  a  division  into  platoons.  If  there  be  a  junior 
officer  of  the  guard,  he  takes  post  at  the  same  time  as  the 
senior,  facing  to  the  front  3  yards  in  front  of  the  guide  of  the 
first  platoon,  and  the  senior  of  the  two  noncommissioned  offi- 
cers acts  and  takes  post  as  chief  of  the  second  platoon.  The 
junior  officer  of  the  guard  may  be  directed  by  the  commander 
of  the  guard  to  assist  in  inspecting  the  guard. 

860.  If  there  be  no  officer  of  the  guard  the  adjutant  inspects 
the  guard  and  during  the  inspection  notifies  the  senior  non- 
commissioned officer  to  command  the  guard  and  the  next  two 
senior  noncommissioned  officers  to  serve  as  platoon  leaders. 
A  noncommissioned  officer  commanding  the  guard  takes  the 
post  of  the  officer  of  the  guard,  the  next  senior  noncommis- 
sioned officer  the  post  of  the  junior  officer  of  the  guard. 

The  inspection  ended,  the  adjutant  places  himself  about  30 
yards  in  front  of  and  facing  the  center  of  the  guard  and 
draws  saber.  The  new  officer  of  the  day  takes  post  in  front 
of  and  facing  the  guard  about  30  yards  from  the  adjutant. 
The  old  officer  of  the  day  takes  post  3  yards  to  the  right  of 
and  1  yard  less  advanced  than  the  new  officer  of  the  day. 
The  commander  of  the  guard  takes  post  8  yards  in  front  of 
the  right  trooper,  facing  to  the  front,  and  draws  saber. 

The  adjutant  then  commands :  1.  Draw,  2.  SABER,  3.  SOUND 
OFF, 

The  band,  playing,  passes  in  front  of  the  commander  of  the 
guard  to  the  left  of  the  line  arid  back  to  its  post  on  the  right, 
when  it  ceases  playing. 

The  adjutant  then  commands  POSTS,  at  which  platoon 
leaders  take  their  posts  3  yards  in  front  of  the  guides  of 
their  platoons,  facing  to  the  front,  and  the  commander  of  the 
guard  takes  post  6  yards  in  front  of  the  leader  of  the  center 
(right)  platoon,  facing  to  the  front,  and  the  file  closers  re- 
sume their  places  3  yards  in  rear  of  the  rank.  If  there  be  no 
junior  officer  of  the  guard,  the  commander  of  the  guard  takes 
post  3  yards  in  front  of  the  center  guide. 

The  commander  of  the  guard  and  the  chiefs  of  platoon  and 
file  closers  having  taken  their  posts,  the  adjutant  commands : 
1.  Present,  2.  SABER,  faces  toward  the  officer  of  the  day, 
salutes,  and  then  reports,  /Sir,  the  guard  is  formed. 


302        MANUAL  ?OR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

The  new  officer  of  the  day,  after  the  adjutant  has  reported, 
salutes  with  the  hand  and  directs  the  adjutant,  March  the  ' 
guard  in  review,  Sir. 

861.  The  adjutant  turns  about,  brings  the  guard  to  a  carry, 
and  commands:  1.  Platoons  right  turn,  2.  MARCH;  3.  Guard, 
4.  HALT.  The  platoons  execute  the  movement  as  in  the 
troop,  the  band  takes  post  in  front  of  the  column  (Par.  806). 
The  adjutant  places  himself  abreast  of  the  first  platoon  and 
6  yards  from  its  left  flank ;  the  sergeant  major  .abreast  of  the 
second  platoon  and  6  Yards  from  its  left  flank.  The  adjutant 
then  commands:  1.  Pass  in  review,  li.  FORWARD,  8.  MARCH. 

The  guard  marches  at  the  walk  past  the  oflicer  of  the  day. 
according  to  the  principles  of  squadron  review,  the  adjutant, 
commander  of  the  guard,  chiefs  of  platoon,  sergeant  major, 
and  drum  major  saluting.  The  new  oflicer  of  the  day  returns 
the  salute  of  the  commander  of  the  guard  and  the  adjutant 
only,  making  one  salute  with  the  hand. 

882.  The  band,  having  passed  the  officer  of  the  day,  turns 
to  the  left  out  of  the  column,  places  itself  opposite  to  and 
facing  him,  and  continues  to  play  until  the  puard  leaves  the 
parade  ground.  The  buglers  detach  themselves  from  the 
band  when  the  latter  turns  out  of  the  column  and  remain 
in  firont  of  the  guard,  commencing  to  play  when  the  band 
ceases.  In  the  absence  of  the  band  the  buglers  do  not  turn 
out  of  the  column,  but  continue  to  play  in  front  of  the  guard. 

863.  The  guard  having  passed  12  yards  beyond  the  officer  of 
the  day.  the  adjutant  halts ;  the  sergeant  major  halts  along- 
side of  the  adjutant  and  1  yard  to  his  left ;  they  then  return 
saber,  salute,  and  retire.  The  commander  of  the  guard  then, 
without  halting,  breaks  the  guard  into  column  of  fours  and 
marches  it  to  its  post. 

884.  The  officers  of  the  day  turn  toward  each  other  and 
salute,  the  old  officer  of  the  day  turning  over  the  orders  to  the 
new  officer  of  the  day. 

While  the  band  is  sounding  off  and  while  the  guard  is  pass- 
ing in  review  the  officers  of  the  day  remain  at  attention. 

865.  If  the  guard  be  not  divided  into  platoons  the  adjutant 
commands:  1.  Guard  right  turn,  2.  MARCH;  8.  Guard,  4.  HALT, 
and  it  passes  in  review  as  explained ;  the  commander  of  the 
guard  is  3  yards  in  front  of  its  center  guide,  the  adjutant  is 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         803 

6  yards  from  the  rank  and  abreast  of  the  commander,  the 
sergeant  major  covers  the  adjutant  and  marches  abreast  .of 
the  rank. 

RELIEVING    THE    OLD    GUARD — (FORMAL    GUARD    MOUNTING, 
MOUNTED. ) 

866.  As  the  new  guard  approaches  the  guardhouse  the  old 
guard  is  formed  in  line  at  the  carry  saber,  its  buglers  3  yards 
to  its  right;  when  the  buglers  at  the  head  of  the  new  guard 
arrive  opposite  the  left  of  the  old  guard  its  commander  com- 
mands: 1.  Present,  2.  SABER;   both  commanders  salute  and, 
when  the  new  guard  has  passed  the  commander  of  the  old 
guard,  the  latter  commands :  1.  Carry,  2.  SABER.    The  buglers 
and  guard  continue  marching  without  changing  direction  until 
the  rear  of  the  column  has  passed  9  yards  beyond  the  buglers 
of  the  old  guard,  when  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  com- 
mands :  1.  Fours  right,  2.  MARCH. 

867.  The  buglers  and  guard  are  marched  3  yards  in  rear  of 
the  line  of  the  old  guard,  when  the  commander  of  the  new 
guard  commands:  1.  Fours  right  about,  2.  MARCH;  3.  Guard, 
4.  HALT;  5.  DRESS;   he  then,  facing  to  the  front,  aligns  his 
guard  so  as  to  be  on  a  line  with  the  old  guard  and  commands, 
Front;  the  buglers  of  the  new  guard  are  3  yards  to  the  right 
of  the  rank. 

868.  The  new  guard  being  dressed,  the  commander  of  each 
guard,  in  front  of  and  facing  its  center,  commands :  1.  Pre- 
sent, 2.  SABER,  resumes  his  front,  salutes,  resumes  the  carry, 
faces  his  guard,  and  commands :  1.  Carry,  2.  SABER. 

Each  guard  is  then  presented  by  its  commander  to  its  officer 
of  the  day ;  if  there  be  but  one  officer  of  the  day  present,  or 
if  an  officer  acts  in  the  capacity  of  old  and  new  officer  of  the 
day,  each  guard  is  presented  to  him  by  its  commander. 

869.  If  another  person  entitled  to  a  salute  approaches,  each 
commander  of  the  guard  brings  his  own  guard  to  attention  if 
not  already  at  attention.     The, senior  commander  of  the  two 
guards  then  commands :  1.  Old  and  new  guards,  2.  Present, 
3.  SABER.    The  junior  will  salute  at  the  command  "  Present, 
Saber,"  given  by  the  senior.     After  the  salute  has  been  ac- 
knowledged  the  senior  brings  both   guards  to   the  "  Carry, 
Saber." 


304        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

870.  After  the  salutes  have  been  acknowledged  by  the  offi- 
cers of  the  day,  each  guard  returns  saber  by  command  of  its 
own  officer  of  the  guard :  the  commander  of  the  now  guard 
then  directs  the  orderly  or  orderlies  to  fall  out  and  report. 

371.  The  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  falls  out  mem- 
bers of  the  guard  for  detached  posts,  placing  them  under- 
charge of  the  proper  noncommissioned  oflicer,  divides  the 
guard  into  three  reliefs,  first,  second,  and  third,  from  right  to 
left,  and  directs  a  list  of  the  guard  to  be  made  by  reliefs.  The 
sentinels  and  detachments  of  the  old  guard  are  at  once  re- 
lieved by  members  of  the  new  guard,  the  two  guards  standing 
at  ease  or  dismounted  while  these  changes  are  being  made. 
The  commander  of  the  old  transmits  to  the  commander  of  the 
new  guard  all  his  orders,  instructions,  and  information  con- 
cerning the  guard  and  its  duties. 

872.  The  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  has  his  own 
guard  fall  out,  takes  possession  of  the  guardhouse  and  verifies 
the  articles  in  charge  of  the  guard. 

873.  If  considerable  time  is  required  to  bring  in  that  portion 
of  the  old  guard  still  on  post,  the  commanding  officer  may 
direct  that  as  soon  as  the  orders  and  property  are  turned  over 
to  the  new  guard  the  portion  of  the  old  guard  at  the  guard- 
house may  be  marched  off  and  dismissed.     In  such  case  the 
remaining  detachments  of  the  old  guard  will  be  inspected  by 
the  commander  of  the  new  guard  when  they  reach  the  guard- 
house.     He   will    direct    the   senior    noncommissioned    officer 
present  to  march  these  detachments  off  and  dismiss  them  in 
the  prescribed  manner. 

874.  In  bad  weather,  at  night,  or  after  long  marches  the 
music  may  be  omitted,  or  the  buglers  may  take  the  place  of 
the  band  and  sound  off  standing  on  the  right  of  the  guard  and 
the  march  in  review  be  omitted. 

In  cases  in  which  an  organization,  entire  or  in  part,  is  de- 
tailed for  guard,  it  is  marched  to  the  parade  ground  as  a  sin- 
gle detail  (Par.  858.) 

375.  For  detailed  instructions  for  guards  and  sentinels  see 
Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        305 

FOBMAL  GUABD  MOUNTING,  DISMOUNTED. 

876.  Guard  mounting,  dismounted,  and  relieving  the  old 
guard  are  conducted  on  the  same  principles  as  when  mounted, 
with  the  following  modifications : 

(a)  The  men  designated  for  guard  fall  in,  dismounted,  on 
their  troop  parade  grounds ;  noncommissioned  officers  not 
commanding  detail,  2  paces  in  rear  of  rank. 

(&)  The  detail  that  is  to  be  on  the  right  is  marched  to  the 
line  so  that  upon  halting  the  breast  of  the  man  on  the  right 
shall  be  near  to  and  opposite  the  left  arm  of  the  sergeant 
major.  At  the  command  DRESS,  the  detail  dresses  up  to  the 
line  of  the  sergeant  major  and  its  commander,  the  man  on  the 
right  placing  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  the  sergeant 
major. 

(c)  When  the  last  detail  has  formed,  the  sergeant  major 
takes  a  side  step  to  the  right,  draws  saber  if  armed  with  one, 
verifies  the  detail,  takes  post  2  paces  to  the  right  and  2  paces 
to  the  front  of  the  guard,  facing  to  the  left  and  causes  the 
guard  to  count  fours. 

(d)  When  the  sergeant  major  has  reported,  the  officer  of 
the  guard  takes  post  3  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
guard,   draws  saber  and  orders  saber,   the  guard  -being  at 
order  arms. 

The  inspection  which  corresponds  to  that  of  par.  882  being 
ended,  and  the  officers  of  the  day,  the  adjutant,  and  the  com- 
mander of  the  guard  having  taken  their  posts,  the  commander 
of  the  guard  draws  saber  with  the  adjutant  and  comes  to  the 
order. 

The  adjutant  then  commands :  1.  Parade,  2.  Rest,  3.  SOUND 
OFF,  and  comes  to  the  order  and  parade  rest. 

(c)  After  the  band  has  sounded  off,  the  adjutant,  com- 
mander of  the  guard,  and  platoon  leaders  come  to  attention, 
and  the  adjutant  commands :  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS,  faces  toward 
the  officer  of  the  day  and  reports :  Sir,  the  guard  is  formed. 
The  new  officer  of  the  day,  after  the  adjutant  has  reported, 
returns  the  salute  with  the  hand  and  directs  the  adjutant: 
March  the  guard  in  review,  Sir.  The  adjutant  carries  saber, 
faces  about,  brings  the  guard  to  an  order  and  commands:  1. 


306        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

At  trail,  platoons  (or  guard)  right  turn,  2.  MARCH:  3.  Guard, 
4.  HALT. 

The  guard  marches  in  quick  time  past  the  officer  of  the  day, 
according  to  the  principles  as  when  mounted. 

While  the  band  is  sounding  off  and  while  the  guard  is 
marching  in  review,  the  officers  of  the  day  stand  at  parade 
rest  with  arms  folded.  They  take  this  position  when  the 
adjutant  comes  to  parade  rest,  resume  the  attention  with  him, 
again  take  the  parade  rest  at  the  first  note  of  the  inarch  in 
review,  and  resume  attention  as  the  head  of  the  column  ap- 
proaches. 

(/)  If  the  guard  be  not  divided  into  platoons,  the  adjutant 
commands :  1.  At  trail,  guard  right  turn,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Guard, 
4.  HALT,  and  it  passes  in  review  as  explained ;  the  commander 
of  the  guard  is  3  paces  in  front  of  its  center  guide. 

Section  21.   Relieving  the  Old  Guard. 

360.  As  the  new  guard  approaches  the  guardhouse,  the  old 
guard  is  formed  in  line,  with  its  field  music  three  paces  to  its 
right ;  and,  when  the  field  music  at  the  head  of  the  new  guard 
arrives  opposite  its  left,  the  commander  of  the  new  guard 
commands:  1.  Eyes,  RIGHT;  the  commander  of  the  old  guard 
commands:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS;  commanders  of  both  guards 
salute.  The  new  guard  marches  in  quick  time  past  the  old 
guard. 

When  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  is  opposite  the  field 
music  of  the  old  guard,  he  commands :  FRONT;  the  commander 
of  the  old  guard  commands :  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS,  as  soon  as  the 
new  guard  shall  have  cleared  the  old  guard. 

The  field  music  having  marched  three  paces  beyond  the  field 
music  of  the  old  guard,  changes  direction  to  the  right,  and, 
followed  by  the  guard,  changes  direction  to  the  left  when  on 
a  line  with  the  old  guard ;  the  changes  of  direction  are  with- 
out command.  The  commander  of  the  guard  halts  on  the 
line  of  the  front  rank  of  the  old  guard,  allows  his  guard  to 
march  past  him,  and,  when  its  rear  approaches,  forms  it  in 
line  to  the  left,  establishes  the  left  guide  three  paces  to  the 
right  of  the  field  music  of  the  old  guard,  and  on  a  line  with 
the  front  rank,  and  then  dresses  his  guard  to  the  left ;  the 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        307 

field  music  of  the  new  guard  is  three  paces  to  the  right  of  its 
front  rank. 

361.  The  new  guard  being  dressed  the  commander  of  each 
guard,  in  front  of  and  facing  its  center,  commands :  1.  Present, 
2.  ARMS,  resumes  his  front,  salutes,  carries  saber,  faces  his 
guard,  and  commands :  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Should  a  guard  be  commanded  by  a  noncommissioned  offi- 
cer, he  stands  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  front  rank,  according 
as  he  commands  the  old  or  new  guard,  and  executes  the  rifle 
salute. 

362.  After  the  new  guard  arrives  at  its  post  and  has  saluted 
the  old  guard,  each  guard  is  presented  by  its  commander  to 
its  officer  of  the  day ;  if  there  be  but  one  officer  of  the  day 
present,  or  if  one  officer  acts  in  the  capacity  of  old  and  new 
officer  of  the  day,  each  guard  is  presented  to  him  by  its  com- 
mander. 

363.  If  other  persons  entitled  to  a  salute  approach,  each  com- 
mander of  the  guard  will  bring  his  own  guard  to  attention  if 
not:  already  at  attention.     The  senior  commander  of  the  two 
guards  will  then  command :  "  1.  Old  and  new  guards,  2.  Pre- 
sent, 3.  Arms." 

The  junior  will  salute  at  the  command  "  Present  Arms " 
given  by  the  senior.  After  the  salute  has  been  acknowledged, 
the  senior  brings  both  guards  to  the  order. 

364.  After  the  salutes  have  been  acknowledged  by  the  officers 
of  the  day,  each  guard  is  brought  to  an  order  by  its  com- 
mander; the  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  directs  the 
orderly  or  orderlies  to  fall  out  and  report  and  causes  bayo- 
nets to  be  fixed  if  so  ordered  by  the  commanding  officer ; 
bayonets  will  not  then  be  unfixed  during  the  tour  except  in 
route  marches  while  the  guard  is  actually  marching  or  when 
specially  directed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

The  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  falls  out  members  of 
the  guard  for  detached  posts,  placing  them  under  charge, of  the 
proper  noncommissioned  officers,  divides  the  guard  into  three 
reliefs,  first,  second,  and  third,  from  right  to  left,  and  directs 
a  list  of  the  guard  to  be  made  by  reliefs.  When  the  .uiard 
consists  of  troops  of  different  arms  combine*.!,  the  men  are 
assigned  to  reliefs  so  as  to  insure  a  fair  division  of  duly  under 
rules  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 


308         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

365.  The  sentinels  and  detachments  of  the  old  guard  are  at 
once  relieved  by  members  of  the  new  guard,  the  two  guards 
standing  at  ease  or  at  rest  while  these  changes  are  being 
made.    The  commander  of  the  old  transmits  to  the  commander 
of  the  new  guard  all  his  orders,  instructions,  and  information 
concerning  the  guard  and  its  duties.     The  commander  of  the 
new  guard  then  takes  possession  of  the  guardhouse  and  veri- 
fies the  articles  in  charge  of  the  guard. 

366.  If  considerable  time  is  required  to  bring  in  that  por- 
tion of  the  old  guard  still  on  post,  the  commanding  officer 
may  direct  that  as  soon  as  the  orders  and  property  are  turned 
over  to  the  new  guard  the  portion  of  the  old  guard  at  the 
guardhouse  may  be  marched  off  and  dismissed.     In  such  a 
case  the  remaining  detachment  or  detachments  of  the  old 
guard  will  be  inspected  by  the  commander  of  the  new  guard 
when  they  reach  the  guardhouse.     He  will  direct  the  senior 
noncommissioned  officer  present  to  march  these  detachments 
off  and  dismiss  them  in  the  prescribed  manner. 

367.  In  bad  weather,  at  night,  after  long  marches,  or  when 
the  guard  is  very  small,  the  field  music  may  be  dispensed  with. 


CHAPTER  X. 

MAP  READING  AND  SKETCHING. 


Section  1.   Military  map  reading. 

When  you  pick  up  a  map,  the  Jirst  question  is,  Where  is  the 
north?  This  can  usually  be  told  by  an  arrow  (see  tig.  1,  p. 
259)  which  will  be  found  in  one  of  the  corners  of  the  map, 
and  which  points  to  the  true  north — the  north  of  the  north 
star. 

On  some  maps  no  arrow  is  to  be  found.  The  chances  are  a 
hundred  to  one  that  the  north  is  at  the  top  of  the  map,  as  it 
is  on  almost  all  printed  maps.  But  you  can  only  assure  your- 
self of  that  fact  by  checking  the  map  with  the  ground  it 
represents.  For  instance,  if  you  ascertain  that  the  city  of 
Philadelphia  is  due  east  of  the  city  of  Columbus,  then  the 
Philadelphia-Columbus  line  on  the  map  is  a  due  east-and- 
west  line,  and  establishes  at  once  all  the  other  map  direc- 
tions. 

Now,  the  map  represents  the  ground' as  nearly  as  it  can  be 
represented  on  a  flat  piece  of  paper.  If  you  are  standing  up, 
facing  the  north,  your  right  luind  will  be  in  the  east,  your  left 
in  the  west,  and  your  back  to  the  south.  It  is  the  same  with  a 
map;  if  you  look  across  it  in  the  direction  of  the  arrow — that 
is,  toward,  its  north — your  right  hand  will  be  toward  what  is 
east  on  the  map ;  your  left  hand  to  the  west ;  the  south  will  be 
at  the  bottom  of  the  map. 

There  is  another  kind  of  an  arrow  that  sometimes  appears 
on  a  map.  It  is  like  the  one  in  ligure  2,  page  259,  and  points 
not  to  the  true  north  but  to  the  magnetic  north,  which  is  the 
north  of  the  compass.  Though  the  compass  needle,  ,and  there- 
fore the  arrow  that  represents  it  on  the  map,  does  not  point 

309 


310         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


5O   25      O 


ng.2. 


lOG? 


fig.5- 


200  INCHES 


Fig.3. 


F,g.4. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        311 

exactly  north,  the  deviation  is,  from  a  military  point  of  view, 
slight,  and  appreciable  error  will  rarely  result  through  the 
use  of  the  magnetic  instead  of  the  true  north  in  the  solution 
of  any  military  problems. 

Should  you  be  curious  to  know  the  exact  deviation,  consult 
your  local  surveyor  or  any  civil  engineer. 

Both  arrows  may  appear  on  your  map.  In  that  case  disre- 
gard the  magnetic  arrow  unless  you  are  using  the  map  in 
connection  with  a  compass. 

If  a  map  is  being  used  on  the  ground,  the  first  thing  to  be 
done  is  to  put  the  lines  of  the  map  parallel  to  the  real  outlines 
of  the  ground  forms,  and  roads,  fences,  railroads,  etc.,  that  the 
map  shows;  for  the  making  of  a  map  is  no  more  than  the 
drawing  on  paper  of  lines  parallel  to  and  proportional  in 
length  to  real  directions  and  distances  ou  the  ground. 

For  instance,  the  road  between  two  places  runs  due  north 
and  south.  Then  on  the  map  a  line  representing  the  road  will 
be  parallel  to  the  arrow  showing  the  north  and  will  be  propor- 
tional in  length  to  the  real  road.  In  this  way  a  map  is  a  pic- 
ture, or  better,  a  bare  outline  sketch ;  and,  us  we  can  make  out 
a  picture,  though  it  be  upside  down,  or  crooked  on  the  wall, 
so  we  can  use  a  map  that  is  upside  down  or  not  parallel  to  the 
real  ground  forms.  But  it  is  easier  to  make  out  both  the  pic- 
ture and  the  map  if  their  lines  are  parallel  to  what  they  repre- 
sent. So  in  using  a  map  on  the  ground  we  always  put  the 
lines  parallel  to  the  actual  features  they  show.  This  is  easy 
if  the  map  has  an  arrow. 

If  the  map  has  no  arrow,  you  must  locate  objects  or  features 
on  the  ground,  and  on  the  map,  their  representations.  Draw 
on  the  map  a  line  connecting  any  two  of  the  features ;  place 
this  line  parallel  to  an  imaginary  line  through  the  two  actual 
features  located,  and  your  map  will  be  correctly  placed.  Look 
to  it  that  you  do  not  reverse  on  The  map  the  positions  of  the 
two  objects  or  features,  or  your  map  will  be  exactly  upside 
down. 

When  the  map  has  been  turned  into  the  proper  position — 
that  is  to  say,  "  oriented  '' — the  next  thing  is  to  locate  on  the 
map  your  position.  If  you  tire  in  the  village  of  Easton  and 
there  is  a  place  on  the  map  labeled  Easton,  the  answer  is 
apparent.  But  if  you  are  out  in  the  country,  at  an  unlabeled 
point  that  looks  like  any  one  of  a  dozen  other  similar  poimti, 


Jrw*"*« 


Sid        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

the  task  is  more  complicated.  In  this  latter  case  you  must 
locate  and  identify,  both  on  the  map  and  on  the  ground,  other 
points — hills,  villages,  peculiar  bends  in  rivers,  forests — any 
ground  features  that  have  some  easily  recognizable  peculiarity 
and  that  you  can  see  from  your  position. 

Suppose,  for  instance,  you  were  near  Leavenworth  and 
wanted  to  locate  your  exact  position,  of  which  you  are  uncer- 
tain. You  have  the  map  shown  in  this  manual,  and,  looking 
about,  you  see  southwest  from  where  you  stand  the  United 
States  Penitentiary;  also,  halfway  between  the  south  and 
the  southeast — south-southeast  a  sailor  would  say — the  reser- 
voir (rectangle  west  of  "  O"  in  "Missouri").  Having  ori- 
ented your  map,  draw  on  it  a  line  from  the  map  position  of 
the  reservoir  toward  its  actual  position  on  the  ground.  Simi- 
larly draw  a  line  from  the  map  position  of  penitentiary  to- 
ward its  actual  position.  Prolong  the  two  lines  until  they  in- 
tersect. The  intersection  of  the  lines  will  mark  the  place 
where  you  stand — south  Merritt  Hill. 

This  method  consists  merely  in  drawing  on  the  map  lines 
that  represent  the  lines  of  sight  to  known  and  visible  places. 
The  lines  pass  through  the  map  position  of  the  places  you  see 
and  are  parallel  to  the  actual  lines  of  sight;  therefore  they 
are  the  map  representations  of  the  lines  of  sight,  and  their 
intersection  is  the  map  position  of  the  eye  of  the  observer. 
'  After  this  orientation  and  location  of  position,  one  can  de- 
duce from  the  map  everything  there  is  to  know  in  regard  to 
directions.  In  this  respect,  study  of  the  ground  itself  will 
Show  no  more  than  will  study  of  the  map. 

After  "What  direction?"  comes  "How  far?"  To  answer 
this,  one  must  understand  that  the  map  distance  between  any 
two  points  shown  bears  a  fixed  and  definite  relation  or  propor- 
tion to  the  real  distance  between  the  two  points. 

For  instance:  We  measure  on  a  map  and  find  the  distance 
between  two  points  to  be  1  inch.  Then  we  measure  the  real 
distance  on  the  ground  and  find  it  to  be  10,000  inches ;  hence 
the  relation  between  the  map  distance  and  the  real  distance 
is  1  to  10,000.  or  10000-  Now,  if  the  map  is  properly  drawn, 
the  same  relation  will  hold  good  for  all  distances,  and  we  can 
obtain  any  ground  distance  by  multiplying  by  10,000  the  cor- 
responding map  distance. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        813 

This  relation  need  not  be  i0Soo>  but  may  be  anything  from 
•rfas  that  an  architect  might  use  in  making  a  map  or  plan  of  a 
house  up  to  one  over  a  billion  and  a  half,  which  is  about  the 
proportion  between  map  and  real  distances  in  a  pocket-atlas 
representation  of  the  whole  world  on  a  6-inch  page.  Map 
makers  call  tfris  relation  the  "  scale  "  of  the  map  and  put  it 
down  in  a  corner  in  one  of  three  ways. 

For  the  sake  of  an  illustration,  say  the  relation  between 
map  and  ground  distances  is  1  to  100 ;  that  is,  1  inch  on  the 
map  is  equal  to  100  on  the  ground.  The  scale  may  be  written : 

First.  1  inch  equals  100. 

Second.  ^. 

Third.  As  shown  by  figure  3  (p.  259). 

These  expressions  mean  one  and  the  same  thing.  A  varia- 
tion of  the  first  method  on  a  map  of  different  scale  might  be : 
1  inch  equals  1  mile.  Since  a  mile  contains  63,360  inches,  then 
the  real  distance  between  any  two  points  shown  on  the  map  is 
63,360  times  the  map  distance. 

To  find  the  ground  distance  by  the  third  kind  of  scale,  copy 
it  on  the  edge  of  a  slip  of  paper,  apply  the  slip  directly  to  the 
map,  and  read  off  the  distance ;  and  so  we  answer  the  ques- 
tion, "  How  far?  " 

After  direction  and  distance  comes  the  interpretation  of  the 
signs,  symbols,  and  abbreviations  on  the  map.  Those  author- 
ized are  given  on  pages  272  and  273  (a  reprint  of  Appendix  4, 
Field  Service  Regulations,  1914)  ;  but  there  are  a  good  many 
other  conventional  signs  in  common  use.  A  key  to  them  is 
published  by  the  War  Department  and  is  called  "  Conven- 
tional Signs,  United  States  Army."  From  these  you  read  at 
once  the  natural  and  artificial  features  of  the  country  shown 
on  your  map.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  these  conven- 
tional signs  are  not  necessarily  drawn  to  scale,  as  are  the 
distances.  They  show  the  position  and  outline  of  the  fea- 
tures rather  than  the  size.  This  for  the  reason  that  many  of 
the  features  shown,  if  drawn  to  scale,  would  be  so  small  that 
one  could  not  make  them  out  except  with  a  magnifying  glass. 
If  the  exact  dimensions  are  of  any  importance,  they  will  be 
written  in  figures  on  the  map.  For  instance,  bridges. 

In  addition  to  the  above  conventional  signs,  we  have  con- 
tours to  show  the  elevations,  depressions,  slope,  and  Aape  of 


314         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

the  ground.  Abroad,  haehures  are  much  used,  but  they  serve 
only  to  indicate  elevation,  and.  as  compared  to  contours,  are 
of  little  value.  Contours  resemble  the  lines  shown  in  figure  4 
(p.  259). 

Haehures  are  shown  in  figure  5  (p.  259),  and  may  be  found 
on  any  European  map.  They  simply  show  slopes,  and,  when 
carefully  drawn,  show  steeper  slopes  by  heavier  shading  and 
gentler  slopes  by  the  fainter  haehures.  The  crest  of  the  moun- 
tain is' within  the  haehures.  (See  fig.  5,  p.  259.) 

Contours. — A  certain  student,  when  asked  by  his  instructor 
to  define  "  space,"  said :  "  I  have  it,  sir,  in  my  head,  but  can 
not  put  it  into  words."  The  instructor  replied :  "I  suppose 

that  under  those  circumstances,  Mr.  ,  the  definition 

really  would  not  help  much."  And  so  it  is  with  contours — the 
definition  does  not  help  much  if  you  know  a  contour  when  you 
meet  it  on  a  map.  For  examples  of  contours,  turn  to  the  map 
facing  page  274,  raid,  starting  at  the  United  States  peniten- 
tiary, note  the  smooth,  flowing:,  irregular  curved  lines  marked 
880,  860,  840.  840,.  860.  etc. 

The  only  other  lines  on  the  map  that  at  all  resemble  con- 
tours are  stream  lines,  like  <%  Corral  Creek,"  but  the  stream 
lines  are  readily  distinguished  from  contours  by  the  fact  that 
they  cross  the  contours  squarely,  while  the  contours  run 
approximately  parallel  to  each  other.  Note  the  stream  line 
just  to  the  west  of  South  Merritt  Hill. 

The  contours  represent  lines  on  the  ground  that  are  horizon- 
tal and  whoso  meanderings  follow  the  surface,  just  as  the  edge 
of  a  flood  would  follow  the  irregularities  of  the  hills  about  it. 
Those  lines  that  contours  stand  for  are  just  as  level  as  the 
water's  edge  of  a  lake,  but  horizontally  they  wander  back  and 
forth  to  just  as  great  a  degree. 

The  line  marked  880,  at  the  penitentiary,  passes  through  on 
that  particular  piece  of  ground  every  point  that  is  880  feet 
above  sea  level.  Should  the  Missouri  River  rise  in  flood  to 
880  feet,  the  penitentiary  would  be  on  an  island,  the  edge  of 
which  is  marked  by  the  880  contour. 

Contours  show  several  things ;  among  them  the  height  of  the 
ground  they  cross.  Usually  the  contour  has  labeled  on  it  in 
figures  the  height  above  some  starting  point,  called  the  datum 
plane — generally  sea  level.  If,  with  a  surveying  instrument, 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         815 

you  put  in  on  a  piece  of  ground  a  lot  of  stakes,  each  one  of 
which  is  exactly  the  same  height  above  sea  level — that  is,  run 
a  line  of  levels — then  make  a  map  showing  the  location  of  the 
stakes,  a  line  drawn  on  the  map  through  all  the  stake  positions 
is  a  contour  and  shows  the  position  of  all  points  of  that  par- 
ticular height. 

On  any  given  map  all  contours  are  equally  spaced  in  a  ver- 
tical direction,  and  the  map  shows  the  location  of  a  great 
number  of  points  at  certain  fixed  levels.  If  you  know  the 
vertical  interval  between  any  two  adjacent  contours,  you 
know  the  vertical  interval  for  all  the  contours  on  that  map, 
for  these  intervals  on  a  given  map  are  all  the  same. 

With  reference  to  a  point  through  which  no  contour  passes, 
we  can  only  say  that  the  point  in  question  is  not  higher  than 
the  next  contour  up  the  hill,  nor  lower  than  the  next  one 
down  the  hill.  For  the  purposes  of  any  problem,  it  is  usual  to 
assume  that  the  ground  slopes  evenly  between  the  two  adja- 
cent contours  and  that  the  vertical  height  of  the  point  above 
the  lower  contour  is  proportional  to  its  horizontal  distance 
from  the  contour,  as  compared  to  the  whole  distance  between 
the  two  contours.  For  instance,  on  the  map,  find  the  height 
of  point  A.  The  horizontal  measurements  are  as  shown  on 
the  map.  The  vertical  distance  between  the  contours  is  20 
feet.  A  is  about  one-quarter  of  the  distance  between  the  800 
and  the  820  contours,  and  we  assume  its  height  to  be  one- 
quarter  of  20  feet  (5  feet)  higher  than  800  feet.  So  the 
height  of  A  is  805  feet. 

The  vertical  interval  is  usually  indicated  in  the  corner  of 
the  map  by  the  letters  "  V.  I."  For  instance :  V.  I.=20  feet. 

On  maps  of  very  small  pieces  of  ground,  the  V.  I.  is  usually 
small — perhaps  as  small  as  1  foot ;  on  maps  of  large  areas  on 
a  small  scale  it  may  be  very  great — even  1,000  feet. 

Contours  also  show  slopes.  It  has  already  been  explained 
that  from  any  contour  to  the  next  one  above  it  the  ground 
rises  a  fixed  number  of  feet,  according  to  the  vertical 
interval  of  that  map.  From  the  scale  of  distances  on  the 
map  the  horizontal  distance  between  any  two  contours  can 
be  found.  For  example :  On  the  map  the  horizontal  dis- 
tance between  D  and  E  is  90  yards,  or  270  feet.  The  verti- 
cal distance  is  20  feet,  the  V.  I.  of  the  map.  The  slope  the,n  is 


316        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEHS. 

£n>=  T5.-s=f<?%— 4i°,  in  all  of  which  different  ways  the  slope 
can  be  expressed. 


27O 


On  a  good  many  contoured  maps  a  figure  like  this  will  be 

found  in  one  of  the  corners : 

i_         1°  i     2°     .  3°  .4°.  5°. 

On  that  particular  map  contours  separated  by  the  distance 

i  »"        i 

on  the  vertical  scale  show  a  slope  of  1° ;  if  separated  by  the 
distance  §  2  g  they  show  a  2°  slope,  etc.  A  slope  of  1° 

is  a  rise  of  1  foot  in  57.  To  use  this  scale  of  slopes,  copy  it  on 
the  edge  of  a  piece  of  paper  just  as  you  did  the  scale  of  dis- 
tances and  apply  it  directly  to  the  map. 

You  will  notice  that  where  the  contours  lie  closest  the  slope 
is  steepest;  where  they  arc  farthest  apart,  the  ground  is  most 
nearly  flat. 

It  has  already  been  set  forth  how  contours  show  height  and 
slope ;  in  addition  to  this  they  show  the  shape  of  the  ground, 
or  GROUND  FORMS.  Each  single  contour  shows  the  shape  at  its 
particular  level  of  the  hill  or  valley  it  outlines ;  for  instance, 
the  880  contour  about  the  penitentiary  shows  that  the  hill  at 
that  level  has  a  shape  somewhat  like  a  horse's  head.  Simi- 
larly, every  contour  on  the  map  gives  us  the  form  of  the 
ground  at  its  particular  level,  and  knowing  these  ground 
forms  for  many  levels  we  can  form  a  fair  conception  of  what 
the  whole  surface  is  like. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         317 

A  round  contour  like  the  letter  O  outlines  a  round  ground 
feature;  a  long,  narrow  one  indicates  a  long,  narrow  ground 
feature. 

Different  hills  and  depressions  have  different  shapes.  A 
good  many  of  them  have  one  shape  at  one  level  and  another 
shape  at  another  level,  all  of  which  information  will  be  given 
you  by  the  contours  on  the  map. 

One  of  the  ways  to  see  how  contours  show  the  shape  of  the 
ground  is  to  pour  half  a  bucket  of  water  into  a  small  depres- 
sion in  the  ground.  The  water's  edge  will  be  exactly  level, 
and  if  the  depression  is  approximately  round  the  water's  edge 
will  also  be  approximately  round.  The  outline '  will  look 
something  like  figure  6. 

Draw  roughly  on  a  piece  of  paper  a  figure  of  the  same  shape 
and  you  will  have  a  contour  showing  the  shape  of  the  bit  of 
ground  where  you  poured  your  waiter. 

Next,  with  your  heel  gouge  out  on  one  edge  of  your  little 
pond  a  small,  round  bay.  The  water  will  rush  in  and  the 
watermark  on  the  soil  will  now  be  shaped  something  like 
figure  7. 

Alter  your  drawing  accordingly,  and  the  new  contour  will 
show  the  new  ground  shape. 

Again  do  violence  to  the  face  of  nature  by  digging  with  a 
stick  a  narrow  inlet  opening  out  of  your  miniature  ocean, 
and  the  watermark  will  now  look  something  like  figure  8. 

Alter  your  drawing  once  more  and  your  contour  shows 
again  the  new  ground  form.  Drop  into  your  main  pond  a 
round  clod  and  you  will  have  a  new  watermark,  like  figure  9, 
to  add  to  your  drawing.  This  new  contour,  of  the  same  level 
with  the  one  showing  the  limit  of  the  depression,  shows  on 
the  drawing  the  round  island. 

Drop  in  a  second  clod,  this  time  long  and  narrow,  the  water- 
mark will  be  like  figure  10,  and  the  drawing  of  it,  properly 
placed,  will  show  another  island  of  another  shape.  Your 
drawing  now  will  look  like  figure  11. 

It  shows  a  depression  approximately  round,  off  wiiich  open 
a  round  bay  and  a  long,  narrow  bay.  There  is  also  a  round 
elevation  and  a  long,  narrow  one ;  a  long,  narrow  ridge,  jut- 
ting out  between  the  two  bays,  and  a  short,  broad  one  across 
the  neck  of  the  round  bay. 


318         MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


Fig.lk 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        319 

Now  flood  your  lake  deeply  enough  to  cover  up  the  features 
you  have  introduced.  The  new  water  line,  about  as  shown  by 
the  dotted  line  in  figure  11,  shows  the  oblong  shape  of  the 
depression  at  a  higher  level ;  the  solid  lines  show  the  shape 
farther  down ;  the  horizontal  distance  between  the  two  con- 
Put  together  the  information  each  of  these  contours  gives  you, 
and  you  will  see  how  contours  show  the  shape  of  the  ground. 
On  the  little  map  you  have  drawn  you  have  introduced  all  the 
varieties  of  ground  forms  there  are ;  therefore  all  contour  forms. 

The  contours  on  an  ordinary  map  seem  much  more  compli- 
cated, but  this  is  due  only  to  the  number  of  them,  their  length, 
and  many  turns  before  they  finally  close  on  themselves.  Or 
they  may  close  off  the  paper.  But  trace  each  one  out,  and  it 
will  resolve  itself  into  one  of  the  forms  shown  in  figure  11. 

Just  as  the  high-tide  line  around  the  continents  of  North 
and  South  America  runs  a  long  and  tortuous  course,  but  finally 
closes  back  on  itself,  so  will  every  contour  do  likewise.  And 
just  as  truly  as  every  bend  in  that  high-tide  mark  turns  out 
around  a  promontory,  or  in  around  a  bay,  so  will  every  bend 
in  a  contour  stand  for  a  hill  or  a  valley,  pointing  to  the  low- 
lands if  it  be  a  hill,  and  to  the  height  if  it  mark  a  valley. 

If  the  map  embrace  a  whole  continent  or  an  island,  all  the 
contours  will  be  of  closed  form,  as  in  figure  11,  but  if  it  em- 
brace only  a  part  of  the  continent  or  island,  some  of  the  con- 
tours will  be  chopped  off  at  the  edge  of  the  map,  and  we  have 
the  open  form  of  contours,  as  we  would  have  if  figure  11  were 
cut  into  two  parts. 

The  closed  form  may  indicate  a  hill  or  a  basin ;  the  open 
form,  a  ridge  or  a  valley ;  sometimes  a  casual  glance  does  not 
indicate  which. 

Take  up,  first,  the  contour  of  the  open  type.  If  the  map 
shows  a  stream  running  down  the  inside  of  the  contour,  there 
is  no  difficulty  in  saying  at  once  that  the  ground  feature  is  a 
valley ;  for  instance,  V,  V,  V,  and  the  valley  of  Corral  Creek 
on  the  map.  But  if  there  is  no  stream  line,  does  the  contour 
bend  show  a  valley  or  a  ridge? 

First  of  all,  there  is  a  radical  difference  between  the  bend 
of  a  contour  round  the  head  of  a  valley  arid  its  bend  round 
the  nose  of  a  ridge. 


320        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Compare  on  the  map  the  valleys  V  and  the  ridges  R.  The 
bend  of  the  contour  round  the  head  of  the  valley  is  much 
sharper  than  the  bend  of  the  contour  round  the  nose  of  the 
ridge.  This  is  a  general  truth,  not  only  in  regard  to  maps, 
but  also  in  regard  to  ground  forms.  Study  any  piece  of  open 
ground  and  note  how  much  wider  are  the  ridges  than  the  val- 
leys. Where  you  find  a  "  hog  back  "  or  "  devil's  backbone," 
you  have  an  exception  to  the  rule,  but  the  exceptions  are  not 
frequent  enough  to  worry  over. 

To  tell  whether  a  given  point  is  on  a  ridge  or  in  a  valley, 
start  from  the  nearest  stream  shown  on  the  map  and  work 
across  the  map  to  the  underter mined  point,  keeping  in  mind 
that  in  a  real  trip  across  the  country  you  start  from  the 
stream,  go  up  the  hill  to  the  top  of  a  ridge,  down  the  other 
side  of  the  hill  to  a  watercourse,  then  up  a  hill  to  the  top  of  a 
ridge,  down  again,  up  again,  etc.  That  is  all  traveling  is — 
valley,  hill,  valley,  hill,  valley,  etc.,  though  you  wander  till 
the  crack  o'  doom.  And  so  your  map  travels  must  go — valley, 
hill,  valley,  hill — till  you  run  off  the  map  or  come  back  to  the 
starting  point. 

On  the  map,  follow  the  R-V  line,  V  indicating  valley  and  R 
ridge  or  hill.  Note  first  the  difference  in  sharpness  in  the 
contour  bends ;  also  how  the  valley  contours  point  to  the 
highland  and  the  ridge  contours  to  the  lowland. 

The  contours  go  thus : 

Law* 


The  streams  flow  down  the  valleys,  and  the  sharp  angle  of 
the  contour  points  always  up  stream.  Note  also  how  the  junc- 
tion of  a  stream  and  its  tributary  usually  makes  an  angle 
that  points  doicn  stream. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        321 

"Which  way  does  this  stream  run?" 

Water  flows  down  hill.  If  you  are  in  the  bed  of  a  stream, 
contours  representing  higher  ground  must  be  to  your  right 
and  to  your  left.  Get  the  elevations  of  these  contours.  Gen- 
erally the  nearest  contour  to  the  bank  of  the  stream  will  cross 
the  stream,  and  there  will  be  an  angle  or  sharp  turn  in  the 
contour  at  this  crossing.  If  the  point  of  the  angle  or  sharp 
turn  is  toward  you,  you  are  going  downstream ;  if  away  from 
you,  you  are  going  upstream. 

If  the  contours  are  numbered,  you  have  only  to  look  at  the 
numbers  to  say  where  the  low  and  where  the  high  places  are ; 
but  to  read  a  map  with  any  speed  one  must  be  quite  independ- 
ent of  these  numbers.  In  ordinary  map  reading  look,  first  oi! 
all,  for  the  stream  lines.  The  streams  are  the  skeleton  upon 
which  the  whole  map  is  hung.  Then  pick  out  the  hilltops  and 
ridges,  and  you  have  a  body  to  clothe  with  all  the  details  that 
will  be  revealed  by  a  close  and  careful  study  of  what  the  map 
maker  has  recorded. 

As  to  closed  contours,  they  may  outline  a  depression  or  a 
hill.  On  the  map  "  881 "  or  "  885  "  might  be  hills  or  ponds,  as 
far  as  their  shape  is  concerned.  But,  clearly,  they  are  hills, 
for  on  either  side  are  small  streams  running  away  from  them, 
If  they  were  ponds,  the  stream  lines  would  run  toward  the 
closed  contours.  The  test  of  "  hill,  valley,  hill,"  will  always 
solve  the  problem  when  there  are  not  enough  stream  lines 
shown  to  make  evident  at  once  whether  a  closed  contour 
marks  a  pond  or  a  hill.  Look  in  the  beginning  for  the  stream 
lines  and  valleys,  and,  by  contrast,  if  for  no  other  reason,  the 
hills  and  ridges  at  once  loom  up. 

To  illustrate  the  subject  of  contours  to  aid  those  who  have 
difficulty  in  reading  contoured  maps  the  following  is  sug- 
gested : 

1.  Secure  modeling  clay  and  build  a  mound. 

2.  Use  wire  and  slice  this  mound  horizontally  at  equal  ver- 
tical intervals  into  zones ;  then  insert  vertical  dowels  through 
the  mound  of  clay. 

3.  Remove  the  top  zone,  place  on  paper,  and  draw  outline  of 
the-  bottom   edge.     Trim   your  paper   roughly  to  the  outline 
drawn.     Indicate  where  the  holes  made  by  the  dowels  pierce 
the  paper. 

366P— 17— — 12 


ooo 


322        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

4.  Do  the  above  with  each  zone  of  your  mound. 

5.  Place  these  papers  in  proper  order  on  dowels  similarly 
placed  to  ones  in  original  mound  at,  say,  1  inch  vertical  inter-^ 
val  apart.    A  skeleton  mound  results. 

6.  Replace  the  zones  of  the  clay  mound  and  form  the  orig- 
inal clay  mound  along  the  side  of  skeleton  mound. 

7.  Now  force  all  the  paper  sheets  down  the  dowels  onto  the 
bottom  sheet,  and  we  have  a  map  of  clay  mound  with  contours. 

NOTE. — One-inch  or  2-inch  planks  can  be  made  into  any  de- 
sired form  by  the  use  of  dowels  and  similar  procedure  fol- 
lowed. 

People  frequently  ask,  "  What  should  I  see  when  I  read  a 
map?"  and  the  answer  is  given,  "  The  ground  as  it  is."  This 
is  not  true  any  more  than  it  is  true  that  the  words  "  The  valley 
of  the  Meuse,"  bring  to  your  mind  vine-clad  hills,  a  noble  river, 
and  green  fields  where  cattle  graze.  Nor  can  any  picture  ever 
put  into  your  thought  what  the  Grand  Canyon  really  is* 
What  printed  word  or  painted  picture  can  not  do,  a  map  will 
not.  A  map  says  to  you,  "  Here  stands  a  hill,"  "  Here  is  a 
valley,"  "  This  stream  runs  so,"  and  gives  you  a  good  many 
facts  in  regard  to  them.  But  you  do  not  have  to  "  see  "  any- 
thing, any  more  than  you  have  to  visualize  Liege  in  order  to 
learn  the  facts  of  its  geography.  A  map  sets  forth  cold  facts 
in  an  alphabet  all  its  own,  but  an  easy  alphabet,  and  one  that 
tells  with  a  few  curving  lines  more  than  many  thousand  words 
could  tell. 

Section  2.  Sketching:. 

Noncommissioned  officers  and  selected  privates  should  be 
able  to  make  simple  route  sketches.  This  is  particularly  use- 
ful in  patrolling,  as  thereby  a  patrol  leader  is  able  to  give  his 
commander  a  good  idea  of  the  country  his  patrol  has  traversed. 
Sketches  should  be  made  on  a  certain  scale,  which  should  be 
indicated  on  the  sketch,  such  as  3  inches  on  the  sketch  equals 
1  mile  on  the  ground.  The  north  should  be  indicated  on  the 
sketch  by  means  of  an  arrow  pointing  in  that  direction.  Any 
piece  of  paper  may  be  used  to  make  the  sketch  on.  The  back 
of  the  field-message  blank  is  ruled  and  prepared  for  this  pur- 
pose. The  abbreviations  and  conventional  signs  shown  on  the 
following  pages  should  be  used  in  making  such  simple  sketches. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


Field  Maps  and  Sketches. 

-   The  following  abbreviations  aad  signs  are  authorized  for  use  on  field  maps  antf 
Iketches.    For  more  elaborate  map  work  the  authorized  conventional  signs  as 
given  in  the  manual  of  "  Conventional  Signs,  United  States  Army  Maps/!  are  used. 
Abbreviations  otner  than  those  given  should  not  be  used. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


A. 

Arroyo. 

abut. 

Abutment. 

Arch. 

jj 

Brick. 

B.S. 

Blacksmith  Shop. 

bot. 

Bottom. 

Br. 

Branch. 

i 

Bridge. 
Cape. 

cem. 
con. 

Cemetery. 
Concrete. 

cov. 

Covered. 

Cr. 

Creek. 

d. 
cul. 
D.S. 

Deep. 
Culvert. 
Drug  Store, 

East. 

Est. 

Estuary. 
Fordable. 

Ft. 

Fort. 

G.S. 

General  Store. 

Pt. 

Point. 

!.' 

Girder, 
Gristmill. 
Iron. 

r 

R,  H. 

Queen-post. 
River. 
Roundhouse. 

1. 

Island. 

R.  R. 

Railroad. 

ic. 

Junction. 

South, 

kiD. 

King-post. 

^ 

Steel. 

L( 

Lake. 

S.  H. 

School  houte. 

Lat. 

Latitude. 

S.  M. 

Sawmill. 

Ldg. 

Landing. 

Sta. 

Station. 

L.  v>«  o. 

Life-Saving  Station. 
Lighthouse 
Longitude. 
Mountain. 

st, 
str. 
T.  G. 
Tres, 

Stone. 
Stream. 
Tollgate. 
Trestle. 

Mts. 

Mountains. 

tr. 

Truss. 

N. 

North. 

W  T 

Water  Tank. 

n,f. 

Notfordable. 
Pier. 

Wo  W 
XV. 

Waterworks. 
West. 

pk. 

Plank. 

W. 

Wood. 

£.0. 

Post  Office 

wd. 

Wide. 

SIGNS — FIELD   MAPS   AND    SKETCHES. 


lelefraphUne 


Symbol  (modified  below)  »T»«TT»T  r 

Along  improved  road       «  •    •  • " 

Along  unimproved  road  •,»»?***-*-*•»•«»• 
A!on|trait  ^.^^-r-r-^-i 

Singe  track  """"""  """""M>>' 

Double  track  """""" '!"!"""">: 

Trolley  ,*"'" <m<rvnni^M- 

Improved  * 

Unirrproved  ~  =  =  -  ==--=-^;3zfs-::- 

barbed  wire     .  •'•"•'•    •   •  •  •    •"• 

smcDthwtre     |  •    <    • 

wood 
stone 


334         MANUAL  FOB  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 
8rid§J 


Indicate  character  and  span  by  abbreviations 
Example: 


Meaning  wooden  kingpost  bridge.40feet  Ion6,20  feet  wide, 
and  10  feet  above  the  water 


Streams  >•*. 


Indicate  character  by  abbreviation^ 


MeanJn£astream  15  feet  wide*  6  feet  deep,  and  not  "fordable. 
House  •  Church*  School  house  *S.H 

Woods    $<^^)  Orchardb-lTrT!}  Cultivated  Land  jCultj 

If  boundary  tines  are  fences  they  are  Indicated  as  such 
Brush,  crops  or  |pasa,  importeint  as  covert^  fbrage  [^^^£^1 


Cemeter»X     1  *****+t  Trees,  isolated 

Cut.andGll-  *  ^  •  N.        cut  10  feet  deep 


1 


CHAPTER  XI. 
MESSAGE  BLANKS. 


U.  S.  ARMY  FIELD 
MESSAGE. 

No.      Sent  by.!  Time.   Rec'd  by.   Time.    Check. 
(These  spaces  for  Signal  Operators  only.) 

Communicated  by 
Buzzer,      Phone,     Tele- 
graph,    Wireless,     Lan- 

[Name of  sending  detachment.] 
From,     

tern,    Helio,    Flag,    Cy- 
clist,   Foot    Messenger, 
Mounted        Messenger, 
JVlotor    far     frivin<r    TVfn 

[Location  of  sending  detachment.] 
At             _       

chine. 

Underscore  means  used. 

T)ntr>                         Hour                    A7o 

To 

• 

Received  

The  heading  "From"  is  filled  in  with  the  name  of  the  detachment  sending  the 
information:  as  "Officer's  Patrol,  7th  Cav."  Messages  sent  on  the  same  day  from 
the  same  source  to  the  same  person  are  numbered  consecutively.  The  address  is 
written  briefly,  thus:  "Commanding  officer,  Outpost,  1st  Brigade."  In  the  signa- 
ture the  writer's  surname  only  and  rank  are  given. 

This  blank  is  four  and  a  half  by  six  and  three-quarters  inches,  including  the 
margin  on  the  left  for  binding.  The  back  is  ruled  in  squares,  the  side  of  each  square 
representing  100  yards  on  a  scale  of  3  inches  to  one  mile,  for  use  in  making  simple 
sketches  explanatory  of  the  message.  It  is  issued  by  the  Signal  Corps  in  blocks  of 
forty  with  duplicating  sheets.  The  regulation  envelope  is  three  by  five  and  one- 
fourth  inches  and  is  printed  as  follows: 

UNITED  STATES  ARMY  FIELD  MESSAGE. 

#o  ____ 

(•For  signal  operator  only.) 


To 


When  sent 

Rate  of  speed ; 

Name  of  messenger 

When-  and  by  whom  rec'd 

This  Envelope  will  be  Returned  to  Bearer. 


.No, 


325 


CHAPTER  XII. 
SIGNALS  AND  CODES. 

(Extracts  from  Signal  Book,  United  States  Army,  1916.) 


General  Instructions  for  Army  Signaling. 

•  1.  Each  signal  station  will  have  its  call,  consisting  of  one  or 
two  letters,  as  Washington,  "  W  " ;  and  each  operator  or  sig- 
nalist  will  also  have  his  personal  signal  of  one  or  two  letters, 
as  Jones,  "  Jo."  These  being  once  adopted  will  not  be  changed 
without  due  authority. 

2.  To  lessen  liability  of  error,  numerals  which  occur  in  the 
body  of  a  message  should  be  spelled  out. 

3.  In  receiving  a  message  the  man  at  the  telescope  should 
call  out  each  letter  as  received,  and  not  wait  for  the  com- 
pletion of  a  word. 

4.  A  record  of  the  date  and  time  of  the  receipt  or  trans- 
mission of  every  message  must  be  kept. 

5.  The  duplicate  manuscript  of  messages  received  at,  or  the 
original  sent  from,  a  station  should  be  carefully  filed. 

6.  In    receiving    messages    nothing    should    be    taken    for 
granted,  and  nothing  considered  as  seen  until  it  has  been  posi- 
tively and  clearly  in  view.    Do  not  anticipate  what  will  follow 
from  signals  already,  given.     Watch  the  communicating  sta- 
tion until  the  last  signals  are  made,  and  be  very  certain  that 
the  signal  for  the  end  of  the  message  has  been  given. 

7.  Every    address   must   contain    at   least   two   words   and 
should  be  sufficient  to  secure  delivery. 

8.  All  that  the  sender  writes  for  transmission  after  the  word 
"  To  "  is  counted. 

326 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         387 

9.  Whenever  more  than  one  signature  is  attached  to  a  mes- 
sage count  all  initials  and  names  as  a  part  of  the  message. 

10.  Dictionary  words,  initial  letters,  surnames  of  persons, 
names  of  cities,  towns,  villages,   States,  and  Territories,  or 
names  of  the  Canadian  Provinces  will  be  counted  each  a«  one 
word ;  e.  g.,  New  York,  District  of  Columbia,  East  St.  Louis 
should  each  be  counted  as  one  word.     The  abbreviation  of 
the  names  of  cities,  towns,  villages,  States,  Territories,  and 
provinces  will  be  counted  the  same  as  if  written  in  full. 

11.  Abbreviations  of  weights  and  measures  in  common  use, 
figures,  decimal  points,  bars  of  division,  and  in  ordinal  num- 
bers the  affixes  "  st,"  "  d,"   "  nd,"  "  rd,"  and  '•'  th "  will  be 
each  counted  as  one  word.     Letters  and  groups  of  letters, 
when  such  groups  do  not  form  dictionary  words  and  are  not 
combinations  of  dictinary  words,  will  be  counted  at  the  rate 
of  five  letters  or  fraction  of  five  letters  to  a  word.    When  such 
groups  are  made  up1  of  combinations  of  dictionary  words,  each 
dictionary  word  so  used  will  be  counted. 

12.  The  following  are  exceptions  to  paragraph  55,  and  are 
counted  as  shown: 

A.     M 1  word 

P.     M ^ 1  word 

O.     K— 1  Word 

Per    cent ^ 1  word 

13.  No  message  will  be  considered  sent  until  its  receipt  has 
been  acknowledged  by  the  receiving  station. 

The  International  Morse  or  General  Service  Code. 

18.  The  International  Morse  Code  is  the  General  Service 
Code  and  is  prescribed  for  use  by  the  Army  of  the  United 
States  and  between  the  Army  and  the  Navy  of  the  United 
States.  It  will  be  used  on  radio  systems,  submarine  cables 
using  siphon  recorders,  and  with  the  heliograph,  flash-lan- 
terns, and  all  visual  signaling  apparatus  using  the  wigwag. 


328         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Alphabet. 

A  ._ 

*=:-. 

D .. 

E.  s™' 

F..  — .  S... 

H7T77*  uTT  — 

i  ••  v  ...— . 

Numerals. 
1. 

2  .. 

4  iiini~" 

5 


Punctuation. 


Period . ..    ..    .. 

Comma ~.  .  — . . 

Interrogation . . 

Hyphen  or  dash — .... — 

Parenthesis  (before  and  after  the  words) _.__._ 

Quotation  mark   (beginning  and  ending) ^ ._..__. 

Exclamation __..__ 

Apostrophe , % .  — . 

Semicolon __.__.__. 

Colon ___  —  ... 

Bar  indicating  fraction . .  — . 

Underline    (before  and  after  the  word  or  words  it  is 

wished  to  underline) ..-___•_. 

Double  dash  (between  preamble  and  address,  between 
address  and  body  of  message,  between  body  of  mes- 
sage and  signature,  and  immediately  before  a  frac- 
tion)  __...__ 

Cross .  — .  — . 

Visual  Signaling  in  General. 

21.  Methods  of  visual  signaling  are  divided  as  follows: 
(a)  By  flag,  torch,  hand  lantern,  or  beam  of  searchlight 
(without  shutter.)     (General  Service  Code.) 

(5)  By  heliograph,  flash  lantern,  or  searchlight  (with  shut- 
ter.)    (General  Service  Code.) 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         329 

(c)  By  Ardois.     (General  Service  Code,) 

(d)  By  hand  flags  or  by  stationary  semaphore.     (Two-arm 
semaphore  Code.) 

(e)  By   preconcerted   signals  with   Coston  lights,   rockets, 
bombs,  Very  pistols,  small  arms,  guns,  etc. 

(/)  By  flag  signals  by  permanent  hoists.      (International 
Code.) 

22.  The    following    conventional    signals,  with    exceptions 
noted,  will  be  used  in  the  first  four  classes. 

Exceptions. 

Ardois  and  semaphore. 
End  of  word.  Interval. 

End  of  sentence.  Double  interval. 

End  of  message.  Triple  interval. 

Signal  separating  preamble 
from  address;   address 

from  text;   text  from  sig-  re 

nature.  _..._  Double  interval,  signatu » 

S  receded  also  by  "Sig' 
nterval. 
Acknowledgement.  R. 

Error.  A. 

Negative.  K. 

Preparatory.  L. 

Annulling.  N. 

Affirmative.  P. 

Interrogatory.  ..___..  O. 

Repeat  after  word.  Interrogatory.  A  (word). 

Repeat  last  message.  Interrogatory  three  times. 

Send  taster.  QRQ 

Send  slower.  QRS 

Cease  sending.  QRT 

Wait  a  moment.  .__...  None. 

Execute.  IX,  IX 

Move  to  your  right.  MR 

Move  to  your  left.  ML 

Move  up.  MU 

Move  down.  MD 

Finished  (end  of  work) .        ..._.__  None. 

Visual  Signaling:   By  Flag  (Wig-Wag),  Torch,  Hand  Lantern, 
or  Beam  or  Searchlight  (Without  Shutter). 

GENERAL   SERVICE  CODE. 

23.  For  the  flag  used  with  the  General  Service  Code  there 
are  three  motions  and  one  position.    The  position  is  with  the 
flag  held  vertically,  the  signalman  facing  directly  toward  the 


330         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

station  with  which  it  is  desired  to  communicate.  The  first 
motion  (the  dot)  is  to  the  right  of  the  sender,  and  will  em- 
brace an  arc  of  90°,  starting  with  the  vertical  and  returning 
to  it,  and  will  be  made  in  a  plane  at  right  angles  to  the  line 
connecting  the  two  stations.  The  second  motion  (the  dash) 
is  a  similar  motion  to  the  left  of  the  sender.  The  third  mo- 
tion (front)  is  downward  directly  in  front  of  the  sender  and 
instantly  returned  upward  to  the  first  position.  Front  is  used 
to  indicate  an  interval. 

24.  The   beam   of  the  searchlight,   though   ordinarily   used 
with  the  shutter  like  the  heliograph,  may  be  used  for  long- 
distance signaling,  when  no  shutter  is  suitable  or  available, 
in  a  similar  manner  to  the  flag  or  torch,  the  first  position 
being  a  vertical  one.     A  movement  of  the  beam  90°  to  the 
right  of  the  sender  indicates  a  dot,  a  similar  movement  to  the 
left   indicates  a  dash ;    the  beam   is  lowered   vertically   for 
front. 

25.  To  use  the  torch  or  hand  lantern,  a  footlight  must  be 
employed  as  a  point  of  reference  to  the  motion.     The  lantern 
is  most  conveniently  swung  out  upward  to  the  right  of  the 
footlight  for  a  dot,  to  the  left  for  a  dash,  and  raised  vertically 
for  front. 

NOTE. — To  call  a  station,  make  the  call  letter  until  acknowl- 
edged, at  intervals  giving  the  call  or  signal  of  the  calling 
station.  If  the  call  letter  of  a  station  is  unknown,  wave  flag 
until  acknowledged.  In  using  the  searchlight  without  shutter 
throw  the  beam  in  a  vertical  position  and  move  it  through  an 
arc  of  180°  in  a  plane  at  right  angles  to  the  line  connecting 
the  two  stations  until  acknowledged.  To  acknowledge  a  call, 
signal  "Acknowledgment "  followed  by  the  call  letter  of  the 
acknowledging  station. 

Signaling  with  Heliograph,   Flash   Lantern,   and   Searchlight 
(With  Shutter.) 

QENEEAL    SERVICE    CODE. 

26.  The  first  position  is  to  turn  a  steady  flash  on  the  receiv- 
ing station.    The  signals  are  made  by  short  and  long  flashes. 
Use  a  short  flash  for  dot  and  a  long  steady  flash  for  dash. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         331 

The  elements  of  a  letter  should  be  slightly  longer  than  in 
sound  signals. 

27.  To  call  a  station,  make  its  call  letter  until  acknowledged. 

28.  If  the  call  letter  of  a  station  be  unknown,  signal  A  until 
acknowledged.    Each  station  will  then  turn  on  a  steady  flash 
and  adjust.     When  adjustment  is  satisfactory  to  the  called 
station,  it  will  cut  off  its  flash  and  the  calling  station  will 
proceed  with  its  message. 

29.  If  the  receiver  sees  that  the  sender's  mirror  or  light 
need's  adjustment,  he  will  turn  on  a  steady  flash  until  an- 
swered by  a  steady  flash.     When  the  adjustment  is  satisfac- 
tory the  receiver  will  cut  off  his  flash  and  the  sender  will 
resume  his  message. 

30.  To  break  the  sending  station  for  other  purposes,  turn  on 
a  steady  flash. 

SOUND    SIGNALS. 

56.  Sound  signals  made  by  the  whistle,  foghorn,  bugle, 
trumpet,  and  drum  may  well  be  used  in  a  fog,  mist,  falling 
snow,  or  at  night.  They  may  be  used  with  the  dot  and  dash 
code. 

In  applying  the  General  Service  Code  to  whistle,  foghorn, 
bugle,  or  trumpet,  one  short  blast  indicates  a  dot  and  one  long 
blast  a  dash.  With  the  drum,  one  tap  indicates  a  dot  and  two 
taps  in  rapid  succession  a  dash.  Although  these  signals  can 
be  used  with  a  dot  and  dash  code,  they  should  be  so  used  in 
connection  with  a  preconcerted  or  conventional  code. 

Signaling  by  Two-Arm  Semaphore. 

HAND   FLAGS. 

43.  Signaling  by  the  two-arm  semaphore  is  the  most  rapid 
method  of  sending  spelled-out  messages.  It  is,  however,  very 
liable  to  error  if  the  motions  are  slurred  over  or  run  together 
in  an  attempt  to  make  speed.  Both  arms  should  move  rapidly 
and  simultaneously,  but  there  should  be  a  perceptible  pause  at 
the  end  of  each  letter  before  making  the  movements  for  the 
next  letter.  Rapidity  is  secondary  to  accuracy.  For  alphabet 
see  pages  following. 


I 


332        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


B 


C      Jft    3 


D      1   4 


E     »    5 


F     3L  6 


G     *    7 


H    a  s 


i     *  9 


TD 

o 


K 


PREPARATORY 


M 


ANNULLING 


ERRQGATORY 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         333 


r  IrvMATlVfc. 


IrvMAT 

i 


a 
p 


Q      1 


ACKNOWLEDGE 


U 


w 


V     I 


TTELNrlON 


INTERVAL 


NUMERALS 


334         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


NOTE. — ID  making  the  interval  the  flags  are  crossed  down- 
ward in  front  of  the  body  (Jusl:  above  the  knees)  ;  the  double 
interval  is  the  "  chop-chop "  signal  made  twice ;  the  triple 
interval  is  "  chop-chop  ?'  signal  made  three  times.  In  calling  a 
station  face  it  squarely  and  make  its  call.  If  there  is  no  im- 
mediate reply  wave  the  flags  over  the  head  to  attract  atten- 
tion, making  the  call  at  frequent  intervals.  When  the  sender 
makes  "  end  of  message  "  the  receiver,  if  message  is  under- 
stood, extends  the  flags  horizontally  and  waves  them  until  the 
sender  does  the  same,  when  both  leave  their  stations.  Care 
must  be  taken  with  hand  flags  to  hold  the  staffs  so  as  to  form 
a  prolongation  of  the  arms. 

LETTER  CODES. 

INFANTRY. 

47.  For  use  with  General  Service  Code  or  semaphore  hand 
flags. 


Letter  of  alphabet. 

If  signaled  from  the  rear  to 
the  firing  line. 

If  signaled  from  the  firing  line 
to  the  rear. 

\M 

Ammunition  going  forward. 

Ammunition  required. 

ccc  

Charge   (mandatory  at  all 

Am  about  to  charge  if  no 

CF.   , 

times). 
Cease  firing. 

instructions    to    the    con- 
trary. 
Cease  firing. 

DT  

Double  time  or  "rush." 

Double  time  or  "rush." 

F                ....  

Commence  firing. 

FB  

Fix  bayonets. 

FL  

Artillery  fire  is  causing  us 

Cj 

losses. 
Move  forward. 

Preparing  to  move  forward  . 

HHH 

Halt. 

K         

Negative. 

Negative.  • 

LT  

Left. 

Left. 

o           

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)? 

What  is  the  (R.N.,  etc.)? 

(Ardois   and   sema- 
phore only.) 

(All    methods    but 
ardois  and  sema- 
phore.) 

Interrogatory. 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)? 
Interrogatory. 

Affirmative. 

Interrogatory. 

What  is  the  (R.  N..  etc.)? 
Interrogatory. 

Affirmative. 

MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         335 


Letter  of  alphabet. 

If  signaled  from  the  rear  to 
the  firing  line. 

If  signaled  from  the  firing  line 
to  the  rear. 

RN... 

Range. 

Range. 

RT  

Right. 

Right. 

sss  

Support  going  forward. 

Support  needed. 

SUF  

Suspend  firing. 

Suspend  firing. 

T    . 

Target. 

Target. 

CAVALRY. 

48.  For  use  with  General  Service  Code  or  semaphore  hand 


AM— Ammunition  going  forward  (if  signaled  from  the  roar  to  the 

front). 

Ammunition  required  (if  signaled  from  the  front). 
CCC — Charge  (if  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the  frort). 

About  to  charge  if  no  instructions  to  the  contrary  (if  signaled 

from  the  front). 
OF— Cease  firing. 
DT— Double  time,  rush,  or  hurry. 

F — Commence  firing. 
FL— Artillery  fire  is  causing  us  losses. 
G— Move  forward  (if  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the  front). 

Preparing  to  move  forward  (if  signaled  from  the  front). 
HHH— Halt. 

K— Negative. 
LT— Left. 
M— Bring  up  the  horses  (if  signaled  from  front  to  rear). 

Horses  going  forward  (if  signaled  from  rear  to  front). 
O— What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)    Interrogatory.    (Ardois  and  sema- 
phore only.) 
..____.  .—What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)?    Interrogatory.    (All  methods  but 

Ardois  and  semaphore). 
P— Affirmative. 
R— Acknowledgment. 
RN— Range. 
RT— Right. 
SSS— Support  going  forward  (if  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the  front). 

Support  needed  (if  signaled  from  the  front.) 
SUF— Suspend  firing. 
T— Target. 


336        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

FIELD  ARTILLERY. 

49.  For  use  with  General  Service  Code  or  semaphore  haud 
flags. 

,  .—Error.    (All  methods  but  Ardois  and  semaphore.) 

A— Error.    (Ardois  and  semaphore  only.) 
AD— Additional. 

AKT— Draw  ammunition  from  combat  train. 
AL — Draw  ammunition  from  limbers. 
AM— Ammunition  going  forward. 
A  Mf— At  my  command. 

AP — Aiming  point. 

B  ( numerals)— Battery  (so  many)  rounds. 
BS  (numerals) — (Such.)    Battalion  station. 
BL— Battery  from  the  left  . 
BR— Battery  from  the  right. 
CCC— Charge  (mandatory  at  all  times).    Am  about  to  charge  if  not 

instructed  to  contrary. 
OF— Cease  firing. 
CS— Close  station. 
CT— Change  target. 

D — Down. 
DF— Deflection. 
PT— Double  time.    Rush.    Hurry. 

F— Commence  firing. 

FCL  (numerals)— On  1st  piece  close  by  (so  much). 

FL— Artillery  fire  is  causing  us  losses. 

FOP  (numerals) — On  1st  piece  open  by  (so  much). 

G— Move  forward.    Preparing  to  move  forward. 
HUH—  Halt.    Action  suspended. 

IX— Execute.    Go  ahead.    Transmit. 
JI— Report  firing  data, 
K-Negative.    No. 
KR— Corrector. 

L— Preparatory.    Attention. 
LCL  (numerals)— On  4th  piece  close  by  (so  much). 
LOP  (numerals)— On  4th  piece  open  by  (so  mucn). 
LT— Left. 

LL— Left  from  the  left. 
LR— Left  from  the  right. 
LK  .  numerals)— Less  (so  much). 
MD— Move  down. 
ML— Move0  to  your  left. 
MR— Move0  to  your  right. 
^  MU— Move  up. 

MO  (numerals)— Move  (so  much). 
Is — Annul,  cancel. 

O— What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)?   Interrogatory.    (Ardois  and  sema 
phore  only.) 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        337 


.  .—What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)?    Interrogatory.    (All  methods  "but 

Ardois  and  semaphore.) 
P— Aifirmative.    Yes. 
PS.— Percussion.  .  Shrapnel. 
QRQ— Send  faster. 
QRS— Send  slower. 
QRT— Cease  sending. 

R— Acknowledgment.    Received. 
RS— Regimental  station. 
RL— Right  from  the  left. 
RR— Right  from  the  right. 
RN— Range. 
RT— Right. 

S— Subtract. 
SCI*  numerals)— On  2d  piece  close  by  (so  much). 
SOP  'numerals)— On  2d  piece  open  by  (so  much). 
SH— Shell. 
SI— Site. 
SSS— Support  needed. 

T— Target. 

TCL  (mmericals)— On  3d  piece  close  by  (so  much). 
TOP  (minerals)— On  3d  piece  open  by  (so  much). 

U— Up. 
T  (letter)— Such  battery  station.        * 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
FIRST-AID  RULES, 


The  bandages  and  dressings  contained  in  the  first-aid  picket 
have  been  so  treated*  as  to  destroy  any  germs  thereon.  Tiere- 
fore,  when  dressing  a  wound,  be  careful  not  to  touch  or  htndle 
that  part  of  the  dressing  which  is  to  be  applied  to  the  wrand. 

A  sick  or  injured  person  should  always  be  made  to  lie  lown 
on  his  back,  if  practicable,  as  this  is  the  most  comfortable 
position,  and  all  muscles  may  be  relaxed. 

All  tight  articles  of  clothing  and  equipment  shoud  be 
loosened,  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  breathing  or  the  circu- 
lation of  the  blood.  Belts, ,  collars,  and  the  trousers  it  the 
waist  should  be  opened. 

Don't  let  mere  onlookers  crowd  about  the  patient.  They 
prevent  him  from  getting  fresh  air  and  also  make  hin  nerv- 
ous and  excited. 

In  case  of  injury  the  heart  action  is  generally  we?k  from 
shock,  and  the  body,  therefore,  grows  somewhat  cdd.  So 
don't  remove  any  more  clothing  than  is  necessary  tc  expose 
the  injury. 

Cut  or  rip  the  clothing,  but  don't  pull  it.  Try  to  disturb  the 
patient  as  little  as  possible. 

Don't  touch  a  wound  with  your  fingers  or  a  handkerchief, 
or  with  anything  else  but  the  first-aid  dressing.  Don't  wash 
the  wound  with  water,  as  you  may  infect  it. 

Don't  administer  stimulants  (whisky,  brandy,  vine,  etc.) 
unless  ordered  to  do  so  by  a  doctor.  While  in  a  few  cases 
stimulants  are  of  benefit,  in  a  great  many  cases  tley  do  posi- 
tive harm,  especially  where  there  has  been  any  bl«eding. 

The  heart  may  be  considered  as  a  pump  and  the  arteries  as 
a  rubber  hose,  which  carry  the  blood  from  the  hfart  to  every 
part  of  the  body.  The  veins  afe  the  hose  whL'h  carry  the 
blood  back  to  the  heart.  Every  wound  bleeds  sone,  but,  unless 
a  large  artery  or  a  large  vein  is  cut,  the  Meeting  will  stop 

338 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


339 


after  a  short  while  if  the  patient  is  kept  quiet  and  the  first- 
aid  (Irtish i ix  is  bound  over  tho  wound  so  as  to  nmko  pressure 
on  it. 

When  a  large  artery  is  cut  the  blood  gushes  out  in  spurts 
eveiy  time  the  heart  beats.  In  this  case  it  is  necessary  to  stop 
the  flow  of  blood  by  pressing  upon  the  hose  somewhere  be- 
tween the  heart  and  the  leak. 

If  the  leak  is  in  the  arm  or  hand,  apply  pressure  as  in 
figure  1. 


FIG.  1. 

Tf  the  leak  is  in  the  leg,  apply  pressure  as  in  figure  2. 

If  the  leak  is  in  the  shoulder  or  armpit,  apply  pressure  as  in 
figure  3. 

The  reason  for  this  is  that  at  the  places  indicated  the  ar- 
teries may  be  pressed  against  a  bone  move  easily  than  at  any 
other  places. 

Another  way  of  applying  pressure  (by  means  of  a  tourni- 
quet) is  shown  in  Hgure  4.  Place  a  pad  of  tightly  rolled  cloth 
or  paper,  or  any  suitable  object,  over  the  artery.  Tie  a  band- 
age loosely  about  the  limb  and^then  insert  your  bayonet,  or  a 


340        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

stick,  and  twist  up  the  bandage  until  the  pressure  of  the  pad 
on  the  artery  stops  the  leak.  Twist  the  bandage  slowly  and 
stop  as  soon  as  the  blood  ceases  to  flow,  in  order  not  to  bruise 
the  flesh  or  muscles  unnecessarily. 

A  tourniquet  may  cause  pain  and  swelling  of  the  limb,  and 
if  left  on  too  long  may  cause  the  limb  to  die.     Therefore, 


FIG.  2. 

about  every  half  hour  or  so  loosen  the  bandage  very  carefully, 
but  if  the  bleeding  continues  pressure  must  be  applied  again. 
In  this  case  apply  the  pressure  with  the  thumb  for  five  or  ten 
minutes,  as  this  cuts  off  only  the  main  artery  and  leaves  some 
of  the  smaller  arteries  and  the  veins  free  to  restore  some  of 
the  circulation.  When  a  tourniquet  is  painful  it  is  too  tight 
and  should  be  carefully  loosened  a  little. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         341 

If  the  leg:- or  arm  is  held  upright,  this  also  helps  to  reduce 
the  bleeding  in  these  parts,  because  the  heart  then  has  to 
pump  the  blood  uphill. 

A  broken  bone  is  called  a  fracture.  The  great  danger  in  the 
case  of  a  fracture  is  that  the  sharp,  jagged  edges  of  the  bones 
may  stick  through  the  flesh  and  skin,  or  tear  and  bruise  the 
arteries,  veins,  and  muscles.  If  the  skin  is  not  broken,  a  frac- 
ture is  not  so  serious,  as  no  germs  can  get  in.  Therefore  never 
move  a  person  with  a  broken  bone  until  the  fracture  has  been 
so  fixed  that  the  broken  ends  of  the  bone  can  not  move. 


FIG.  3. 

If  the  leg  or  arm  is  broken,  straighten  the  limb  gently  and 
if  necessary  pull  upon  the  end  firmly  to  get  the  bones  in  place. 
Then  bind  the  limb  tirmly  to  a  splint  to  hold  it  in  place.  A 
splint  may  be  made  of  any  straight,  stiff  material — a  shingle 
or  piece  of  board,  a  bayonet,  a  rifle,  a  straight  branch  of  a  tree, 
etc.  Whatever  material  you  use  must  be  well  padded  on  the 
side  next  to  the  limb.  Be  careful  never  to  place  the  bandages 
over  the  fracture,  but  always  above  and  below.  (Figs.  5,  C, 
7.  8.) 

Many  surgeons  think  that  the  method  of  binding  a  broken 
leg  to  the  well  one,  and  of  binding  the  arm  to  the  body,  is 


342        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

the  best  plan  in  the  field  as  being  the  quickest  and  one  that 
serves  the  immediate  purpose. 


FIG.  4. — Improvised  tourniquet. 

With  wounds  about  the  body,  the  chest,  and  abdomen  you 
must  not  meddle  except  to  protect  them  when  possible,  with- 
out much  handling,  with  the  materials  of  the  packet. 


FAINTING,    SHOCK,    HEAT  EXHAUSTION. 

The  symptoms  of  fainting,  shock,  and  heat  exhaustion  are 
very  similar.    The  face  is  pale,  the  skin  cool  and  moist,  the 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         343 


pulse  is  weak,  and  generally  the  patient  is  unconscious. 
Keep  the  patient  quiet,  resting  on  his  back,  with  his  head  low. 
Loosen  the  clothing,  but  keep  the  patient  warm,  and  ;;ive 
stimulants  (whisky,  hot  coffee,  tea,  etc.). 

SUNSTROKE. 

In  the  case  of  sunstroke  the  face  is  flushed,  the  skin  is  dry 
and  very  hot,  and  the  pulse  is  full  and  strong.    In  this  case 


FIG  5. 


FIG.  G. 


place  the  patient  in  a  cool  spot,  remove  the  clothing,  and  make 
every  effort  to  lessen  the  heat  in  the  body  by  cold  applications 
to  the  head  and  surface  generally.  Do  not,  under  any  circum- 
stances, give  any  stimulants  or  hot  drinks. 


FBEEZING  AND  FBOSTBITE. 

The  part  frozen,  which  looks  white  or  bluish  white,  and  is 
cold,  should  be  very  slowly  raised  in  temperature  by  brisk 
but  careful  rubbing  in  a  cool  place,  and  never  near  a  fire. 
Stimulants  are  to  be  giveji  cautiously  when  the  patient  can 


344         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

swallow,  and  followed  by  small  amounts  of  warm  liquid  nour- 
ishment. The  object  is  to  restore  the  circulation  of  the  blood 
and  the  natural  warmth  gradually  and  not  violently.  Care 
and  patience  are  necessary  to  do  this. 


FIG.  7. 


FIG.  8. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         345 
RESUSCITATION  OF  THE  APPARENTLY  DROWNED. 

In  the  instruction  of  the  Army  in  First  Aid  the  method,  of 
resuscitation  of  the  apparently  drowned,  as  described  by 
"  Schaefer,"  will  be  taught  instead  of  the  "  Sylvester  Method," 
heretofore  used.  The  Schaefer  method  of  artificial  respiration 
is  also  applicable  in  cases  of  electric  shock,  asphyxiation  by 
gas,  and  of  the  failure  of  respiration  following  concussion  of 
the  brain. 

Being  under  water  for  four  or  five  minutes  is  generally 
fatal,  but  an  effort  to  revive  the  apparently  drowned  should 
always  be  made,  'unless  it  is  known  that  the  body  has  been 
under  water  for  a  very  long  time.  The  attempt  to  revive  the 
patient  should  not  be  delayed  for  the  purpose  of  removing  his 
clothes  or  placing  him  in  the  ambulance.  Begin  the  procedure 
as  soon  as  he  is  out  of  the  water,  on  the  shore  or  in  the  boat. 
The  first  and  most  important  thing  is  to  start  artificial  respi- 
ration without  delay. 

The  Schaefer  method  is  preferred  because  it  can  be  carried 
out  by  one  person  without  assistance,  and  because  its  pro- 
cedure is  not  exhausting  to  the  operator,  thus  permitting  him, 
if  required,  to  continue  it  for  one  or  two  hours.  When  it  is 
known  that  a  person  has  been  under  water  for  but  a  few 
minutes  continue  the  artificial  respiration  for  at  least  one 
and  a  half  to  t\vo  hours  before  considering  the  case  hopeless. 
Once  the  patient  has  begun  to  breathe  watch  carefully  to  see 
that  he  does  not  stop  again.  Should  the  breathing  be  very 
faint,  or  should  he  stop  breathing,  assist  him  again  with 
artificial  respiration.  After  he  starts  breathing  do  not  lift 
him  nor  permit  him  to  stand  until  the  breathing  has  become 
full  and  regular. 

SCHAEFER    METHOD. 

As  soon  as  the  patient  is  removed  from  the  water,  turn  him 
face  to  the  ground,  clasp  your  hands  under  his  waist,  and  raise 
the  body  so  any  water  may  drain  out  of  the  air  passages  while 
the  head  remains  low.  (Figure  9.) 

The  patient  is  laid  on  his  stomach,  arms  extended  from  his 
body  beyond  his  head,  face  turned  to  one  side  so  that  the 
mouth  and  nose  do  not  touch  the  ground.  This  position  causes 


346        MANUAL  FOB  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 


the  tongue  to  fall  forward  of  its  own  weight  and  so  prevents 
its  falling  back  into  the  air  passages.  Turning  the  head  to  one 
side  prevents  the  face  coining  into  contact  with  mud  or  water 
during  the  operation.  This  position  also  facilitates  the  re- 


I. 

0> 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         347 

moval  from  the  mouth  of  foreign  bodies,  such  as  tobacco, 
chewing  gum,  false  teeth,  etc.,  and  favors  the  expulsion  of 
mucus,  blood,  vomitus,  serum,  or  any  liquid  that  may  be  in 
the  air  passages. 


348        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

The  operator  kneels,  straddles  one  or  both  of  the  patient's 
thighs,  and  faces  his  head.  Locating  the  lowest  rib,  the  oper- 
ator, with  his  thumbs  nearly  parallel  to  his  fingers,  places 
his  hands  so  that  the  little  finger  curls  over  the  twelfth  rib. 
If  the  hands  are  on  the  pelvic  bones,  the  object  of  the  work  is 
defeated;  hence  the  bones  of  the  pelvis  are  first  located  in 
order  to  avoid  them.  The  hands  must  be  free  from  the  pelvis 
and  resting  on  the  lowest  rib.  By  operating  on  the  bare  back 
it  is  easier  to  locate  the  lower  ribs  and  avoid  the  pelvis,  Tlu> 
nearer  the  ends  of  the  ribs  the  hands  are  placed  without  slid- 
ing off  the  better.  The  hands  are  thus  removed  from  the 
spine,  the  fingers  being  nearly  out  of  sight. 

The  fingers  help  some,  but  the  chief  pressure  is  exerted  by 
the  heels  (thenar  and  hypothenar  eminences)  of  the  hands, 
with  the  weight  coming  straight  from  the  shoulders.  It  is  a 
waste  of  energy  to  bend  the  arms  at  the  elbows  and  shove  in 
from  the  sides,  because  the  muscles  of  the  back  are  stronger 
than  the  muscles  of  the  arms. 

The  operator's  arms  are  held  straight,  and  his  weight  is 
brought  from  his  shoulders  by  bringing  his  body  and  shoul- 
ders forward.  This  weight  is  gradually  increased  until  at  the 
end  of  the  three  seconds  of  vertical  pressure  upon  the  lower 
ribs  of  the  patient  the  force  is  felt  to  be  heavy  enough  to  com- 
press the  parts ;  then  the  weight  is  suddenly  removed.  If 
there  is  danger  of  not  returning  the  hands  to  the  right  posi- 
tion again,  they  ran  remain  lightly  in  place;  but  it  is  usually 
better  to  remove  the  hands  entirely.  If  the  operator  is  light 
and  the  patient  an  overweight  adult,  he  can  utilize  over  80  per- 
cent of  his  weight  by  raising  his  knees  from  the  ground  and 
supporting  himself  entirely  on  his  toes  and  the  heels  of  his 
hands,  the  latter  properly  placed  on  the  ends  of  the  floating 
ribs  of  the  patient.  In  this  manner  he  can  work  as  effectively 
as  a  heavy  man. 

A  light  feather  or  a  piece  of  absorbent  cotton  drawn  out 
thin  and  held  near  the  nose  by  some  one  will  indicate  by  its 
movements  whether  or  not  there  is  a  current  of  air  going  and 
coining  wTith  each  forced  expiration  and  spontaneous  inspira- 
tion. 

The  natural  rate  of  breathing  is  12  to  15  times  per  minute. 
The  rate  of  operation  should  not  exceed  this.  The  lungs  must 
be  thoroughly  emptied  by  three  seconds  of  pressure,  then  re- 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        349 

filling  takes  care  of  itself.  Pressure  and  release  of  pressure — 
one  complete  respiration — occupies  about  five  seconds.  If  the 
operator  is  alone,  he  can  be  guided  in  each  act  by  his  own 
deep,  regular  respiration  or  by  counting  or  by  his  watch  lying 
by  his  side.  If  comrades  are  present,  be  can  be  advised  by 
them. 

The  duration  of  the  efforts  as  artificial  respiration  should 
ordinarily  exceed  an  hour ;  indefinitely  longer  if  there  are  any 
evidences  of  returning  animation,  by  way  of  breathing,  speak- 
ing, or  movements.  There  are  liable  to  be  evidences  of  life 
within  25  minutes  in  patients  who  will  recover  from  electric 
shock,  but  where  there  is  doubt  the  patient  should  be  given  the 
benefit  of  the  doubt.  In  drowning,  especially,  recoveries  are 
on  record  after  two  hours  or  more  of  unconsciousness ;  hence, 
the  Schaefer  method,  being  easy  of  operation,  is  more  likely  to 
be  persisted  in. 

Aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  may  be  poured  on  a  handker- 
chief and  held  continuously  within  3  inches  of  the  face  and 
nose.  If  other  ammonia  preparation  are  used,  they  should  be 
diluted  or  held  farther  away.  Try  it  on  your  own  nose  first. 

When  the  operator  is  a  heavy  man  it  is  necessary  to  caution 
him  not  to  bring  force  too  violently  upon  the  ribs,  as  one  of 
them  might  be  broken. 

Do  not  attempt  to  give  liquids  of  any  kind  to  the  patient 
while  unconscious.  Apply  warm  blankets  and  hot-water  bot- 
tles as  soon  as  they  can  be  obtained., 


CHAPTER  XIV. 
LAWS  AND  REGULATIONS, 


Section  1.  General  provisions. 

The  Army  of  the  United  States  is  governed  by  certain  laws 
called  "  The  Articles  of  War  "  and  certain  regulations  called 
"Army  Regulations/' 

The  following  list  includes  the  offenses  most  often  com- 
mitted by  soldiers,  generally  through  ignorance  or  carelessness 
rather  than  viciousness.  Violations  of  any  rule  or  regulation 
should  be  carefully  guarded  against,  since  they  not  only  sub- 
ject the  offender  to  punishment,  but  also  bring  discredit  on 
his  comrades,  his  organization,  and  on  the  military  pro- 
fession : 

1.  Selling,  pawning,  or.  through  neglect,  losing  or  spoiling 
any  Government  property,  such  as  uniforms,  blankets,  equip- 
ment, ammunition,  etc. 

2.  Disobedience  of  the  orders  of  any  officer  or  noncommis- 
sioned officer. 

3.  Disrespect  to  an  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer. 

4.  Absence  from  camp  without  leave. 

5.  Absence  from  any  drill,  formation,  or  other  dutv  without 
authority. 

6.  Drunkenness  on  duty  or  off  duty,  whether  in  camp  or 
when  absent  either  with  or  without  leave. 

7.  Bringing  liquor  into  camp. 

8.  Noisy   or   disorderly   conduct   in   camp   or   when   absent 
either  with  or  without  leave. 

9.  Entering  on  private  property,  generally  for  the  purpose 
of  stealing  fruit,  etc. 

•    350 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         351 

10.  Negligence  or  carelessness  at  drill  or  on  other  duty, 
particularly  while  on  guard  or  as  a  sentinel  over  prisoners. 

11.  Wearing  an  unauthorized  uniform  or  wearing  the  uni- 
form in  an  improper  manner. 

12.  Urinating  in  or  around  camp. 

13.  Failing  to  salute  properly. 

14.  Disrespect  or  affront  to  a  sentinel. 

15.  Abuse  or  neglect  of  his  horse. 

"  The  basic  principles  of  the  combat  tactics  of  the  different 
arms  are  set  forth  in  the  Drill  Regulations  of  those  arms  for 
units  as  high  as  brigades."  (Preface,  Field  Service  Regula- 
tions. ) 

"  The  Drill  Regulations  are  furnished  as  a  guide.  They 
provide  the  principles  for  training  and  for  increasing  the 
probability  of  success  in  battle.  In  the  interpretation  of  the 
regulations  the  spirit  must  be  sought.  Quibbling  over  the 
minutiae  of  form  is  indicative  of  failure  to  grasp  the  spirit/* 
(Paragraph  4,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations.} 

Field  Service  Regulations  govern  all  arms  of  the  Army  of 
the  United  States. 

Section  2.  The  Army  of  the  United  States. 

The  Army  of  the  United  States  shall  consist  of  the  Regular 
Army,  the  Volunteer  Army,  the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps,  the 
Enlisted  Reserve  Corps,  the  National  Guard  while  in  the 
service  of  the  United  States,  and  such  other  land  forces  as 
are  now  or  may  hereafter  be  authorized  by  law.  (Sec.  1,  act 
of  JuneS,  1916.) 

Section  3.  Bank  and  precedence  of  officers  and  noncommissioned 

officers. 

The  following  are  the  grades  of  rank  of  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers: 

1.  Lieutenant  general. 

2.  Major  general. 

3.  Brigadier  general. 

4.  Colonel. 

5.  Lieutenant  colonel. 


352        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS, 

6.  Major. 

7.  Captain. 

S.  First  Lieutenant. 

9.  Second  lieutenant. 

10.  Aviator,  Signal  Corps. 

11.  Cadet. 

12.  (a)  Sergeant  major,  regimental;  sergeant  major,  senior 
grade,   Coast   Artillery   Corps;    (b)    quartermaster   sergeant, 
senior  grade,  Quartermaster  Corps ;  master  hospital  sergeant, 
Medical  Department;  master  engineer,  senior  grade,  Corps  of 
Engineers;  master  electrician,  Coast  Artillery  Corps;  master 
signal  electrician;  band  leader;  (c)  hospital  sergeant,  Medical 
Department ;    master   engineer,    junior   grade,   Corps   of   En- 
gineers ;  engineer,  Coast  Artillery  Corps. 

13.  Ordnance   sergeant ;    quartermaster   sergeant*   Quarter- 
master Corps ;  supply  sergeant,  regimental. 

14.  Sergeant     major,     squadron     and     battalion :     sergeant 
major,  junior  grade,  Coast  Artillery  Corps;  supply  sergeant, 
battalion,  Corps  of  Engineers. 

15.  (a)  First  sergeant;  (&)  sergeant,  first  class,  Medical  De- 
partment ;  sergeant,  first  class,  Quartermaster  Corps ;  sergeant, 
first  class,  Corps  of  Engineers;  sergeant,  first  class,  Signal 
Corps;  electrician  sergeant,  first  class,  Coast  Artillery  Corps; 
electrician  sergeant,  Artillery  Detachment,  United  States  Mili- 
tary Academy;  assistant  engineer,  Coast  Artillery  Corps;  (c) 
master  gunner,  Coast  Artillery  Corps ;  master  gunner,  Artillery 
Detachment,  United  States  Military  Academy ;  band  sergeant 
and  assistant  leader,  United  States  Military  Academy  band ; 
assistant  band  leader ;  sergeant  bugler ;  electrician  sergeant, 
second  class,  Coast  Artillery  Corps ;  electrician  sergeant,  sec- 
ond class,  Artillery  Detachment,  United  States  Military  Acad- 
emy; radio  sergeant. 

16.  Color  sergeant. 

17.  Sergeant;    supply   sergeant,   company;    mess   sergeant; 
stable  sergeant;  fireman,  Coast  Artillery  Corps. 

18.  Corporal. 

In  each  grade  and  subgrade  date  of  commission,  appoint- 
ment, or  warrant  determines  the  order  of  precedence.  (Para- 
graph 9,  Army  Regulations,  1913.) 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        353 
Section  4.  Insignia  of  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers. 

The  insignia  of  rank  appearing  on  the  shoulder  straps, 
shoulder  loops,  or  collar  of  shirt  (when  shirt  is  worn  without 
coat)  of  officers  are  as  follows: 

General :  Coat  of  arms  and  two  stars. 

Lieutenant  general :  One  large  star  and  two  smaller 
ones. 

Major  general :  Two  silver  stars. 

Brigadier  general :  One  silver  star. 

Colonel :  One  silver  spread  eagle. 

Lieutenant  colonel :  One  silver  leaf. 

Major :  One  gold  leaf. 

Captain :  Two  silver  bars. 

First  lieutenant:  One. silver  bar. 

The  grade  of  noncommissioned  officers  is  indicated  by  chev- 
rons worn  on  the  sleeve. 

Section  5.  Extracts  from  the  Articles  of  War. 

(Relating  to  enlisted  men.) 
CERTAIN  ARTICLES  TO  BE  READ  AND  EXPLAINED. 

ART.  110.  Articles  1,  2,  and  29,  54  to  96,  inclusive,  and  1<M 
to  109,  inclusive,  shall  be  read  and  explained  to  every  soldier 
at  the  time  of  his  enlistment  or  muster  in,  or  within  six  days 
thereafter,  and  shall  be  read  and  explained  once  every  six 
months  to  the  soldiers  of  every  garrison,  regiment,  or  com- 
pany in  the  service  of  the  United  States. 
DEFINITIONS. 

ARTICLE  1.  The  following  words  when  used  in  these  articles 
shall  be  construed  in  the  sense  indicated  in  this  article,  unless 
the  context  shows  that  a  different  sense  is  intended,  namely: 

(a)  The  word  "  officer "  shall  be  construed  to  refer  to  a 
commissioned  officer; 

(b)  The  word  "soldier"  shall  be  construed  as  including  a 
noncommissioned  officer,  a  private,  or  any  other  enlisted  man; 

(c)  The  word  "  company  "  shall  be  understood  as  including 
a  troop  or  battery;  and 

366°— 17 13 


354        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

(d)  The  word  "battalion"  shall  be  understood  as  includ- 
ing a  squadron. 

PERSONS  SUBJECT  TO  MILITARY  LAW. 

AET.  2.  The  following  persons  are  subject  to  these  articles 
and  shall  be  understood  as  included  in  the  term  "  any  person 
subject  to  military  law  "  or  "  persons  subject  to  military  law  " 
whenever  used  in  these  articles :  Provided,  That  nothing  con- 
tained in  this  act,  except  as  specifically  provided  in  article  2, 
subparagraph  (c),  shall  be  construed  to  apply  to  any  person 
under  the  United  States  naval  jurisdiction,  unless  otherwise 
specifically  provided  by  law; 

(a)  All  officers  and  soldiers  belonging  to  the  Regular  Army 
of  the  United  States;  ail  volunteers,  from  the  dates  of  their 
muster  or  acceptance  into  the  military  service  of  the  United 
States;  and  all  other  persons  lawfully  called,  drafted,  or  or- 
dered into  or  to  duty  or  for  training  in  the  said  service,  from 
the  dates  they  are  required  by  the  terms  of  the  call,  draft,  or 
order  to  obey  the  same. 

(6)   Cadets. 

(c)  Officers  and   soldiers   of  the  Marine  Corps  when  de- 
tached for  service  with  the  armies  of  the  United  States  by 
order  of  the  President:  Provided,  That  an  officer  or  soldier 
of  the  Marine  Corps  when  so  detached  may  be  tried  by  mili- 
tary court-martial  for  an  offense  committed  against  the  laws 
for  the  government  of  the  naval  service  prior  to  his  detach- 
ment, and  for  an  offense  committed  against  these  articles  he 
may  be  tried  by  a  naval  court-martial  after  such  detachment 
ceases. 

(d)  All  retainers  to  the  camp  and  all  persons  accompanying 
or  serving  with  the  armies  of  the  United  States  without  the 
territorial  jurisdiction  of  the  United  States,  and  in  times  of 
war  all  such  retainers  and  persons  accompanying  or  serving 
with  the  armies  of  the  United  States  in  the  field,  both  within 
and  without  the  territorial  jurisdiction  of  the  United  States, 
though  not  otherwise  subject  to  these  articles. 

(e)  All  persons  under  sentence  adjudged  by  courts-martial. 
(/)  All  persons  admitted  into  the  Kegular  Army  Soldiers* 

Home  at  Washington,  D.  C. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        355 
ENLISTMENT  WITHOUT  DISCHARGE. 

ABT.  29.  Any  soldier  who,  without  having  first  received  a 
regular  discharge,  again  enlists  in  the  Army,  or  in  the  militia 
when  in  the  service  of  tbe  United  States,  or  in  the  Navy  or 
Marine  Corps  of  the  United  States,  or  in  any  foreign  army, 
shall  be  deemed  to  have  deserted  the  service  of  the  United 
States,  and,  where  enlistment  is  in  one  of  the  forces  of  tho 
United  States  mentioned  above,  to  have  fraudulently  enlisted 
therein. 

FRAUDULENT  ENLISTMENT, 

ART.  54.  Any  person  who  shall  procure  himself  to  be  enlisted 
in  the  military  service  of  the  United  States  by  means  of 
willful  misrepresentation  or  concealment  as  to  his  qualifica- 
tions for  enlistment,  and  shall  receive  pay  or  allowances 
under  such  enlistment,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct. 

OFFICER  MAKING  UNLAWFUL  ENLISTMENT, 

ART.  55.  Any  officer  who  knowingly  enlists  or  musters  inter 
the  military  service  any  person  whose  enlistment  or  muster 
in  is  prohibited  by  Law,  regulations,  or  orders  shall  be  dis- 
missed from  the  service  or  suffer  such  other  punishment  as 
a  court-martial  may  direct. 

MUSTER    ROLLS— FALSE    MUSTER. 

ART.  56.  At  every  muster  of  a  regiment,  troop,  battery,  or 
company  the  commanding  officer  thereof  shall  give  to  the  mus- 
tering officer  certificates,  signed  by  himself,  stating  how  long 
absent  officers  have  been  absent  and  the  reasons  of  their  ab- 
sence. And  the  commanding  officer  of  every  troop,  battery,  or 
company  shall  give  like  certificates,  stating  how  long  absent 
noncommissioned  officers  and  private  soldiers  have  been  ab- 
sent and  the  reasons  of  their  absence.  Such  reasons  and  time 
of  absence  shall  be  inserted  in  the  muster  rolls  opposite  the 
names  of  the  respective  absent  officers  and  soldiers,  and  the 
certificates,  together  with  the  muster  rolls,  shall  be  transmit- 
ted by  the  mustering  officer  to  the  Department  of  War  as 


356        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS, 

speedily  as  the  distance  of  the  place  and  muster  will  admit. 
Any  officer  who  knowingly  makes  a  false  muster  of  man  or 
animal,  or  who  signs  or  directs  or  allows  the  signing  of  any 
muster  roll  knowing  the  same  to  contain  false  muster  or  false 
statement  as  to  the  absence  or  pay  of  an  officer  or  soldier,  or 
who  wrongfully  takes  money  or  other  consideration  on  muster- 
ing in  a  regiment,  company,  or  other  organization,  or  on  sign- 
ing muster  rolls,  or  who  knowingly  musters  as  an  officer  or 
soldier  a  person  who  is  not  such  officer  or  soldier,  shall  be  dis- 
missed from  the  service  and  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

FALSE  RETURNS— OMISSION  TO  RENDER  RETURNS, 

AET.  57.  Every  officer  commanding  a  regiment,  an  independ- 
ent troop,  battery,  or  company,  or  a  garrison  shall,  in  the  be- 
ginning of  every  month,  transmit,  through  the  proper  chan- 
nels, to  the  War  Department  an  exact  return  of  the  same, 
specifying  the  names  of  the  officers  then  absent  from  their 
posts,  with  the  reasons  for  and  the  time  of  their  absence. 
Every  officer  whose  duty  it  is  to  render  to  the  War  Depart- 
ment or  other  superior  authority  a  return  of  the  state  of  the 
troops  under  his  command,  or  of  the  arms,  ammunition,  cloth- 
ing, funds,  or  other  property  thereunto  belonging,  who  know- 
ingly makes  a  false  return  thereof  shall  be  dismissed  from  the 
service  and  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct.  And  any  officer  who,  through  neglect  or  design, 
omits  to  render  such  return  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-mar- 
tial may  direct. 

DESERTION, 

AKT.  58.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  deserts  or 
attempts  to  desert  the  service  of  the  United  States  shall,  if  the 
offense  be  committed  in  time  of  war,  suffer  death  or  such  other 
punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct,  and,  if  the  offense 
be  committed  at  any  other  time,  any  punishment,  excepting 
death,  that  a  court-martial  may  direct. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS,        357 
ADVISING  OK  AIDING  ANOTHER  TO  DESERT. 

ART.  59.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  advises  or 
persuades  or  knowingly  assists  another  to  desert  the  service  of 
the  United  States  shall,  if  the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of 
war,  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct,  and  if  the  offense  be  committed  at  any  other  time 
any  punishment,  excepting  death,  that  a  court-martial  may 
direct. 

ENTERTAINING  A  DESERTER. 

AET.  60.  Any  officer  who,  after  having  discovered  that  a  sol- 
dier in  his  command  is  a  deserter  from  the  military  or  naval 
service  or  from  the  Marine  Corps,  retains  such  deserter  in  his 
command  without  informing  superior  authority  or  the  com- 
mander of  the  organization  to  which  the  deserter  belongs, 
shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

ABSENCE  WITHOUT  LEAVE. 

ART.  61.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  fails  to 
repair  at  the  fixed  time  to  the  properly  appointed  place  of 
duty,  or  goes  from  the  same  without  proper  leave,  or  absents 
himself  from  his  command,  guard,  quarters,  station,  or  camp 
without  proper  leave,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct. 

DISRESPECT  TOWARD  THE  PRESIDENT,  VICE  PRESIDENT,  CON- 
GRESS, SECRETARY  OF  WAR,   GOVERNORS,   LEGISLATURES. 

ART.  62.  Any  officer  who  uses  contemptuous  or  disrespectful 
words  against  the  President,  Vice  President,  the  Congress  of 
the  United  States,  the  Secretary  of  War,  or  the  governor  or 
legislature  of  any  State,  Territory,  or  other  possession  of  the 
United  States  in  which  he  is  quartered  shall  be  dismissed  from 
the  service  or  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct.  Any  other  person  subject  to  military  law  who  so 
offends  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

DISRESPECT  TOWARD  SUPERIOR  OFFICERS. 

ART.  63.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  behaves 
himself  with  disrespect  toward  his  superior  officer  shall  be 
punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 


358        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 
ASSAULTING  OR  WILLFULLY  DISOBEYING  SUPERIOR  OFFICER. 

ABT.  64.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who,  on  any  pre- 
tense whatsoever,  strikes  his  superior  officer  or  draws  or  lifts 
up  any  weapon  or  offers  any  violence  against  him,  being  in 
the  execution  of  his  office,  or  willfully  disobeys  any  lawful 
command  of  his  superior  officer,  shall  suffer  death  or  such 
other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

INSUBORDINATE    CONDUCT    TOWARD    NONCOMMISSIONED 
OFFICER. 

ART.  65.  Any  soldier  who  strikes  or  assaults,  or  who  at- 
tempts or  threatens  to  strike  or  assault,  or  willfully  disobeys 
the  la wful  order  of  a  noncommissioned  officer  while  in  the 
execution  of  his  office,  or  uses  threatening  or  insulting  lan- 
guage, or  behaves  in  an  insubordinate  or  disrespectful  manner 
toward  a  noncommissioned  officer  while  in  the  execution  of 
his  office,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

MUTINY  OR  SEDITION. 

ABT.  66.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  attempts 
to  create  or  who  begins,  excites,  causes,  or  joins  in  any  mutiny 
or  sedition  in  any  company,  party,  post,  camp,  detachment, 
guard,  or  other  command  shall  suffer  death  or  such  other 
punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

FAILURE   TO    SUPPRESS   MUTINY   OR   SEDITION. 

ART.  67.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who,  being  present  at  any 
mutiny  or  sedition,  does  not  use  his  utmost  endeavor  to  sup- 
press the  same,  or  knowing  or  having  reason  to  believe  that  a 
mutiny  or  sedition  is  to  take  place,  does  not  without  delay 
give  information  thereof  to  his  commanding  officer  shall  suffer 
death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

QUARRELS,  FRAYS,  DISORDERS. 

ART.  68.  All  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  have 
power  to  part  and  quell  all  quarrels,  frays,  and  disorders 
among  persons  subject  to  military  law  and  to  order  officers 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        359 

who  take  part  In  the  same  into  arrest,  and  other  persons 
subject  to  military  law  who  take  part  in  the  same  into 
arrest  or  confinement,  as  circumstances  may  require,  until 
their  proper  superior  officer  is  acquainted  therewith.  And 
whosoever,  being  so  ordered,  refuses  to  obey  such  officer  or 
noncommissioned  officer  or  draws  a  weapon  upon  or  otherwise 
threatens  or  does  violence  to  him  shall  be  punished  as  a 
court-martial  may  direct. 

ARREST  OR  CONFINEMENT  OF  ACCUSED  PERSONS, 

ART.  69.  An  officer  charged  with  crime  or  with  a  serious 
offense  under  these  articles  shall  be  placed  in  arrest  by  the 
commanding  officer,  and  in  exceptional  cases  an  officer  so 
charged  may  be  placed  in  confinement  by  the  same  authority. 
A  soldier  charged  with  crime  or  with  a  serious  offense  under 
these  articles  shall  be  placed  in  confinement,  and  when 
charged  with  a  minor  offense  he  may  be  placed  in  arrest. 
Any  other  person  subject  to  military  law  charged  with  crime 
or  with  a  serious  offense  under  these  articles  shall  be  placed 
in  confinement  or  in  arrest,  as  circumstances  may  require; 
and  when  charged  with  a  minor  offense  such  person  may  be 
placed  in  arrest.  Any  person  placed  in  arrest  under  the  pro- 
visions of  this  article  shall  thereby  be  restricted  to  his  bar- 
racks, quarters,  or  tent,  unless  such  limits  shall  be  enlarged 
by  proper  authority.  Any  officer  who  breaks  his  arrest  or 
who  escapes  from  confinement  before  he  is  set  at  liberty  by 
proper  authority  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service  or  suffer 
such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct;  and 
any  other  person  subject  to  military  law  who  escapes  from 
confinement  or  who  breaks  his  arrest  before  he  is  set  at 
liberty  by  proper  authority  shall  be  punished  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 

INVESTIGATION  OF  AND  ACTION  UPON   CHARGES. 

ART.  70.  No  person  put  in  arrest  shall  be  continued  in  con- 
finement more  than  eight  days,  or  until  such  time  as  a  court- 
martial  can  be  assembled.  When  any  person  is  put  in  arrest 
for  the  purpose  of  trial,  except  at  remote  military  posts  or 
stations,  the  officer  by  whose  order  he  is  arrested  shall  see 


360        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

that  a  copy  of  the  charges  on  which  he  is  to  he  tried  is  served 
upon  him  within  eight  days  after  his  arrest,  and  that  he  is 
brought  to  trial  within  10  days  thereafter,  unless  the  necessi- 
ties of  the  service  prevent  such  trial ;  and  then  he  shall  be 
brought  to  trial  within  30  days  after  the  expiration  of  said  10 
days.  If  a  copy  of  the  charges  be  not  served,  or  the  arrested 
person  be  not  brought  to  trial,  as  herein  required,  the  arrest 
shall  cease.  But  persons  released  from  arrest,  under  the  pro- 
visions of  this  article,  may  be  tried,  whenever  the  exigencies 
of  the  service  shall  permit,  within  12  months  after  such  re- 
lease from  arrest :  Provided,  That  in  time  of  peace  no  person 
shall,  against  his  objection,  be  brought  to  trial  before  a  gen- 
eral court-martial  within  a  period  of  five  days  subsequent  to 
the  service  of  charges  upon  him. 

REFUSAL  TO  RECEIVE  AND  KEEP  PRISONERS. 

ART.  71.  No  provost  marshal  or  commander  of  a  guard  shall 
refuse  to  receive  or  keep  any  prisoner  committed  to  his  charge 
by  an  officer  belonging  to  the  forces  of  the  United  States,  pro- 
vided the  officer  committing  shall,  at  the  time,  deliver  an 
account  in  writing,  signed  by  himself,  of  the  crime  or  offense 
charged  against  the  prisoner.  Any  officer  or  soldier  so  refus- 
ing shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

REPORT    OF    PRISONERS   RECEIVED. 

AST.  72.  Every  commander  of  a  guard  to  whose  charge  a 
prisoner  is  committed  shall,  within  24  hours  after  such  con- 
finement, or  as  soon  as  he  is  relieved  from  his  guard,  report  in 
writing  to  the  commanding  officer  the  name  of  such  prisoner, 
the  offense  charged  against  him,  and  the  name  of  the  officer 
committing  him ;  and  if  he  fails  to  make  such  report  he  shall 
be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

RELEASING  PRISONER  WITHOUT  PROPER  AUTHORITY. 

ABT.  73.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who,  without 
proper  authority,  releases  any  prisoner  duly  committed  to 
his  charge,  or  who,  through  neglect  or  design,  suffers  any 
prisoner  so  committed  to  escape,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct 


MANTTAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        361 
DELIVERY  OF  OFFENDERS  TO  CIVIL  AUTHORITIES. 

ART.  74.  When  any  person  subject  to  military  law,  except 
one  who  is  held  by  the  military  authorities  to  answer,  or  who 
is  awaiting  trial  or  result  of  trial,  or  who  is  undergoing  sen- 
tence for  a  crime  or  offense  punishable  under  these  articles, 
is  accused  of  a  crime  or  offense  committed  within  the  geo- 
grnphical  limits  of  the  States  of  the  Union  and  the  District 
of  Columbia,  and  punishable  by  the  laws  of  the  land,  the  com- 
manding officer  is  required,  except  in  time  of  war,  upon  appli- 
cation duly  made,  to  use  his  utmost  endeavor  to  deliver  over 
such  accused  person  to  the  civil  authorities,  or  to  aid  the 
officers  of  justice  in  apprehending  and  securing  him,  in  order 
that  he  may  be  brought  to  trial.  Any  commanding  officer 
who  upon  such  application  refuses  or  willfully  neglects,  ex- 
cept in  time  of  war,  to  deliver  over  such  accused  person  to 
the  civil  authorities  or  to  aid  the  officers  of  justice  in  appre- 
hending and  securing  him  shall  be  dismissed  from  the  service 
or  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct. 

When  under  the  provisions  of  this  article  delivery  is  made 
to  the  civil  authorities  of  an  offender  undergoing  sentence  of 
a  court-martial,  such  delivery,  if  followed  by  conviction,  shall 
be  held  to  interrupt  the  execution  of  the  sentence  of  the  court- 
martial,  and  the  offender  shall  be  returned  to  military  cus- 
tody, after  having  answered  to  the  civil  authorities  for  his 
offense,  for  the  completion  of  the  said  court-tnartial  sentence. 

MISBEHAVIOR   BEFORE    THE   ENEMY. 

ART.  75.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  misbehaves  himself  be- 
fore the  enemy,  runs  away,  or  shamefully  abandons  or  delivers 
up  any  fort,  post,  camp,  guard,  or  other  command  which  it  is 
his  duty  to  defend,  or  speaks  words  inducing  others  to  do  the 
like,  or  casts  away  his  arms  or  ammunition,  or  quits  his  post 
or  colors  to  plunder  or  pillage,  or  by  any  means  whatsoever 
occasions  false  alarms  in  camp,  garrison,  or  quarters,  shall 
suffer  death  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may 


direct. 


362        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 
SUBORDINATES   COMPELLING   COMMANDER  TO    SURRENDER. 

ART.  76.  If  any  commander  of  any  garrison,  fort,  post,  carnp, 
guard,  or  other  command  is  compelled  by  the  officers  or  sol- 
diers under  his  command  to  give  it  up  to  the  enemy  or  to  aban- 
don it,  the  officers  or  soldiers  so  offending  shall  suffer  death 
or  such  other  punishent  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

IMPROPER  USE  OF  COUNTERSIGN. 

ART.  77.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  makes 
known  the  parole  or  countersign  to  any  person  not  entitled  to 
receive  it  according  to  the  rules  and  discipline  of  war,  or  gives 
M  parole  or  countersign  different  from  that  which  he  receives, 
shall,  if  the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of  war,  suffer  death 
or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct 

FORCING  A  SAFEGUARD, 

ART.  78.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who,  in  time  of 
war,  forces  a  safeguard  shall  suffer  death  or  such  other  pun- 
ishment as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

CAPTURED  PROPERTY  TO  BE  SECURED  FOR  PUBLIC  SERVICE. 

AKT.  79.  All  public  property  taken  from  the  enemy  is  the 
property  of  the  United  States  and  shall  be  secured  for  the 
service  of  the  United  States,  and  any  person  subject  to  mili- 
tary law  who  neglects  to  secure  such  property  or  is  guilty  of 
wrongful  appropriation  thereof  shall  be  punished  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 

DEALING  IN  CAPTURED  OR  ABANDONED  PROPERTY. 

ART.  80.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  buys,  sells, 
trades,  or  in  any  way  deals  in  or  disposes  of  captured  or  aban- 
doned property,  whereby  he  shall  receive  or  expect  any  profit, 
benefit,  or  advantage  to  himself  or  to  any  other  person  di- 
rectly or  indirectly  connected  with  himself,  or  who  fails  when- 
ever such  property  comes  into  his  possession  or  custody  or 
within  his  control  to  give  notice  thereof  to  the  proper  author- 
ity and  to  turn  over  such  property  to  the  proper  authority 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        363 

without  delay,  shall,  on  conviction  thereof,  be  punished  by 
fine  or  imprisonment,  or  by  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial,  military  commission,  or  other  military  tribunal  may 
adjudge/ or  by  any  or  all  of  said  penalties. 

RELIEVING,    CORRESPONDING  WITH,    OR   AIDING   THE   ENEMY. 

ART.  81.  Whosoever  relieves  the  enemy  with  arms,  ammuni- 
tion, supplies,  money,  or  other  thing,  or  knowingly  harbors 
or  protects  or  holds  correspondence  with  or  gives  intelligence 
to  the  enemy,  either  directly  or  indirectly,  shall  suffer  death, 
or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  or  military  com- 
mission may  direct. 

SPIES, 

ART.  82.  Any  person  who  in  time  of  war  shall  be  found  lurk- 
ing or  acting  as  a  spy  in  or  about  any  of  the  fortifications, 
posts,  quarters,  or  encampments  of  any  of  the  armies  of  the 
United  States,  or  elsewhere,  shall  be  tried  by  a  general  court- 
martial  or  by  a  military  commission,  and  shall,  on  conviction 
thereof,  suffer  death. 

MILITARY  PROPERTY— WILLFUL  OR  NEGLIGENT  LOSS, 
DAMAGE,  OR  WRONGFUL  DISPOSITION  OF, 

ART.  83.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  willfully 
or  through  neglect  suffers  to  be  lost,  spoiled,  damaged,  or 
wrongfully  disposed  of  any  military  property  belonging  to  the 
United  States  shall  make  good  the  loss  or  damage  and  suffer 
such  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

WASTE   OR  UNLAWFUL   DISPOSITION   OF  MILITARY   PROPERTY 
ISSUED   TO   SOLDIERS. 

ART.  84.  Any  soldier  who  sells  or  wrongfully  disposes  of  or 
willfully  or  through  neglect  injures  or  loses  any  horse,  arms, 
ammunition,  accouterments,  equipments,  clothing,  or  other 
property  issued  for  use  in  the  military  service  shall  be  pun- 
ished as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

DRUNK   ON   DUTY. 

ART.  85.  Any  officer  who  is  found  drunk  on  duty  shall,  if 
the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of  war,  be  dismissed  from 


364        MANTTAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

the  service  and  suffer  such  other  punishment  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct ;  and  if  the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of 
peace  he  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 
Any  person  subject  to  military  law,  except  an  officer,  who  is 
found  drunk  on  duty  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct. 

MISBEHAVIOR  OF  SENTINEL, 

ART.  86.  Any  sentinel  who  is  found  drunk  or  sleeping  upon 
his  post,  or  who  leaves  it  before  he  is  regularly  relieved,  shall, 
if  the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of  war,  suffer  death  or 
such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct;  and  if 
the  offense  be  committed  in  time  of  peace  he  shall  suffer  any 
punishment,  except  death,  that  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

PERSONAL  INTEREST  IN  SALE  OF  PROVISIONS, 

ART.  87.  Any  officer  commanding  in  any  garrison,  fort,  bar- 
racks, camp,  or  other  place  where  troops  of  the  United  States 
may  be  serving  who,  for  his  private  advantage,  lays  any  duty 
or  imposition  upon  or  is  interested  in  the  sale  of  any  victuals 
or  othes  necessaries  of  life  brought  into  such  garrison,  fort, 
barracks,  camp,  or  other  place  for  the  use  of  the  troops,  shall 
be  dismissed  from  the  service  and  suffer  such  other  punish- 
ment as  a  court-martial  may  direct. 

INTIMIDATION   OF  PERSONS   BRINGING  PROVISIONS, 

ART.  88.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  abuses,  in- 
timidates, does  violence  to,  or  wrongfully  interferes  with  any 
person  bringing  provisions,  supplies,  or  other  necessaries  to 
the  camp,  garrison,  or  quarters  of  the  forces  of  the  United 
States  shall  suffer  such  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may 
direct. 

GOOD   ORDER   TO    BE   MAINTAINED   AND   WRONGS   REDRESSED. 

ART.  89.  All  persons  subject  to  military  law  are  to  behave 
themselves  orderly  in  quarters,  garrison,  camp,  and  on  the 
inarch;  and  any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  commits 
any  waste  or  spoil,  or  willfully  destroys  any  property  whatso- 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEES.         365 

ever  (unless  by  order  of  his  commanding  officer),  or  commits 
any  kind  of  depredation  or  riot,  shall  be  punished  as  a  court- 
Dijn'tial  nmy  direct.  Any  commanding  officer  who,  upon  com- 
plaint made  to  him,  refuses  or  omits  to  see  reparation  made  to 
the  party  injured,  in  so  far  as  the  offender's  pay  shall  go 
toward  such  reparation,  as  provided  for  in  article  105,  shall  be 
dismissed  from  the  service  or  otherwise  punished  as  a  court- 
martial  may  direct. 

PROVOKING  SPEECHES  OR  GESTURES. 

ART.  90.  No  person  subject  to  military  law  shall  use  any 
f  f-proachful  or  provoking  speeches  or  gestures  to  another ;  and 
any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  offends  against  the 
provisions  of  this  article  shall  be  punished  as  a  court-martial 
may  direct. 

DUELING. 

ART.  91.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  fights  or 
promotes  or  is  concerned  in  or  connives  at  fighting  a  duel,  or 
who  having  knowledge  of  a  challenge  sent  or  about  to  be  sent, 
fails  to  report  the  fact  promptly  to  the  proper  authority,  shall, 
if  an  officer,  be  dismissed  from  the  service  or  suffer  such  other 
punishment  as  a  court-martial  may  direct ;  and  if  any  other 
person  subject  to  military  law  shall  suffer  such  punishment  as 
a  court-martial  may  direct. 

MURDER— RAPE. 

ART.  92.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  commits 
murder  or  rape  shall  suffer  death  or  imprisonment  for  life,  as 
a  court-martial  may  direct ;  but  no  person  shall  be  tried  by 
court-martial  for  murder  or  rape  committed  within  the -geo- 
graphical limits  of  the  States  of  the  Union  and  the  District 
of  Columbia  in  time  of  peace. 

VARIOUS  CRIMES. 

ART.  93.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  commits 
manslaughter,  mayhem,  arson,  burglary,  robbery,  larceny,  em- 
bezzlement, perjury,  assault  with  intent  to  commit  any  felony, 
or  assault  with  intent  to  do  bodily  harm,  shall  be  punished  as 
a  court-martial  may  direct. 


366        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 
FRAUDS  AGAINST  THE  GOVERNMENT. 

ART.  94.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law  who  makes  or 
causes  to  be  made  any  claim  against  the  United  States  or 
any  officer  thereof,  knowing  such  claim  to  be  false-  or  fraudu- 
lent ;  or 

Who  presents  or  causes  to  be  presented  to  any  person  in  the 
civil  or  military  service  thereof,  for  approval  or  payment,  any 
claim  against  the  United  States  or  any  officer  thereof,  know- 
ing such  claim  to  be  false  or  fraudulent;  or 

Who  enters  into  any  agreement  or  conspiracy  to  defraud 
the  United  States  by  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  obtain,  the 
allowance  or  payment  of  any  false  or  fraudulent  claim ;  or 

Who,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  ob- 
tain, the  approval,  allowance,  or  payment  of  any  claim  against 
the  United  States  or  against  any  officer  thereof,  makes  or 
uses,  or  procures,  or  advises  the  making  or  use  of,  any  writ- 
ing or  other  paper,  knowing  the  same  to  contain  any  false  or 
fraudulent  statements ;  or 

Who.  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  ob- 
tain, the  approval,  allowance,  or  payment  of  any  claim  against 
the  United  States  or  any  officer  thereof,  makes,  or  procures, 
or  advises  the  making  of,  any  oath  to  any  fact  or  to  any  writ- 
ing or  other  paper,  knowing  such  oath  to  be  false ;  or 

Who,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining,  or  aiding  others  to  ob- 
tain, the  approval,  allowance,  or  payment  of  any  claim  against 
the  United  States  or  any  officer  thereof,  forges  or  counter- 
feits, or  procures,  or  advises  the  forging  or  counterfeiting  of 
any  signature  upon  any  writing  or  other  paper,  or  uses,  or 
procures,  or  advises  the  use  of  any  such  signature,  knowing 
the  same  to  be  forged  or  counterfeited ;  or 

Who,  having  charge,  possession,  custody,  or  control  of  any 
money  or  other  property  of  the  United  States,  furnished  or 
intended  for  the  military  service  thereof,  knowingly  delivers, 
or  causes  to  be  delivered,  to  any  person  having  authority  to 
receive  the  same,  any  amount  thereof  less  than  that  for  which 
he  receives  a  certificate  or  receipt ;  or 

Who,  being  authorized  to  make  or  deliver  any  paper  cer- 
tifying the  receipt  of  any  property  of  the  United  States  fur- 
nished or  intended  for  the  military  service  thereof,  makes  or 
delivers  to  any  person  such  writing,  without  having  full 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        367 

knowledge  of  the  truth  of  the  statements  therein  contained 
and  with  intent  to  defraud  the  United  States ;  or 

Who  steals,  embezzles,  knowingly  and  willfully  misappro- 
priates, .applies 'to  his  own  use  or  benefit,  or  wrongfully  or 
knowingly  sells  or  disposes  of  any  ordnance,  arms,  equip- 
ments, ammunition,  clothing,  subsistence  stores,  money,  or 
other  property  of  the  United  States  furnished  or  intended  for 
the  military  service  thereof;  or 

Who  knowingly  purchases  or  receives  in  pledge  for  any  ob- 
ligation or  indebtedness  from  any  soldier,  officer,  or  other  per- 
son who  is  a  part  of  or  employed  in  said  forces  or  service,  any 
ordnance,  arms,  equipment,  ammunition,  clothing,  subsistence 
stores,  or  other  property  of  the  United  States,  such  soldier, 
officer,  or  other  person  not  having  lawful  right  to  sell  or 
pledge  the  same ; 

Shall,  on  conviction  thereof,  be  punished  by  fine  or  impris- 
onment, or  by  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial  may 
adjudge,  or  by  any  or  all  of  said  penalties.  .  And  if  any  per- 
son, being  guilty  of  any  of  the  offenses  aforesaid  while  in  the 
military  service  of  the  United  States,  receives  his  discharge 
or  is  dismissed  from  the  service,  he  shall  continue  to  be  liable 
to  be  arrested  and  held  for  trial  and  sentence  by  a  court-mar- 
tial in  the  same  manner  and  to  the  same  extent  as  if  he  had 
not  received  such  discharge  nor  been  dismissed. 

CONDUCT  UNBECOMING  AN  OFFICER  AND  GENTLEMAN, 

ART.  95.  Any  officer  or  cadet  who  is  convicted  of  conduct 
unbecoming  an  officer  and  a  gentleman  shall  be  dismissed  from 
the  service. 

GENERAL   ARTICLE. 

ART.  96.  Though  not  mentioned  in  these  articles,  all  disor- 
ders and  neglects  to  the  prejudice  of  good  order  and  military 
discipline,  all  conduct  of  a  nature  to  bring  discredit  upon  the 
military  service,  and  all  crimes  or  offenses  not  capital  of  which 
persons  subject  to  military  law  may  be  guilty  shall  be  taken 
cognizance  of  by  a  general  or  special  or  summary  court- 
martial,  according  to  the  nature  and  degree  of  the  offense,  and 
punished  at  the  discretion  of  such  court. 


368        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFPICERS. 

DISCIPLINARY  POWERS  OF   COMMANDING  OFFICERS. 

ART.  104.  Under  such  regulations  as  the  President  may  pre- 
scribe, and  which  he  may  from  time  to  time  revoke,  alter,  or 
add  to,  the  commanding  officer  of  any  detachment,  company, 
or  higher  command  may,  for  minor  offenses  not  denied  by  the 
accused,  impose  disciplinary  punishments  upon  persons  of  his 
command  without  the  intervention  of  a  court-martial,  unless 
the  accused  demands  trial  by  court-martial. 

The  disciplinary  punishments  authorized  by  this  article  may 
include  admonition,  reprimand,  withholding  of  privileges, 
extra  fatigue,  and  restriction  to  certain  specified  limits,  but 
shall  not  include  forfeiture  of  pay  or  confinement  under  guard. 
A  person  punished  under  authority  of  this  article  who  deems 
his  punishment  unjust  or  disproportionate  to  the  offense  may, 
through  the  proper  channel,  appeal  to  the  next  superior  au- 
thority, but  may  in  the  meantime  be  required  to  undergo  the 
punishment  adjudged.  The  commanding  officer  who  imposes 
the  punishment,  his  successor  in  command,  and  superior  au- 
thority shall  have  power  to  mitigate  or  remit  any  unexecuted 
portion  of  the  punishment.  The  imposition  and  enforcement 
dL  disciplinary  punishment  under  authority  of  this  article  for 
any  act  or  omission  shall  not  be  a  bar  to  trial  by  court-martial 
for  a  crime  or  offense  growing  out  of  the  same  act  or  omis- 
sion; but  the  fact  that  a  disciplinary  punishment  has  been 
enforced  may  be  shown  by  the  accused  upon  trial,  and  when 
so  shown  shall  be  considered  in  determining  the  measure  of 
punishment  to  be  adjudged  in  the  event  of  a  finding  of  guilty. 

REDRESS  OF  INJURIES  TO  PERSON  OR  PROPERTY, 

ART.  105.  Whenever  complaint  is  made  to  any  commanding 
officer  that  damage  has  been  done  to  the  property  of  any  per- 
son or  that  his  property  has  been  wrongfully  taken  by  per- 
sons subject  to  military  law,  such  complaint  shall  be  inves- 
tigated by  a  board  consisting  of  any  number  of  officers  from 
one  to  three,  which  board  shall  be  convened  by  the  command- 
ing officer  and  shall  have,  for  the  purpose  of  such  investi- 
gation, power  to  summon  witnesses  and  examine  them  upon 
oath  or  affirmation,  to  receive  depositions  or  other  docu- 
mentary evidence,  and  to  assess  the  damages  sustained 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         369 

against  the  responsible  parties.  The  assessment  of  damages 
aade  by  such  board  shall  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the 
ommanding  officer,  and  in  the  amount  approved  by  him  shall 
le  stopped  against  the  pay  of  the  offenders.  And  the  order 
<f  such  commanding  officer  directing  stoppages  herein  author- 
Led  shall  be  conclusive  on  any  disbursing  officer  for  the  pay- 
nent  by  him  to  the  injured  parties  of  the  stoppages  so  or- 
(ired. 

Where  the  offenders  can  not  be  ascertained  but  the  organi- 
ztion  or  detachment  to  which  they  belong  is  known,  stop- 
pees  to  .the  amount  of  damages  inflicted  may  be  made  and 
aaessed  in  such  proportiton  as  may  be  deemed  just  upon  the 
inqvidual  members  thereof  who  are  shown  to  have  been  pres- 
ontwith  such  organization  or  detachment  at  the  time  the  dam: 
ag«  complained  of  were  inflicted,  as  determined  by  the  ap- 
prqed  findings  of  the  board. 

ARREST   OF   DESERTERS   BY  CIVIL   OFFICIALS, 

A*.  106.  It  shall  be  lawful  for  any  civil  officer  having  au- 
thorv  under  the  laws  of  the  United  States,  or  of  any  State, 
Terrkry,  District,  or  possession  of  the  United  States,  to 
arrest  offenders,  summarily  to  arrest  a  deserter  from  the 
rcilitay  service  of  the  United  States  and  deliver  Mm  into  the 
custoc^of  the  military  authorities  of  the  United  States. 

SOLDIERS  TO   MAKE   GOOD   TIME  LOST. 

ABT.  Vf.  Every  soldier  who  in  an  existing  or  subsequent 
enlistma  deserts  the  service  of  the  United  States  or  with- 
out prop  authority  absents  himself  from  his  organization, 
station,  <Vluty  for  more  than  one  day,  or  who  is  confined  for 
more  thaine  day  under  sentence,  or  while  awaiting  trial  and 
disposition  his  case,  if  the  trial  results  in  conviction,  or 
through  tl  intemperate  use  of  drugs  or  alcoholic  liquor,  or 
through  dfcse  or  injury  the  result  of  his  own  misconduct, 
renders  hiipif  unable  for  more  than  one  day  to  perform 
duty,  shall  V  liable  to.  serve,  after  his  return  to  a  full-duty 
status,  for  U  period  as  shall,  with  the  time  he  may  have 
served  prior,  sucn  desertion,  unauthorized  absence,  confine- 


370        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

merit,  or  inability  to  perform  duty,  amount  to  the  full  term  aj 
that  part  of  his  enlistment  period  which  he  is  required  D 
serve  with  his  organization  before  being  furloughed  to  tie 
Army  Reserve. 

SOLDIERS— SEPARATION  FROM  THE  SERVICE. 

ART.  108.  No  enlisted  man,  lawfully  inducted  into  the  mli- 
tary  service  of  the  United  States,  shall  be  discharged  fr>m 
said  service  without  a  certificate  of  discharge,  signed  b?  a 
field  officer  of  the  regiment  or  other  organization  to  which  he 
enlisted  man  belongs  or  by  the  commanding  officer  wheono 
such  field  officer  is  present;  and  no  enlisted  man  shall  be  lis- 
charged  from  said  service  before  his  term  of  service  has  ex- 
pired, except  by  order  of  the  President,  the  Secretary  of  ''Tar, 
the  commanding  officer  of  a  department,  or  by  a  sentenceof  a 
general  court-martial. 

OATH  OF  ENLISTMENT. 

ART.  109.  At  the  time  of  his  enlistment  every  soldie  shall 
take  the  following  oath  or  affirmation :  "  I,  -  — ,  o  sol- 
emnly swear  (or  affirm)  that  I  will  bear  true  faith  aJ  alle- 
giance to  the  United  States  of  America ;  that  I  will  ser^  them 
honestly  and  faithfully  against  all  their  enemies  whosoever; 
and  that  I  will  obey  the  orders  of  the  President  of  th  United 
States  and  the  orders  of  the  officers  appointed  ove-nie,  ac- 
cording to  the  Rules  and  Articles  of  War."  Thfcoath  or 
affirmation  may  be  taken  before  any  officer. 


CHAPTER  XV. 
ENGLISH-FRENCH  VOCABULARY. 


COMMON    WORDS. 

Aft«*noon  (this) Get  apres-midi. 

Army  (an) Une  armee. 

Bamage Un  bandage. 

Bath Un  bain. 

Bayoiet Une  baionnette. 

Bed.L Unlit, 

Blanit Une  couverture. 

Boy.  \ Un  garcon. 

BulletS Une°balle. 

\  Un  pruneau  (soldier  slang). 

Camp.  1 Un  camp. 

\  Un  campement. 

Cartrid^ Une  cartouche. 

Child. .  .\ Un  enfant. 

Une  enfant. 

Cook \ Un  cuisinier. 

Un  cuistot  (slang). 
Une  cuisiniere  (fern.). 

Dance ...  -V Un  bal. 

Une  danse  (one  dance). 

Dark .V Ob  scur . 

Day \ Un  jour. 

Dead -V Mort, 

Deserter —  A Un  deserteur. 

Door -V Une  porte. 

Farm \ Une  terme. 

Firearms \ Des  armes  a  feu. 

Field  gun V Une  piece  de  campagne. 

Flag \. Un  drapeau. 

Un  £tendard  (standard). 

371 


372        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Forest ,. ... Une  for£t. 

Un  bols  (woods). 

UD  boqueteau  (clump  of  trees). 
Friend .„.. . Un  ami. 

Une  amie. 

Girl Une  jeune  fille. 

Guide ^ Un  guide. 

Gun Un  fusil. 

Halt! Halte! 

Hand .Une  main. 

Hat — Un  chapeau. 

Un  kepi  (cap). 

Un  casque  (helmet). 

Un  feutre  (campaign  hat). 

Head La  tete 

Headquarrters Le  quartier-ge'ne'ral. 

Horse Un  cheval. 

Interpreter Un  interprete. 

Knife Un  couteau. 

Lake Un  lac. 

Man Un  homme. 

Meat De  la  viande. 

Name Un  nom. 

Night La  nuit. 

Noon Midi. 

Machine  gun Une  mitrailleuse. 

Mess  call La  soupe. 

Password. Le  mot  de  passe. 

Pay Le  pret  (enlisted  men^ 

La  solde  (orhcers). 

Prisoner LTn  prisonnier. 

Recruit Une  recrue. 

Un  bleu  (slang). 

Un  bleuet  (slang). 

Un  blanc-bec  (slar,). 
Restaurant Un  restaurant. 

Un  cafe. 
Road Un  chemin. 

Une  route. 
Retreat La  retraite. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        373 

Reveille Le  reVeil. 

La  diane. 

Saber Un  sabre. 

Saddle Une  eelle. 

Shoe Des  chaussures  (shoes  in  general). 

Des  souliers  (low  shoes). 

Des  bottines  (high  shoes) . 

Des  brpdequins  (marching  shoes). 

Shotgun Un  fusil  de  chasse. 

Sick Malade. 

Soup Une  soupe. 

Un  potage. 

Spy Un  espion . 

Supper Le  souper. 

Sword Une  epee. 

Tent Une  tente. 

Shelter  tent Une  tente-abri. 

NUMERALS. 

One Un,  une. 

Two Deux. 

Three Trois. 

Four Quatre. 

Five Cinq  (pronounce  sank). 

Six Six  (pronounce  cease). 

Seven Sept  (pronounce  set) . 

Eight Huit  (pronounce  wcet}. 

Nine Neuf . 

Ten Dix  (pronounce  deess) . 

Eleven Onze. 

Twelve Douze. 

Thirteen Treize. 

Fourteen Quatorze. 

Fifteen Quinze. 

Sixteen Seize. 

Seventeen Six-sept. 

Eighteen Dix-huit. 

Nineteen Dix-neuf . 

Twenty Vingt  (pronounce  vant). 

Twenty-one , Vingt-et-un. 


374        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

. 

Thirty Trente. 

Thirty -one Trente-et-un. 

Thirty-two Trente-deux. 

Forty Quarante. 

Fifty Cinquante. 

Sixty Soixante. 

Seventy Soixante-dix.  , 

Seventy -one Soixante-et-onze. 

Seventy-two Soixante-douze. 

Eighty Quatre-vingts. 

Eighty-one Quatre-  vingt-un. 

Ninety Quatre- vin-.'t-dix. 

Ninety-one .  Quatre- vingt-onze. 

One  hundred Cent. 

One  hundred  and  one.  .^ Cent  un. 

Two  hundred Deux  cents. 

Two  hundred  and  one Deux  cent  un. 

One  thousand Mille. 

Two  thousand ' Deux  mille. 

One  thousand  one  hundred Mille  rent;  onze  cents. 

Thousands  of  soldiers Des  milliers  de  soldats. 

A  million Un  million. 

Two  million  men Deux  millions  d'hommes. 

A  score Une  vingtaine. 

About  forty  men Une  quarantaine  d  'hommes. 

Hundreds  of  men Des  centaines  d'hommes. 

CURRENCY,    MEASURES,    AND    WEIGHTS. 

1  cent Un  sou ;  cinq  centimes. 

10  cents Dix  sous;  cinquante  centimes. 

20  cents  (about) Un  francs. 

1  dollar Cinq  francs. 

(The  French  have  gold  pieces  of  10  francs  and  20  francs;  bank 
notes  of  50  francs,  100  francs,  and  higher.  The  gold  pieces  are 
probably  replaced  by  bank  notes  now.) 

1  meter  (1.0936  yards) Un  metre. 

1  kilometer  (0.62138  mile) Un  kilometre. 

NOTE.— For  all  ordinary  purposes,  the  "  Kilometre  "=f  of  a  mile;  the  "  Centi- 
metre "=T*5  of  an  inch. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS,        375 

1  league  (2.48552  miles) Une  lieue. 

1  hectare  (2.471 1  acres) Un  hectare. 

1  gram  (15.43239  grain  Troy) Un  gramme. 

1    kilogram    (2.204621    pounds 

avoirdupois) Un  kilogramme. 

220.46  pounds  avoirdupois Un  quintal;  100  kilos. 

,  2,204.6  pounds  avoirdupois Une  "tonne;  1,000  kilos. 

(Coal  is  sold  by  the  tonne;  grain  and  hay  by  the  quintal.     Dix 
quintaux  de  ble",  de  foin— 10  quintals  of  grain,  of  hay.) 

1 .0567  quart  (liquid) Un  litre. 

26.417  gallons Un  hectolitre. 

0.9081  quart  (dry) Un  litre. 

2.8379  bushels Un  hectolitre. 

(The  litre,  which  is  the  principal  unit  of  both  fluid  and  dry  meas- 
ures, is  the  contents  of  1  cubic  decimetre  (decimetre =^5-  metre).) 

DAYS,  MONTHS,  AND   SEASONS. 

Sunday Dimanche. 

Monday Lundi. 

Tuesday Mardi. 

Wednesday Mercredi. 

Thursday Jeudi. 

Friday Vendredi. 

Saturday Samedi. 

January Janvier. 

February Fevrier. 

March Mar?. 

April Avril. 

May Mai. 

June Juin. 

July Juillet. 

August A  o  ut  (pronounced  oo) . 

September Septembre. 

October Octobre. 

November Novembre. 

December Decembre. 

The  seasons Les  saisons. 

Winter L'hiver. 


376        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Spring — ...... —  ^ _ Le  printemps. 

Summer L'e*te". 

Fall ...... L'automne. 

Year Un  an;  une  anne*e. 

Month Un  mois. 

Week Une  eeinaine. 

Day Un  jour. 

Hour Une  heure. 

Minute Une  minute. 

Second Une  seconde. 

COMMON   PHRASES. 

Good  morning, sir,madam, miss. IBonjour,       monsieur,      madame, 

Good  afternoon /     mademoiselle. 

Good  evening,  sir Bonsoir,  monsieur. 

Gootf  night,  sir Bonne  nuit,  monsieur. 

Pardon  me. . Pardon;  je  vous  demande  pardon. 

Don't  mention  it Je  vous  en  prie. 

How  do  you  do? Comment  allez-vous? 

Comment  ca  va? 

Comment  vous  portez-vous? 
Very  well,  thank  you Tres  bien,  merci. 

Je  vais  bien,  merci. 

Ca  va  bien,  merci. 

Je  me  porte  bien.  merci. 
Do  not  trouble  yourself Ne  vous  genez  pas. 

Ne  vous  d6rano:ez  pas. 
I  am  very  glad  to  see  you Je  suis  bien  asise  de  vous  voir. 

Je  suis  content  (heureux)  do  vous 
voir. 

What  time  is  it? Quelle  heure  est-il? 

It  is  10  o'clock II  est  dix  heures. 

Take  care;  look  out Prenez  garde. 

Do  not  bother  me Ne  me  derangez  pas. 

Stop  here Arr£tez-vous  ici. 

Does  Mr.  —  live  here? M.  —  deineure  t-il  ici? 

Come  in Entrez. 

You  are  very  kind Vous  etes  tres  aimable. 

At  what  time  does  the  first  train  A   quelle  heure  part  le  premier 
start?  train? 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        377 

What  is  the  name  of  this  sta-  ComeDt  s'appelle  cette  station 
tion?  (gare)? 

I  want Je  de"sire. . Je  veux  (stronger). 

I  do  not  want  it Je  n'en  veux  pas. 

Let  me  know  what  I  owe  you...Dites-moi  ce  que  je  vous  dois. 
Are  you  not  mistaken? Ne  faites-vous  pas  erreur? 

Ne  vous  trompez-vous  pas? 

Please  give  me Veuillez  me  donner. 

Move  on Avancez. 

Circulez.     (Policeman.) 

I  want  something  to  eat Je  desire  quelque  chose  a  manger. 

Where  is  it ? O  ii  est-ce? 

Go  and  look  for  it Allez  le  chercher. 

Take  this  letter  to  the  post  office.  Portez  cette  lettre  a  la  poste. 
How  much  is  it? Combien? 

Combien  cela  coute-t-il? 

It  is  dear .,.  „. ... C'est  cher. 

Thank  you M  ^. .. Merci. 

Je  vous  en  remercie. 
Don't  mention  it. ...  ..„ ... ... II  n'y  a  pas  de  quoi. 

De  nen. 
Allow  me  to  present  my  friend. — Permettez-moi  de  vous  presenter 

mon  ami  — . 

I  am  glad  to  make  your  ac-  Je  suis  encahnt£  de  faire  votre 
quaintance.  connaissance. 

How  far  is  it? A  quelle  distance  est-ce? 

What  can  I  do  for  you? Que  puis-je  faire  pour  vous? 

Do  you  speak  English? Parlez-vous  anglais? 

I  do  not  speak  French  very  well .  Je  ne  parle  pas  tres  bien  le  francais. 

Where  do  you  come  from? D'oti  venez-vous? 

How  did  you  come? Comment  etes-vous  venu? 

On  foot,  in  a  carriage,  in  an  auto,  A  pied,  en  voiture,  en  auto,  en 
by  rail,  by  boat,  on  a  bicycle,  cehmin  de  fer,  en  bateau,  a  bicy- 
on  horseback,  in  an  aeroplane.  clette,  a  cheval,  en  aeroplane. 

MILITARY   TITLES,  RANKS,  AND   GRADES. 

General  officers Les  officers  ge*n£raux. 

General  staff L'etat-major  general. 

Field  officers Les  officiers  sup^rieurs. 

Company  officers Lee  officiers  subalternes. 


378        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Enlisted  men .  .Les  hommes  de  troupe. 

Noncommissioned  officers Les  sous-officiers. 

Private  soldiers Les  simples  soldats. 

Colonel ..,. Le  colonel  (addressed*  as  "Mon 

colonel"). 

Major. . . ...  ^. Le  commandant  ("Mon  command- 
ant"). 

Captain Le  captaine  ("Mon  captaine"). 

Le  piston  (slan°:). 

First  lieutenant Le  lieutenant  (en  premier)  ("Mon 

lieutenant"). 

Second  lieutenant Le    sous-lieutenant    ( ' ' Mon    lieu- 
tenant"). 

A  doctor Un  (medecin)  major. 

A  sergeant Un   sergent   (addressed  as   "Ser- 

gent"); 

Un  marechal  des  logis  (mounted 
service). 

A  corporal Un  caporal  ("Caporal "). 

Un  brigadier  (mounted  service). 

A  private Un  simple  solaat. 

A  body  of  troops Une  troupe. 

French  troops Des  troupes  francaises. 

A  wagoner Un  conducteur. 

Un  fourgonnier. 

A  horseshoer Un  mar<§chal-f errant. 

A  saddler Un  sellier. 

A  signaler Un  signaleur. 

A  deserter Un  deserteur. 

A  soldier  of  Infantry Un  fantassin. 

Cav  airy Un  cavalier. 

Artillery Un  artillcur. 

Engineers Un  sapeur-mineur. 

Quartermaster  Un  homme  de  rintendance. 
Corps. 

Signal  Corps Un  homme  du  corps  des  signaux. 

Hospital  Corps LTn  infirmier. 

Line  of  Communi-  Un  garde  des  voies  et  communica- 
cations.  tions,  G.  V.  C. 

Infantry L'infanterie. 

*  See  note,  p.  388. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        379 

Cavalry La  cavalerie. 

Artillery L'artillerie. 

Engineers Le  ge"nie. 

Signal  Corps Le  corps  des  aignaux. 

Hospital  Corps Le  corps  de  saute* . 

Le  service  de  sante*. 
Aviation  Corps Le  corps  d 'aviation. 

MILITARY   TERMS. 

The  headquarters Le  quartier  general. 

The  train Le  train  des  Equipages. 

Railway  service Le  service  des  chemins  de  fer. 

Telegraph  service Le  service  des  tele*graphes. 

Rural  guards La  gendarmerie. 

Des  gendarmes. 

A  paymaster .Un  tre*sorier. 

A  chaplain Un  aumonier. 

An/trmy Une  arme*e. 

General  So-and-so's  army L'arme'e— (I'arm6e  Foch). 

An  army  corps Un  corps  cTarme'e. 

A  division ...„ Une  division. 

A  brigade Une  brigade. 

A  regiment Un  regiment. 

A  battalion Un  bataillon. 

A  company Une  compagnie. 

A  platoon Un  pelotpn. 

A  section Une  section. 

A  squad Une  escouade. 

A  detachment Un  detachment. 

Barracks Une  caserne. 

A  camp Un  camp  (more  or  less  permanent). 

Un  campement  (temporary). 

A  cantonment Un  cantonnement. 

Line (Une)  ligne. 

Column (Une)  colonne. 

As  skirmishers En  tirailleurs. 

Follow  me,  as  skirmishers A  moi,  en  tirailleurs. 

Scouts Des  6 claireurs. 

A  patrol Une  patrouille. 

The  advance  guard L 'avant-garde. 


380        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

The  rear  guard L'arriere-garde. 

Flankers Des  flanc-gardes. 

The  main  body Le  gros  (de  la  colonne) . 

Combat  train Le  train  de  combat. 

Field  train Le  train  regimentaire. 

Outposts Des  avant-postes. 

Cossack  posts Des  avant-postes  a  la  cosaque. 

A  sentinel Une  sentinelle. 

Un  factionnaire. 
On  post En  faction. 

De  faction . 

Guard  mounting La     garde     inontante    (also    new 

guard) . 

The  sentinel  challenges: ''Halt!  1  La  sentinelle  crie:  "Halte!     Qui 
Who's  there?"  /    vive?" 

The  answer  is:  "France" La  reponse  est:  "France." 

Advance  with  the  countersign.  .A vance  ail  ralliement. 

(The  person  challenged  gives  the  mot  d'ordre,  which  is  the  name 
of  some  general,  and  the  sentinel  replies  with  the  mot  de  ralliement, 
which  is  the  name  of  a  battle  or  a  city.) 

Go  away;  you  can't  pass (Passe)  au  large. 

Halt,  or  I  fire Halte,  ou  je  fais  feu. 

Put  down  your  arms D6posez  vos  armes. 

Hands  up! Levez  les  bras. 

Face  about (Faites)  demi-tour. 

Come  here Venez  ici. 

A  spy Un  espion. 

A  flag  of  truce Un  drapeau  blanc. 

Un  drapeau  parlementaire. 

UNIFORMS,  AftMS,  CLOTHING,  AND  EQUIPMENT. 

Clothing Les  vetements  1'habillement. 

Change  your  clothes Changez  de  vetements. 

Overcoat  (worn  by  French  in- 
fantry)  Une  capote. 

Trousers Un  pantalon. 

Breeches Une  culotte. 

Shirt Une  chemise. 

Blouse Un  dolman,  une  vareuse. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        381 

Cap Un  ke*pi. 

Campaign  hat  (United  States).  .Un  (chapeau  de)  feutre. 

Helmet Un  casque  (de  tranche'e). 

Cap  with  visor  worn  by  French 

off  duty Un  bonnet  de  police. 

Tam-o'-shanter  worn  by  Alpine 

chasseurs Un  be"ret. 

Shoes  in  general Des  chaussures. 

Service  shoes Des  brodequins. 

Leggins Des  guetres. 

Wrap  putties Des  bandes  molletieres. 

Leather  putties Des  houseaux  (or  housseaux). 

Full-dress  uniform La  grande  tenue. 

Dress  uniform La  petite  tenue. 

Field  uniform La  tenue  de  campagne. 

Overcoat  (mounted  men) Un  manteau. 

Overcoat  (officers) Un  manteau. 

Un  manteau-capote. 

Fatigue  coat Le  bourgeron. 

Fatigue  trousers  (overalls) Un  pan  talon  de  treillis. 

Fatigue  uniform La  tenue  de  corvee. 

Magazine  rifle Un  fusil  a  re" petition. 

The  barrel Le  canon. 

The  bolt Le  verrou. 

The  ramrod La  baguette. 

The  butt La  crosse. 

The  gun  sling La  bretelle. 

The  trigger La  detente. 

Rear  sight La  hausse. 

Front  sight Le  guidon. 

A  bayonet Une  baionnette. 

Rosalie  (slang). 

Ball  cartridge Une  cartouche  a  balle. 

Blank  cartridge Une  cartouche  a  blanc. 

Dummy  cartridge Une  fausse  cartouche. 

Belt Un  ceinturon. 

Cartridge  box Une  cartouchiere. 

First-aid  packet Un  paquet  de  pansement. 

The  pack Le  sac. 

A  haversack Un  e"tui-niusette. 

iteen...  ..Unbidon. 


382        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEES. 

Tin  cup Un  quart. 

Mess  can Une  gamelle. 

Equipment L'e'quipement. 

Compass Une  boussole. 

Field  glasses Des  jumelles  (de  campagne). 

Whistle Un  sifflet. 

Revolver Un  revolver. 

QUESTIONS  ABOUT  THE  ROADS,  ETC. 

Pardon  me.  sir,  do  you  speak  f  Pardon,  monsieur,'  paries- vous  an- 
English?.' * \  glais? 

(German,  French,  Italian,  Rus- 
sian)  (Allemand,  francais,  italien,  russe.) 

All  right,  then  show  me,  please,  fTres  bien,  alors  indiquez-moi,  je 
the  road  to \  vous  prie,  ie  chemin  de . 

Is  it  far  from  here? Est-ce  loin  d'ici? 

How  long  does  it  take  to  go /Combien  faut-il  de  temps  pour  y 
there? ?.\  aller? 

How  many  kilometers? Combien  de  kilometres? 

Is  there  a  short  cut?  (road) Y  a-t-il  un  chemin  de  traverse? 

Is  there  a  short  cut?  (trail) Y  a-t-il  un  sentier  plus  court? 

Where  does  this  road  go?. Ou  mene  cette  route? 

Are  we  on  the  right  road  to  gofSommes-nous  sur  le  bon  chemin 
to ? 7 \  pour  aller  & ? 

Does  this  road  go  through  Com- (Cette  route  passe-t-elle  par  Com- 
piegne? \  piegne? 

Shall  we  find  any  villages  on/Trouverons-nous  des  villages  sur 
our  road? \  notre  chemin? 

Are  there  any  other  roads  soing/Y  a-t-il  d'autres  chemins  pour  aller 
to^ ? I  a ? 

Is  this  road  in  good  condition? .  .  Cette  route  est-elle  en  bon  etat? 

Are  there  hills? Y  a-t-il  des  cotes  (des  coteaux)? 

Are  they  steep? Sont-elle3  raidcs? 

Does  the  road  go  through  open  fLa  route  traverse-t-elle  un  pays 
or  wooded  country? \  decouvert  ou  boise? 

Can  we  get  through  with  artil- 
lery?  Peut-on  passer  avec  de  Partillerie? 

Can  we  get  through  with  heav- (Teuton  passer  avec  de  grosses 
ily  loaded  wagons  (autoj  voitures  charg^es  (avec  des 
trucks)? I  camions-automobiles)? 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        383 

Is  this  road  practicable  for  artil-  fCette  route  est-elle  praticable  pour 

lery?  ......................  \     1'artillerie? 

Can  infantry  march  on  the  sidesJL'infanterie  peut-elle  marcher  sur 

of  the  roads?  ,  .............  \    les  c6t6s  de  la  route? 

Is  the  ground  practicable  .......  Le  terrain  est-U  praticable? 

Is  the  ground  marshy  ...........  Le  terrain  est-il  mare'cageux? 

What  is  the  nature  of  the  ground.  Quelle  eat  la  nature  du  sol? 


jusqu'a  X? 
Where  does  your  railroad  come 

from?  ......................  D'ou  vient  votre  chemin  de  fer? 

Where  does  it  go  to?  ...........  Ou  ya-t-il? 

Is  it  single  tracked  or  double  f  Est-il  a  une  voie  ou  a  deux  voies 

tracked  the  whole  way?.  .  .  .\    sur  tout  le  parcours? 

Where  is  the  station?    Is  it  far?.  .  0  u  est  la  gare?    Est-elle  loin  d'ici? 
How  can  the  river  be  crossed  ?..  Comment  peut-on  passer  la  riviere? 
Is  there  a  bridge?  a  ferry?  ......  Y  a-til  un  pont?  un  bac? 

Are  there  fords?  ..............  Y  a-t-il  des  passages  a  gue*  (des  gue*s)? 

Can  we  get  boats?  .............  Peut-on  trouver  des  bateaux? 

In  that  wood  are  there  clear-  f  Dans  ce  bois,  y  a-t-il  des  clairieres, 

ings,  ravines,  brooks,  marshes,]     des  ravins,  des  ruisseaux,  des 

pools?  [     mares? 

Are  there  any  places  near  here  fY  a-t-il  des  endroits  pres  d'ici  pour 

for  watering  horses?  .........  \    abreu  ver  les  chevaux? 

Is  the  water  good?  ............  L'eau  est-elle  bonne? 

Is  this  water  drinkable?  ........  Est-ce  de  1'eau  potable? 

Are  there  watering  troughs?  ____  Y  a-t-il  des  abreu  voirs? 

Where  is  there  good  grass  for  the  f  Oil  y  a-t-il  de  bonne  herbe  pour  les 

animals?  ...................  \    animaux? 

Can  we  buy  provisions?  ........  Peut-on  acheter  des  vivres? 


ment)? 
Can  you  give  me  any  informa-fPouyez-vous  me  donner  des  ren- 

tion  about  the  enemy?  ......  \     seignements  sur  1'ennemi? 

Please  find   me  a  guide  whojVeuillez  me  trouver  un  guide  qui 

knows  the  country?  .........  \    connaisse  le  pays. 

We  are  going  to  follow  this  trail 

(tracks)  .....................  Nous  aliens  suivre  cette  piste. 

Crossroads.  .  .  .  .  .  «.  ...  ...  ...  Un  carref  our. 


384        MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICEES. 

TOWNS. 

Where  is  the  post-office  andfOu  est  le  bureau  des  postes  et 
telegraph  office? \    tetegraphes? 

The  nostmaste-  lLe  dii;ecteur  des  Postes  et  t(^; 

LSter \    graphes. 

The  mail . . . .  Le  courrier. 

When  was  the  last  mail  dis- fA  quelle  heure  a-t-on  fait  la  der- 

tributed  ?     \    mere  distribution? 

General  delivery Poste  restante. 

Are  there  any  letters  for ?..Y  a-t-il  des  lettres  pour ? 

I  should  like  to  send  a  telegram..  Je    voudrais    expe*dier    un    tele*- 

gramme. 
Have  you  received  a  telegram  f A vez-vous    recu    un    t^legramme 

for ? \    (une  d6peche)  pour ? 

A  telegraph  instrument Un  appareil  (tele"graphique) . 

Can   you   tell   me   where   the  fPourriez-yous  me  dire  ou  se  trouve 

mayor's  office  is? \    la  mairie? 

I  couldn't  tell  you;   I  am  a  f  Je  ne  saurais  vous  renseigner;  je  ne 

stranger  here I    connais  pas  la  \dlle. 

Good  morning,  sir,  are  you  thefBonjour,    Monsieur,    etes-vous   le 

mayor? I    maire? 

No,  sir,  I  am  his  assistant Non,  Monsieur,  je  suis  son  adjoint. 

I  should  like  to  speak  to  thefJe  voudrais  parler  au  maire  lui- 

mayor  himself \    meme. 

Listen,  sir.    A  detachment  will  [Ecoutez,  monsieur.    Un  d^tache- 

arrive  here  to-morrow  morn-<     ment  arrivera  ici  demain  matin 

ing  at  5  o'clock [    a  cinq  heures. 

i.    i    i      r»  rt^rv  fPouvez-vous   prendre   des  dispo- 
Can  you  arrange  to  lodge  2,000      ^  ?         2m  hom^eg 

men  for  two  days j    pendant  deux  >urs? 

A  policeman... Un  sergent  de  ville,  un  agent  de 

la  paix. 

HAILROADS. 

The  station  agent Le  chef  de  gare. 

The  conductor Le  conchicteur. 

The  engineer Le  mecanicien . 

The  fireman Le  chauffeur. 

The  brakeman Le  serre-freins. 


MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.         385 

The  telegraph  operator Le  telegraph  jste. 

An  engine .Une  locomotive. 

Passenger  cars Des  wagons  (de  voyagenrs) . 

Flat  cars Des  trucks. 

Box  cars Des  wagons  de  marchandiscs. 

Stock  cars Des  wagons  a  bestiaux . 

A  n  express  train Un  train  express. 

A  through  train Un  train  direct. 

A  local  train Un  train  omnibus. 

A  passenger  train Un  train  de  voyageurs. 

A  freight  train Un  train  de  marchandises. 

To  entrain  the  troops Embarquer  les  troupes. 

To  detrain  the  troops Debarquer  les  troupes. 

To  get  on  a  train Monter  dans  un  tram. 

To  get  off  a  train Descendre  d'un  train. 

The  railroad  track La  voie  (ferree). 

A  side  track . Une  voie  de  garage. 

A  ticket Un  billet, 

A  round  trip  ticket Un  billet  d'aller  et  retour. 

One  way  only Aller  seulement. 

The  ticket  window Le  guichet. 

At  what  time  does  the  Paris  f  A  quelle  heure  part  le  train  ]  our 

train  start  ? \    Paris? 

It  is  late  (15  minutes  late) II  est  en  retard  (de  quinze  mi- 
nutes). 

Do  we  have  to  change  cars? Faut-il  changer  de  train? 

The  train  stops Le  train  s'arrete. 

All  aboard ! En  voiture ! 

The  train  starts Le  train  s'ebranle. 

RATIONS  AND   FOOD. 

Provisions  (in  general) Les  vivres. 

The  ration .La  ration. 

Fresh  beef De  la  viande  fraiche. 

Bacon Du  lard. 

Flour De  la  farine. 

Soft  bread Du  pain  frais. 

Hard  bread  (crackers) Du  biscuit. 

Field  bread Du  pain  de  guerre.  • 

366°—17 14 


386        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Corn  meal De  la  farine  de  ma'is. 

Coffee -Du  cafe. 

Sugar. —  Du  sucre. 

Eggs .Des  ceufs. 

Chickens Des  poulets. 

Potatoes Des  pommes  de  terre. 

Peas Des  pois. 

String  beans Des  haricots  verts. 

Vegetables  (in  general) Des  legumes. 

An  apple ... Une  pomme. 

A  pear Une  poire. 

A  cherry Une  cerise. 

A  peach Une  peche. 

Cheese Du  frpmage. 

Wine Du  vin. 

Beer De  la  Mere. 

A  glass  of  beer Un  bock. 

I  am  hungry J'ai  faim. 

Bring   me   something   to    eat,  fApportez-moi    quelque    chose    & 

please \    manger,  s'il  vous  plait. 

I  am  thirsty J'ai  soif . 

Please  give  me  a  glass  of  water.. Veuillez  me  donner  un  verre  d'eau. 
Waiter,  I'll  take  a  beefsteak. .  .Garcon,  je  desire  un  bifteck. 

Some  black  coffee Du  cafe  noir. 

Coffee  with  milk Du  cafe  au  lait. 

Rolls Des  petits  pains. 

Crescent  rolls -.  Des  croissants. 

HOSPITALS. 

A  field  hospital.*. Une  ambulance. 

A  hospital  (in  general) Un  hopital  (plural:  des  h6pitaux). 

A  dressing  station Tin  poste  de  secours. 

A  first-aid  dressing Un  pansement  sommaire. 

Red  Cross La  Croix  Rouge. 

A  doctor .Un  medicin. 

Un  docteur. 

A  surgeon Un  chirurgien. 

A  military  surgeon Un  (medecin)  major. 


MANUAL  FOE  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS.        387 

Assistant  surgeon Un  aide-major. 

A  male  nurse,  hospital  corps  manlln  infirmier. 

A  female  nurse line  infirmiere. 

An  ambulance Une  ambulance. 

A  stretcher  (litter) Un  brancard . 

A  litter  bearer Un  brancardier. 

A  roll  of  bandages Un  rouleau  de  bandage. 

A  first-aid  packet Un  paquet  de  pansement . 

A  wounded  man Un  blesse. 

T  am  sick Je  suis  malade. 

f  have  a  fever J'ai  la  fieyre. 

I  have  chills  and  fever J'ai  des  frissons  de  tievro. 

I  am  constipated Je  suis  cqnstipe. 

I  have  diarrhea J^a  i  la  diarrhee. 

POINTS    OF   THE   COMPASS. 

North Le  nord. 

South Le  sud . 

East L'est. 

West L'ouest. 

Northeast Le  nord-est. 

Southeast Le  sud-est. 

Northwest Le  nord-ouest. 

Southwest Le  sud-ouest. 

TRENCH   WARFARE. 

Trench  warfare La  guerre  des  tranchees. 

La  guerre  de  position. 

La  guerre  de  taupe  (moles). 

Trench Une  tranchee. 

Communication  trench Un  boyau  (de  communication). 

The  parapet Le  parapet. 

A  loophole Un  cre'neau. 

Une  meurtriere. 

A  grenade Une  grenade. 

A  grenadier,  bomber Un  grenadier. 

Barbed  wire Du  fil  de  fer  barbele. 

Barbed  wire  entanglement Un  reseau  de  fils  de  fer  barbeles. 


388         MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 

Trench  mortar Un  mortier. 

Un  crapQuillaud. 

Minenwerfer  (German). 

Bomb Une  bombe. 

Howitzer Un  obusier. 

Machine  gun Une  mitrailleuse. 

Fieldpiece Une  piece  de  campagne. 

75  millimeter  field  gun Une  piece  de  soixante-qumze. 

Siege  gun Une  piece  de  siege. 

120  long Cent  vingt  long. 

120  short Cent  vingt  court. 

77  (German) Soixante-dix-sept  (allemand). 

Shell Unobus. 

Une  marmite  (slang). 

Un  colis  a  domicile  (slang). 
Shrapnel Un  shrapnell. 

Un  rageur  (slang). 

Periscope Un  periscope. 

Trench  knife Un  couteau  de  tranchee. 

Dugout Un  abri  dans  les  tranchees. 

Un  cagibi  (slang). 

Une  cagna  (slang). 

Un  gourbi  (slang). 

Une  guitoune  (slang). 

NOTE. — In  addressing  an  officer  of  grade  superior  to  his  own,  an  officer 
must  use  the  possessive  adjective;  a  senior  addressing  a  junior  uses  the  title  of 
the  grade  only.  Thus:  A  major  to  a  colonel  says  "  Mon  colonel/'  but  the  colonel 
to  the  major  would  say  "Commandant." 


APPENDIX. 
FOKM  FOE  LAST  WILL  AND  TESTAMENT. 


Last  Will  and  Testament 
or 


of 

do  make,  publish,  and  declare  this  my  last  will  and  testament. 
I  give,  devise,  and  bequeath  to 1 


And  I  do  give,  devise,  and  bequeath  all  the  rest  and  residue  of 
my  estate,  ooth  real  and  personal,  to 


heirs  and  assigns  forever,2- 


1  Here  insert  specific  legacies  and  devises. 

-  If  the  residue  of  the  estate  is  given  to  several  persons,  add  here 
the  manner  in  which  it  is  to  be  divided,  as  "in  equal  shares  as  ten- 
ants in  common." 


390        MANUAL  FOR  NONCOMMISSIONED  OFFICERS. 
/  hereby  appoint 


-executor 


of  this  ma  last  will  and  testament,  and  I  desire  that 

s/iaU  not  be  required  to  give  bond  for  the  performance  of  the 
ditties  of  that  office. 

Witness  my  hand  this* 

day  of ,  191 


tik/ued,  published,  and  declared  by- 


the  aborc-named  testator,  as  and  for  his  last  will  and  testa- 
went,  in  the  presence  of  us,  who,  at  his  request  ami  in  his 
presence,  and  in  the  presence  of  each  other,  hare  subscribed 
our  names  as  witnesses  thereto? 


Residence : 


Residence : 


Residence : 


1  If  the  will  is  made  in  Nevada,  or  if  the  testator  has  real  estate 
in  that  State,  he  should  affix  his  seal. 

2  If  the  will  is  made  in  Louisiana,  unless  it  is  wholly  in  the  hand- 
writing of  the  testator,  there  should  be  seven  witnesses  and  a  notary 
at  the  "  sealing  up."     If  wholly  in  his  handwriting,  no  formalities 
lire  required. 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Abbreviations  on  maps 323 

Advance  guards. . ....... 210 

Advance  party  of  advance  guard * 211 

Advice  to  riflemen 241 

Aiming  rifle 235 

Alignments 235 

Ammunition 20 

Arm  signals .* 154 

Arms  (see  Field  kit) 30 

Articles  of  War: 

Extracts  from 353 

Reading.., 353 

Assembling  Infantry  equipment 

Ball  cartridges 20 

Battle  sight ... ... 20 

Bayonet,  manual  of: 

Attacks. 75 

Combat 84 

Combined  movements 83 

Defenses 79 

Fencing  exercises 85 

Foot  movements 85 

General  rules 85 

Instruction  without  bayonet 81 

Instruction  with  rifle *    74 

Instruction  without  rifle 74 

Suggestions  for  fencing  at  will 93 

Blanket  roll 33 

Calling  the  shot 241 

Care  of  feet 47 

Care  of  rifle 21 

Company,  school  of: 
Close  order  drill — 

Alignments 146 

391 


392  *    INDEX. 

Page. 

Cossack  post 215 

Course  in  small-arms  firing 243 

Courtesies  in  conversation 18 

Courtesy,  military 13 

English-French  vocabularies 371 

Equipment: 

Assembling 33 

Part  of 1 33 

Facings 61 

Feet,  caro  of 47 

Field  kit 30 

Field  service: 
Outposts- 
Combat 181 

Principles  of  Infantry  training 180 

Fire: 

Control .192 

Direction 191 

Discipline 

Ranges 193 

Firing  with  rests 243 

First-aid  rules 338 

Flank  guards 213 

Forage  ration 41 

Form  for  last  will  and  testament 389 

French-English  vocabulary 371 

Guard  duty  (extracts  from  Manual  of  Interior): 

Classification  of  interior  guards 255 

Color  sentinels '. 271 

"Commander  of  the  guard 258 

Compliments  from  guards 284 

Corporal  of  the  guard 260 

Countersigns 282 

Details 255 

Flags 296 

Guard  mounting 259 

Formal 256 

Informal 256 

Guard  patrols 

Guarding  prisoners 289 


INDEX.  393 

Guard  duty— Continued.  Page. 

Introduction 254 

Musician  of  the  guard 271 

Orderlies 271 

Orders  for  sentinels 273 

Paroles 282 

Prisoners 286 

Privates  of  the  guard 273 

Relieving  the  old  guard 306 

Retreat  gun 298 

Reveille  gun 298 

Rosters 255 

Sergeant  of  the  guard 263 

Watchmen 283 

Guard  mounting 298 

Formal I 299 

Informal 297 

Hygiene,  personal 43 

Individual  cooking 30 

Recipes 34 

International  Morse  code '  327 

Laws  governing  Army 350 

Lino  of  observation. 102 

Loadings  and  firings 95 

Loyalty 11 

Manual  of  arms 30 

Manual  of  the  Bayonet.     (Sec  Bayonet.  Manuel  of.) 
Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty .     ( Sec  G uard  duty. ) 
Manual  of  Tent  Pitching.     (Sec  Tent  Pitching,  Manual  of.) 
Maps: 

Abbreviations 323 

Contours 313 

Datum  plane 314 

Directions 309 

Distances 312 

Ground  forms 316 

!I;i-hure,-i ' 314 

Making  (sketching) 322 

Orienting T 311 

Reading. 313 

Ridges 317 


1 


394  INDEX. 

Maps — Continued.  Page. 

Scales 313 

Signs 323 

Slopes 315 

Stream  lines 319 

Valleys 316 

Vertical  intervals 315 

Marching 223 

Preparation  for 223 

Markmanship,  preliminary  training 233 

Message  blanks 235 

Metal  fouling  solution  for  cleaning  rifle 26 

Military  courtesy 13 

Morse,  international  code.     (See  General  service  code.) 

National  anthem 17 

Noncommissioned  officers: 

Corporal  of  guard 352 

Insignia 353 

Precedence 352 

Rank 353 

'  Sergeant  of  guard -. 352 

Oath  of  enlistment 

Obedience 9 

Observation,  line  of.     (See  Line  of  observation.) 
Officers: 

Insignia 353 

Precedence 352 

Rank 353 

Orienting  maps 311 

Outguards 215 

Outposts 213 

Pack 35 

Close 35 

Open 35 

Patrolling 199 

Patrols: 

Advance  guards 210 

Outposts 213 

Personal  hygiene 43 

Pickets 215 


INDEX.  395 

Pistol:  Page. 

Cleaning 104 

Practice 104 

Rations: 

Carried  on  person 37 

Cooking 37 

Emergency 41 

Forage 41 

Grain 42 

Kinds  of 38 

Reading  maps 309 

Rear  guards 312 

Regulations  governing  Armv 350 

Rifle: 

Aiming 242 

Care  of - 24 1 

Cleaning 242 

Coordination  in  firing 241 

Trenches 219 

Sal  vies: 

Hand 14 

Rifle 14 

Saber 15 

Sentinels 16 

Saluting ; 13 

Rules  governing 15 

Scales  on  maps ."". 324 

Soda  solution  for  cleaning  rifle 26 

Soldier,  school  of: 

Duties  of  instructor 57 

Eyes  right  or  left 61 

Facings 6  J 

Instruction  without  arms 5S 

Manual  of  arms 30 

Position  of. the  soldier  on  attention 59 

Rifle  salute 1 71 

Salute  with  the  hand 14 

Salute  with  saber 1 G 

Steps  and  marchings 61 

Back  step 04 


396  INDEX. 

j 

Soldier,  school  of — Continued. 

Steps  and  marchings — Continued.  Page. 

Change  step 65 

Quick  time 62 

Side  step 63 

The  half  step 63 

To  halt 64 

To  march  by  the  flank 64 

To  march  to  the  rear 64 

To  mark  time 63 

The  bayonet 75 

The  inspection 72 

The  rests 70 

To  dismiss  the  squad 72 

Solutions  for  cleaning  rifle 26 

Squad,  school  of: 

Alignments 146 

Instruction 74 

Kneeling  and  lying  down 74 

Loadings  and  firings 95 

Observation 102 

The  assembly 172 

The  oblique  march 158 

The  use  of  cover 101 

To  cease  firing 100 

To  deploy  as  skirmishers 169 

To  fire  at  will 99 

To  fire  by  clip 99 

To  fire  by  volley 98 

To  form  squad 142 

To  load 96 

To  set  the  sight 98 

To  stack  and  take  arms 

To  suspend  firing 99 

'To  take  intervals  and  distance 65 

To  unload 97 

Steps  and  marchings 61 

Subsistence.     (See  Rations.) 

Surplus  kit 

Swabbing  solution  for  cleaning  rifle 26 


INDEX.  397 

Target  practice:  Page. 

Advice  to  riflemen 241 

Aiming  rifle 235 

Battle  sight 236 

Calling  the  shot 240 

Coordination 241 

Firing  positions 238 

Preliminary  training  in  markmanship 233 

Sight  adjustment 233 

.    Table  of  sight  corrections 235 

Targets 244 

The  course  in  small-arms  firing 243 

Trigger  squeeze 237 

Targets 244 

Tent  Pitching,  Manual  of: 

Conical  wall  tent 177 

Folding  tents 178 

Pitch  all  type  Army  tents  (except  shelter  and  conical 

wall  tents) 176 

Striking  tents 178 

Trigger  squeeze 237 

Two-arm  semaphore  code 231 

Uniforms 27 

Care  of 27 

Disposing  of 27 

Dress 28 

Full  dress 28 

How  worn 28 

Service 28 

Use  of  cover 101 

Visual  signaling  (see  Signals): 

In  general 328 

Flag 329 

Vocabulary — English-French 391 

o 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  5O  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


30  1337 


APR  2  6  1966  4  4 


3G9J67 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


